Sustainable Path to Net-Zero for India

  • 19 Nov 2024

In News:

India's commitment to achieving net-zero carbon emissions by 2070 presents a significant challenge, with only 45 years remaining to reach this ambitious target. The path to net-zero requires a balancing act between economic development, energy security, and climate adaptation. India’s efforts to meet its climate goals will be shaped by multiple factors, including resource constraints, land use, and financial limitations.

Why Net-Zero at All?

  • Scientific Consensus on Climate Change
    • Climate change is a growing concern, with the global temperature rise already reaching 1.1°C above pre-industrial levels.
    • To avoid catastrophic impacts, the world needs to limit the temperature rise to 1.5°C. The remaining global carbon budget for this target is around 400-500 billion tonnes of CO?.
  • Necessity of Sharp Emission Reductions
    • Countries must drastically reduce emissions to stay within the carbon budget. Achieving net-zero emissions is essential for maintaining global climate stability.

Equity in Net-Zero Transitions

  • Developed vs. Developing Countries
    • Developed nations, historically responsible for a large share of emissions, are expected to lead the transition. However, they have not met the financial and technological support commitments for developing countries.
    • Developing nations like India, with low per capita emissions, are under pressure to balance climate action with economic development.
  • Climate Justice
    • India’s per capita emissions are among the lowest globally, but the richest 10% of Indians contribute significantly to national emissions, exacerbating inequality.
    • The impacts of climate change disproportionately affect the economically weaker sections, making the transition to net-zero not only an environmental challenge but a social justice issue as well.

The Challenge of Balancing Development and Sustainability

  • Limits of India’s Resources
    • India faces resource constraints, including land, water, and biodiversity, which limit the feasible expansion of renewable energy capacity.
    • Meeting energy demands while ensuring food security, forest cover, and biodiversity preservation becomes increasingly challenging as energy requirements rise.
  • Sustainable Consumption vs. Aspirational Lifestyles
    • India’s aspiration to emulate the developed world’s lifestyle is unsustainable due to limited resources, which could lead to severe consequences like groundwater depletion, heat stress, and biodiversity loss.
    • The focus should be on sufficiency consumption corridors, ensuring that consumption meets developmental goals without exceeding sustainable limits.

Projected Power Demand and Renewable Energy Targets

  • Rising Power Demand
    • India’s power demand could increase nine to ten-fold by 2070. Meeting this demand entirely via renewable energy requires significant expansion in energy generation capacity:
      1. 5,500 GW of solar energy
      2. 1,500 GW of wind energy
  • Land Use Constraints
    • To meet these targets, India must address land-use trade-offs. Expanding beyond 3,500 GW of solar and 900 GW of wind would require significant compromises in land availability for other uses, including agriculture and conservation.

Strategic Pathways to Net-Zero: Demand and Supply Measures

  • Demand-Side Measures
    • Energy-efficient construction: Use of better materials and passive designs to reduce cooling energy demand.
    • Urban transport: Shift to public and non-motorized transport to reduce energy consumption in cities.
    • Dietary choices: Promoting sustainable dietary practices to reduce the carbon footprint of food systems.
    • Electrification: Focus on alternative fuels and energy-efficient appliances.
  • Supply-Side Measures
    • Decentralization of Energy Production: Expanding rooftop solar panels and solar pumps for agriculture.
    • Nuclear Power Expansion: Increase nuclear energy to provide a low-carbon baseload and complement renewable sources like solar and wind, which are intermittent.

The Role of International Cooperation and Financial Support

  • Global Cooperation
    • Global climate action requires alignment between national interests, which may not always coincide, as seen in the context of the U.S. presidential election potentially influencing global climate policy.
    • India’s path to net-zero depends heavily on international climate financing, technology transfer, and collaborative efforts to address climate justice.
  • Equitable Financing for Developing Countries
    • Developed countries are expected to provide financial support to developing nations like India to achieve climate goals. However, this support has been insufficient to date.

Conclusion: India’s Balancing Act

India faces a challenging balancing act as it seeks to provide quality of life for its growing population while achieving its climate adaptation and mitigation goals. The path to net-zero will require careful management of economic growth, energy production, and resource conservation. India must focus on demand-side strategies to reduce energy consumption and increase efficiency while expanding renewable energy infrastructure in a sustainable manner. Additionally, international cooperation and financial support will be crucial in ensuring that India’s transition to net-zero is equitable, efficient, and aligned with its developmental priorities.

Andhra Pradesh's Natural Farming Model

  • 18 Nov 2024

In News:

Andhra Pradesh's (AP) natural farming model presents a transformative opportunity to reshape the state’s agricultural landscape by 2050. An analysis by the Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO), in collaboration with the AP government, reveals how scaling natural farming could employ more farmers, increase incomes, and foster sustainable agricultural practices, potentially surpassing the benefits of conventional industrial agriculture.

AgroEco2050: Exploring Two Agricultural Futures

The AgroEco2050 initiative aimed to envision two possible futures for Andhra Pradesh’s agricultural systems by 2050:

  • Industrial Agriculture Path: Focusing on intensification of conventional farming, relying heavily on chemicals, machinery, and monocultures.
  • Natural Farming Path: Expanding agroecological practices, relying on regenerative, chemical-free farming methods to create more jobs, better livelihoods, and improve the environment.

The study compared these pathways, analyzing their impacts on employment, income, food production, biodiversity, and land use.

Key Findings: Natural Farming’s Impact on Employment and Income

  • Employment Growth
    • By 2050, natural farming would employ twice as many farmers as industrial agriculture: 10 million compared to 5 million.
    • Unemployment in natural farming would decrease to 7%, in stark contrast to a projected 30% unemployment rate in the industrial agriculture scenario.
  • Farmer Income
    • Natural farming is expected to be more profitable for farmers due to lower input costs (seeds, fertilizers, machinery) and higher market prices for high-quality produce.
    • The income gap between farmers and non-farmers, which stood at 62% in 2019, would decrease to 22% under natural farming by 2050, a sharp improvement compared to the 47% gap predicted under industrial agriculture.

What is Natural Farming?

Natural farming is an ecological, chemical-free farming system that emphasizes the use of locally available resources. Key practices include:

  • Biodiversity-based pest management
  • On-farm biomass recycling (e.g., mulching)
  • Indigenous techniques like using cow dung and urine for soil fertility.

Globally recognized as a form of regenerative agriculture, it offers a sustainable alternative to industrial agriculture by sequestering carbon and restoring soil health.

Global Adoption

States like Andhra Pradesh, Karnataka, Himachal Pradesh, and others are already adopting natural farming. While still evolving, its acceptance among farmers is steadily growing.

Zero Budget Natural Farming (ZBNF) in Andhra Pradesh

Origin and Growth

  • In 2016, Andhra Pradesh launched the Zero Budget Natural Farming (ZBNF) initiative to offer a sustainable alternative to capital-intensive agriculture.
  • This program, implemented by RythuSadhikaraSamstha, targets covering 6 million farmers across 6 million hectares.

National Recognition

The ZBNF approach gained national attention when it was featured in the 2019 Union Budget, aimed at doubling farmers' incomes by 2022. The central government now promotes this model under the Paramparagat Krishi Vikas Yojana (PKVY).

Challenges in Scaling Natural Farming

  • Farmer Training and Support
    • Farmers need ongoing education and support to transition effectively to natural farming. Current training systems often fail to address the full scope of their needs.
  • Certification Barriers
    • The certification process for organic farming, including Participatory Guarantee Systems (PGS) and third-party certifications, is complex and costly, presenting a barrier for small-scale farmers.
  • Marketing and Procurement Challenges
    • There is a lack of effective marketing systems for organic products, which hampers the ability of farmers to sell their produce at fair prices.
    • Without strong procurement or buy-back systems, farmers may struggle to find markets for their products.
  • Policy and Funding Gaps
    • Organic and natural farming programs still receive minimal funding compared to subsidies for chemical fertilizers, impeding large-scale adoption.
    • Slow state-level implementation and a continued reliance on chemical inputs also delay the widespread shift to natural farming.

Moving Forward

  • Scientific Research on Yields
    • To address concerns about lower yields for staple crops, more scientific research is needed to assess the long-term viability of natural farming, especially for crops like wheat and rice, which are crucial for India’s food security.
  • Localized Adoption
    • Natural farming may be best suited for non-staple crops or localized farming, balancing sustainability with the need for food security.
  • Risk Mitigation for Food Security
    • Careful evaluation of natural farming’s impact on staple crop yields is necessary to avoid the food security risks witnessed in countries like Sri Lanka, where a sudden shift to organic farming led to reduced yields and increased prices.

Conclusion

The Andhra Pradesh natural farming model offers a promising alternative to industrial agriculture, with the potential to create jobs, improve farmers' incomes, and promote environmental sustainability. However, for this vision to become a reality, significant efforts must be made to address challenges related to training, certification, marketing, and funding. With continued research, policy support, and community involvement, natural farming can play a crucial role in feeding the future and promoting a more sustainable agricultural system.

Khap Panchayats: Evolving Towards Modern Governance and Justice

  • 17 Nov 2024

Why in the News?

Khap Panchayats have attracted attention due to their evolving role in addressing key socio-economic issues like unemployment, education, and rural development. Modernization efforts are underway to regulate these traditional councils, integrating them into formal Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) systems for better governance, accountability, and social justice.

What are Khap Panchayats?

Definition and Origin:

Khap Panchayats are community-based councils primarily found in North India, particularly in Haryana, Uttar Pradesh, and parts of Rajasthan. These informal bodies, composed of elders from kinship groups (Khaps), have historically served as local governance bodies that resolve disputes within their communities. Their origins trace back centuries and they function alongside formal legal systems, often prioritizing customary norms over constitutional law.

Historical Role:

Historically, Khap Panchayats have maintained social order in rural areas, acting as forums for dispute resolution related to marriage, property, and community matters. While their decisions were respected within their communities, they operated parallel to formal courts, and their influence was often seen as a stabilizing force in rural society. However, their structure has also contributed to the perpetuation of patriarchal practices and social exclusion.

Issues with Khap Panchayats

  • Patriarchal Practices:Khap Panchayats have often been associated with gender inequality. They enforce rigid social norms that limit women's autonomy, particularly in matrimonial matters, inheritance rights, and personal freedoms. This has led to criticism for their role in suppressing women's rights.
  • Honor Killings and Social Conservatism:Khap Panchayats are notorious for opposing inter-caste and same-gotra marriages, at times even endorsing honor killings to preserve social order. Such practices are violations of fundamental rights and personal freedoms guaranteed by the Indian Constitution.
  • Legality Concerns:The decisions of Khap Panchayats often clash with constitutional values such as equality, personal liberty, and dignity. Their informal judgments lack legal validity and frequently violate the rule of law, raising significant concerns about their adherence to India’s legal framework.
  • Caste-based Discrimination:Khap Panchayats have been criticized for reinforcing caste hierarchies, which leads to discrimination and exclusion of marginalized communities. Their focus on preserving traditional caste structures often results in the oppression of the vulnerable, particularly lower-caste groups.

Gender Dynamics and Evolving Roles of Khap Panchayats

In recent years, some Khap Panchayats have started to show more progressive and inclusive stances, particularly in promoting gender justice:

  • Support for Women Athletes:Khap Panchayats have begun to recognize and celebrate the achievements of women, particularly in sports. Several Khap bodies have felicitated women sportspersons, contributing to a growing culture of sports among rural women. This marks a shift from their traditionally patriarchal stance.
  • Promoting Gender Justice:Notably, the MehamChaubisiKhap in Haryana has played a significant role in advocating for women’s rights and gender equality. It was involved in supporting the 2023 wrestlers' protest against sexual harassment, demonstrating a shift towards gender-related activism and social reform.

Supreme Court Ruling on Khap Panchayats:

In the landmark Shakti Vahini v. Union of India case (2018), the Supreme Court of India addressed the issue of honor killings and inter-caste marriages. The Court emphasized that honor killings violate fundamental rights and called for strict measures to prevent such crimes. The Court further directed state governments to establish special protection cells for couples facing threats from their families and communities. This ruling underscored the importance of personal liberty and freedom of choice, regardless of community or caste.

What is Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR)?

Definition and Importance:

Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) refers to methods of resolving disputes without resorting to formal litigation. These methods include mediation, arbitration, and conciliation, all of which encourage cooperative problem-solving and mutually agreeable solutions. ADR is particularly important in India due to the overburdened judicial system, which faces a backlog of cases and delays.

ADR offers several advantages, including:

  • Cost-effectiveness
  • Confidentiality
  • Flexibility
  • Improved relationships between parties involved

Types of ADR Mechanisms:

  • Arbitration: A formal process where an arbitrator resolves disputes and their decision is legally binding.
  • Conciliation: A third-party neutral assists the parties in reaching an agreement, and the recommendations can be accepted or rejected.
  • Mediation: A mediator facilitates communication between disputing parties, helping them reach a voluntary and mutually agreeable resolution.
  • Negotiation: A direct negotiation between the parties without third-party involvement, aiming for a mutually acceptable settlement.

Integrating Khap Panchayats into the Formal ADR System

Given the potential of Khap Panchayats as community-based governance bodies, integrating them into the formal ADR framework can significantly enhance their role in dispute resolution. Here are some strategies for modernizing Khap Panchayats:

  • Legal Recognition of ADR Role:Khap Panchayats can be legally recognized within the ADR framework, formalizing their role in mediation and dispute resolution, ensuring their decisions align with constitutional norms and human rights.
  • Training and Capacity Building:Khap leaders can undergo training in ADR techniques such as mediation and arbitration, equipping them with skills to resolve conflicts impartially and in line with legal standards. This would help transition Khaps from informal bodies to more structured and legally compliant dispute resolution mechanisms.
  • Legal Regulation and Oversight:Regulations can be put in place to define the scope and limitations of Khap Panchayats' authority, ensuring their decisions do not violate human rights or the constitution. Oversight mechanisms should be established to monitor their actions and prevent practices like honor killings or forced marriages.
  • Shift Towards Developmental Roles:Some Khap Panchayats are already advocating for progressive reforms in areas like unemployment, education, and rural development. By focusing on these issues, Khap Panchayats can serve as agents of social change and contribute to community development.
  • Awareness and Accountability:Awareness campaigns can educate rural communities about constitutional rights and the legal system, emphasizing the importance of formal legal frameworks and human rights. At the same time, Khap Panchayats should be held accountable for actions that undermine justice or equality.
  • Collaboration with Formal Institutions:Khap Panchayats can collaborate with local governance bodies and judicial institutions, ensuring that their decisions align with the rule of law and contribute to social justice. This would enhance their role in inclusive decision-making and legally sound governance.

Conclusion

Khap Panchayats, with their deep-rooted history and influence, have the potential to evolve into modern governance institutions. By integrating them into the formal ADR framework, aligning their practices with constitutional values, and focusing on community development, they can contribute positively to dispute resolution and social reform in rural India. This transformation will require legal regulation, training, oversight, and awareness to ensure that Khap Panchayats function as effective, equitable bodies that respect the fundamental rights of all individuals.

Net Borrowing Ceiling

  • 16 Nov 2024

In News:

  • In 2023, the central government imposed a Net Borrowing Ceiling (NBC) on Kerala, limiting its borrowing capacity to 3% of the projected Gross State Domestic Product (GSDP) for the fiscal year 2023-24.
  • Impact on Kerala’s Finances: This ceiling has significantly impacted Kerala’s ability to meet its expenditure needs and fund developmental activities, triggering political and legal disputes. Kerala has approached the Supreme Court of India, arguing that the imposition of NBC infringes upon its constitutional rights under Article 293 of the Indian Constitution.

Constitutional Provisions on Borrowing Powers

Article 292: Borrowing Powers of the Centre

  • Central Government’s Borrowing: Article 292 grants the Central Government the authority to borrow money on the security of the Consolidated Fund of India.
  • Limits on Borrowing: The extent of borrowing by the Centre is determined by laws enacted by Parliament.

Article 293: Borrowing Powers of the States

  • State Borrowing: Article 293 allows State Governments to borrow within India against the Consolidated Fund of the State. However, it imposes certain conditions:
    • If a State has outstanding loans or guarantees given by the Centre, the Centre’s consent is required to raise further loans.
    • The Central government can impose conditions when granting such consent.

Centre’s Role in State Borrowing

  • Article 293(3) allows the Centre to impose conditions on a state’s borrowing if it has existing liabilities or guarantees outstanding.
  • The Centre has wide discretion in granting or denying consent, which has been a point of contention in Kerala’s case.

The Imposition of Net Borrowing Ceiling (NBC)

Scope of the NBC

  • Comprehensive Coverage: The NBC encompasses all borrowing avenues, including open market loans, loans from financial institutions, and liabilities from State public accounts. To curb circumventing of the borrowing cap via State-owned enterprises, the NBC also covers borrowings by these entities.

Purpose of NBC

  • Fiscal Discipline: The NBC is designed to regulate borrowing and prevent states from accumulating unsustainable levels of debt, thus ensuring financial stability.
  • Transparency: By including all borrowing avenues, including off-budget borrowings by state-owned enterprises, the NBC aims to provide a clearer picture of a state’s financial health.

Arguments for the NBC

  • Macroeconomic Stability: The NBC helps maintain macroeconomic stability by controlling the borrowing levels of states, thus protecting the national economy.
  • Compliance with FRBM Act: The NBC aligns with the Fiscal Responsibility and Budget Management (FRBM) Act, aiming to keep the fiscal deficit within prescribed limits.
  • Equitable Resource Distribution: The NBC ensures that wealthier states do not disproportionately borrow, thus promoting balanced regional development.

Arguments Against the NBC

  • Erosion of Fiscal Autonomy: Critics argue that the NBC undermines the fiscal autonomy of states, as guaranteed by Article 293, by restricting their ability to make independent financial decisions.
  • Impact on Developmental Activities: States, particularly Kerala, contend that the borrowing cap restricts their ability to fund key infrastructure projects and social welfare activities.
  • Legal Concerns: The NBC’s impact on the interpretation of Article 293 raises legal questions regarding the extent of the Centre’s authority over state borrowing powers.

Fiscal Responsibility and Budget Management (FRBM) Act

Overview of the FRBM Act

  • Objective: The FRBM Act, 2003 was enacted to promote fiscal discipline and ensure long-term financial stability in India.
  • Key Features:
    • Targets a 3% fiscal deficit of GDP for the Centre.
    • Requires states to enact similar laws to control their fiscal deficit.

Amendments to FRBM Act

  • 2018 Amendment: The FRBM Amendment Act required the central government to ensure that the fiscal deficit did not exceed 3% of GDP and total public debt remained under 60% of GDP.
  • Fiscal Deficit Reduction: By 2025-26, the fiscal deficit is expected to be reduced to below 4.5% of GDP.

Way Forward: Strengthening Article 293

Guidelines for Borrowing Powers

  • Transparency in Decision-Making: The Centre should ensure that the borrowing process is transparent, with clear standards and procedures for accepting or rejecting state borrowings.
  • Consultative Process: The Centre should engage in consultations with states before imposing borrowing caps or conditions, fostering a cooperative federal structure.
  • Equitable Treatment: Borrowing restrictions should apply uniformly to all states to avoid bias or favoritism.

Strengthening Fiscal Federalism

  • Fiscal Autonomy: States should be given the flexibility to manage their finances in a way that reflects their unique economic needs and challenges.
  • Periodic Reviews: The Net Borrowing Ceiling should be reviewed periodically to account for changing economic conditions and developmental priorities.

The Need for More Women in Politics

  • 15 Nov 2024

In News:

India, the world's largest democracy, is at a crucial juncture where women’s active political participation is essential for holistic development and true democratic engagement. The year 2024 demands increased involvement of women in politics to address issues of gender inequality and ensure comprehensive policy representation.

Current Status of Women’s Political Representation in India

Women in Parliament

  • Initial Representation: In 1952, women accounted for only 4.41% of the Lok Sabha. This gradually rose to around 14.36% in the 2019 elections.
  • Recent Trends: In the 2024 elections, women made up approximately 16% of the Lok Sabha, with 74 women MPs, 43 of whom are first-time representatives.

Women in State Legislatures

  • Representation in state legislative assemblies remains low, with the highest percentages in Chhattisgarh (14.4%), West Bengal (13.7%), and Jharkhand (12.4%).

Global Comparison

  • According to the Inter-Parliamentary Union (IPU), India ranks lower than many countries in terms of female representation in parliament, with global averages standing at 26.1%. India lags behind several African and South Asian nations.

Importance of Women’s Political Empowerment

  • Enhancing Governance and Accountability: Political empowerment of women ensures better representation of gender-sensitive issues, promoting accountability in governance.
  • Breaking Patriarchal Norms: Increasing women’s participation helps challenge the patriarchal structure that dominates Indian politics and promotes inclusive governance.
  • Policy and Social Impact: Women in politics are more likely to advocate for policies that address issues like health, education, and gender equality, leading to improved societal welfare.
  • Economic Benefits: Studies suggest that women in political leadership tend to improve economic outcomes for their constituencies by prioritizing social infrastructure.

Barriers to Women’s Political Participation

  • Gender Gaps in Political Ambition: Women are less likely to pursue political careers due to gender conditioning, family pressures, and stereotypes about leadership abilities.
  • Patriarchal Culture: A deeply ingrained patriarchal society hampers women’s political involvement, with male-dominated party structures and social norms limiting opportunities.
  • High Election Costs: The financial burden of running for office often discourages women from contesting elections due to unequal access to resources.
  • Male Gatekeepers in Politics: Political parties often show a preference for male candidates, especially for higher-profile positions, hindering the rise of women leaders.
  • Criminalisation and Corruption in Politics: Growing criminalisation in politics and lack of political education further alienates women from the political process.

Key Legislative and Constitutional Measures for Women’s Political Empowerment

Legislative Measures

  • Nari Shakti VandanAdhiniyam (2023): Provides 33% reservation for women in the Lok Sabha and state assemblies.
  • 73rd and 74th Amendments (1992): Introduced 33% reservation for women in Panchayats and Municipalities.
  • Gender-Neutral Rules: Lok Sabha adopted gender-neutral rules in 2014, promoting inclusivity in legislative procedures.

Constitutional Provisions

  • Article 14 and 15: Ensure equality and non-discrimination, fundamental to women’s political participation.
  • Article 243D: Mandates 33% reservation for women in Panchayats.

International Commitments

  • CEDAW (1979): Advocates for women’s participation in political and public life.
  • Beijing Platform (1995) and SDGs (2015): Call for removing barriers to women’s participation in politics.

Measures for Promoting Women’s Political Participation

  • Quotas and Reservations: Ensuring mandatory quotas for women candidates in party tickets and legislative bodies can help bridge gender gaps.
  • Capacity Building and Training: Offering political training programs for women can empower them with the skills and resources necessary for effective political participation.
  • Strengthening Grassroots Movements: Support for Self-Help Groups (SHGs) and Panchayati Raj Institutions (PRIs) can build leadership among women at the local level.
  • Supportive Political Ecosystem: Political parties should be encouraged to nominate women for higher office positions, such as the Rajya Sabha or state legislative councils.
  • Raising Public Awareness: Public awareness campaigns focusing on the importance of women in politics can shift societal attitudes and garner wider public support.

Conclusion:

As India moves forward, the active participation of women in politics is not merely a matter of equity but an essential building block for a vibrant, inclusive, and effective democracy. Through structural reforms, public awareness, and the promotion of female leadership, India can strengthen its democratic framework, ensuring that all citizens, regardless of gender, have an equal stake in shaping the nation's future.

Inter-State Council

  • 14 Nov 2024

In News:

The Inter-State Council, which works for Centre-State and interstate coordination and cooperation, has been reconstituted with Prime Minister Narendra Modi as its chairman, all chief ministers and nine Union ministers as members and 13 Union ministers as permanent invitees.

About the Inter-State Council (ISC)

Formation of ISC

  • Establishment: Created on May 28, 1990, through a Presidential Order following the recommendations of the Sarkaria Commission (1988).
  • Headquarters: New Delhi.
  • Meetings: The Council has convened 12 times since its formation.

Constitutional Provisions

  • Not a Constitutional Body: It was established under Article 263 of the Constitution, making it a non-permanent advisory body.
  • Role: Article 263 empowers the President to create the ISC for improving coordination between States and the Union.

Powers and Functions

  • Investigate and Discuss: The ISC discusses subjects of common interest between the Centre and States.
  • Recommendations: It recommends measures for better coordination and addressing inter-state issues.
  • Deliberations: The ISC also deliberates on matters referred by the Chairman.

Composition of the ISC

  • Chairperson: Prime Minister of India.
  • Members:
    • Chief Ministers of all States and Union Territories with legislative assemblies.
    • Lieutenant Governors/Administrators of Union Territories without assemblies.
    • 6 Union Cabinet Ministers nominated by the Prime Minister.
    • Governors of States under President’s rule.
  • Standing Committee:
    • Chaired by the Union Home Minister.
    • Includes 5 Union Cabinet Ministers and 9 Chief Ministers.

Functions and Role of the ISC

Role in Centre-State Cooperation

  • Facilitates better coordination and cooperation between the Centre and States.
  • Addressing disputes related to Centre-State and Inter-State relations.

Additional Functions

  • Make Recommendations: Based on discussions, it recommends actions to align policies.
  • Promote Social Legitimacy: Through consensus-driven decisions, ISC strengthens policy acceptance among states.

Key Bodies Related to Centre-State Relations

Zonal Councils

  • Purpose: Promote interstate cooperation and coordination.
  • Constitution: There are five Zonal Councils (Northern, Central, Eastern, Western, Southern) and a separate North Eastern Council established in 1972.

River Water Dispute Tribunals

  • Function: Set up under the Inter-State River Water Disputes Act, 1956, these tribunals resolve disputes over river water sharing between States.

GST Council

  • Constitution: Established under Article 279A, the GST Council is responsible for decisions related to GST implementation, ensuring cooperative federalism.

Chief Justice of India

  • 13 Nov 2024

In News:

On November 11, 2024, Justice Sanjiv Khanna was sworn in as the 51st Chief Justice of India (CJI) at the Rashtrapati Bhavan, New Delhi, marking a significant milestone in the Indian judiciary. He succeeds Justice D.Y. Chandrachud, who retired on November 10, 2024. Justice Khanna's term as CJI will last until May 13, 2025.

Background of Justice Sanjiv Khanna

Early Life and Legal Career

  • Legal Practice: Justice Khanna began his legal career in 1983 after completing his law degree from Delhi University. He practiced in the District Courts of Delhi and handled cases in constitutional law, taxation, arbitration, and environmental law.
  • Career in Delhi High Court: He was appointed as an Additional Judge to the Delhi High Court in 2005 and became a Permanent Judge in 2006.
  • Appointment to the Supreme Court: Justice Khanna was appointed as a Supreme Court Judge in January 2019, without having served as a Chief Justice of a State High Court, and superseding 32 senior High Court judges.

Key Judicial Rulings of Justice Sanjiv Khanna

Major Constitutional Bench Decisions

  • Abrogation of Article 370: Justice Khanna was part of the Bench that upheld the abrogation of Article 370 of the Constitution, which revoked Jammu and Kashmir’s special status.
  • Electoral Bonds Scheme: He also contributed to the ruling that struck down the 2018 Electoral Bonds scheme, raising questions about the transparency of political funding.

Support for EVMs

  • Justice Khanna defended the use of Electronic Voting Machines (EVMs) and rejected calls to revert to paper ballots, emphasizing the need for technological progress and institutional trust.

Personal Liberty and Bail Decisions

  • Arvind Kejriwal’s Interim Bail: Justice Khanna granted interim bail to Delhi Chief Minister Arvind Kejriwal in the liquor policy case, underscoring personal liberty as a fundamental right.
  • Judicial Review of Bail Conditions: He also initiated discussions on setting standards for bail conditions in cases involving significant political figures.

Role of the Chief Justice of India (CJI)

Appointment Process

  • Article 124(2): A Supreme Court judge is appointed by the President of India, with the senior-most judge of the Supreme Court traditionally becoming the CJI.
  • Qualifications: The CJI must be a citizen of India and have served as a judge in a High Court for at least five years or as an advocate in a High Court for ten years.

Powers and Responsibilities

  • Master of the Roster: The CJI is the "Master of the Roster," responsible for assigning cases to specific benches and determining the court's schedule.
  • Collegium System: The CJI, along with four senior judges, forms the Collegium that recommends judicial appointments for the Supreme Court and High Courts.
  • Ad-Hoc Appointments: The CJI can also appoint ad-hoc judges to the Supreme Court under Article 127 of the Constitution.

Removal

  • A CJI can only be removed through a process initiated in Parliament, requiring a special majority in both Houses of Parliament.

Appointment of CJI in Other Countries

United States

  • The Chief Justice of the United States serves for life, with tenure continuing until impeachment or voluntary retirement.

United Kingdom

  • The Lord Chief Justice in the UK is appointed by a special panel from the Appeal Court or the Supreme Court. The tenure is life, but mandatory retirement is set at 75 years of age.

Conclusion

Justice Sanjiv Khanna’s appointment as the 51st Chief Justice of India represents a significant moment in the country's judicial history. With his extensive experience and legal acumen, he faces numerous challenges, from dealing with case pendency to navigating sensitive constitutional issues. His tenure will likely shape the future trajectory of the Indian judiciary, with a focus on upholding justice and personal liberty while addressing the evolving needs of a democratic society.

Significance of LignoSat

  • 12 Nov 2024

Introduction

  • LignoSat is the world's first satellite constructed with wood, developed to test the viability of using timber as a sustainable material in space exploration.
  • Launched on November 5, 2024, the satellite was sent to the International Space Station (ISS) aboard a SpaceX Dragon cargo capsule and will be released into orbit after a month for a six-month test.

What is LignoSat?

  • Dimensions: LignoSat measures 4 inches (10 cm) on each side and weighs 900 grams.
  • Material Composition: The satellite features panels made from magnolia wood using traditional Japanese craftsmanship, without screws or glue.
  • Development Collaboration: LignoSat was developed by Kyoto University and Sumitomo Forestry, in collaboration with various researchers and space organizations.

Purpose and Objectives of the Mission

  • Testing Timber in Space:
    • The primary goal is to study how wood performs in the extreme conditions of space, where temperatures fluctuate dramatically between -100°C to 100°C.
    • The satellite will also assess how wood interacts with space radiation and its potential to reduce the impact of radiation on sensitive electronics, such as semiconductors.
  • Space Sustainability:
    • LignoSat aims to demonstrate that wood can be a sustainable, renewable alternative to metals (like aluminium) traditionally used in spacecraft construction.
    • The satellite will help determine if wood can be used in future space missions, potentially reducing reliance on non-renewable materials.

Testing the Durability of Wood in Space

  • Challenges of Space Environment:
    • Space is an extremely harsh environment with extreme temperature variations, exposure to radiation, and the lack of water and oxygen, all of which affect material durability.
    • Unlike Earth, where wood decomposes due to moisture and oxygen, space's vacuum conditions could potentially preserve the wood's integrity, providing valuable insights into its durability.
  • Previous Use of Wood in Space:
    • Wood has already been tested in space applications: cork has been used on spacecraft to withstand re-entry conditions.
    • The LignoSat mission builds on this knowledge, aiming to test wood's performance in space's high-radiation and vacuum environment.

Potential Advantages of Using Wood in Space Exploration

  • Sustainability and Environmental Benefits:
    • Unlike conventional aluminium satellites, which generate harmful pollutants upon re-entry (e.g., aluminium oxides), LignoSat's wooden components will degrade in a more environmentally friendly manner, minimizing atmospheric pollution.
    • As space exploration increases, particularly with mega-constellations (e.g., SpaceX’s Starlink), space debris management becomes critical. Using wood could reduce the environmental impact of satellite disposal.
  • Renewable Resource:
    • Wood is a renewable resource, which offers a potential solution to the growing demand for materials used in space technology.
    • Kyoto University researchers have long been exploring the idea of building habitats on the Moon and Mars using timber, with LignoSat seen as a stepping stone to proving the material's space-grade capabilities.

LignoSat's Design and Construction

  • Hybrid Construction:
    • While the outer panels of LignoSat are made from magnolia wood, the satellite still incorporates traditional aluminium structures and electronic components inside.
    • The hybrid construction allows researchers to compare the performance of wood against conventional materials used in spacecraft.
  • Testing Methods:
    • LignoSat will orbit Earth for six months and monitor the wood’s reaction to space conditions, providing valuable data for future space missions.
    • Sensors embedded in the satellite will track various environmental factors, such as radiation exposure, temperature fluctuations, and the structural integrity of the wood.

The Long-Term Vision: Building Timber Habitats in Space

  • The research team, led by Takao Doi (astronaut and Kyoto University professor), envisions a future where timber is used for constructing space habitats on the Moon and Mars.
  • The team’s ultimate goal is to plant trees in space and develop timber houses on extraterrestrial bodies, providing a sustainable, self-sufficient environment for humans in space.

Broader Implications for Space Exploration

  • Sustainability in Space Missions:
    • LignoSat represents an innovative step toward more sustainable space technologies by investigating eco-friendly materials that can minimize the environmental impact of space missions.
    • It aligns with global efforts to make space exploration more sustainable, especially as space tourism and colonization plans grow.
  • Future Prospects:
    • If successful, LignoSat could pave the way for wood-based materials being used in spacecraft construction, not only for satellites but also for space stations and future human habitats in space.

Conclusion

  • LignoSat’s mission marks a significant milestone in space exploration by exploring wood as a sustainable material in space technology.
  • As the first wooden satellite, its results could pave the way for more eco-friendly, renewable materials in future space missions, aligning with global goals for sustainability and reducing space-related pollution.

What are the costs of population decline?

  • 11 Nov 2024

In News:

India has been witnessing significant demographic changes due to decades of family planning policies. This has led to declining fertility rates in certain States, particularly in the southern and smaller northern regions.

Introduction: Demographic Shift in India

  • Southern States’ Fertility Trends: States like Tamil Nadu, Kerala, Andhra Pradesh, and Telangana have fertility rates below the replacement level (around 1.4–1.5), while Bihar, Uttar Pradesh, and Madhya Pradesh have higher fertility rates (2.6–3).
  • Ageing Population: Southern States face the challenge of an ageing population, with Kerala projected to have 22.8% of its population aged 60+ by 2036, while Bihar will have only 11%.

Economic and Health Impact of Population Decline

  • Economic Consequences:
    • Dependency Ratio: The old-age dependency ratio (the number of elderly for every 100 working-age individuals) has increased significantly in some States. Kerala, for example, had a ratio of 26.1 in 2021, signaling a crisis point.
    • Loss of Demographic Dividend: States with declining fertility rates face the loss of a demographic dividend, i.e., the economic benefit from a large working-age population, which is increasingly burdened by elderly dependents.
    • Health Expenditure: Rising healthcare costs, especially for cardiovascular diseases in southern States, will strain public health systems. The southern States, although comprising one-fifth of India's population, spent 32% of the country’s total out-of-pocket expenditure on cardiovascular diseases in 2017-18.
  • Challenges of Low Fertility:
    • Declining Labour Force Participation: Policies encouraging higher fertility may also reduce women’s labour force participation, undermining the economic growth of these States.
    • Economic Pressures: Southern States, despite higher tax contributions, face a diminished share of central resources due to slower population growth. This is a point of concern in inter-State fiscal relations.

Political Implications of Uneven Population Growth

  • Impact on Federal Structure:
    • The uneven population growth across States will lead to significant changes in the delimitation of constituencies after the current freeze on seat allocation in Parliament expires in 2026.
    • Redistribution of Lok Sabha Seats: Northern States like Uttar Pradesh and Bihar will likely gain more seats, while southern States like Tamil Nadu, Kerala, and Andhra Pradesh will lose seats due to their declining population shares.
  • Challenges in Federal Relations:
    • Southern States’ economic contributions through taxes are disproportionate to the resources they receive from the central pool, leading to growing tensions between high-growth and slow-growth regions.
    • The shift in political power post-delimitation could increase regional disparities, potentially leading to political tensions between States.

Solutions and Policy Recommendations

  • Pro-Natalist Policies:
    • Southern States are considering pro-natalist policies to incentivize higher fertility rates. However, such measures have been largely unsuccessful internationally, especially when women’s economic independence and educational choices are restricted.
    • International Experience: Attempts to incentivize childbearing, without addressing broader socio-economic factors like gender equality, have generally failed in other nations. Maternity benefits, gender-neutral parental leave, and childcare support are key to increasing fertility sustainably.
  • Gender Equity and Work-Family Balance:
    • Work-family policies that support paid maternity and paternity leaves, affordable childcare, and gender-neutral employment policies are essential to empower women to balance family and career.
    • Studies indicate that countries with higher gender equity have better fertility rates because women are less likely to forgo childbearing for career reasons.
  • Increasing Retirement Age:
    • One way to reduce the old-age dependency ratio is to increase the retirement age, which would allow older workers to remain employed longer and support a sustainable economy.
    • Social Security and pension reforms should also be considered to accommodate the ageing workforce and reduce the economic burden on younger generations.
  • Managing Migration:
    • Migration policies should be adjusted to manage the influx of economic migrants into southern States, who contribute to the economy but continue to be counted in their home States for fiscal and political purposes.
    • Migration-based policy reforms could address the challenge of an ageing population in states with declining fertility while ensuring equitable resource distribution across States.

Bharat 6G Mission

  • 10 Nov 2024

In News:

India aspires to lead the world in 6G technology by 2030 through the Bharat 6G Mission. This initiative builds upon the successful rollout of 5G, which reached 98% of districts in just 21 months.

Key Features of 6G Technology

  • Terahertz (THz) Frequencies: 6G will utilize THz waves capable of transmitting significantly more data than 5G, offering ultra-fast data rates.
  • Massive MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output): Supports a large number of devices and simultaneous connections using multiple antennas, improving data transmission and reception.
  • Network Slicing: Creates specialized, smaller networks tailored to specific traffic types, such as video streaming or industrial automation.
  • Enhanced Security: Incorporates advanced encryption and authentication protocols to safeguard sensitive data.
  • Ultra-Reliable Low Latency Communication (URLLC): Ensures ultra-low latency, critical for applications like industrial automation, virtual reality (VR), and augmented reality (AR).
  • Integrated Intelligent Reflecting Surfaces (IIRS): Enhances signal strength and quality, particularly in areas with poor reception.
  • High-Speed Data Transfer: Supports data communication over hundreds of GHz or THz frequencies, facilitating faster transfer rates.

Government Initiatives for 6G Development

Bharat 6G Vision and Strategy

  • Goal: To design, develop, and deploy 6G technologies, ensuring secure, intelligent, and pervasive global connectivity.
  • Core Principles:
    • Affordability, sustainability, and ubiquity aligned with the vision of Atmanirbhar Bharat (self-reliant India).
  • Strategic Objectives:
    • Promote R&D through startups, universities, and industries.
    • Develop affordable 6G solutions and global IP contributions.
    • Focus on transformative applications to enhance quality of life.

Technology Innovation Group (TIG) on 6G

  • Established: November 1, 2021.
  • Task Forces:
    • Focus on multidisciplinary solutions, spectrum management, devices and networks, international standards, and R&D funding.

Bharat 6G Alliance

  • A collaborative effort between Indian industry, academia, and research institutions to develop 5G advancements, 6G products, and patents.
  • Global Alignment: Partners with organizations like the Next G Alliance (US), 6G Flagship (Finland), and South Korea’s 6G Forum.

Applications of 6G Technology

Application Area

Description

Healthcare

Real-time patient monitoring and AI-connected devices.

Agriculture

IoT and AI-driven predictive systems for crop health and irrigation.

Defense & Internal Security

Enhanced surveillance, communication, and unmanned operations.

Disaster Response

High-volume communication for emergency coordination.

Transportation

Ultra-low latency for urban air mobility and traffic management.

Education

High-speed remote learning, immersive AR/VR-enabled classrooms.

Metaverse

3D holographic displays and seamless virtual interactions.

Industrial Automation

Smart factories with enhanced operational efficiency through real-time data.

Smart Cities

Efficient urban infrastructure and real-time monitoring using IoT.

Entertainment & Media

Higher-quality streaming, immersive content delivery.

Environmental Monitoring

Real-time data collection for resource management and conservation.

Challenges in 6G Development

  • Technical Complexity: Development of advanced components and subsystems makes 6G technology highly complex.
  • Infrastructure Deployment: Significant investment and regulatory support are required for the necessary infrastructure upgrades.
  • Spectrum Allocation: The limited availability of spectrum poses challenges in balancing competing demands for bandwidth.
  • Security Concerns: High-speed data transmission increases vulnerability to cyber threats, necessitating robust security protocols.
  • Standardization Issues: Achieving global consensus on standards for 6G interoperability can be slow and contentious.
  • Global Collaboration: Effective international cooperation is critical for technological and regulatory alignment.

Conclusion

India’s Bharat 6G Mission represents a visionary approach to maintaining technological leadership in the rapidly evolving global digital landscape. By investing in research, fostering international collaborations, and pursuing policies aligned with Atmanirbhar Bharat, India can harness 6G to fuel socio-economic growth and strengthen global connectivity.

Uttar Pradesh Board of Madarsa Education Act, 2004

  • 09 Nov 2024

In News:

The Supreme Court recently upheld the constitutional validity of the Uttar Pradesh Board of Madarsa Education Act, 2004 (also called the Madarsa Act), while striking down certain provisions related to the granting of higher education degrees. The Court overturned the Allahabad High Court's previous decision, which had deemed the Act unconstitutional on the grounds that it violated the principle of secularism.

What is the Madarsa Act?

The Madarsa Act provides a legal framework for regulating madrasas (Islamic educational institutions) in Uttar Pradesh. The Act:

  • Establishes the Uttar Pradesh Board of Madarsa Education, which oversees the curriculum and examinations for madrasas.
  • Ensures that madrasas follow the National Council of Educational Research and Training (NCERT) curriculum for mainstream secular education alongside religious instruction.
  • Empowers the state government to create rules for regulating madrasa education.

Allahabad High Court's Ruling

In March 2024, the Allahabad High Court declared the Madarsa Act unconstitutional, citing:

  • Violation of secularism: The Court argued that the Act's emphasis on compulsory Islamic education, with modern subjects being optional, discriminated on religious grounds, violating the secular nature of the Constitution.
  • Right to Education: The Court also claimed that the Act denied quality education under Article 21A, which guarantees free and compulsory education to children.
  • Higher Education Degrees: The Act's provisions allowing the granting of Fazil and Kamil degrees were found to conflict with the University Grants Commission Act, 1956, which regulates higher education.

Supreme Court's Ruling

The Supreme Court overturned the Allahabad High Court's decision on several grounds:

  • Basic Structure Doctrine: The Court clarified that the basic structure doctrine, which applies to constitutional amendments, does not apply to ordinary legislation like the Madarsa Act. Therefore, a law cannot be struck down simply for violating secularism unless explicitly prohibited by the Constitution.
  • State's Authority to Regulate Education: The Court held that the state has the right to regulate education in minority institutions, as long as the regulation is reasonable and rational. It emphasized that the Madarsa Act does not deprive these institutions of their minority character.
  • Right to Education for Minority Institutions: Referring to a 2014 decision, the Court ruled that the Right to Education Act (RTE) does not apply to minority institutions, as it would undermine their right to impart religious education and self-administer.

Striking Down Higher Education Provisions

While upholding most of the Act, the Supreme Court struck down the provisions related to higher education degrees (Fazil and Kamil). It ruled that:

  • Section 9 of the Act, which allowed the Board to grant these degrees, is in conflict with the University Grants Commission Act, which only permits degrees to be awarded by universities recognized by the UGC.

Implications of the Ruling

  • Regulation of Madrasa Education: The ruling affirms the state's authority to ensure quality education in madrasas, balancing religious instruction with secular subjects.
  • Protection of Minority Rights: By upholding the Madarsa Act, the Court protected the rights of religious minorities to run educational institutions while ensuring they meet educational standards.
  • Focus on Inclusivity: The judgment emphasizes the integration of madrasas within the broader educational framework, ensuring that madrasa students receive quality education.

In conclusion, the Supreme Court's decision supports the regulation of madrasa education while safeguarding the rights of minority institutions, except in areas related to the granting of higher education degrees, which remain under the jurisdiction of the UGC Act.

Indus Waters Treaty (IWT)

  • 08 Nov 2024

In News:

Need for modification of the Indus Waters Treaty (IWT) amidst changing geopolitical, environmental, and demographic realities.

Background of the Indus Waters Treaty (IWT)

  • About IWT:
    • Signed in 1960 between India and Pakistan, brokered by the World Bank.
    • Governs the sharing of the Indus River system waters.
  • Historical Context:
    • Origin in the Inter-Dominion Accord of 1948 post-partition.
    • Finalized after negotiations facilitated by the World Bank in 1951.
  • Key Provisions:
    • Eastern Rivers (Ravi, Beas, Sutlej) allocated to India.
    • Western Rivers (Indus, Jhelum, Chenab) allocated to Pakistan, with limited use allowed for India (e.g., hydropower, irrigation).
    • Establishment of the Permanent Indus Commission (PIC) for cooperation and dispute resolution.

India’s Perspective

  • Rationale for Modification:
    • Increased demographic and agricultural demands.
    • Need for sustainable water management.
    • Acceleration of hydropower projects on western rivers permitted by the treaty.
  • Security Concerns: Cross-border terrorism impacting trust in treaty operations.

Pakistan’s Concerns

  • Dependence on Indus System:  Critical for agriculture and drinking water as the lower riparian state.
  • Potential Impacts of Modification:
    • Fear of reduced water availability.
    • Concerns over India’s hydropower projects altering water flow.

Current Challenges

  • Hydropower Projects: Disputes over compliance with treaty provisions regarding hydropower construction.
  • Technical Disputes: Divergent interpretations of treaty terms.
  • Political Tensions: Strained bilateral relations with minimal diplomatic engagement.
  • Climate Change Impacts: Altered precipitation patterns and glacial melt affecting water availability.

Arguments for Modifying the Treaty

  • Addressing Contemporary Challenges: Climate change, technological advancements, and increased water demand.
  • Securing National Interests:
    • Clarifications on hydropower construction.
    • Improved dispute resolution mechanisms.

Risks of Modifying the Treaty

  • Escalation of Tensions: Perceived unilateral actions by Pakistan.
  • Political Sensitivities: Domestic opposition in both countries.

Way Forward: A Balanced Approach

  • Engagement and Dialogue: Bilateral discussions with potential third-party mediation (e.g., World Bank).
  • Cooperation over Conflict: Recognizing mutual benefits of collaboration in water management.
  • Adaptation Measures: Incorporate provisions addressing climate change and technological advances.

Zeroing in on Methane Diplomacy, at COP29

  • 07 Nov 2024

In News:

From November 11 to 22, 2024, global leaders will gather in Baku, Azerbaijan, for the 29th Conference of Parties (COP29) under the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC). This year’s summit, known as the Finance COP, will focus on setting a new global climate finance target—the New Collective Quantified Goal (NCQG).

A key focus of the summit is the reduction of methane emissions, as countries aim to curb near-term temperature increases, which buys critical time for long-term CO2 reductions necessary for stabilizing climate change.

U.S.-China Collaboration and Methane Reduction

US-China Collaboration Despite Geopolitical Tensions

Despite ongoing geopolitical tensions, the United States and China have found common ground on the issue of methane reduction. Both nations recognize the importance of addressing methane emissions, which are more potent in the short term than CO2. They, along with the United Arab Emirates, organized a summit at COP28 to discuss methane and other non-CO2 pollutants.

China’s National Plan for Methane Emissions

In November 2023, China launched its first national methane reduction plan, emphasizing capacity-building efforts over explicit reduction targets. This plan marked a significant step in China’s climate policy, underscoring its commitment to mitigating methane emissions alongside the U.S.

Given that China and the U.S. are the two largest contributors to methane emissions globally, their collaboration presents a significant opportunity for global climate mitigation efforts. India, the third-largest emitter of methane, could benefit from this partnership by seeking financial support and technical expertise to address its methane challenges.

India’s Methane Emissions Profile and Challenges

Emissions Breakdown

India’s Third Biennial Update Report to the UNFCCC indicates that in 2016, India emitted approximately 409 million tons of CO2-equivalent methane. The major sources of these emissions include:

  • Agriculture: 74% (mainly from livestock and rice cultivation)
  • Waste: 14% (unmanaged organic waste in landfills and dumpsites)
  • Energy: 11%
  • Industrial processes: 1%

Due to the dominant role of agriculture, India has been cautious about committing to stringent methane reduction targets. Initiatives like the Global Methane Pledge, which calls for a 30% reduction from 2020 levels by 2030, have not been fully embraced.

Environmental and Health Impact of Methane Emissions

Methane-related fires at waste dumpsites, such as the Bhalswa dump in Delhi (2022), have highlighted the broader environmental and health risks of methane emissions. These fires contribute significantly to air pollution, making it urgent for India to address methane in its waste management and agricultural sectors.

India’s Initiatives for Methane Reduction

Waste Management Programs

  • Comprehensive Waste Management Framework India’s waste management sector is a significant source of methane, contributing 14% of the nation’s total emissions. Although a comprehensive regulatory framework for waste management has been developed, implementation remains slow due to local capacity constraints and financial limitations.
  • Innovative Solutions Indore, a city in Madhya Pradesh, has pioneered waste sorting and biomethane production. The city's initiative includes:
    • Sorting organic waste
    • Converting it into biogas to fuel city buses

This model has gained national attention and is being considered for replication in other cities.

  • GOBARdhan Scheme Launched as part of the Swachh Bharat Mission-Urban 2.0, the Galvanizing Organic Bio-Agro Resources Dhan (GOBARdhan) scheme encourages rural communities to convert cattle manure and other organic waste into biogas and compost, reducing methane emissions from livestock waste while providing additional income to rural households.

Agricultural and Livestock Emission Reduction

  • National Mission for Sustainable Agriculture (NMSA) The NMSA promotes climate-resilient agricultural practices that reduce methane emissions. For example, Alternate Wetting and Drying (AWD) is a water-saving technique used in rice farming that reduces methane emissions by limiting anaerobic decomposition.
  • National Livestock Mission Under the National Livestock Mission, practices such as improved fodder management, silage making, and Total Mixed Ration (TMR) feeding are being promoted. These practices reduce methane emissions from livestock by improving digestion and feed efficiency.

 

Opportunities for India at COP29

Leveraging U.S.-China Methane Partnership

COP29 offers India an opportunity to leverage the U.S.-China collaboration on methane reduction. By engaging with these two major emitters, India can seek:

  • Financial support
  • Technical assistance
  • Capacity-building resources, particularly for its waste sector, which is a significant source of methane emissions.

Accurate data on methane emissions, such as satellite-based monitoring, can help India refine its emission inventories and enhance the effectiveness of its methane mitigation efforts.

Fast-Tracking India’s Methane Reduction Efforts

Although methane is not the primary focus at COP29, India has an opportunity to fast-track its efforts in methane reduction. The country's existing policies and initiatives, such as waste management programs and agricultural missions, provide a foundation upon which international collaboration can build.

Recent data from satellite monitoring in cities like Delhi and Mumbai shows that actual methane emissions from waste dumpsites may be 50%-100% higher than previously estimated, highlighting the urgency of addressing this issue.

 

Conclusion

Although methane may not dominate the COP29 agenda, it represents a critical pathway for India to accelerate its climate action. With the groundwork already laid through domestic policies and innovative solutions, India now requires enhanced financial and technical backing to scale up its methane reduction initiatives. By engaging proactively at COP29, India has a unique opportunity to secure the resources needed to tackle methane emissions, benefiting both its citizens and the global fight against climate change.

Supreme Court Ruling on Property and Redistribution

  • 06 Nov 2024

In News:

A crucial 9-judge bench of the Supreme Court ruled on the scope of government powers over private property, with a focus on Articles 39(b) and 31C of the Constitution.

Key Issues Considered by the Court

  • Article 31C: Whether it still protects laws giving effect to Articles 39(b) and 39(c), even after amendments and past rulings.
  • Interpretation of Article 39(b): The meaning of “material resources of the community” and the limits on government acquisition.

Legal and Constitutional Background

  • Article 31C and 39(b) Overview:
    • Article 31C was introduced by the 25th Amendment (1971) to protect laws related to the distribution of resources for the common good.
    • Article 39(b) (Directive Principle of State Policy) mandates that resources should be distributed to best serve the common good.
  • Historical Context:
    • Kesavananda Bharati Case (1973): The Supreme Court affirmed the Constitution’s "basic structure," impacting the interpretation of amendments to Article 31C.
    • Minerva Mills Case (1980): The Court struck down further amendments to Article 31C.

The Supreme Court’s Ruling in 2024

  • Restoration of the Post-Kesavananda Position: The Supreme Court clarified that the interpretation of Article 31C is restricted, and the protection under this article applies only to laws implementing Articles 39(b) and 39(c), not all directive principles.
  • On Redistributing Private Property:
    • The majority opinion held that not all privately owned properties can be considered “material resources of the community” for redistribution under Article 39(b).
    • The Court dismissed the broad interpretation of "material resources" used in previous rulings (e.g., Justice Krishna Iyer’s dissent in the Ranganatha Reddy case, 1977).

Dissenting and Concurring Opinions

  • Justice Nagarathna’s Concurring Opinion:
    • Acknowledged that certain privately owned resources could be considered material resources (e.g., forests, wetlands), but emphasized a balanced approach.
    • Distinguished between personal belongings and resources that could be considered part of the public domain.
  • Justice Dhulia’s Dissent:
    • Argued for a broader interpretation, in line with past rulings, that private resources could be considered material resources if they served the public good.

Interpretation of Article 39(b)

  • Scope of the Article:
    • Article 39(b) directs the State to ensure that the ownership of material resources is distributed to serve the common good.
    • It imposes a positive obligation on the State to create policies for resource distribution, but does not authorize arbitrary expropriation of private property.
  • Private Property as Material Resources:
    • The Court clarified that private property cannot be deemed a material resource of the community unless specific conditions are met (e.g., scarcity, public welfare implications).
    • The judgment emphasized a case-by-case analysis rather than a blanket approach.

Criteria for Assessing Material Resources

The Court provided criteria to evaluate whether a private property could be considered a “material resource of the community”:

  • Nature of the Resource: What is the resource’s fundamental characteristic?
  • Impact on Public Welfare: Does the resource impact the common good or public interest?
  • Ownership Type: Is the resource privately owned or under state control?
  • Scarcity: Is the resource scarce or in finite supply?
  • Concentration of Ownership: Are the resources concentrated in the hands of a few private entities?

Implications of the Ruling

  • Protection of Private Property Rights: The ruling strengthens protections against arbitrary State acquisition of private property, reinforcing the constitutional safeguards for property rights.
  • Economic Implications: The Court noted that India’s economic trajectory has shifted from socialism to a market-based economy, and that resource redistribution policies should reflect this change.
  • Policy Shifts: The ruling marks a shift away from a socialist economic ideology towards one that emphasizes private property rights, while still considering public welfare in resource distribution.

Conclusion

  • Balancing Individual Rights with Public Welfare: The ruling underscores the importance of balancing private property rights with the need for equitable resource distribution to serve the common good.
  • Implications for Constitutional Interpretation: This judgment marks a pivotal moment in the interpretation of property rights in India, affirming the evolving nature of the Constitution in response to dynamic economic and social policies.

Does Data Justify Subdivision of Quotas?

  • 05 Nov 2024

Context

India's reservation system has long been a tool for uplifting historically marginalized communities, especially Scheduled Castes (SCs) and Scheduled Tribes (STs). However, recent debates have questioned whether the system serves its intended purpose, particularly in light of disparities within the SC groups. The need for a ‘quota-within-quota’ system has been raised to ensure more equitable outcomes across different SC subgroups.

The Reservation System: Origins and Objectives

Purpose of Reservations

  • Historical Background: Established to correct centuries of social and economic exclusion faced by SCs and STs.
  • Mechanism for Equality: Aimed to create opportunities in education, government employment, and public offices for historically marginalized groups.
  • Dr. B.R. Ambedkar’s Vision: Reservations were designed to transition from formal legal equality to substantive equality.

Challenges of the Current System

  • Despite progress, certain SC subgroups seem to have benefited more than others.
  • A Supreme Court ruling has led to calls for a 'quota-within-quota' to address intra-SC disparities.

Exploring Intra-SC Disparities: The Data Analysis

States Examined

  • Key States: Andhra Pradesh, Bihar, Punjab, Tamil Nadu, Uttar Pradesh, and West Bengal.
  • Objective: To investigate whether some SC subgroups have disproportionately benefited from the reservation system.

Findings Across States

  • Andhra Pradesh: Minor differences between SC groups (Malas vs. Madigas), with both groups showing similar socio-economic progress.
  • Tamil Nadu: No significant disparity between Adi Dravida and Pallan groups, both benefiting equally from reservations.
  • Punjab: Subdivision of quotas since 1975 has led to better outcomes for disadvantaged groups like Mazhabi Sikhs and Balmikis.
  • Bihar: The Mahadalit category, introduced in 2007, failed due to political intervention, undermining the policy’s goals.

Key Insights

  • In some states (e.g., Punjab), a subdivision of quotas has been effective in addressing intra-SC disparities.
  • In other states, like Andhra Pradesh and Tamil Nadu, the benefits of reservations are already distributed fairly evenly among SC subgroups.
  • The gap between SCs and upper-caste groups remains much larger than the gap within SCs.

The Issue of Access to Reservations

Caste Certificates as a Proxy for Access

  • Data from IHDS: Less than 50% of SC households in Uttar Pradesh and Bihar report having caste certificates, limiting access to reserved positions.
  • Better Access in Some States: Over 60-70% of SC households in Tamil Nadu and Andhra Pradesh have caste certificates.

Core Issue: Ensuring Access

  • Access Challenges: Without proper access to caste certificates, many SCs are excluded from the benefits of the reservation system.
  • Priority Area: Ensuring that all eligible SCs have access to reservations is a critical concern before considering subdivision.

The 'Quota-within-Quota' Proposal

Concept and Potential Benefits

  • Targeted Assistance: A ‘quota-within-quota’ would provide more focused help to the most disadvantaged SC subgroups, as seen in Punjab.
  • Political Considerations: However, the political motivations behind quota subdivision, as seen in Bihar, can undermine the policy’s effectiveness.

Criticism and Limitations

  • Uneven Need for Subdivision: In many states, the need for further subdivision is minimal, as the benefits of reservations are already fairly distributed.
  • Political Exploitation: The policy risks becoming a political tool rather than a genuine means of achieving social justice, as political influence often determines who is categorized as the most disadvantaged.

Addressing Inequality Beyond Reservations

Income-Based Criteria and Monetary Benefits

  • Current Approach: Monetary benefits (e.g., scholarships, lower fees) are a part of the affirmative action system.
  • Income Criterion: Should be used to determine eligibility for monetary benefits to focus assistance on those most in need.

The "Creamy Layer" Debate

  • Supreme Court’s Suggestion: The introduction of a "creamy layer" exclusion for SCs, akin to the Other Backward Classes (OBCs) model, remains contentious and requires stronger evidence.

Challenges of Economic Mobility

  • Stigma and Discrimination: Economic progress does not necessarily eliminate social stigma or discrimination, especially for historically marginalized groups.
  • Long-Term Goal: While reservations have contributed to creating a Dalit middle class, addressing stigma will require a gradual process.

The Need for Updated Data and Evidence-Based Policy

Data Deficiency

  • Lack of Comprehensive Data: The absence of updated, reliable data on caste-based disparities limits the effectiveness of any policy reform.
  • National Census Delay: India’s national Census, the only source of comprehensive data on caste, has been delayed, exacerbating the problem.

Evidence-Driven Reform

  • Importance of Data: Robust and up-to-date data is essential to assess the true impact of reservations and to make informed policy decisions.

Conclusion: Reforming the Reservation System

  • Reservations’ Success: The reservation system has played a significant role in improving the socio-economic status of SCs and STs.
  • Intra-SC Disparities: While some subgroups benefit more than others, the broader gap between SCs and upper-caste groups remains far more pronounced.
  • Focus on Access: The primary focus should be on improving access to reservations, ensuring that all eligible SCs benefit fully from affirmative action.

RBI brings back 102 tonnes gold from BoE; 60 per cent reserves in India

  • 04 Nov 2024

In News:

England over the past two-and-a-half years, reflecting a strategic shift in its approach to safeguarding gold reserves. This move marks a significant increase in the RBI's domestic gold holdings.

Rise in the RBI's Domestic Gold Holdings

  • Current Status (September 2024):The RBI's domestic gold reserves have grown to 510.46 metric tonnes, up from 295.82 metric tonnes in March 2022.
  • Reduction in Gold Held Abroad:The gold held under the custodianship of the Bank of England has decreased to 324 metric tonnes from 453.52 metric tonnes in March 2022.
  • Gold as a Share of Foreign Exchange Reserves:The proportion of gold in India's total foreign exchange reserves increased from 8.15% in March 2024 to 9.32% in September 2024.

Gold Kept in the Bank of England

  • Overview of the Bank of England's Gold Vault:The Bank of England is home to one of the largest gold vaults in the world, second only to the New York Federal Reserve, housing around 400,000 bars of gold.
  • India’s Gold Held Abroad:The RBI continues to retain 324 metric tonnes of its gold with the Bank of England and the Bank for International Settlements (BIS).
  • Additional Gold Management:Around 20 tonnes of gold are managed through gold deposit schemes.
  • Strategic Role of London’s Gold Market:Storing gold in London provides immediate access to the global London bullion market, enhancing liquidity for India’s gold assets.

Historical Context of India’s Gold Holdings

  • 1991 Balance of Payments Crisis:During a financial crisis in 1991, India had to send 47 tonnes of gold to the Bank of England to secure loans for repaying international creditors.

RBI’s Strategy to Bring Gold Back to India

  • Global Trend of Central Banks Buying Gold:Since the imposition of U.S. sanctions on Russia in 2022, central banks globally have been increasing their gold reserves as a hedge against inflation and to reduce reliance on the U.S. dollar. India has outpaced other G20 nations in this trend, surpassing Russia and China in gold purchases.
  • De-dollarisation:This shift is part of a broader strategy of de-dollarisation, aiming to diversify away from the U.S. dollar amidst rising gold prices and growing geopolitical tensions.

Significance of Repatriating Gold to India

  • Sign of Economic Strength
    • Recovery from the 1991 Crisis:The decision to repatriate gold reflects a significant improvement in India's economic position, a stark contrast to the 1991 economic crisis when India had to pledge gold for financial survival.
  • Optimizing Financial Resources
    • Reducing Storage Costs:Storing gold domestically allows the RBI to save on storage fees paid to foreign custodians, such as the Bank of England.
  • Strategic Significance
    • Enhanced Resilience Amid Global Instability:By repatriating its gold, India enhances its strategic autonomy and strengthens its economic position in a world of rising uncertainties and currency volatility.

RBI's Capacity to Safeguard Gold Domestically

  • Increasing Domestic Storage Capacity:The RBI has been increasing its domestic capacity for gold storage to accommodate rising reserves and reduce dependence on foreign gold safekeeping facilities.
  • Current Foreign Exchange Reserves:As of October 2024, India’s total foreign exchange reserves stand at $684.8 billion, sufficient to cover over 11.2 months of imports.

Diversification of Foreign Exchange Reserves

  • Mitigating Currency Risks:By increasing gold reserves, India diversifies its foreign exchange holdings, reducing reliance on any single currency and shielding itself from global currency fluctuations and economic volatility.
  • Gold as a Stable Asset:Gold serves as a stable asset, providing a safeguard against global economic shocks, and balances India’s reserves portfolio.

Gold as a Hedge against Inflation

  • Preserving Wealth amid Inflation:Gold is traditionally viewed as a hedge against inflation, maintaining or appreciating in value when other currencies weaken. By increasing its gold reserves, India positions itself to better withstand the adverse effects of inflation and ensure long-term financial stability.

Conclusion

The repatriation of gold by the RBI reflects a strategic move to bolster India's economic strength and diversify its financial assets. The decision to bring gold back to India not only signifies an improvement in India's economic fundamentals but also aligns with global trends of central banks increasing their gold reserves to ensure long-term stability and reduce reliance on the U.S. dollar.

Key Takeaways from COP-16: Convention on Biological Diversity

  • 03 Nov 2024

In News:

The 16th edition of the Convention of Biological Diversity (CBD) in Cali, Colombia was concluded.

Key Agreements at COP-16

  • Establishment of the Cali Fund
    • Purpose: To ensure equitable benefit-sharing from the use of Digital Sequence Information (DSI) on genetic resources.
    • Focus on Indigenous Communities: At least 50% of the Cali Fund will support Indigenous peoples and local communities, with special emphasis on women and youth.
  • Creation of a Permanent Subsidiary Body
    • Inclusion of Indigenous Peoples: A new body will ensure the active participation of Indigenous groups in biodiversity conservation and policy discussions.
  • Resource Mobilisation Strategy
    • Target Funding: The conference agreed on a strategy to secure USD 200 billion annually by 2030 to support global biodiversity initiatives.
    • Kunming Biodiversity Fund: A contribution of USD 200 million from China to support biodiversity funding.
  • Management of Invasive Alien Species
    • New Guidelines: Proposals for databases, cross-border trade regulations, and enhanced coordination with e-commerce platforms to manage invasive species.
  • Identification of Ecologically or Biologically Significant Marine Areas (EBSAs)
    • Enhanced Process: COP-16 agreed on an evolved process for identifying EBSAs, a critical aspect of marine conservation.
  • Global Action Plan on Biodiversity and Health
    • One Health Approach: Approval of a global action plan to curb zoonotic diseases, promote health, and safeguard ecosystems.

India’s Contribution at COP-16

Updated National Biodiversity Strategy and Action Plan (NBSAP)

  • Financial Commitment: India plans to invest ?81,664 crore (USD 9.8 billion) from 2025-30 on biodiversity conservation.
  • Focus Areas: India highlighted efforts such as the establishment of the International Big Cat Alliance, expansion of Ramsar sites, and increased spending on biodiversity from 2018-2022.

International Finance Support

  • Global Partnerships: India emphasized the need for international finance to meet biodiversity targets, particularly under the Kunming-Montreal Global Biodiversity Framework (KMGBF).

Key Outcomes from COP-16

  • New Mechanisms for Biodiversity Conservation
    • Cali Fund: Ensures equitable benefit-sharing from genetic resources.
    • Permanent Subsidiary Body: Facilitates the inclusion of Indigenous peoples in policy-making.
  • Funding and Resource Mobilization
    • USD 200 Billion Annually: Strategy to secure funding for biodiversity initiatives.
    • Redirecting Harmful Subsidies: Agreement to redirect USD 500 billion in harmful subsidies by 2030.
  • Biodiversity and Human Health
    • Global Action Plan on Biodiversity and Health: Aimed at preventing zoonotic diseases and promoting human, animal, and environmental health.

Challenges in Biodiversity Protection

Key Threats to Biodiversity

  • Population Growth and Resource Demand: Increasing population and demand for biological resources lead to over-exploitation.
  • Habitat Degradation and Climate Change: Destruction of ecosystems and climate change threaten species globally.
  • Invasive Species: Introduction of non-native species harms local biodiversity.
  • Government Policies: Policies that prioritize development without environmental safeguards contribute to biodiversity loss.

Gaps in Global Biodiversity Framework

  • Weak Legal Language: Concerns about insufficient legal protection for critical ecosystems.
  • Lack of Implementation Mechanisms: Absence of mandatory review mechanisms for biodiversity targets.

Kunming-Montreal Global Biodiversity Framework (KMGBF)

Framework Overview

  • Adoption: Adopted at COP-15 in 2022, the KMGBF sets 23 action-oriented targets for biodiversity by 2030.
  • Key Goals: Includes restoring 30% of degraded ecosystems and reducing the risk of invasive species by 50%.
  • Living in Harmony with Nature: The framework envisions achieving biodiversity targets and living sustainably with nature by 2050.

Way Forward: Moving from Agreements to Action

  • Participation of Stakeholders - Inclusive Approach: Ensuring the involvement of all relevant stakeholders, including governments, businesses, and local communities, in biodiversity conservation.
  • Integrated Resource Management - Ecosystem Approach: Promoting a holistic approach to managing biodiversity and natural resources.
  • Strengthening Governance - Good Governance Practices: Encouraging better governance to prevent unregulated exploitation of natural resources.
  • International Financial Support - Alignment with Financial Institutions: Aligning global financial institutions and multilateral development banks with biodiversity conservation goals.

WWF Living Planet Report 2024

  • 02 Nov 2024

In News:

  • The WWF Living Planet Report 2024 highlights a drastic 73% decline in the average size of monitored wildlife populations globally from 1970 to 2020.
  • The report underscores the urgent need for biodiversity conservation to maintain ecological balance, food security, and human health.

Key Findings of the 2024 Report

Wildlife Population Decline

  • 73% Decline in monitored wildlife populations over the past 50 years (1970-2020).
  • Freshwater species: Declined by 85%, the most significant drop.
  • Terrestrial species: Declined by 69%.
  • Marine species: Declined by 56%.

Main Threats to Wildlife

  • Habitat Loss: Primary driver, particularly due to the expansion of food systems.
  • Overexploitation: Over-hunting, fishing, and resource extraction.
  • Invasive Species: Non-native species disrupt local ecosystems.
  • Pollution: Water, air, and soil contamination, especially in Asia-Pacific.
  • Disease: Emerging diseases impacting wildlife populations.

Ecosystem Risks and Tipping Points

  • Decline in wildlife signals risks of ecosystem tipping points.
  • Critical ecosystems, like the Amazon and coral reefs, face potential irreversible damage.
  • Impact on global food security and livelihoods due to ecosystem collapse.

India’s Wildlife Status

  • Vulture populations in India remain critically endangered.
  • Tiger populations have increased to 3,682 (2022).
  • Snow leopards have been successfully monitored with 718 individuals recorded.

Case Study: Chennai’s Wetland Loss

  • 85% reduction in Chennai’s wetlands due to urban expansion, exacerbating flood and drought risks.
  • Initiatives like the Tamil Nadu Wetland Mission aim to restore these wetlands to improve ecosystem resilience.

 

Impacts of Wildlife Decline

  • Ecosystem Imbalance
    • Disruption in predator-prey relationships, pollination, and nutrient cycles due to species decline.
    • Leads to ecosystem instability and potential collapse.
  • Loss of Biodiversity
    • Reduced genetic diversity makes ecosystems less resilient to environmental changes.
    • Increases vulnerability to diseases, natural disasters, and climate change.
  • Threats to Food Security
    • Pollinators like bees and insects are essential for crop yields.
    • Loss of pollinators threatens global food supply and agriculture.
  • Human Health Implications
    • Healthy ecosystems regulate disease by controlling pest populations.
    • Declining biodiversity increases the risk of zoonotic diseases, such as COVID-19.
  • Economic Consequences
    • Agriculture, fisheries, and tourism industries depend on healthy ecosystems.
    • Decline in wildlife can lead to job losses and economic instability.
  • Cultural and Social Impacts
    • Wildlife holds cultural, spiritual, and recreational value for societies worldwide.
    • Loss of iconic species diminishes cultural identities and opportunities for nature-based tourism.

 

Challenges in Biodiversity Conservation

  • Inadequate National Actions
    • Despite global commitments (e.g., Global Biodiversity Framework, Paris Agreement, UN SDGs), national actions are insufficient to meet 2030 biodiversity targets.
    • Risk of crossing tipping points that could lead to irreversible ecosystem degradation.
  • Key Drivers of Biodiversity Loss
    • Habitat Loss: Driven by agriculture, urbanization, and infrastructure development.
    • Climate Change: Rising temperatures, extreme weather, and altered precipitation patterns.
    • Overexploitation: Unsustainable hunting, fishing, logging, and resource extraction.
    • Pollution: Industrial, agricultural, and plastic pollution disrupt natural habitats.
    • Invasive Species: Non-native species outcompeting and threatening native populations.
    • Lack of Funding: Inadequate financial resources for effective conservation.
    • Weak Policy and Enforcement: Poorly implemented habitat protection laws.
    • Human-Wildlife Conflict: Increased interactions between expanding human populations and wildlife.
    • Genetic Diversity Loss: Reduced genetic diversity makes species vulnerable to diseases and environmental changes.
    • Awareness Gaps: Insufficient public awareness on the importance of biodiversity.

 

Conclusion and Way Forward

Policy and Action Recommendations

  • Expand protected areas and restore ecosystems to halt biodiversity loss.
  • Engage Indigenous communities in conservation and land management practices.
  • Promote sustainable farming, reduce food waste, and encourage plant-based diets to lessen food production impacts.
  • Shift to renewable energy and reduce fossil fuel use to mitigate climate change.
  • Redirect investments from environmentally harmful sectors to nature-friendly industries.

WWF-India’s Call for Collective Action

  • WWF-India advocates for collective action to align climate, conservation, and sustainable development policies.
  • The goal is to ensure a resilient and thriving future for both biodiversity and human societies.

Tackling Judicial Pendency and Adjournments in India

  • 01 Nov 2024

In News:

The issue of judicial delays and adjournments has become a significant concern in India’s judicial system. President Droupadi Murmu, while addressing the National Conference of District Judiciary in September 2024, emphasized the need to eliminate the culture of adjournments. These delays particularly affect the poor and rural populations, who often suffer in silence, avoiding court due to the fear of protracted justice.

Background of the Indian Judicial System

India’s judicial system has evolved under various legal frameworks, including the Code of Civil Procedure (CPC) and the Criminal Procedure Code (CrPC). Initially, civil courts dealt with a wide range of cases, while criminal courts focused on criminal offenses. The establishment of the Supreme Court and High Courts further strengthened India’s judicial architecture to handle constitutional and appellate cases.

To address the growing caseload, the Indian government introduced the tribunal system through the 42nd Constitutional Amendment Act, 1976, aiming to manage specialized disputes. However, despite these reforms, case pendency continues to rise.

Key Issues Contributing to Judicial Delay and Pendency

  • Judge-to-Population Ratio - India currently has 21 judges per million people, far below the recommended 50 judges per million as per the 120th Law Commission Report. The shortage of judges directly contributes to the growing backlog of cases.
  • Vacant Judicial Positions - As of late 2024, 30% of High Court positions remain vacant, exacerbating the case pendency crisis. The delay in filling these vacancies has resulted in overburdened judges, further delaying case resolution.
  • Legislative Overload - The enactment of laws without conducting prior judicial impact assessments leads to an increase in the number of cases, often without considering the capacity of the judiciary to handle them. This lack of foresight results in excessive pressure on courts.
  • Overworked Judiciary - Judges often face a heavy workload, with some handling multiple responsibilities across different courts. This overburdening leads to mental fatigue, increased errors, and prolonged decision-making.
  • Witness Delays - The absence of witnesses and delays in their appearance in court can significantly prolong the judicial process, contributing to case pendency.

Government Initiatives and Challenges

    • National Judicial Infrastructure Plan (NJIP): The NJIP aims to modernize judicial infrastructure, improving court functioning and case processing. However, its full implementation across the country remains a work in progress.
    • E-Courts Project: The E-Courts project aims to digitize the judicial process, including e-filing and virtual hearings. This initiative has shown promise in reducing procedural delays but still requires wider application.
    • Tribunal System: While tribunals were introduced to reduce the burden on regular courts, their success has been limited, and the abolition of six tribunals in 2021 has added additional pressure on High Courts.
    • Case Timeline Legislation: Laws prescribing time-bound adjudication for sensitive cases have been enacted, but due to inefficiencies in the system, deadlines are rarely met.

Recommendations for Reform

    • Enhance Judicial Strength
    • Increase the Judge-to-Population Ratio: The government should prioritize the appointment of judges to meet the 50 judges per milliontargets.
    • Fill Vacant Positions: High Courts should fill vacant positions six months in advance to ensure a steady supply of judges.
    • Judicial Impact Assessment
  • Implement Judicial Impact Assessments: The Justice M. Jagannadha Rao Committee’s recommendation for judicial impact assessments should be made mandatory. Every new Bill should assess the likely increase in judicial workload, the required number of judges, and the necessary infrastructure.
    • Promote Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR)
    • Encourage ADR Mechanisms: Mediation and arbitration should be promoted as cost-effective alternatives to court proceedings. Public awareness campaigns and legal reforms can encourage the use of ADR.
    • Strengthen Infrastructure and Technology
  • Modernize Court Infrastructure: The judiciary should invest in technology such as e-filing and virtual hearings to reduce administrative burdens and expedite case resolutions.
  • Streamline Administrative Processes: Technology can also help automate administrative tasks, thereby reducing the workload on judges and speeding up case processing.
  • Limit Adjournments
  • Stricter Norms for Adjournments: Judicial bodies should enforce stricter norms for granting adjournments, ensuring that they are not used excessively.
  • Oversight Mechanism: An independent body can monitor the frequency of adjournments and take corrective action if needed.

Conclusion

Addressing the issue of judicial adjournments and case pendency requires a comprehensive approach involving structural reforms, better resource allocation, and the adoption of technology. Strengthening the judiciary’s infrastructure, increasing judicial appointments, and promoting alternative dispute resolution are vital steps toward ensuring quicker, fairer justice. The collaborative efforts of the judiciary, government, and society at large are essential to ensuring that India’s judicial system can meet the demands of justice in a timely and efficient manner.

Analysis of Election Expenditure in India

  • 30 Oct 2024

Overview

Election expenditure has become a pressing issue in modern democracies, with growing concerns about its implications for political integrity and fair competition. In India, the skyrocketing costs of elections—both in terms of candidate spending and political party expenditure—pose significant challenges to electoral transparency, governance, and equity.

 

Current State of Election Expenditure in India

The total expenditure on elections in India has risen dramatically in recent years. For the 2024 Lok Sabha elections, the total expenditure by various political parties is estimated to reach around ?1,00,000 crores. This is a significant jump from the ?9,000 crores spent in the 1998 general elections. The expenditure per vote has also risen substantially, from ?25,000 in 1951 to ?1,400 in 2024.

The election expenditure limits for individual candidates are capped by the Election Commission of India (ECI):

  • ?95 lakh for larger states (Lok Sabha constituencies)
  • ?75 lakh for smaller states
  • ?40 lakh for legislative assembly elections in larger states
  • ?28 lakh for smaller states

However, these caps apply only to individual candidates. Political parties are not subject to any expenditure limits, allowing them to spend unlimited amounts during campaigns. This discrepancy leads to considerable financial disparities between well-funded national parties and regional or smaller parties, undermining the principle of equitable competition.

 

Global Comparisons: Election Financing and Spending Limits

Election financing varies widely across democracies, with countries like the United States and the United Kingdom adopting specific limits and regulations to curb excessive spending.

  • United States: U.S. elections are financed largely through contributions from individuals, corporations, and Political Action Committees (PACs). Notably, Super PACs—which can raise and spend unlimited funds—have exacerbated concerns over money's influence on political outcomes. The 2024 U.S. presidential election is expected to cost around $16 billion (approximately ?1,36,000 crores).
  • United Kingdom: Political parties are subject to strict expenditure limits. Each political party is allowed to spend £54,010 for each constituency, with an overall cap of £35 million for contests across all constituencies. This is aimed at ensuring that elections are not swayed by wealth alone and that smaller parties have a fighting chance.

Despite these measures, the United States still faces issues with unlimited corporate donations and the growing influence of wealthy donors, highlighting the complexities in curbing money in politics.

 

Challenges Posed by Rising Election Expenditure

The rising costs of elections present multiple challenges in India, exacerbating corruption, unfair competition, and political inequality.

a) Political Corruption and Influence

Large election expenditures are often funded by corporate donations and other private entities, creating a nexus between politicians and donors. This can lead to a quid-pro-quo relationship, where politicians may prioritize the interests of their donors over public welfare. This undermines public trust in the political system.

b) Unaccounted Money and Illegal Practices

A significant portion of the election expenditure is unaccounted for. The Centre for Media Studies (CMS) reports that in the 2019 general elections, around 25% of the total expenditure was spent on illegally distributing cash to voters. This practice, coupled with the absence of strict regulations on third-party campaigners, enables the use of black money in elections, further skewing the electoral process.

c) Uneven Playing Field

The absence of limits on party spending creates a situation where well-funded national parties have an inherent advantage over smaller regional parties and independent candidates. This financial inequality reduces the ability of under-funded candidates to compete based on ideas and merit rather than financial muscle. Furthermore, the growing influence of digital advertising and media campaigns has further widened this gap, with larger parties investing heavily in digital platforms like Google and Facebook, marginalizing those without the resources to do so.

 

Proposed Reforms to Address Election Expenditure Issues

To address these challenges, several reforms have been suggested by experts, committees, and the Election Commission. These reforms aim to curb excessive spending, ensure fairness, and increase accountability in the electoral process.

a) Capping Expenditure by Political Parties

There is a pressing need to introduce expenditure ceilings for political parties, in addition to those imposed on individual candidates. According to the 2016 Electoral Reforms Report by the Election Commission, political party spending should be capped at a level not exceeding the total expenditure limit for all candidates fielded by the party. This would level the playing field, ensuring that the influence of money is curtailed during elections.

b) State Funding of Elections

Recommendations for state funding of elections have been made by the Indrajit Gupta Committee (1998) and the Law Commission Report (1999). The state could partially finance the campaigns of recognized political parties, ensuring that candidates are not solely reliant on private donations. However, this reform faces challenges in terms of feasibility and implementation, especially regarding the mechanism for allocation of funds.

c) Regulation of Third-Party Campaigners

India should follow the example of countries like Australia, where third-party campaigners are formally registered and required to disclose their funding sources. This would help in tracking illegal contributions and ensure that election spending is transparent.

d) Ban on Government Advertisements During Election Periods

The use of government advertisements by the ruling party during the run-up to elections often leads to an uneven playing field. A ban on government-funded ads during the six months before elections would ensure that the ruling party does not gain an unfair advantage through public resources.

e) Strengthening Electoral Oversight

An independent electoral oversight body could be established to oversee campaign financing and ensure that all parties comply with spending limits. This would include measures to audit party finances, track donations, and verify spending claims, making it more difficult for parties to evade rules or use black money.

 

Conclusion: The Need for Comprehensive Electoral Reforms

The rising costs of elections in India present significant challenges to the democratic process. While expenditure limits for candidates exist, the lack of restrictions on party spending creates financial inequalities that undermine fair competition. The increasing role of corporate donations, illegal cash distribution, and unregulated third-party spending further complicates the situation.

To ensure fair elections, it is crucial that India adopts reforms such as capping political party expenditures, state funding of elections, and stronger oversight mechanisms. These steps, coupled with bipartisan political will, could help create a more equitable, transparent, and accountable electoral system, fostering greater public trust in the democratic process.

By addressing these challenges head-on, India can work toward an election system that encourages political participation based on ideas and policies rather than financial clout, ultimately strengthening the foundations of democracy.

Analysis of Growing Economic Divide in India

  • 29 Oct 2024

Overview

The Economic Advisory Council to the Prime Minister (EAC-PM)'s report titled "Relative Economic Performance of Indian States: 1960-61 to 2023-24" highlights an alarming trend of widening economic disparities across India's states, which is increasingly threatening the principles of federalism and national unity. The findings reveal significant regional imbalances in terms of contributions to the national income, per capita income, and overall economic development. This analysis delves into the key insights from the report and explores the broader implications for India's federal structure, governance, and policy approaches.

Key Insights from the Report

  • Regional Economic Disparities:
    • Western and Southern States' Dominance: States such as Maharashtra, Gujarat, Tamil Nadu, and Karnataka have consistently outperformed others. These states have benefited from higher private investments, better infrastructure, and a more business-friendly environment. They also enjoy proximity to international markets, especially coastal regions like Gujarat and Tamil Nadu, which have access to ports and export markets.
    • Underperformance of Northern and Eastern States: On the other hand, northern states (with exceptions like Delhi and Haryana) and eastern states like Bihar, Odisha, and West Bengal lag behind in economic performance. These regions face challenges such as poor infrastructure, low levels of investment, and weak governance structures, which hinder their growth potential.
  • Impact of Liberalization (1991):
    • The 1991 economic reforms marked a shift toward market-oriented growth, benefiting states that were already more industrialized or had better urban infrastructure. Southern states, in particular, adapted well to the liberalized environment, attracting higher levels of private investment and expanding their economies.
    • The liberalization process disproportionately favored urban centers like Delhi, Mumbai, Chennai, and Bengaluru, where investments were channelized into growing service sectors, technology, and industries, creating a feedback loop of wealth accumulation in these hubs. Meanwhile, the hinterland remained underdeveloped due to insufficient public investment and the lack of private sector interest in these regions.
  • Investment Disparities:
    • Private Investment: Wealthier states attract a disproportionate share of private investment, which is driven by profitability and market opportunities. These states have better infrastructure, which reduces transaction costs and increases returns on investment. In contrast, underdeveloped states struggle to attract investment due to poor governance, inadequate infrastructure, and perceived higher risks.
    • Public Investment: While the public sector still plays a role in investment, the New Economic Policies (NEP) since 1991 have shifted the focus towards private sector-driven growth. This has further widened the investment gap, as the poorer states receive less public investment relative to their needs.
  • Role of Infrastructure and Governance:
    • The availability and quality of infrastructure are significant determinants of economic performance. States with better roads, energy supply, ports, and communication networks tend to attract more investments. Additionally, good governance, characterized by reduced corruption, better policy implementation, and transparency, also plays a critical role in fostering economic development.
    • In contrast, states with weaker governance structures and poor infrastructure struggle to create an enabling environment for businesses, further compounding regional disparities.
  • Impact on Federalism:
    • The growing economic divide is leading to tensions between the Centre and state governments, particularly in wealthier states that contribute significantly to national income but feel short-changed in resource allocation. These states argue that they are not receiving a fair share of national resources in return for their contributions, leading to growing dissatisfaction with the federal system.
    • The tension is exacerbated by political factors, such as accusations from opposition-led states that the Centre uses public investment to favor states aligned with the ruling party. The growing perception of politicization of resource allocation has the potential to undermine the spirit of cooperative federalism.

Structural Causes of Regional Inequality

  • Economic and Investment Magnetism:
    • Wealthier states attract more private investments, as they offer better returns due to established markets, skilled labor, and urbanization. Cities like Mumbai, Delhi, and Bengaluru serve as economic magnets, drawing talent, technology, and capital, which further consolidates their economic dominance.
    • In contrast, states without such economic hubs or access to global markets struggle to attract investment. The absence of urban agglomerations and the concentration of wealth and resources in a few states perpetuate regional disparities.
  • Policy and Investment Bias:
    • Post-liberalization policies have disproportionately benefited the organized sector, often at the expense of the unorganized sector, which is more prevalent in poorer states. The emphasis on industrial growth and infrastructure development has largely bypassed the rural and informal sectors, which are critical in underdeveloped states.
    • The organized sector has also benefited from government support, such as tax concessions and subsidized infrastructure, which have enabled these industries to thrive in already developed regions. This has widened the gap between the haves and the have-nots.
  • Cronyism and the Black Economy:
    • Crony capitalism and the prevalence of the black economy in poorer states further exacerbate regional imbalances. In some cases, political patronage and corruption divert resources and investments from areas that need them most. This weakens the investment climate, especially in states with higher levels of informal and illegal economic activity.

Implications for Federalism

The growing economic disparity poses a serious threat to India's federal structure. The increasing dissatisfaction of wealthier states with the current fiscal arrangements and the growing demand for fairer resource allocation challenge the spirit of cooperative federalism. A well-functioning federal system relies on equitable distribution of resources and opportunities for all regions to develop.

Policy Recommendations

To address these disparities and strengthen India's federal framework, several policy measures need to be implemented:

  • Enhancing Governance and Infrastructure in Lagging States:
    • Improved governance and reducing corruption are essential in attracting both private and public investments. Additionally, there must be a focus on developing critical infrastructure, such as roads, energy, and health facilities, which are essential for economic growth.
    • States need to increase public investment in sectors like education, healthcare, and social security to improve human capital and productivity.
  • Focus on the Unorganized Sector:
    • A significant portion of the labor force in poorer states is employed in the unorganized sector. Policies should aim to formalize this sector by providing social security benefits, improving labor rights, and increasing productivity through skill development. This could help raise incomes and stimulate local demand, attracting more private investment.
  • Balancing the Organized and Unorganized Sectors:
    • While the organized sector has benefited from liberalization, more attention should be given to the unorganized sector, which forms the backbone of the economy in many poorer states. A balanced approach to economic growth, which includes both organized and unorganized sectors, can help reduce disparities.
  • Shifting Focus from Urban Centers to Hinterlands:
    • Private sector investment must be incentivized in underdeveloped regions through tax breaks, subsidies, and targeted infrastructure projects. This will encourage businesses to expand beyond the major urban centers, thus promoting a more balanced distribution of economic activities.

Conclusion

The widening economic divide in India, as revealed by the EAC-PM report, poses a significant challenge to the country's federalism and unity. To ensure inclusive and balanced development, policy reforms must focus on reducing regional disparities by improving governance, infrastructure, and investment in lagging states. A shift towards equitable growth, addressing the needs of both the organized and unorganized sectors, is essential to promoting national cohesion and ensuring sustainable economic progress across all regions.

Strengthening the Anti-Defection Law to Uphold India's Democratic Integrity

  • 28 Oct 2024

In News:

The Anti-Defection Law, introduced in 1985 through the 52nd Constitutional Amendment, aims to curb political instability caused by legislators switching parties for personal or financial reasons. While the law has helped maintain political stability, it faces several challenges, including delays in decision-making, potential bias in adjudication, and lack of transparency in party directives. These issues undermine its effectiveness in safeguarding democratic integrity.

Historical Context and Genesis

The issue of political defections, exemplified by the term "Aaya Ram, Gaya Ram," traces its origins to the 1960s when frequent party-switching destabilized governments. To address this, the Anti-Defection Law was enacted in 1985, disqualifying members who voluntarily gave up their party membership or defied party whips on critical votes. Initially effective in reducing defections, the law has faced challenges due to emerging loopholes, particularly regarding party "splits" and "mergers."

Gaps and Loopholes in the Current Law

One major loophole was the provision allowing a party split if one-third of its members defected, exploited until the 91st Amendment in 2003, which increased the threshold for mergers to two-thirds. Despite this change, defections continue, particularly through "mergers." Another issue is the role of the Speaker in deciding disqualification petitions. Given that the Speaker is often affiliated with the ruling party, their decisions are sometimes seen as biased, leading to delays in resolving defection cases. Additionally, the lack of transparency in issuing party whips has caused disputes regarding their legitimacy.

Proposed Reforms

To address these challenges, two key amendments are proposed:

  1. Fixed Time Frame for Decision-Making: A clear time frame—such as four weeks—should be established for the Speaker or an adjudicatory body to resolve defection cases. If no decision is made within this period, defecting members should automatically be disqualified.
  2. Transparency in Whips: Political parties should be required to make the issuance of whips public, either through newspaper publications or electronic communication, to ensure that members are fully informed of party positions on critical votes.

Ethical Concerns and Impact on Democracy

While the Anti-Defection Law was introduced to promote political stability, it has inadvertently stifled internal dissent within parties. Legislators are often forced to follow party lines, even when their personal convictions or constituents' interests conflict. This limits their freedom of expression and undermines the representative nature of democracy. Furthermore, the law has not fully curbed unethical practices such as "poaching" of members or defectors seeking personal gain, which continue to destabilize governments and erode public trust in the system.

The Way Forward: Political Will and Comprehensive Reforms

To strengthen the Anti-Defection Law, reforms must balance party discipline with individual freedoms. Key steps include:

  • Independent Adjudication: Establishing an independent tribunal to handle defection cases can reduce political bias and expedite the decision-making process.
  • Clear Timeframes: Setting a fixed timeline for resolving defection cases will prevent delays and ensure accountability.
  • Transparency in Whip Issuance: Ensuring public notice of party whips will reduce ambiguity and disputes.
  • Promoting Ethical Conduct: Strengthening ethical guidelines to discourage "poaching" and protect the integrity of the electoral process.

Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana (PMMY)

  • 27 Oct 2024

Introduction

The Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana (PMMY) was launched by Prime Minister Narendra Modi on April 8, 2015, with the aim of providing financial support to non-corporate, non-farm small and micro enterprises in India. Through this initiative, loans are provided to individuals and small businesses who are unable to access formal institutional finance.

In the Union Budget 2024-25, Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman announced an increase in the loan limit under PMMY from ?10 lakh to ?20 lakh, with the introduction of a new loan category, Tarun Plus, aimed at fostering growth in the entrepreneurial sector.

Key Features of the Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana

Loan Limit Increase

  • Loan Limit Raised: The loan limit has been increased from ?10 lakh to ?20 lakh for eligible entrepreneurs.
  • New Loan Category: The newly introduced Tarun Plus category caters to entrepreneurs who have previously availed and successfully repaid loans under the Tarun category.
  • Credit Guarantee: The Credit Guarantee Fund for Micro Units (CGFMU) will cover these enhanced loans, further ensuring the security of micro-enterprises.

Categories of MUDRA Loans

PMMY provides collateral-free loans through financial institutions like Scheduled Commercial Banks, Regional Rural Banks (RRBs), Small Finance Banks (SFBs), Non-Banking Financial Companies (NBFCs), and Micro Finance Institutions (MFIs). These loans are provided for income-generating activities in sectors like manufacturing, trading, services, and allied agriculture activities.

Objectives of PMMY

  1. Financial Inclusion: PMMY targets marginalized and socio-economically neglected sections of society, promoting financial inclusivity.
  2. Support to Small Businesses: By providing affordable loans, the scheme encourages small-scale entrepreneurs, particularly women and minority groups, to establish and expand their businesses.
  3. Fostering Entrepreneurship: PMMY aims to unlock the potential of India’s entrepreneurial spirit, especially in rural and underserved areas.

MUDRA: The Institutional Backbone

Role of Micro Units Development & Refinance Agency Ltd. (MUDRA)

MUDRA is the primary institution set up by the Government of India to manage and implement the Mudra Yojana. It acts as a refinancing agency that provides financial support to small and micro-enterprises by working through financial intermediaries, such as banks and micro-finance institutions.

Funding Sources

  • Scheduled Commercial Banks
  • Regional Rural Banks (RRBs)
  • Small Finance Banks (SFBs)
  • Non-Banking Financial Companies (NBFCs)
  • Micro Finance Institutions (MFIs)

Application Process

Applicants can avail loans through any of the aforementioned financial institutions or apply online via the Udyami Mitra Portal.

Benefits of Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana

  • Collateral-free Loans: No security is required to obtain loans, which reduces the financial burden on borrowers.
  • Easily Accessible: PMMY loans are available across India, making them accessible to entrepreneurs in both rural and urban areas.
  • Quick and Flexible Loans: Loans can be disbursed quickly with flexible repayment terms (up to 7 years).
  • Empowering Women Entrepreneurs: The scheme offers special incentives for women entrepreneurs, helping them to establish and grow their businesses.
  • Support to Rural Areas: Special emphasis on empowering rural enterprises and reducing regional disparities.
  • MUDRA Card: The MUDRA Card is a RuPay debit card that allows borrowers to access funds through an overdraft facility, enhancing liquidity for businesses.
  • No Default Penalty: In case of loan defaults due to unforeseen circumstances, the government will step in to reduce the burden on entrepreneurs.

Categories of Loans Under PMMY

1. Shishu Category: Loans up to ?50,000

  • Targeted at micro-enterprises at the initial stage of their business journey.

2. Kishore Category: Loans between ?50,000 and ?5 lakh

  • Targeted at enterprises looking to expand their operations and upgrade their infrastructure.

3. Tarun Category: Loans between ?5 lakh and ?10 lakh

  • For established businesses that are in need of funds to scale up.

4. Tarun Plus: Loans between ?10 lakh and ?20 lakh

  • A new category designed for entrepreneurs who have repaid loans under the Tarun category and wish to further expand their business.

Achievements of PMMY (2023-24)

  • Total Loans Sanctioned: ?5.4 trillion across 66.8 million loans in FY 2023-24.
  • Loans Disbursed: Significant amounts were disbursed under each category:
    • Shishu: ?1,08,472.51 crore
    • Kishore: ?1,00,370.49 crore
    • Tarun: ?13,454.27 crore
  • Women Borrowers: A large share of loans have gone to women entrepreneurs, ensuring gender inclusivity.
  • Minority Borrowers: The scheme also emphasizes financial empowerment of minority communities.
  • NPA Reduction: The Non-Performing Assets (NPA) in Mudra loans have reduced to 3.4% in FY 2024, compared to higher levels in earlier years.

Digital Tools and Support Systems

MUDRA MITRA App

The MUDRA MITRA mobile app helps users access information about the PMMY scheme, loan application procedures, and other resources. The app is available for download on Google Play Store and Apple App Store.

Online Loan Application

Entrepreneurs can apply for loans online via portals such as PSBloansin59minutes and Udyamimitra, providing greater convenience and accessibility.

Steps to Improve Implementation

  • Handholding Support: Assistance in submitting loan applications is available for applicants.
  • Intensive Awareness Campaigns: The government conducts publicity campaigns to raise awareness about PMMY.
  • Simplified Loan Process: The loan application forms have been simplified to encourage wider participation.
  • Performance Monitoring: Regular monitoring of PMMY implementation to ensure its success.
  • Interest Subvention: A 2% interest subvention is offered for prompt repayment of Shishu loans.

Conclusion

The Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana has been a transformative scheme in fostering entrepreneurship and ensuring financial inclusion for small and micro-businesses across India. With the recent increase in loan limits and the addition of the Tarun Plus category, the scheme continues to empower emerging entrepreneurs and provides a crucial lifeline for business growth and sustainability. By supporting women, minorities, and new entrepreneurs, PMMY has contributed significantly to economic upliftment and inclusive growth in the country.

The right to die with dignity

  • 26 Oct 2024

In News:

  • The Ministry of Health and Family Welfare's draft guidelines (October 2024) aim to implement the Supreme Court's 2018 and 2023 orders on the right to die with dignity.

Legal Context: Supreme Court Rulings and Constitutional Rights

  • Right to Refuse Treatment:
    • Common Law & Article 21: The right to refuse medical treatment is grounded in common law and is now recognized as a fundamental right under Article 21 of the Indian Constitution, following the 2018 Supreme Court judgment in Common Cause v. Union of India.
    • Supreme Court Rulings: The court's rulings in 2018 and 2023 affirmed that individuals have the constitutional right to refuse life-sustaining treatment and to die with dignity.

Withholding and Withdrawing Life-Sustaining Treatment

  • Definition and Meaning:
    • What Is Life-Sustaining Treatment? Life-sustaining treatments, such as ventilators and feeding tubes, artificially replace vital bodily functions to sustain life.
    • Withholding/Withdrawal: This refers to discontinuing these treatments when they no longer improve the patient's condition or merely prolong suffering.
  • When Is It Done?
    • End-of-Life Care: Withholding or withdrawing treatment is considered when further medical intervention is futile and would only artificially prolong the dying process.
    • Focus on Comfort: After withdrawing life-sustaining measures, the focus shifts to palliative care to alleviate pain and suffering.

Understanding Euthanasia and Misconceptions

  • What Is Euthanasia?
    • Definition: Euthanasia refers to the intentional ending of a terminally ill patient’s life by medical professionals to relieve suffering.
    • Passive Euthanasia Misconception: In India, the term "passive euthanasia" is often mistakenly used to describe withholding or withdrawing life-sustaining treatment, but this does not involve the active killing of the patient.
  • Legal Framework: The Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR) clarified in 2018 that "passive euthanasia" is not a legally accepted practice in the country.

The Role of Doctors: Ethical Dilemmas and Shared Decision-Making

  • Is Withdrawing Treatment "Giving Up" on the Patient?
    • Not Abandonment: Withdrawing life-sustaining treatment is not about abandoning the patient but recognizing when further interventions would cause unnecessary suffering.
    • Palliative Care: The patient’s comfort and dignity are prioritized through palliative care, which focuses on pain management and emotional support for both the patient and family.
  • Doctors' Ethical Responsibility:
    • Shared Decision-Making: The process encourages a collaborative approach between doctors and the patient’s family or surrogate decision-makers. This joint decision-making ensures that the wishes of the patient are respected and relieves the doctor from bearing sole responsibility for life-and-death decisions.

Living Wills and Advance Medical Directives

  • What Is a Living Will?
    • Definition: A living will is a legal document where a person outlines their medical preferences in the event they lose decision-making capacity.
    • Eligibility and Process: Individuals aged 18 or older, who are capable of making decisions, can draft a living will, naming at least two trusted surrogate decision-makers.
    • Legal Requirements: The document must be signed in the presence of an executor, two witnesses, and notarized to be legally binding.
  • 2023 Supreme Court Guidelines: The Court simplified the procedure for making living wills to ensure that the right to die with dignity is upheld.

Medical Procedure for Withholding or Withdrawing Treatment

  • Supreme Court Guidelines
    • The Supreme Court laid out a clear procedure for withholding or withdrawing life-sustaining treatment, emphasizing patient autonomy, expert assessments, and family consent.
  • Primary and Secondary Medical Boards:
    • Primary Medical Board: The treating hospital sets up a Primary Medical Board, consisting of the treating doctor and two subject-matter experts, to assess the patient's condition and determine if life-sustaining treatment is appropriate.
    • Secondary Medical Board: A Secondary Medical Board, comprising independent experts, reviews the Primary Board's decision for added oversight.
  • Consent from Family/Surrogate Decision-Makers:
    • The patient’s wishes, as outlined in an advance directive or by a surrogate, must be respected, and their consent is essential for proceeding with treatment withdrawal.
  • Judicial Oversight:
    • Once the decision to withdraw treatment is made, the hospital is required to notify the local judicial magistrate, ensuring transparency and accountability.

Conclusion: Legal and Ethical Clarity in End-of-Life Care

  • Shared Decision-Making: The process ensures that medical teams, families, and surrogate decision-makers collaborate, preventing any medical professional from facing moral or legal dilemmas alone.
  • Protection of Autonomy: These frameworks and guidelines uphold patient autonomy, offering a legal and ethical pathway for terminally ill patients to exercise their right to die with dignity.

16th BRICS Summit

  • 25 Oct 2024

In News:

Recently, the 16th BRICS Summit was held in Kazan, Russia.

Key Highlights:

Overview of the Bilateral Meeting between PM Modi and President Xi

  • Location & Context: The meeting took place on the sidelines of the 16th BRICS Summit in Kazan, Russia (October 23, 2024), marking the first bilateral interaction between PM Modi and President Xi Jinping in nearly five years.
  • Significance: The meeting focused on India-China relations, specifically the border dispute that arose following the 2020 standoff in Ladakh.
  • Agreement on Border Disengagement: Both leaders welcomed an agreement for "complete disengagement" along the Line of Actual Control (LAC), which could pave the way for the resolution of issues that emerged after the Galwan Valley clashes in June 2020.

Key Points of the India-China Border Pact

  • Resolution of Border Issues: The agreement addresses longstanding disputes, including in Depsang Plains and Demchok, where Chinese forces had encroached on Indian territory.
  • Restoration of Patrolling: Both nations agreed to restore patrols to old patrolling points (PPs) along the LAC in these disputed areas.
  • Next Steps: The Special Representatives (SRs) on the India-China boundary will meet soon to oversee the management of peace and tranquility in the border areas and explore mutually acceptable solutions.
  • Diplomatic Mechanisms: Dialogue mechanisms at the foreign ministers and other official levels will be utilized to stabilize and rebuild bilateral relations, contributing to regional and global stability.

Strategic Importance of the Bilateral Meeting

  • Maintaining Peace and Stability: PM Modi emphasized that differences between India and China should be managed carefully to ensure that broader peace and tranquility are maintained.
  • Global Impact: Both leaders affirmed that stable India-China relations would have a positive impact on regional and global peace and contribute to a multipolar world.
  • Long-Term Strategic Perspective: The leaders discussed progressing bilateral relations from a strategic perspective, enhancing communication, and exploring cooperation to address developmental challenges.

Key Takeaways from the 16th BRICS Summit

  • Expansion and New Membership: The summit saw the inclusion of five new membersEgypt, Ethiopia, Iran, the UAE, and Saudi Arabia (pending formalization). This expansion reflects BRICS’s growing influence as a forum representing the Global South.
  • Focus on Multilateralism: Leaders emphasized multilateral cooperation to address challenges such as global security, economic growth, and sustainable development.
  • Kazan Declaration: The declaration touched upon key issues:
    • Geopolitical Conflicts: It called for dialogue and diplomacy to resolve disputes like the Ukraine crisis and the West Asia conflict.
    • Sanctions and Trade: Criticized unilateral sanctions and their disruptive effects on global trade and development goals.
    • Grain Exchange: A proposal was made to establish a BRICS Grain Exchange, aimed at improving agricultural trade among member states.
    • Financial Integration: There was a push for greater financial integration through the use of local currencies for trade, exemplified by India’s UPI system as a successful model.

Importance of BRICS in the Global Context

  • Global Influence: BRICS continues to be a key player in global geopolitics, representing 40% of the world’s population and 26% of global GDP (as of 2023).
  • Strategic Goals: BRICS has consistently called for reform of international institutions like the UNSC, IMF, and World Bank, advocating for a more equitable global governance structure.
  • Economic Collaboration: The New Development Bank (NDB), established in 2015, continues to play a vital role in funding development projects across BRICS countries, though the group’s influence in global finance remains limited compared to the World Bank.

Challenges Facing BRICS Expansion

  • Geopolitical Contradictions: The inclusion of diverse new members (e.g., UAE, Egypt, Iran) could complicate decision-making due to geopolitical rivalries.
  • Decision-Making Hurdles: Achieving consensus among an expanding membership will become more challenging. The expansion may dilute the cohesiveness of the group, as seen in other multilateral forums like the Non-Aligned Movement (NAM) and G77.
  • De-Dollarisation Efforts: While BRICS aims to de-dollarize trade and reduce reliance on the SWIFT system, efforts to develop alternatives like a BRICS payment system and BRICS currency are still in nascent stages.
  • Economic Disparities: Economic gaps among members—China’s GDP is significantly larger than the combined GDP of other members—could also create imbalances in decision-making.

India’s Role and Strategic Positioning in BRICS

  • Geopolitical Balancing: India's participation in BRICS is a strategic maneuver to balance its global position and strengthen ties with emerging economies, particularly in the Global South.
  • Diplomatic Relations with Russia: India continues to prioritize its relationship with Russia, which remains crucial for regional security and energy cooperation.
  • India-China Ties: The agreement on the India-China border represents a significant shift in relations, with potential for a reset in Sino-Indian ties.

Key Themes in the Kazan Declaration

  • Global Governance: Calls for reforming global institutions to give developing nations more representation.
  • Energy and Sustainability: Proposals for strengthening energy cooperation, including the creation of energy corridors and the promotion of sustainable energy practices.
  • Security: Emphasized the need for universal security by addressing the security concerns of all nations and promoting dialogue over confrontation.

Conclusion: Future of India-China and BRICS Relations

  • India-China Relations: The border disengagement pact is a critical step towards stabilizing the India-China relationship, with potential positive impacts on regional security and global geopolitics.
  • BRICS’s Growing Influence: As BRICS expands, it faces internal challenges but remains a potent voice for the Global South, aiming to reshape global governance and financial systems.
  • India’s Strategic Positioning: India is likely to play a pivotal role in BRICS, especially as the group’s focus shifts towards regional stability, economic cooperation, and de-dollarization in the coming years.

Stubble Burning and the Supreme Court's Ruling: Protecting the Right to a Pollution-Free Environment

  • 24 Oct 2024

Introduction

Recently, the Supreme Court of India expressed serious concerns about the ongoing issue of stubble burning in the states of Punjab and Haryana. The Court criticized the selective enforcement of penalties for stubble burning and emphasized that such practices violate citizens' fundamental right under Article 21 of the Indian Constitution, which guarantees the right to live in a pollution-free environment.

Court’s Observations on Stubble Burning

  • The Supreme Court highlighted the failure of state governments in effectively implementing laws against stubble burning.
  • Selective Enforcement: The Punjab and Haryana governments were accused of prosecuting only a few violators while allowing many others to escape punishment by paying a nominal fine.
  • The Court observed that this approach is a blatant violation of the right to live in a pollution-free environment, which is guaranteed under Article 21 of the Constitution.

Right to a Pollution-Free Environment

  • The Court emphasized that every citizen has the fundamental right to live in an environment free from pollution, as mandated by Article 21 of the Constitution.
  • The Court questioned the effectiveness of current environmental regulations, specifically pointing out the lack of proper machinery to collect fines under Section 15 of the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.

Impact of Stubble Burning

Stubble burning, primarily in the northern states of India, exacerbates air pollution, especially in Delhi and surrounding regions. The seasonal spike in air pollution during the months of October and November is largely attributed to farm fires. This not only worsens the air quality but also has severe implications for public health.

Environmental and Health Consequences

  • Air Pollution: The burning of crop residues significantly contributes to the rise in PM2.5 and PM10 levels, leading to hazardous air quality.
  • Soil Health: Burning crop residues depletes essential nutrients from the soil, reducing organic carbon content and harming soil fertility.

Health Risks

  • Exposure to pollutants like particulate matter (PM) can lead to respiratory problems, heart diseases, and other health complications for the population, especially in densely populated areas like Delhi.

Legal and Institutional Shortcomings

  • Inadequate Implementation: Despite laws and penalties being in place, the lack of an effective enforcement mechanism has resulted in the persistence of stubble burning.
  • Toothless Penalties: The Supreme Court criticized the amended Section 15 of the Environment Protection Act, 1986, which replaced criminal penalties with financial fines for environmental violations. However, the lack of rules and appointed adjudicating officers has rendered this provision ineffective.
  • No Serious Enforcement: The failure of the Central government and state authorities to implement effective penalties has led to widespread non-compliance with environmental laws.

Government Actions and Responses

Centre’s Efforts:

  • The Central Government has introduced a Central Sector Scheme to promote agricultural mechanization for in-situ management of crop residue in Punjab, Haryana, Uttar Pradesh, and Delhi.
  • The government provides financial assistance of up to 50% for the purchase of machinery, such as the Happy Seeder, to manage paddy stubble without burning.
  • A total of ?3,062 crore has been released from 2018 to 2023 to tackle stubble burning.

State-Level Actions:

  • The Punjab government has introduced cash incentives for farmers who refrain from burning stubble. Additionally, the state is offering non-fiscal incentives, such as access to panchayat land for storing paddy straw.
  • The Pusa Decomposer, developed by the Indian Agricultural Research Institute (IARI), is a bio-enzyme used to decompose crop residue. It helps in turning the stubble into manure within 20-25 days, enhancing soil health.

Challenges for Farmers:

  • Many farmers still prefer burning stubble due to high costs associated with alternative methods of residue management.
  • The Happy Seeder and other machinery remain expensive and are not affordable for most small-scale farmers, leading them to resort to burning as the most cost-effective option.

Court’s Directive and the Way Forward

  • The Supreme Court directed the Centre and state governments to ensure better enforcement of laws related to air pollution, vehicular emissions, and industrial pollution.
  • The Court also urged the Union Government to consider Punjab’s request for additional funds to tackle the stubble burning issue and to strengthen the enforcement mechanism.
  • Urgency for Action: The Court’s observations suggest that the existing framework needs urgent reforms to protect citizens’ right to a pollution-free environment.

Constitutional Provisions Related to Environmental Protection

India’s Constitution provides several provisions to ensure the protection of the environment:

Article 21: Right to Life and Environment

  • In the landmark case Subhash Kumar v. State of Bihar (1991), the Supreme Court held that the right to life under Article 21 includes the right to a wholesome environment.
  • This view was reiterated in Virender Gaur v. State of Haryana (1994), further strengthening the legal framework for environmental protection.

Directive Principles of State Policy

  • Article 48A: The State is mandated to protect and improve the environment and safeguard forests and wildlife.
  • Article 39(e) and 47: These Articles place a duty on the State to promote public health and ensure environmental protection.

Fundamental Duties

  • Article 51A(g) places a duty on citizens to preserve and protect the environment.

Conclusion

The Supreme Court’s ruling highlights the urgent need for better implementation of environmental laws and the protection of citizens’ fundamental rights under Article 21. While government schemes are in place, a more robust and consistent approach is required to address the issue of stubble burning and air pollution. Immediate reforms in the enforcement mechanisms and incentives for farmers are crucial to achieve a sustainable, pollution-free environment in India.

Biodiversity COP16

  • 23 Oct 2024

In News:

The Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD), while historically overshadowed by climate change discussions, is now gaining increasing attention due to the growing recognition of the global biodiversity crisis. This evolving prominence highlights the need for urgent action to preserve ecosystems and halt biodiversity loss, which is intimately linked with the climate crisis.

Overview of the Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD)

  • Origins and Objectives:
    • The CBD emerged from the 1992 Rio Earth Summit, alongside the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC).
    • Main Goals:
    • Protect global biodiversity.
    • Restore ecosystems.
    • Ensure equitable distribution of the benefits derived from biological resources.
  • COP16 and the Kunming-Montreal Framework:
    • The 16th Conference of Parties (COP16) marks the first meeting following the Kunming-Montreal Global Biodiversity Framework adopted at COP15 in 2022.
    • The framework sets out four key goals and 23 targets to be achieved by 2030, including:
    • Protect 30% of global lands and oceans by 2030.
    • Restore 30% of degraded ecosystems by 2030.

The Growing Convergence Between Climate Change and Biodiversity

  • Interlinkages Between Climate Change and Biodiversity:
    • Mutual Impact:
    • Climate change accelerates biodiversity loss by altering habitats and threatening species.
    • In turn, ecosystem degradation contributes to climate change by releasing greenhouse gases (GHGs) from deforestation and soil degradation.
  • Shared Drivers:
    • Both crises are driven by unsustainable human activities, including over-exploitation of natural resources, deforestation, over-consumption, and pollution.
  • Increasing Synergy:
    • There is a growing realization of the need for integrated solutions that address both climate change and biodiversity loss simultaneously.
  • Momentum for 30 x 30 Targets
  • The 30 x 30 Commitment:
    • The 30 x 30 targets are central to the Kunming-Montreal Framework, which includes:
    • Conservation of 30% of the world's lands and oceans.
    • Restoration of 30% of degraded ecosystems.
    • These targets aim to ensure the preservation of biodiversity-rich areas and the restoration of degraded ecosystems globally by 2030.
  • National Biodiversity Strategies and Action Plans (NBSAPs):
    • Countries are required to develop and submit their NBSAPs (akin to Nationally Determined Contributions (NDCs) for climate change).
    • As of now, only 32 countries have submitted their NBSAPs, with more expected during COP16.
  • High Seas Treaty:
    • A crucial agreement for achieving 30 x 30 targets is the High Seas Treaty (also called Biodiversity Beyond National Jurisdictions (BBNJ)), which focuses on:
    • Establishing protected marine areas in biodiversity-rich regions beyond national jurisdictions.
    • Ensuring regulation of human activities in these areas.

Access and Benefit Sharing: The Case of Genetic Resources

  • Genetic Resources and Their Exploitation:
    • The oceans, along with terrestrial ecosystems, harbor a wide variety of genetic resources that can be exploited for medical, commercial, and scientific purposes.
    • Advances in biotechnology and digital sequencing of genetic material have raised issues about the equitable sharing of benefits from these resources.
  • Nagoya Protocol and Benefit Sharing:
    • The Nagoya Protocol (2010) set out guidelines for the access and fair sharing of benefits derived from genetic resources.
    • At COP16, discussions will center on how genetic sequences (used in products such as medicines, crops, etc.) can be used fairly, ensuring that indigenous communities, who may be the original custodians of these resources, benefit equitably.

Finance Mechanisms for Biodiversity Conservation

  • Financial Targets:
    • One of the key goals of the Kunming-Montreal Framework is to mobilize $200 billion per year by 2030 for biodiversity conservation globally.
    • Developed countries are expected to contribute $20 billion annually to developing nations, increasing to $30 billion by 2030.
  • Phasing Out Harmful Subsidies:
    • Countries are urged to eliminate perverse incentives that harm biodiversity, such as subsidies for:
    • Over-fishing.
    • Deforestation.
    • Fossil fuel consumption.
    • The goal is to repurpose such incentives to support sustainable practices and conservation efforts.
  • New Financial Mechanisms:
    • COP16 discussions will also focus on creating innovative financial mechanisms, such as:
    • A biodiversity fund.
    • Biodiversity credits, similar to carbon credits, which would allow countries or organizations to offset their biodiversity loss by investing in conservation projects elsewhere.

Challenges and the Way Forward

  • Implementation of 30 x 30 Targets:
    • The main challenge lies in translating ambitious goals into actionable plans at the national and local levels. Countries must not only submit action plans but also implement and monitor them effectively.
  • Increased Global Cooperation:
    • Addressing biodiversity loss requires collaboration between countries, industries, and local communities to ensure that efforts are comprehensive and inclusive.
  • Public Awareness and Engagement:
    • It is crucial to raise awareness about the importance of biodiversity conservation and the urgent need for collective action to mitigate the combined threats of biodiversity loss and climate change.

Conclusion: The Need for Urgent Action

The discussions at COP16 signal an important shift in how the world addresses biodiversity and its links to climate change. As countries continue to recognize the interconnectedness of these two crises, the outcome of the CBD negotiations could play a pivotal role in shaping global environmental policy. However, meeting the ambitious goals set forth by the Kunming-Montreal Framework requires strong political will, adequate financing, and effective global cooperation.

What are the stress factors for Indian Railways?

  • 22 Oct 2024

In News:

On October 17, eight coaches of the Agartala-Lokmanya Tilak Express derailed in Assam with no casualties. On October 11, a passenger train rear-ended a stationary goods train near Chennai, also with no casualties. Indian trains have been involved in multiple accidents of late. The Balasore accident on June 2, 2023, had the greatest death toll, more than 275, yet pressure on the Railways to improve safety competes with pressures straining its subsistence.

Railway Accident Trends

  • Decline in Accidents Over Time:
    • From 1,390 accidents per year in the 1960s, railway accidents have reduced to about 80 accidents per year in the last decade.
  • Recent Consequential Accidents:
    • 34 accidents in 2021-2022
    • 48 accidents in 2022-2023
    • 40 accidents in 2023-2024
  • Primary Causes of Accidents:
    • 55.8% due to staff errors (railway personnel).
    • 28.4% due to non-staff errors.
    • 6.2% due to equipment failure.
  • Role of Signalling Failures:
    • Major accidents, such as Balasore and Kavaraipettai, were attributed to signalling system failures.

Key Safety Technologies and Measures

  • Kavach System:
    • Kavach is an automatic train protection system designed to prevent collisions by monitoring train positions and activating alarms or braking.
    • As of February 2024, Kavach was implemented on only 2% (1,465 route km) of the railway network, limiting its effectiveness.
  • Signalling System Overhaul:
    • Outdated and faulty signalling systems contribute significantly to accidents. Both Balasore and Kavaraipettai incidents were linked to failures in signalling infrastructure.

Financial Strain on Indian Railways

  • Operating Ratio (OR):
    • The Operating Ratio (OR) in 2024-2025 is estimated to be ?98.2, indicating that the Railways spends ?98.2 for every ?100 earned.
    • A higher OR reduces available funds for safety improvements and infrastructure upgrades.
  • Budgetary Constraints:
    • The 2023-24 budget showed a 7.2% reduction in capital outlay for track renewal and a 96% decrease in the Depreciation Reserve Fund, which is used to replace aging assets.
  • Revenue Imbalance:
    • Freight services account for 65% of Railways’ revenue but face capacity constraints, with 30% of the network operating at over 100% capacity.
    • Passenger services, however, continue to incur significant losses, with ?68,269 crore loss in 2021-22.

Challenges in Rail Infrastructure

  • Slow Infrastructure Development:
    • The government's Dedicated Freight Corridors (DFCs), intended to alleviate congestion, are severely delayed:
    • The Eastern DFC is the only fully operational corridor.
    • Other corridors, including the Western DFC and additional planned routes, remain incomplete.
  • Track and Equipment Maintenance:
    • Ongoing delays in upgrading and maintaining essential infrastructure (tracks, wagons, signalling) contribute to the rising number of accidents.

Loco Pilot Working Conditions

  • Extended Working Hours:
    • Loco pilots often work 12-hour shifts due to manpower shortages, leading to fatigue and increased risk of human error.
    • Stress and exhaustion are significant contributors to accidents caused by human error, including Signal Passed at Danger (SPAD).

Recommendations for Improving Railway Safety

  • Loco Pilot Vacancies:Immediate recruitment to fill the 18,799 vacant loco pilot positions to prevent overworking and reduce fatigue-related errors.
  • Expand Kavach Deployment:Accelerate the nationwide installation of the Kavach system, particularly on high-risk and high-traffic routes, to enhance safety.
  • Complete Dedicated Freight Corridors (DFCs):Expedite the completion of DFCs to ease congestion and increase freight movement efficiency.
  • Independent Railway Safety Authority:Establish an independent Railway Safety Authority with statutory powers, as recommended by the Kakodkar Committee (2012), to enforce safety standards and monitor implementation.
  • Improve Signal Infrastructure:Invest in advanced and reliable signalling systems to prevent errors stemming from outdated or malfunctioning infrastructure.
  • Regulate Working Hours:Enforce strict work hour limits to reduce fatigue among railway staff and ensure proper rest between shifts.
  • Strengthen Trackside Infrastructure:Install fencing along tracks in high-risk areas to prevent cattle run-overs, a common cause of derailments in rural and semi-urban areas.

Conclusion

  • Indian Railways faces a complex set of challenges, balancing safety requirements with financial constraints. Despite technological advancements like Kavach, its limited deployment and outdated infrastructure continue to present significant risks.
  • A holistic approach to reform is needed, including addressing manpower shortages, upgrading safety technologies, and investing in infrastructure development. This will be essential for reducing accidents, improving safety, and ensuring the long-term sustainability of India’s vast railway network.

Fortified Rice: A Strategic Initiative to Combat Micronutrient Deficiencies in India

  • 21 Oct 2024

Introduction to Rice Fortification

Fortification refers to the process of adding micronutrients, such as vitamins and minerals, to food products that are not naturally present in sufficient amounts. In India, rice fortification has been identified as a cost-effective strategy to address widespread micronutrient deficiencies, particularly iron, folic acid, and vitamin B12. These deficiencies contribute to various health problems such as anemia, stunted growth, and cognitive impairments, particularly among women and children.

Background: India’s Fortified Rice Program

India has one of the highest rates of malnutrition globally, with anemia affecting every second woman and every third child in the country. Rice is a staple food for approximately 65% of India’s population, making it an ideal vehicle for micronutrient fortification. In 2019, the Indian government launched the rice fortification initiative as part of its broader strategy to improve public health and nutrition outcomes.

In July 2024, the Union Cabinet approved the continuation of the fortified rice program under key welfare schemes, including the Pradhan Mantri Garib Kalyan Anna Yojana (PMGKAY). This initiative will run until December 2028, and aims to make fortified rice a common feature of the Public Distribution System (PDS), mid-day meals, and anganwadis, reaching millions of beneficiaries across the country.

Fortification Process and Standards

The fortification of rice involves adding essential micronutrients—iron, folic acid, and vitamin B12—to rice grains. This can be done by either coating the rice with a premix or producing extruded rice kernels that are enriched with nutrients before blending them with regular rice. According to the Food Safety and Standards Authority of India (FSSAI), every kilogram of fortified rice should contain:

  • Iron: 28 mg - 42.5 mg
  • Folic Acid: 75 - 125 micrograms
  • Vitamin B12: 0.75 - 1.25 micrograms

Scientific Safety and Efficacy of Iron Fortified Rice

The safety and effectiveness of iron-fortified rice have been under close scrutiny. Concerns were raised about whether individuals with hemoglobinopathies (such as Thalassemia and Sickle Cell Anemia) might be adversely affected by the added iron. Initially, the packaging of fortified rice carried health advisories for these individuals, but a 2023 scientific review and committee assessment concluded that there were no health risks from iron fortification for such individuals. The iron levels in fortified rice are minimal compared to the levels of iron patients with Thalassemia receive through blood transfusions, and Sickle Cell patients have naturally elevated levels of hepcidin, which limits iron absorption.

Following the review, the advisory was removed in July 2024, aligning with global practices where similar advisories are not required in countries that fortify rice.

Expansion of Fortified Rice Infrastructure

India’s rice fortification program has scaled up rapidly. As of 2024, over 21,000 rice mills have installed blending equipment to produce fortified rice, with a monthly capacity of 223 lakh metric tons (LMT). Additionally, 232 premix suppliers have the capacity to produce 75 LMT annually, significantly surpassing the requirements of the PMGKAY, which mandates the procurement of 5.2 LMT of fortified rice annually.

To ensure quality, NABL-accredited labs conduct rigorous testing on fortified rice products across the country. This infrastructure expansion supports the goal of fortifying rice distributed through welfare schemes and public safety nets.

Global Context: Rice Fortification Worldwide

Fortification of staple foods, including rice, is a globally recognized practice aimed at addressing micronutrient deficiencies in populations with limited access to diverse diets. As of 2024, 18 countries globally are actively involved in rice fortification. The World Health Organization (WHO) has endorsed rice fortification as an effective means to combat iron deficiency anemia, especially in countries like India where rice is a primary dietary staple.

Countries such as the U.S. have been fortifying rice since the late 1950s, and WHO recommends iron fortification where rice constitutes a major part of the diet.

Benefits of Iron Fortification of Rice

  • Improved Cognitive Development: Iron is crucial for brain development and cognitive function. Adequate iron intake during early childhood is linked to better cognitive performance, which can improve educational outcomes.
  • Enhanced Maternal and Infant Health: Iron deficiency during pregnancy is associated with risks such as maternal anemia and poor fetal development. Fortified rice helps reduce these risks by improving iron intake among pregnant women.
  • Reduction in Prevalence of Anemia: Regular consumption of fortified rice has been shown to improve hemoglobin levels in populations suffering from iron deficiency anemia. This has been particularly evident in pilot districts in India, where iron fortification has led to improved health outcomes among both adults and children.

Potential Risks and Challenges

  • Bioavailability of Iron: Iron bioavailability refers to the body's ability to absorb and utilize the iron from fortified foods. While iron from rice is absorbed to a lesser extent compared to meat, its fortification still contributes significantly to overall iron intake, especially in populations that consume rice regularly.
  • Overload of Iron: Excessive iron intake can lead to iron toxicity, causing oxidative stress, liver damage, and increased risk of infections. Special care must be taken to ensure that individuals with conditions like hemochromatosis or those receiving other forms of iron supplementation do not experience iron overload.
  • Technical and Social Barriers: While India has made substantial progress in infrastructure for rice fortification, challenges remain in ensuring the quality, stability, and safety of fortified rice. Moreover, ensuring affordability, accessibility, and acceptance of fortified rice among diverse population groups remains a critical concern.

Future Directions for Rice Fortification

  • Nanotechnology for Enhanced Iron Absorption: To improve the bioavailability of iron, exploring the use of nanotechnology could help encapsulate iron particles, enhancing their absorption and effectiveness in the body.
  • Biofortification Integration: Combining iron fortification with biofortification—the process of breeding rice varieties with naturally higher iron content—could provide a sustainable solution for long-term micronutrient deficiency.
  • Public-Private Partnerships: To scale up rice fortification, there is a need for collaborations between the government, private sector, and non-governmental organizations (NGOs). These partnerships can help improve distribution networks, technology development, and financial sustainability.
  • Continuous Monitoring and Evaluation: Rigorous evaluation studies, such as those being conducted by the Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR) and NITI Aayog, will help assess the effectiveness of the rice fortification program and ensure its continuous improvement.

Conclusion: A Path to Nutritional Security

The fortification of rice in India represents a powerful tool to address the growing problem of micronutrient deficiencies, particularly iron deficiency anemia, which affects millions of people, especially women and children. By ensuring that fortified rice is integrated into government welfare schemes, India can take a significant step toward improving public health and achieving its nutritional goals.

While challenges related to bioavailability, iron overload, and implementation remain, ongoing research, technological innovation, and collaborative efforts can help mitigate these risks. As India continues to expand its rice fortification program, it offers a model for other countries facing similar nutritional challenges, reinforcing the role of fortified foods in achieving global sustainable development goals (SDGs) related to health and nutrition.

Mission Mausam

  • 20 Oct 2024

Introduction: The Need for Advanced Weather Forecasting

India is increasingly facing extreme weather events such as flooding and droughts, which have become more frequent and intense in recent years. According to a 2021 study by the Council on Energy, Environment, and Water (CEEW), 40% of districts in India face alternating climatic hazards, where flood-prone areas also experience droughts, and vice versa. Moreover, a 64% increase in heavy rainfall days during the monsoon season has been recorded over the last decade.

Despite these challenges, India’s weather forecasting systems remain underdeveloped, particularly in flood-prone regions. While cyclone-prone areas benefit from comprehensive early warning systems, flood-prone regions are largely under-covered. To address these gaps and to prepare for more frequent climate risks, the Mission Mausam, launched in September 2024, aims to transform India's weather forecasting capabilities.

Key Objectives of Mission Mausam

Mission Mausam focuses on three main pillars:

  • Increasing Weather Observation Networks
  • Improving Weather Forecasting Models
  • Investigating Weather Modification Techniques

This initiative is led by three institutions under the Ministry of Earth Sciences:

  • India Meteorological Department (IMD)
  • National Centre for Medium Range Weather Forecasting (NCMRWF)
  • Indian Institute of Tropical Meteorology (IITM)

The mission is backed by an investment of ?2,000 crore and aims to address the growing complexity of India’s climate challenges.

1. Gaps in India's Current Weather Observation Network

Despite significant advances, India’s existing weather observation system has several gaps, particularly in terms of coverage and data accessibility.

Weather Radar Coverage

India currently operates 39 Doppler Weather Radars (DWRs), but their distribution is not optimal. Key regions that are highly vulnerable to extreme weather events are under-monitored:

  • Western Coast: Only 5 radars monitor the entire western coastline, where cyclones are becoming more frequent and intense.
  • Urban Centres: Cities like Ahmedabad, Bengaluru, and Jodhpur — which have experienced repeated flooding — lack adequate radar coverage.

Action Required:

  • Expand Radar Coverage: Prioritise the installation of weather radars along the western coast and in urban centres with high climate risks.
  • Improve Observation Platforms: In addition to radars, install other weather observation platforms such as wind profilers and radiometers to provide more comprehensive data.

Limited Data Access

At present, the data from India’s weather observation network is not fully accessible to researchers and innovators. This limits the ability to develop localised early warning systems and innovative solutions for climate resilience.

Action Required:

  • Open Data Access: Make weather data available to researchers, academic institutions, and private sector innovators. This will encourage the development of analytical tools and localized solutions for extreme weather events.
  • Global Best Practices: Following the examples of countries like the United States, United Kingdom, and France, which openly share weather data, India can foster innovation and improve its forecasting capabilities.

2. Strengthening Weather Forecasting Models

Improved weather forecasting models are essential for accurately predicting extreme weather events, including heavy rainfall, floods, and cyclones.

Machine Learning and Atmospheric Physics

Mission Mausam will enhance weather forecasting models through:

  • Integration of Machine Learning: By incorporating machine learning techniques, India can improve prediction accuracy and lead times.
  • Better Understanding of Atmospheric Physics: Improved scientific understanding of the atmosphere can lead to more accurate and reliable weather forecasts.

Action Required:

  • Enhance Forecasting Capabilities: Focus on improving long-term and short-term weather predictions, especially for regions prone to extreme weather.
  • Incorporate Technology: Leverage advanced technologies, including AI and machine learning, to predict weather patterns more accurately.

3. Improving Communication and Dissemination of Weather Information

Effective communication of weather warnings is essential for timely action by governments, businesses, and citizens.

Enhancing Warning Systems

Currently, the India Meteorological Department (IMD) disseminates weather warnings through various channels, including mobile applications and web portals. However, the effectiveness of these warnings can be improved.

Action Required:

  • User-Friendly Warnings: Improve the interface of weather apps and websites, providing users with guidance on how to interpret warnings and take necessary precautions.
  • Capacity Building: Create informational videos, media campaigns, and easy-to-understand guides to help citizens act upon warnings effectively.

Wider Use of Localised Decision Tools

Localized decision tools can be used to help communities in specific regions take proactive steps before, during, and after extreme weather events.

Action Required:

  • Localized Early Warning Systems: Develop region-specific warning tools that integrate local knowledge with scientific forecasts, making them more effective for local populations.

4. Integrating Mission Mausam with Sectoral Planning

The success of Mission Mausam will depend on its integration with various sectoral policies, particularly in areas such as agriculture, water management, and energy.

Use Cases for Climate-Resilient Sectors

Data from the enhanced weather observation system can be used to:

  • Support Agriculture: Weather forecasts can inform crop planning and irrigation management, helping farmers mitigate the impacts of extreme weather events.
  • Water Resource Management: Improved forecasting can assist in flood management, water storage, and distribution planning.
  • Energy Sector Planning: Accurate weather predictions can help the energy sector plan for weather-related disruptions, such as extreme temperatures or storms that affect power grids.

Action Required:

  • Sectoral Integration: Ensure that the weather data generated by Mission Mausam is shared with relevant ministries (e.g., Agriculture, Water Resources, Energy) to develop climate-resilient policies and strategies.

Conclusion: Moving Towards a Climate-Smart India

Mission Mausam is a critical initiative to make India more weather-ready and climate-smart. By improving weather observation networks, enhancing forecasting models, and promoting data-sharing, India can mitigate the impacts of extreme weather events that have become increasingly unpredictable and severe. The success of Mission Mausam will depend on:

  • Investing in technology
  • Expanding weather coverage
  • Engaging local communities and sectors

As India continues to face the challenges posed by climate change, Mission Mausam holds the potential to revolutionize how the country prepares for and responds to extreme weather events, ultimately reducing the toll on lives and livelihoods.

Section 6A of the Citizenship Act, 1955

  • 19 Oct 2024

In News:

A Constitution Bench of the Supreme Court, in a majority judgment of 4:1 ratio, upheld the constitutionality of Section 6A of the Citizenship Act, 1955, which permits immigrants from Bangladesh residing in Assam to secure Indian citizenship, as a valid piece of legislation aligned to the Preambular value of fraternity.

Background:

  • Section 6A of the Citizenship Act, 1955, deals with the citizenship status of immigrants from Bangladesh who entered Assam before March 25, 1971.
  • Introduced as part of the 1985 Assam Accord, it provides a special provision for Assam due to the unique demographic challenges posed by large-scale migration from Bangladesh.

Key Aspects of the Supreme Court Ruling

Majority Opinion

  • Constitutional Validity: The Court reaffirmed that Section 6A does not violate Articles 6 and 7 of the Constitution. These Articles set the cut-off for granting citizenship to migrants from East and West Pakistan. Section 6A, operating from a later date, is distinct and does not interfere with these earlier constitutional provisions.
  • Justification of Cut-off Date: The March 25, 1971 cut-off date is upheld as reasonable. This date coincides with Operation Searchlight, launched by the Pakistani Army to suppress the Bengali nationalist movement. Migrants arriving before this date are considered part of India's post-partition demographic landscape.
  • Fraternity and Equal Treatment: The Court emphasized that the principle of fraternity, as enshrined in the Preamble, cannot be selectively applied. Immigrants who arrived before March 25, 1971, are entitled to citizenship, while those arriving after are considered illegal immigrants. The ruling aims to balance the humanitarian aspect of migration with the state's right to protect its cultural and economic integrity.
  • Historical Context: The judgment also invoked the Assam Accord, which was designed to address the issue of large-scale migration from Bangladesh, providing a political solution to Assam’s concerns. The Court held that the special provisions for Assam under Section 6A do not violate Article 14 (equality before the law) due to the distinct situation in Assam compared to the rest of India.

Section 6A of the Citizenship Act: Provisions and Purpose

  • Section 6A was introduced under the 1985 Citizenship (Amendment) Act following the Assam Accord. It allows migrants who entered Assam before January 1, 1966, to automatically gain citizenship. For those entering between January 1, 1966, and March 25, 1971, citizenship can be granted after fulfilling specific conditions.
  • Exclusion of Post-1971 Migrants: Migrants arriving in Assam after March 25, 1971, are not eligible for Indian citizenship under Section 6A and are considered illegal immigrants.
  • Assam Accord Context: The Assam Accord sought to resolve the issue of illegal immigration from Bangladesh and address the political, cultural, and economic concerns of the indigenous Assamese population. It set the cut-off date of March 25, 1971, as a landmark for distinguishing between legal and illegal migrants.

Implications of the Supreme Court Judgment

Impact on Immigrant Recognition

  • Continued Citizenship: By upholding Section 6A, the Court grants continued citizenship rights to immigrants from Bangladesh who entered Assam before the cut-off date of March 25, 1971. This decision affirms India's commitment to protect those displaced by the Bangladesh Liberation War.

Assamese Identity Preservation

  • Cultural Protection: The majority opinion dismissed concerns that the presence of immigrants would infringe upon the cultural and linguistic rights of the Assamese people. The Court emphasized that existing constitutional safeguards (e.g., Article 29(1)) are sufficient to preserve the unique identity of the Assamese community, even in the face of demographic changes.

Demographic and Economic Impact

  • Tensions on Demographic Shift: Critics argue that the continued influx of migrants, though legally recognized, may strain Assam’s demographic balance, potentially threatening its cultural identity and economic resources. This could fuel local demands for stricter immigration controls and increase political mobilization around cultural preservation.
  • Resource Allocation Challenges: The judgment implies that immigrants who are granted citizenship will have access to public resources, adding pressure on Assam's limited economic resources. This may necessitate the implementation of more robust policies for equitable resource distribution.

Pressure on Immigration Laws and Enforcement

  • Immigration Law Enforcement: The judgment stresses the need for more effective enforcement of immigration laws, particularly regarding the detection and deportation of illegal immigrants who entered Assam post-1971. The inefficiencies in the current mechanisms for detecting such immigrants were criticized, and the Court called for judicial oversight to improve the enforcement process.

Regional and International Implications

  • Bangladesh Relations: The decision, by excluding post-1971 immigrants from citizenship, may strain India-Bangladesh relations, as it could be perceived as India pushing responsibility for these migrants onto Bangladesh. This has the potential to complicate regional cooperation on issues like border management, migration control, and security.

Conclusion: Balancing Humanitarian and Political Interests

The Supreme Court’s decision to uphold Section 6A of the Citizenship Act, 1955, reflects a delicate balance between humanitarian concerns—acknowledging the plight of displaced persons—and the political necessity of protecting Assam’s cultural and demographic integrity. While the judgment provides clarity on the legal status of immigrants in Assam, it also highlights the need for efficient immigration enforcement, greater judicial oversight, and equitable resource management to address the ongoing challenges posed by migration in the region.

India - Canada Relations

  • 18 Oct 2024

In News:

India-Canada relations have recently faced serious setbacks following allegations of India's involvement in the killing of Khalistani leader Hardeep Singh Nijjar in Canada. These claims have led to escalating diplomatic tensions and mutual expulsions of diplomats between the two countries.

Recent Developments in India-Canada Relations

  • Assassination of Hardeep Singh Nijjar:
    • Nijjar, a prominent Khalistani leader, was assassinated in British Columbia, Canada.
    • The Canadian Prime Minister accused Indian officials of involvement, which India has denied as "absurd."
  • Diplomatic Fallout:
    • Both nations expelled each other's diplomats, reducing diplomatic staff and freezing consular services, exacerbating the tensions.
  • Support from the Five Eyes Alliance:
    • Canada enlisted the Five Eyes intelligence alliance to gain international backing amid the escalating diplomatic crisis with India.

What is the Five Eyes Alliance?

  • About:
    • The Five Eyes is a multilateral intelligence alliance composed of Australia, Canada, New Zealand, the United Kingdom, and the United States.
    • These countries cooperate on signals intelligence under the UK-USA Agreement.
  • Expansion:
    • The alliance later grew into the Nine Eyes and Fourteen Eyes alliances, incorporating additional countries like the Netherlands, Denmark, France, Norway, and others.

Key Areas of India-Canada Relations

  • Political Relations:
    • Diplomatic ties began in 1947, with both countries sharing democratic values, human rights, and pluralism.
    • Collaborative efforts in global forums like the UN, G20, and Commonwealth focus on climate change, security, and sustainable development.
  • Economic Cooperation:
    • Bilateral trade in 2023 was worth USD 9.36 billion.
    • Canada is the 18th largest investor in India with investments totaling USD 3.3 billion (2000-2023).
    • Ongoing Comprehensive Economic Partnership Agreement (CEPA) negotiations aim to boost trade in goods, services, and investments.
  • Diaspora Connections:
    • Over 1.8 million people of Indian origin in Canada, contributing significantly to cultural and economic exchanges.
    • Canada is home to one of the largest Indian diaspora populations globally.
  • Education and Space Innovation:
    • IC-IMPACTS promotes joint research in healthcare, agricultural biotechnology, and waste management.
    • Space collaboration includes partnerships between ISRO and the Canadian Space Agency.
    • Indian students represent nearly 40% of Canada's international student population.
  • Nuclear Cooperation:
    • A 2010 nuclear agreement allows the supply of uranium to India and establishes a Joint Committee for oversight.
  • Strategic Importance:
    • India’s role is key in Canada’s Indo-Pacific strategy, including collaboration on maritime security, counter-terrorism, and regional stability.

Challenges in India-Canada Relations

  1. Diplomatic Immunity Issues:
    • Canada invoked the Vienna Conventions to protect its diplomatic staff amid tensions, with both sides highlighting the importance of maintaining diplomatic norms.
  2. Khalistan Issue:
    • India views Canada’s tolerance of Khalistani separatist groups as a threat to its territorial integrity.
    • Canada’s investigation into India’s alleged role in Nijjar’s assassination has exacerbated diplomatic mistrust.
  3. Economic and Trade Barriers:
    • The political rift has stalled negotiations for the CEPA and slowed bilateral trade.
    • Canadian investments in India face increased uncertainty due to deteriorating relations.
  4. Visa and Immigration Delays:
    • Reduced Canadian diplomatic staff in India has caused significant delays in visa processing, especially for students.
  5. Geopolitical Implications:
    • Tensions between India and Canada risk damaging India’s reputation on the global stage, particularly if allegations of intelligence overreach are substantiated.
    • Canada’s membership in the G7 and ties with the Five Eyes make the situation complex, affecting relations with other strategic partners of India, including the US, UK, Australia, and Japan.

The Vienna Convention on Diplomatic Immunity

  • Vienna Convention on Diplomatic Relations (1961): Establishes the framework for the treatment and protection of diplomatic missions and their personnel.
    • Diplomatic Immunity: Diplomats are protected from arrest and detention by the host country.
    • Inviolability of Diplomatic Premises: Diplomatic missions cannot be entered without permission.
    • Protection of Consular Officers: Ensures consular officers can assist their nationals without interference.

Way Forward for India-Canada Relations

  1. Address the Khalistan Issue: Engage in active dialogue to resolve concerns about the Indian diaspora and the Khalistan movement, respecting each other’s sovereignty.
  2. Strengthen Economic Ties:
    • Revitalize CEPA negotiations, with a focus on sectors like technology, renewable energy, and infrastructure.
    • Enhance trade and investment frameworks for mutually beneficial opportunities.
  3. Balance Geopolitical Interests:
    • Both nations should navigate relationships with major powers like the US, China, and Russia with care.
    • A cautious approach is necessary to maintain strategic partnerships without further conflict.
  4. Leverage Multilateral Platforms: Utilize forums like the G7 and Five Eyes to address global challenges and promote shared values, while working to stabilize bilateral ties.

Conclusion

India-Canada relations are at a critical juncture due to recent tensions. While historical ties and shared interests provide a strong foundation, the diplomatic fallout requires careful management. Both nations must seek ways to restore dialogue, address sensitive issues like the Khalistan movement, and focus on economic cooperation to stabilize and strengthen the relationship moving forward.

 

Global Hunger Index 2024

  • 17 Oct 2024

Why in the news?

India is ranked 105th among 127 countries in the Global Hunger Index (GHI) 2024, indicating a ‘serious’ level of hunger, along with Afghanistan and Pakistan, which also face hunger challenges.

According to the Global Hunger Index released on 10th October 2024, the hunger levels in 42 countries are at alarming levels, making the goal of Zero Hunger by 2030 unattainable. At this pace of progress, the world will not even attain a low hunger level until 2160. The world’s GHI score is 18.3, which is considered moderate in the severity of hunger scale.

Key Takeaways:

1. The GHI is published by Concern Worldwide and Welthungerhilfe annually to measure and track hunger at global, regional, and national levels. The purpose of the report is to create awareness and understanding of the struggle against hunger and call attention to those areas of the world where hunger levels are highest and there is a need for additional efforts.

2. GHI is calculated based on a formula that combines four indicators that together capture the multidimensional nature of hunger:

  • Undernourishment: the share of the population whose caloric intake is insufficient;
  • Child stunting: the share of children under the age of five who have low height for their age, reflecting chronic undernutrition;
  • Child wasting: the share of children under the age of five who have low weight for their height, reflecting acute undernutrition; and
  • Child mortality: the share of children who die before their fifth birthday, reflecting in part the fatal mix of inadequate nutrition and unhealthy environments.

 

3. The 2024 GHI reflects that multiple factors are posing challenges in attaining Zero Hunger. The challenges include large-scale armed conflicts, climate change indicators that are worsening faster than expected, high food prices, market disruptions, economic downturns, and debt crises in many low- and middle-income countries.

4. The report highlights the link between Gender inequality, climate change, and hunger. Gender is intertwined with climate and food security challenges in ways that respective policies and interventions often ignore. Women and girls are typically hardest hit by food insecurity and malnutrition. They also suffer disproportionately from the effects of weather extremes and climate emergencies.

5. Six countries – Somalia, Yemen, Chad, Madagascar, Burundi, and South Sudan- have levels of hunger considered alarming. This is the result of widespread human misery, undernourishment, and malnutrition.

What is Hunger?

The Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO) defines hunger as food deprivation, or undernourishment, as the habitual consumption of too few calories to provide the minimum dietary energy an individual requires to live a healthy and productive life, given that person’s sex, age, stature, and physical activity level.

6. India ranked 105th out of 125 countries in the Global Hunger Index 2024, with a score of 27.3, indicating a serious level of hunger.  Child wasting is particularly high in India. Child undernutrition in India goes hand in hand with the poor nutritional status of mothers, suggesting an intergenerational pattern of undernutrition and underscoring the need for attention to maternal health nutrition and infant feeding.

 

 

7. India’s GHI score of 27.3 is a cause for concern, especially when compared to its South Asian neighbours like Bangladesh, Nepal, and Sri Lanka, which fall into the “moderate” category

8. The performance of India on various parameters of GHI:

  • 13.7 per cent of India’s population suffers from undernourishment,
  • 35.5 per cent of children under the age of five are stunted
  • 18.7 per cent experience child wasting and
  • 2.9 per cent of children do not reach their fifth birthday.

9. The policy recommendations made in the document include strengthening accountability to international law and the enforceability of the right to adequate food, promoting gender-transformative approaches to food systems and climate policies and programs, and making investments that integrate and promote gender, climate, and food justice.

National Family Health Survey

1. The National Family Health Survey (NFHS) in India provides estimates of underweight, (low weight for age), stunting (low height for age), and wasting (low weight for height). These conditions affect preschool children (those less than 6 years of age) disproportionately and compromise a child’s physical and mental development while also increasing the vulnerability to infections.

2. According to the NFHS 5, the percentage of stunted, wasted, and underweight children is 36 per cent19 per cent and 32 per cent respectively.

(Thought Process: These data can be incorporated in your Mains Answer Writing to enrich your content.)

3. NFHS 5 highlighted that among mothers with a child between ages 6-23 months, 18 per cent reported that their child did not eat any food whatsoever — referred to as “zero-food” — in the 24 hours preceding the survey. The zero-food prevalence was 30 per cent for infants aged 6-11 months, remains worryingly high at 13 per cent among the 12-17 months old, and persists even among 18-23 months-old children at 8 per cent.

Hidden Hunger

In India, we suffer largely from “hidden hunger” which does not always manifest itself in an emaciated appearance. It is a hunger caused by the constant or recurrent lack of food of sufficient quality and quantity. It is the deprivation of vitamins and minerals, essential micronutrients that are necessary for proper growth, physical fitness, and mental development.

4. Going without food for an entire day at this critical period of a child’s development raises serious concerns related to severe food insecurity. According to the World Health Organisation, at six months of age, 33 per cent of the daily calorie intake is expected to come from food. This proportion increases to 61 per cent at 12 months of age. The recommended calorie percentages mentioned here are the minimum amount that should come from food.

5. India has a challenging task in attaining the Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) 2 of “zero hunger”. Mission Poshan 2.0, the overarching flagship programme dedicated to maternal and child nutrition, has evolved in the right direction by targeting SDG 2 “zero hunger” and focusing on food-based initiatives, including its flagship supplementary nutrition programme service as mandated by the 2013 National Food Security Act.

Climate Change and Methane Emissions in the Amazon Rainforest

  • 16 Oct 2024

Overview

Recent research from the University of São Paulo reveals that climate change is poised to significantly disrupt the methane cycle in the Amazon rainforest, with potential global repercussions. Rising temperatures and increased flooding are impacting microbial activity in both floodplain and upland forest soils, leading to contrasting changes in methane dynamics.

Key Findings

  • Methane Uptake Reduction: The study indicates that methane absorption in upland forest soils could decrease by as much as 70% in warmer, drier conditions. This reduction diminishes the forest's role as a methane sink.
  • Floodplain Contributions: Floodplains, which cover over 800,000 square kilometers during the rainy season, contribute up to 29% of global wetland methane emissions. Here, methane-producing microbes thrive due to the breakdown of organic matter.

Understanding the Methane Cycle

  • Definition: The methane cycle encompasses the processes that control the production, consumption, and release of methane (CH4) in the environment.
  • Microbial Roles:
    • Methanogens produce methane, primarily in waterlogged conditions.
    • Methanotrophs consume methane, living in drier, oxygen-rich soils. These interactions are critical in regulating methane levels in the atmosphere.
  • Sources and Sinks: While wetlands and other environments release methane, hydroxyl radicals (OH) in the troposphere act as a natural sink, helping to oxidize methane into carbon dioxide.

Climate Change Impacts on the Methane Cycle

  • Imbalance of Sources and Sinks: As global temperatures rise, the release of methane from soils may increase, exacerbating climate change effects.
  • Melting Clathrates: Methane clathrates, trapped in cold sediments, are at risk as warming causes them to release methane, further contributing to greenhouse gas concentrations.

Global Consequences of Methane Disruption

  • Climate Change Amplifier: Methane is the second most significant greenhouse gas, with a global warming potential 28 times greater than carbon dioxide over a century.
  • Air Quality and Health: Increased methane emissions can lead to higher levels of tropospheric ozone, resulting in respiratory health issues and reduced air quality.
  • Biodiversity Threats: The changes in methane dynamics can destabilize ecosystems, leading to shifts in species distributions and loss of biodiversity.

Balancing the Methane Cycle

To mitigate the impacts of methane emissions, various strategies can be employed:

  1. Enhanced Landfill Design: Utilizing gas collection systems to capture methane for energy rather than allowing it to escape.
  2. Livestock Management: Introducing feed additives to reduce methane emissions from ruminants.
  3. Sustainable Agricultural Practices: Implementing techniques like alternative wetting and drying in rice cultivation to lower methane output.
  4. Soil Health Improvements: Promoting organic fertilization and crop rotation to foster aerobic conditions in soils.

Research Insights

The study involved subjecting soil samples from floodplains and upland forests to elevated temperatures and varying humidity levels. Results indicated:

  • Stable methane emissions in floodplains alongside an increase in methane-producing microbes.
  • A significant decline in methane uptake in upland soils due to temperature sensitivity, with higher temperatures reducing microbial diversity.

Conclusion

The Amazon rainforest plays a crucial role in regulating global methane levels, and its response to climate change is vital for understanding future greenhouse gas emissions. As these ecosystems face increased pressure from rising temperatures and changing hydrological conditions, it becomes imperative to enhance our understanding and management of methane dynamics to mitigate broader climate impacts.

Asset Monetisation

  • 15 Oct 2024

In News

The NITI Aayog has recently increased the asset monetisation target for the fiscal year 2024-25 (FY25) by ?23,000 crore, bringing the total to ?1.9 trillion. This adjustment aligns with the broader target of ?6 trillion set under the National Monetisation Pipeline (NMP) for the period from FY 2022 to FY 2025.

Understanding Asset Monetisation

Definition

Asset monetisation refers to the process of converting public assets into revenue-generating assets without selling them outright. This includes using assets to generate profit or cash, thereby unlocking their economic value.

Importance

  • Revenue Generation: Monetisation creates new revenue streams for governments by leveraging underutilised public assets.
  • Focus on Public Assets: The emphasis is on monetising existing infrastructure such as roads, airports, railways, and pipelines, primarily targeting brownfield assets—those that can be improved or repurposed.

Monetisation vs. Privatisation

While privatisation involves complete ownership transfer to the private sector, asset monetisation allows public authorities to retain ownership while benefiting from private sector efficiencies through structured partnerships.

The National Monetisation Pipeline (NMP)

Overview

The NMP is an initiative aimed at promoting sustainable infrastructure financing through the monetisation of operational public assets. It envisions a monetisation potential of ?6 lakh crore, focusing on leasing core assets from the Central government and public sector entities.

Preparation and Coverage

  • Collaborative Approach: Developed by NITI Aayog in consultation with infrastructure ministries such as Roads, Railways, and Power.
  • Sector Coverage: Encompasses various sectors including roads (27% of the total value), railways (25%), power (15%), and telecom (6%).

Framework for Monetisation

  1. Retention of Rights: The government retains ownership, with assets reverting to public authorities post-transaction.
  2. Stable Revenue Streams: Focus on de-risked brownfield assets that provide consistent revenue.
  3. Defined Partnerships: Establishment of contractual frameworks with strict performance indicators.

Alignment with National Infrastructure Pipeline (NIP)

The NMP is integrated with the NIP, which seeks to attract investments in both greenfield and brownfield projects across all sectors.

Current Status of the NMP

Revenue Generation

As of FY24, the NMP has generated ?3.9 trillion, slightly below the original target of ?4.3 trillion for the initial three years.

Successful Monetisation Examples

  • The Ministry of Coal exceeded its target, raising ?1.54 trillion against a goal of ?80,000 crore.
  • Mining assets have also been monetised significantly, surpassing their revised targets.

Sectors Lagging

  • Railways: Only ?20,417 crore monetised, achieving just 30% of the target.
  • Civil Aviation: A mere 14% of its targeted monetisation has been achieved.

Challenges Facing the NMP

  • Low Monetisation Potential: The NMP's ?6 lakh crore target represents only a small fraction (5-6%) of the total capital expenditure under the NIP.
  • Disinvestment Issues: Many sectors chosen for monetisation have consistently fallen short of their disinvestment targets, raising doubts about achieving future goals.
  • Long-Term Rights Concerns: Granting private entities long-term operational rights may be perceived as a form of privatisation, potentially leading to public distrust.
  • Budget Clarity: There is a lack of transparency regarding how monetisation proceeds will be allocated within the government budget.
  • Potential for Monopolies: Consolidation of asset ownership could lead to monopolistic practices, especially in critical infrastructure sectors.
  • Taxpayer Concerns: Taxpayers are wary of the potential for double charges on public assets they initially funded.

Way Forward

  • Accelerating Monetisation: The government should expedite contract-based monetisation through Public-Private Partnerships (PPP), particularly in sectors like railways and airports.
  • Land Monetisation Initiatives: Engaging real estate companies to develop multi-storey buildings can generate additional revenue while enhancing housing options.
  • Establishing Budget Guidelines: Clear budgeting guidelines should be developed to clarify the allocation of funds generated from monetisation, ensuring they are used for infrastructure development rather than operational expenses.

Navigating the Middle-Income Trap: Challenges and Solutions for India

  • 14 Oct 2024

Introduction

The World Development Report 2024 addresses the phenomenon of the middle-income trap, where countries struggle to maintain growth as they transition from low to middle-income status. This report advocates for a "3i" approach—Investment, global Technology infusion, and domestic Innovation—to overcome this challenge. India faces specific hurdles, including stagnant exports, rising protectionism, and premature deindustrialization.

Understanding the Middle-Income Trap

Definition and Characteristics

  • A middle-income trap occurs when a country, after achieving middle-income status, fails to progress to high-income status.
  • This phenomenon typically arises when a country's per capita income reaches about 11% of US levels, leading to:
    • High wage levels that diminish competitiveness against low-wage economies.
    • Insufficient technological advancement to compete with high-income nations.

Economic Implications

  • Traditional growth drivers become ineffective.
  • Rising wages in labor-intensive sectors decrease competitiveness, while innovation and productivity remain stagnant.

Historical Context: India’s Income Evolution

1. Post-Independence Era (1950s-1970s)

  • Per Capita Income: ?265 in 1950-51.
  • Growth Rate: 3.5%, dominated by agriculture.
  • Economic Structure: Heavy state intervention and public sector focus.

2. Liberalization Phase (1980s-1990s)

  • Per Capita Income Growth: Accelerated to 5.6%.
  • Major Shift: 1991 liberalization led to a rise in the services sector and an expanding middle class.

3. High Growth Phase (2000-2010)

  • GDP Growth: 8-9% annually.
  • Per Capita Income: Increased from ?16,173 in 2000-01 to ?24,295 in 2007-08.
  • Sectoral Dominance: Surge in software and services exports.

4. Mixed Growth Phase (2010-2020)

  • Growth Volatility: Average of 6-7%.
  • Wealth Inequality: Top 1% owned 40.5% of national wealth by 2021.

5. Post-Covid Recovery (2020-Present)

  • GDP: Reached $3.75 trillion.
  • Current Issues: Unemployment at 8.1%, while digital payment systems expanded.

Challenges in Overcoming the Middle-Income Trap

1. Premature Deindustrialization

  • The manufacturing sector's GDP share has stagnated at 15-17%, far below the target of 25%.
  • Limits potential productivity gains and innovation.

2. Limitations of Services-Led Growth

  • Over-reliance on the services sector hampers mass employment and inclusive growth.

3. Declining Total Factor Productivity (TFP)

  • TFP growth has been declining, indicating a shift toward input-driven growth rather than efficiency-driven growth.

4. Informal Sector Dominance

  • The informal economy comprises about 90% of the workforce, leading to low productivity and limited access to technology.

5. Risk of a Demographic Burden

  • Youth unemployment is rising, with only 2.3% of the workforce receiving formal skill training.

6. Global Economic Headwinds

  • Slowing global growth affects India’s export-led strategies, with a recent contraction in merchandise exports.

7. Infrastructure and Logistics Bottlenecks

  • India ranks 38th in the World Bank’s Logistics Performance Index, highlighting significant infrastructure gaps.

Strategic Measures for India

1. Enhance Manufacturing Competitiveness

  • Targeted Industrial Policies: Refine the Production-Linked Incentive scheme and extend it to emerging sectors like green hydrogen.

2. Accelerate Digital Infrastructure and Skills Development

  • Leverage India's digital platforms to create a skills ecosystem and modernize vocational training.

3. Boost R&D Expenditure

  • Increase public R&D spending to 2% of GDP by 2030, focusing on key sectors like renewable energy.

4. Foster an Innovation-Driven Manufacturing Policy

  • Shift focus to high-value specialized manufacturing rather than competing in mass production.

5. Integrate Skills and Education

  • Align educational curricula with industry needs and establish centers of excellence in tier-2 and tier-3 cities.

6. Lead in Green Technology

  • Scale initiatives like the International Solar Alliance and create a national carbon market.

7. Reform Market Regulations

  • Liberalize product and factor markets to enhance competition and efficiency.

Conclusion

India's path out of the middle-income trap necessitates a concerted effort to boost manufacturing, foster innovation, and address productivity challenges. By leveraging digital infrastructure and enhancing skills, alongside adopting green technologies, India can create a sustainable framework for growth. Effective execution of targeted policies will be crucial for transitioning to a high-income economy.

ASEAN SUMMIT

  • 11 Oct 2024

In News:

The 21st ASEAN-India Summit took place in Vientiane, Lao PDR, on 10 October 2024. This summit coincided with the 10th anniversary of India’s Act East Policy. Prime Minister Narendra Modi joined ASEAN leaders to assess the progress of the ASEAN-India Comprehensive Strategic Partnership and set the course for future collaboration.

 

In his address, Prime Minister Modi reaffirmed India's strong support for ASEAN Unity, ASEAN Centrality, and the ASEAN Outlook on the Indo-Pacific. Referring to the 21st century as the “Asian century,” he emphasized the pivotal role of India-ASEAN relations in shaping Asia’s future. He highlighted the success of India’s Act East Policy, noting that in the last decade, trade between India and ASEAN had doubled to over USD 130 billion, with ASEAN becoming one of India’s top trade and investment partners. He also pointed out direct flight connections with seven ASEAN countries, advancements in Fin-tech collaborations, and efforts to restore shared cultural heritage in five ASEAN nations. PM Modi also stressed the importance of completing the review of the ASEAN-India Free Trade Agreement (AITIGA) promptly to unlock greater economic potential. He spoke about the progress made in the India-ASEAN knowledge partnership, particularly through scholarships for ASEAN students at Nalanda University.

In line with the summit’s theme of ‘Enhancing Connectivity and Resilience", PM Modi announced a 10-point plan, which includes:

  • Celebrating 2025 as the ASEAN-India Year of Tourism, with USD 5 million allocated for joint initiatives.
  • Marking a decade of the Act East Policy through people-centric activities like a Youth Summit, Start-up Festival, Hackathon, Music Festival, ASEAN-India Network of Think Tanks, and Delhi Dialogue.
  • Organizing an ASEAN-India Women Scientists Conclave under the ASEAN-India Science and Technology Development Fund.
  • Doubling scholarships at Nalanda University and offering new scholarships for ASEAN students at Indian agricultural universities.
  • Reviewing the ASEAN-India Trade in Goods Agreement by 2025.
  • Enhancing disaster resilience, with India contributing USD 5 million.
  • Initiating a new Health Ministers’ track for building health resilience.
  • Establishing a regular ASEAN-India Cyber Policy Dialogue to strengthen digital and cyber resilience.
  • Hosting a workshop on Green Hydrogen.
  • Inviting ASEAN leaders to join the ‘Plant a Tree for Mother’ campaign to promote climate resilience.

 

During the summit, leaders agreed to develop a new ASEAN-India Plan of Action (2026-2030) to guide future cooperation and adopted two joint statements:

 

  • Joint Statement on Strengthening ASEAN-India Comprehensive Strategic Partnership for Peace, Stability, and Prosperity in the Indo-Pacific, highlighting the role of India’s Act East Policy in advancing the ASEAN-India relationship.
  • ASEAN-India Joint Statement on Advancing Digital Transformation, recognizing India’s leadership in digital transformation and embracing a partnership in digital public infrastructure.

 

Prime Minister Modi expressed his gratitude to the Prime Minister of Laos for successfully hosting the summit and to Singapore for its role as Country Coordinator over the past three years. He looked forward to working with the Philippines, the new Country Coordinator for India.

 

ABOUT Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN)

  • ASEAN is a political and economic organization focused on fostering economic growth and regional stability among its member countries.
  • The member states include Brunei, Cambodia, Indonesia, Laos, Malaysia, Myanmar, the Philippines, Singapore, Thailand, and Vietnam.
  • ASEAN was founded in 1967 in Bangkok, Thailand, with the signing of the ASEAN Declaration (Bangkok Declaration) by its original members: Indonesia, Malaysia, the Philippines, Singapore, and Thailand.  Brunei Darussalam joined in 1984, followed by Vietnam in 1995, Lao PDR and Myanmar in 1997, and Cambodia in 1999.

 ASEAN Summit:

  • This is ASEAN’s highest decision-making body, consisting of the heads of state or government of member nations. The summit is held twice a year.
  • The first ASEAN Summit took place in 1976 in Bali, Indonesia.

The Mental Health Crisis in India

  • 10 Oct 2024

In News:

India faces a significant mental health crisis, driven by various factors including economic disparities, social isolation, and changing family dynamics. The pandemic further worsened these issues, leading to detrimental effects on mental well-being.

Causes of Mental Illness

  • Socioeconomic Factors: Poverty, violence, inequality, and environmental deprivation contribute to rising mental health issues.
  • Pandemic Impact: Lockdowns and uncertainties have heightened stress levels and anxiety.
  • Adverse Life Experiences: Trauma, abuse, and dysfunctional family relationships can severely impact mental health.
  • Cultural Pressures: The urban focus on consumerism and status can lead to feelings of inadequacy and dissatisfaction.

The Shortage of Mental Health Professionals

India's mental health services are severely lacking, with only 0.75 psychiatrists per 100,000 population—far below the World Health Organization's recommendation of three. This shortage underscores the need for policy interventions and incentives to increase the supply of mental health professionals.

Government Initiatives for Mental Health

The Indian government has implemented several initiatives to improve mental health care:

  • National Mental Health Programme (NMHP): Launched in 1982 to enhance community-based mental health services.
  • Mental Healthcare Act, 2017: Decriminalized suicide attempts and introduced advanced directives for treatment choices.
  • Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act, 2017: Recognizes mental illness as a disability, enhancing rights for affected individuals.
  • Manodarpan Initiative: Provides psycho-social support to students.
  • Kiran Helpline: A suicide prevention helpline for crisis management.
  • National Tele-Mental Health Programme: Launched in 2022 to expand access to mental health services, particularly in underserved areas.

Economic Survey 2023-24

For the first time, the Economic Survey emphasized the importance of mental health in policy recommendations, calling for effective implementation of mental health initiatives to address existing gaps.

Understanding Healthy Workplaces

Defining a Healthy Workplace

A healthy workplace fosters collaboration between employers and employees to promote physical and psychological safety. It encompasses open communication, respect, and a supportive environment, crucial for addressing workplace stress, anxiety, and burnout.

Current Crisis: Overwork and Mental Health

The phenomenon of ‘Karoshi’ (death from overwork) highlights the severe consequences of workplace stress. In India, 40% of employees report high stress levels due to excessive work demands.

Ethical Perspectives on Healthy Workplaces

Creating a healthy workplace involves:

  • Fairness and Equity: Ensuring all employees have equal access to resources and opportunities.
  • Respect for Individual Dignity: Acknowledging contributions and fostering psychological safety.
  • Moral Responsibility of Employers: Providing a safe working environment and promoting mental health initiatives.
  • Transparency and Accountability: Building trust through open communication about policies and practices.
  • Promoting Work-Life Balance: Encouraging a balance between professional and personal life to prevent burnout.

Global Precedents for Work-Life Balance

Countries like Australia and France have introduced regulations, such as the ‘right to disconnect,’ allowing employees to disengage from work communications after hours.

Conclusion and Way Forward

Establishing healthy workplaces is not merely a regulatory compliance issue but an ethical commitment to employee well-being. Both employers and employees must collaborate to create an environment of psychological safety, open communication, and mutual respect. By prioritizing these principles, organizations can foster workplaces that enhance productivity and support mental health, ultimately driving innovation and improving overall well-being.

MeitY relaxes AI compute procurement norms for Start-ups

  • 09 Oct 2024

Overview

The Ministry of Electronics and IT (MeitY) has relaxed certain provisions related to the procurement of computing capacity for artificial intelligence (AI) solutions. This decision is part of the Rs 10,370 crore IndiaAI Mission, aimed at enhancing the country’s AI capabilities.

Key Relaxations

Annual Turnover Requirements

  • Primary Bidders: Turnover requirement reduced from ?100 crore to ?50 crore.
  • Non-Primary Consortium Members: Requirement halved from ?50 crore to ?25 crore.

Computing Capacity Adjustments

  • The performance threshold for successful bidders has been revised:
    • FP16 Performance: Reduced from 300 TFLOPS to 150 TFLOPS.
    • AI Compute Memory: Reduced from 40 GB to 24 GB.

Importance of the Changes

These adjustments respond to concerns raised by smaller companies about exclusionary requirements that favored larger firms. The aim is to create an inclusive environment that allows start-ups to participate in the AI landscape.

AI Mission Goals

  • Establish a computing capacity of over 10,000 GPUs.
  • Develop foundational models with capacities exceeding 100 billion parameters.
  • Focus on priority sectors such as healthcare, agriculture, and governance.

New Technical Criteria

  • Companies must demonstrate experience in offering AI services over the past three financial years.
  • Minimum billing of ?10 lakh required for eligibility.

Local Sourcing Requirements

  • Components for cloud services must be procured from Class I or Class II local suppliers as per the ‘Make in India’ initiative:
    • Class I Supplier: Domestic value addition of at least 50%.
    • Class II Supplier: Local content between 20-50%.

Data Sovereignty and Service Delivery

  • All AI services must be delivered from data centres located in India.
  • Data uploaded to cloud platforms must remain within India's sovereign territory.

Implementation Strategy

  • The Rs 10,370 crore plan will be implemented through a public-private partnership model.
  • 50% viability gap funding has been allocated for computing infrastructure development.

Conclusion

The relaxations in AI compute procurement norms aim to support the growth of start-ups in India, fostering an environment conducive to innovation in artificial intelligence. With these changes, smaller companies are better positioned to contribute to the country's ambitious AI goals.

 

How India can harness the power of AI to become a Trailblazer

  • 08 Oct 2024

Introduction

India stands at the forefront of an AI revolution, poised to leverage its unique position for unprecedented growth and innovation. With a robust economic outlook, the nation is ready to transform its AI capabilities.

Economic Landscape

Projected Growth

  • Nomura estimates India's economy will grow at an average rate of 7% over the next five years, surpassing the IMF's global growth forecast of 3.2% for 2024.
  • Hosting the G20 and Global Partnership on AI meetings in 2023 has created a favorable geopolitical environment.

Market Potential

  • India’s AI market is expected to reach $17 billion by 2027, with a growth rate of 25-35% annually from 2024 to 2027 (Nasscom).
  • The country leads Asia Pacific in the use and adoption of Generative AI, with significant engagement from students and employees.

The Role of Industry

Driving Transformation

  • Similar to historical industrial leaders, India Inc has the potential to drive significant change across various sectors.
  • The goal is to transition from participation to leadership in the global AI ecosystem.

Sector-Specific Strategies

  • Industries must align AI capabilities with specific sectoral goals by mapping challenges, opportunities, and ambitions.

Case Study: Logistics Sector

Historical Inefficiencies

  • A decade ago, the logistics sector in India faced significant inefficiencies.

AI Integration

  • Traditional AI introduced automation and basic forecasting. Companies like PandoAI have leveraged AI to consolidate supply chain data and provide valuable analytics.
  • The integration of Generative AI can further enhance predictive capabilities and innovative solutions.

Infrastructure and Investment

Current Challenges

  • India generates 20% of the world’s data but has only 2% of global data centers, limiting technological advancement.

Government Initiatives

  • Plans to procure 10,000 GPUs in the next 18-24 months and a National Semiconductor Mission to establish a domestic chip industry.

Need for Industry Investment

  • Collaboration between government and industry is crucial to meet the growing demands for computing power.

Talent Development

Workforce Dynamics

  • Hiring of AI talent increased by 16.8% in 2023, indicating a rising focus on AI capabilities.
  • Many Indian-origin AI professionals work for international companies, highlighting the need for local opportunities.

Educational Initiatives

  • Programs like FutureSkills PRIME should be expanded to enhance talent development in AI.

Ethical Standards and Governance

Importance of Trust

  • Establishing trustworthy AI standards is essential for consumer confidence and sustainable operation.
  • Challenges such as bias and data security require robust governance frameworks.

Operationalizing Ethics

  1. Develop AI governance frameworks addressing ethical concerns and data security.
  2. Ensure transparency in AI algorithms and decision-making processes.
  3. Promote inclusive AI development by engaging diverse perspectives.
  4. Invest in ethical AI research through collaborations with academic institutions.

Conclusion

India’s commitment to a strategic vision, substantial investment, and adherence to trustworthy AI practices can position it as a global leader in the AI landscape. This is a pivotal moment for India to harness AI's transformative power, paving the way for a new era of economic prosperity.

National Agriculture Code (NAC)

  • 07 Oct 2024

Introduction

The Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) is in the process of developing the National Agriculture Code (NAC), which aims to establish standardized practices across the agricultural sector. This initiative mirrors existing frameworks such as the National Building Code and the National Electrical Code.

Purpose of the National Agriculture Code

The NAC seeks to standardize agricultural practices throughout the entire agricultural cycle, ensuring consistency and quality in farming operations. It will serve as a comprehensive guide for farmers, agricultural institutions, and policymakers.

Structure of the NAC

The NAC will be divided into two main parts:

  1. General Principles: Applicable to all crops, providing a foundational framework.
  2. Crop-Specific Standards: Tailored standards for key crops such as paddy, wheat, oilseeds, and pulses.

Coverage of the NAC

The code will encompass a wide range of agricultural processes, including:

  • Agricultural Cycle: From crop selection to post-harvest operations.
  • Post-Harvest Operations: Including standards for storage, processing, and traceability.
  • Emerging Practices: Guidelines for natural and organic farming, as well as the integration of Internet-of-Things (IoT) technologies.
  • Input Management: Recommendations for the use of fertilizers, pesticides, and weedicides.

Objectives of the National Agriculture Code

The BIS outlines several key objectives for the NAC:

  • Standardization: Create a national code that reflects the diverse agro-climatic zones and socio-economic conditions across India.
  • Quality Culture: Act as a reference for policymakers and regulators to enhance agricultural quality.
  • Guidance for Farmers: Provide a practical guide to assist farmers in making informed decisions.
  • Integration of Standards: Combine existing Indian standards with agricultural practices.
  • Modernization: Emphasize aspects such as SMART farming, sustainability, and documentation.
  • Capacity Building: Support training programs conducted by agricultural extension services.

Implementation Timeline

The BIS has established working panels comprising university professors and research organizations to draft the NAC, with a target completion date set for October 2025. Following this, training programs for farmers will be organized, facilitated by universities with financial assistance from the BIS.

Standardized Agriculture Demonstration Farms (SADF)

In conjunction with the NAC, the BIS is launching Standardized Agriculture Demonstration Farms (SADFs) at select agricultural institutions. These farms will serve as experimental sites to test and implement agricultural practices aligned with Indian standards. Partnerships with prominent agricultural institutes are being formalized through Memorandums of Understanding (MoUs), with two agreements already signed, including one with Govind Ballabh Pant University of Agriculture and Technology.

Significance of the NAC

  • Uniform Standards: Promotes best practices in diverse agricultural environments.
  • Stakeholder Guidance: Provides a structured framework for informed decision-making.
  • Support for Modern Techniques: Encourages the adoption of innovative practices and technologies.
  • Farmer Empowerment: Facilitates training and capacity building for enhanced productivity.

Challenges and Limitations

  • Implementation Barriers: Standardizing practices across varied climates and soil conditions may prove challenging.
  • Adoption Resistance: Smaller farmers might struggle with resource availability or awareness of new practices.
  • Dynamic Agricultural Needs: The need for frequent updates to the NAC to keep pace with evolving agricultural trends.
  • Infrastructure Constraints: Rural areas may lack the necessary infrastructure to effectively implement NAC guidelines.

Conclusion

The National Agriculture Code represents a pivotal move towards modernizing and standardizing agricultural practices in India. While it aims to enhance productivity and sustainability, its success hinges on effective implementation, farmer engagement, and ongoing updates to meet the changing landscape of agriculture.

Fairwork India Report

  • 06 Oct 2024

In News:

The Fairwork India Ratings 2024 report, which analyses the work conditions of platform workers on digital labour platforms in India, draws a picture of aggregators who are non-committal to ensuring that workers earn the local living wage and unwilling to recognise collectivisation of workers.

Key Findings:

  • Overall Performance: No platform scored above six out of ten, and none achieved top points across the five assessed principles: Fair Pay, Fair Conditions, Fair Contracts, Fair Management, and Fair Representation.
  • Study Background: This report is the sixth annual analysis conducted by the Fairwork India Team, in collaboration with the Centre for IT and Public Policy (CITAPP), IIIT-Bangalore, and Oxford University.

Analysis of Welfare Legislation

  • The report discusses the evolving nature of platform work and its implications for proposed legislation affecting gig workers in Karnataka and Jharkhand.
  • Political interest in gig workers' welfare has increased, but the effectiveness of these initiatives remains uncertain.
  • Professors Balaji Parthasarathy and Janaki Srinivasan highlight the importance of ongoing research and advocacy for improving gig worker conditions.

Methodology

  • Principles of Assessment: Platforms were evaluated based on five principles, each consisting of two points—one that could only be awarded if the first point was fulfilled.
  • Data Collection: Worker interviews were conducted across multiple cities, including Bengaluru, Chennai, Delhi, Kochi, and Thiruvananthapuram.
  • Platforms Analyzed: The study included 11 platforms from various sectors, such as logistics, food delivery, and personal care.

Detailed Findings by Principle

Fair Pay

  • First Point: Bigbasket and Urban Company were recognized for implementing a minimum wage policy ensuring workers earn at least the local minimum wage.
  • Second Point: No platform met the criteria for committing to a local living wage after work-related costs.

Fair Conditions

  • First Point: Platforms such as Amazon Flex, BigBasket, and Swiggy provided adequate safety equipment and training.
  • Second Point: BigBasket, Swiggy, Urban Company, Zepto, and Zomato offered additional protections, including accident insurance and compensation for medical-related work absences.

Fair Contracts

  • First Point: BigBasket, BluSmart, and others ensured contract accessibility and data protection protocols.

Fair Management

  • First Point: Amazon Flex, BigBasket, and several others provided due process in disciplinary decisions.
  • Second Point: BluSmart, Swiggy, Urban Company, and Zomato were noted for regular external audits and anti-discrimination policies.

Fair Representation

  • Despite increased collectivization efforts among platform workers, no platform showed a willingness to recognize collective bodies, underscoring a critical gap in worker representation.

Conclusion

The Fairwork India Ratings 2024 report highlights significant challenges in ensuring fair work conditions for platform workers in India, stressing the need for continuous advocacy and reform in the gig economy.

National Urban Livelihood Mission (NULM)

  • 05 Oct 2024

In News:

The Government is set to launch NULM 2.0, the latest iteration of the National Urban Livelihood Mission (NULM), aimed at enhancing the livelihoods of urban poor and vulnerable populations. This version will specifically target six key groups: construction workers, gig workers, waste management workers, care workers, domestic workers, and transportation workers.

Overview of DAY-NULM

The Deendayal Antyodaya Yojana-National Urban Livelihoods Mission (DAY-NULM) was initiated in 2014 by the Ministry of Housing and Urban Affairs to replace the Swarna Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana. It aims to uplift urban poor through organized self-help groups (SHGs), skill development, and access to credit.

Key Features:

  • Funding Structure: DAY-NULM operates as a Centrally Sponsored Scheme, with a funding ratio of 75:25 between the central and state governments, adjusted to 90:10 for North Eastern and Special Category states.
  • Mobilization of Women: The mission has successfully formed over 831,000 SHGs, mobilizing more than 8.4 million urban poor women by 2023.
  • Objectives: It focuses on sustainable livelihoods through skill development, financial access, and entrepreneurship, particularly for women.

Components and Achievements

DAY-NULM includes various initiatives such as:

  • Skill training programs.
  • Support for self-employment.
  • Rehabilitation for street vendors.

Performance Highlights:

  • Over 89.33 lakh women have joined SHGs, with 6.12 lakh receiving initial funds.
  • Approximately 15 lakh individuals have undergone skill training, leading to employment for 8.20 lakh.
  • Surveys have identified 53.76 lakh street vendors, resulting in significant documentation and support.

Introduction of NULM 2.0

NULM 2.0 is a revamped initiative designed to further support urban livelihoods through financial aid and infrastructure enhancements.

Key Features:

  • Microcredit Access: Eligible individuals can obtain microcredit of up to ?4 lakh, while groups can access up to ?20 lakh, with a subsidized interest rate of 5%.
  • Support for Enterprises: The funding aims to assist beneficiaries in starting small businesses, creating social infrastructure, and providing grants for innovative projects, such as sanitation machinery.

Pilot Initiative

To effectively implement NULM 2.0, the government will conduct a pilot program in 25 cities. This will focus on:

  • Identifying urban poor populations.
  • Ensuring targeted assistance to improve beneficiaries’ earnings and living conditions.

Conclusion

The rollout of NULM 2.0 represents a significant step in addressing the needs of the urban poor, with a comprehensive framework designed to provide financial support and improve livelihoods. By focusing on critical worker groups and leveraging microcredit, the initiative aims to foster sustainable development and enhance the quality of life for urban vulnerable communities.

Bihar Under Water: An Analysis of Recurring Floods

  • 04 Oct 2024

Overview

Bihar is one of India's most flood-prone states, with 11.84 lakh people affected by annual flooding. The state grapples with the devastation of homes, crops, and livestock, prompting a cycle of recovery only to face similar disasters each year.

Geographical Vulnerabilities

Flood-Prone Conditions

  • Demographics: 76% of North Bihar’s population lives under the threat of floods.
  • River Systems: The state is crisscrossed by multiple snow-fed and rain-fed rivers, contributing to various flood types:
    • Flash Floods: Rapid onset due to rainfall in Nepal (lead time: 8 hours).
    • River Floods: Slower onset with a lead time of 24 hours, lasting over a week.
    • Drainage Congestion: Extended flooding throughout the monsoon season (lead time: over 24 hours).
    • Permanent Waterlogging: Caused by various factors including sedimentation and encroachments.

Factors Contributing to Flooding

  • Himalayan Rivers: Rivers like Kosi, Gandak, and Bagmati carry significant sediment, leading to overflow during heavy rains.
  • Waterlogging Causes: Silted rivers, encroachment of drainage channels, and local topographical features called Chaurs contribute to permanent waterlogging.

Historical Management Efforts

Embankments and Their Impact

  • Kosi River: Known as the "sorrow of Bihar," embankments built in the 1950s to control the Kosi’s flow have led to unintended consequences.
  • Sediment Accumulation: Narrowing of the river’s course has caused sediment to build up, increasing the riverbed height and flood risks.
  • Current Crisis: Recent flooding was exacerbated by the release of 6.6 lakh cusec of water from the Birpur barrage in Nepal, leading to multiple embankment breaches.

Economic and Social Effects

Impact on Livelihoods

  • While annual flooding may not always lead to significant loss of life, the economic repercussions are severe:
    • Damage to crops and infrastructure.
    • Loss of livestock and economic migration outside the state.
  • Government Spending: Approximately Rs 1,000 crore is allocated annually for flood management and relief efforts.

Proposed Solutions

Structural vs. Non-Structural Approaches

  • Dam Construction: Proposals for new barrages on the Kosi and other rivers have been discussed, but require cooperation from Nepal.
  • Need for Comprehensive Strategies: Experts suggest a dual approach:
    • Structural Solutions: Dams and embankments.
    • Non-Structural Solutions: Policy development, risk mitigation, and improved community awareness.

Emphasis on Risk Reduction

  • The Flood Atlas of Bihar advocates for minimizing flood risk rather than relying solely on structural measures.
  • Focus on enhancing early warning systems and community preparedness is crucial for effective flood management.

Conclusion

Bihar’s unique geographical and socio-economic landscape necessitates a multifaceted approach to flood management. While structural solutions like dams are important, the state must also invest in non-structural measures that promote resilience and reduce vulnerability among its population.

Tax Crackdown on NGOs: Overview and Allegations

  • 03 Oct 2024

Introduction

In recent months, the Income Tax (I-T) Department has intensified scrutiny of several non-governmental organizations (NGOs) in India, linking them to allegations of misconduct, particularly in relation to foreign funding and activities that allegedly stall economic development. The investigation, which began with searches on September 7, 2022, targets prominent NGOs such as Oxfam, the Centre for Policy Research (CPR), and others.

Background of the Investigation

Triggering Events

The I-T probe was initiated following extensive searches at the premises of five major NGOs, including Oxfam, CPR, Environics Trust (ET), the Legal Initiative for Forest and Environment (LIFE), and Care India Solution for Sustainable Development (CISSD).

Key Allegations

The investigation highlights several critical allegations:

  • Foreign Funding: Over 75% of funding for four of the NGOs during a five-year period was sourced from abroad, which is claimed to shape their activities in India.
  • Interconnections: There are allegations of overlapping personnel and funding connections between these NGOs.
  • Legal Challenges: Following the cancellation of their Foreign Contribution Regulation Act (FCRA) licenses, these organizations have filed legal challenges that are currently under review by the Delhi High Court.

Violations of the FCRA

The I-T department asserts that these NGOs violated multiple provisions of the FCRA, including discrepancies in annual returns and misappropriation of foreign funds. The cancellation of their FCRA licenses has led to heightened scrutiny and legal ramifications.

Specific NGO Allegations

  1. Oxfam India
    • Accused of supporting foreign entities in efforts to halt mining projects by the Adani Group, violating its stated charitable objectives.
    • Allegations include attempts to redirect funds through other NGOs post-FCRA cancellation.
  2. Centre for Policy Research (CPR)
    • Charged with mishandling foreign donations and involvement in environmental litigation, notably the Hasdeo movement against coal mining in Chhattisgarh.
    • Received substantial funding for its Namati-Environmental Justice Programme, purportedly to facilitate legal actions rather than educational initiatives.
  3. Environics Trust (ET)
    • Allegedly funded protests against significant industrial projects, including JSW’s Utkal Steel Plant.
    • Claims of collaboration with international organizations to impede development projects, particularly coal initiatives.
  4. Legal Initiative for Forest and Environment (LIFE)
    • Accused of being used as a conduit by the US-based Earth Justice to obstruct coal mining and thermal projects in India.
    • Internal communications allegedly reveal awareness of their controversial activities.

Interconnected Operations

The investigation indicates that these NGOs may be working in concert, as highlighted by the I-T department:

  • Funding Networks: For instance, Oxfam is cited as a primary funder of ET, allegedly to mobilize local communities against coal industries.
  • Personnel Links: Relationships between key figures in these organizations, such as the former president of CPR, who is also associated with Care India, raise concerns about coordinated efforts.

Responses from NGOs

Denial of Allegations

The allegations have been met with strong denials from the NGOs involved. Ritwick Dutta, founder of LIFE, characterized the claims of interlinking as baseless, asserting that his organization operates independently and has no financial ties to Oxfam or CPR.

Lack of Official Responses

Other NGOs, including Oxfam and CPR, have not officially responded to the I-T department's accusations, leaving some questions unanswered regarding their operational practices.

The Role of Civil Society Organizations (CSOs) in India

Definition and Importance

CSOs encompass a range of nonprofit organizations that operate independently from the government. In India, these include:

  • Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs): Primarily focused on community welfare and development across various sectors.
  • Community-Based Organizations (CBOs): Grassroots entities that directly serve local needs and interests.

Impact and Challenges

CSOs play a crucial role in advocating for vulnerable populations and addressing social issues. However, they face significant challenges, including scrutiny over funding sources and operational transparency, especially amid increasing governmental oversight.

 

Conclusion

The ongoing investigation into these NGOs raises critical questions about the relationship between civil society and government regulation in India. While the I-T department's crackdown aims to ensure compliance with foreign funding regulations, the implications for activism and public participation in developmental issues remain contentious. As the legal proceedings unfold, the future of these organizations and their missions may be at stake.

Women Entrepreneurship Platform

  • 01 Oct 2024

In News:

Telangana has become the first state in India to establish a chapter of NITI Aayog’s Women Entrepreneurship Platform (WEP), aimed at promoting and supporting women entrepreneurs across various sectors.

Overview of WEP

  • Objective: To provide women entrepreneurs access to resources, tools, and networks for business growth.
  • Previous Operation: WEP was primarily a Central Government initiative before this chapter's establishment.

Launch Details

  • Event: The WEP Telangana Chapter was launched in Hyderabad.
  • Key Figures:
    • NITI Aayog CEO BVR Subrahmanyam
    • State IT and Industries Secretary Jayesh Ranjan
    • Co-chair of WEP Sangeetha Reddy

Customised Support for Women Entrepreneurs

  • Services Offered:
    • Digital skilling
    • Access to financial services
    • Mentorship
    • Market linkages
  • Implementation Body: WE Hub will serve as the nodal body for the scheme in the state, leveraging its expertise to empower women entrepreneurs.

Importance of Women Entrepreneurship

  • Economic Impact: Emphasis the crucial role of women entrepreneurship in India's economic future.
  • Challenges Addressed: The initiative aims to overcome barriers faced by women entrepreneurs in finances, mentoring, and marketing.

Future Expansion Plans

  • Vision for Growth:
    • Principal Economic Advisor Anna Roy outlined plans to expand WEP to tier 2 and 3 cities.
    • The initiative aims to build an inclusive entrepreneurial ecosystem through a hub-and-spoke model.

WE Bridge Initiative

  • Leadership: WE Hub CEO Sita Pallacholla appointed as mission director for the WEP Telangana Chapter.
  • State’s Advantages: Telangana was chosen for its supportive environment for entrepreneurship in Self-Help Groups (SHGs) and its robust innovation ecosystem.
  • WE Bridge: Introduced as a single-window platform for women entrepreneurs in the state.

Benefits of the Partnership

  • Access to Resources: The collaboration with NITI Aayog will enhance opportunities for women, providing access to funding, technology, and networks.
  • Mentoring Emphasis: Sangeetha Reddy highlighted the critical role of mentoring in business success.

Objectives of WEP Telangana

  1. Skill Empowerment: Enhance digital technology and financial literacy among women entrepreneurs.
  2. Mentorship Connections: Link women entrepreneurs with industry leaders for guidance in business development, marketing, and scaling.
  3. Market Access: Facilitate connections with potential investors and industry partners through WE Hub’s extensive network.

What is the Unified Lending Interface by the RBI?

  • 03 Sep 2024

In News:

The Reserve Bank of India (RBI), as part of its strategy to create digital public infrastructure in the country, has announced that a new technology platform called the Unified Lending Interface (ULI) would be introduced by the Reserve Bank Innovation Hub, Bengaluru which will enable friction-less credit to farmers and MSME borrowers to begin with.

What is ULI?

The ULI platform, aims to revolutionize the credit underwriting process by enabling a streamlined and consent-based transfer of both financial and non-financial data from various sources to lenders.

  1. Seamless Data Flow: ULI facilitates an efficient flow of digitized data, including crucial records like land titles, directly to lenders, enhancing the credit appraisal process.
  2. Faster Credit Appraisal: The platform is particularly beneficial for smaller and rural borrowers who may lack extensive credit histories, significantly reducing the time required for credit assessments.
  3. Standardized APIs: ULI employs common, standardized Application Programming Interfaces (APIs) that allow for a plug-and-play integration, simplifying the technical requirements for lenders and ensuring easy access to diverse data sources.
  4. Access to Diverse Data: Lenders can access a wealth of information from various databases, including government records and satellite imagery, which can provide deeper insights into potential borrowers.
  5. Opportunities for FinTechs: The platform also opens up opportunities for FinTech companies by connecting them with multiple lenders, thereby enhancing their ability to deliver tailored financial solutions.

ULI aims to create a more inclusive and efficient lending ecosystem, ultimately improving access to credit for a wider range of borrowers.

How will it work?

The ULI platform transforms the loan application process, especially for first-time borrowers and those without traditional credit histories. Here’s how it works:

  1. Centralized Data Access: ULI acts as a single point of access for lenders to retrieve crucial economic data about loan applicants. This reduces the need for applicants to gather extensive documentation themselves.
  2. Plug-and-Play Integration: Financial institutions can easily connect to the ULI platform through standardized APIs, allowing them to quickly access various data sources relevant to the borrower’s financial history and status.
  3. Automated Data Retrieval: Instead of borrowers spending weeks collecting documents, lenders can automatically fetch necessary information from the platform. For instance, data for a dairy farmer may include:
    • Cash Flow Information: Sourced from local milk cooperatives.
    • Land Ownership: Verified through state land records.
    • Financial Insights: Derived from the farmer’s historical farming patterns.
  4. Enhanced Visibility: This comprehensive data access turns what were previously blind spots for lenders into clear insights, allowing them to assess applicants more accurately.
  5. Rapid Decision-Making: With immediate access to essential data, lenders can quickly determine the borrower’s income and creditworthiness. This streamlines decision-making, enabling loans to be sanctioned and disbursed within minutes.
  6. Supporting Tenant Farmers: Tenant farmers, who typically struggle to obtain loans due to lack of land titles, can also benefit. ULI can facilitate loans by allowing banks to verify identity and eligibility based on the intended use of funds for agricultural inputs rather than land ownership.

In summary, ULI simplifies the loan process, making it faster and more inclusive for diverse borrowers by leveraging digital data access and automation.

How did it start?

The ULI platform, officially launched by the RBI on August 10, 2023, emerged from the need for a streamlined approach to credit appraisal in an increasingly digital landscape. Here’s how it all began:

  1. Identification of Need: The RBI recognized that with rapid digitalization, there was a pressing need for a centralized platform to provide access to the data necessary for credit assessments. This was essential for facilitating frictionless digital credit delivery.
  2. Pilot Project: To test the concept, the RBI initiated a pilot project focused on the digitalization of Kisan Credit Card (KCC) loans under ?1.6 lakh in September 2022. This pilot was launched in select districts across Madhya Pradesh, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka, Uttar Pradesh, and Maharashtra.
  3. Encouraging Results: The initial outcomes of the KCC pilot were promising, showcasing the potential for seamless loan disbursement. The pilot demonstrated that loans could be disbursed at the doorstep, either through assisted or self-service modes, all without the need for extensive paperwork.
  4. Development of ULI: Building on the success of the KCC pilot, the RBI moved forward with the establishment of the ULI platform to broaden the scope of digital credit accessibility for a wider range of borrowers.

Drone Technology in Agriculture

  • 02 Sep 2024

In News:

Farmers in Bhagthala Khurd, Kapurthala, and Amritsar are increasingly using drones to apply pesticides to their maize and moong crops. Drones, also known as unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs), are advanced flying machines that can be operated either autonomously or via remote control.

 

Drone Technology in Agriculture

While the use of drones in Indian agriculture is still emerging, it shows great potential. In Punjab, 93 out of the 100 drones provided to farmers by the Indian Farmers Fertiliser Cooperative (IFFCO) under the Centre’s ‘NAMO Drone Didi’ scheme are already in operation. Each drone, costing Rs 16 lakh, is equipped with a 12-litre water tank.

 

Benefits

  • Health Protection:  Drones minimize farmers' direct exposure to harmful pesticides, reducing the risk of health issues like cancer and kidney problems.
  • Efficiency:  Drones can spray an acre in just 5-7 minutes, significantly faster than the several hours required for manual application. They ensure a uniform application, which can enhance crop yields.
  • Data Collection: Drone data helps pinpoint areas requiring attention, leading to better crop management and increased profits.
  • Nano Fertilisers: Drones effectively handle nano fertilisers, ensuring even distribution of these small quantities that are difficult to spread manually.
  • Pest Control: Drones enable timely application of pesticides during infestations of pests such as pink bollworms, locusts, and whiteflies.
  • Environmental Benefits:  Drones improve nutrient absorption from nano fertilisers by up to 90%, reducing runoff and pollution. Leaf-based application is also less polluting than soil-based methods.
  • Water Conservation:  Drones reduce water usage by up to 90% compared to traditional methods.
  • Cost Reduction: They decrease the need for manual labor and reduce pesticide and chemical use, lowering overall costs.
  • Additional Uses:  Drones are also used to drop seed balls (a mix of soil and cow dung with seeds) for potential reforestation projects.

 

Challenges

  • Job Loss:  The use of drones may reduce demand for manual labor, affecting job opportunities for laborers.
  • Knowledge and Training: Farmers may lack the necessary skills and training to operate drones effectively.
  • Cost: The high cost of drones can be a significant barrier for many farmers.
  • Regulatory Barriers: Regulatory challenges may complicate the adoption of drones in agriculture.

 

Initiatives

  • Digital India Campaign: Aims to enhance digital infrastructure and provide training.
  • Indian Council of Agricultural Research (ICAR):  Promotes precision agriculture technologies, including drones.
  • Production Linked Incentive (PLI) Scheme:  Offers Rs. 120 crore (US$ 14.39 million) to incentivize domestic drone manufacturing and reduce import reliance.
  • Sub-Mission on Agricultural Mechanization (SMAM):  Provides financial aid to farmers purchasing drones, making technology more accessible.
  • NAMO Drone Didi Scheme: Launched to empower women Self-Help Groups (SHGs) and provide access to modern agricultural technology.
  • Support and Training:  Efforts are underway to offer training and support to farmers to overcome adoption barriers.

 

Conclusion and Way Forward

Drone technology holds the promise of transforming agriculture by boosting efficiency, yields, and cost-effectiveness. In Punjab, where traditional manual methods have prevailed, drones offer a new approach to pesticide and fertiliser application. It is essential for farmers and policymakers to work together to address challenges and ensure that the benefits of drones are fully realized while mitigating any potential drawbacks.

 

What does spaceflight do to the human body?

  • 01 Sep 2024

In News:

  • On August 24, 2023, NASA announced that Boeing’s Starliner crew capsule was deemed unsafe for the return of astronauts Sunita Williams and Barry Wilmore from the International Space Station (ISS).
  • Williams and Wilmore’s stay onboard the ISS has been extended until February 2025, with their return planned via a SpaceX crew capsule in September 2024.
  • Starliner will undock and return uncrewed.

Understanding Space

Definition and Characteristics

  • What is Space?
    • Space is defined as the area above the Karman line (100 km above sea level), transitioning from ‘earth-like’ to ‘space-like’ conditions.
  • Microgravity Explained
    • Astronauts experience microgravity due to the diminishing force of gravity, not complete absence, leading to various physiological effects.

Environmental Challenges

  • Radiation in Space
    • The Van Allen radiation belts, located above the Karman line, pose a significant challenge, exposing astronauts to charged particles.
    • Historical research during the Apollo program determined that exposure levels in these belts are not harmful.

Effects of Space on the Human Body

Physiological Changes

  • Bone Health: Microgravity leads to bone weakening, potentially causing renal stones due to excess mineral deposition.
  • Digestive Issues: Food movement slows, contributing to potential weight gain.
  • Eye Health: Spaceflight-associated neuro-ocular syndrome (SANS) affects about 20% of astronauts, with 70% of long-duration astronauts affected, causing vision impairment.
  • Cardiovascular Effects: Reduced workload on the heart can result in muscle shrinkage.
  • Muscle and Blood Changes: Muscle mass and strength decline; increased loss of red blood cells necessitates dietary adjustments.

Cognitive and Psychological Factors

  • Balance and Orientation: Altered signals in microgravity challenge the brain's ability to maintain balance.
  • Psychological Impacts: Isolation, fatigue, and stress from family separation contribute to mental health challenges.

Mitigating the Effects of Space

Strategies and Research

  • Exercise and Routines: Strict exercise regimens and predictable routines are critical for maintaining astronaut health during missions.
  • Nutritional Adjustments: Research is ongoing into how nutrients and drugs are metabolized in space.
  • Monitoring and Countermeasures: Development of portable optical coherence tomography machines for SANS detection is underway, alongside potential countermeasures like lower body negative pressure and artificial gravity exposure.

Ongoing Research Initiatives

  • Understanding Spaceflight Effects: The "space omics" studies aim to identify how space environments affect human biology, exemplified by NASA’s Twins Study.
  • International Collaboration: Programs like Japan’s KAKENHI and Europe’s Space Omics Topical Team, along with U.S. research protocols, are exploring biological responses to space conditions.

Duration of Human Space Missions

Historical Context and Current Trends

  • Increased Duration: The average time spent in space has risen from one month in the 1960s to six months in the 2020s.
  • Current Missions
    • Williams and Wilmore will potentially spend 256 days in orbit.
    • Record holders: Valeri Polyakov (437 days), Frank Rubio (370 days), and Oleg Kononenko (over 1,000 days across missions).

Future Aspirations

  • Long-Duration Missions: The shift from lunar missions to potential permanent moon bases and human missions to Mars presents new challenges in safety and health for astronauts.

DRAFT GUIDELINES ON PASSIVE EUTHANASIA IN INDIA

  • 30 Sep 2024

Introduction

The Union Health Ministry of India has released new draft guidelines regarding passive euthanasia, aiming to address the complexities surrounding the withdrawal of life support for terminally ill patients. This move is significant, as it provides clarity for both medical professionals and patients regarding end-of-life care. The guidelines represent an effort to bridge the existing regulatory gap, ensuring ethical practices in sensitive medical decisions.

Understanding Euthanasia

Definition and Types

Euthanasia refers to the practice of intentionally ending a patient's life to alleviate suffering. The term originates from Greek, meaning "good death." Euthanasia can be categorized into several types:

  • Active Euthanasia: Actively causing death, such as administering a lethal injection.
  • Passive Euthanasia: Withholding life-sustaining treatments, allowing death to occur naturally.
  • Voluntary Euthanasia: Conducted with the patient’s consent.
  • Involuntary Euthanasia: Performed without patient consent, often in cases where the patient’s wishes are unknown.

Legal Context

While active euthanasia remains illegal in India, passive euthanasia was legalized by the Supreme Court in March 2018. This legal framework allows for the withdrawal of life support under specific circumstances.

Key Provisions of the Draft Guidelines

Conditions for Withdrawal of Life Support

The guidelines stipulate four critical conditions under which life support may be withdrawn:

  1. Brainstem Death: The patient must be declared brainstem dead as per the Transplantation of Human Organs and Tissues Act (THOA) of 1994.
  2. Medical Prognosis: The patient's condition must be advanced, indicating that aggressive therapeutic interventions are unlikely to yield benefits.
  3. Informed Refusal: The patient or their surrogate must document an informed refusal of continued life support following an understanding of the prognosis.
  4. Legal Compliance: Procedures must align with the legal principles established by the Supreme Court.

Decision-Making Process

The decision to withdraw life support requires a multi-tiered approach:

  • Primary Medical Board (PMB): A group of at least three physicians must reach a consensus and explain the medical situation to the patient’s surrogate.
  • Secondary Medical Board (SMB): A further validation by another set of three physicians, including one appointed by the district’s Chief Medical Officer, is necessary to confirm the PMB’s decision.

Advance Medical Directives

The guidelines emphasize the importance of advance medical directives, allowing individuals to document their healthcare preferences in case they lose decision-making capacity.

Ethical Considerations

Concerns from the Medical Community

While the guidelines aim to provide clarity, there are concerns regarding the legal scrutiny that doctors may face. The Indian Medical Association (IMA) has raised issues about the potential for undue stress on medical professionals, who historically have made these decisions in good faith without formal guidelines. They argue that placing such decisions within a regulatory framework might misinterpret standard medical practices.

Patient Autonomy and Dignity

The guidelines uphold the fundamental rights to autonomy, privacy, and dignity. Patients capable of making healthcare decisions can refuse life-sustaining treatments, even if such refusals may lead to death. The emphasis on informed decision-making seeks to ensure that patients can navigate their end-of-life choices with dignity.

Implications for Policy and Practice

Need for Stakeholder Feedback

The Health Ministry has solicited feedback from stakeholders, including healthcare professionals and the public, by October 20, 2024. This participatory approach aims to refine the guidelines and address any concerns regarding their implementation.

Balancing Ethical and Practical Considerations

The draft guidelines represent a significant step towards formalizing the process of passive euthanasia in India. They attempt to balance ethical considerations surrounding patient autonomy with the practical realities faced by healthcare providers.

Conclusion

The introduction of draft guidelines on passive euthanasia marks a pivotal moment in India's healthcare landscape. By clarifying the legal and ethical frameworks surrounding end-of-life decisions, these guidelines aim to enhance the dignity of terminally ill patients while providing essential support to healthcare professionals. The ongoing discourse surrounding these guidelines will be crucial in shaping their final form and ensuring their alignment with societal values and ethical norms.

CONCERNS OVER JUDICIAL CONDUCT

  • 29 Sep 2024

Background

A recent incident involving Justice V Srishananda of the Karnataka High Court has raised serious concerns regarding judicial comments and conduct. During a hearing, Justice Srishananda referred to a locality in Bengaluru as being “in Pakistan” and made an objectionable remark against a female lawyer. Although he subsequently apologized, the Supreme Court, led by Chief Justice D Y Chandrachud, expressed serious concern, highlighting the rarity of such judicial reproach.

Constitutional Framework for Judicial Discipline

Impeachment: The Sole Recourse

Judges of constitutional courts, including the Supreme Court and High Courts, enjoy substantial protections to maintain independence from executive interference. However, this raises the question of accountability: who oversees the judiciary?

  • Article 124(4): This article outlines that judges can only be removed through impeachment, which requires a political process involving both Houses of Parliament. The grounds for impeachment are limited to "proved misbehaviour" or "incapacity."
  • High Standards for Impeachment: The necessity for a two-thirds majority in both Houses makes successful impeachment exceedingly rare. Historically, only five impeachment proceedings have been initiated, with only one resulting in successful impeachment (Justice Soumitra Sen).

Challenges in Addressing Judicial Misconduct

Certain actions, such as indiscipline or bias, may not meet the impeachment standard but still warrant attention. The Supreme Court faces a dilemma: how to address these issues without the option of impeachment.

Mechanisms for Judicial Accountability

Judicial Intervention

The Supreme Court can intervene through judicial action, as evidenced by past cases:

  • Contempt of Court: In 2017, the Supreme Court sentenced Calcutta High Court’s Justice C S Karnan to six months’ imprisonment for contempt. This case raised concerns about one constitutional court punishing judges of another, as it set a precarious precedent.

Transfer Policy

The Supreme Court also influences High Court judges through its Collegium system:

  • Collegium Recommendations: The Collegium recommends the transfer of judges, which can serve as a disciplinary tool. The case of Justice P D Dinakaran illustrates this practice. Facing allegations of corruption, he was transferred from Karnataka to Sikkim, a move criticized as merely “transferring corruption.”

Conclusion

The incident involving Justice Srishananda underscores the complexities of judicial accountability in India. While the Constitution provides for impeachment as the only formal recourse against errant judges, the high threshold for such proceedings necessitates alternative mechanisms for maintaining judicial integrity. The Supreme Court's ability to intervene and the use of transfer policies are critical components in addressing judicial misconduct, but they also raise questions about the balance between accountability and judicial independence.

SOUTH CHINA SEA

  • 28 Sep 2024

In News:

In recent years, maritime East Asia has emerged as a battleground for intensified power politics, particularly in the East China Sea and the South China Sea. These regions involve complex territorial disputes and geopolitical tensions, particularly concerning China, Japan, Taiwan, and several Southeast Asian nations.

Geographic and Strategic Significance

East China Sea

  • Territorial Claims: The East China Sea borders China, Taiwan, Japan, and South Korea, with the Senkaku/Diaoyu islands being a focal point of contention.
  • Crises: Multiple crises have erupted over these islands, reflecting deep-seated national interests.

South China Sea

  • Key Players: Located between China, Taiwan, and five Southeast Asian countries—Vietnam, Malaysia, Brunei, the Philippines, and Indonesia.
  • Flashpoint: This area has become a critical flashpoint in the Indo-Pacific, with China aggressively asserting its claims.

China's Motivations

Naval Exercises and Claims

  • Naval Collaboration: China has conducted naval exercises with Russia in the South China Sea, showcasing military capabilities and reinforcing territorial claims.
  • Legal Standing: Despite a 2016 ruling by a permanent court of arbitration declaring China's claims to lack legal basis, Beijing has rejected this decision.

Regional Responses to China's Actions

1. Enhancing Defence Capabilities

  • Increased Defence Spending: Countries like Japan and the Philippines are significantly boosting their defence budgets, with Japan aiming to double its spending by 2027.
  • Acquisition of Technology: The Philippines has acquired anti-ship BrahMos missiles from India as part of its defence enhancement efforts.

2. Addressing Maritime Activities

  • Shift in Policy: The Philippines has pivoted from a conciliatory approach to actively publicizing confrontations with Chinese vessels.
  • Public Diplomacy: The Philippines employs social media to document and share encounters with Chinese ships, shaping public perceptions.

3. Strengthening Alliances

  • U.S. Cooperation: The Philippines, Japan, and South Korea are reinforcing their defence relationships with the U.S., expanding cooperation in various domains including joint exercises.
  • Trilateral Meetings: The U.S., Japan, and South Korea have deepened their trilateral cooperation, addressing concerns about unilateral changes to the status quo in the Indo-Pacific.

U.S. Credibility and Strategic Implications

Despite efforts to bolster alliances, concerns remain regarding U.S. credibility and the impact of domestic politics on its international commitments. There is ongoing debate over whether U.S. engagement balances Chinese power or exacerbates tensions.

China’s Sovereignty Perspective

National Security Framework

  • Defence White Paper: China's 2019 Defence White Paper emphasizes that the South China Sea islands and Diaoyu Islands are integral parts of its territory.
  • Infrastructure Development: China claims its actions are defensive, building infrastructure and conducting patrols, while regional nations view these actions as provocative.

Economic Importance of the Seas

  • Maritime Trade Routes: Key maritime trade routes in East Asia traverse these waters, with the Taiwan Strait being a critical choke point.
  • Resource Richness: The region contains vast reserves of untapped oil and natural gas, making it economically significant.

China's Aggressive Tactics

Infrastructure and Militarization

  • Building Facilities: China is constructing military installations and artificial islands in both the East and South China Seas.
  • Conflict with Japan: China has frequently contested Japanese claims, resulting in significant diplomatic and military tensions.

South China Sea Belligerence

  • Power Asymmetry: China's navy is the largest in the world, enabling it to project power effectively in the South China Sea.
  • Aggressive Maneuvers: Tactics include harassment of resupply missions, ramming vessels, and the use of military-grade lasers.

Recent Escalations in the South China Sea

  • Increased Incidents: Since 2022, clashes between China and the Philippines have intensified, especially around Second Thomas Shoal and Sabina Shoal.
  • Dangerous Encounters: China's larger Coast Guard vessels pose significant risks during confrontations, raising concerns about potential miscalculations.

Conclusion

The evolving power dynamics in maritime East Asia highlight the interplay of national interests, regional security, and international cooperation. The situation remains fluid, with significant implications for global trade, security, and diplomatic relations. Understanding these complexities is essential for addressing the challenges posed by an assertive China and fostering stability in the region.

ARMED FORCES (SPECIAL POWERS) ACT (AFSPA)

  • 27 Sep 2024

In News:

The Armed Forces (Special Powers) Act (AFSPA) is a controversial law that grants extraordinary powers to the armed forces in designated "disturbed areas." Recently, the Ministry of Home Affairs extended AFSPA for six months in parts of Nagaland and Arunachal Pradesh, highlighting ongoing security concerns in these regions.

Current Status of AFSPA

Extended Areas

  • Nagaland: AFSPA has been extended to eight districts—Dimapur, Niuland, Chumoukedima, Mon, Kiphire, Noklak, Phek, and Peren—along with 21 police stations in additional districts.
  • Arunachal Pradesh: The Act continues in Tirap, Changlang, and Longding districts, as well as in certain areas of Namsai district.

Duration of Extension

The current extension is effective from October 1, 2024, lasting for six months unless revoked earlier. These areas were initially declared "disturbed" on April 1, 2024.

About AFSPA

Objective

AFSPA aims to maintain law and order in regions affected by insurgency or unrest, providing armed forces with necessary powers to perform their duties.

Key Provisions

  • Section 3: Empowers the Governor or the Central Government to declare areas as "disturbed."
  • Section 4: Grants special powers for arrests and searches without warrants.
  • Section 6: Mandates that arrested individuals and seized property be handed over to the police.
  • Section 7: Prosecution of armed forces personnel requires prior approval from the Central Government.

Rationale for Implementation

  • To enable effective counter-insurgency operations.
  • To ensure the protection of armed forces members.
  • To uphold national security and sovereignty.

Criticisms and Issues

AFSPA has faced significant backlash for:

  • Violating Fundamental Rights: Critics argue it undermines Articles 14, 19, and 21 of the Constitution.
  • International Law Conflicts: It is perceived as contrary to the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights.
  • Erosion of State Autonomy: The Act is viewed as an infringement on state powers, even in peaceful contexts.

Ineffectiveness and Atrocities

Reports of human rights abuses and the ineffectiveness of AFSPA in genuinely countering insurgency raise questions about its continued application.

Government's Position

Union Home Minister Amit Shah has noted that AFSPA has been lifted from 70% of the northeastern states, but it remains in force in certain areas, including Jammu and Kashmir, where revocation is also being considered.

Jeevan Reddy Committee

On November 19, 2004, the Central Government established a five-member committee led by Justice B.P. Jeevan Reddy to assess the Armed Forces (Special Powers) Act (AFSPA) in northeastern states. The committee was tasked with reviewing the law's implications and effectiveness.

Key Findings

In its 2005 report, the Jeevan Reddy Committee made several critical observations and recommendations:

  • Complete Repeal: The committee advocated for the complete repeal of AFSPA, labeling it a "symbol of hate and oppression" and describing it as an "instrument of high-handedness."
  • Incorporation into Other Legislation: It suggested that relevant provisions of AFSPA be integrated into the Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act, 1967, with necessary modifications to delineate the powers of armed and paramilitary forces.
  • Establishment of Grievance Cells: The committee recommended the creation of grievance cells in each district where armed forces are deployed, aimed at addressing public complaints and concerns regarding military actions.

Additional Recommendations

  • The 5th report of the Second Administrative Reforms Commission also echoed the call for repealing AFSPA, reinforcing the need for legislative reform in addressing security issues.
  • In 2016, the Supreme Court ruled that the armed forces cannot evade investigation for alleged excesses committed during their duties, even in "disturbed areas." This ruling clarified that the legal protections offered by AFSPA are not absolute, emphasizing accountability.

Conclusion

AFSPA remains a contentious issue with significant implications for civil rights, regional stability, and national security. A careful review and possible reform of the Act are essential to balance security needs with the protection of fundamental rights.

PLFS REPORT 2023-24

  • 26 Sep 2024

In News:

The Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS) conducted by the National Statistical Office (NSO) from July 2023 to June 2024 provides crucial insights into the employment landscape in India.

Key Findings from the PLFS Report 2023-24

  • Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR):
    • The LFPR for individuals aged 15 years and above rose to 60.1%, an increase from 57.9% the previous year.
    • For males, LFPR is at 78.8%, while for females, it increased to 41.7%, up from 37.0%.
  • Worker Population Ratio (WPR):
    • The WPR for the same age group stands at 58.2%. This is composed of 76.3% for males and 40.3% for females.
    • Female WPR improved from 35.9% to 40.3% during the reporting period.
  • Unemployment Rate (UR):
    • The overall unemployment rate is 3.2%. It slightly declined for males from 3.3% to 3.2%, while it increased for females from 2.9% to 3.2%.

Overview of the PLFS

The PLFS, initiated in April 2017, aims to provide timely and accurate labor market data. It focuses on two main objectives:

  • Short-term Employment Indicators: Measure key employment metrics every three months in urban areas using the Current Weekly Status (CWS) approach.
  • Annual Estimates: Gather employment and unemployment data for both urban and rural areas, assessing them in terms of Usual Status and CWS.

Methodology and Sample Design

  • The survey employs a rotational panel sampling design in urban areas, where households are visited multiple times to ensure comprehensive data collection.
  • During the 2023-24 period, a total of 12,800 Field Sampling Units (FSUs) were designated, with 12,743 successfully surveyed.

Conceptual Framework

Key indicators measured include:

  • Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR): Percentage of the population working or actively seeking work.
  • Worker Population Ratio (WPR): Percentage of employed individuals in the total population.
  • Unemployment Rate (UR): Proportion of unemployed individuals among the labor force.

Challenges in Job Creation

India continues to face significant challenges in generating formal jobs. Key factors contributing to this issue include:

  • Informalization of Employment: Growth in sectors like agriculture and construction is leading to increased informal employment, lacking social security and job protections.
  • Technological Advancements: Automation and AI threaten job opportunities, even for skilled workers, as evidenced by layoffs in the IT sector.
  • Skill Mismatch: Despite a push for skill development, the share of skilled jobs has declined, highlighting a growing disconnect between training programs and labor market needs.
  • Policy Impacts: Past policies, such as demonetization and poorly implemented GST, have negatively impacted small and medium enterprises (SMEs), which are vital for job creation.

Way Forward:

To address these challenges, several strategies are proposed:

  • Sectoral Diversification: Fostering investments in manufacturing, renewable energy, and technology can generate productive jobs.
  • Support for MSMEs: Targeted financial aid and regulatory relief for micro, small, and medium enterprises are crucial for boosting their employment potential.
  • Skill Development: Aligning training initiatives with current industry demands, particularly in emerging sectors, is essential.
  • Focus on New-Age Services: Encouraging growth in sectors like e-commerce and online education could create diverse job opportunities.

Conclusion

The PLFS 2023-24 reveals an encouraging increase in labor force participation, particularly among women, while also highlighting persistent challenges in unemployment and gender disparities. The findings underscore the need for continued efforts to enhance job creation and improve employment conditions in both formal and informal sectors.

TRIPURA'S INSURGENCY RESOLUTION: A LANDMARK DECLARATION

  • 25 Sep 2024

In News:

Recent Developments

Insurgency-Free Declaration

Tripura Chief Minister Manik Saha has officially declared the state "insurgency-free" following a significant surrender ceremony where 584 militants from the National Liberation Front of Tripura (NLFT) and the All-Tripura Tiger Force (ATTF) laid down their arms.

Memorandum of Settlement

This milestone follows a Memorandum of Settlement signed on September 4 between the central government and various insurgent groups, witnessed by the union home minister. The Tripura government has successfully facilitated 12 peace accords over the last decade, leading to over 10,000 insurgents surrendering.

Understanding Insurgency in Tripura

Historical Context

Tribal Composition

Tripura is home to 19 indigenous tribes, including the Tripra, Reang, and Jamatia, with Kok Borok as the primary language alongside other Tibeto-Burmese dialects.

Journey to Statehood

  • Accession: Tripura became part of the Indian Union on October 15, 1949.
  • Union Territory: It was designated as a Union Territory on November 1, 1956.
  • Statehood: Tripura attained full statehood on January 21, 1972.

Causes of Insurgency

  • Demographic Changes: A significant influx of Bengali refugees from East Pakistan resulted in the indigenous population declining from 95% in 1931 to 31% by 1991.
  • Tribal Discontent: The tribal population lost control over land and resources, leading to widespread grievances.
  • Socio-Economic Factors: Issues such as geographic isolation, socio-economic challenges, corruption, and tribal land alienation fueled unrest.

Evolution of Political Movements and Insurgency

Formation of Political Organizations

  • TUJS: Established in 1967 to advocate for tribal rights and autonomy.
  • Armed Struggle: The Tripura Sena emerged in 1970, followed by the Tripura National Volunteers (TNV) in 1978, both pushing for an independent tribal state.

Rise of Insurgent Groups

Key groups involved include:

  • TUJS: Formed in 1971.
  • TNV: Established in 1981.
  • NLFT: Founded in 1989.
  • ATTF: Formed in 1990.

Communal Clashes and Military Response

  • Opposition from Bengali Population: Groups like Amra Bangali emerged in opposition to tribal demands, leading to violent clashes with over 1,800 fatalities.
  • Military Intervention: The Indian Army was deployed in 1980 to restore order.

Attempts at Peace and Resurgence of Militancy

TNV Settlement

The TNV signed a peace agreement with the state government in 1988, focusing on restoring tribal lands. However, issues with implementation led to the rise of new militant groups.

Resurgence of Insurgency

Between 1996 and 2004, insurgency gained traction, supported by logistics from Bangladesh and external networks, leveraging the region's challenging geography.

Strategic Response to Insurgency

  • Counter-Insurgency Operations
    • The state focused on effective counter-insurgency operations involving local police and paramilitary forces, minimizing the need for military deployment.
  • Psychological Operations
    • Efforts were made to shift perceptions among tribal communities, exposing the exploitative nature of insurgents.
  • Confidence-Building Measures
    • Rehabilitation packages and public appeals by state leaders encouraged insurgents to reintegrate into society.
  • Civic and Developmental Initiatives
    • Comprehensive development initiatives were implemented, enhancing healthcare, connectivity, and job opportunities, alongside civic action programs by security forces.
  • Political and Governance Reforms
    • Strengthening local governance through autonomous councils and encouraging tribal participation aimed to foster a more inclusive development process.

Conclusion

Tripura's journey to overcome insurgency highlights the effectiveness of a multi-faceted approach, combining socio-economic development with strategic military and political initiatives. The state's experience illustrates that insurgency can be addressed through sincere leadership and a balanced focus on military and socio-economic challenges.

INDIA'S STRATEGIC PUSH FOR A DOMESTIC SEMICONDUCTOR ECOSYSTEM

  • 24 Sep 2024

Introduction

India is actively pursuing the establishment of a domestic semiconductor ecosystem to lessen dependence on imports and tackle global supply chain vulnerabilities. This initiative, launched under the Semiconductor Mission in 2021 with a USD 10 billion investment, is vital for national security, particularly in defense and telecommunications.

Current Status of the Semiconductor Industry in India

Market Overview

  • 2022 Market Size: USD 26.3 billion
  • Projected Growth: Expected to reach USD 271.9 billion by 2032, with a CAGR of 26.3%.

Import-Export Dynamics

  • Imports: USD 5.36 billion in 2021; efforts are underway to reduce this reliance.
  • Exports: USD 0.52 billion in 2022, marking the highest level to date.

Government Initiatives

  • India Semiconductor Mission (ISM): Part of the Digital India Corporation, focused on developing a strong semiconductor ecosystem.
  • Financial Support: Covers 50% of project costs for semiconductor and display manufacturing facilities.
  • Semicon India Programme: Launched in December 2021 with ?76,000 crore (around USD 9.2 billion) dedicated to semiconductor manufacturing.
  • FY24 Budget Increase: Allocated ?6,903 crore (approximately USD 833.7 million) for further development.

International Collaborations

  • MoU with the European Commission: Aims to enhance semiconductor ecosystems.
  • MoC with Japan: Focused on improving supply chain resilience in the semiconductor sector.

Importance of Semiconductors for India

Economic Growth and Industrial Development

  • Semiconductors are crucial for enhancing India's electronics manufacturing, targeting a notable share of the projected USD 1 trillion global semiconductor market by 2030.
  • The Semiconductor Mission is projected to generate 35,000 direct jobs and 100,000 indirect jobs, potentially raising electronics manufacturing to USD 300 billion by 2026.

National Security and Strategic Autonomy

  • Essential for defense and telecommunications, semiconductors ensure reliable supplies for critical defense systems and secure communication networks.

Technological Self-Reliance and Innovation

  • With around 65-70% of electronic components currently imported, primarily from China, initiatives aim to foster domestic innovation and reduce this reliance.

Global Supply Chain Integration

  • The objective is to position India as a key player in the global electronics supply chain, increasing its current 3% share of the global electronics manufacturing value.

Job Creation and Skill Development

  • The semiconductor industry is anticipated to drive job creation and skill development, enhancing STEM education and research in advanced technologies.

Challenges Facing India's Semiconductor Aspirations

Infrastructure Issues

  • India faces significant infrastructure challenges, including unreliable power supply and water shortages that impact semiconductor production.

Talent Shortage

  • There is a projected need for 250,000 to 300,000 skilled professionals in semiconductor fields by 2027.

High Manufacturing Costs

  • Semiconductor manufacturing is capital-intensive, and operational costs in India are generally higher compared to established hubs like Taiwan and South Korea.

Global Supply Chain Vulnerabilities

  • Global supply chain disruptions, exacerbated by events such as the Russia-Ukraine conflict, present risks to India's semiconductor goals.

Environmental Challenges

  • The energy-intensive nature of semiconductor manufacturing raises concerns about its environmental impact, particularly regarding greenhouse gas emissions.

Competition from Other Emerging Markets

  • India faces competition from countries like Vietnam and Malaysia, which are successfully attracting semiconductor investments with favorable conditions and incentives.

Strategies for Advancing India's Semiconductor Vision

Enhance Education and Training

  • Expand semiconductor engineering programs and collaborate with global companies to develop relevant curricula and hands-on training.

Develop Domestic Chip Design Capabilities

  • Invest in chip design by establishing dedicated centers in technology hubs to encourage innovation.

Build a Comprehensive Supply Chain

  • Create a robust domestic supply chain by attracting investments across all segments, from raw materials to advanced packaging.

Establish a Sovereign Semiconductor Fund

  • Launch a dedicated fund for semiconductor projects to provide long-term investment and reduce reliance on foreign funding.

Implement a "Chip Diplomacy" Approach

  • Use India's geopolitical position to negotiate technology transfers and partnerships with leading semiconductor nations.

Launch a "Green Semiconductor" Initiative

  • Aim to become a leader in sustainable semiconductor manufacturing by minimizing environmental impacts.

Create a National Semiconductor Commons

  • Establish shared infrastructure for research and prototyping to lower barriers for startups and promote innovation.

Conclusion

To fulfill its semiconductor aspirations, India must enhance education and training, develop a strong supply chain, and foster strategic collaborations. By addressing infrastructure challenges and skill gaps while promoting sustainable practices, India can secure its position as a significant player in the global semiconductor industry and strive for technological self-reliance.

ANALYSIS OF INDIA'S TRADE DEFICIT

  • 23 Sep 2024

Overview of the Trade Deficit

India experienced a notable increase in its trade deficit during July and August 2024, primarily due to declining exports and rising imports. This trend is indicative of both domestic challenges and global economic conditions.

Understanding Trade Deficit

A trade deficit occurs when a country's imports surpass its exports, leading to a negative trade balance. While not inherently detrimental, sustained trade deficits can result in issues such as currency depreciation, rising national debt, and pressure on local industries.

Factors Influencing India's Trade Deficit

Several key elements have contributed to the widening of India’s trade deficit in recent months:

  1. Decline in Exports
    • Oil Exports: A sharp decline was observed in petroleum exports, which dropped by 22.2% in July and 37.6% in August, influenced by both weakened global demand and falling oil prices.
    • Gems & Jewellery: This sector saw a reduction exceeding 20% in exports during both months, adversely affecting overall trade performance.
    • Pharmaceuticals and Electronics: These sectors also faced slower growth due to ongoing weak global demand.
  2. China's Economic Slowdown
    • Exports to China, particularly in materials such as stone and iron ore, diminished as China grappled with internal economic challenges and reduced infrastructure spending, negatively impacting India's export revenue.
  3. Surge in Gold Imports
    • August saw a record $10.1 billion in gold imports, more than doubling previous figures. This increase was driven by lowered import duties and heightened domestic demand for the festive season, significantly contributing to the trade deficit.
  4. Decline in Oil Imports
    • On a more positive note, India’s oil import bill decreased by nearly a third due to falling global oil prices, marking the lowest petroleum trade deficit in three years. However, this reduction did not sufficiently counterbalance deficits in other areas.

Implications of the Trade Deficit

  1. Currency Depreciation: A growing trade deficit may exert downward pressure on the Indian rupee, making imports costlier and potentially worsening the deficit further, given India's heavy reliance on imported commodities.
  2. Impact on Economic Growth: Prolonged trade deficits can hinder economic growth by reflecting diminished export competitiveness and excessive reliance on imports.
  3. Foreign Exchange Reserves: While India’s foreign exchange reserves are currently robust, a sustained deficit could deplete these reserves, complicating efforts to stabilize the rupee in the future.

Long-term Challenges and Outlook

India's trade deficit is shaped by a mixture of global and domestic influences:

  • Weak Global Demand: Economic sluggishness in developed markets, such as the U.S. and EU, reduces demand for Indian exports, particularly in pharmaceuticals and textiles.
  • China’s Economic Issues: As China seeks to offload surplus goods, India may face increased competition from cheaper imports, which could challenge domestic industries.
  • Trade Barriers and Regulations: New international trade policies, particularly in the EU regarding environmental standards, impose additional compliance burdens on Indian exporters.

Conclusion and Strategic Recommendations

While India's escalating trade deficit poses challenges, it is not an insurmountable issue. Policymakers need to adopt strategic measures to tackle underlying structural problems:

  1. Boosting Exports: Enhancing the competitiveness of export sectors through technological investment and market expansion is vital. Strengthening trade agreements can also improve market access.
  2. Reducing Non-essential Imports: Minimizing reliance on luxury imports, particularly gold, while promoting domestic manufacturing can help in balancing the trade deficit.
  3. Developing Domestic Industries: Fostering growth in sectors such as electronics and renewable energy will not only reduce import dependence but also enhance export capacity.
  4. Managing Currency and Debt: Careful management of the rupee's valuation and maintaining adequate foreign exchange reserves are crucial in mitigating trade deficit impacts.

Achieving the ambitious goal of $1 trillion in exports for both goods and services by 2030 is attainable but requires overcoming current global economic hurdles, adapting to new trade regulations, and building a self-sufficient economy. By strategically addressing these challenges, India can work toward reducing its trade deficit while maintaining economic growth.

INTEGRATED DEVELOPMENT OF WILDLIFE HABITATS (IDWH) SCHEME

  • 22 Sep 2024

In News:

The Union Cabinet has approved the continuation of the Integrated Development of Wildlife Habitats (IDWH) scheme for the 15th Finance Commission cycle, with a total outlay of ?2,602.98 crore. This scheme aims to enhance the conservation of wildlife and their habitats across India, building upon the earlier "Assistance for the Development of National Parks and Sanctuaries."

Overview of the Integrated Development of Wildlife Habitats (IDWH)

IDWH is a Centrally Sponsored Scheme designed to support various components critical to wildlife conservation. Key aspects of the scheme include:

  • Support to Protected Areas: This encompasses national parks, wildlife sanctuaries, conservation reserves, and community reserves.
  • Protection of Wildlife Outside Protected Areas: This aims to safeguard wildlife habitats and corridors beyond designated reserves.
  • Recovery Programs: These initiatives focus on critically endangered species and their habitats.

Key Projects Under IDWH

The scheme integrates several prominent conservation projects:

  1. Project Tiger: Launched in 1973, this initiative seeks to ensure a viable population of Bengal tigers in their natural habitats. It employs advanced technologies such as the M-STrIPES application for effective management and monitoring.
  2. Project Elephant: Initiated in 1992, this project focuses on elephant conservation, addressing human-elephant conflicts, and promoting the welfare of domesticated elephants.
  3. Development of Wildlife Habitat: This includes Project Dolphin, which utilizes technology like Remotely Operated Vehicles (ROVs) for monitoring dolphin populations, and Project Lion, aimed at strengthening lion conservation efforts in line with the “Lion @ 2047” vision.

Significance of the Scheme

The IDWH scheme promises significant ecological and economic benefits:

  • It is projected to generate over 50 lakh man-days of direct employment, alongside indirect job opportunities through eco-tourism and related activities.
  • A total of 55 tiger reserves, 33 elephant reserves, and 718 protected areas will benefit from the scheme, enhancing biodiversity and ecosystem health.
  • By supporting keystone species such as tigers, elephants, cheetahs, snow leopards, and lions, the scheme contributes to the overall integrity of these ecosystems.

The overall outlay for the three components for the 15th Finance Commission cycle as well as its remaining period:

S.No.                   Name of the Scheme             Central Share                State Share                 Total

1.                        Project Tiger                            1575.00                         955.00                         2530.00

2.                        Project Elephant                      182.58                           54.00                            236.58

3.            Development of Wildlife Habitat           845.4                           273.02                           1118.42

*All figures in Rs. Crores       Total                  2602.98                       1282.02                         3885.00       

 

Component of EFC                                   2024-25               2025-26

Project Tiger                                            365.00                   365.00     

Project Elephant                                      40.00                      40.12

Development of Wildlife Habitat              195.00                    183.16

*All figures in Rs. Crores       Total       600                         588.28

SRI LANKA’S PRESIDENTIAL ELECTIONS: IMPORTANCE AND IMPLICATIONS FOR INDIA

  • 21 Sep 2024

Overview of the Elections

Sri Lanka is gearing up for its first presidential election since the significant protests of 2022 and an unprecedented economic crisis. Scheduled for September 21, the election comes at a critical juncture for the nation, following the ousting of the Rajapaksa regime.

Context of the Crisis

The protests were ignited by severe economic difficulties, including inflation soaring to 70% and shortages of essential goods like food, fuel, and medicine. While some improvements have been noted, a full recovery remains elusive, with economic concerns at the forefront of voters' minds.

Electoral Landscape

Voting System

  • Candidates: 38 candidates are contesting, all men.
  • Voting Process: Each of the 17 million eligible voters can select up to three candidates. A candidate needs over 50% of the votes to win outright; otherwise, a run-off will occur between the top two contenders.

India's Strategic Interests

Concerns over Regional Influence

India is closely monitoring the elections due to strategic interests, particularly in countering China's expanding influence in Sri Lanka. The previous administrations have leaned towards China, which has raised concerns in New Delhi.

Key Candidate Positions

  • Sajith Premadasa: Historically skeptical of China; supports the implementation of the 13th Amendment for provincial power devolution, aligning with Indian interests.
  • Anura Kumara Dissanayake: Has a pro-China background and has criticized Indian business interests in Sri Lanka, raising potential tensions with India.

Economic Recovery and Voter Sentiment

Current Economic Situation

Post-crisis, the economy has shown signs of stabilization, with no food or fuel shortages and reduced inflation. However, many Sri Lankans continue to struggle financially, feeling the impact of increased taxes and electricity rates mandated by the IMF bailout conditions.

Voter Priorities

The election marks a shift in voter focus, with economic recovery taking precedence over traditional ethnic or religious considerations. Skepticism about political promises is high, as citizens recall previous failures to deliver on reforms.

Conclusion: The Path Ahead

As Sri Lanka heads into this pivotal election, the outcome will be crucial for both the nation and its international relations, particularly with India. The next president's ability to navigate economic recovery and regional dynamics will significantly influence Sri Lanka's trajectory.

INDUS WATERS: INDIA FREEZES TALKS WITH PAKISTAN

  • 20 Sep 2024

In News:

India has decided to halt all meetings of the Permanent Indus Commission (PIC) until both governments engage in discussions to renegotiate the Indus Waters Treaty (IWT), a decision communicated by a senior official. The last PIC meeting occurred in May 2022, and since January 2023, India has made four attempts to initiate talks with Pakistan, but these efforts have not received satisfactory responses.

The IWT, established in 1960 with the mediation of the World Bank, governs the sharing of six rivers between India and Pakistan. Under this treaty, India controls the waters of the Ravi, Sutlej, and Beas rivers, while Pakistan has rights to the Sindh, Jhelum, and Chenab rivers. The treaty mandates annual meetings of the PIC, which have continued despite ongoing conflicts between the two nations. However, India’s recent push for renegotiation threatens the stability of this long-standing arrangement.

 

India's Notice for Review of the Indus Waters Treaty

India formally issued a notice to Pakistan on August 30, 2023, seeking modifications to the IWT, citing "fundamental and unforeseen changes" that necessitate a reassessment of the agreement. This is not an isolated instance; India had previously requested a review in January 2023, attributing the need for change to Pakistan’s persistent intransigence regarding its obligations under the treaty.

Key reasons for India’s demand include:

  • Changes in population demographics and environmental challenges.
  • The necessity for clean energy development to meet emissions targets.
  • The impact of ongoing cross-border terrorism, which India argues affects water management and security.

The notification highlights issues related to two contentious hydroelectric projects in Jammu & Kashmir—the Kishanganga and Ratle projects—over which Pakistan has raised objections, claiming they violate the IWT. India asserts that these projects are "run-of-the-river" schemes that do not significantly impede river flow.

Dispute Resolution Mechanisms Under the Treaty

The IWT outlines a structured dispute resolution mechanism, as detailed in Article IX. This mechanism involves three levels:

  1. First Level: Initial discussions occur at the PIC, where either party must inform the other of planned projects.
  2. Second Level: If differences remain unresolved, a Neutral Expert, appointed by the World Bank, is engaged to mediate.
  3. Third Level: Should the Neutral Expert fail to resolve the issue, the dispute escalates to the Court of Arbitration.

Historically, both countries have used these mechanisms, although recent years have seen significant contention. After a Pakistan-backed terror attack in Uri in 2016, India’s Prime Minister expressed the sentiment that “blood and water cannot flow together,” leading to the suspension of routine talks.

The World Bank has navigated a complex situation, receiving requests from both nations for adjudication on overlapping disputes. In December 2016, it paused these processes to encourage direct negotiations. Despite attempts to resume dialogue between 2017 and 2022, Pakistan’s reluctance to engage has further complicated matters.

Current Status and Future Implications

India’s formal notification and its call for renegotiation may set a precedent that challenges the existing framework of the IWT. The continuation of the PIC's activities hinges on a willingness from both governments to address these evolving concerns collaboratively. As tensions persist and environmental needs grow, the future of water-sharing arrangements in the region remains uncertain. The overarching goal for both nations will be to find a sustainable resolution that addresses emerging challenges while honoring the historical framework established by the IWT.

 

Can Sheikh Hasina be Extradited?

  • 19 Sep 2024

In News:

The chief prosecutor of Bangladesh’s International Crimes Tribunal (ICT), Mohammad Tajul Islam, announced plans to seek the extradition of former Prime Minister Sheikh Hasina from India. The ICT was established in 2010 to investigate crimes committed during the 1971 independence war from Pakistan.

Background on Sheikh Hasina's Exile

Ms. Hasina sought refuge in India in early August after a mass uprising forced her to resign. Following her departure, numerous criminal cases have been filed against her and her aides, with charges including murder, torture, abduction, crimes against humanity, and genocide. The interim government in Dhaka has revoked her diplomatic passport, and the existing bilateral extradition treaty between India and Bangladesh may allow for her return to face trial.

Extradition Treaty Overview

Key Provisions

  • Under the International Crimes (Tribunals) Act of 1973, Bangladeshi courts can proceed with trials in Ms. Hasina’s absence, raising concerns about the fairness and adherence to due process. Thus, her extradition is deemed crucial.
  • The extradition treaty between India and Bangladesh was executed in 2013 and amended in 2016 to facilitate the exchange of fugitives. The treaty has allowed the transfer of several political prisoners, including two involved in the 1975 assassination of Sheikh Mujibur Rahman, Ms. Hasina’s father, and Anup Chetia, the former general secretary of the banned United Liberation Front of Assam (ULFA).

Extradition Conditions

  • The treaty mandates the extradition of individuals charged with crimes punishable by at least one year’s imprisonment. It follows the principle of dual criminality, meaning the offense must be punishable in both countries. Since the charges against Ms. Hasina are prosecutable in India, she qualifies for extradition. The treaty also covers attempts to commit crimes and complicity in such offenses.
  • The 2016 amendment significantly lowered the evidentiary threshold for extradition, requiring only an arrest warrant from a competent court in the requesting country to initiate proceedings.

Grounds for Refusal of Extradition

Political Nature of Offenses

Article 6 of the treaty allows for extradition to be refused if the offense is deemed of a “political nature.” However, many offenses, including murder and terrorism-related crimes, are explicitly excluded from this classification. Given that several charges against Ms. Hasina fall outside this exemption, it is unlikely India could justify denying extradition on these grounds.

Good Faith Clause

Article 8 permits denial of extradition requests if the accusations are not made in good faith or involve military offenses not recognized under general criminal law. India could argue that the charges against Ms. Hasina are politically motivated and may lead to her facing unfair trials or persecution upon her return. Recent reports indicate that some of Ms. Hasina’s former ministers faced violent arrests, raising further concerns about the political climate in Bangladesh.

Potential Implications of Extradition Request

Dr. Sreeradha Datta, a professor of international relations at O.P. Jindal Global University, commented that the treaty does not guarantee Ms. Hasina’s extradition, emphasizing that the final decision will depend on diplomatic negotiations and political factors. Even if India declines the request, it may only serve as a minor political irritant rather than significantly damaging bilateral relations.

Economic Considerations

Bangladesh is India’s largest trade partner in South Asia, with bilateral trade estimated at $15.9 billion for the fiscal year 2022-23. Before Ms. Hasina’s ouster, both countries were set to discuss a comprehensive economic partnership agreement (CEPA) to strengthen economic ties. Following the regime change in Dhaka, Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi has engaged with Chief Adviser Muhammad Yunus of the interim government, pledging continued support for ongoing development projects.

Financing Sustainable Agriculture: Insights from the RBI

  • 18 Sep 2024

Context

At the International Research Conference, the Deputy Governor of the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) addressed the crucial topic of financing sustainable agriculture, emphasizing the need for effective solutions.

What is Sustainable Agriculture?

Sustainable agriculture involves farming practices that meet current food demands while conserving resources for future generations. This approach aims to:

  • Protect the environment
  • Reduce reliance on chemical inputs
  • Efficiently use water and land

The goal is to balance productivity, environmental health, and socio-economic equity.

Benefits of Sustainable Agriculture

  • Environmental Conservation: Promotes biodiversity, reduces soil degradation, and conserves water.
  • Economic Stability: Lowers dependence on costly chemical inputs, improving farmers’ profitability.
  • Improved Food Security: Enhances soil health and crop diversity, ensuring resilience against climate change.
  • Social Equity: Farmer Producer Organizations (FPOs) empower small and marginal farmers by providing access to technology, markets, and financial resources, enhancing their bargaining power.

Challenges Facing Sustainable Agriculture

  • Low Productivity: Small, fragmented landholdings hinder investment in sustainable practices and mechanization.
  • Dependence on Rainfall: Approximately 60% of Indian agriculture is rain-fed, making farmers vulnerable to climate variability.
  • Price Volatility: Fluctuating prices force farmers to sell at low prices during peak harvests, while limited processing capacity leads to post-harvest losses.
  • Access to Finance: Small farmers struggle to obtain credit, as the formal banking system often favors larger agribusinesses.

Initiatives for Sustainable Agriculture

  • Farmer Producer Organizations (FPOs): Over 24,000 FPOs formed by March 2023 enhance farmers’ access to resources and markets.
  • Warehouse Receipt Financing: This model allows farmers to store produce and sell when prices are favorable, stabilizing commodity prices.
  • Priority Sector Lending (PSL): RBI regulations enable loans up to ?2 crore for agricultural activities, with higher limits for FPOs involved in assured marketing.
  • Climate-Smart Agriculture (CSA): India is adopting practices such as drought-resistant crops and advanced water management.
  • Technology Integration and Mechanization: Initiatives like the “Per Drop More Crop” scheme promote efficient water use, while Custom Hiring Centres (CHCs) enhance mechanization, reducing labor costs.

How do emergency provisions impact Centre-State relations?

  • 17 Sep 2024

In News:

The recent spate of renewed violence in Manipur has once again triggered the discussion around Centre-State relations and the use of emergency provisions by the Centre.

What is our federal set-up?

India is a federation with governments at the Centre and the States. The Seventh Schedule to the Indian Constitution distributes the power between the Union and States. Under this scheme, it is the domain of the State governments to maintain law and order in their respective States.

What are emergency provisions?

The emergency provisions are provided in Part XVIII of the Constitution. Articles 355 and 356 deal primarily with the affairs of government in a State under this part.

Article 355 imposes a duty on the Centre to protect every State from external aggression and internal disturbance. It also specifies that the Centre should ensure that every State government operate according to the Constitution.

Article 356 allows for the imposition of the President’s rule if a State’s government cannot function in accordance with constitutional provisions. While in the U.S. and Australia, federal government functions also involve protecting States, their constitutions do not contain provisions for removing State governments.

B.R. Ambedkar explained the purpose of Article 355, keeping in mind the federal character of our polity, that if the Centre is to interfere in the State’s administration under Article 356, it must be by or under some obligation which the Constitution imposes on the Centre. Hence, Article 355 was incorporated to check any arbitrary or unauthorised use of Article 356.

What have the courts ruled?

Dr. Ambedkar again in the constituent Assembly wished that Articles 355 and 356 would never be called into operation and would remain a dead letter. However, it was a travesty of the Constitutional principles and federalism that Article 356 was misused on several occasions removing elected governments that enjoyed majority in the States. Reasons varied from loss in Lok Sabha elections to deterioration of law and order in the States. It was only after the Supreme Court’s categorical judgement in the S R Bommai case (1994) that such misuse was restricted. The court held that Article 356 should be imposed only in the event of a breakdown of constitutional machinery, as distinguished from an ordinary breakdown of law and order. It also held that the imposition of the President’s rule is subject to judicial review and should not be misused for political reasons.

On the other hand, the scope of Article 355 has been widened by various Supreme Court rulings. In State of Rajasthan Vs Union of India (1977), the court had a narrow interpretation of Article 355 as justifying the employment of Article 356. However, in subsequent cases such as Naga People’s Movement of Human Rights Vs Union of India (1998), Sarbananda Sonowal Vs Union of India (2005), and H.S.Jain Vs Union of India (1997), the legal position with respect to Article 355 has shifted. The scope of actions under this article has been widened to permit all statutorily and constitutionally available actions by the Union to discharge its duties of protecting the State and ensuring that its governance is in accordance with the Constitution.

What are the suggestions?

The Sarkaria Commission on Centre-State Relations (1987), the National Commission to Review the Working of the Constitution (2002), and the Punchhi Commission on Centre-State Relations (2010) have all opined that Article 355 not only imposes a duty on the Union but also grants it the power to take necessary actions for the effective performance of that duty. Imposition of the President’s rule under Article 356 must be used as a last resort in situations of utmost gravity and urgency.

The situation in Manipur is grave. Large-scale violence against innocent civilians, women and children; looting of ammunition from police armoury; drone and missile attacks targeting civilians cannot be viewed as just an ordinary breakdown of law and order. Constitutional as well as political expediency, considering that the same party is in power at the Centre and the State, has resulted in Article 356 not being invoked. However, under Article 355, all possible instructions and actions should continue to be pursued to restore normalcy at the earliest.

Preventive Detention

  • 16 Sep 2024

In News:

The recent Supreme Court ruling in Jaseela Shaji vs. Union of India (2024) introduces new standards for preventive detention in India, aiming to strengthen safeguards for individual liberty.

Key Aspects of the Ruling

  1. Strict Standards for Preventive Detention:
    • The Court emphasized the need for authorities to furnish all essential materials relied upon in detention orders to the detainee.
    • This includes providing documents in a language the detainee understands to ensure fair representation.
  2. Constitutional Guarantees:
    • The ruling reinforced the constitutional right to personal liberty and the need for a fair process in preventive detention cases, as guaranteed under Article 22(5) of the Constitution.
    • The Court asserted that individual freedom is paramount and cannot be curtailed without adherence to due process.
  3. Importance of Timely Representation:
    • The Court criticized the significant delays in handling and deciding the detainee's representation.
    • Authorities are mandated to act with “utmost expedition” in processing and deciding representations related to personal liberty.
  4. Case-Specific Findings:
    • In the case of Appisseril Kochu Mohammed Shaji, the Court found that critical documents and witness statements were not provided to him, nor were translations of important documents made available in his native language, Malayalam.
    • The delay in handling Shaji’s representation was deemed “callous and casual,” impacting his right to challenge his detention effectively.
  5. Criticism of Procedural Lapses:
    • The Court overturned the Kerala High Court's decision, finding that procedural lapses, including the failure to provide key documents and delays in processing representations, violated Shaji’s constitutional rights.
    • The Supreme Court highlighted the necessity for detaining authorities to avoid arbitrary actions and ensure the detainee’s rights are respected throughout the process.

Implications

This ruling has significant implications for preventive detention practices:

  • Enhanced Accountability: Authorities must now ensure meticulous compliance with procedural requirements to avoid legal challenges.
  • Stronger Protections for Detainees: The ruling reinforces the need for transparency and fairness in the detention process, potentially impacting future cases involving preventive detention.
  • Administrative Efficiency: The Court’s focus on prompt processing of representations underscores the need for administrative efficiency and accountability in handling such matters.

What is Preventive detention?

  • Preventive detention refers to the detention of an individual without a trial or conviction by a court. The primary objective of preventive detention is not to punish an individual for a past offence but to prevent them from committing an offence in the future.
  • Preventive detention laws are enacted by governments to ensure public safety and maintain social order.
  • The detention of an individual under preventive detention cannot exceed three months, as specified by the Indian Constitution's Article 22. However, if an advisory board reports sufficient cause for extended detention, the detention can be extended. The advisory board is an independent body that reviews the case and provides its opinion on whether the detention is necessary.
  • Article 22 of the Indian Constitution grants protection to individuals who are arrested or detained. It has two parts—
    • The first part deals with cases of ordinary law, which includes situations where an individual is detained as part of a criminal investigation.
    • The second part deals with cases of preventive detention law, which pertains to the detention of individuals without a trial or conviction.

Two types of detentions

There are two types of detentions: preventive detention and punitive detention.

  • Preventive detention is when someone is held in police custody based on a suspicion that they might commit a crime. The police can make arrests without a warrant in certain cases.
  • Punitive detention is when someone is detained as punishment for committing a criminal offence. This type of detention occurs after the offence has been committed or attempted

Preventive Detention Laws in India

  • Maintenance of Internal Security Act (MISA), 1971 (repealed in 1978)
  • COFEPOSA, 1974
  • National Security Act (NSA), 1980
  • Terrorist and Disruptive Activities (Prevention) Act (TADA), 1985 (repealed in 1995)
  • Prevention of Terrorism Act (POTA), 2002 (repealed in 2004)
  • Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act (UAPA), 1967 (amended several times)

Important Judicial Cases

  • Shibban Lal v. State of Uttar Pradesh (1954): Established limited judicial intervention in preventive detention.
  • Khudiram v. State of West Bengal (1975): Reaffirmed that the judiciary cannot assess the validity of detention grounds.
  • Nand Lal Bajaj v. State of Punjab (1981): Criticized preventive detention laws as inconsistent with parliamentary principles.
  • Rekha v. State of Tamil Nadu (2011): Urged limiting preventive detention to avoid violating fundamental rights.
  • Mariappan v. District Collector (2014): Stressed preventive detention should prevent harm, not punish.
  • Prem Narayan v. Union of India (2019): Highlighted that preventive detention should not be imposed casually.
  • Abhayraj Gupta v. Superintendent, Central Jail (2021): Stressed that preventive detention should not duplicate existing detention.

 

The Shock of Crumbling Infrastructure and the Path Forward

  • 15 Sep 2024

Infrastructure is a cornerstone of economic development, and in a rapidly growing economy like India’s, its robustness is vital. Recent incidents, particularly the collapse of several under-construction bridges in Bihar, have cast a spotlight on significant issues within the Indian infrastructure sector, particularly in terms of quality control and project management. With the country's aim to become a developed nation by 2047, addressing these challenges is crucial for sustaining economic growth and ensuring safety.

Current Challenges

  1. Cost Overruns and Delays: One of the most pressing issues is the frequent occurrence of cost overruns and delays. According to a report by the Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation, 431 infrastructure projects with investments exceeding ?150 crore each have faced cost overruns totaling ?4.82 lakh crore as of December 2023. Additionally, a significant percentage of projects are delayed, with 36% running behind schedule by 25 to 60 months and 15% delayed for over 60 months.
  2. Bureaucratic Hurdles: Infrastructure projects often face delays due to the complex maze of clearances required. The implementation status of many projects indicates a lack of comprehensive planning and coordination, especially in urban infrastructure projects managed by local bodies that may lack sufficient capacity and expertise.
  3. Project Management Deficiencies: Traditional project management practices in India are often outdated. There is a need for an overhaul to incorporate modern tools and techniques for real-time data management and analysis. Insufficient attention during the planning stages of projects exacerbates these issues, leading to increased costs and project failures.

Path Forward

1. Integrating Modern Practices: Adopting modern project management practices is essential. This includes real-time data management, use of advanced analytics, and adopting global best standards. For example, in the United Kingdom, the Infrastructure and Projects Authority focuses on refining project processes, while countries like China and Saudi Arabia have established agencies dedicated to end-to-end project delivery.

2. PM Gati Shakti National Master Plan: India has initiated the PM Gati Shakti National Master Plan, aimed at integrating various government departments and stakeholders into a unified platform. This GIS-based ERP portal is designed to monitor real-time progress and enhance coordination among departments. While this initiative is promising, the effectiveness will depend on the quality of implementation and oversight.

3. Holistic Program Management Approach: The “Program Management Approach” used in industrial corridor development projects, like the Shendra-Bidkin in Aurangabad, exemplifies effective management of multiple projects simultaneously. This disciplined approach, involving systematic coordination of resources and information, can be applied more broadly across infrastructure projects.

4. Professional Training and Certification: To build a capable workforce, there is a need to establish agencies for professional training in project management. Similar to the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India, such agencies can focus on developing professional ethics and responsibilities in project execution and oversight.

Conclusion

With substantial taxpayer money allocated for infrastructure development, it is imperative to prevent the pitfalls of cost overruns and project failures. A robust program management system, incorporating modern practices and professional training, will enhance the efficiency and effectiveness of infrastructure projects. This approach will not only support India’s high-growth trajectory but also contribute to creating a safer, more affluent future for its citizens.

The Path to Universal Health Coverage: Embracing Data and Digital Technology

  • 13 Sep 2024

The expansion of Universal Health Coverage (UHC) represents a complex but crucial endeavor. The integration of data and digital technology stands out as a pivotal factor in smoothing the way towards achieving this goal.

Understanding Universal Health Coverage

Universal Health Coverage means ensuring that every individual has access to the full spectrum of quality health services when and where they need them, without facing financial hardship. This concept encompasses a broad range of essential health services, including health promotion, prevention, treatment, rehabilitation, and palliative care throughout an individual's life.

UHC as a Sustainable Development Goal

Achieving UHC is a key target of the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) established by the global community in 2015. However, despite this commitment, progress towards this goal remains off-track. Since 2015, improvements in health services coverage have stalled, and the proportion of people facing catastrophic out-of-pocket health expenses has been rising steadily since 2000.

Challenges to Universal Health Coverage

Several challenges hinder the advancement of UHC:

  1. Global Stagnation: Progress in health coverage has stagnated globally, affecting regions and countries alike.
  2. Manpower Shortages: Many Western and Central Asian countries face severe healthcare manpower shortages.
  3. Pandemic Disruptions: The COVID-19 pandemic has further disrupted essential health services, with 92% of countries experiencing interruptions at the pandemic's peak in 2021, and 84% still reporting disruptions in 2022.
  4. Inequality in Healthcare Spending: The disparity between poor and non-poor households has widened, with lower-income families often forced to deplete their resources or sell assets to cover healthcare costs. According to the WHO, 55 million people fall into poverty annually due to catastrophic health expenditures.
  5. Insufficient Spending: India’s healthcare spending, currently at 3.2% of its GDP, is lower than the average spending of 5.2% observed in lower and middle-income countries (LMICs). The government’s health expenditure is also lower compared to other countries like China, Thailand, Vietnam, and Sri Lanka.

Opportunities Through Digital Health

To address these challenges, leveraging digital health solutions is critical. India's leadership in digital health is exemplified by the Global Initiative on Digital Health, launched under India’s G20 presidency. This initiative aims to drive investments into digital health and facilitate regional and international collaboration.

India’s Ayushman Bharat Digital Mission, which precedes this global initiative, highlights the country's commitment to using digital technology to manage the complexities of UHC expansion. Digital health tools can play a transformative role in managing contracts, implementing value-based provider reimbursements, and streamlining healthcare delivery.

The Role of Artificial Intelligence

Artificial Intelligence (AI) holds significant promise for revolutionizing healthcare. AI-powered diagnostic tools can improve the accuracy and speed of medical diagnoses, leading to better patient outcomes. AI can also predict disease outbreaks, analyze healthcare data, optimize treatment plans, and enhance drug discovery, making healthcare more personalized and effective.

Building Digital Infrastructure

India’s experience in expanding digital health infrastructure can serve as a model for other low- and middle-income countries. Many of these nations are seeking to build and enhance their healthcare systems, and India’s approach may offer valuable policy insights.

The Need for Private Sector Participation

Achieving UHC in India cannot rely solely on the public sector. Integrating the private sector into the public healthcare framework is essential. Addressing modern health challenges requires a collaborative effort that includes both public and private sectors, creating a multifaceted and synergistic approach to healthcare.

WHO’s Recommendations

To strengthen health systems, the WHO recommends reorienting them with a primary health care (PHC) approach. Implementing PHC can deliver up to 90% of essential UHC interventions, potentially saving 60 million lives and increasing global life expectancy by 3.7 years by 2030.

Looking Ahead

It is crucial to balance national interests with international ambitions and leverage digital technologies to create inclusive solutions. Countries should build on their existing systems, gradually implementing reforms and best practices. With dedicated effort and a commitment to excellence, it is possible to build a healthier and more prosperous future for generations to come.

Port Blair renamed as Sri Vijaya Puram

  • 14 Sep 2024

Port Blair to be Renamed Sri Vijaya Puram: A Move to Erase Colonial Echoes

Union Home Minister Amit Shah announced on Friday that Port Blair, the capital city of the Andaman and Nicobar Islands, will be renamed Sri Vijaya Puram. This decision is part of a broader effort to “free the nation from colonial imprints,” Shah explained. In a post on X, he emphasized that while the current name carries colonial connotations, the new name, Sri Vijaya Puram, represents the triumph of India's freedom struggle and acknowledges the Andaman & Nicobar Islands’ pivotal role in that struggle. 

Shah further highlighted the strategic importance of the islands, which historically served as a naval base for the Chola Empire and are now envisioned as a key element in India’s strategic and developmental plans. Port Blair, named after British naval surveyor Archibald Blair, will henceforth be known as Sri Vijaya Puram, aligning with Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s vision to remove colonial legacies.

The Origin of Port Blair’s Name

Port Blair, the gateway to the Andaman and Nicobar Islands, was named after Archibald Blair, a lieutenant in the Bombay Marine. Blair conducted a thorough survey of the islands after joining the Bombay Marine in 1771. His expedition, which began in December 1778, was crucial in mapping the Andaman Islands. Initially, Blair named the natural harbor Port Cornwallis, in honor of Commodore William Cornwallis. Later, the harbor was renamed Port Blair.

Blair’s survey was highly valued by the East India Company (EIC), leading to the islands’ colonization. The primary motivation was to create a secure harbor to monitor Malay pirates and provide refuge for shipwrecked individuals. Over time, the islands were established as a penal colony, receiving numerous convicts who performed forced labor.

In 1792, the EIC relocated the colony to Port Cornwallis, but it was soon abandoned due to disease and high mortality rates. The Revolt of 1857 brought an influx of prisoners, leading to the reestablishment of Port Blair as a penal colony. The harsh conditions led to numerous deaths, and the area became notorious for its brutal treatment of prisoners, including freedom fighters like Veer Damodar Savarkar. The infamous Cellular Jail, or Kaala Paani, was built by 1906 to house political prisoners.

Historical Significance of the Andaman Islands

Historical records indicate that the Andaman Islands were strategically significant during the 11th century, particularly for the Chola Empire under Emperor Rajendra I. The islands were used as a naval base in the Chola campaign against Srivijaya, a kingdom in present-day Indonesia. An inscription from Thanjavur dating to 1050 CE refers to the islands as Ma-Nakkavaram land, which may have influenced the modern name Nicobar.

Historian Herman Kulke, in his book "Nagapattinam to Suvarnadwipa," describes the Chola invasion of Srivijaya as a notable event, reflecting the complex interactions between India and Southeast Asia. Various scholars offer differing interpretations of the invasion, ranging from a response to trade disruptions to an extension of Chola expansionism.

In summary, the renaming of Port Blair to Sri Vijaya Puram represents a significant shift in recognizing the historical and strategic importance of the Andaman and Nicobar Islands, aligning with India's broader goals of addressing colonial legacies and honoring its rich history.

India’s sickle cell challenge

  • 12 Sep 2024

In News:

Last year, Prime Minister Narendra Modi launched the National Sickle Cell Anaemia Elimination Mission to eliminate sickle cell disease as a public health problem by 2047, from Shahdol, Madhya Pradesh.

What is Sickle Cell Disease?

  • It is a genetic blood disorder that affects the shape of red blood cells. Normally, red blood cells are round and flexible, but in sickle cell disease, they become stiff and crescent-shaped, resembling a sickle.
  • This abnormal shape makes it difficult for these cells to travel smoothly through blood vessels, leading to blockages and various health problems.
  • It is caused by a mutation in the gene that tells the body how to make hemoglobin, the protein in red blood cells that carries oxygen.
  • Both parents must pass down the defective gene for a child to develop the disease.
  • If a person inherits the gene from just one parent, they have sickle cell trait and can pass the gene to their children but usually do not experience symptoms.
  • Symptoms:
    • Episodes of severe pain, called pain crises, typically in the chest, joints, and bones.
    • Fatigue and anemia, due to the rapid breakdown of red blood cells.
    • Swelling in the hands and feet, caused by the sickle-shaped cells blocking blood flow.
    • Frequent infections, as the spleen, which helps fight infection, may be damaged by the disease.
    • Delayed growth and puberty in children, due to chronic anemia.
  • Diagnosis:
    • It is usually diagnosed through a blood test. Newborns are routinely screened for the disease in many countries.
    • The test checks for the presence of hemoglobin S, the defective form of hemoglobin that causes sickle cell disease.
  • Treatment:
    • While there is no universal cure for sickle cell disease, treatments can help manage symptoms and reduce complications.
    • Pain relief medications for pain crises.
    • Blood transfusions to treat anemia and prevent stroke.
    • Hydroxyurea, a medication that can reduce the frequency of pain crises and the need for blood transfusions.
    • Bone marrow or stem cell transplants, which can potentially cure the disease but are not suitable for all patients due to risks and availability of donors.
  • Challenges in India
    • India, with over a million affected individuals, faces the world’s second largest burden of sickle cell disease, primarily affecting tribal regions across Odisha, Jharkhand, Chhattisgarh, Madhya Pradesh, and Maharashtra. Only 18% of those affected receive consistent treatment due to significant drop-offs at diagnosis and adherence stages. Diagnosis is hindered by stigma and reliance on traditional healers, with a lack of trust in the public healthcare system. Treatment adherence is also poor due to the absence of a permanent cure, inadequate supply of essential medications like hydroxyurea, and logistical challenges, including long travel distances for medicine. Additionally, vaccination coverage, which helps improve patients' quality of life, remains insufficient.

The way ahead

  • It is important to reduce the stigma related to the disease and build trust in public health institutions. Awareness should be raised through targeted media campaigns to bust specific myths (which vary by region and tribe).
  • Second, given that cases are often missed and diagnosis delayed, there could be increasing screening for newborns. This strategy is low-cost with a high pay-off and would especially be effective in areas where the condition is endemic.
  • Third, drugs as well as adherence support must be available close to patients, in the nearest health and wellness centres. For complications, interdisciplinary centres of excellence at the district/division levels should be made operational.
  • Fourth, ensuring that all known patients receive approved vaccines will be crucial; this may require catch-up vaccination programmes.
  • Fifth, health in tribal areas should be operationally strengthened by factoring in conditions unique to these areas. Healthcare should also be adequately funded.
  • Finally, research should be conducted to better understand the disease and its pathways in India, and to develop new treatments. Philanthropists and members of civil society must play a catalytic role, and work with the Central and State governments.

India’s Approach to the Russia-Ukraine Conflict and Economic Ties

  • 11 Sep 2024

India’s Four-Point Principle on the Russia-Ukraine Conflict

  • Principles for Resolution: External Affairs Minister S. Jaishankar outlined India's four key principles regarding the Russia-Ukraine conflict:
    • Peace as a Priority: Emphasis on the need for peace and the belief that the conflict cannot be resolved through continued warfare.
    • Negotiation Requirement: Asserted that any resolution must involve Russia in the dialogue process.
    • No Battlefield Solutions: Stressed that solutions cannot be achieved on the battlefield.
    • Active Engagement: India is actively engaged and concerned about finding a resolution, with ongoing discussions with both Russia and Ukraine.
  • Hosting Peace Conference: Jaishankar noted that while suggestions for India to host a peace conference have been made, there is no commitment from India to propose or host such a conference.
  • Recent Diplomacy: Referenced Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s visits to Moscow and Kyiv and highlighted National Security Adviser Ajit Doval's current visit to Russia.

Diplomatic Discussions with Germany

  • Bilateral Meeting: Jaishankar met with German Foreign Minister Annalena Baerbock in Berlin to prepare for German Chancellor Olaf Scholz’s visit to New Delhi on October 24-25.
  • Topics of Discussion:
    • Global Issues: Discussed the Russia-Ukraine conflict, the Gaza conflict, and coordination for the UN Summit of the Future.
    • UN Security Council Expansion: India and Germany are jointly advocating for the expansion of the UN Security Council.
  • Ongoing Engagement: Both ministers will reconvene later this month at the UN General Assembly.

India-Germany Relations

  • Germany’s Role: Baerbock acknowledged ongoing discussions with India and other countries about their roles in peace efforts, despite differing positions on the Russia-Ukraine conflict.
  • Economic and Trade Relations:
    • Migration and Mobility: Plans to enhance the India-Germany migration and mobility partnership, aiming to increase the number of skilled Indian workers in Germany. Currently, 125,000 Indian nationals work and 50,000 students study in Germany.
    • Military Cooperation: Discussed expanding military partnerships, including joint air force exercises and upcoming naval exercises in Goa.
    • Trade and Investment: Efforts to boost annual bilateral trade to $30 billion and attract about $25 billion in investment from Germany. New Delhi will host the Asia Pacific Conference of German Business next month.

Economic Ties with China

  • Business Relations: Jaishankar addressed concerns about economic ties with China amidst a four-year military stand-off and related restrictions.
    • Business Sectors: India is open to Chinese business but emphasizes the need for clarity on sectors and business terms.

Summary

India’s approach to the Russia-Ukraine conflict emphasizes peace, negotiation, and active engagement. Diplomatic efforts with Germany focus on global issues, military cooperation, and economic growth. Jaishankar also highlighted a nuanced stance on economic ties with China amid ongoing tensions.

 

Arctic Sea Ice Changes May Alter India's Monsoon Patterns

  • 09 Sep 2024

In News:

A study by researchers from India’s National Centre for Polar and Ocean Research (NCPOR) has found that seasonal variations in Arctic Sea ice are impacting the Indian monsoon.

What is the Indian Summer Monsoon Rainfall?

The Indian Summer Monsoon Rainfall (ISMR), occurring from July to September, is one of the most significant monsoon systems globally. During the summer, the Central Asian and Indian landmasses heat up more quickly than the surrounding oceans. This temperature difference creates a low-pressure zone at the Tropic of Cancer known as the intertropical convergence zone (ITCZ). Trade winds from the southeast are then deflected toward the Indian subcontinent due to the Coriolis effect and the low pressure they encounter after crossing the equator. As these winds pass over the Arabian Sea, they pick up moisture and bring rain to India. The southwest monsoon divides into two branches over the Indian landmass. The Arabian Sea branch delivers rain to the west coast, while the Bay of Bengal branch brings rain to the eastern and northeastern parts of India. These branches converge over Punjab and Himachal Pradesh, with the Arabian Sea branch moving inward and the Bay of Bengal branch following the Himalayas.

Complexity of the Indian Summer Monsoon Rainfall

Recent climate models have revealed that the ISMR is influenced by the surface temperatures of the Indian, Atlantic, and Pacific Oceans. Additionally, the circum-global teleconnection (CGT), a large-scale atmospheric wave at mid-latitudes, also plays a significant role in affecting the monsoon.

Influence of Arctic Sea Ice on the Indian Monsoon

The study indicates that reduced sea ice in the central Arctic results in decreased rainfall in western and peninsular India, but increased rainfall in central and northern India. Conversely, lower sea ice levels in the upper latitudes, especially in the Barents-Kara Sea region, delay the onset of the monsoon and make it more unpredictable.

Other Atmospheric Systems Influencing the Pattern

When sea ice levels in the central Arctic rise, the heat transferred from the ocean to the atmosphere triggers cyclonic circulation at lower latitudes, such as the North Atlantic. This process enhances Rossby waves—fast-moving air currents created by Earth's rotation and temperature differences—which move from west to east. These waves cause high pressure over northwest India and low pressure over the Mediterranean region, strengthening the Asian jet stream over the Caspian Sea and shifting the subtropical easterly jet northward. This shift leads to increased rainfall in western and peninsular India. On the other hand, decreased sea ice in the Barents-Kara Sea generates an anticyclonic circulation (clear skies) over northwest Europe. This disturbance affects the upper atmosphere over subtropical Asia and India, resulting in increased rainfall in northeastern India while leaving central and northwest regions drier.

Role of Climate Change

Climate change accelerates the reduction of Arctic sea ice, which intensifies the variability and unpredictability of the ISMR. Lower Arctic sea ice contributes to more frequent and severe droughts in some areas, while causing excessive rainfall and flooding in others. The study underscores the urgent need for expanded research on climate dynamics and more accurate monsoon forecasts to address these changing patterns.

The role of district agro-met offices in supporting farmers

  • 10 Sep 2024

In News:

  • Last week, PTI reported that the India Meteorological Department (IMD) is planning to revive District Agro-Meteorology Units (DAMUs) under the Gramin Krishi Mausam Sewa (GKMS) scheme.

Background:

  • The IMD established 199 DAMUs in 2018 in collaboration with the Indian Council of Agricultural Research.
  • The aim was to use weather data to prepare and disseminate sub-district level agricultural advisories. In March, DAMUs were shut down following an order issued by the IMD.

Why are agro-met units important?

  • Around 80% of farmers in India are small and marginal. They largely practise rain-fed agriculture in the backdrop of a decades-long farm crisis that is now overlaid with climate change-related weather variability.
  • The DAMUs were located within Krishi Vigyan Kendras (KVKs). Scientists and researchers trained in meteorology and agriculture were recruited as DAMU staff. They used weather data provided by the IMD like rainfall, temperature and wind speeds to prepare agricultural advisories related to sowing and harvesting, usage of fertilizers and pesticides, irrigation etc.
  • These advisories were sent to millions of farmers across the country free-of-cost in local languages twice a week. They were shared via text messages, WhatsApp groups, newspapers and also through in-person communication from DAMU staff and KVK officers.
  • Since these advisories provided weather information in advance, they helped farmers plan activities like irrigation. They also served as early warnings for extreme events like droughts and heavy rainfall. Many studies conducted over the years have stressed the benefits of agro-met advisories.

Why were DAMUs shut down?

  • According to an Article-14 report, the NITI Aayog misrepresented the role of District Agricultural Management Units (DAMUs) and advocated for their privatization. The report claims that NITI Aayog inaccurately stated that agro-met data was automated, thereby diminishing the role of DAMU staff. In reality, DAMU staff were crucial in creating agricultural advisories based on IMD weather data, which were disseminated to farmers in local languages. NITI Aayog also proposed monetizing these services, contrasting with the current free provision of agro-met information to all farmers.
  • A policy brief from the National Institute of Advanced Studies (NIAS), Bangalore, released in August, highlights that localized and accessible advisories from District Agricultural Management Units (DAMUs) have significantly improved farmers' responses to climatic variations in the Kalyana-Karnataka region. This has led to increased yields and incomes. The brief recommends reconsidering the decision to discontinue DAMUs and suggests exploring ways to enhance their effectiveness and presence.

What about private players?

Currently, a few private companies offer weather advisories, but their services are often too costly for small and marginal farmers.  Dr. M. N. Thimmegowda, a professor at the University of Agricultural Sciences noted that annual subscriptions can cost ?10,000 per crop, leading to expenses of ?20,000-40,000 for vegetable and cereal growers, and up to ?60,000-80,000 for specialized advisories. Additionally, there is concern that these companies may provide biased recommendations for fertilizers and pesticides, favoring certain brands.

How can biotechnology be harnessed for economic development?

  • 04 Sep 2024

The Centre unveiled its BioE3 (Biotechnology for Economy, Environment and Employment) policy last week.

On the face of it, the policy appears to be a routine attempt to create incentives and opportunities to energise growth in the biotech sector. But it is, in fact, about transforming existing industrial and manufacturing processes across various sectors to make them more sustainable and environment-friendly, and less wasteful.

The policy seeks to achieve this by harnessing the power of biotechnology, and developing new manufacturing methods that replicate, or mimic, processes found in natural biological systems.

Potential Benefits of Biotechnology:

  • Medical Science:
    • Cures for genetic disorders.
    • Development of targeted therapies and treatments.
  • Agriculture:
    • Creation of new plant varieties with desirable traits.
    • Increased crop yields and resistance to pests and diseases.
  • Environmental Sustainability:
    • Bioplastics: Eco-friendly alternatives to traditional plastics (e.g., polylactic acid from corn starch).
    • Carbon Capture: Micro-organisms capture and convert CO2 into biofuels, reducing the need for CO2 storage.
  • Synthetic Biology:
    • Design of novel organisms for specific functions.
    • Laboratory-grown organs for transplantation, reducing reliance on organ donors.
  • Industrial Processes:
    • Replacement of chemical processes with biological ones, reducing pollution.
    • Production of sustainable materials and fuels.

BioE3 Policy Benefits for India:

  • Economic Impact:
    • Expected $2-4 trillion from biomanufacturing over the next decade.
    • Prepares India for future economic opportunities in biotechnology.
  • Research and Development:
    • Promotes competencies, research, and talent development.
    • Supports technology development and maturation.
  • Biomanufacturing Hubs:
    • Establishes facilities for producing bio-products: chemicals, enzymes, functional foods, and more.
    • Focus areas: bio-based chemicals, smart proteins, precision therapeutics, climate-resilient agriculture, carbon capture, and marine/space research.
  • Future Technologies:
    • Supports development of life support systems for space and innovative marine-based products.
    • Encourages collaboration among multiple government departments for effective implementation.

State changes in rape law

  • 05 Sep 2024

The recent legislative changes in rape laws across West Bengal, Andhra Pradesh, and Maharashtra represent significant shifts towards more stringent punishments and expedited judicial processes.

West Bengal: Aparajita Bill

Features:

  • Death Penalty: The Bill introduces the death penalty as the mandatory punishment for rape where the victim dies or is left in a permanent vegetative state. It also extends the death penalty to all cases of rape, including gang rape of women above 18.
  • Special Institutions: It mandates the creation of Special Task Forces in each district for investigating rape cases, and Special Courts for expedited trials.
  • Changes to Existing Laws: The Bill amends the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita, Bharatiya Nyaya Suraksha Sanhita, and the Protection of Children Against Sexual Offences Act (POCSO), introducing rigorous imprisonment and increasing penalties for repeat offenders and for disclosing victim identities.
  • Acid Attacks: The Bill increases punishment for acid attacks to rigorous imprisonment for life.

Special Provisions:

  • Establishes strict timelines for investigation and trial, aiming for efficiency.
  • Includes amendments to the POCSO Act to align with the new death penalty provisions.

Andhra Pradesh: Disha Bills

Features:

  • Death Penalty: The Disha Act introduces the death penalty for rape, including for minors below 16, gang rape, and repeat offenders.
  • Special Courts and Teams: Similar to the Aparajita Bill, it creates Special Police Teams and Exclusive Special Courts in each district to handle these cases.
  • Women and Children Offenders Registry: Proposes a registry to track offenders, enhancing transparency and accountability.

Special Provisions:

  • Focuses on speeding up the investigation and trial process.
  • Proposes comprehensive measures including a registry to maintain offender data, although this may have privacy implications.

Maharashtra: Shakti Bill

Features:

  • Death Penalty: The Shakti Bill also introduces the death penalty for rape cases, with an emphasis on “heinous” cases such as acid attacks.
  • Shortened Timelines: Like the other bills, it reduces the timeframes for investigations and trials.
  • Web Platform Obligations: Imposes penalties on social media and internet platforms for failing to provide data requested by investigators in cases of crimes against women.

Special Provisions:

  • Includes specific provisions for acid attacks with potential death penalty in severe cases.
  • Addresses the role of web platforms in aiding investigations, reflecting concerns over digital evidence.

Comparative Summary

Death Penalty:

  • West Bengal and Andhra Pradesh both introduce the death penalty for various rape offenses, including cases involving minors and gang rapes.
  • Maharashtra includes the death penalty but emphasizes "heinous" acid attack cases more explicitly.

Special Institutions:

  • All three states create special investigative teams and courts to handle rape cases more swiftly, though the exact mechanisms and timelines differ slightly.

Amendments to Existing Laws:

  • West Bengal and Maharashtra both amend the POCSO Act to include the death penalty.
  • Andhra Pradesh also makes amendments but with a broader focus on creating a comprehensive registry.

Additional Provisions:

  • Maharashtra uniquely addresses the role of web platforms in investigations, an aspect not covered by the other states.
  • Andhra Pradesh includes the establishment of an offender registry, which may have broader implications for data privacy and offender tracking.

 

Council of Europe’s Convention on Artificial Intelligence

  • 06 Sep 2024
  • The United States, the European Union, and the United Kingdom are anticipated to sign the Council of Europe’s new convention on artificial intelligence (AI), marking it as the first “legally binding” international treaty on AI.
  • The treaty, officially named the Council of Europe Framework Convention on Artificial Intelligence and Human Rights, Democracy and the Rule of Law, was opened for signature during a Council of Europe Ministers of Justice conference in Vilnius, Lithuania.

Purpose and Approach:

  • Human Rights Focus:
    • The convention prioritizes human rights in regulating both public and private-sector AI systems.
    • It seeks to address concerns that fragmented regulations by individual countries could impede the development of AI technology.
  • Risk-Based Framework:
    • The treaty adopts a risk-based approach to the design, development, use, and decommissioning of AI systems.
    • It is applicable to AI systems used across public sectors, including entities acting on behalf of the government, and private sectors, covering multiple geographies.

Key Provisions and Obligations:

  • Accountability:
    • Signatories are accountable for harmful and discriminatory outcomes resulting from AI systems.
    • They must ensure AI outputs respect equality and privacy rights and provide legal recourse for victims of AI-related rights violations.
  • Human Rights and Democratic Integrity:
    • AI systems must be consistent with obligations to protect human rights.
    • They must not undermine democratic institutions, including judicial independence and access to justice.
    • Measures must be implemented to safeguard democratic processes, including fair access to public debate and freedom of opinion.
  • Exemptions:
    • Exemptions include national security and research and development activities.
    • Parties are obligated to address risks related to the lifecycle of AI activities by both public and private actors.

International Context:

  • Related Agreements:
    • The treaty complements other AI regulations and agreements, such as the G7 pact on AI (October 2023), Europe’s AI Act, and the Bletchley Declaration signed by 28 countries (November 2023).

Challenges and Concerns:

  • Enforcement Issues:
    • Despite being termed “legally binding,” the treaty lacks specific provisions for punitive sanctions like penalties or fines.
    • Compliance is primarily monitored, which may not be a strong deterrent for enforcement.
  • Initial Approvals:
    • Hanne Juncher, Director of Security, Integrity and Rule of Law at the Council, indicated that 10 participants are expected to be among the first to approve the convention.
    • This early support reflects the significant investment and satisfaction of these participants in the treaty’s outcome.

Conclusion:

  • The Council of Europe’s convention represents a pioneering step towards a globally coordinated approach to AI regulation, emphasizing human rights and democratic principles. However, its effectiveness will depend on the development of robust enforcement mechanisms and broader adoption by key international stakeholders

La Niña Delays and Its Impact on India’s Weather

  • 07 Sep 2024
  • Current Conditions:
    • The India Meteorological Department (IMD) reported neutral Indian Ocean Dipole (IOD) conditions.
    • La Niña is expected to develop towards the end of the monsoon season, around the end of this month.
  • Forecasting Challenges:
    • Major global agencies have struggled with accurate forecasts for La Niña’s onset this year.
    • Initial predictions suggested La Niña would start around July, but it has been delayed.
  • Understanding La Niña:
    • La Niña, meaning "The Little Girl" in Spanish, is a phase of the El Niño Southern Oscillation (ENSO).
    • ENSO influences global climate through changes in tropical Pacific Ocean sea surface temperatures.
    • ENSO phases:
      • El Niño (warm phase)
      • La Niña (cool phase)
      • Neutral
  • ENSO Phases Explained:
    • Neutral Phase: Eastern Pacific is cooler; trade winds drive warm water westward, causing upwelling of cooler waters.
    • El Niño Phase: Weakened trade winds result in warmer eastern Pacific waters.
    • La Niña Phase: Strengthened trade winds push more warm water to the western Pacific, cooling the eastern Pacific.
  • Impact on India:
    • El Niño typically reduces monsoon rainfall; La Niña generally enhances it.
    • The previous El Niño occurred from June 2023 to May 2024.
    • La Niña episodes can influence severe weather patterns and are linked to higher temperatures, heavy precipitation, and droughts.
  • Weather Model Predictions:
    • A strong El Niño ended in June, transitioning ENSO to neutral.
    • Global models initially forecasted La Niña for July but revised this to August-October.
    • IMD’s forecast since April predicted La Niña in the latter half of the monsoon season, aiming for enhanced rainfall in August and September.
  • Reasons for Delayed Onset:
    • The expected La Niña might be weak, complicating predictions.
    • Other atmospheric factors, including the Madden-Julian Oscillation, impact weather models.
  • Current and Future Impacts:
    • La Niña's first signs are expected by late September or early October.
    • It is projected to peak in November and continue through the northern hemisphere winter.
    • Monsoon Impact: La Niña’s delayed onset means it won’t significantly affect the current southwest monsoon, though India saw a 16% surplus in August rainfall and a forecast of 109% “above normal” rain for September.
  • Potential Effects:
    • Northeast Monsoon: La Niña could influence the northeast (winter) monsoon (October-December), impacting Tamil Nadu, coastal Andhra Pradesh, Rayalaseema, south interior Karnataka, and Kerala. While La Niña typically doesn’t favor northeast monsoon rainfall, exceptions have occurred.
    • Cyclone Activity: La Niña years often see increased cyclone activity in the north Indian Ocean, with higher intensity and longer-lasting storms.
    • Winter Weather: Historically, La Niña years lead to harsher and colder winters, suggesting a potentially severe winter ahead.

India Becomes Leading Plastic Polluter

  • 08 Sep 2024

India has emerged as the top global plastic polluter, releasing 9.3 million tonnes (Mt) of plastic annually, accounting for nearly 20% of the world's total plastic emissions.

Top Plastic Polluters:

  1. India: 9.3 Mt
  2. Nigeria: 3.5 Mt
  3. Indonesia: 3.4 Mt
  4. China: Previously first, now fourth, due to improvements in waste management practices such as incineration and controlled landfills.

Understanding Plastic Emissions

Plastic emissions refer to plastic that escapes from managed systems into unmanaged or uncontrolled environments. These emissions can occur throughout the lifecycle of plastic, from production through to disposal.

Intergovernmental Negotiating Committee (INC)

The INC, established by the United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) in 2022, is working towards creating a global binding treaty on plastic pollution. The committee addresses the entire plastic lifecycle:

  • INC Sessions:
    • INC-1: Punta del Este, Uruguay (November 2022)
    • INC-2: Paris, France (May – June 2023)
    • INC-3: Nairobi, Kenya (December 2023)
    • INC-4: Ottawa, Canada (2024)
    • INC-5: Scheduled for South Korea (November 2024)

Status of Waste Generation in India

  • Underreported Waste Generation: Official figures estimate 0.12 kilograms per person per day, which may be higher in reality.
  • Excluded Data:
    • Waste from rural areas.
    • Waste recycled by the informal sector.
    • Open burning of uncollected waste.

Global Trends in Plastic Pollution

  • Sources of Pollution:
    • Global North: Littering is a major contributor.
    • Global South: Uncollected waste is the primary source of plastic pollution.
  • Top Polluting Countries: 69% of global plastic waste emissions come from 20 countries, mostly low- and middle-income nations.
  • High-Income Countries: Although these countries produce more plastic waste, their advanced waste management systems prevent them from being top polluters.

India's Initiatives to Address Plastic Waste

  • UNDP India’s Plastic Waste Management Program (2018-2024): Focuses on improving plastic waste management practices.
  • Ban on Single-Use Plastics (SUP): Prohibits the manufacture, import, sale, and use of plastic bags thinner than 120 microns.
  • Plastic Waste Management Rules (2022): Introduces Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR) for plastic packaging, with targets for recycling, reusing, and using recycled plastic.
  • Swachh Bharat Mission: Launched in 2014 to improve waste management and eliminate open defecation.
  • India Plastics Pact: Aims to transform the plastic lifecycle.
  • Project REPLAN: Focuses on creating carry bags from a blend of plastic waste and cotton fibers.
  • Un-Plastic Collective: Promotes a circular economy to reduce unnecessary plastic use and environmental impact.
  • GoLitter Partnerships Project: Targets reducing marine plastic litter from fisheries and shipping.

Global Initiatives to Combat Plastic Pollution

  • Closing the Loop: A UN Economic and Social Commission for Asia and the Pacific project to develop policies addressing plastic waste.
  • Global Tourism Plastics Initiative: Aims to reduce plastic pollution from the tourism sector by 2025.
  • EU Single-Use Plastics Directive (2021): Seeks to minimize plastic waste in the environment.

Heat Waves Impact on Informal Workers and India's Heat Action Plans

  • 31 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

Crowded urban areas exacerbate the heat island effect, heightening risks for informal workers due to their unstable employment, lack of safety nets, and existing socio-economic vulnerabilities.

Context:

  • Nowadays, Northern India is experiencing an intense heat wave, with workers, particularly those involved in hard physical labour, being the most vulnerable.
  • In Delhi, temperatures have exceeded 50 degrees Celsius, posing severe and life-threatening conditions for labourers.
  • The recent death of a 40-year-old worker due to extreme heat has prompted the Lieutenant Governor's office to issue guidelines, underscoring the urgency and gravity of the situation for those working under the scorching sun.

What is a Heat Action Plan?

  • Heat Action Plan or HAP is a policy document prepared to effectively understand and respond to the harmful effects of heat waves.
  • HAPs are prepared by the government authorities at various levels and serve as a comprehensive guide, outlining measures to prepare for, respond to, recover from and learn from extreme heat events.
  • It is an advisory document that’s put forward by state and local governments that explains what needs to be done to prepare for a heat wave, what is to be done after a heat wave is declared, and puts forth a range of emergency responses and course corrective actions to learn from the heat wave experience so that the HAP can be refined.
  • The primary purpose of these plans is to protect vulnerable populations and direct essential resources, including healthcare, financial support, information, and infrastructure, to those most at risk during extreme heat conditions.
  • These plans are multi-sectoral in nature. They involve implementation from multiple government departments simultaneously before enduring heat waves and the main idea behind them is to make sure that during extreme temperatures, there is no loss of life.
  • HAPs play a crucial role in raising awareness and providing guidance for individuals and communities to proactively safeguard their well-being against heat waves through a balanced mix of short and long-term actions.

What are the Flaws in Existing Heat Action Policies?

  • Inadequate Coverage and Implementation: Despite NDMA mandates, many regions lack comprehensive HAPs.
    • Where HAPs do exist, implementation is often inconsistent, leading to uneven protection for vulnerable populations, especially in urban areas.
  • Insufficient Focus on Informal Workers: HAPs largely overlook the specific needs of informal workers, who make up a significant portion of the urban workforce.
    • This group includes construction labourers, street vendors, domestic workers, and home-based workers, all facing unique challenges during heat waves.
    • When workers are mentioned, it's usually in a generic "outdoor workers" category, resulting in insufficient and inappropriate interventions.
  • Short-Term, Reactive Approach: Many HAPs focus on immediate relief rather than long-term solutions, evidenced by temporary measures like water provision and altered work hours.
    • While these provide immediate relief, they do not address the underlying vulnerabilities that exacerbate the impact of heat waves on workers.
    • There is a need for HAPs to integrate with broader urban planning and climate action plans for sustainable, resilient solutions.
  • Rural Bias in Planning: HAPs often have a rural bias, neglecting the unique challenges of urban environments.
    • Urban areas experience the "heat island effect," where dense infrastructure and reduced vegetation lead to higher temperatures.
    • Informal urban settlements, where many workers live, are particularly vulnerable due to poor housing conditions and limited access to basic services.
  • Lack of Integration with Urban Planning: HAPs often operate in isolation from other urban planning and development initiatives.
    • There is little coordination between HAPs and urban design, housing policies, or infrastructure development.
    • This lack of integration means missed opportunities to create more heat-resilient urban environments.
    • Urban greening, improved housing designs, and better urban mobility can significantly reduce heat exposure and improve life quality for informal workers, but these measures are rarely considered in HAPs.
  • Absence of Worker Participation: A critical gap is the lack of participation from worker communities in developing and implementing HAPs.
    • Informal workers, who are most affected by heat waves, often have valuable insights into their working conditions and specific challenges.
    • Excluding them from the planning process results in measures that may not be practical or effective.

Recommended Policies to Mitigate the Impact of Heat Waves:

  • Reconceptualizing Heat Waves: Heat waves should be treated as prolonged disasters rather than isolated events, integrating Heat Action Plans (HAPs) with long-term urban planning and climate action strategies.
    • The NDMA should collaborate with urban stakeholders such as the Ministry of Housing and Urban Affairs (MoHUA) and the Ministry of Labour and Employment (MoLE).
  • Worker Participation: It's essential to include worker communities in the preparation of action plans.
    • The government should involve worker welfare boards and committees, like the Town Vending Committees (TVC) for street vendors, in drafting and implementing HAPs.
    • Engaging these groups can lead to more tailored and effective interventions.
  • Gender-Specific Needs: The impact of heat waves is not gender-neutral. Women workers, who constitute a significant part of the informal workforce, face unique challenges often overlooked in HAPs.
    • These include increased care responsibilities, reproductive health risks, and greater exposure to heat in domestic and care work settings.
    • HAPs should incorporate gender-specific measures to address these challenges, ensuring equitable and inclusive interventions.
  • Economic and Health Protection: Heat waves profoundly affect the economic and health conditions of informal workers, yet HAPs often lack comprehensive measures to mitigate these effects.
    • Informal workers frequently face income loss due to reduced working hours and increased healthcare expenses.
    • HAPs should include provisions for income protection, such as compensation for lost wages and access to affordable healthcare.
    • Strengthening social protection systems is also crucial to provide a safety net for workers during extreme heat events.
  • Rethinking Labor Laws: As labour laws and Labor Codes are reformed, they should integrate considerations of climate change and its impact on work.
    • This ensures that labour laws are responsive to new challenges posed by extreme heat and other climate-related events.
    • Extending legal protections to informal workers is necessary, ensuring they receive the same rights and benefits as formal workers, including safe working conditions, fair wages, and social security access.
  • Urban Reimagining: The government should redesign urban spaces to prioritize the needs of informal workers.
    • This includes ensuring access to water, shade, and rest areas in public and work spaces.
    • Additionally, investing in urban infrastructure to mitigate the impact of heat waves is essential.
    • This involves increasing green spaces, improving housing conditions in informal settlements, and enhancing public transportation.

Conclusion

The recent severe heat wave in northern India highlights the pressing need for comprehensive and inclusive measures to safeguard the most vulnerable workers. By integrating long-term planning, inclusive policies, and active worker participation, India can effectively protect its informal workforce from the devastating impacts of extreme heat. Prioritizing the design of cities to meet the needs of workers is essential for fostering a more resilient and equitable urban environment.

Dispelling Population Myths Triggered by a Working Paper

  • 30 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

The working paper released by the Economic Advisory Council (EAC) to the Prime Minister makes an erroneous assertion regarding the growth of the Muslim population.

Context:

  • The discussion on India's religious demographics is frequently marred by sensationalism and misinterpretation, often driven by media and political narratives.
  • A recent working paper by the Economic Advisory Council to the Prime Minister (EAC-PM), titled "Share of Religious Minorities: A Cross-Country Analysis (1950-2015)," has been a particular target of such distortions.
  • Hence, it is crucial to critically examine the findings and interpretations of the EAC-PM's working paper, placing them within the broader socio-economic dynamics and demographic trends.

Composition of the Population of various communities highlighted by EAC:

  • The population composition of various communities in the region has changed between 1950 and 2015, as highlighted by the data:
  • In terms of absolute numbers, the Hindu population saw a substantial increase of 701 million individuals, while the Muslim population grew by 146 million.
  • However, when looking at proportional changes, the Hindu population experienced a decrease of 6.64 percentage points, from 84.7% in 1950 to 78.06% in 2015.
    • Conversely, the Muslim population's proportion increased by 4.25, rising from 9.84% in 1950 to 14.09% in 2015.
  • Despite these shifts in proportions, the Hindu population remains numerically larger than the Muslim population as of 2015.

What does the 2011 census say?

According to the 2011 census, the following changes in the proportions of various religious communities were observed in comparison to the 2001 census:

  • The Hindu population's proportion relative to the total population decreased by 0.7 percentage points.
  • The Sikh population's proportion saw a decline of 0.2 percentage points.
  • The Buddhist population's proportion decreased by 0.1 percentage points.
  • On the other hand, the Muslim population's proportion relative to the total population increased by 0.8 percentage points.
  • The proportions of the Christian and Jain communities underwent no significant change during the 2001-2011 period.

A Study on Socio-Economic Aspects and Population Growth in the  Muslim Communities:

The Impact of Education:

  • Education significantly influences fertility rates and overall population growth. Communities with higher educational attainment, particularly among women, generally exhibit lower fertility rates.
  • Education equips individuals with knowledge about family planning, reproductive health, and the economic implications of large families.
  • In India, disparities in educational attainment among different religious communities contribute to variations in population growth rates.
  • Historically, the Muslim community has encountered barriers to accessing quality education, leading to higher fertility rates compared to the Hindu community.
  • This indicates that the higher population growth rate among Muslims is due to limited educational opportunities rather than religious doctrine.

Economic Conditions:

  • Economic stability plays a crucial role in determining family size and population growth.
  • Economically stable families tend to have fewer children, enabling them to invest more resources in each child's health, education, and overall well-being.
  • In contrast, economically disadvantaged communities often exhibit higher fertility rates as a response to economic insecurity, viewing children as contributors to household income.
  • The higher growth rate of the Muslim population in India can be attributed to lower average income levels and limited access to economic opportunities within the community.
  • Addressing economic disparities is essential for moderating population growth and enhancing overall human development.

Access to Healthcare:

  • Healthcare access, especially reproductive health services, is a key determinant of fertility rates.
  • Communities with better access to healthcare services, including contraception and maternal healthcare, typically have lower fertility rates.
  • The Muslim community in India has historically faced challenges in accessing healthcare services, contributing to higher fertility rates.
  • Improving healthcare access for all communities is vital for achieving balanced population growth and improving quality of life.

Cultural Factors and Gender Norms:

  • Cultural factors and gender norms also influence fertility rates. Traditional norms valuing large families and early marriage can lead to higher fertility rates in some communities.
  • Promoting gender equality and empowering women to make informed reproductive choices are crucial for moderating population growth.
  • Programs aimed at changing cultural attitudes towards family size and encouraging later marriages can significantly impact reducing fertility rates.

Urbanization and Migration:

  • Urbanization and migration patterns affect population growth, with urban areas generally exhibiting lower fertility rates than rural areas due to better access to education, healthcare, and economic opportunities.
  • Migration from rural to urban areas can lead to a decline in fertility rates as individuals adapt to urban socio-economic conditions.
  • In India, the Muslim population is more concentrated in rural areas, which tend to have higher fertility rates.
  • Promoting urbanization and integrating rural communities into urban settings can contribute to balanced population growth.

Human Development Indicators:

  • Human development indicators, such as life expectancy, child mortality rates, and literacy rates, are closely linked to population growth.
  • Communities with higher human development indicators tend to have lower fertility rates.
  • The lag in human development indicators among the Muslim community compared to the Hindu community underscores the need for targeted interventions to improve education, healthcare, and economic opportunities for all.

Religious Demography in a Broader Context:

Historical Stability in Religious Composition:

  • Historical data indicates that India's religious composition has remained relatively stable over the decades.
  • The 2021 Pew Research Centre report, which analyzed Census data from 1951 to 2011, reveals that the proportions of India's major religious groups have shown remarkable stability since Partition.
  • This stability counters claims of dramatic demographic shifts.  The Hindu population has consistently constituted a large majority, while the proportions of other religious groups, including Muslims, have grown at a predictable rate.
  • This historical perspective underscores that changes in religious demography are gradual and not indicative of sudden or alarming shifts.

Projections and Future Trends:

  • Projections by leading demographers offer a nuanced understanding of future demographic trends.
  • In a 2005 study, P. N. Mari Bhat and Francis Zavier projected that the proportion of Muslims in India’s total population would peak at around 18.8% by 2101.
  • This projection is based on historical trends and factors such as declining fertility rates and improvements in socio-economic conditions.
  • Recent data from the National Family Health Survey (NFHS) shows a significant decline in Muslim fertility rates, suggesting that the peak proportion might be even smaller if similar studies were conducted today.
  • These projections highlight that fears of Muslims overtaking Hindus in population numbers are unfounded and not supported by empirical evidence.

Socio-Economic Development and Demographic Trends:

  • Socio-economic development plays a critical role in shaping demographic trends. Improved education, healthcare, and economic opportunities lead to lower fertility rates across all communities.
  • The decline in Muslim fertility rates, as observed in the NFHS data, is a direct result of better access to education and healthcare.
  • This trend is expected to continue as development efforts reach more communities.
  • Therefore, socio-economic development is essential for achieving balanced population growth and should be the focus of policy interventions.

Conclusion

The sensationalism and misinterpretation of the EAC-PM working paper's findings can obstruct informed public discourse. Achieving an accurate understanding of population dynamics demands a nuanced examination of socio-economic conditions and demographic data. As India awaits updated Census data, it's imperative to promote a discourse on religious demography that is informed and balanced, free from divisive political narratives.

Still No Sign of the Language of Equity and Inclusion

  • 29 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

Equity in education, health care, and rights in India cannot succeed unless the ableist barriers that exclude Deaf and hard-of-hearing citizens are removed.

Context:

  • As the 2024 general election in India concludes, the absence of sign language interpreters during the Election Commission of India's announcement in March highlights the ongoing exclusion of Deaf and Hard of Hearing (DHH) citizens.
  • This incident reflects the broader societal neglect and ableism that marginalize the DHH community in daily life.
  • It is crucial to examine the everyday challenges faced by DHH individuals, the limited opportunities available to them, and the necessary steps to address these issues.

Promoting Equity and Recognizing Exclusive Practices:

  • India's goals for equitable education, healthcare, and rights are fundamentally compromised by persistent ableist barriers that exclude Deaf and Hard of Hearing (DHH) individuals.
  • The National Programme for Prevention and Control of Deafness exemplifies this issue.
    • Although it addresses hearing impairment prevention and treatment, it fails to improve the quality of life for DHH individuals.
  • The program emphasizes theoretical aspects like screening and hearing aids but neglects Indian Sign Language (ISL), essential for deaf communication.
  • Despite the Social Justice Ministry establishing the ISL Research and Training Centre in 2015 and the National Education Policy 2020 recommending ISL standardization in schools, ISL remains unrecognized as an official language and is rarely used in educational systems, even in schools for the deaf.

The Debate Over Oralism and Educational Exclusion:

Historical Context and Pedagogical Approaches:

  • The debate between oralism and the use of sign language in educating deaf individuals has deep historical roots, reflecting broader societal attitudes toward disability and communication.
  • Emerging in the late 19th century, oralism emphasizes teaching deaf individuals to use their voices and read lips rather than relying on sign language.
  • Proponents believed that integrating deaf individuals into the hearing world was best achieved by encouraging them to mimic spoken language as closely as possible, assuming this would enable them to function more effectively in a predominantly hearing society.

Criticisms of Oralism:

  • Despite its intentions, oralism has faced widespread criticism for its limitations and negative impacts on deaf individuals.
  • One major criticism is that oralism often leads to linguistic deprivation, especially in children.
  • Learning to speak and read lips can be extremely challenging and time-consuming, resulting in delays in language acquisition and cognitive development.
  • Without early and consistent exposure to a natural language like sign language, deaf children risk not developing the foundational language skills necessary for effective communication and learning.
  • Additionally, oralism can create significant social isolation, as the pressure to conform to oral communication can undermine the development of a strong, positive deaf identity and sense of belonging within the deaf community.

The Case for Sign Language:

  • In contrast, using sign language as the primary mode of instruction for deaf students has numerous benefits.
  • Sign language is a natural and fully developed language that enables deaf individuals to communicate effectively from an early age.
  • Research shows that early exposure to sign language supports cognitive development and academic achievement, allowing deaf children to develop language skills on par with their hearing peers.
  • Furthermore, sign language fosters a sense of community and cultural identity among deaf individuals, providing a strong sense of belonging and self-worth.

The Indian Context:

  • In India, the education system has largely adhered to the oralist approach, significantly impacting deaf students.
  • Most educators in schools for the deaf are not trained in Indian Sign Language (ISL), perpetuating exclusion and limited accessibility.
  • The current educational framework focuses on "rehabilitation," expecting deaf individuals to adapt to their surroundings rather than addressing the societal barriers impeding their inclusion.
  • This approach fails to recognize the value of sign language and the importance of providing deaf students with a language-rich environment that supports their linguistic and cognitive development.

Everyday Challenges and Opportunities for the Invisible Deaf Population:

The Invisible Population:

  • India's hearing-impaired population is substantial, with the 2011 Census reporting five million people, the National Association of the Deaf estimating 18 million, and the World Health Organization suggesting nearly 63 million Indians have significant hearing impairment.
  • Despite these numbers, Deaf and Hard of Hearing (DHH) individuals remain largely invisible in society.
  • Only 5% of deaf children attend school, often facing prolonged educational timelines due to an oralist curriculum.
  • Employment opportunities for the deaf are limited, with government recruitment sometimes favouring those with lesser impairments, leading to protests.
  • Despite petitions for Indian Sign Language (ISL) recognition, the government resists, citing the adequacy of the Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act (RPDA) 2016, which falls short in practical implementation.

Lack of Accessibility in Public Transport:

  • DHH individuals face numerous every day challenges due to a lack of accessibility in public transport, media, public structures, and emergency services.
  • Basic activities, such as following public announcements or accessing customer service, become insurmountable tasks.
  • While some progress has been made with accessible options in films and sports, much remains to be done.
  • Employment opportunities for the deaf are often restricted to low-skill jobs, and the government sector lags in accessibility and inclusion initiatives.
  • Protests by the deaf community demanding better education and employment opportunities have often been met with force or empty promises.

Healthcare and Mental Health Accessibility:

  • Access to healthcare poses additional challenges for the deaf community, as most hospitals lack interpreters, complicating communication.
  • This is especially problematic in mental healthcare, where a lack of ISL-trained professionals further marginalizes DHH individuals.
  • Although the Mental Healthcare Act of 2017 promises universal mental healthcare, its implementation is ineffective, with only 250 certified sign language interpreters available and no clear data on ISL-trained mental health professionals.

Way Forward:

  • To address these issues, recognizing Indian Sign Language (ISL) as an official language and integrating it into schools and colleges for both hearing and Deaf and Hard of Hearing (DHH) students is crucial.
    • This approach would also create employment opportunities for DHH individuals as educators.
  • Additionally, healthcare systems need to be updated to ensure easy and accessible communication for DHH patients, including employing language-concordant physicians.
    • Regulatory commissions in medical fields must reduce barriers for DHH individuals aspiring to healthcare professions, fostering a more inclusive workforce.
  • Media channels should consistently offer deaf programming, and government event announcements should include live ISL interpreters, as seen in many other countries.
    • Timely interventions in these areas could lead to significant improvements, potentially ensuring real-time ISL interpretations in future elections.

Conclusion

The challenges faced by the Deaf and Hard of Hearing (DHH) community in India are complex and deeply rooted in societal ableism. While some progress has been made, much more needs to be done. It is crucial for authorities to actively engage with the DHH community and address their specific needs. By recognizing and implementing necessary changes, India can move towards a more inclusive society where the rights and needs of DHH individuals are fully acknowledged and met.

Geopolitical Significance of Chabahar Port: Opportunities and Challenges for India

  • 28 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

Recently, India secured rights to invest in and operate the Shahid-Behesti terminal at Chabahar Port for another 10 years.

Context:

  • The recent extension of the contract between India and Iran, granting New Delhi continued investment and operational rights at the Shahid-Beheshti terminal within Chabahar Port for another ten years, underscores the project's strategic and economic significance.
  • This development occurs amid a turbulent period in West Asia, characterized by ongoing conflict in Gaza, escalating tensions between Israel and Iran, and a destabilizing helicopter crash resulting in the loss of Iran’s President and Foreign Minister.
  • Nevertheless, the Chabahar project retains its pivotal role in cementing economic ties between India and Iran despite these formidable challenges.

Significance of the Chabahar Project for India:

  • Economic Connectivity and Trade Advancement: Chabahar Port serves as a vital node in the International North-South Transport Corridor (INSTC), streamlining India's trade routes with Central Asia, Russia, and beyond.
    • By offering a direct sea-land route that circumvents Pakistan, Chabahar substantially cuts transportation time and costs for Indian exports bound for these regions.
    • This heightened connectivity fosters increased trade, economic convergence, and access to fresh markets, augmenting India's export potential and economic prosperity.
  • Geopolitical Influence and Strategic Independence: Chabahar represents a strategic asset for India to assert its influence in the region and diminish reliance on Pakistani transit routes, often fraught with geopolitical tensions.
    • Through investment in Chabahar, India solidifies a strategic foothold in Iran, a nation wielding significant sway in West and Central Asia.
    • The port empowers India to project strength and maintain a strategic presence in a landscape where China, through its Belt and Road Initiative (BRI), and Pakistan, vie for dominance.
    • This strategic autonomy is pivotal for India's foreign policy, enabling adept navigation of intricate regional dynamics.
  • Regional Security and Harmony: Chabahar Port assumes a crucial role in India's efforts towards regional security and stability, particularly concerning Afghanistan.
    • Endorsed by the Taliban and with their financial commitment, Chabahar emerges as a key conduit for humanitarian aid and economic provisions to Afghanistan, thereby fostering stability in a strife-ridden region.
    • By promoting economic growth and offering alternatives to Pakistani ports, Chabahar helps mitigate the peril of economic isolation for Afghanistan, fostering regional tranquillity.
  • Countervailing Chinese Influence: Strategically positioned to counterbalance Chinese presence, Chabahar offers a distinct avenue to offset Chinese influence, notably vis-à-vis the China-Pakistan Economic Corridor (CPEC) and Gwadar Port.
    • While Gwadar, under China's dominion, lies proximate to Chabahar, the latter furnishes an alternative route pivotal for diversifying regional supply chains.
    • By fortifying Chabahar, India not only mitigates the strategic risks of Chinese infrastructure dominance but also offers a viable alternative for international trade routes evading Chinese control.
  • Diplomatic Collaboration and Multilateralism: Chabahar Port epitomises India's dedication to diplomatic collaboration and multilateral engagement.
    • Through this venture, India showcases its adeptness in partnering with diverse international stakeholders, including Iran, Afghanistan, and Central Asian nations, nurturing a collaborative regional milieu.
    • The port aligns with broader international endeavours to bolster connectivity and economic amalgamation across Eurasia, positioning India as a pivotal player in regional developmental endeavours.
  • Energy Security: Given Iran's substantial energy reserves, Chabahar Port holds promise in bolstering India's energy security.
    • By serving as a strategic ingress point for Iranian oil and gas, the port facilitates energy imports, diversifies India's energy sources, and diminishes dependence on any single nation or route.
    • This diversification is instrumental in securing a stable and resilient energy supply, indispensable for India's burgeoning economy.

 

Challenges in India-Iran Relations Amidst Chabahar Port Dynamics:

  • Sanctions and Global Pressures: The imposition of international sanctions, particularly by the United States, has significantly disrupted economic ties between India and Iran.
    • Projects like the Farzad-B gas field and the Irano Hind Shipping Company bore the brunt of these sanctions directly.
    • The Chabahar Port project itself has faced intricacies due to U.S. sanctions, necessitating periodic exemptions for India to sustain its development efforts.
  • Geopolitical Dynamics: India's strategic partnership with the United States sometimes clashes with its engagements with Iran, creating geopolitical complexities.
    • During the Obama administration, India curtailed its oil imports from Iran in line with U.S. policies on Tehran’s nuclear program, impacting bilateral trade and diminishing Iran's standing as a major oil supplier to India.
  • Competing Regional Agendas: India and Iran harbour divergent regional interests that occasionally conflict.
    • While Iran aims to bolster its influence in West Asia and deepen ties with nations like China and Russia, India’s regional focus includes countering China’s Belt and Road Initiative and safeguarding its interests in Afghanistan.
    • These disparate priorities can lead to friction and curtail the extent of bilateral cooperation.

 

Recommendations for Future Engagement:

Diversification of Economic Cooperation: While the Chabahar Port remains crucial, India and Iran should broaden their economic collaboration beyond it.

    • Exploring sectors like energy, agriculture, pharmaceuticals, and technology through revived projects like the Farzad-B gas field or new joint ventures can enhance economic ties.
    • Establishing a comprehensive trade framework involving tariff reduction, streamlined customs procedures, and investment incentives can stimulate bilateral commerce.

Enhancement of Diplomatic Engagement: Regular high-level visits and dialogues are essential to address misunderstandings and align strategic interests.

    • Institutionalizing such engagements ensures continuous and structured communication between the two nations.
    • Leveraging participation in multilateral forums like the United Nations and regional organizations can facilitate joint initiatives, amplifying diplomatic influence and fostering closer ties.
  • Balancing Geopolitical Alignments: India should navigate its strategic partnership with the United States while engaging with Iran, emphasizing the significance of projects like Chabahar.
    • Diplomatic efforts should prioritize securing exemptions from sanctions hindering critical projects, necessitating transparent communication with the U.S.
    • Strengthening ties with other regional actors such as Afghanistan, Central Asian countries, and Russia can reinforce India-Iran relations and regional stability.
    • By implementing these recommendations, India and Iran can foster a more robust and diversified partnership, enhancing mutual prosperity and geopolitical stability in the region.

 

Conclusion

The Chabahar port project symbolizes the intricate fabric of India-Iran relations, intertwining economic ambitions with strategic considerations. Amidst the shifting tides of geopolitics, Chabahar emerges as a symbol of the enduring collaboration between the two nations.

Maintaining this foundational project while expanding economic collaboration and diplomatic finesse will be pivotal in fortifying and advancing the India-Iran relationship in the years ahead.

A Door to a Housing Scheme, Tribals Find Hard to Open

  • 27 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

According to a recent report, the Pradhan Mantri Janjati Adivasi Nyaya Maha Abhiyan (PM JANMAN) is facing challenges in implementation.

Context:

  • India is home to numerous tribal groups, including 75 identified as Particularly Vulnerable Tribal Groups (PVTGs) across various states.
  • To address their socio-economic backwardness, the Government of India launched the Pradhan Mantri PVTG Development Mission in 2023-24.
  • Despite this initiative, both PVTGs and frontline officials encounter significant challenges when using a mobile application to register for the housing scheme.

What is the Pradhan Mantri Janjati Adivasi Nyaya MahaAbhiyan (PM JANMAN)?

  • The Pradhan Mantri Janjati Adivasi Nyaya MahaAbhiyan (PM JANMAN) is an initiative launched by the Government of India to uplift and empower the Particularly Vulnerable Tribal Groups (PVTGs).

Its key objectives and implementation aspects:

  • The PM JANMAN initiative aims to ensure that PVTGs have access to essential services and improved living standards by addressing their critical needs through a comprehensive set of interventions.
    • One of the flagship programs under this initiative is the Housing scheme, a Direct Benefit Transfer (DBT) scheme designed to provide secure and habitable housing to PVTG households.
  • The Housing scheme targets to reach 4.90 lakh PVTG households by the year 2026, with each household entitled to receive ?2.39 lakh in three instalments.
    • This financial assistance is intended to enable these vulnerable communities to construct safe and durable houses, protecting them from environmental challenges and providing a sense of security and dignity.
  • By addressing the critical need for safe housing, along with other interventions focused on clean drinking water, sanitation, and other essential services, the PM JANMAN initiative aims to uplift the living conditions of PVTGs and empower them to overcome the challenges they face.
    • This comprehensive approach seeks to create a supportive environment for the overall development and well-being of these marginalized communities. CopyRetry

What are the Challenges Associated with PM JANMAN Housing Scheme Implementation?

Data Mismatch and Ineligibility Issues:

  • A significant challenge in the registration process is the widespread deletion of job cards, essential for registering for the PM JANMAN Housing scheme.
  • Over the past two years, more than eight crore MGNREGA workers' job cards, including those of PVTG members, have been deleted. This massive data purge has prevented many eligible households from registering for the scheme, thereby excluding them from receiving benefits.
  • Additionally, incorrect registrations have been reported, where individuals register using others' job cards.
  • This not only deprives rightful owners of their entitlements but also creates administrative burdens in correcting these errors.

Discrepancies in Data Collection Systems:

  • The 'Awaas+' registration app, used by block/panchayat-level officials, is critical for data collection but has significant discrepancies with other official records.
    • For instance, in Vanjari Panchayat, Alluri Sitharama Raju district, Andhra Pradesh, the app lists only 22 villages, while the MGNREGA Management Information System (MIS) lists 31 villages.
  • These discrepancies confuse beneficiaries and officials and may lead to the exclusion of eligible households.

App Usability and Confusion:

  • The 'Awaas+' app's user interface and functionality present several challenges. The app collects beneficiaries' data in three main areas: geographical location, household profiles, and bank account details.
  • However, its design and operational issues make the process cumbersome.
  • The app includes pre-populated village lists that often do not match official records, leading to incorrect registrations or an inability to register certain households.

Geo-tagging and Network Issues:

  • The app’s geo-tagging feature, meant to accurately record household locations and planned construction sites, faces issues due to network problems in remote areas.
  • These network issues hinder the geo-tagging process, resulting in incomplete or incorrect data entries, which affects registration and service delivery planning.

Financial Inclusion Barriers:

  • The app's bank selection functionality is another significant hurdle. Beneficiaries must choose from three categories of banks (Cooperative Bank, Commercial Bank, or Regional Rural Bank), each presenting numerous options.
    • For instance, selecting 'Commercial Bank' can display over 300 options, and choosing 'State Bank of India' can show over 500 branch options.
  • This complexity is overwhelming for beneficiaries and officials, especially those with limited digital literacy.
  • Despite the Government of India’s push for India Post Payments Bank (IPPB) to enhance financial inclusion in remote areas, the app does not list IPPB, limiting access to convenient banking services for many PVTG households.

Inclusivity and Accessibility Issues:

  • The app also fails to capture specific information about PVTGs, defaulting to a general 'ST' (Scheduled Tribe) category.
  • This oversight results in non-PVTG registrations, complicating the process further. Local officials sometimes require PVTG members to obtain certification from village leaders, problematic in areas where PVTGs and non-PVTGs coexist.
  • Additionally, network issues exacerbate the geo-tagging feature's challenges, adding to the difficulties faced by officials and beneficiaries alike.

Recommendations for Policymakers to Improve the PM JANMAN Scheme:

User-Friendly Application Interface:

  • Redesign the ‘Awaas+’ mobile app to simplify navigation with intuitive menus and clear instructions.
  • This will assist both beneficiaries and frontline officials who may not be tech-savvy. Include detailed guidelines on entering names and other details, especially when Aadhaar information is unavailable or differs from official records.

Accurate and Comprehensive Data Lists:

  • Ensure the app’s pre-populated lists of villages and other data fields are regularly updated and synchronized with other government databases, such as the MGNREGA Management Information System (MIS), to eliminate discrepancies.
  • Additionally, include explicit fields for PVTGs within the app to prevent incorrect registration of non-PVTG households.

Include IPPB in Banking Options:

  • Add the India Post Payments Bank (IPPB) to the list of available banks in the registration app.
  • Given IPPB’s extensive reach in rural and remote areas, this inclusion would significantly enhance financial access for PVTG households.
  • Simplify the bank selection process by implementing a search function or categorizing banks more effectively to facilitate easier selection by users.

Improve Technical Infrastructure:

  • Invest in improving network connectivity in remote areas to support geo-tagging and other app functionalities.
  • Partner with telecom companies to extend coverage to underserved regions and develop offline capabilities for the registration app, allowing data collection without immediate internet access and subsequent synchronization when connectivity is available.

Provide Comprehensive Training and Support:

  • Implement comprehensive training programs for frontline officials and community volunteers on using the app and managing the registration process efficiently.
  • Establish dedicated technical helplines or support centres to assist with real-time troubleshooting and provide guidance for users facing difficulties.

Conclusion

While various initiatives have targeted the vulnerabilities of PVTGs, accessing government benefits remains a substantial challenge for these marginalized communities. The PM JANMAN initiative stands as a potential avenue to enhance the well-being of PVTGs. However, it is imperative to address the existing obstacles in the registration process and prioritize inclusivity and accessibility. The PM JANMAN scheme presents an opportunity to shift the paradigm for PVTGs, but its success hinges on effectively tackling implementation challenges and fulfilling the commitments made.

 

 

Religion Should Not be the Sole Reason for Granting Reservation

  • 25 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

The Calcutta High Court has struck down a series of orders passed by the West Bengal government between March 2010 and May 2012 by which 77 communities (classes), 75 of which were Muslim, were given reservation under the Other Backward Classes (OBC) category.

Context:

  • In a significant ruling on Wednesday, the Calcutta High Court dismissed all Other Backward Classes (OBC) certificates issued in West Bengal since 2010.
  • A division bench of Justice Tapabrata Chakraborty and Justice Rajasekhar Mantha made this decision while addressing a public interest litigation (PIL) that challenged the process of granting OBC certificates.
  • The court directed that a new list of OBCs should be created based on the West Bengal Commission for Backward Classes Act of 1993.

What is the Issue With OBC Certificates?

  • In 2010, the West Bengal (WB) government issued notifications, on the recommendations of the West Bengal Backward Classes Commission, including 42 classes (41 from the Muslim community) as Other Backward Classes (OBCs), entitling them to reservation and representation in government employment under Article 16(4) of the Constitution.
  • Also in 2010, an order was issued sub-categorizing the 108 identified OBCs in the state (66 pre-existing and 42 newly identified) into 56 OBC-A (more Backward) and 52 OBC-B (Backward) categories.
  • In 2012, the West Bengal government included 35 classes (34 from the Muslim community) as OBCs.
  • In 2013, the West Bengal Backward Classes (Other than Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes) (Reservation of vacancies and posts) Act 2012 gave recognition to all 77 new OBCs.
  • These orders and legislation were challenged in the Calcutta High Court on the grounds that the declaration of classes as OBCs was based purely on religion, the categorization was not based on any acceptable data, and the survey conducted by the Commission was unscientific.

The Calcutta High Court's Ruling on West Bengal's Reservation Policies:

  • The court found that religion had been the sole basis for the state government to provide reservation, which is prohibited by the Constitution and court orders.
  • The High Court heavily relied on the Supreme Court's judgment in Indra Sawhney v Union of India (Mandal judgment).
    • In 1992, a nine-judge Bench held that OBCs cannot be identified and given reservation solely based on religion.
    • The Supreme Court also held that all states must establish a Backward Classes Commission to identify and recommend classes of citizens for inclusion and exclusion in the state OBC list.
  • The High Court noted that the Commission's recommendation had been made with "lightning speed" and without using any objective criteria to determine the backwardness of these classes.
  • The court stated that there is no question that the said communities have been used as a political prop for vote bank politics.
  • The court struck down some provisions of West Bengal's 2012 Act, including:
    • The provision allowed the state government to sub-classify OBC reservations into OBC-A and OBC-B categories.
    • The provision allows the state to amend the Schedule of the 2012 Act to add to the list of OBCs.
  • The court held that sub-classification is meant to address different levels of deprivation faced by different communities and could only be done based on scientific data.
  • Since the Commission acknowledged that the government did not consult it prior to sub-classification within OBC, the court ruled that the state government must consult the Commission to create a fair and unbiased classification.

The Position on Religiously-Based Reservations in the Constitution and Court Orders:

The Constitution of India:

  • Article 15(1) specifically prohibits the state from discriminating against citizens on grounds only of religion and caste (along with sex, race, and place of birth).
  • Article 16(2) specifically prohibits the state from discriminating against citizens on grounds only of religion, race, caste, sex, descent, place of birth, residence or any of them, in respect of any employment or office under the State.

The Observations of the Supreme Court:

  • In M R Balaji (1962), the SC held that while castes among Hindus may be an important factor to take into account when assessing the social backwardness of certain groups or classes of citizens, it cannot be the only test in this regard.
  • In E P Royappa vs State Of Tamil Nadu (1973), the SC held that equality is a dynamic concept and cannot be confined within traditional limits.
  • In State of Kerala vs N M Thomas (1975), the SC held that the crucial word 'only' in Articles 15 and Article 16 implies that if a religious, racial, or caste group constitutes a weaker section (under Article 46) or constitutes a backward class, it would be entitled to special provisions for its advancement.
  • The SC in Indra Sawhney (1992) laid down that any social group if found to be backward under the same criteria as others, will be entitled to be treated as a backward class.

What are the Current Provisions of Reservation?

  • The current provisions of reservation in India stem from the Constituent Assembly's decision to provide employment reservations for Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes under Article 16(4A) of the Constitution.
    • Initially approved for a period of 10 years, these reservations have been renewed annually ever since.
    • Notably, Christian and Muslim communities within the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes do not receive reservation benefits.
  • The decision not to extend reservation to religious minorities was influenced by the partition, as reflected in Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel's presentation of a special sub-committee report in 1949, addressing the issues faced by minority populations in East Punjab and West Bengal.
  • The committee, which included Nehru, Rajendra Prasad, KM Munshi, and Ambedkar, concluded that the country's conditions had changed to such an extent that "in the context of independent India and the present circumstances, it is no longer appropriate to reserve seats for Muslims, Christians, Sikhs, or any other religious minority."
  • They believed that reservations for religious communities "may lead to some degree of separatism and, to an extent, contradict the concept of a secular democratic state."
    • They argued that the fundamental rights of freedom of religion and the right of minorities to maintain their own educational institutions were sufficient safeguards for protecting minorities.
    • However, the Advisory Committee agreed that "the specific situation of the Scheduled Castes would make it necessary to grant them reservation for the originally decided ten-year period."
  • Ambedkar attempted to resolve several positions on the caste question by introducing the concept of backwardness and reservation as methods of creating a society beyond caste.

Arguments Related to Religion-based Reservation in India:

Arguments in Favour of Religion-Based Reservations in India:

  • Socio-Economic Backwardness: According to the Sachar Committee Report, Muslims in India lag behind other communities in terms of socio-economic indicators such as education, employment, and income.
    • Reservations can help in bridging this gap.
  • Constitutional Mandate: The Indian Constitution provides for affirmative action for socially and educationally backward classes irrespective of religious and cultural denomination.
  • Ensuring Adequate Representation: Reservations can ensure adequate representation of underrepresented religious groups in employment, education, and other fields.

Arguments Against Religion-Based Reservations in India:

  • Secularism: Critics argue that providing reservations based on religion goes against the principle of secularism enshrined in the Indian Constitution, which advocates equal treatment of all religions by the state.
  • Undermining National Unity: Religion-based reservations could undermine national unity as it could lead to resentment and division among different communities.
  • Economic Criteria: Reservations should be based solely on economic criteria rather than religion, to ensure that benefits reach those who are truly economically disadvantaged, irrespective of their religion.
  • Administrative Challenges: Implementing reservations based on religion could pose administrative challenges, such as determining the criteria for identifying beneficiaries and preventing misuse of the system.

Way Forward:

  • Socio-Economic Criteria: Instead of religion, reservations could be based on socio-economic criteria, ensuring that benefits reach the most disadvantaged individuals regardless of their religion.
  • Empowerment Through Education: Focus on improving educational infrastructure and providing skill development programs to empower the backward communities and enhance their socio-economic status.
  • Inclusive Policies: Implement inclusive policies that address the specific needs of the backward religious communities in areas such as education, employment, and healthcare, without resorting to religious-based reservations.
  • Dialogue and Consensus: Engage in a dialogue involving all stakeholders to arrive at a consensus to address the socio-economic challenges faced by the various communities, ensuring that any measures taken are in line with constitutional values and principles.

Conclusion

While recognizing the socio-economic disparities faced by various religious communities in India, the emphasis on inclusive policies based on socio-economic criteria emerges as pivotal. By prioritizing education empowerment, promoting dialogue, and fostering consensus, India can navigate towards a more equitable and inclusive society. By steering away from religion-based reservations and focusing on holistic development, India can uphold its constitutional values while addressing the diverse needs of its population.

 

A Message on the Model Code of Conduct for Leaders – From Mahabharata and Beyond

  • 24 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

In a democracy, while elections are imperative, it's equally crucial for both the populace and our leaders to retain their moral integrity, as a loss of ethical grounding could result in repercussions that extend far beyond the periodic act of political selection.

Context:

  •  Satyameva Jayate ("Truth alone triumphs") from the Mundaka Upanishad was adopted as the national motto on January 26, 1950, the day India became a Republic.
  • A day earlier, the country's Election Commission was formed with the primary responsibility of enabling citizens to exercise their democratic right to choose a government.
  • The Election Commission is expected to provide a level playing field so that candidates, political parties, and their campaigners do not unduly influence voters through excessive use of money, force, or dishonesty.

About The Model Code of Conduct (MCC):

  • The Election Commission of India introduced the Model Code of Conduct with the hope that it would encourage self-control among political stakeholders.
  • The 2019 Manual emphasized that those seeking public office should behave in a way worthy of being emulated by others.
  • The Commission considers the Code an important contribution by political parties to democracy.
  • It expects parties to exhibit model behaviour in their actions and rhetoric.
  • However, reality often deviates from this expectation. Political discourse sometimes degrades into coarse and ignoble exchanges.
  • This has led to debates on whether it should be called a moral code rather than just a model code.

The Complexity of Truth from a Philosophical Perspective:

  • Francis Bacon's Essay of Truth commences with Pilate's profound questioning, "What is truth?" - a query that resonates through the ages, its answer shrouded in layers of complexity.
  • This intricate nature finds symbolic representation in the Ashokan pillar's trio of visible lions, embodying the three dimensions of truth: my viewpoint, your perspective, and an objective third-person narrative.
  • Yet, there exists a fourth, unseen dimension - that of absolute truth, often perceived as knowable only to a higher power.
  • Amidst this philosophical labyrinth, the Election Commission of India (ECI) navigates the realm of human imperfection, striving to enforce the Model Code of Conduct (MCC) – a framework designed to curb dishonest practices during the electoral process.
  • However, expecting individuals to adhere to this model solely for the duration of elections, if they have not upheld such principles in their daily lives, could be considered a naive endeavor.

The Intersection of Morality and Law in the Electoral Process:

  • Foundations of the Model Code of Conduct (MCC):
  • At the core of the Model Code of Conduct lies a fundamental interplay between legal requirements and moral expectations.
    • Morality governs individual behaviour based on notions of right and wrong, often rooted in cultural, religious, or personal beliefs.
    • Law, conversely, comprises rules established by a governing authority to regulate conduct and ensure order and justice within society.
  • Philosophical perspectives offer valuable insights into this dynamic. Immanuel Kant's philosophy distinguishes between morality and law, viewing moral actions as those driven by a sense of duty, while societal rules govern legal actions.
    • Utilitarianism, advocated by thinkers like Jeremy Bentham and John Stuart Mill, evaluates actions based on their consequences and their contribution to the overall well-being of society.
    • In the context of the Model Code of Conduct, this perspective suggests that political behaviour should be assessed not only against legal standards but also by its broader impact on societal harmony and democratic health.
  • Legal Framework and Enforcement:
  • The legal framework encompassing the Model Code of Conduct includes specific provisions in the Indian Penal Code and the Representation of the People Act, 1951.
    • These laws define actions that constitute corrupt practices and electoral offences, providing a legal basis for enforcing the Code.
    • However, the intersection of morality and law within this framework presents unique challenges.
  • In legal terms, "mens rea" refers to the intention or knowledge of wrongdoing, and establishing mens rea is crucial for proving guilt in many cases.
    • The Model Code of Conduct implicitly addresses mens rea by prohibiting actions intended to manipulate or deceive voters, such as false promises or appeals to communal sentiments.
  • Sections 123(3) and 123(3A) of the Representation of the People Act classify appeals to caste or communal feelings as corrupt practices, punishable under the law.
    • Similarly, Section 125 prohibits promoting enmity between different groups in connection with elections.
    • These legal provisions aim to curb divisive tactics and uphold the ethical conduct envisioned by the Model Code of Conduct.
    • However, enforcement requires clear evidence linking the actions to the intent of influencing electoral outcomes.

Ethical Reflection in the Electoral Process & Lesson from Mahabharata:

  • Upholding Integrity: The imperative for ethical reflection in the electoral process stems from the need to uphold the integrity of democracy itself.
    • The conduct of elections must align with the core values of truth and fairness that underpin the democratic ethos.
  • Ethical Lesson from Mahabharata: The story of Yudhishthira in the Mahabharata, who lost his moral high ground despite technically telling the truth, underscores the importance of ethics over mere adherence to rules.
    • Ethics in elections transcends simply following the law; it involves adhering to higher standards of honesty, integrity, and fairness.
  • Moral Soundness over Legal Compliance: Ethical reflection ensures that political actions and decisions are not just legally compliant but also morally sound.
    • This is particularly crucial in a democracy, where the legitimacy of the government is derived from the consent of the governed, and this consent must be obtained through fair means.
  • Safeguarding Democratic Norms: When ethical standards are compromised, democratic norms such as transparency, accountability, and fairness are weakened.
    • This erosion can lead to a governance crisis where the authority of elected officials is questioned, undermining the very foundation upon which democracy rests.

Conclusion

“Satyameva Jayate” is not just India’s motto however it encapsulates a guiding principle that should permeate the conduct of individuals and institutions alike. The Election Commission of India's efforts to enforce the Model Code of Conduct reflect an ongoing struggle to strike a delicate balance between legal enforcement and moral persuasion. For a truly democratic society to thrive, this equilibrium must be continually sought and maintained. The pursuit of political power must never be allowed to erode the foundational value of truth upon which the democratic edifice rests. By upholding the principle of Satyameva Jayate, not just in rhetoric but in action, the integrity of the electoral process and the sanctity of democratic norms can be safeguarded, ensuring that the will of the people remains the cornerstone of governance.

 

 

 

 

India's Balancing Act: Navigating Iran Relations in the Face of Regional Turmoil and Leadership Transition

  • 23 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

The death of Iran’s President Ebrahim Raisi in a helicopter accident on May 20 has added another layer of uncertainty in a region already wracked by political tensions and war.

Context:

  • In the wake of President Ebrahim Raisi's unexpected passing in a helicopter accident on May 20, the geopolitical landscape of the region faces heightened uncertainty.
  • Despite the tragic event, the enduring influence of Supreme Leader Ayatollah Ali Khamenei suggests minimal immediate impact on Iran's policies.
  • However, this event prompts a closer examination of the evolving dynamics between India and Iran, amidst recent geopolitical shifts.

A Historical Perspective on India-Iran Relations:

  • Historical Background: India and Iran share a rich historical tie woven with deep-rooted cultural and economic connections spanning centuries.
    • From ancient times, both civilizations have influenced each other in language, culture, and commerce, fostering enduring ties.
    • Following India's independence in 1947, formal diplomatic relations were swiftly established between the two nations.
    • Despite the divergence of their Cold War alliances—India with the Non-Aligned Movement and Iran aligning with the United States—mutual respect characterized their interactions.
    • The Iranian Revolution in 1979 heralded a shift in Iran's ideological stance, yet India remained committed to nurturing bilateral relations, recognizing the significance of regional stability and economic collaboration.
  • Economic and Energy Collaboration: Central to the India-Iran partnership is their robust energy cooperation, with Iran serving as a vital supplier of oil and natural gas to India.
    • In addressing India's burgeoning energy demands, Iranian resources have played a pivotal role in sustaining India's economic growth.
    • The early 2000s witnessed landmark agreements, including long-term oil supply pacts and discussions on strategic pipeline projects like the Iran-Pakistan-India (IPI) gas pipeline.
  • Strategic Imperatives; Strategically, India has recognized Iran's pivotal role in shaping the dynamics of the broader West Asian region.
    • Both nations have shared interests, notably in fostering stability in Afghanistan.
    • Iran's geographic position offers India a strategic gateway to Central Asia, circumventing Pakistan—a factor underscored by India's investments in projects such as the Chabahar port, aimed at bolstering connectivity to Afghanistan and beyond.

Recent Shifts and Implications for India-Iran Relations:

  • The Abraham Accords and Evolving Regional Dynamics: The 2020 Abraham Accords, facilitated by the US, introduced a new layer of complexity to regional geopolitics.
    • These agreements, which normalized ties between Israel and several Arab nations including the UAE and Bahrain, were perceived as part of a broader US strategy to counterbalance Iran's influence.
    • India's active involvement in the I2U2 coalition (India, Israel, UAE, and the US) signals its alignment with this strategy, potentially signalling a departure from traditional bilateral collaborations, a shift Iran has taken note of.
  • India-Middle-East Economic Corridor (IMEC) Initiative: The unveiling of the IMEC project during the 2023 G20 summit in New Delhi marks a pivotal development.
    • This initiative proposes a transportation network linking India to Israel via the UAE and Saudi Arabia, presenting a strategic alternative route that bypasses Iran.
    • The IMEC underscores India's commitment to integrating into evolving economic and strategic frameworks in West Asia, potentially reshaping traditional ties with Iran.
  • Impact of US Sanctions: The reinstatement of US sanctions on Iran following the Trump administration's withdrawal from the Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action (JCPOA) in 2018 had profound implications for India-Iran economic relations.
    • These sanctions triggered a significant reduction in India's oil imports from Iran, prompting India to seek alternative energy sources.
    • While this strained the economic aspect of bilateral ties, India remained interested in advancing projects like the Chabahar port despite the challenges posed by the sanctions.

Strategic Implications and Hurdles with the Chabahar Project:

Strategic Importance:

  • The Chabahar endeavour stands as a linchpin within India's regional connectivity and strategic framework.
  • Nestled along Iran's southeastern coast, the port furnishes India with direct access to the Arabian Sea, offering a vital alternative to China's Gwadar port under its Belt and Road Initiative.
  • Positioned as a gateway to Afghanistan and Central Asia, Chabahar bolsters India's geopolitical foothold, circumventing historical barriers imposed by Pakistan.
  • Envisioned as a nucleus of economic activity, the port holds the promise of catalyzing trade and investment between India, Iran, and Afghanistan, unlocking the vast potential of Central Asian markets.
  • By fostering Chabahar's development, India aims to provide a counterbalance to China's Gwadar port, positioning itself as a pivotal player in reshaping regional trade dynamics.

Navigating Challenges Amid Strategic Imperatives:

  • Despite its strategic allure, the Chabahar project grapples with multifaceted challenges.
  • US sanctions have cast a pall over international investments and hindered crucial financial transactions vital for the port's advancement.
  • The seismic shift in Afghanistan's political landscape following the Taliban's resurgence has cast uncertainty over the project's trajectory.
  • The original tripartite agreement, contingent upon the stability offered by the erstwhile US-backed Ghani regime, now faces an altered reality.
  • The enduring viability of Chabahar hinges on regional stability and collaboration, factors further complicated by Iran's economic woes amidst ongoing sanctions.
  • Persistent geopolitical tensions pose formidable obstacles to the sustained success of this ambitious undertaking, underscoring the need for adept navigation amid strategic imperatives.

Future Trajectories for India-Iran Relations:

  • Pursuing Strategic Autonomy: Chabahar demonstrates India's pursuit of strategic autonomy, allowing it to navigate geopolitical landscapes and assert regional influence.
    • Balancing relations with Iran, the US, and other regional players enables India to maintain a multifaceted foreign policy that serves its strategic objectives.
  • Leveraging International Cooperation: India could explore collaborations with international partners like the EU to mitigate the impact of US sanctions and garner diplomatic and economic support.
    • Strengthening ties with Central Asian countries may enhance Chabahar's economic prospects.
  • Commitment to Regional Stability: India's continued engagement with Afghanistan, including humanitarian aid, underscores its commitment to regional stability and connectivity through Chabahar.
    • Maintaining a presence in Afghanistan highlights the strategic importance of Chabahar as a key node for regional diplomacy and economic activity.

Conclusion

The sudden demise of Iran's President Ebrahim Raisi exacerbates uncertainty in an already tumultuous region. India must deftly balance its strategic interests amidst competing regional powers and the intricate landscape of geopolitical rivalries and international sanctions. The revival of the Chabahar project exemplifies India's strategic adaptability but also underscores the precarious nature of its regional engagements. India's ability to exhibit strategic foresight and diplomatic finesse will be crucial in effectively navigating the ever-changing geopolitical environment.

 

C Raja Mohan writes: A time for para diplomacy

  • 22 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

Recently, the Shiromani Akali Dal came out with its poll manifesto and said it would seek the transfer of Kartarpur Sahib from Pakistan to India through mutual land exchange between the two countries.

Context:

  • The Shiromani Akali Dal's (SAD) proposal to retrieve Kartarpur Sahib from Pakistan through a negotiated territory exchange reflects a growing desire to transform the India-Pakistan border from a zone of conflict to one of cooperation and economic integration.
  • This idea might appear as unlikely as the Bharatiya Janata Party's (BJP) pledge to integrate Pakistan-occupied Kashmir (PoK) into India.
  • Nonetheless, it signifies a profound aspiration to transform the India-Pakistan border from a contentious zone into one characterized by cooperation and economic integration.

What is Para Diplomacy?

Origins of Paradiplomacy:

  • The concept of para-diplomacy was first proposed in 1990 by John Kincaid, an American scholar who outlined a foreign policy role for local governments within a democratic federal system.
  • Economic para diplomacy related to trade and investment in particular has become an institutionalised practice across the world – in federal states like the United States, Canada and Belgium, quasi-federal states like Spain, non-federal states like Japan and even non-democratic states like the People’s Republic of China.

Aims and Objectives of Paradiplomacy:

  • Paradiplomacy can be employed with a variety of aims which can range from bringing in a decentralised dimension to international debates to internationalisation of domestic issues by bringing regional issues onto the global stage, promoting trade, tourism, cultural ties and even post-conflict reconciliation to local political activism being sought for international support.
  • Subnational relations can also be conducted to promote and attract investments seeking region-specific economic advantages.

Drivers of Paradiplomacy:

  • In more ways than one, paradiplomacy owes its origins to globalisation.
  • As the world economy has become increasingly global and increasingly integrated in a variety of ways, sub-national units (regions, states, provinces and even cities) find their functions and activities circumscribed by the global system.
  • Federalism is also a key contributor to the growth of paradiplomacy.
  • Sub-national actors such as states and provinces that have a formal legal personality are necessarily more likely to engage in international activities designed to promote and protect local and international interests and prerogatives.

 

What are the Challenges Associated with BJP and SAD’s Territorial Ambitions?

  • Practical Hurdles in BJP and SAD's Territorial Objectives: The proposals put forth by the SAD to renegotiate the Radcliffe Line in Punjab or the BJP's assertion to reclaim PoK face numerous challenges.
    • Altering the territorial status quo in Punjab or reclaiming PoK, whether through diplomatic negotiations or by force, presents formidable obstacles.
  • Complexities and Resistance: Such endeavours would not merely disrupt the already delicate territorial equilibrium but also provoke substantial opposition, given the deep-rooted historical and ongoing tensions between India and Pakistan.
  • Pursuing a Pragmatic Approach: A more viable alternative lies in reimagining these borders as conduits for trade and collaboration rather than confrontation.
    • This pragmatic stance resonates with the SAD's additional proposal to reopen the Attari and Hussainiwala borders with Pakistan for trade and tourism, with the aim of fostering economic prosperity in the region.

 

Obstacles Hindering Economic Cooperation Between India and Pakistan:

  • Political and Military Resistance in Pakistan: One of the foremost barriers to economic cooperation stems from the entrenched position of Pakistan's military and political establishment.
    • Over the years, the Pakistani military's steadfast opposition to economic engagement with India, primarily due to unresolved issues surrounding Kashmir, has been a significant deterrent.
    • Despite occasional signs of thaw, such as the February 2021 ceasefire agreement, internal resistance has consistently impeded progress.
    • Even Prime Minister Imran Khan's tentative consideration of resuming trade ties with India faced vehement opposition, highlighting the deep-seated reluctance to normalize relations without addressing the Kashmir dispute.
  • Historical Context and Suspicion: The historical animosities dating back to the traumatic partition of 1947 and subsequent wars have entrenched mutual suspicion and distrust between the two nations.
    • These historical grievances have not only shaped national narratives but also influenced contemporary policy decisions.
    • Addressing underlying political tensions becomes imperative for either country to fully commit to economic cooperation.
  • Lack of Reciprocal Trade Policies: On the trade front, Pakistan's refusal to grant India the Most Favoured Nation (MFN) status remains a significant hurdle.
    • While India extended this status to Pakistan in 1996 to foster trade ties, the gesture was not reciprocated.
    • Subsequent events, such as India's withdrawal of MFN status post the Pulwama terror attack and the revocation of Jammu and Kashmir's special constitutional status, have further strained bilateral trade relations.
  • Economic Rationality vs. Political Baggage: Despite the evident economic benefits of trade, Pakistan's establishment remains wary of engaging with India due to historical conflicts and the overarching Kashmir issue.
    • While there have been instances where the Pakistani business community advocated for resuming trade ties, such appeals often faced resistance from the political and military elite, who prioritize geopolitical concerns over economic pragmatism.
  • Regional Stability and Security Concerns: Security concerns, including allegations of cross-border terrorism, complicate the economic relationship between India and Pakistan.
    • Heightened military vigilance and frequent skirmishes along the border hinder trade and perpetuate an environment of hostility and mistrust.
    • The ongoing conflict and the threat of terrorist activities cast a shadow over efforts to normalize trade relations.

 

Proposing a New Strategy for Improving India-Pakistan Relations:

  • Introduction of Special Economic Zones: A significant aspect of the SAD's manifesto is the proposition to convert the Punjab border into a special economic zone, aiming to nurture small and medium enterprises and potentially revolutionize India-Pakistan relations.
    • This innovative vision encompasses the idea of Pakistan establishing a parallel zone on its side, fostering integrated development and economic interdependence.
    • Drawing inspiration from successful models of cross-border economic zones in Southeast Asia and China's collaborative initiatives with neighbouring countries, such an endeavour holds promise for fostering mutual prosperity.
  • Leveraging Para Diplomacy: At the heart of these proposals lies the concept of para diplomacy, or sub-state diplomacy, wherein provincial and local governments engage in formal interactions to advance national interests.
    • This approach offers a novel means to navigate around the entrenched positions often held by national governments, presenting fresh avenues for cooperation.
    • While historical attempts at para diplomacy between East and West Punjab have surfaced intermittently, they have struggled to endure amidst overarching national conflicts.
    • Embracing these innovative strategies could pave the way for a constructive dialogue and sustainable cooperation between India and Pakistan, fostering mutual understanding and prosperity in the region.

 

Fostering Consensus and Cooperative Federalism for Sustainable India-Pakistan Relations:

  • To foster sustainable and productive economic cooperation between India and Pakistan, nurturing a robust consensus between the central government and state governments, particularly those in the border regions, is imperative.
    • This collaborative approach, known as cooperative federalism, holds the key to innovative diplomatic strategies that prioritize the interests of local populations.
  • India's federal structure has historically grappled with tensions between the central and state governments, particularly concerning foreign policy and cross-border cooperation.
  • The diverse political landscapes across Indian states often give rise to conflicting interests and priorities.
    • For example, West Bengal's interactions with Bangladesh have been marked by complexities stemming from differing perspectives between the state leadership and the central government.
  • Similarly, Tamil Nadu's influence on India's policies towards Sri Lanka has been substantial, occasionally complicating bilateral relations due to the state's concerns for the Tamil population in Sri Lanka.
  • Cooperative federalism entails the harmonious collaboration of national and state governments to achieve shared objectives while respecting the autonomy of state governments.
    • By aligning state objectives with national interests, this approach offers a pragmatic framework for managing border relations and fostering economic cooperation with neighbouring countries.
  • Embracing consensus and cooperative federalism is paramount for forging a path towards peace, stability, and prosperity in the region, laying the groundwork for enduring and mutually beneficial relations between India and Pakistan.

Why is it in the News?

Recently, the Shiromani Akali Dal came out with its poll manifesto and said it would seek the transfer of Kartarpur Sahib from Pakistan to India through mutual land exchange between the two countries.

Context:

  • The Shiromani Akali Dal's (SAD) proposal to retrieve Kartarpur Sahib from Pakistan through a negotiated territory exchange reflects a growing desire to transform the India-Pakistan border from a zone of conflict to one of cooperation and economic integration.
  • This idea might appear as unlikely as the Bharatiya Janata Party's (BJP) pledge to integrate Pakistan-occupied Kashmir (PoK) into India.
  • Nonetheless, it signifies a profound aspiration to transform the India-Pakistan border from a contentious zone into one characterized by cooperation and economic integration

What is Para Diplomacy?

Origins of Paradiplomacy:

  • The concept of para-diplomacy was first proposed in 1990 by John Kincaid, an American scholar who outlined a foreign policy role for local governments within a democratic federal system.
  • Economic para diplomacy related to trade and investment in particular has become an institutionalised practice across the world – in federal states like the United States, Canada and Belgium, quasi-federal states like Spain, non-federal states like Japan and even non-democratic states like the People’s Republic of China.

Aims and Objectives of Paradiplomacy:

  • Paradiplomacy can be employed with a variety of aims which can range from bringing in a decentralised dimension to international debates to internationalisation of domestic issues by bringing regional issues onto the global stage, promoting trade, tourism, cultural ties and even post-conflict reconciliation to local political activism being sought for international support.
  • Subnational relations can also be conducted to promote and attract investments seeking region-specific economic advantages.

Drivers of Paradiplomacy:

  • In more ways than one, paradiplomacy owes its origins to globalisation.
  • As the world economy has become increasingly global and increasingly integrated in a variety of ways, sub-national units (regions, states, provinces and even cities) find their functions and activities circumscribed by the global system.
  • Federalism is also a key contributor to the growth of paradiplomacy.
  • Sub-national actors such as states and provinces that have a formal legal personality are necessarily more likely to engage in international activities designed to promote and protect local and international interests and prerogatives.

 

What are the Challenges Associated with BJP and SAD’s Territorial Ambitions?

  • Practical Hurdles in BJP and SAD's Territorial Objectives: The proposals put forth by the SAD to renegotiate the Radcliffe Line in Punjab or the BJP's assertion to reclaim PoK face numerous challenges.
    • Altering the territorial status quo in Punjab or reclaiming PoK, whether through diplomatic negotiations or by force, presents formidable obstacles.
  • Complexities and Resistance: Such endeavours would not merely disrupt the already delicate territorial equilibrium but also provoke substantial opposition, given the deep-rooted historical and ongoing tensions between India and Pakistan.
  • Pursuing a Pragmatic Approach: A more viable alternative lies in reimagining these borders as conduits for trade and collaboration rather than confrontation.
    • This pragmatic stance resonates with the SAD's additional proposal to reopen the Attari and Hussainiwala borders with Pakistan for trade and tourism, with the aim of fostering economic prosperity in the region.

 

Obstacles Hindering Economic Cooperation Between India and Pakistan:

  • Political and Military Resistance in Pakistan: One of the foremost barriers to economic cooperation stems from the entrenched position of Pakistan's military and political establishment.
    • Over the years, the Pakistani military's steadfast opposition to economic engagement with India, primarily due to unresolved issues surrounding Kashmir, has been a significant deterrent.
    • Despite occasional signs of thaw, such as the February 2021 ceasefire agreement, internal resistance has consistently impeded progress.
    • Even Prime Minister Imran Khan's tentative consideration of resuming trade ties with India faced vehement opposition, highlighting the deep-seated reluctance to normalize relations without addressing the Kashmir dispute.
  • Historical Context and Suspicion: The historical animosities dating back to the traumatic partition of 1947 and subsequent wars have entrenched mutual suspicion and distrust between the two nations.
    • These historical grievances have not only shaped national narratives but also influenced contemporary policy decisions.
    • Addressing underlying political tensions becomes imperative for either country to fully commit to economic cooperation.
  • Lack of Reciprocal Trade Policies: On the trade front, Pakistan's refusal to grant India the Most Favoured Nation (MFN) status remains a significant hurdle.
    • While India extended this status to Pakistan in 1996 to foster trade ties, the gesture was not reciprocated.
    • Subsequent events, such as India's withdrawal of MFN status post the Pulwama terror attack and the revocation of Jammu and Kashmir's special constitutional status, have further strained bilateral trade relations.
  • Economic Rationality vs. Political Baggage: Despite the evident economic benefits of trade, Pakistan's establishment remains wary of engaging with India due to historical conflicts and the overarching Kashmir issue.
    • While there have been instances where the Pakistani business community advocated for resuming trade ties, such appeals often faced resistance from the political and military elite, who prioritize geopolitical concerns over economic pragmatism.
  • Regional Stability and Security Concerns: Security concerns, including allegations of cross-border terrorism, complicate the economic relationship between India and Pakistan.
    • Heightened military vigilance and frequent skirmishes along the border hinder trade and perpetuate an environment of hostility and mistrust.
    • The ongoing conflict and the threat of terrorist activities cast a shadow over efforts to normalize trade relations.

 

Proposing a New Strategy for Improving India-Pakistan Relations:

  • Introduction of Special Economic Zones: A significant aspect of the SAD's manifesto is the proposition to convert the Punjab border into a special economic zone, aiming to nurture small and medium enterprises and potentially revolutionize India-Pakistan relations.
    • This innovative vision encompasses the idea of Pakistan establishing a parallel zone on its side, fostering integrated development and economic interdependence.
    • Drawing inspiration from successful models of cross-border economic zones in Southeast Asia and China's collaborative initiatives with neighbouring countries, such an endeavour holds promise for fostering mutual prosperity.
  • Leveraging Para Diplomacy: At the heart of these proposals lies the concept of para diplomacy, or sub-state diplomacy, wherein provincial and local governments engage in formal interactions to advance national interests.
    • This approach offers a novel means to navigate around the entrenched positions often held by national governments, presenting fresh avenues for cooperation.
    • While historical attempts at para diplomacy between East and West Punjab have surfaced intermittently, they have struggled to endure amidst overarching national conflicts.
    • Embracing these innovative strategies could pave the way for a constructive dialogue and sustainable cooperation between India and Pakistan, fostering mutual understanding and prosperity in the region.

 

Fostering Consensus and Cooperative Federalism for Sustainable India-Pakistan Relations:

  • To foster sustainable and productive economic cooperation between India and Pakistan, nurturing a robust consensus between the central government and state governments, particularly those in the border regions, is imperative.
    • This collaborative approach, known as cooperative federalism, holds the key to innovative diplomatic strategies that prioritize the interests of local populations.
  • India's federal structure has historically grappled with tensions between the central and state governments, particularly concerning foreign policy and cross-border cooperation.
  • The diverse political landscapes across Indian states often give rise to conflicting interests and priorities.
    • For example, West Bengal's interactions with Bangladesh have been marked by complexities stemming from differing perspectives between the state leadership and the central government.
  • Similarly, Tamil Nadu's influence on India's policies towards Sri Lanka has been substantial, occasionally complicating bilateral relations due to the state's concerns for the Tamil population in Sri Lanka.
  • Cooperative federalism entails the harmonious collaboration of national and state governments to achieve shared objectives while respecting the autonomy of state governments.
    • By aligning state objectives with national interests, this approach offers a pragmatic framework for managing border relations and fostering economic cooperation with neighbouring countries.
  • Embracing consensus and cooperative federalism is paramount for forging a path towards peace, stability, and prosperity in the region, laying the groundwork for enduring and mutually beneficial relations between India and Pakistan.

Conclusion

Irrespective of its political orientation, the upcoming Indian government should regard para-diplomacy as a strategic asset in its foreign policy arsenal. This approach demands not only robust dialogue between the central government and the border provinces but also concerted efforts to align the interests of the inhabitants of these regions with broader national objectives. By embracing para diplomacy, India can lay the groundwork for a more harmonious and economically fruitful relationship with Pakistan, turning contentious borders into conduits of cooperation.

Critical Times Call for Strong Judicial Adjudication

  • 21 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

The process of judicial review should be strong, immediate, and unambiguous in the case of statutes that are obviously unconstitutional or divisive.

Context:

  • The role of judicial review has become increasingly significant in contemporary times.
  • The Supreme Court of India is currently examining a crucial case regarding the constitutionality of the Citizenship (Amendment) Act (CAA) and its associated rules.
  • The ambiguity in these rules has raised concerns, especially for applicants whose citizenship requests have been denied, highlighting the urgent need for redress.
  • Additionally, the issue of dual citizenship for foreign applicants, without renouncing their original citizenship, has created a conflict with the law.
  • This ambiguity goes against the Parent Act's spirit, as some petitioners pointed out.

Legislative Malice, Judicial Review, and the Challenge of Populist Regimes:

  • Constitutional courts do not routinely interdict statutes or statutory rules, as laws passed by Parliament are generally presumed valid unless proven to contravene constitutional provisions.
    • Moreover, the legal doctrine maintains that malice cannot typically be attributed to the legislative process, as established in Manish Kumar vs Union of India (2021).
  • In Gurudevdatta Vikoos Maryadit vs State Of Maharashtra (2001), the Supreme Court further emphasized that "legislative malice is beyond the pale of jurisdiction of the law courts."
    • However, this conventional wisdom may be insufficient when addressing the unique challenges posed by populist regimes employing motivated legislation.
  • As populist governments worldwide increasingly weaponize legislation to further their political agendas, the question arises as to whether constitutional courts should reconsider their stance on legislative malice.
    • Given the potential for populist regimes to undermine democratic principles and erode the rule of law, the need for robust judicial review has never been greater.
  • In light of these challenges, a careful reevaluation of the limits of judicial intervention may be necessary to ensure that the rights and freedoms enshrined in constitutional democracies are protected from malicious legislative actions.

Judicial Challenges and Lessons from the Recent Cases:

  • Recent cases have highlighted the pressing need for a more proactive judiciary in safeguarding democratic principles and the rule of law.
  • In Vivek Narayan Sharma vs Union of India (2023), the irreversible consequences of the absence of judicial intervention regarding Kashmir's special status were brought to the forefront.
  • The Anoop Baranwal vs Union of India (2023) case underscored the necessity for an independent body to select the Election Commission of India (ECI).
    • However, the Chief Election Commissioner and other Election Commissioners (Appointment, Conditions of Service and Term of Office) Act, 2023, reintroduced the "Prime Minister's Committee" system for ECI appointments, raising concerns about the impartiality of the selection process.
  • When this Act was challenged in Jaya Thakur vs Union of India (2024), the Court declined to halt its implementation, citing the presumption of validity.
    • This decision exemplifies how an overly deferential approach to legislative actions can potentially jeopardize democratic institutions and processes.

Case Studies and Implications of Targeted Legislation:

  • The Citizenship (Amendment) Act (CAA): CAA exemplifies targeted legislation, as it explicitly excludes Muslims from the citizenship application process, demonstrating a clear case of legislative malice through religious categorization.
  • Tripple Talaq case: Another instance of targeted legislation is the Muslim Women (Protection of Rights on Marriage) Act (2019), which criminalized instant triple talaq.
    • Despite the Supreme Court declaring instant triple talaq void in Shayara Bano (2017), the Act's criminalization of an already legally invalid practice appears excessive and unnecessary.
  • Unintended effects: Unintended consequences have arisen from the triple talaq legislation, as some individuals now resort to alternative divorce methods or desertion to avoid potential legal repercussions.
    • Although the law aimed to protect Muslim women, it has paradoxically worsened their situation.
    • Furthermore, such divisive measures have inspired similar legislation in other states, such as anti-conversion laws, perpetuating social divisions.
  • These cases reveal the need for a vigilant judiciary to scrutinize targeted legislation and ensure that laws do not perpetuate discrimination or undermine fundamental rights.
    • Addressing legislative malice is essential for preserving the integrity of democratic institutions and upholding constitutional principles.

Judicial Scrutiny in Contemporary Politics: International Perspectives and Indian Precedents

  • The Evolution of Judicial Scrutiny in Modern Politics: Traditionally, the United States has been cautious about judicial nullification of statutes based on malicious intent.
    • John Hart Ely argued that using the Constitution to penalize perceived ill intentions of political leaders is inappropriate.
  • Susannah W. Pollvogt's Viewpoint on Discriminatory Law: However, in today's political climate, where legislative actions driven by malice are increasingly common, a growing need for more rigorous judicial scrutiny has emerged.
    • Scholar Susannah W. Pollvogt contends that animus, or hostility, can never justify discriminatory state actions under equal protection analysis.
    • She cites the United States Dept. of Agriculture vs Moreno (1973) to illustrate how legislation targeting specific groups reflects discriminatory intent and a desire to cause harm.
  • Indian Legal Precedents for Judicial Intervention: In India, there are instances where the Supreme Court has intervened to halt the implementation of parliamentary legislation.
    • In Ashoka Kumar Thakur vs Union of India (2007), the Court issued a judicial injunction regarding the allocation of a 27% quota for Other Backward Community (OBC) candidates in professional colleges.
  • More recently, in Rakesh Vaishnav vs Union of India (2021), the Supreme Court's stay order on three controversial farm laws effectively prevented their enforcement.
    • This intervention eventually led to the government's withdrawal of the laws amidst widespread farmer protests.
  • These cases demonstrate the vital role of the judiciary in safeguarding fundamental rights and democratic principles.
  • As legislative malice becomes more prevalent, judicial scrutiny must evolve to ensure that laws do not perpetuate discrimination or undermine constitutional values.

Conclusion

To protect constitutional principles and democratic values, judicial review must be prompt, vigorous, and unambiguous when confronted with divisive or unconstitutional statutes. The Supreme Court should learn from its past decisions and recognize the political impact of its actions, particularly during critical moments. Delayed adjudication can render constitutional review ineffective, making time-sensitive intervention essential in addressing malicious and unconstitutional legislation.

Hyperpoliticisation of Indian Higher Education

  • 20 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

The hyperpoliticisation of Indian higher education is a grave threat to academic institutions, the academic profession, and intellectual life in general.

Context:

  • The higher education system in India is one of the largest globally, showcasing its rich historical legacy and future ambitions.
  • The country is home to an impressive range of institutions, including the globally renowned Indian Institutes of Technology (IITs) and Indian Institutes of Management (IIMs), as well as a vast network of universities and colleges.
  • Notably, the QS World University Rankings for Asia 2024 highlight India as having the most represented higher education system.
  • However, this expansive framework faces numerous challenges and opportunities that shape the current higher education landscape in India.
  • While access has significantly expanded, concerns about quality, relevance, and the ability to prepare youth for the 21st century remain.
  • Additionally, recent reports have pointed to a troubling trend of increasing politicization within Indian higher education institutions, which threatens academic freedom, intellectual discourse, and overall educational quality.

Current Status of Higher Education in India:

As per the All India Survey of Higher Education (AISHE) 2021-22, released in January 2024:

  • Student Enrolment: Higher education institutes have seen a significant rise in student enrolment, reaching 4.33 crore in 2021-22 from 4.14 crore in 2020-21 and 3.42 crore in 2014-15.
    • Notably, women's enrolment has surged by 32% to 2.07 crore in 2021-22 from 1.5 crore in 2014-15, with the highest proportion enrolled at the postgraduate level (55.4%).
  • Gross Enrolment Ratio (GER) and Gender Parity Index (GPI): India's estimated GER for the age group 18-23 years stands at 28.4%.
    • The GPI, reflecting the female GER to male GER ratio, is 1.01 at the national level, indicating gender parity.
  • Discipline-wise Enrolment: At the undergraduate level, the Bachelor of Arts (BA) programme leads with 34.2% enrolment, followed by science (14.8%), commerce (13.3%), and engineering and technology (11.8%).
    • Social science dominates postgraduate enrolment, with around 10.8 lakh students.
  • Primacy of Government Institutions: Government universities attract 73.7% of all students, despite comprising only 58.6% of all universities.
    • State public universities hold the largest share of enrolment, accounting for approximately 31% of government-owned universities.

Current Challenges in India's Higher Education System:

  • Politicization and Lack of Autonomy: Concerns arise regarding the growing politicization of higher education institutions, including allegations of political interference in appointments and curriculum decisions.
    • Many institutions lack autonomy in crucial areas like faculty recruitment and curriculum design, hindering innovation and adaptability.
  • Inequitable Access and Low GER: Access to higher education remains unequal, with disparities based on socio-economic status, gender, and geography.
    • Although India's Gross Enrolment Ratio (GER) has improved (currently 28.4%), it still falls below the global average of 36.7%.
  • Limited Funding: Budget cuts in the education sector, including a 7% reduction in the Interim Budget 2024-25 and a 61% decrease in the allocation for the University Grants Commission, pose significant challenges.
    • Despite rising Gross Expenditure on Research and Development (GERD), India's R&D investment as a percentage of GDP lags behind other countries.
  • Shortage of Faculty and Brain Drain: There is a severe shortage of qualified faculty members in Indian higher education institutions, with over 30% of teaching positions vacant in 45 Central Universities as of 2023.
    • The brain drain of talented academics to other countries or the private sector exacerbates this issue.
  • Inadequate Industry-Academia Collaboration: Insufficient collaboration between higher education institutions and industries leads to a skill gap among graduates, with a significant demand-supply gap in key roles such as ML engineer and data scientist.
  • Uneven Regional Development: Higher education institutions' development varies across regions and states, with states like Delhi, Tamil Nadu, and Maharashtra hosting more reputed institutions compared to northeastern and central regions, which face challenges in terms of quality and access.

How Can the Higher Education System in India Be Revamped?

  • Redefine Universities' Role: Shift focus from rote learning to practical skill development through project-based learning, internships, and industry collaborations.
    • Encourage universities to engage with local communities on social development projects, promoting social responsibility among students.
    • Transform institutes from "Degree Issuers" to "Skill Generators."
  • Open Educational Resources (OER): Enhance the National Digital Library of India and promote the development and adoption of open educational resources, like MIT OpenCourseWare, providing free access to quality educational materials.
    • This approach could reduce costs, enhance access, and foster a culture of knowledge sharing.
  • Entrepreneurship and Innovation Centers: Establish dedicated centres within universities, inspired by Stanford University's StartX program, offering mentorship, funding opportunities, and a supportive ecosystem for students and faculty to transform innovative ideas into successful ventures.
  • Dual Study Programs: Implement phase-wise dual study programs, inspired by Germany's apprenticeship model, where students combine theoretical learning at universities with practical training in companies.
    • This approach ensures industry-relevant skill development and enhances employability.
  • Competency-based Credentialing and Blockchain Certificates: Implement a competency-based credentialing system that recognizes skills and competencies acquired through various learning pathways.
    • Leverage blockchain technology to issue tamper-proof, verifiable digital certificates and credentials, promoting lifelong learning, skill-based education, and recognition of diverse learning experiences.
  • Transnational Education Partnerships: Promote collaborations with reputed international universities for joint degrees, twinning programs, or branch campuses.
    • This approach could enhance global exposure, facilitate knowledge transfer, and improve the international competitiveness of Indian higher education.

Key Government Initiatives in Higher Education:

  • National Education Policy (NEP) 2020: Aims to transform the education system, focusing on multidisciplinary learning, skill development, and promoting research and innovation.
    • It proposes increasing the Gross Enrollment Ratio in higher education to 50% by 2035.
  • Institutions of Eminence (IoE) Scheme: Launched in 2018, this scheme selects 20 institutions to enjoy complete autonomy, aiming to improve their global rankings and enhance higher education quality.
  • National Credit Framework: Designed to integrate training and skill development into the education system.
    • Credits earned by students will be stored digitally in the Academic Bank of Credits, accessible via a linked Digilocker account.
  • Revamped Accreditation and Ranking Systems: The National Institutional Ranking Framework (NIRF) ranks higher education institutions across categories, while the revamped National Assessment and Accreditation Council (NAAC) ensures quality standards among institutions.
  • Digital Initiatives: SWAYAM, an online learning platform, offers courses from school to postgraduate levels.
    • The National Digital Library of India provides access to educational resources.
  • SHE under INSPIRE: The Scholarship for Higher Education (SHE) program, part of the Innovation in Science Pursuit for Inspired Research (INSPIRE) by the Department of Science and Technology (DST), supports deserving students in basic and natural sciences at undergraduate, postgraduate levels and encourages research careers through scholarships.
  • Study in India Program: Launched in 2018, this program attracts international students by offering scholarships and streamlining admission processes.
  • Foreign Institutions in India: The University Grants Commission's 2023 regulations allow foreign universities ranked among the world's top 500 to establish branch campuses in India.

Conclusion

India's higher education sector is undergoing significant reforms and initiatives aimed at enhancing quality, accessibility, and global competitiveness. Through policies like the National Education Policy 2020 and programs such as Institutions of Eminence, the government is prioritizing multidisciplinary learning, skill development, and research promotion. Digital initiatives like SWAYAM and the Study in India Program further contribute to modernizing and internationalizing higher education, while efforts to attract foreign institutions and scholarships underscore India's commitment to fostering innovation and excellence in education.

 

Challenges in the Way to Achieve Green Growth and Solutions

  • 18 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

The recent heatwave has reminded us of the stark risks posed by climate change and highlighted the criticality of the efforts taken by the Conference of Parties (COP).

Context:

  • The recent heatwave highlights the escalating threats of climate change, emphasizing the urgent need for robust climate action.
  • The World Meteorological Organization (WMO) confirmed that 2023 was the warmest year on record, drawing renewed attention to carbon-intensive sectors like power and industry.
  • As the third-largest carbon emitter globally, India faces increased scrutiny over its emissions.
  • To address these challenges, significant efforts are being made to transition towards green energy, bolstered by various government initiatives and policies.

India's Green Growth Landscape: A Shift Towards Sustainable Practices

  • Indian industries, particularly those in high-carbon emitting sectors, are increasingly acknowledging the importance of embracing sustainable practices.
  • Many companies are taking proactive measures to transition towards renewable energy sources.
    • For example, leading firms in refining, chemical production, and fertilizers are exploring the potential of Green Hydrogen to reduce their carbon emissions.
  • These sectors are crucial in India's decarbonization efforts due to their significant contribution to greenhouse gas emissions.
  • Although there are no mandatory regulations for green technology adoption, many entities are voluntarily adopting these technologies.
  • This shift is driven by stakeholder expectations and the recognition of transition risks, such as policy, regulatory, technology, market, reputation, and legal challenges.
  • Among these risks, technological risk is the most pressing concern for entities adopting green technologies.

Challenges in India's Transition to Green Growth:

Shifting from Fossil Fuels to Renewable Energy

  • Fossil fuel-based power is India's primary source of carbon emissions.
  • To meet the government's climate target of increasing non-fossil power to 50% by 2030, several schemes have been launched to boost renewable energy.
  • ICRA projects that India will achieve this goal, with the share of non-fossil fuel-based installed capacity rising from 41% in 2022-23 to 59% by 2029-30.
  • However, this transition requires significant investment, with an estimated Rs 11-12 lakh crore needed for renewable energy power and over Rs 5-6 lakh crore for transmission infrastructure and storage capabilities.

Ensuring Continuous Renewable Energy Supply:

  • Ensuring a steady supply of renewable energy is crucial to reach the targeted level, given its intermittent nature.
  • Hybrid renewable energy projects (wind and solar) complemented by energy storage systems can help achieve this.
  • For sectors like steel and cement, the government must explore more carbon sequestration methods, such as installing carbon capture utilisation and storage (CCUS), which is inevitable for these hard-to-abate sectors.

Challenges in the Cement Sector:

  • Cement manufacturing is resource and energy-intensive, producing an equivalent amount of carbon dioxide per tonne of cement.
  • CCUS can reduce 60-70% of emissions during cement manufacturing, as most emissions are generated during clinker production.
  • Niti Aayog's report estimates that the cement sector needs a CCUS capacity of two million tonnes per annum by 2030, with a capital cost of Rs 1,600-1,800 crore.

Challenges in the Steel Sector:

  • Due to the abundance of virgin iron ore and limited domestic scrap, the domestic steel industry primarily uses coal as a reducing agent, resulting in high emissions.
  • With India's 2070 net-zero target and carbon tax policies in some countries, domestic steelmakers are focusing on reducing their carbon footprint by 25-30% through technological interventions by 2030.

Government Efforts in India's Green Energy Transition and Carbon Reduction:

  • Production Linked Incentive (PLI) Scheme: The PLI scheme offers financial incentives to manufacturers, encouraging them to establish production facilities in India.
    • This strengthens the local solar manufacturing industry, making solar energy more affordable and accessible.
  • Viability Gap Funding (VGF) for Offshore Wind and Battery Storage Projects: VGF schemes make large-scale renewable energy projects more financially viable, attracting private investment.
    • Offshore wind and battery storage projects particularly benefit from this support, addressing the intermittent nature of renewable energy sources.
  • Faster Adoption and Manufacturing of Electric Vehicles (FAME) Scheme: The FAME scheme provides subsidies for electric vehicle (EV) purchases and supports the development of charging infrastructure.
    • This initiative aims to reduce vehicular emissions, decrease oil dependency, and promote sustainable urban mobility.
  • National Green Hydrogen Mission: Green hydrogen, produced using renewable energy, has the potential to significantly reduce emissions in hard-to-abate sectors.
    • The mission supports research, pilot projects, and production facilities, positioning India as a global leader in green hydrogen technology.
  • Amendments to the Energy Conservation Act: The amendments include provisions for energy efficiency standards and energy management systems.
    • These measures aim to reduce energy consumption, lower emissions, and promote sustainable industrial practices.

Recommendations for Overcoming Green Growth Challenges in India:

  • Renewable Purchase Obligations (RPOs): The government should enforce mandatory percentages of electricity consumption from renewable sources.
    • RPOs require power distribution companies and large consumers to purchase a specific proportion of energy from renewables, ensuring consistent demand and promoting sector growth.
  • Implementation of the National Action Plan on Climate Change (NAPCC): Policymakers should devise strategies that promote sustainable development while tackling climate change.
    • The NAPCC encompasses eight missions focusing on solar energy, energy efficiency, sustainable agriculture, and water conservation, enabling cross-sectoral efforts to integrate climate resilience and sustainability into national policies.
  • Tax Incentives and Subsidies: Financial incentives should be provided to support renewable energy and green technologies.
    • Tax benefits such as accelerated depreciation and tax holidays reduce investment burdens.
    • Subsidies for solar power, electric vehicles, and energy storage systems make these technologies more accessible and appealing to consumers and businesses.
  • Increased Viability Gap Funding (VGF): The government should address financial gaps in economically viable projects lacking initial investment.
    • VGF schemes make large-scale renewable energy projects, like offshore wind farms and battery storage systems, more financially viable and reduce investment risks.

Conclusion

India's journey towards embracing green energy and sustainability is characterized by both formidable hurdles and promising prospects. The proactive steps taken by the government and the enthusiastic participation of diverse stakeholders are laying the groundwork for a more environmentally friendly tomorrow. Yet, reaching the ambitious climate goals demands persistent backing, significant financial injections, and a surge in technological advancements. In a world grappling with the intensifying effects of climate change, India's resolute pledge to slash carbon emissions and shift towards renewable energy stands as both an imperative and an inspiration for nations worldwide.

 

SC Verdict on Newsclick Highlights the Vitality of Adhering to Due Process Beyond Formalities

  • 17 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

The Supreme Court recently ordered the release of NewsClick Editor Prabir Purkayastha after hearing his plea, challenging the arrest by Delhi Police in an Unlawful Activities Prevention Act (UAPA) case.

Context:

  • The recent ruling by the Supreme Court of India reaffirms its dedication to due process, dispelling assertions of subservience to the executive branch.
  • Through a landmark judgment, the Court underscored the indispensable role of due process, especially concerning the arrest and detention of Prabir Purkayastha, founder-editor of Newsclick.
  • This verdict emphasizes the crucial disparity between reasons for arrest and the grounds for arrest, emphasizing that the latter must be tailored to the individual and formally communicated in writing to safeguard personal liberty.

Why did the Supreme Court Invalidate Purkayastha’s Arrest?

  • The court invalidated the arrest due to the absence of provided grounds, citing a precedent set in the Pankaj Bansal case (2023).
    • This landmark ruling emphasized the constitutional right, under Article 22(1), to be informed about the grounds of arrest in writing, deeming any infringement of this right as vitiating the arrest and remand process.
  • Furthermore, the verdict underscored the fundamental and statutory right of an arrested person to receive a written copy of the grounds of arrest without exception.
    • The court criticized the clandestine manner in which the procedure was conducted, noting that the accused was deprived of the opportunity to defend himself and avail legal representation.
  • Additionally, the judgment clarified that an FIR serves to initiate criminal proceedings and is not exhaustive in detailing grounds of arrest.
    • The court emphasized that the grounds of arrest must convey specific, personal facts to the accused, distinct from general reasons for arrest.

What is the Due Process of Law?

  • Due process of law is a foundational legal principle that ensures the fair and just application of laws while protecting individual rights.
  • The concept requires the state to adhere to established legal rules and principles in every case, ensuring that all legal rights owed to a person are respected.
  • It serves as a safeguard against the arbitrary exercise of government power.

Significance:

  • Fairness and Reasonableness: Due process emphasizes fairness, reasonableness, justness, and non-arbitrariness in legal proceedings.
  • Invalidation of Inequality: Any procedural inequality in the law can be rendered invalid under due process.
  • Legislative Oversight: Courts consider legislative intent while evaluating statutes in light of due process.
  • Protection of Individual Rights: Due process emphasizes the importance of individual rights and grants courts the authority to nullify biased laws.
  • Adherence to Basic Legal Procedures: Laws must follow a fundamental process to receive state assent.

Historical Background:

  • First mentioned in a statute by British King Edward III in the 14th century.
  • The Fifth Amendment of the US Constitution (1791) introduced due process in a constitutional framework.
  • In India, due process was invoked by freedom fighters against unjust colonial laws.
  • The Constituent Assembly considered including due process in India's Constitution but ultimately adopted a "procedure established by law" instead.

Evolution through Case Laws:

  • The Supreme Court's interpretation of due process evolved over time.
  • Initial judgments, such as A K Gopalan (1950) and ADM Jabalpur (1976), limited due process by focusing on the narrow meaning of "procedure established by law."
  • The Bank Nationalisation case (1970) extended due process to property rights.
  • The landmark Maneka Gandhi case (1978) established due process as an integral part of the right to life and personal liberty, requiring laws to be reasonable, just, fair, and non-arbitrary.

Concerns Regarding the Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act (UAPA) 1967 and Due Process of Law:

The UAPA 1967 raises concerns regarding due process of law due to several provisions that deviate from established criminal law principles. These include:

  • Extended Remand and Custody Periods: UAPA allows for 30-day remand orders instead of the usual 15 days and extends the maximum period of judicial custody before filing a chargesheet from 90 to 180 days.
    • In the 2023 Pramod Singla case, the Supreme Court highlighted the potential for abuse in preventive detention laws and emphasized the need for strict procedural adherence.
  • Controversial Bail Provisions: Section 43D(5) of the Act makes obtaining bail extremely difficult for suspects if the court believes there are reasonable grounds to presume the charges are true.
    • The accused must prove the case is false without inviting the court to evaluate evidence, which human rights defenders argue is draconian and undermines due process.
  • Expanded Scope Over Time: The Act was amended in 2004 and 2013 to broaden its coverage, including the declaration of unlawful associations, punishment for terrorist acts, and activities threatening the country's security.
    • This expanded scope, along with an increased ban on organizations from two to five years, raises concerns about potential misuse and erosion of due process protections.
  • Pendency of Cases: According to the National Crime Records Bureau (NCRB), over 12,000 people were imprisoned under such laws in 2021, with 76% being undertrials in 2022.
    • Only 18% of UAPA cases result in conviction, and there is an alarming 89% pendency rate for UAPA cases in courts.
    • This raises questions about the effectiveness and fairness of the Act in ensuring due process.

Achieving a Balance Between State Security and Due Process of Law:

Ensuring national security while preserving due process of law requires a nuanced approach that respects individual rights and maintains checks on state power. The following strategies can help achieve this balance:

  • Clear Legal Framework: Establish precise laws that define the limits and procedures for state actions in the name of security.
    • This framework should ensure accountability and prevent misuse of authority.
    • A parliamentary committee can oversee and recommend changes to security legislation.
  • Strengthened Judicial Oversight: Enhance judicial mechanisms to review and check arbitrary actions by state authorities, including scrutinizing the legality of detentions and other security measures.
    • A judicial review committee can assess cases under laws like the UAPA.
  • Independent Monitoring Bodies: Create independent bodies to monitor the implementation of security laws and investigate abuses.
    • These entities should hold state actors accountable, with organizations like the National Commission for Minorities and NHRC playing crucial roles.
  • Human Rights Training: Train law enforcement and security personnel on human rights standards, emphasizing the importance of protecting individual liberties while maintaining security.
    • Develop training programs in collaboration with institutions such as the National Police Academy.
  • Public Participation: Encourage public engagement in security policy discussions through platforms like MyGov.
    • This fosters transparency and acceptance of policies that balance security and rights.
  • International Cooperation: Collaborate with international organizations like UNESCO and press freedom groups to promote best practices, upholding press freedom and ensuring a safe environment for journalists and media workers, as outlined in the UN Plan of Action on the Safety of Journalists.

Conclusion

As India continues to evolve, it is crucial to ensure that stringent laws, such as the UAPA, do not overshadow the fundamental rights of its citizens. Achieving a balance between state security and individual liberties is vital not only for the protection of personal freedoms but also as a testament to the strength and integrity of India's democratic society. By fostering a legal and constitutional ethos that values this equilibrium, India can pave the way for continued progress, safeguarding the well-being of its people and the future of its democracy.

Redefining India's Poverty Threshold: Embracing New Perspectives

  • 16 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

It is important to recognize India’s progress in alleviating poverty based on norms established in the 1970s. However, there is a need to update the poverty threshold to reflect contemporary notions of a ‘decent standard of living’.

Context:

  • The recent release of the Household Consumer Expenditure Survey (HCES) data by the National Sample Survey Office (NSSO) has sparked renewed debates on poverty estimation in India.
  • According to estimates derived from the methodologies proposed by the Tendulkar and Rangarajan Committees, poverty levels have reportedly decreased significantly since 2011-12, with figures standing at approximately 6.3% and 10% respectively for the year 2022-23.

Evolution of Consumption-Based Poverty Measurement in India:

  • India's consumption-based poverty measurement has evolved since its inception in the 1960s.
  • The approach was first introduced by the 1962 Working Group and further refined by the 1979 Task Force.

The 1979 Task Force:

  • The task force defined the poverty line as the per-capita consumption expenditure level that could satisfy the average daily calorie requirement of 2,400 kcal in rural areas and 2,100 kcal in urban areas.
    • This included associated non-food expenditures, and the monetary value of this norm became the foundation for subsequent poverty line revisions.

Tendulkar and Rangarajan Committees:

  • These committees revisited the calorie norms and expenditure levels established by the 1979 Task Force.
    • However, they did not adequately address non-food components.
    • The committees argued that if expenditures on specific necessities meet nutritional requirements, they should also cover other essential non-food needs.

Implications of the estimates:

  • The estimates indicate a notable decrease in poverty since 2011-12.
  • However, some commentators advocate for a reassessment of the poverty line in light of changes in survey methodology.
  • They contend that recent alterations in survey methodology in the Household Consumer Expenditure Survey (HCES) make previous methodologies unsuitable for analyzing HCES data.
  • Surjit S. Bhalla, an economist and former member of the Economic Advisory Council, has provided comprehensive counterarguments to such assertions.
  • Nevertheless, none of these discussions have addressed the suitability of current methodologies for monitoring poverty using consumption data.

Historical Background of Poverty Measurement:

  • Early approaches: Consumption-based poverty measurement was initiated with a Working Group established by the Planning Commission in 1962 and further refined by a task force in 1979.
    • This task force meticulously outlined its rationale for establishing a poverty line specific to India.
  • Definition of poverty line: It was delineated as the per-capita consumption expenditure required to fulfil average daily calorie needs (2,400 Kcal in rural areas, 2,100 Kcal in urban areas) along with associated non-food expenses.
    • This average calorie standard was derived from an analysis of the demographic and activity-based composition of the population during that period.
  • The monetary value assigned to this standard became the foundation for subsequent revisions of poverty lines.
    • However, the fundamental methodology underpinning this calculation was not critically reassessed.

Reevaluating Poverty Measurement Norms in India:

  • The Tendulkar and Rangarajan Committees acknowledged the evolving demographic and activity composition in India, leading them to propose adjustments to calorie norms and expenditure levels for poverty measurement.
    • However, these committees did not adequately reconsider the non-food components of the poverty line.
  • At the core of their argument was the assertion that if spending within an expenditure class is sufficient to meet nutritional requirements, it should also be adequate to cover associated non-food needs.
    • This assumption is questionable in the context of modern India, as the country has undergone significant changes since the 1970s when the Task Force on Poverty was established.

Demographic and Educational Indicators in India Since the 1970s:

Several significant demographic and educational shifts have taken place in India since the 1970s:

  • Life Expectancy: Life expectancy at birth has improved from 49.7 years in 1970 to 69.4 years in 2018, reflecting advancements in healthcare and overall quality of life.
  • Ageing Population: The proportion of individuals aged 60 and above has grown from 6.1% in the 1970s to 10.1% by 2021.
    • This shift highlights the need for policies and programs that address the unique needs of an ageing population.
  • Primary Education: The Gross Enrolment Ratio (GER) in primary education has experienced substantial growth, increasing from 62% in 1971 to universal enrolment today.
    • This progress demonstrates a stronger emphasis on ensuring access to basic education for all children.
  • Higher Education: The Gross Enrolment Ratio for higher education has also seen significant growth, rising from below 6% in the 1970s to approximately 28% in recent years.
    • This development signals a greater focus on providing opportunities for advanced education and skill development.

Implications of Demographic and Educational Changes in India:

  • The demographic and educational shifts observed in India since the 1970s have significant implications for out-of-pocket expenditures on health and education, as revealed by National Sample Survey (NSS) data. Key implications include:

Education Expenditures:

  • The increase in primary and higher education enrolment has led to stiffer competition for aspirational jobs.
  • This competition has driven higher spending on private tuition, leading to 'education poverty' among families with young children.
  • Addressing this issue requires a change in the approach to education, as outlined in the National Education Policy (2020).

Health Expenditures:

  • The rise in life expectancy and an ageing population have led to increased health expenditure needs, especially among the elderly.
  • Changes in household composition and a growing elderly population living independently have further highlighted the need for better healthcare provisions.
  • Political parties, like the ruling party with its Ayushman Bharat promise, recognize the importance of addressing these healthcare needs, indicating a potential shift in policy focus.

Elderly Population and Household Composition:

  • The increase in life expectancy and decline in mortality rates have created a more age-diverse population with a larger elderly population.
  • This ageing population necessitates greater attention to healthcare and financial support for the elderly, an issue that may not be adequately captured by current poverty measurement norms.

Redefining Poverty Norms for a Changing India:

  • Current consumption-based poverty measures capture average population attributes but face limitations when accounting for increased population heterogeneity.
  • As the population structure evolves, using averages to describe poverty becomes problematic.
    • For example: Elderly households may meet nutrition expenditure requirements but struggle with healthcare costs.
  • Households with young children might cover food needs yet face challenges in meeting aspirational education expenses, like private tuition.
  • These examples highlight how households could surpass extreme poverty thresholds yet lack resources for a decent living standard.
    • Consequently, updating poverty norms is essential to accurately capture the realities of diverse household needs.
  • To achieve the Sustainable Development Goal of eradicating poverty in all forms, India must redefine its poverty norms, moving away from outdated standards based on 1970s data.
  • By establishing fresh norms for the Amrit Kaal, India can better address the unique challenges faced by its population and make significant strides towards alleviating poverty.

Conclusion

India has made remarkable progress in alleviating poverty based on existing norms. However, to ensure a decent living standard for all citizens, it is crucial to update poverty measures to reflect current demographic and economic changes. By acknowledging the evolving needs of its population, India can continue making significant strides in poverty reduction and work towards a more inclusive and prosperous future.

Evaluating India's Current Competition Law Amid Proposed Digital Framework

  • 15 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

It stated that due to the swift evolution of digital markets, the current competition law framework may not timely address the anti-competitive conduct by large digital enterprises.

Context:

  • The Committee on Digital Competition Law (CDCL), recently released its report recommending a new Digital Competition Law for India alongside the Draft Digital Competition Bill (DCB).
  • The genesis of the report goes back to the 53rd Report of the Parliamentary Standing Committee on Finance (PSC), released in December 2022.
  • The PSC Report acknowledged the unique dynamics of digital markets, noting their strong network effects and concentration.
  • It highlighted that the current competition law framework may not address anti-competitive conduct by large digital enterprises in a timely manner due to the rapid evolution of digital markets.
  • Consequently, the report emphasized the need for a new law to restrict certain leading players from engaging in specific anti-competitive activities that could distort competition.
  • Activities such as self-preferencing, bundling and tying, and deep discounting were highlighted as areas of concern.

Key Proposals of the Draft Digital Competition Bill:

Predictive regulation:

  • The dynamic nature of digital markets, characterized by constant evolution and interconnected offerings, necessitates a shift from traditional ex-post regulation to a forward-looking, preventive, and presumptive ex-ante framework.
  • The draft Bill proposes this proactive approach as the way forward, acknowledging the limitations of regulating market abuse after it has already occurred.
  • India's current Competition Act of 2002 follows an ex-post antitrust framework, which has faced criticism for its delayed response to market abuse.
  • By the time penalties are imposed, market conditions may have already changed, further disadvantaging smaller competitors.
  • To effectively navigate the complexities of the digital realm, it is crucial to implement predictive regulation that identifies potential antitrust issues and establishes clear guidelines to mitigate harm and maintain a level playing field.

Significant entities:

  • In the Bill, certain "core digital services," such as search engines and social media platforms, prompt the Competition Commission of India (CCI) to designate companies as "Systematically Significant Digital Enterprises (SSDEs)."
  • This designation hinges on diverse quantitative and qualitative criteria, encompassing turnover, user base, and market influence.
  • The quantitative thresholds for SSDE designation include:
    • A turnover in India of at least Rs 4,000 crore over the last three financial years or a global turnover of at least $30 billion.
    • A gross merchandise value in India of at least Rs 16,000 crore, or a global market capitalization of at least $75 billion.
    • Additionally, the relevant core digital service should have a minimum of 1 crore end users or 10,000 business users.
  • Entities falling outside these parameters may still be designated as SSDEs if the CCI deems their presence significant in any core digital service.
  • SSDEs are prohibited from practices such as self-preferencing, anti-steering, and restricting third-party applications.
  • Violations of these regulations may result in fines of up to 10% of their global turnover.

Associate Digital Enterprises:

  • Recognizing the potential benefits of data sharing among entities within a major technology conglomerate, the Bill proposes to identify Associate Digital Enterprises (ADEs).
  • Under this provision, if an entity within a group is identified as an associate entity, it would bear similar obligations as SSDEs, contingent upon its involvement with the core digital service provided by the primary company.
    • For instance, consider the relationship between Google Search and Google Maps, where data flow from the former informs the functionalities of the latter.
    • In this scenario, Google Maps could potentially be classified as an ADE.
  • Similarly, the extent of data exchange between Google Search and YouTube could determine the classification of the latter as an ADE, depending on the recommendations provided to users.

Key Challenges with the Digital Competition Bill:

  • Regulatory Approach: While the Digital Competition Bill (DCB) draws inspiration from international frameworks such as the UK's Digital Markets, Competition and Consumers Bill (DMCC) and the EU's Digital Markets Act, it could benefit from considering alternative approaches like Japan's "co-regulation" strategy.
    • Integrating such an approach might foster a better balance between competition and innovation.
  • Timeline: The current May 15, 2024 deadline for submitting comments may not provide sufficient time for a thorough analysis of the complex issues addressed by the DCB and its potential impacts on various stakeholders.
    • A further extension of the consultation period should be considered.
  • Inter-Regulatory Mechanisms: Overlaps between the DCB and existing sector-specific policy instruments need to be addressed.
    • Implementing an inter-regulatory consultation mechanism will ensure clarity and a harmonized approach across regulatory bodies.
  • Capacity Building: Strengthening the capacity of the Competition Commission of India (CCI) and its Digital Markets and Data Unit (DMDU) is crucial, particularly through the integration of technology sector experts.
    • The DCB should outline specific measures to bolster the Commission's capacity and resources in order to effectively navigate the rapidly evolving digital landscape.

Need to Foster Digital Competition:

  • Advocating for a Presumptive Framework: Government officials propose a shift towards a presumptive regulatory framework to address the entrenched pattern of anti-competitive behaviour by major tech companies.
    • Notably, Google faced a substantial fine of Rs 1.337 crore from the CCI for its anti-competitive practices within the Android ecosystem.
  • Concerns Over Tech Monopolies: Officials express apprehension over the dominance of a handful of US-based tech giants, which has stifled innovation over the past decade.
    • High market barriers deter new entrants from challenging the dominance of established players, perpetuating a cycle of market concentration.
  • Challenges for Emerging Players: Once a company secures a significant market share, its product often becomes the default choice for users, making it challenging for competitors to challenge its dominance.
    • Even prominent entities like Spotify have raised concerns about the restrictive policies enforced by industry giants like Apple and Google.
  • Niche Alternatives and Market Dynamics: While niche alternatives such as Signal for messaging and DuckDuckGo for search engines exist, they remain niche preferences rather than mainstream choices.
    • The proliferation of big tech companies has facilitated affordable advertising rates for smaller businesses, but it has also intensified surveillance and data tracking practices, compromising user privacy.

Conclusion

The proposed DCB marks a notable stride towards regulating India’s digital markets. However, certain concerns persist about its content and policymaking mechanism. The timeline for stakeholder consultation is inadequate, necessitating an extension to ensure comprehensive feedback. Additionally, implementing inter-regulatory mechanisms and capacity building for the CCI remains critical to effectively navigating the evolving digital landscape. Therefore, addressing these issues will be pivotal in ensuring a progressive digital competition framework in India.

Need for a Farmer-Friendly Agri-Export Policy

  • 14 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

The current government policy, skewed towards consumers, unfavourably impacts farmers, necessitating a shift to enhance farmers' incomes.

Current State of India‘s Agricultural Exports:

  • The current status of India's agri exports highlights a notable shortfall in achieving government targets.
  • Despite aiming for $60 billion in 2022, actual exports in 2023-24 amounted to $48.9 billion, showing an 8% decrease from the previous year's $53.2 billion.
  • Between 2004-05 and 2013-14, agricultural exports witnessed remarkable growth, expanding nearly fivefold from $8.7 billion to $43.3 billion.
  • However, this growth trajectory slowed significantly in the period from 2014-15 to 2023-24, with an annual growth rate of merely 1.9%.
  • Key exports include rice ($10.4 billion), marine products ($7.3 billion), spices ($4.25 billion), bovine meat ($3.7 billion), and sugar ($2.8 billion).

What is Agricultural Export Policy?

  • The Agricultural Export Policy, commonly known as an agri-export policy, encompasses a range of governmental regulations, strategies, and incentives aimed at facilitating and encouraging the export of agricultural commodities from a specific nation.
  • It encompasses diverse measures such as export subsidies, tariff adjustments, quality benchmarks, market access arrangements, financial support, and promotional efforts to assist agricultural producers and exporters in accessing global markets, enhancing their competitiveness, and broadening their export horizons.
  • The Government of India introduced a comprehensive Agriculture Export Policy in December 2018, with the following objectives:
    • To diversify our export basket, and destinations and boost high-value and value-added agricultural exports, including focus on perishables.
    • To promote novel, indigenous, organic, ethnic, traditional and non-traditional Agri products exports.
    • To provide an institutional mechanism for pursuing market access, tackling barriers and dealing with sanitary and phytosanitary issues.
    • To strive to double India’s share in world agri exports by integrating with global value chains.
    • Enable farmers to get the benefit of export opportunities in overseas markets.

What is the Need for an Agri-Export Policy?

  • Economic Contribution: India's agricultural exports, totalling around USD 53 billion in the fiscal year 2022-2023, constitute a significant portion of overall exports, yet the country's global share in agricultural exports remains low at 2.2% as of 2016.
  • Food Security Enhancement: Despite catering to a substantial portion of the world's population with limited resources, a well-designed export policy can generate additional revenue to invest in bolstering food security and augmenting farmers' incomes.
  • Inflation Control: Agricultural exports have the potential to stabilize domestic prices, benefiting consumers and producers, particularly during periods of abundant harvests.
  • Job Creation: With approximately 45% of the workforce engaged in agriculture, promoting agricultural exports can foster employment opportunities, particularly in rural areas where agriculture is predominant.
  • Balance of Payments Support: Agricultural exports significantly contribute to India's foreign exchange reserves, helping to offset trade deficits and maintain currency stability.
  • Crop Diversity Utilization: India's diverse agricultural production offers substantial export potential, which can be tapped into through a well-structured export policy.
  • Trade Relations Strengthening: Agricultural exports are pivotal in fostering and reinforcing trade ties with countries like the United States, Saudi Arabia, and the United Arab Emirates.
  • Addressing Structural Challenges: The policy framework can effectively tackle obstacles such as low farm productivity, inadequate infrastructure, global price fluctuations, and limited market access.

What are the Challenges in India's Agri-Export Policy?

Several challenges hamper the effectiveness of India's agricultural export policy, requiring strategic interventions to unleash the sector's full potential:

  • Restrictive Export Policies: Favoring domestic consumers over farmers often impedes the achievement of export targets.
    • Restrictions on commodities like Basmati rice, such as the Minimum Export Price (MEP) of USD 1,200, can limit export volumes.
  • Subsidy-Centric Schemes: Increased subsidies during election periods, including food and fertilizer subsidies, strain fiscal discipline.
    • Populist measures like loan waivers and free power for farmers impact the financial health of the agricultural sector.
  • Insufficient R&D Investment: Low investment in agricultural R&D, approximately 0.5% of agricultural GDP, hinders growth prospects.
    • Doubling or tripling R&D investments is essential for India to excel in agricultural production and exports.
  • Quality and Standards: Maintaining consistent quality and meeting international standards is challenging.
    • Variability in quality, compliance issues, and difficulties in meeting Sanitary and Phytosanitary (SPS) Measures due to pests and diseases impede exports.
  • Infrastructure: Inadequate infrastructure for storage, transportation, and processing results in post-harvest losses, reducing export competitiveness.
  • Environmental and Sustainability Concerns: Balancing the growth of agricultural exports with environmental sustainability is crucial.
    • Over-exploitation of resources may have long-term consequences, necessitating careful resource management and sustainable practices.

Government Initiatives Promoting Agri-Export in India:

To unlock the full potential of India's agricultural exports, the government has launched several initiatives to enhance productivity, modernise infrastructure, and promote sustainable practices. Key schemes include:

  • E-NAM (National Agriculture Market): A pan-India electronic trading portal, E-NAM enables farmers to sell directly to buyers, reducing intermediaries and ensuring fair prices.
    • E-NAM has integrated 1,000 wholesale markets and 585 mandis across 18 states and 3 Union Territories.
  • National Horticulture Mission (NHM): Promoting sustainable horticulture practices, including organic farming and precision farming, NHM supports the establishment of over 100 Farmer Producer Organizations (FPOs) for horticultural products.
    • The mission also backs the production of high-value horticultural products for export.
  • Market Access Initiative (MAI): Supporting export promotion activities, such as participation in trade fairs, capacity building, and market research, MAI has facilitated Indian exporters' participation in over 100 international trade fairs annually.
  • Operation Greens: With an allocation of INR 500 crores in the Union Budget 2023-2024, Operation Greens stabilizes the supply and prices of essential agricultural commodities like fruits and vegetables.
    • The scheme reduces price volatility, ensures fair prices for farmers, and fosters sustainable agri-exports.
  • Scheme for Agro-Marine Processing and Development of Agro-Processing Clusters (SAMPADA): With a budgetary allocation of INR 6,000 crores for the period 2020-2021 to 2024-2025, SAMPADA modernizes infrastructure for agro-processing clusters.
    • This reduces post-harvest losses and increases shelf life, improving the overall export potential.
  • APEDA: Promoting the export of scheduled products, APEDA provides guidelines for sustainability and quality.
    • APEDA facilitated exports of agricultural products worth USD 22.17 billion during the financial year 2022-2023.
  • Agri Export Zones (AEZs): AEZs provide infrastructure development and technology adoption for sustainable agri-exports.
    • Established for commodities like mangoes, grapes, and spices, AEZs have contributed to increased export volumes.
  • Promotion of Organic Farming: Initiatives promoting organic farming for environmental sustainability and the export potential of organic products have resulted in increased organic farming area, reaching 3.90 million hectares in 2022-2023, with exports of organic products totalling USD 1.04 billion.

Way Forward for a Stable Agricultural Export Policy in India:

To establish a stable and prosperous agri-export policy in India, several strategic actions and considerations must be taken into account. These include:

  • Prioritizing Farmer Welfare: Ensuring that farmers receive fair prices for their produce is crucial for the success of agricultural exports and the well-being of the farming community.
  • Supporting Domestic Consumers: Implementing targeted income policies to support vulnerable populations and maintain food security for domestic consumers.
  • Enhancing Productivity: Increasing agricultural productivity through investments in R&D, seeds, irrigation, fertilizers, and improved farming practices to bolster global competitiveness.
  • Diversifying Export Basket: Expanding the range of agricultural exports, focusing on value-added products, and targeting a wide array of international markets to minimize reliance on a select few commodities.
  • Quality Assurance: Implementing strict quality standards and certification mechanisms to ensure that exported agricultural products meet international norms.
    • Establishing uniform quality and standardization protocols is vital, particularly for horticultural items.
  • Infrastructure Development: Investing in modern infrastructure, such as cold storage, processing facilities, transportation, and logistics, to reduce post-harvest losses and enhance export competitiveness.
    • Offering financial incentives, subsidies, and credit facilities can encourage investments in agriculture, infrastructure, and processing facilities.
  • Technology Adoption: Promoting the use of advanced agricultural technologies, precision farming, and efficient irrigation techniques to boost productivity.
    • Encouraging the growth of agri-startups and fostering innovative solutions can enhance agricultural production and export efficiency.
  • Environmentally Sustainable Practices: Encouraging sustainable farming practices, including organic farming, to ensure environmental sustainability in agriculture.
  • Learning from Global Best Practices: Gaining insights from successful agricultural export policies and best practices in other countries can inform India's approach.
    • Strengthening diplomatic efforts to negotiate favourable trade agreements and reduce trade barriers will provide better access to international markets.

Conclusion

To ensure India's continued growth in global agricultural trade, a stable export policy is crucial, embodying dynamism, responsiveness, and adaptability. It must prioritize agricultural sustainability, environmental responsibility, and farmer welfare, securing India's position in international trade. Balancing economic growth with farmer well-being and environmental concerns is key to unleashing India's agricultural potential. Forward-looking policies and innovative solutions will strengthen the agri-export sector, fostering a prosperous and sustainable future for all.

Evaluating the Enhancement of State-run Companies Under Modi Government and Realities

  • 13 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman on Wednesday said the government's focus on capital expenditure and infrastructure development has directly benefited state-run companies and led to substantial growth in their stock performance.

Context:

  • In a democratic system, robust opposition plays a vital role in upholding accountability and fostering balanced governance.
  • However, the absence of an effective opposition can impede democratic processes, resulting in unfounded criticisms and ineffective checks and balances.
  • Prime Minister Narendra Modi's government has encountered such obstacles, especially concerning its oversight of public sector enterprises (PSEs).
  • Thus, it is imperative to evaluate the performance of PSEs during the Modi administration, juxtaposing it with historical contexts, and elucidating the government's strategic initiatives aimed at their revitalization.

Strategic Divestment Initiatives by the Modi Government:

  • The divestment strategy adopted by the Modi government involves a well-thought-out approach to balance fiscal objectives and national interests.
  • This is exemplified through the decisions made regarding Air India and Bharat Petroleum Corporation Ltd (BPCL).
  • Air India Privatisation: Air India's transition from a loss-making entity reliant on government subsidies to a privately-owned enterprise signifies a strategic move to enhance efficiency and competitiveness in the aviation sector.
    • Privatisation aims to inject agility and market responsiveness into Air India's operations, fostering growth and profitability amidst intense industry competition.
    • Post-privatisation, Air India's ambitious expansion plans underscore its renewed focus on capturing market opportunities and improving financial performance.
  • Retaining Stake in BPCL: Contrary to Air India, the government's decision to maintain ownership of Bharat Petroleum Corporation Ltd (BPCL) reflects strategic considerations linked to energy security and sectoral importance.
    • BPCL's extensive retail network and expertise in areas like ethanol blending align with the government's objectives in sustainable energy transition.
    • By retaining control over BPCL, the government ensures influence over critical sectors while leveraging the company's capabilities to advance national priorities such as sustainability and energy resilience.
  • Strategic Decision-Making: The government's divestment strategy goes beyond immediate financial gains, considering broader strategic implications and long-term national interests.
    • Factors like sectoral significance, market dynamics, and alignment with development goals inform divestment decisions, ensuring they contribute to India's economic growth and strategic objectives.
    • Through a strategic divestment approach, the government aims to strike a balance between fiscal imperatives and broader developmental priorities, driving sustainable and inclusive growth.

An In-depth Review of PSE Performance During the Modi Era:

  • Under Prime Minister Narendra Modi's leadership, Public Sector Enterprises (PSEs) have experienced notable growth and transformations across various sectors. This comprehensive analysis showcases the strides made by PSEs under the current administration:
  • Financial Sector: The Modi government's intervention and reforms revitalized public sector banks (PSBs), inherited with significant non-performing assets (NPAs).
    • PSBs reported their highest-ever profits and lowest-ever NPAs in the fiscal year 2022-23, indicating a substantial improvement in their financial health and investor trust.
  • Oil and Gas Sector: Oil India Ltd, an upstream oil company, achieved its highest-ever crude and natural gas production, contributing to India's energy security.
    • Indian Oil Corporation Limited (IOCL) reported record-high refinery throughput, sales volume, and net profit, highlighting its operational efficiency and market competitiveness.
  • Energy Generation: Bharat Petroleum Corporation Limited (BPCL) achieved its highest-ever profit for the first nine months of any fiscal year, demonstrating resilience and adaptability in a dynamic market.
    • Coal India registered its highest-ever production, underscoring the government's emphasis on maximizing domestic coal output to meet growing demand.
  • Infrastructure Development and Expansion: National Thermal Power Corporation (NTPC) set a new record for the highest-ever electricity generation in a year, strengthening India's power infrastructure.
    • PSEs like Indian Railways and Ports have undertaken ambitious plans to modernize and expand infrastructure capacity, supporting economic growth and development.

Notable Differences Between the Current Government's Strategy and Results and Those of its Predecessors:

  • Comparing the current government's approach to managing Public Sector Enterprises (PSEs) with that of its predecessors reveals significant differences:
  • UPA Era Mismanagement: During the UPA regime, PSEs were frequently subjected to political interference and corruption, resulting in inefficiency and stagnation.
    • Sectors like Indian Railways faced systemic challenges, such as bureaucratic hurdles and lack of accountability, leading to suboptimal performance and reduced contributions to the economy.
  • Corruption and Cronyism During Past Administrations: The UPA era was tainted by major corruption scandals, damaging the credibility of PSEs and eroding public trust in the government's capacity to manage public resources.
    • Political-corporate alliances further undermined the integrity and efficiency of PSEs, compromising their capacity to serve the public interest.
  • Policy Paralysis and Inefficiency: The UPA government's policy paralysis and administrative inefficiencies hindered innovation and growth in the public sector.
    • Delayed projects and bureaucratic obstacles led to missed economic opportunities and job creation constraints.
  • Modi Government's Transformative Reforms: The Modi government has pursued a reform agenda to revitalize and enhance the competitiveness of the public sector through strategic vision, decisive action, and an emphasis on transparency and accountability.
    • Prime Minister Modi's leadership has emphasized accountability and performance, with measures to streamline decision-making processes, reduce red tape, and hold PSEs accountable.
    • Proactive governance and strategic initiatives, including divestment, strategic partnerships, and infrastructure investments, have unlocked new growth opportunities, improved operational efficiency, and positioned PSEs for long-term success in a global market.

Conclusion

  • The governance of Public Sector Enterprises (PSEs) under Prime Minister Modi's leadership marks a transformative era characterized by forward-thinking reforms, efficient management, and a clear vision for national development.
  • In the face of opposition critique, the government's strategic interventions have successfully positioned PSEs as significant contributors to India's growth trajectory, ultimately fostering a brighter and more prosperous future for the nation and its citizens.
  • Through a combination of bold decision-making, transparency, and a commitment to accountability, the Modi government has revitalized the public sector and enhanced its competitiveness.
  • By addressing the challenges inherited from previous administrations, the current leadership has demonstrated its dedication to promoting sustainable growth and development while effectively managing PSEs for the greater good of the country.

Freshwater Quest: The Emergence of the New Gold Rush

  • 11 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

India can take the lead in shaping non-controversial legislative text that addresses the gaps in the laws of the sea, especially in exploratory activities that concern freshwater extraction.

Context:

  • Recent statistics reveal that the vast majority of Earth's water is saline, leaving only a small portion as freshwater. Surprisingly, just 0.3% of this freshwater exists in liquid form on the surface, highlighting the significance of subterranean freshwater reserves, including those beneath the ocean floor.
  • This emphasizes the growing importance of underground freshwater resources amid the escalating scarcity of surface water.

What are Undersea Freshwater Reserves?

  • Undersea freshwater reserves are large volumes of fresh water found beneath the ocean floor.
  • In the 1960s, the U.S. Geological Survey made an unexpected discovery of freshwater reserves beneath the ocean floor while drilling off the coast of New Jersey.
  • This finding has since been followed by international scientific teams uncovering additional sources of underwater freshwater across the globe, notably including a deep river at the bottom of the Black Sea.
  • This particular underwater river is over 100 feet deep, flows at a rate of about four miles per hour, and boasts a volume comparable to some of the world's largest land-based rivers.
  • As freshwater resources on land become increasingly scarce, countries are turning their attention towards exploring and potentially exploiting both surface and subsurface freshwater reserves within their maritime zones.
  • It is anticipated that these efforts may eventually extend beyond national Exclusive Economic Zones into regions governed by the United Nations Law of the Sea Convention, highlighting the significance of this valuable resource and the increasing need for its sustainable management.

Legal and Policy Framework of Ocean Governance:

  • United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS): The United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS) serves as the primary legal framework governing the management and constitution of the world's oceans.
    • It incorporates most internationally recognized maritime laws while also acknowledging the importance of customary international law in sea governance.
    • UNCLOS designates the "Area" beyond national jurisdiction as the seabed, ocean floor, and subsoil, defining it as the common heritage of mankind.
    • This classification underscores the notion that these regions should be available for the benefit of current and future generations.
  • 1958 Geneva Conventions: The 1958 Geneva Conventions on the Law of the Sea also play a vital role in maritime legal doctrine.
    • These include the Convention on the Territorial Sea and the Contiguous Zone, the Convention on the High Seas, the Convention on Fishing and Conservation of the Living Resources of the High Seas, and the Convention on the Continental Shelf.
    • These Geneva Conventions address many issues similar to those covered by UNCLOS and draw their principles from customary international law, reinforcing the essential foundations of maritime legal norms.
  • Exclusive Economic Zones and the "Area" under UNCLOS: UNCLOS delineates Exclusive Economic Zones (EEZs) extending up to 200 nautical miles from coastal boundaries, granting states exclusive rights to marine resources within this zone.
    • Beyond the EEZ lies the "Area," designated as the common heritage of mankind, managed collectively for sustainable utilization.

Navigating Complexities in UNCLOS and Geneva Conventions:

  • The United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS) and the 1958 Geneva Conventions on the Law of the Sea present complex legal interplays due to varying degrees of ratification and overlapping jurisdictions.
    • For instance, UNCLOS supersedes the Geneva Conventions for its signatories but does not apply to non-signatory states.
    • This divergence in international agreements is exemplified by the United States, which is a signatory to the Geneva Conventions but not UNCLOS.
  • The term "resources" under UNCLOS is limited to solid, liquid, or gaseous mineral resources found in the Area.
    • However, it remains unclear whether this definition extends to freshwater. Given the increasing scarcity of freshwater resources, potential conflicts may arise over its exploration and extraction in the "Area," particularly in the absence of specific legislation governing resources beyond national jurisdiction.
  • The complex legal landscape is further exacerbated by the presence of multiple pieces of maritime legislation that fail to address emerging challenges effectively.
    • Additionally, the regulatory authority of the International Seabed Authority (ISA) under UNCLOS adds another layer of complexity, as it remains unclear who regulates state parties to the Geneva Conventions regarding mining and exploratory activities in the "Area.

Significance of Freshwater Exploration for the Future:

  • Addressing Scarcity: Given that merely 0.3% of Earth's freshwater is readily available on the surface, the exploration of underground and underwater sources emerges as imperative to satisfy future water demands.
  • Conflict Prevention: As freshwater scarcity intensifies, the exploration and protection of underwater sources serve as proactive measures to mitigate potential conflicts over water resources.
  • Promoting Sustainability: Engaging in responsible freshwater exploration aligns with Sustainable Development Goals, fostering the sustainable utilization of natural resources to ensure their availability for future generations.

Way Forward:

  • Legislative Clarity: It is crucial to create a thorough legal framework that addresses the difficulties of discovering freshwater reserves outside of national borders.
    • This framework should harmonize UNCLOS provisions with customary international law, ensuring clarity and consistency in governing maritime activities.
  • International Collaboration: Engaging in constructive dialogue and negotiation forums, nations can strive to reconcile divergent legal interpretations and foster mutual understanding.
    • Establishing multilateral agreements and protocols can enhance cooperation and coordination in managing underwater freshwater resources.
  • Research and Technological Advancement: Investment in research and technological innovation is crucial for unlocking the full potential of underwater freshwater reserves.
    • Advanced exploration techniques and sustainable extraction methods can optimize resource utilization while minimizing environmental impact.
  • India's Leadership Role: As a pivotal stakeholder in maritime affairs, India can spearhead international discourse on freshwater exploration.
    • By advocating for inclusive and equitable approaches, India can contribute to the development of global norms and standards governing underwater resource management.

Conclusion

The increasing scarcity of freshwater underscores the urgent need for an internationally recognized legislative framework to govern the exploration and exploitation of underground freshwater resources. The establishment of such a framework would not only help prevent potential conflicts but also ensure the sustainable utilization of this vital resource for the benefit of both present and future generations on a global scale. By proactively addressing these challenges, nations can work together to secure the long-term availability and equitable distribution of freshwater, fostering stability and prosperity in an increasingly water-scarce world.

An AI-infused World Needs Matching Cybersecurity

  • 10 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

As generative AI technology becomes more prevalent, safeguarding consumers' ability to navigate digital environments securely has become increasingly imperative.

Context:

  • In recent times, the integration of generative artificial intelligence (AI) across industries has significantly transformed operational processes.
  • However, this rapid advancement has also led to the emergence of new cyber threats and safety concerns.
  • With incidents such as hackers exploiting generative AI for malicious purposes, including impersonating kidnappers, it is evident that a comprehensive analysis and proactive approach are required to address and mitigate the potential risks associated with this technology.
  • A study by Deep Instinct revealed that 75% of professionals observed a surge in cyberattacks over the past year, with 85% attributing this escalation to generative AI.
  • Among surveyed organizations, 37% identified undetectable phishing attacks as a major challenge, while 33% reported an increase in the volume of cyberattacks.
  • Additionally, 39% of organizations expressed growing concerns over privacy issues stemming from the widespread use of generative AI.

Significant Impact of Generative AI & Growing Cybersecurity Challenges:

  • Transformative Impact: Generative AI has revolutionized various sectors like education, banking, healthcare, and manufacturing, reshaping our approach to operations.
    • However, this integration has also redefined the landscape of cyber risks and safety concerns.
  • Economic Implications: The generative AI industry's projected contribution to the global GDP, estimated between $7 to $10 trillion, underscores its significant economic potential.
    • Yet, the development of generative AI solutions, such as ChatGPT introduced in November 2022, has introduced a cycle of benefits and drawbacks.
  • Rising Phishing and Credential Theft: An alarming surge of 1,265% in phishing incidents/emails and a 967% increase in credential phishing since late 2022 indicates a concerning trend.
    • Cybercriminals exploit generative AI to craft convincing emails, messages, and websites, mimicking trusted sources to deceive unsuspecting individuals into divulging sensitive information or clicking on malicious links.
  • Emergence of Novel Cyber Threats: The proliferation of generative AI has expanded the cyber threat landscape, enabling sophisticated attacks.
    • Malicious actors leverage AI-powered tools to automate various stages of cyber-attacks, accelerating their pace and amplifying their impact.
    • This automation poses challenges for detection and mitigation, making attacks more challenging to thwart.
  • Challenges for Organizations: Organizations across sectors face escalating cyber threats, including ransomware attacks, data breaches, and supply chain compromises.
    • The interconnected nature of digital ecosystems exacerbates the risk, as vulnerabilities in one system can propagate to others, leading to widespread disruption and financial losses.
    • Additionally, cybercriminals' global reach and anonymity pose challenges for law enforcement and regulatory agencies.

The Bletchley Declaration: Addressing AI Challenges

  • Global Significance: The Bletchley Declaration represents a pivotal global initiative aimed at tackling the ethical and security dilemmas associated with artificial intelligence, particularly generative AI.
    • Named after Bletchley Park, renowned for its British code-breaking endeavours during World War II, the declaration embodies a collective resolve among world leaders to shield consumers and society from potential AI-related harms.
  • Acknowledgement of AI Risks: The signing of the Bletchley Declaration at the AI Safety Summit underscores the mounting awareness among global leaders regarding AI's inherent risks, notably in the cybersecurity and privacy realms.
    • By endorsing coordinated efforts, participating nations affirm their dedication to prioritizing AI safety and security on the international agenda.
  • Inclusive Engagement: The Bletchley Declaration's inclusive nature is evident in the involvement of diverse stakeholders, including major world powers like China, the European Union, India, and the United States.
    • By fostering collaboration among governments, international bodies, academia, and industry, the declaration facilitates cross-border and cross-sectoral knowledge exchange, essential for effectively addressing AI challenges and ensuring equitable regulatory frameworks.
  • Consumer Protection Focus: At its heart, the Bletchley Declaration underscores the imperative of safeguarding consumers against AI-related risks.
    • Participating countries commit to formulating policies and regulations that mitigate these risks, emphasizing transparency, accountability, and oversight in AI development and deployment.
    • Additionally, mechanisms for redress in cases of harm or abuse are prioritized.
  • Ethical AI Promotion: A core tenet of the Bletchley Declaration is the promotion of ethical AI practices.
    • Participating nations pledge to uphold principles of fairness, accountability, and transparency in AI development and usage, striving to prevent discriminatory or harmful outcomes.
    • This commitment aligns with broader endeavours to ensure responsible AI deployment for the betterment of society.

Alternative Measures for AI Risk Mitigation:

  • Institutional-Level Strategies: Governments and regulatory bodies can enact robust ethical and legislative frameworks to oversee the development, deployment, and utilization of generative AI technologies.
    • These frameworks should prioritize consumer safeguarding, transparency, and accountability, all while fostering innovation and economic prosperity.
    • Furthermore, the integration of watermarking technology can aid in the identification of AI-generated content, empowering users to discern between authentic and manipulated information.
    • This proactive approach can substantially mitigate the prevalence of misinformation and cyber threats stemming from AI-generated content.
  • Continuous Innovation and Adaptation: Sustained investment in research and development is imperative to proactively address emerging cyber threats and devise innovative solutions to counter them.
    • By bolstering support for cutting-edge research in AI security, cryptography, and cybersecurity, governments, academia, and industry can drive technological progress that fortifies cybersecurity resilience and mitigates the inherent risks associated with generative AI.

Conclusion

Effectively tackling the challenges presented by generative AI demands a comprehensive strategy encompassing regulatory, collaborative, and educational efforts across institutional, corporate, and grassroots domains. Through the enactment of robust regulatory frameworks, stakeholders can collaboratively mitigate the risks posed by AI-driven cyber threats, fostering a safer and more secure digital environment for all.

Balancing Fundamental Rights (FR) and the Directive Principles of State Policy (DPSP)

  • 09 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

The top court has a chance, in Property Owners Association vs State of Maharashtra, to resolve the clash between fundamental rights and Directive Principles of State Policy.

Context:

  • In a recent hearing before a nine-judge Bench of the Supreme Court of India in Property Owners Association vs State of Maharashtra, two crucial questions have surfaced concerning the interpretation and implementation of constitutional provisions.
  • The initial query revolves around elucidating the concept of "material resources of the community" as articulated in Article 39(b) of the Indian Constitution.
  • The subsequent issue delves into the potential discord between legislation crafted to fulfil the objectives delineated in Article 39(b) and the fundamental rights to equality and liberty enshrined in Part III of the Constitution.

The Conflict Between Fundamental Rights (FR) and Directive Principles of State Policy (DPSP):

  • Inherent Dilemma: At the core of India's constitutional framework lies a significant tension between fundamental rights and directive principles of state policy (DPSP).
    • Part III guarantees citizens' fundamental rights, while Part IV outlines DPSPs as guiding principles for state action.
    • This tension stems from the divergent nature of these provisions:
      • fundamental rights are legally enforceable
      • whereas DPSPs serve as moral and political directives without judicial enforceability.
  • Clash of Objectives: The conflict between fundamental rights and DPSPs arises from conflicting priorities: individual liberties versus collective welfare.
    • While fundamental rights focus on safeguarding individual autonomy and limiting state interference, DPSPs underscore the state's responsibility to foster social and economic justice for citizens' well-being.
    • This tension is compounded by India's diverse societal fabric, marked by varying social, economic, and cultural landscapes.
  • Historical Discourse: The conflict between fundamental rights and DPSPs has sparked considerable debate and legal scrutiny throughout India's constitutional history.
    • Courts have grappled with striking a balance between state intervention for societal welfare and safeguarding individual freedoms, especially when legislative measures aimed at fulfilling DPSPs impinge on fundamental rights.
    • The Supreme Court's pivotal role in adjudicating these conflicts has significantly shaped India's constitutional democracy.
  • Intensified Debate: During the 1970s, the conflict between fundamental rights and DPSPs reached a zenith, prompting amendments to shield certain laws from judicial review.
    • The landmark Kesavananda Bharati vs State of Kerala (1973) case sought to address this conflict, yet it persisted, reflecting the ongoing struggle to reconcile competing constitutional imperatives.

What is the Article 31C of the Indian Constitution?

  • The 25th Amendment (Birth of Article 31C): Enacted through the 25th amendment to the Indian Constitution, Article 31C was introduced to shield laws aimed at actualizing Article 39(b) and (c) from judicial scrutiny concerning potential violations of fundamental rights.
    • This constitutional provision sought to safeguard legislative measures crafted to secure the material resources of the community, shielding them from challenges under Articles 14 and 19, which safeguard equality and various freedoms, respectively.
  • Kesavananda Bharati Case (Challenging Article 31C): The landmark Kesavananda Bharati vs State of Kerala (1973) case questioned the validity and breadth of Article 31C.
    • The Supreme Court deliberated on whether Article 31C, by immunizing certain laws from fundamental rights challenges, infringed upon the basic structure of the Constitution.
    • While affirming the principle of judicial review and the supremacy of the Constitution's basic structure, the ruling left uncertainties about the extent to which Article 31C could restrict fundamental rights.
  • Expansion via the 42nd Amendment: Despite judicial scrutiny in Kesavananda, Parliament expanded Article 31C's reach through the 42nd Amendment in 1976.
    • This amendment aimed to widen the immunity granted to laws furthering directive principles, extending beyond Article 39(b) and (c) to encompass any directive principle.
    • The 42nd Amendment marked a significant shift in the equilibrium between fundamental rights and directive principles, sparking concerns over potential encroachments on individual liberties.
  • Minerva Mills Case  (Judicial Intervention): The constitutionality of the expanded Article 31C faced judicial scrutiny in Minerva Mills vs Union of India (1980).
    • In a seminal verdict, the Supreme Court struck down the 42nd Amendment, emphasizing the symbiotic relationship between fundamental rights and directive principles within the constitutional framework.
    • Chief Justice Y.V. Chandrachud's assertion regarding fundamental rights serving as a check against unchecked state authority underscored the significance of this ruling.
  • Ambiguities and Pending Matters: Following the Minerva Mills case, ambiguities persisted regarding the status of Article 31C and its alignment with the Constitution's basic structure.
    • Justice Y.V. Chandrachud's divergent opinions in Minerva Mills and Waman Rao vs Union of India added complexity to the issue.
    • The absence of a definitive Supreme Court ruling on the validity of Article 31C has perpetuated the tension between fundamental rights and directive principles.

Property Owners Association Vs State of Maharashtra: Resolving a Constitutional Conundrum

  • Comprehensive Legal Examination by the Supreme Court: At the heart of this case lies a critical examination of a law granting a state government board full control over dilapidated buildings, contingent upon the consent of at least 70% of residents.
    • The legality of this law is under scrutiny, particularly regarding its potential infringement on fundamental rights enshrined in Articles 14 and 19, which ensure equality and various freedoms, respectively.
  • Rebalancing Fundamental Rights and Directive Principles: The verdict in the Property Owners case holds profound significance for recalibrating the equilibrium between fundamental rights and directive principles in India's constitutional fabric.
    • It will delineate whether laws designed to uphold directive principles, such as acquiring dilapidated buildings for the common good, can withstand challenges based on fundamental rights.
    • This raises fundamental questions regarding the hierarchy of rights and duties within the constitutional framework and the extent to which the state can limit individual liberties for the collective welfare.
  • Addressing Ambiguities and Pending Issues: The Property Owners case offers an opportunity for the judiciary to clarify ambiguities surrounding the interpretation and implementation of Article 31C, considering previous judicial precedents.
    • Prior conflicting rulings in cases like Kesavananda Bharati and Minerva Mills have left unresolved queries regarding the validity and scope of Article 31C, particularly concerning its alignment with the Constitution's basic structure.
    • Despite subsequent judgments like Waman Rao and Sanjeev Coke vs Bharat Coking Coal (1982), which followed, the Supreme Court has yet to provide a definitive analysis of Article 31C introduced by the 25th amendment and its compatibility with the Constitution's foundational principles.
    • By offering clarity on these matters, the Supreme Court can foster a more coherent and uniform approach to reconciling the divergent demands of fundamental rights and directive principles.

Conclusion

The verdict in the Property Owners case stands as an opportunity to reinforce the core tenets of equality, liberty, and social justice embedded within the Indian Constitution. By delicately reconciling the safeguarding of individual rights with the advancement of societal well-being, the judiciary holds the key to preserving the integrity of India's constitutional democracy. Such a decision would ensure that principles of justice and fairness remain paramount in the governance of the nation, fostering a more inclusive and equitable society.

Elevating India's Online Gaming Industry

  • 08 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

The Prime Minister’s vision to establish India as a prominent global gaming hub has received renewed attention as he engaged with seven of the top gamers in the country.

Context:

  • The Prime Minister of India has envisioned the nation as a leading global gaming hub, recognising the potential of the online gaming industry to drive economic growth and innovation.
  • In a recent engagement with top gamers, key areas of focus were identified, including regulatory clarity, cultural integration, and diversity in the gaming landscape.
  • As India's gaming industry experiences rapid growth, it is essential to address existing challenges and devise effective strategies to propel the nation to the forefront of the global gaming arena.
  • By establishing clear regulatory guidelines, fostering partnerships, promoting skill development, encouraging original Indian content, and leveraging the country's digital infrastructure, India can unlock its full potential and emerge as a global gaming powerhouse.

Factors Driving the Growth of India's Gaming Industry:

  • Enhanced Internet Infrastructure and Connectivity: The expansion of broadband services in Tier-II and Tier-III cities via initiatives like BharatNet and the National Broadband Mission has widened the accessibility of online gaming beyond urban areas.
    • The proliferation of 4G and forthcoming 5G networks has further bolstered internet speeds and reduced latency, crucial for seamless gaming experiences.
  • Affordable Data and Smartphone Access: Decreasing costs of mobile data plans, spurred by intense competition among telecom providers, have made data more affordable and accessible for gaming enthusiasts across socio-economic segments.
    • With India's smartphone base exceeding 680 million, predominantly comprising 4G devices, mobile phones have emerged as the primary gaming platform, capturing a significant share of the market.
  • Emergence of E-sports: The inclusion of e-sports in prestigious events like the Commonwealth Games and Asian Games has elevated its status as a legitimate sporting activity.
    • The success of Indian teams on global platforms has further propelled industry growth, enhancing its profile and inspiring aspiring gamers.
  • Government Support and Regulatory Clarity: Regulations like the IT Rules 2021 have established a regulatory framework for online gaming, addressing concerns regarding content and addiction.
    • The formation of self-regulatory bodies and initiatives like the AVGC Promotion Task Force have fostered industry growth.
    • Additionally, liberalized FDI norms and government recognition of gamers have attracted international investments.
  • Robust Start-up Ecosystem: India's thriving start-up ecosystem has fostered the growth of numerous gaming companies, driving innovation and catering to diverse consumer preferences.
    • The emergence of gaming unicorns like Game 24X7, Dream11, and Mobile Premier League underscores the sector's potential and attractiveness to investors.
  • Cultural Shift and Pandemic Impact: The Covid-19 lockdown accelerated the adoption of online gaming as a virtual entertainment and socializing avenue.
    • With Indians spending an average of 4.5 hours per week on gaming post-lockdown, perceptions have evolved, recognizing gaming not just as a leisure activity but also as a viable career option.
  • Integration of Advanced Technologies: Adoption of technologies such as Augmented Reality (AR), Virtual Reality (VR), cloud gaming, and blockchain has enriched gaming experiences and spurred innovation.
    • AR and VR offer immersive gameplay, while cloud gaming ensures device-agnostic access.
    • Blockchain integration facilitates asset ownership and tokenized economies, enhancing engagement.

Key Challenges Facing India's Gaming Sector:

The Indian gaming industry faces several obstacles that must be addressed to foster sustainable growth and innovation:

  • Regulatory Ambiguity and Fragmented Policies: The absence of a cohesive regulatory framework creates uncertainty for industry players.
    • Varying state laws and regulations leads to a fragmented policy landscape, with some states banning certain online games while others adopt a more liberal approach.
  • Taxation Concerns and Sustainability Challenges: The recent imposition of a 28% Goods and Services Tax (GST) on the total face value of bets raises concerns about the long-term sustainability of the industry, particularly for smaller startups.
    • High tax rates may force smaller companies out of business, stifling innovation and hampering industry growth.
  • Infrastructure and Connectivity Challenges: Despite progress, reliable and high-speed internet connectivity remains a challenge in rural and remote areas.
    • Only 31% of the rural population uses the internet compared to 67% of urban dwellers (India Inequality Report 2022).
  • Content Localization and Cultural Relevance: Developing games and content that resonate with India's diverse cultural and linguistic landscapes presents a challenge for game developers.
    • While some games like Ludo King have successfully adapted to local tastes, many international games struggle to find similar cultural resonance.
  • Responsible Gaming and Addiction Concerns: As the gaming industry expands, concerns about gaming addiction, particularly among younger populations, must be addressed.
    • The prevalence of internet gaming disorder in Indian students ranges from 1.3% to 19.9% for the adolescent group (source).
    • The "Beware of Smartphone Zombies" signboards in Bengaluru serve as a reminder of the growing issue of digital distraction and the need for responsible gaming practices.

Strategies to Boost India's Gaming Industry:

Several measures can be adopted to enhance the gaming industry in India:

  • Regulatory Clarity: Improving regulatory clarity is crucial, particularly regarding the implementation of self-regulatory bodies mandated by the IT Rules of 2021.
    • Prompt action is needed to establish a clear and supportive framework for industry growth.
  • Dedicated Gaming Hubs and Incubators: Establishing specialized gaming hubs and incubators in major cities can foster innovation, collaboration, and talent development.
    • These hubs can provide cutting-edge infrastructure, mentorship, and resources for game developers, startups, and professionals.
  • Promote Game Development based on Indian Culture and Mythology: Encouraging and incentivizing game developers to create games inspired by India's rich cultural heritage, mythology, and folklore can help build a unique identity for Indian games, catering to both domestic and international audiences.
    • Games like "Raji: An Ancient Epic" have successfully blended Indian cultural elements with engaging gameplay.
  • Innovative Funding and Investment Models: Supporting alternative funding models like crowdfunding, venture capital investments, and public-private partnerships can assist game development and startups.
    • Global gaming companies like Ubisoft have experimented with blockchain-based assets and in-game economies, presenting opportunities for Indian companies to explore innovative funding models.
  • Empowering Women in Gaming: With women constituting 40% of India's gaming populace, they are well-positioned to lead the country's gaming revolution.
    • Supporting and empowering women in the gaming industry can unlock diverse talent, fresh perspectives, and innovative ideas to drive sector growth.
  • Cross-Industry Collaborations: Fostering collaborations between the gaming industry and other sectors, such as tourism, education, and hospitality, can help explore the potential of gamification and serious games.
    • These partnerships can lead to innovative applications of gaming technology across various domains.
  • By implementing these strategies, India can create a thriving and globally competitive gaming industry, unlocking significant economic, creative, and technological potential.

Conclusion

India's gaming industry holds immense potential for growth and innovation. To capitalize on this opportunity, it is crucial to address key challenges such as regulatory ambiguity and infrastructure limitations while promoting cultural integration and diversity in the gaming landscape. By fostering cross-industry collaborations, leveraging cutting-edge technologies, and empowering underrepresented groups, India can become a global gaming powerhouse, driving economic development and shaping the future of the gaming industry.

Constructed Wetlands: Solution for Wastewater Treatment in India

  • 07 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

Constructed wetlands ecosystems can significantly contribute to sustainable industrial progress and the preservation of water resources.

Context:

  • Industrial growth in India has led to major environmental issues, especially in managing industrial wastewater.
  • Untreated or improperly treated industrial discharge into water sources causes severe threats to ecosystems, public health, and water security.
  • With diverse sectors like manufacturing, textiles, chemicals, and mining, pollution is substantial.
  • Traditional treatment methods often fail to address the complex pollutants in industrial wastewater, demanding a shift to comprehensive, nature-based solutions.
  • Constructed wetlands offer a promising solution, providing effective treatment and significant environmental and economic benefits.
  • These unique ecosystems combine the efficiency of natural processes with human innovation, presenting an eco-friendly alternative to conventional treatment methods.

What are Constructed Wetlands?

  • A constructed wetland is a type of sustainable wastewater treatment system that is designed to look and function as a natural wetland does.
  • Constructed wetlands are created for the purpose of treating wastewater from small, rural communities in an environmentally friendly way before allowing it to return to the water system safely.
  • They are usually made up of a primary settlement tank where wastewater from the community is collected and from that, several ponds follow which are planted with wetland plants including reeds, rushes and sedges.
    • The ponds are usually gently sloped towards a river to allow water to flow very slowly through the wetland before flowing away.
    • Any particles that have been carried in the water will settle on the bottom and the plants and natural microorganisms (e.g. bacteria, algae and fungi) in the wetlands will break down and remove certain pollutants and elements e.g. phosphorus in the water.
  • Constructed wetlands are typically divided into two categories: Subsurface flow (SSF) and surface flow (SF).
    • Subsurface flow (SSF) wetlands direct wastewater through gravel beds or porous media, promoting microbial activity that degrades organic matter.
    • In contrast, surface flow (SF) wetlands demonstrate their aesthetic appeal above the water’s surface, with gently flowing streams and lush vegetation.
  • While each design exhibits distinct advantages, both variants share a unified objective: to convert pollutants into benign compounds through natural processes.
  • Plant Selection: Plants like cattails, bulrushes, and sedges are crucial for nutrient absorption and provide habitat for beneficial bacteria.
    • Their roots oxygenate the soil and support microbial processes, aiding in pollutant removal.
  • Microbial Activity: Beneath the water's surface, a complex microbial community breaks down pollutants, converting toxic substances like ammonia into benign compounds like nitrate.
    • This microbial activity occurs naturally, without external intervention.
  • Mutual Benefit: Plants and microbes engage in a symbiotic relationship where plants absorb nutrients and contaminants are trapped, while microbes break down pollutants.
    • This mutually beneficial interaction fosters a thriving ecosystem within constructed wetlands.

Nature’s Filtration System:

  • Constructed wetlands replicate the functionalities of natural wetlands but are purposefully designed to treat wastewater efficiently.
  • They comprise shallow basins adorned with wetland vegetation such as reeds, rushes and sedges.
  • As wastewater traverses through these basins, a series of physical, chemical and biological processes unfold, effectively eliminating contaminants and enhancing water quality.

Constructed wetlands present numerous benefits:

  • Cost-Effectiveness: In contrast to traditional treatment facilities, constructed wetlands frequently offer a more economical option for construction and upkeep.
    • Their construction and maintenance entail minimal energy consumption and lower operational expenses, rendering them especially appropriate for settings with limited resources.
  • Versatility: Constructed wetlands can be customised to address diverse forms of industrial wastewater, effectively managing a broad spectrum of pollutants and contaminants.
    • These wetlands can be configured as either free-water surface or subsurface flow systems, chosen based on the particular needs of the location and the characteristics of the pollutants present.
  • Environmental benefits: In addition to their primary role in wastewater treatment, constructed wetlands offer supplementary environmental advantages.
    • They function as habitats for a wide array of plant and animal species, promoting biodiversity conservation.
    • Moreover, they contribute to ecosystem services such as flood control and carbon sequestration, further enhancing their ecological significance.
  • Scalability and adaptability: Constructed wetlands are flexible in their scalability, and able to be adjusted to fit various industrial operations and spatial limitations.
    • They are versatile, accommodating both centralised and decentralised wastewater treatment methods, thereby providing adaptability in their deployment.

Constructed Wetlands Across India:

  • India boasts several remarkable locations where constructed wetlands are utilised for wastewater treatment.
  • In Delhi's Asola Bhatti Wildlife Sanctuary, a constructed wetland system purifies sewage from adjacent settlements while providing a habitat for diverse flora and fauna, contributing to regional biodiversity conservation.
  • Chennai's Perungudi and Kodungaiyur regions have integrated constructed wetlands into their decentralised wastewater treatment strategy.
    • These wetlands treat local community sewage, reducing pollutant levels and easing pressure on centralised treatment plants.
  • The Kolkata East Wetlands in West Bengal, a Ramsar site, comprises an extensive network of natural and constructed wetlands treating Kolkata's wastewater.
    • These wetlands offer livelihoods for local fishing and agricultural communities while improving water quality.
  • Palla village in Haryana uses constructed wetlands to treat wastewater from Delhi before releasing it into the Yamuna River, improving water quality and mitigating downstream pollution.
  • Auroville, a sustainable international township in Tamil Nadu, employs decentralised wastewater treatment systems featuring constructed wetlands, demonstrating a community-driven approach to wastewater management.
  • The Sariska Tiger Reserve in Rajasthan utilises constructed wetlands for treating village wastewater.
    • This initiative addresses sanitation needs while preserving the reserve's ecological integrity and wildlife habitats.

Opportunities and Challenges in the Indian Context:

Potential for Adoption:

  • In India, the potential for utilising constructed wetlands in industrial wastewater treatment is immense.
  • With its rich biodiversity and abundance of wetland ecosystems, the country presents favourable conditions for their widespread adoption.
  • The decentralised nature of industries makes constructed wetlands an appealing option for on-site or cluster-level wastewater treatment.

Challenges to Overcome:

  • Establishment of clear policies and regulatory frameworks to encourage the adoption of constructed wetlands in industrial wastewater treatment.
  • Provision of incentives and subsidies to incentivize industries to invest in sustainable wastewater management practices.
  • Raising awareness and enhancing technical expertise among stakeholders, including industry professionals, regulators, and local communities.
  • Continuous monitoring and research efforts to evaluate the performance of constructed wetlands in diverse industrial settings, including optimizing design parameters and addressing emerging challenges such as new contaminants and the impacts of climate change.

Community Involvement:

  • Engagement of local communities in the planning, design, and management of constructed wetlands fosters a sense of ownership and ensures the long-term sustainability of these systems.
  • Active participation from community members is essential for the success of constructed wetland projects.

Conclusion

Constructed wetlands present a promising solution for combating industrial wastewater pollution in India. By addressing policy, capacity-building initiatives, and community involvement, constructed wetlands have the potential to significantly contribute to sustainable industrial progress and the preservation of water resources for future generations.

Challenges Faced by MSME Sector in India & Its Solution

  • 06 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

A new provision in the Income-Tax Act from Budget 2023-24 ensures prompt payments to MSMEs however, it's causing a problem: large companies are cancelling orders from registered MSMEs and giving them to unregistered ones.

Context:

  • The Union Budget 2023-24 brought in a fresh provision in the Income-Tax (IT) Act to ensure timely payments to micro, small, and medium enterprises (MSMEs) within 45 days of supplying goods or services.
  • Yet, this measure has led to an unusual issue: big corporations are cancelling orders from registered MSMEs and redirecting them to unregistered ones.

What is the Latest Tax Compliance Guidelines for MSMEs:

  • In India, businesses typically record expenses as they occur (accrual basis), regardless of whether payment has been made.
  • However, under Section 15 of the MSMED Act 2006 and the newly enacted Section 43B(h) of the IT Act, businesses are obligated to settle payments with MSME Registered Enterprises within 15 days or up to 45 days if stipulated in an agreement.
  • Failure to adhere to this regulation results in the inability to deduct these payments as expenses in the same fiscal year, potentially increasing taxable income and business taxes.
  • Moreover, delayed payments to MSME-registered units incur interest liabilities, placing the responsibility on the payer to fulfil outstanding dues.

What is MSME?

  • MSMEs are Micro, Small, and Medium Enterprises that are usually involved in the manufacture and production of goods and commodities.
  • These business enterprises are the backbone of a country’s development and provide holistic development to the rural and urban population of the country.
    • The MSME sector in India makes a contribution of around 30% to the nation’s GDP.
    • Moreover, it contributes about 40% to the total exports of India, and
    • It provides more than 110 million job opportunities in the country.
  • The Government of India introduced the MSME under the Micro, Small, and Medium Enterprises Development (MSMED) Act of 2006.
    • MSMEs are managed under the Ministry of MSMEs.
  • The objective of MSMEs is to primarily engage in manufacturing, processing, production, and preservation of goods and commodities.
  • These business enterprises play an important role in the socio-economic development of the country.
  • Thus, the importance of MSME in the growth and development of India is vital.

MSME Classification:

  • Businesses are classified as micro, small or medium enterprises based on their turnover and the sector they operate in (manufacturing/services).

Types of MSME:

According to the Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises Development (MSMED) Act 2006, MSMEs are of 2 types:

  • Manufacturing Enterprises: Business enterprises that are involved in the manufacturing of goods, as stated under Schedule I of the IDRA 1951, are categorised as MSMEs.
    • Additionally, all business enterprises that contribute value to the finished products by making use of plants and machinery also come under MSMEs.
  • Service Enterprises: Business enterprises that provide services and come under the category of ‘enterprises’ as stated in the MSMED Act are service enterprises and come under MSMEs.
    • However, individual service providers do not qualify as service enterprises.

Importance of MSME in the Indian economy:

  • Export: MSMEs’ contribution to the exports from India was recorded at 45.56% till Sept. 2023.
    • Such high volumes of exports facilitate international trade and contribute to industrial growth within the country.
  • Employment: MSMEs create employment in rural and urban areas of the country.
    • These business enterprises are the second largest employment sector in India after agriculture.
    • By setting up units in rural and underdeveloped areas, MSMEs contribute to the better living standards of people from lower socioeconomic and rural areas as well.
  • Innovation: MSMEs bring innovation to various processes in the manufacturing of goods and commodities.
    • They provide the necessary skills, tools, and technology for automation and advancement in their sectors.
    • It contributes to the overall technological upgradation of the country and promotes research and development.
  • Entrepreneurship: MSMEs promote inclusiveness in the country by facilitating the entry of aspiring entrepreneurs in various sectors.
    • They promote healthy competitiveness among entrepreneurs, which fuels industrial growth.

Challenges faced by the MSME sector in India:

  • Financial: Access to finance is a significant hurdle for MSMEs, with only 16% receiving timely finance.
    • This forces them to rely on their own resources, hindering their growth prospects.
    • Even larger firms struggle to access cheaper credit from formal banks.
  • Regulatory issues: MSMEs face challenges with tax compliance and labour law changes, which have proven costly.
    • Despite attempts to make the sector more competitive, compliance with regulations and tax registration remains difficult, leading to low capital and business closures.
  • Infrastructure: India's infrastructure is crucial for the MSME sector, especially in the outsourcing industry.
    • However, inadequate infrastructure affects their efficiency and ability to compete globally, limiting their growth potential.
  • Low productivity & Lack of innovation: MSMEs may lack high productivity but offer value through cost efficiency and providing goods at lower prices.
    • However, their small-scale production and low margins put them at a disadvantage compared to larger firms.
    • Indian MSMEs often rely on outdated technologies and lack entrepreneurs who embrace new tools and technologies.
    • This hampers their productivity and competitiveness, especially when compared to larger firms in sectors like e-commerce and call centres.
  • Technical changes: MSMEs have faced significant technical changes over time, impacting their growth potential.
    • Changes in land ownership rights have led to mismanagement and reduced productivity, highlighting the need for adaptability.
  • Competition & Skills: MSMEs face fierce competition from larger firms, exacerbated by the rise of e-commerce and globalization.
    • While competition is not new, MSMEs struggle to withstand the pressure in areas such as agriculture, garments, and tourism.
    • MSMEs lag behind in terms of skills compared to their counterparts in other countries.
    • Dependence on informal workers with limited technical skills hampers productivity and forces smaller firms into low-skilled jobs, hindering long-term growth.
  • Lack of professionalism: Many Indian MSMEs lack professionalism, making them vulnerable to corruption and abuse of power.
    • This significantly impacts their business productivity and overall growth.
  • Lack of standardized policies: India lacks consistent MSME policies, resulting in inconsistent development and entrepreneurship promotion programs.
    • While progress has been made in Delhi, nationwide efforts are necessary for Indian firms to compete globally.

Government MSME Schemes and Policies in India:

  • FIRST: Keeping in view the crucial role MSMEs play in the development of the country, the central government announced the launch of FIRST (Forum for Internet Retailers, Sellers, and Traders).
  • The program aligns with the government’s Digital India movement and educates and informs MSMEs about opportunities to become self-reliant and digitally capable.
  • MSME Innovation Scheme: Under this scheme, MSMEs can enjoy reimbursement of the cost of Intellectual Property Rights applications for new ideas and designs.
    • The programme provides financial and other resources to MSMEs to encourage innovation.
  • CGTMSE: The Credit Guarantee Trust Fund for Micro and Small Enterprises scheme provides financial assistance of up to ?2 Crore to new businesses.
  • CLCSS: The Credit Linked Capital Subsidy Scheme provides capital subsidies to MSMEs operating in the khadi, village, and coir sectors.
    • The subsidy allows these businesses to acquire technological innovation and upgradation.
  • ASPIRE: ASPIRE, or A Scheme for Promotion of Innovation, Rural Industries, and Entrepreneurship, fosters innovation and entrepreneurship in rural and agricultural sectors by establishing advanced technology networks.
  • Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana (PMMY): The PMMY scheme provides loans up to Rs. 10 lakhs to MSMEs.
    • The scheme has three categories of loans: Shishu (up to Rs. 50,000), Kishore (up to Rs. 5 lakhs), and Tarun (up to Rs. 10 lakhs).
    • The loans do not require collateral and are available to both new and existing MSMEs.
  • Stand-Up India: The Stand-Up India scheme provides loans up to Rs. 1 crore to SC/ST and women entrepreneurs for setting up new ventures in the manufacturing, services, or trading sectors.
    • The scheme aims to promote entrepreneurship among these communities and provides support through the entire loan process.

Way Forward:

  • Creating awareness about government schemes and initiatives: Stakeholders should take active measures to educate MSMEs about the various schemes and initiatives launched by the government to promote SME financing.
    • This will help MSMEs take advantage of these schemes and secure financing for their businesses.
  • Developing innovative financing solutions: Financial institutions should develop innovative financing solutions that cater to the unique needs of MSMEs.
    • These solutions can include alternative credit scoring mechanisms, digital lending platforms, and other innovative solutions that reduce the reliance on collateral and traditional credit histories.
  • Encouraging private-public partnerships: Private-public partnerships can be a powerful tool to promote SME financing.
    • Governments and private sector companies can work together to develop financing solutions that are tailored to the needs of MSMEs.
  • Reducing the cost of credit: High interest rates on loans can be a significant barrier for MSMEs to secure financing.
    • Stakeholders should take measures to reduce the cost of credit for MSMEs, which will make it easier for them to invest in their businesses and drive growth.
  • Leveraging technology: Technology can play a crucial role in improving SME financing.
    • Stakeholders should leverage technology to develop digital lending platforms, credit scoring mechanisms, and other solutions that can reduce the cost and time involved in securing financing.

Conclusion

MSMEs are vital to India's economy, driving exports, employment, innovation, and entrepreneurship. Although they face financial, regulatory, and infrastructure hurdles, fostering a supportive environment through awareness, innovative financing, partnerships, cost reduction, and technology can empower MSMEs to overcome challenges and significantly contribute to India's socio-economic growth.

Get the Sustainable Development Goals Back on Track

  • 04 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

2024 is an election year across the world and newly elected governments need to focus on the all-important sustainability issue.

Context:

  • The United Nations Summit on Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) held in September in New York presented a chance to assess progress toward the lofty Agenda 2030 goal.
  • The COVID-19 pandemic and other worldwide crises have made progress towards these goals difficult, despite the fact that they are part of a framework that has been widely agreed upon.
  • It is critical to evaluate the state of SDG implementation, investigate critical areas that call for immediate attention, talk about the results of academic studies on the SDGs' political influence, and suggest ways to advance sustainable development.

What is Sustainable Development?

  • Sustainable development entails fostering development that fulfils present needs while safeguarding the capacity of future generations to meet their own needs.
  • Coined by the Brundtland Commission in its 1987 report, "Our Common Future," this definition remains widely embraced.
  • Embracing sustainable development involves collaborative endeavours aimed at constructing an inclusive, sustainable, and resilient future for both humanity and the environment.

What is the Progress and Emerging Challenges in SDG Implementation?

  • Slow Progress and Growing Concerns: The path toward achieving the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) has been marred by sluggish progress and mounting concerns, casting doubt on the world's ability to attain the 2030 targets.
    • Despite initial optimism following the adoption of Agenda 2030 by the UN General Assembly in 2015, reports indicate inadequate progress and deviation from the intended trajectory.
    • While there were modest improvements noted between 2015 and 2019, particularly in areas like poverty reduction and access to essential services, they fell significantly short of the necessary benchmarks outlined in the agenda.
  • Challenges Amplified by Global Crises: The onset of the COVID-19 pandemic and other global crises has compounded the hurdles in SDG achievement.
    • The pandemic, in particular, has triggered profound socioeconomic repercussions, disrupting economies, widening inequalities, and propelling millions into poverty.
    • The diversion of resources and attention toward addressing immediate health and economic exigencies has further impeded advancements toward long-term sustainable development objectives.
  • Concerns Over Environmental Sustainability: A notable concern arises from the insufficient emphasis on goals related to environmental sustainability and biodiversity conservation.
    • Critical objectives such as sustainable consumption and production, climate action, and marine and terrestrial biodiversity preservation have been overlooked, jeopardising the welfare of present and future generations.
    • Neglecting these environmental imperatives not only undermines progress toward specific SDGs but also poses existential threats to humanity and the planet.
  • Fragmented Approach to SDG Pursuit: Furthermore, the prevailing approach to SDG pursuit often disregards the interconnected and indivisible nature of the goals.
    • The SDGs are interlinked, with progress in one goal intricately linked to advancements in others.
    • Yet, the disjointed strategies adopted by many nations and stakeholders fail to acknowledge these interconnections, leading to isolated efforts unlikely to yield substantive outcomes.
    • Without a holistic and cohesive approach to sustainable development, achieving the overarching objective of harmonising human well-being with environmental health remains elusive.

International Promises and Real-World Execution:

Renewed Pledges from International Leaders:

  • Amidst these developments, the UN SDG Report 2023 underscored five critical areas necessitating immediate attention:
    • The government's commitment to seven years of accelerated, sustained, and transformative actions to fulfil SDG promises;
    • Concrete, comprehensive, and targeted governmental policies to eradicate poverty, mitigate inequality, and combat environmental degradation, prioritising the empowerment of women, girls, and marginalised communities;
    • Enhancement of national and subnational capacities, institutional accountability, and governance mechanisms to expedite progress;
  • Reaffirmation of the international community's commitment to provide assistance and mobilise resources for developing nations, alongside fortifying the UN development system.
  • Acknowledging the gravity of the situation, world leaders reiterated their commitments and pledged intensified efforts to achieve the SDGs, envisioned as the global pathway out of crises by 2030.
  • However, the extent to which these global declarations translate into action at the grassroots level remains uncertain.

Challenges in National Implementation:

  • Despite governments' global vows, significant disparities often exist between rhetoric and practical implementation on the national stage.
  • Political considerations, competing agendas, and resource limitations can impede the effective execution of SDG-related policies.
  • Furthermore, inadequate coordination and coherence among various government departments and administrative tiers may lead to fragmented initiatives, diminishing the overall efficacy of SDG implementation efforts.

Academic Perspectives and Suggestions:

  • Limited Political Influence: The research highlights that while the SDGs have sparked discussions and prompted some normative and institutional adjustments, their direct political impact at national and local levels remains constrained.
    • Despite international endorsement, the SDGs have yet to yield significant political outcomes in many nations, underscoring the necessity for a nuanced understanding of the factors shaping SDG implementation and the pathways for driving political transformation.
  • Systemic Strategies for SDG Achievement: The study underscores the significance of embracing a systemic approach to unlock the transformative potential of the SDGs.
    • This entails identifying and managing trade-offs while maximising synergies across diverse goals.
    • By addressing interconnected challenges comprehensively, policymakers can capitalise on synergistic effects and enhance the efficacy of their interventions.
      • For instance, initiatives promoting renewable energy can simultaneously advance climate action (SDG 13), foster economic growth (SDG 8), and improve access to clean water and sanitation (SDG 6).
  • Customised Implementation Approaches: Moreover, the study stresses the importance of tailored strategies for SDG implementation tailored to regional and national contexts.
    • Cookie-cutter solutions are unlikely to succeed given the varied socio-economic, political, and environmental landscapes in which the SDGs are being pursued.
    • Instead, policymakers should identify context-specific entry points and leverage existing resources and capacities to drive progress.
    • This may involve targeting specific sectors or geographic areas requiring interventions and engaging marginalized communities to ensure their voices and needs are addressed.
  • Pragmatic Steps to Enhance Implementation: Additionally, the study provides pragmatic recommendations for bolstering SDG implementation.
    • These encompass strengthening governance frameworks and accountability mechanisms, mobilising financial resources, fostering innovation and technology dissemination, and nurturing partnerships among governments, civil society, the private sector, and other stakeholders.
    • By adopting a multi-faceted approach addressing political, economic, social, and environmental dimensions, policymakers can foster an enabling environment for transformative change.

Conclusion

The evaluation of SDG advancement highlights the imperative for swift and collaborative measures to overcome prevailing hurdles and hasten advancement. As 2024 heralds elections in numerous nations, incoming administrations have a chance to elevate sustainability as a focal point and harmonise domestic policies with the SDGs. By infusing sustainability tenets into governance structures and policy formulations, governments can play a pivotal role in expediting SDG attainment.

The Judiciary’s Shadow Over Standard-essential Patents

  • 03 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

The government must put in place measures to regulate standard essential patents before the judiciary causes further damage to India’s manufacturing dreams.

Context:

  • The emergence of Standard Essential Patents (SEPs) and their implications for India's telecom manufacturing industry has become a significant policy issue.
  • However, the utilization of SEPs by technology firms presents hurdles, potentially jeopardizing India's domestic manufacturing sector.
  • Thus, it is crucial to delve into the intricacies of this matter, scrutinizing the role of SEPs, the regulatory challenges they present, and the necessity for regulatory action.

What are Standard Essential Patents (SEPs)?

  • EPS are patents indispensable for implementing a technical standard, particularly prominent in industries like telecommunications reliant on standards such as 3G, 4G, and 5G for seamless device and network communication.
  • Typically owned by entities or individuals, these patents are vital for guaranteeing the interoperability and compatibility of products and technologies adhering to specific standards.
  • Critical for fostering interoperability and competitiveness in the cellular phone market, EPS covers technologies adopted as industry standards.
  • Despite their significance, conflicts over EPS licensing and infringement are common, often resulting in legal disputes and negotiations between companies and patent holders to establish equitable licensing terms.

Significance of Essential Patents and Regulatory Hurdles:

  • Essential Patents (EPs) such as CDMA, GSM, and LTE serve as the linchpin of technological standards in the telecom industry, ensuring seamless compatibility among various cellular phone brands.
  • However, the standard-setting process, predominantly governed by private Standard Setting Organizations (SSOs), limits India's influence in shaping these standards.
  • Consequently, owners of EPs may demand excessive royalties, resulting in the "patent holdup" dilemma.
  • Although SSOs strive for fair, reasonable, and non-discriminatory (FRAND) licensing, opacity and anti-competitive behaviours persist, as illustrated by substantial fines levied on companies like Qualcomm by multiple jurisdictions.

Judicial Response to Standard Essential Patents (SEPs) Issues:

  • Competition Law Enforcement Inertia: The Competition Commission of India (CCI) commenced an inquiry in 2013 upon a complaint by Micromax against Ericsson, alleging SEP licensing abuse.
    • However, Ericsson contested the CCI's jurisdiction, resulting in protracted legal wrangling.
    • Despite a favourable ruling for the CCI in 2016, Ericsson's appeals prolonged the case until a final judgment in 2023.
    • India, due to this prolonged litigation, remains the sole major economy yet to examine potential anti-competitive SEP licensing practices.
  • Patent Infringement Cases and Judicial Engagement: While competition law matters linger, the Delhi High Court actively hears lawsuits by SEP owners against cellular phone manufacturers accused of patent infringement.
    • These lawsuits entail intricate trials to ascertain patent validity, infringement, and damages.
    • Rather than pausing proceedings pending competition law resolution, the court issues interim measures favouring SEP owners.
    • Such measures often mandate manufacturers, many of them Indian, to deposit substantial sums with the court for ongoing production during trials.
  • Unprecedented "Deposit" Orders: Issuing "deposit" orders, compelling manufacturers to deposit significant funds before trial, is unprecedented in commercial law.
    • These orders, lasting throughout lengthy trials, impose heavy financial burdens on defendants, depriving them of vital working capital.
    • While lacking legal foundation and fairness, the Delhi High Court justifies them using its "inherent powers to ensure justice."
    • This judicial activism, while aimed at expediting legal proceedings, raises concerns about procedural fairness and equitable treatment of litigants.

Impact of Judicial Interventions and Legal Battles on India's Manufacturing Goals:

  • Undermining Investor Confidence and Market Stability: Extended legal battles and judicial interventions sow uncertainty, denting investor trust in India's manufacturing sector.
    • Foreign investors may perceive the unpredictable legal environment as a barrier to entering or expanding operations in the nation.
    • Uncertainty regarding SEP licensing practices and potential adverse court rulings disrupts market stability, impeding long-term investment planning for both domestic and international enterprises.
  • Stifling Growth and Innovation: SEP-related disputes divert attention and resources away from fostering innovation and technological progress in the telecom manufacturing domain.
    • Rather than directing efforts towards research and development (R&D) or embracing new technologies, companies become entangled in legal disputes, hindering productive pursuits.
    • This diversion of resources curtails innovation, obstructs product development, and undermines India's global competitiveness.
  • Impact on Employment and Economy: The manufacturing sector is a vital source of employment and economic advancement, especially in emerging economies like India.
    • However, uncertainties surrounding SEP-related litigation pose a threat to job stability and employment opportunities, particularly in the telecom manufacturing sector.
    • Protracted legal proceedings and financial burdens may compel companies to downsize operations, leading to workforce reductions and inhibiting future investments.
  • Policy Inconsistencies: Contradictions arise between judicial rulings favouring SEP owners and government initiatives to incentivize domestic manufacturing.
    • While the government aims to attract investment and bolster indigenous production, SEP-related disputes undermine these objectives.
    • The disconnect between supporting manufacturers and overlooking financial burdens imposed by SEP owners questions the coherence of policies promoting industrial growth.
  • Long-term Industrial Landscape Implications: Unresolved tensions surrounding SEP licensing practices and judicial handling of disputes cast shadows over India's industrial future.
    • Failure to address these issues may deter investors, jeopardize job creation, and impede India's transition to a knowledge-based economy.
    • With regulatory intervention to streamline legal processes and ensure fairness, India can catch up to global peers in manufacturing prowess.

Way Forward:

  • The European Parliament's proactive stance on regulating SEPs offers valuable lessons for global intervention in this arena.
  • Given India's constrained influence in standard-setting and obligations to uphold patents of foreign tech firms, it presents a strong rationale for similar regulatory action.
  • Enhancing regulatory frameworks to foster transparency, equity, and non-discriminatory practices in SEP licensing is essential to protect India's economic welfare and foster indigenous manufacturing.

Conclusion

The Indian government must prioritize resolving regulatory uncertainties regarding SEPs to protect domestic manufacturers' interests and drive industrial advancement. Regulatory actions should strive for a harmonious balance between technology firms' interests and overarching goals of economic progress, innovation, and consumer protection. Through decisive intervention, India can assert its autonomy, cultivate fair competition, and cultivate an environment conducive to investment and innovation.

Analysing Labour on a Warming Planet

  • 02 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

The latest report from the International Labour Organization (ILO), titled 'Safeguarding Workers in a Changing Climate', underscores the pressing necessity to ensure the resilience of labour in the face of climate change.

Context:

  • The International Labour Organisation (ILO) recently released a report titled "Ensuring Safety and Health at Work in a Changing Climate," highlighting the urgency of climate-proofing labour practices to protect workers' well-being.
  • As the planet experiences warming, workplace environments evolve, and the ILO emphasizes the need to update occupational safety and health (OSH) regulations to address emerging risks.
  • According to the report, over one-third of the global population is exposed to extreme heat each year, resulting in nearly 23 million work-related injuries.
    • The ILO urges an overhaul of existing OSH laws and protections, as they have not kept pace with climate change-related hazards, leading to increased worker mortality and morbidity.

What Are the Emerging Climate-Related Risks?

  • The International Labour Organization (ILO) has identified six primary impacts of climate change:
    • Excessive heat
    • Ultraviolet (UV) radiation
    • Extreme weather events
    • Workplace air pollution
    • Vector-borne diseases
    • Agrochemicals
  • These hazards can result in various health issues such as stress, stroke, and exhaustion. Particularly vulnerable to these risks are workers in sectors like agriculture, construction, urban conservation, transportation, and tourism.
  • Of significant concern is the rising prevalence of gig employment globally, which is particularly susceptible to heat-related conditions.
    • In India, gig workers, including ride-hailing app drivers, food and grocery delivery personnel, home repair technicians (electricians, plumbers, AC mechanics), and courier service employees, constitute approximately 1.5% of the total workforce, a figure projected to reach 4.5% by 2030 according to a Nasscom study.
  • In the Indian context, the collective impact of these segments suggests that approximately 80% of the country's workforce, projected to be 600 million by 2023, is vulnerable to heat-related hazards.
  • This staggering figure exceeds the entire current population of South America by 180 million.

Which Sectors Bear the Brunt of Climate Impact?

Agriculture Sector:

  • Globally, agriculture stands out as the most heat-vulnerable sector, particularly in developing nations where informal farm labourers toil without adequate weather protection.
  • In India, where agriculture and allied activities employed about 45.76% of the workforce in 2022-23 according to Union Agriculture Minister Arjun Munda, there's a concerning trend of decline from levels three decades ago.
  • NSSO data from July 2018 to June 2019 reveals that nearly 90% of Indian farmers own less than two hectares of land, with incomes hovering around ?10,000 monthly on average.
  • The situation is even direr in states like Jharkhand, Odisha, and West Bengal, where farmers' earnings can be as low as ?4,895, ?5,112, and ?6,762 respectively.
  • Additionally, half of India's farmers are burdened with debt and lack access to modern agricultural technology, impeding their ability to adapt to a warming climate.
  • Many communities have already adjusted work schedules to avoid peak heat hours, while the ILO recommends increased hydration facilities, breaks, and shaded rest areas in plantations.

Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises (MSME) Sector:

  • Following agriculture, India's MSME sector employs over 123 million workers, accounting for about 21% of the workforce.
  • Despite its significant contribution to exports and manufacturing output, the sector's pervasive informality has led to minimal oversight of worker conditions by state Occupational Safety and Health (OSH) departments, rendering workers highly susceptible to heat-related risks.

Building & Construction Sector:

  • The building and construction industry, with around 70 million workers constituting almost 12% of India's workforce, faces unique challenges exacerbated by urbanization.
  • Workers in this sector contend with the urban heat island effect, heightened by rapid urban growth.
  • Moreover, they are disproportionately exposed to physical injuries and air pollution-related health hazards, such as asthma, given the alarming pollution levels in many Indian cities.

Legislation Safeguarding Worker Rights in India:

  • Central Laws: Integral to ensuring workplace safety in India are the Factories Act, the Workmen Compensation Act, and the Building and Other Construction Workers Act.
    • These laws encompass various facets of labour rights and welfare, addressing conditions within factories and providing compensation for work-related injuries.
  • Occupational Safety, Health, and Working Conditions Code, 2020 (OSH Code, 2020): Introduced in 2020, the OSH Code represents a comprehensive effort to consolidate and revise existing legislation pertaining to workplace safety.
    • Its primary objective is to streamline and strengthen the legal framework governing occupational safety and health nationwide.
    • By amalgamating disparate regulations into a unified code, it aims to establish a more cohesive and effective system for ensuring workplace safety across diverse sectors and industries.

State Laws in Tamil Nadu and Maharashtra:

  • Tamil Nadu: Tamil Nadu formulated its regulations under the Factories Act as early as 1950.
    • These regulations stipulate a maximum wet bulb temperature of 30°C on shop floors and outline requirements for adequate air circulation.
    • However, they lack specific provisions for thermal comfort tailored to varying activity levels or modern cooling solutions, indicating a need for updated standards.
  • Maharashtra: Similarly, Maharashtra devised its rules under the Factories Act in 1963. Like Tamil Nadu, these regulations address maximum wet bulb temperatures and air circulation standards.
    • Nevertheless, they also lack detailed provisions for contemporary cooling methods or adjustments for thermal comfort aligned with evolving production processes, underscoring the necessity for modernization.

Challenges in Addressing Heat Hazards:

  • Regulatory Ambiguity: Existing regulations lack specificity regarding thermal comfort standards and the integration of air conditioning in workplaces.
    • There's a pressing need to update regulations to accommodate modern cooling technologies and ensure the well-being and safety of workers.
  • Impact of the Gig Economy: The burgeoning gig economy in India exacerbates workers' vulnerability to heat-related risks.
    • Many gig workers, comprising a substantial portion of the workforce, often operate without adequate protections or support systems to mitigate extreme heat conditions.
  • Pressures on Labor Unions: Labour unions face mounting pressures from management and bureaucratic entities, often prioritizing industry interests over worker welfare.
    • This dynamic can result in the neglect of worker safety concerns pertaining to heat hazards and other climate-related risks.
  • Effluent and Byproduct Management: The disposal of effluents and byproducts poses significant health risks, particularly with fluctuating temperatures, necessitating robust management strategies to safeguard worker health.
  • Silicosis in Mining and Quarries: The escalating prevalence of silicosis, stemming from silica exposure in mines and quarries, presents a profound occupational health challenge that demands urgent attention and intervention.
  • Shortcomings in Labor Inspection Departments: Vacancies and a lack of expertise within labour inspection departments undermine effective oversight of workplace safety measures, hindering the enforcement of regulations and exacerbating risks for workers.

Way Forward:

  • Modernize Regulatory Frameworks: Revamp existing regulations to include clear guidelines on thermal comfort and air conditioning standards in workplaces.
    • Integrate innovative cooling technologies to ensure the safety and well-being of workers.
  • Empower Labor Unions: Strengthen labour unions and equip them with the resources needed to advocate for worker welfare and safety.
    • Foster collaboration among unions, management, and governmental bodies to effectively tackle heat hazards.
  • Enhance Labor Inspection Mechanisms: Boost staffing and training within labour inspection departments to enhance oversight of workplace safety.
    • Conduct regular inspections and rigorously enforce safety regulations to shield workers from climate-related risks.
  • Invest in Research and Development: Allocate funding for research initiatives focused on developing climate adaptation strategies tailored to various industries.
    • Support studies assessing the efficacy of interventions and technologies in mitigating heat hazards and other climate-related risks.
  • Raise Awareness and Education: Launch awareness campaigns to educate workers, employers, and the public about the health implications of climate change.
    • Provide training programs on heat stress management and preventive measures to bolster resilience in vulnerable sectors.

Conclusion

Amidst the challenges posed by climate change, safeguarding workplace safety and health emerges as a critical imperative. The ILO report highlights a pressing call for a globally accepted regulatory framework to fortify workplaces against climate-related risks and safeguard workers. Achieving this necessitates concerted action from governments, industries, and workers alike to address evolving hazards and uphold the well-being of workers amidst the changing climate landscape.

Constitution and the Redistribution of Wealth

  • 01 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

During the ongoing election campaign, there have been intense debates between the ruling government and the Opposition regarding wealth redistribution, while the SC has formed a nine-judge Bench to interpret the DPSP concerning ownership and control of material resources.

Context:

  • Congress leader Rahul Gandhi during the Lok Sabha campaign said that there will be a financial survey to determine the distribution of wealth in the country for addressing the issue of inequality.
  • The ruling BJP targeted Gandhi and alleged that Congress if elected, would bring back the "socialistic model" of economics and hinder India's growth as an economy.

What is Wealth Redistribution?

  • The meaning of wealth redistribution is the transfer of wealth from one individual to another through a social mechanism such as taxation, charity, or public services.
    • One biggest example of wealth redistribution would be income tax wherein higher earnings pay a higher percentage of tax compared to lower-income earners.
  • Proponents of this exercise note that wealth redistribution is necessary to bridge the inequality gap between members of society.
  • And in India, the gap between the rich and the poor is only growing further.
  • As per a recent study, the country’s richest one per cent of the population now owns 40 per cent of the country’s wealth.
  • According to the report titled Income and Wealth Inequality in India: The Rise of The Billionaire Raj, and published by The World Inequality Lab, “the inequality gap widened after the economy’s opening up in the early 1990s, but “between 2014-15 and 2022-23, the rise of top-end inequality has been particularly pronounced in terms of wealth concentration”.
    • Based on figures from the World Inequality Database, India’s income inequality is among the very highest in the world, behind only Peru, Yemen and a few other small countries.

What Does India’s Constitution Say on Wealth Distribution?

  • The Preamble to the Constitution aims to secure for all citizens social and economic justice, liberty and equality.
  • Part III of the Constitution lists down the fundamental rights that guarantee liberty and equality while Part IV contains the DPSP.
  • These are principles that the central and State governments should follow to achieve social and economic justice in our country.
  • Unlike the fundamental rights in Part III, the DPSP is not enforceable in court.
  • They are nevertheless fundamental in the governance of the country.
  • Article 39(b) and (c) in Part IV contain principles that are aimed at securing economic justice.
  • They provide that ownership and control of material resources of the society should be distributed to serve the common good and that the operation of the economic system does not result in the concentration of wealth to the common detriment.
  • India’s Constitution-makers haven’t explicitly spoken of wealth redistribution.
  • It’s noteworthy that when Article 39 (Draft Article 31) was being added to the Constitution, it was heavily debated.
  • The economist KT Shah wanted the Constitution to outrightly prevent the creation of monopolies in industries.
  • In agreement with him was Shibban Lal Saxena, who wanted it to be explicitly put down that the State shall control a few key industries.
  • However, there were others Naziruddin Ahmad, who were not comfortable with the Constitution endorsing contested political and economic ideologies.

What is the Historical Context of the Redistribution of Wealth?

  • The Constitution originally guaranteed the right to property as a fundamental right under Article 19(1)(f).
  • It is provided under Article 31 that the state shall pay compensation in case of the acquisition of private property.
    • It is pertinent to note that at the time of independence, the main property rights related to agricultural and other land.
    • The government had to acquire the rights in such estates for carrying out land reforms and the construction of public assets.
  • Considering the inadequate resources of the government and in order to provide greater flexibility in acquiring land for public welfare, various amendments were carried out curtailing the right to property.
  • The Supreme Court in various cases has interpreted the relationship between fundamental rights and the DPSP.
    • Most of these cases were against constitutional amendments made by the state that curtailed the right to property which was then a fundamental right.
    • In the Golak Nath case (1967), the Supreme Court held that fundamental rights cannot be abridged or diluted to implement DPSP.
    • Finally, in the Kesavananda Bharati case (1973), a thirteen-judge Bench of the Supreme Court upheld the validity of Article 31C but made it subject to judicial review.
    • In the Minerva Mills case (1980), the Supreme Court ruled that the Constitution exists on a harmonious balance between fundamental rights and DPSP.
  • In 1978, in order to avoid excessive litigation directly in the Supreme Court by the propertied class, the 44th Amendment Act omitted the right to property as a fundamental right and made it a constitutional right under Article 300A.
    • The right to private property continues to be an important constitutional cum legal right.
    • Any law to acquire private property by the state should be only for a public purpose and provide adequate compensation.

What is the Current Debate on the Redistribution of Wealth?

  • The government of India in the first four decades after independence followed a “socialistic model” of economy.
  • The economic policies resulted in the nationalisation of banking and insurance, extremely high rates of direct taxes (even up to 97%), estate duty on inheritance, tax on wealth etc.
  • The rationale behind these measures during those times was to reduce inequality and redistribute wealth among the poorer sections that constituted the majority of the population.
  • However, such measures stifled growth and also resulted in the concealment of income/wealth.
  • Taxes like estate duty and wealth tax generated revenue that was much less than the cost incurred in administering them.
  • The nineties saw the country move from a closed economy towards liberalisation, globalisation and privatisation.
  • A new industrial policy was unveiled in 1991 with the objective of empowering market forces, improving efficiency and rectifying deficiencies in the country’s industrial structure.
  • Estate duty was abolished in 1985 and wealth tax in 2016.
  • The market-driven economy has resulted in additional resources for the government that has helped in bringing people out of abject poverty.
  • Nonetheless, this economic system has also resulted in growing inequality.
  • A report by the World Inequality Lab states that the top 10% of the country’s population have a share of 65% and 57% of the wealth and income respectively as of 2022-23.
  • The bottom 50% on the other hand have a meagre share of 6.5% and 15% of the wealth and income respectively.
  • The manifesto for the current Lok Sabha elections of the Congress promises that there will be a financial survey to ascertain the distribution of wealth among the people in the country and address the issue of inequality.
  • The ruling party campaigners led by the PM have targeted the Opposition on this matter.
  • The SC meanwhile has constituted a nine-judge Bench to interpret whether material resources under Article 39(b) include private resources as well.

Way Forward:

  • Growing inequality is a worldwide problem of a liberalised open-market economic system.
  • It is the responsibility of the government to protect the interest of the poorer classes who are most dependent on the state machinery for their livelihood.
  • At the same time past policies of extremely high tax rates, estate duty, wealth tax etc., did not achieve their desired goals. Instead, they only led to the concealment of income and wealth.
  • Innovation and growth should not be curtailed but the benefits of growth should reach all sections especially the marginalised.
  • It's essential to design inclusive policies through informed debates, aligning with current economic models, to ensure that the benefits of growth reach marginalized sections, in line with the constitutional principle of economic justice for all.

Conclusion

The debate on wealth redistribution in India underscores the complex challenge of balancing economic growth with equitable resource allocation. While past policies have had mixed results, it remains essential for the government to protect vulnerable populations and promote inclusive growth. To achieve this, policymakers must foster innovation while ensuring the benefits reach marginalized communities. By designing policies aligned with current economic models and adhering to the constitutional principle of economic justice, India can work towards a future where growth and social equity coexist harmoniously.

EC’s Model Code Needs Reform and India Needs Model Leadership

  • 30 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

Former Election Commissioner Ashok Lavasa points out that a significant gap in the present framework is that the Model Code of Conduct for elections has not spelled out the consequences of defaults, thus diluting its deterrent effect.

Context:

  • The Model Code of Conduct (MCC) plays a pivotal role in India's electoral process, having evolved considerably since its inception to uphold fairness in elections.
  • While originally crafted to regulate conduct during elections, the MCC faces new hurdles in today's dynamic political environment.
  • Hence, it becomes imperative to delve into the historical progression of the MCC, identify existing deficiencies, and suggest strategies to bolster its implementation.

Evolution of the Model Code of Conduct (MCC):

  • Kerala was the first state to adopt a code of conduct for elections.
  • In 1960, ahead of the Assembly elections in the state, the administration prepared a draft code that covered important aspects of electioneering such as processions, political rallies, and speeches.
  • It was only in 1974, just before the mid-term general elections, that the EC released a formal MCC.
  • It also set up bureaucratic bodies at the district level to oversee its implementation.
  • So the EC, just before the 1979 Lok Sabha elections, released a revised Model Code with seven parts, with one part devoted to the party in power and what it could and could not do once elections were announced.
  • The MCC has subsequently evolved as an integral part of conducting fair and free elections.

Challenges Faced by the MCC and the Imperative for Strengthening Enforcement:

  • Escalating Violations: Political parties and candidates routinely flout the MCC's regulations, engaging in activities like hate speech, vote-buying, and spreading misinformation, undermining the trust in the electoral process and compromising its fairness and transparency.
  • Exploitation of Loopholes: In today's political landscape, there's a discernible trend of exploiting MCC loopholes to bypass its regulations.
    • With the advent of technology and social media, political entities find novel ways to propagate propaganda and target voters, evading traditional MCC constraints and necessitating revisions to address these evolving challenges.
  • Inadequate Deterrents: While the MCC sets ethical standards, it often lacks effective penalties for violations, resulting in politicians perceiving minimal risks in flouting its provisions.
    • Strengthening the MCC entails imposing clear and proportionate penalties for transgressions to foster a culture of accountability.
  • Complexity of Enforcement: India's vast and diverse electoral terrain, coupled with a surge in reported violations, strains the Election Commission's enforcement capabilities.
    • Adjudicating MCC breaches can be arduous and resource-intensive, leading to accountability delays. Streamlining enforcement procedures and enhancing the EC's capacity is pivotal for ensuring prompt and efficient MCC implementation.
  • Erosion of Public Trust: Widespread disregard for ethical norms and regulations can erode citizens' trust in the democratic process, fostering voter apathy and disenchantment.
    • Restoring public confidence in elections necessitates robust measures to strengthen the MCC and underscore the EC's dedication to upholding electoral integrity.

Proposed Reforms to Enhance MCC Enforcement:

  • Clear and Comprehensive Guidelines: The initial step towards MCC reform entails establishing clear and comprehensive guidelines delineating permissible and impermissible conduct during electoral campaigns.
    • Regular updates to these guidelines are crucial to address evolving challenges and technological advancements, enabling political entities to navigate ethical standards effectively and prevent inadvertent violations.
  • Strict Enforcement Mechanisms: Implementation of proportional penalties for infringements, such as fines, campaigning bans, and withdrawal of electoral symbols, constitutes a vital aspect of reform.
    • Streamlining enforcement procedures by the Election Commission (EC) ensures swift adjudication of cases, bolstering the MCC's credibility and deterrent impact.
  • Indirect Liability for Political Parties: Imposing penalties on parties for MCC violations, irrespective of individual culpability, incentivizes enhanced oversight over members' conduct.
    • This fosters collective responsibility within political organizations, promoting greater accountability and ethical governance.
  • Transparency and Public Accountability: Maintaining a publicly accessible database documenting all reported MCC violations and their dispositions empowers citizens to monitor regulatory compliance.
    • This transparency holds political actors accountable for their actions, reinforcing public trust in the electoral process.
  • Timely and Credible Adjudication: Prioritizing prompt resolution of violations and ensuring impartial decision-making by the EC are essential to uphold the MCC's deterrent effect.
    • Timely adjudication prevents erosion of public confidence and underscores the EC's commitment to fair electoral practices.
  • Continuous Evaluation and Revision: Vigilance in identifying areas for improvement and updating the MCC in response to emerging challenges and evolving electoral dynamics is crucial.
    • This iterative approach ensures the MCC remains relevant and effective in safeguarding India's electoral integrity.

The Role of Political Parties and Election Commission in Safeguarding Electoral Integrity:

Political Leadership's Responsibility:

  • Political leaders wield significant influence in upholding electoral integrity by adhering to ethical standards and fostering responsible conduct within their parties.
  • By exemplifying ethical leadership, politicians can instill a culture of integrity and accountability among their supporters and party members.
  • Effective self-regulation within political parties is imperative to minimize MCC violations and preserve the integrity of electoral campaigns.
  • Through a commitment to fairness, transparency, and democratic principles, leaders can instill confidence in the electoral process and encourage civic engagement among voters.

The Election Commission's Mandate:

  • As the guardian of electoral integrity, the Election Commission plays a pivotal role in impartially adjudicating MCC violations and enforcing electoral regulations.
  • Timely and decisive enforcement of the MCC is crucial for deterring violations and upholding the integrity of electoral campaigns.
  • Maintaining transparency in its actions and decisions related to MCC enforcement is essential for the EC to uphold public accountability.
  • By providing regular updates on reported violations, adjudication outcomes, and enforcement measures, the EC fosters public trust in its ability to safeguard electoral integrity.
  • Enhancing the EC's capacity for MCC enforcement is paramount for effectively addressing emerging challenges and ensuring the integrity of electoral processes.
  • This includes investing in training programs, technological infrastructure, and human resources to enable the EC to adapt to evolving electoral dynamics and enforce regulations effectively.

Conclusion

While the Model Code of Conduct (MCC) serves as a crucial bulwark against electoral misconduct, its effectiveness hinges on vigorous enforcement and adaptability to evolving scenarios. Through the adoption of suggested reforms and the cultivation of ethical leadership, India can fortify the integrity of its democratic mechanisms, guaranteeing equitable and transparent elections for its populace.

Ensuring the Rights and Dignity of Senior Citizens

  • 29 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

Policymakers should proactively address the overshadowing of the needs of the elderly population by the focus on the demographic dividend, and by establishing guidelines for home-based care to meet the challenges posed by an aging population.

Context:

  • Amidst the discourse on India's demographic dividend, the growing population of older individuals is often overlooked.
  • With projections indicating a significant rise in the elderly population, now reaching nearly 15% of the total population and expected to increase further, there is a pressing need to address the implications of this demographic shift.
  • Declining fertility rates and longer life expectancy are key drivers of this transition, leading to smaller households and a greater demand for elder care, straining the existing health and social support systems.
  • As the traditional family structure evolves, there's a growing reliance on external assistance for senior care at home, highlighting the need for a recalibration of healthcare and social welfare policies to meet the needs of this aging population.

What Legal Safeguards Exist for the Elderly Population?

  • Constitutional provisions pertaining to the elderly are outlined in Article 41 and Article 46.
    • While directive principles are not legally binding, they impose a positive obligation on the state during lawmaking processes.
  • The Hindu Marriage and Adoption Act of 1956, in Section 20, mandates provisions for the maintenance of elderly parents.
  • Under Section 125 of the Criminal Procedure Code, elder parents are entitled to claim maintenance from their children.
  • The Maintenance and Welfare of Parents and Senior Citizens Act of 2007 formalizes the legal responsibility of children or heirs to provide maintenance for their parents or senior family members.

Key Issues Affecting Quality and Accessibility in Home-Based Care:

  • Lack of Standardization and Defined Practices: Home-based care practices in India suffer from a lack of standardization and well-defined protocols, operating in a less regulated environment compared to institutional settings like hospitals or nursing homes.
    • This variability in practices can result in inconsistencies in the quality of care provided to elderly individuals at home.
  • Shortage of Trained Caregivers: A significant challenge in home-based care stems from the shortage of adequately trained caregivers.
    • Caring for elderly individuals, particularly those with chronic illnesses or disabilities, demands specialized skills and knowledge.
    • However, there is a scarcity of caregivers with the requisite training and expertise, exacerbating the quality of care provided and contributing to caregiver burnout.
  • Mistreatment of Caregivers: Caregivers in home-based settings often face mistreatment or abuse from the families they serve, including verbal abuse, exploitation, or inadequate compensation for their services.
    • The lack of legal protections and support mechanisms for caregivers leaves them vulnerable to exploitation, undermining the quality of care they can deliver.
  • Financial Barrier: The cost of hiring a caregiver for home-based care can be prohibitively high for many families, particularly those from lower socio-economic backgrounds.
    • This financial barrier limits access to quality home-based care services for elderly individuals in need, leading some families to forgo professional care altogether or rely on informal caregiving arrangements.
  • The dominance of the Private Sector: The provision of home-based care services in India is predominantly controlled by the private, for-profit sector.
    • While private agencies may offer a range of services, their services often come at a premium cost, exacerbating inequalities in access to care.
  • Fragmented Regulatory Framework: The regulatory framework governing home-based care in India is fragmented and lacks comprehensive oversight.
    • Standardized regulations or licensing requirements for home care agencies or individual caregivers are absent, leading to inconsistencies in the quality and safety of care provided and hindering efforts to ensure accountability and quality improvement.

Policy Interventions and Opportunities to Address Home-Based Care Challenges:

  • Recognizing Home as a Viable Care Setting: An opportunity in home-based care lies in acknowledging the home environment as a feasible setting for providing care to elderly individuals, serving both as a place for care provision and employment for caregivers.
    • Policymakers can pave the way for developing tailored policies and regulations to address the unique needs of home-based care.
  • Tailoring Treatment Protocols to Home Environment: Policy interventions should focus on customizing treatment protocols and care plans to the home environment's specific challenges and opportunities, such as limited space, absence of medical equipment, and the presence of family members.
    • This tailored approach can optimize care delivery and improve the experience for both caregivers and care recipients.
  • Strengthening Caregiver Training and Support: Enhancing the training and support available to caregivers is crucial to meet the rising demand for home-based care services.
    • Policy interventions should prioritize the standardization of vocational training programs, delineation of roles and responsibilities, and facilitation of career progression opportunities for caregivers.
    • Investing in caregiver education and professional development can enhance the quality of care and alleviate caregiver shortages.
  • Gender Considerations: Given the gender dimension of aging in India, with women typically outliving men, special attention is warranted for vulnerable elderly women, particularly widows.
    • Policies should aim to empower them to lead dignified and independent lives in their later years.

Governmental and Legislative Initiatives to Enhance Home-Based Care:

  • Policy Development and Implementation: The government holds a pivotal role in crafting and executing policies concerning home-based care for the elderly, with ministries such as the Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, Ministry of Social Justice and Empowerment, and Ministry of Skill Development and Entrepreneurship spearheading initiatives to address pertinent challenges and opportunities.
  • Inter-Ministerial Coordination: Effective coordination among government ministries is indispensable for driving policy reforms in home-based care.
    • Collaborative efforts enable the pooling of resources, expertise, and stakeholder perspectives to formulate comprehensive solutions tailored to the diverse needs of the elderly population and their caregivers.
  • Legislative Frameworks: Legislative endeavors play a vital role in formalizing and regulating home-based care services.
    • Legislation like the Maintenance and Welfare of Parents and Senior Citizens (Amendment) Bill, 2019, exemplifies efforts to standardize home care services and establish minimum standards for providers, thereby ensuring the legal protection, safety, and well-being of elderly individuals receiving such care.
  • Regulatory Oversight: Government bodies like the Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority of India (IRDAI) contribute to regulatory oversight in home-based care services.
    • These entities establish guidelines, standards, and licensing requirements for home care agencies and individual caregivers, ensuring adherence to quality and safety standards.

Conclusion

While India's emphasis on preparing its youth for the future is praiseworthy, it is equally crucial not to neglect the needs of its expanding elderly demographic. A resilient home-based care system enables economic participation and upholds society's ethical responsibility to support its aging citizens. By confronting challenges and embracing opportunities in home-based care, India can safeguard the well-being and dignity of its elderly population, fostering an inclusive and empathetic society for future generations.

Analysis of Curative Jurisdiction of the Supreme Court in Legal Dispute

  • 27 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

Recently, the Supreme Court (SC), in the judgment of Delhi Metro Rail Corporation Ltd (DMRC) vs Delhi Airport Metro Express Pvt Ltd (DAMEPL), set aside the arbitral award by exercising its curative jurisdiction.

Context:

  • The Supreme Court of India holds a multifaceted role, serving as the apex court of appeal, a federal court, and an advisory body.
  • One of its significant powers is the Curative Jurisdiction, established in 2002, which empowers the Court to rectify its judgments even after they have become final.
  • However, the utilization of this jurisdiction has triggered discussions concerning its implications for judicial stability and the Supreme Court's role in shaping legal precedents.

What is the DMRC vs DAMEPL Case?

  • The case dates back to 2008 when the DMRC entered into a PPP with the Delhi Airport Metro Express Private Limited (DAMEPL), a consortium led by Reliance Infrastructure Ltd, for the Delhi Airport Metro Express project.
    • However, disputes arose between the two parties, leading to the termination of the agreement by DAMEPL in 2013.
  • In 2017, an arbitration tribunal ruled in favor of DAMEPL and ordered DMRC to pay nearly Rs 8,000 crore.
    • DMRC challenged this ruling in the Delhi High Court, which overturned the arbitral award in 2019.
    • DAMEPL then appealed to the Supreme Court, which in September 2021 reversed the High Court's decision and upheld the arbitral award.
  • However, in a recent judgment, the Supreme Court has now ruled in favor of DMRC, stating that there was a "fundamental error" in its previous judgment.

Significance of the Supreme Court’s Decision:

  • Firstly, it underscores the importance of curative petitions in correcting grave injustices in legal judgments.
    • Curative petitions are sparingly used and are only permitted on narrow, procedural grounds.
    • The Supreme Court's decision to grant relief to DMRC highlights the court's commitment to rendering justice in its true sense.
  • Secondly, the decision has implications for PPPs in infrastructure projects.
    • PPPs play a crucial role in infrastructure development, but disputes between public and private entities can arise, leading to legal battles.
    • The Supreme Court's decision provides clarity on the legal framework governing PPPs and sets a precedent for future disputes in similar projects.
  • Lastly, the decision has implications for investor confidence.
    • The Supreme Court's exercise of curative jurisdiction in this case, almost two and a half years after its final verdict, demonstrates the court's willingness to correct errors and ensure justice.
    • This is likely to boost investor confidence in India's legal system and encourage investment in infrastructure projects.

Difference Between a Curative Petition and Curative Jurisdiction:

Curative Petition:

  • A curative petition is a specific legal remedy available within the framework of curative jurisdiction.
  • It is a petition filed by a party to the case that has exhausted all other legal remedies and seeks the correction of a judgment that may have resulted from a violation of principles of natural justice or a gross miscarriage of justice.
  • The grounds for filing a curative petition typically include the discovery of new evidence or legal errors that were not apparent earlier.
  • Curative petitions are relatively rare and are considered as a last resort to correct errors in judgment.

Curative Jurisdiction:

  • Curative jurisdiction refers to the broader authority of the Supreme Court to review and rectify its judgments to prevent gross miscarriages of justice.
  • It is a power vested in the Supreme Court to ensure that fundamental principles of justice and fairness are upheld, even after a judgment has become final.
  • Curative jurisdiction allows the Supreme Court to revisit its decisions if it perceives a need to prevent manifest injustice or correct egregious errors that may have escaped earlier notice.
  • While curative petitions are one mechanism through which curative jurisdiction is exercised, the Supreme Court may also suo motu invoke curative jurisdiction in exceptional cases without a formal petition being filed.

Impact and Implications of Curative Jurisdiction:

  • Impact on Arbitral Awards' Integrity: A central apprehension surrounding curative jurisdiction is its potential to affect the integrity of arbitral awards.
    • Arbitration relies on the conclusiveness and enforceability of awards for its efficacy.
    • When the Court intervenes in arbitral decisions, particularly amid concerns of judicial overreach, it risks undermining arbitration's core principles, such as party autonomy and swift dispute resolution.
  • Balancing Judicial Consistency and Flexibility: The dichotomy between judicial consistency and flexibility emerges concerning curative jurisdiction.
    • While consistent legal interpretation fosters stability and predictability, it may stifle innovation. Conversely, excessive flexibility can breed uncertainty, eroding public trust in the judiciary.
  • Examining the Scope of Judicial Review: Curative jurisdiction prompts queries about the extent of judicial review and its boundaries.
    • While the Court's role as the ultimate legal interpreter is clear, intervening in its judgments without impinging on legislative or executive domains requires meticulous consideration.
  • Implications for Legal Precedents: The significance of Supreme Court judgments in maintaining legal coherence is undeniable.
    • However, curative jurisdiction may disrupt established precedents, casting doubt on the binding nature of judicial decisions.
    • The Court must exercise judiciousness to rectify errors without compromising the legal framework's integrity.
  • Public Perception and Judicial Trust: The Court's credibility hinges on its impartiality and integrity in dispensing justice.
    • Excessive or arbitrary curative interventions may undermine public confidence in the judiciary, diminishing its authority as a legal arbiter.
    • The Court must exercise curative powers prudently to maintain public trust in the judiciary.

Critical Analysis of Judicial Instability:

  • Challenging Legal Certainty: Legal certainty, a cornerstone of the rule of law, demands consistency and predictability in legal outcomes.
    • The use of curative jurisdiction, particularly in overturning final judgments, jeopardizes this certainty by casting doubt on the conclusiveness and enforceability of judicial decisions.
    • Such uncertainty undermines parties' confidence in the stability of the legal framework, fostering confusion and mistrust in the judicial process.
  • Diminishing Judicial Authority: Judicial stability is intrinsic to the authority and credibility of the judiciary.
    • When the Supreme Court reverses its own judgments through curative measures, it risks appearing indecisive and inconsistent, eroding its status as the ultimate arbiter of the law.
    • This erosion of authority undermines public trust in the judiciary, fostering skepticism about the fairness and impartiality of judicial proceedings.
  • Disrupting Legal Precedent: The stability of legal precedent is vital for maintaining coherence and consistency in the legal system.
    • However, the exercise of curative jurisdiction introduces the potential for disrupting established precedents and fostering inconsistency in judicial rulings.
    • This undermines the reliability of legal principles, creating confusion among legal practitioners, litigants, and lower courts.
    • Moreover, frequent reversals of judgments hinder the development of clear and consistent legal doctrines, impeding the evolution of the law.
  • Risk of Judicial Overreach: Judicial stability acts as a safeguard against judicial overreach, ensuring that the judiciary respects its constitutional limits and upholds the separation of powers.
    • However, the use of curative jurisdiction raises concerns about the Court's propensity to exceed its authority and intrude into the domains of the legislative and executive branches.
    • By revisiting and overturning its own judgments, the Court risks overstepping its role and undermining the principles of checks and balances inherent in a democratic system.

Ways Forward for Balancing Judicial Oversight Stability:

  • Fostering Judicial Accountability: Upholding judicial oversight, including the use of curative jurisdiction, is vital for ensuring judges are accountable and adhere to legal standards.
    • It offers a mechanism to rectify errors and address any judicial misconduct.
    • However, excessive oversight risks compromising judicial independence and impartiality, undercutting the judiciary's ability to fairly adjudicate disputes.
  • Preserving Legal Stability: Legal stability is crucial for fostering predictability and confidence in the legal system.
    • By upholding established precedents and minimizing disruptions to settled legal principles, the judiciary promotes legal stability.
    • Nevertheless, the exercise of curative jurisdiction introduces uncertainty by allowing the Court to revisit and potentially reverse its judgments, challenging the stability of legal doctrine and the reliability of judicial decisions.
  • Respecting the Separation of Powers: Striking a balance between judicial oversight and stability requires respecting the separation of powers and acknowledging the distinct roles of the judiciary, legislature, and executive.
    • While the judiciary plays a critical role in interpreting and applying the law, it must exercise restraint to avoid intruding into the domains of other branches of government.
    • The use of curative jurisdiction should be guided by principles of judicial deference and deference to legislative intent, particularly in matters where judicial intervention could undermine democratic processes or policy decisions.

Conclusion

The Supreme Court's Curative Jurisdiction is a potent mechanism for rectifying judicial mistakes, yet it presents hurdles to judicial stability and coherence. The DMRC vs DAMEPL case highlights the necessity for a balanced approach in reconciling judicial oversight with legal predictability. Ultimately, as the ultimate arbiter of the law, the Court must carefully wield its curative authority to uphold public trust in the legal system's integrity.

Supreme Court Affirms Women's Right To Child Care Leave

  • 26 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

On Monday, a Supreme Court bench headed by Chief Justice of India D Y Chandrachud said, “Participation of women in the workforce is a matter not just of privilege but a constitutional entitlement protected by Article 15 of the Constitution.

Context:

  • Recent data indicates that while 45% of India's graduates are women, only approximately 10% of educated women pursue long-term careers.
  • However, amidst these challenges, there are instances of women advocating for their rights.
    • For instance, a young mother from Himachal Pradesh recently petitioned the Supreme Court for the right to care for her child, who required her presence.
  • Chief Justice of India DY Chandrachud emphasized that women's participation in the workforce is a constitutional entitlement, and denying mothers childcare leave violates this principle.
  • The petitioner, an assistant professor at a government college, highlighted that the Himachal Pradesh government had refused her childcare leave, despite her child's medical needs.
  • The Supreme Court's intervention underscored that the state, as an employer, must address such concerns and uphold the rights of working mothers.

Protection Under the Constitution and Employer Responsibilities Concerning Women's Employment:

Constitutional Safeguards:

  • Article 15 of the Indian Constitution stands as a pillar of gender equality, prohibiting discrimination based on sex and allowing for affirmative action to address historical disparities.
  • The recent Supreme Court recognition of Article 15 underscores the constitutional imperative to foster a fair and inclusive society, particularly in matters of women's workforce participation.
  • By affirming women's right to work without prejudice, the court reinforces the foundational principles of equality and non-discrimination enshrined in the Constitution.

Employer Responsibility:

  • Employers, especially the government as role models, carry a significant duty to cultivate a supportive environment for female employees.
  • Beyond mere legal compliance, employers must actively address the unique challenges women face in juggling work and caregiving responsibilities.
  • The denial of childcare leave, as highlighted in the recent Supreme Court case, signifies a failure to acknowledge and respect women's rights in the workplace.
  • The court's stance emphasizes that employers cannot overlook the specific needs of women employees and underscores the importance of proactive measures such as offering childcare assistance, flexible work arrangements, and gender-sensitive policies.
  • By fulfilling these obligations, employers not only advance gender equality but also foster a more productive, inclusive, and supportive work culture.

Obstacles to Women's Participation in the Workforce:

Unbalanced Domestic Responsibilities:

  • Women in India shoulder a disproportionate share of unpaid domestic and caregiving duties, including household chores and looking after family members.
  • This unequal distribution of responsibilities consumes considerable time and effort, often hindering women's capacity to engage in paid employment outside their homes.

"Marriage" and "Motherhood" Setbacks:

  • Women commonly encounter setbacks in their careers due to societal norms regarding marriage and motherhood.
  • Marriage can lead to disruptions like relocation or increased household duties, affecting women's career trajectories and earning potential.
  • Likewise, motherhood often results in temporary career breaks or reduced work hours to manage childcare, limiting opportunities for professional growth and financial independence.

Inadequate Support Infrastructure:

  • The scarcity of affordable childcare options, along with insufficient support services like paid parental leave and flexible work arrangements, adds to the challenges faced by women in balancing work and family commitments.
  • The absence of adequate support infrastructure may compel women to prioritize caregiving over employment, particularly when alternative care arrangements are lacking.

Legal Framework for Women’s Participation in the Workforce:

Legislative Advances:

  • India has taken significant strides in enacting laws to uphold women's rights and foster gender equality in workplaces.
  • These laws encompass provisions for maternity benefits, childcare services, and safeguards against gender discrimination in employment practices.
  • Recent legislative changes have broadened maternity leave entitlements and mandated childcare facilities at workplaces, underscoring a commitment to bolstering women's engagement in the workforce.

Gender-Neutral Measures:

  • Initiatives to render legal provisions gender-neutral represent a positive stride toward acknowledging caregiving duties as a shared responsibility among parents.
  • By extending childcare benefits to all employees, regardless of gender, these reforms aim to challenge traditional gender norms and encourage greater equity in caregiving responsibilities within families.

Challenges in Implementing Legal Frameworks for Women's Workforce Participation:

Underfunded Welfare Schemes:

  • Government-led initiatives, such as the National Crèches Scheme, face underfunding and inadequate infrastructure, limiting their ability to provide essential childcare services to marginalized communities.
    • Without sufficient financial resources and institutional support, these schemes struggle to meet the demand for affordable and quality childcare services, particularly in underserved regions.

Lack of Enforcement and Monitoring:

  • Effective enforcement mechanisms and regular monitoring of compliance are crucial for ensuring that employers adhere to legal requirements related to women's workforce participation.
    • However, enforcement agencies often face challenges like limited resources, bureaucratic inefficiencies, and a lack of coordination between government departments, hindering their ability to enforce labour laws and address violations promptly.

Coverage Limitations:

  • Existing laws often have a limited scope, with certain provisions only applying to formal sector establishments or workplaces with a minimum number of employees.
    • This approach excludes many women working in the informal sector or smaller enterprises, leaving them without access to crucial maternity benefits and childcare support.

Way Forward

Collective Responsibility:

  • State: The government plays a key role in setting legal and policy frameworks that promote gender equality.
    • This includes enacting supportive laws, providing incentives for employers to adopt family-friendly policies, and investing in social infrastructure such as childcare facilities and education programs.
  • Employers: Companies can significantly impact women's workforce participation through their practices and policies.
    • Employers should adopt inclusive hiring practices, provide equal opportunities for career advancement, offer flexible work arrangements, and implement family-friendly policies like paid parental leave and on-site childcare facilities.
  • Communities: Communities play a crucial role in challenging traditional gender norms and stereotypes.
    • Community-based organizations, educational institutions, and grassroots initiatives can raise awareness, provide support for working mothers, and advocate for policy changes that promote gender equality.

Policy Integration:

  • Integrating gender considerations into broader policy frameworks is essential for mainstreaming gender equality across all sectors of society.
  • Key strategies include implementing gender-responsive budgeting, conducting gender impact assessments of policies and programs, and ensuring women's voices are heard in decision-making processes.
  • By addressing these aspects, we can create a more inclusive society where women can fully participate in the workforce and achieve their potential.

Conclusion

In conclusion, achieving full participation of women in the workforce requires a comprehensive and collaborative approach involving the state, employers, and communities. By enacting supportive policies, promoting inclusive practices, challenging traditional gender norms, and integrating gender considerations into broader policy frameworks, we can create an enabling environment for women to thrive in their careers. It is through these concerted efforts that we can build a more equitable society and harness the immense potential that women bring to the workforce.

The Reality of the Swachh Bharat Mission

  • 25 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

A scheme fully owned by the state has become a toolkit for privatisation of public health services and continues caste discrimination.

Context:

  • India was ranked right at the bottom of 180 countries in the Environment Performance Index (EPI) in 2022.
    • This index evaluates countries based on their performance in addressing climate change, maintaining environmental health, and preserving ecosystem vitality.
    • It assesses 40 performance indicators across 11 issue categories, encompassing areas like air quality, access to drinking water, and sanitation.
  • In response to this ranking, the government expressed reservations, citing flaws in the methodology that, according to them, fail to accurately capture the Indian scenario.
  • Over the past decade, the Modi government has launched several development campaigns, including the Swachh Bharat Mission, the Atal Mission for Rejuvenation and Urban Transformation, the Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana, and the National Clean Air Programme.
  • These endeavors are geared towards enhancing living standards and addressing various socio-economic challenges.
  • However, despite these efforts, there remains a noticeable rise in the population's vulnerability due to environmental issues like air and water pollution.

About Swachh Bharat Mission:

  • Swachh Bharat Mission, the world’s largest sanitation initiative was launched by the Prime Minister of India in 2014 to achieve an Open Defecation Free India by October 2, 2019, as a tribute to Mahatma Gandhi.
  • The programme led to the construction of over 10 crore individual household toilets, taking sanitation coverage from 39% in 2014 to 100% in 2019 when around 6 lakh villages declared themselves Open Defecation Free (ODF).
    • The second phase of the mission aims to sustain the open defecation-free status and improve the management of solid and liquid waste, while also working to improve the lives of sanitation workers.
  • The mission aimed at progressing toward target 6.2 of the Sustainable Development Goal Number 6 established by the United Nations in 2015.
    • By achieving the lowest open defecation-free status in 2019, India achieved its Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) 6.2 health target in record time, eleven years ahead of the UN SDG target of 31 December 2030.
  • The mission was split into two: rural and urban.
  • In rural areas "SBM - Gramin" was financed and monitored through the Ministry of Drinking Water and Sanitation (since converted to the Department of Drinking Water and Sanitation under the Ministry of Jal Shakti) whereas "SBM - urban" was overseen by the Ministry of Housing and Urban Affairs.
    • The rural division has a five-tier mechanism: central, state, district, block panchayat, and gram panchayat.
  • As part of the campaign, volunteers, known as Swachhagrahis, or "Ambassadors of cleanliness", promoted the construction of toilets using a popular method called Community-Led Total Sanitation at the village level.

Critique of the Swachh Bharat Mission (SBM):

Discrepancy between Goals and Outcomes:

  • The Swachh Bharat Mission (SBM) and its successor, SBM 2.0, set out ambitious objectives to achieve garbage-free cities, garnering political support across party lines.
    • However, the reality on the ground paints a different picture.
  • Despite government assertions of India achieving open defecation-free status, reports from the Comptroller and Auditor General in 2020 raised doubts about the program's effectiveness, highlighting issues such as substandard toilet construction and inadequate waste treatment.
    • In urban areas, certain communities, particularly those residing in slums, continue to lack access to essential sanitation facilities, exacerbating existing inequalities.
    • In rural and peri-urban regions, the lack of integration between toilet construction and waste management has led to environmental contamination and health hazards.

Perpetuation of Power Dynamics and Inequalities:

  • Sanitation and waste management in India are deeply entrenched in caste dynamics, historically burdening marginalized communities with sanitation tasks.
    • Despite attempts by SBM to promote the idea of shared responsibility, the underlying power dynamics persist.
  • The introduction of capital-intensive technologies aimed at mechanizing waste management processes has not yielded the desired outcomes, resulting in health crises due to improper waste disposal practices.
  • The outsourcing of sanitation work to private contractors, often employing members of marginalized communities, has further entrenched caste-based discrimination.
  • Government emphasis on procuring expensive machinery for waste management, funded through public resources, has inadvertently facilitated the privatization of public health services, exacerbating existing inequalities.

Technological Solutions and Implementation Challenges:

  • While the government has invested in technological solutions such as waste-to-energy plants and biological methanation, their effectiveness remains limited, with few success stories to showcase.
  • Challenges persist in the implementation of these solutions, leading to a lack of tangible improvements in solid waste management across many towns and cities.

Gap in Sanitation Inspection Infrastructure:

  • A significant gap in the sanitation inspection infrastructure exists within Himachal Pradesh, as revealed during a recent case in the State's High Court.
  • On March 30, 2024, it was disclosed that the Shimla Municipal Corporation, consisting of 34 wards, has only five sanitation inspectors.
  • Moreover, the decision to declare this cadre dead after retirement raises concerns about the State's commitment to addressing sanitation issues effectively.
  • With more than 50 municipal bodies in Himachal Pradesh and only 20 sanitation inspectors available, it is clear that several municipalities lack essential sanitation inspection personnel.

The interconnectedness of Environmental Performance Index (EPI) and Development Campaigns:

  • The EPI offers a comprehensive assessment of a country's environmental health and sustainability efforts.
  • One critical aspect of the EPI is mapping, which exposes the shortcomings and unsustainability of current development processes.
  • In light of a recent Supreme Court judgment acknowledging the links between climate change and basic human rights, it is evident that development models must be reevaluated and adjusted.
  • The interconnectedness of the EPI and various development campaigns cannot be ignored, as the consequences of climate change directly impact human well-being and rights.
  • With climate scientists attributing current environmental problems to anthropogenic and systemic factors, it is essential to consider the broader implications of the EPI when planning and implementing development initiatives.

Conclusion

To tackle India's environmental challenges, a comprehensive strategy prioritizing sustainability, equity, and social justice is essential. This involves reassessing development strategies, strengthening enforcement, and encouraging community participation in environmental governance. Addressing implementation issues and linking policies to human rights can improve India's EPI performance and foster a sustainable future.

Reversing the Global Democratic Recession

  • 24 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

Despite the disillusionment, for a variety of reasons, the need to fortify democratic foundations has to be ongoing and collaborative.

Context:

  • India is in the midst of its most significant electoral exercise and it might be worthwhile to scrutinize people’s changing perceptions about their political ecosystems in both the largest democracy and other smaller democratic spaces elsewhere.
  • Such an exercise may help us understand the prevailing global situation and work on the future course of action.
  • Drawing insights from an extensive Pew Research Centre survey spanning 24 nations, examining the evolving attitudes toward democratic governance becomes imperative to grasp the broader global context and chart potential pathways forward.

Why Worldwide Decline in Confidence in Democratic Systems?

  • According to the Pew Research Centre's extensive 2023 global survey, which included 30,861 participants, there is a notable decline in faith in democratic institutions across the globe.
  • Although 77% of respondents still hold optimism for representative democracy, there is growing openness to alternative governance structures.
  • Of concern is the diminishing support for representative democracy since 2017, juxtaposed with increased approval for direct democracy, rule by experts, and authoritarian regimes.

Regional Dynamics and Emerging Trends in Perceptions of Governance:

  • Shifting Preferences Towards Expert Rule and Authoritarianism: A noticeable inclination towards endorsing rule by experts and authoritarian forms of governance is observed across different regions.
    • This trend is particularly conspicuous in nations grappling with economic instability, political turbulence, or perceived inefficiencies within democratic structures.
    • In such contexts, citizens often perceive democratic systems as sluggish and inadequate in addressing urgent challenges, fostering a growing appeal towards centralized authority and decisive leadership.
  • Influence of Socioeconomic Factors: Socioeconomic circumstances significantly shape preferences in governance.
    • Individuals from lower-income countries with limited educational access tend to show support for authoritative leadership and military rule.
    • This inclination may stem from a desire for stability and economic advancement, as authoritarian regimes are perceived as more effective in delivering immediate solutions to complex issues.
  • Cultural and Historical Context: Variations in democratic perceptions are also influenced by cultural and historical backgrounds.
    • Nations with past experiences of authoritarian rule or centralized governance structures may exhibit greater openness to authoritarian models.
    • Additionally, cultural norms regarding leadership, hierarchy, and decision-making processes impact attitudes toward democracy and alternative governance models.
  • Resistance to Authoritarian Trends in Certain Regions: Despite the rise in authoritarian sentiments in some areas, resistance to such ideologies persists in others.
    • Regions with strong traditions of liberal democracy, including Canada, Europe, Scandinavia, and the United States, continue to prioritize democratic values and institutions.
    • Here, a steadfast commitment to democratic principles, civil liberties, and the rule of law acts as a barrier against the erosion of democratic norms.

Evolution of Democratic Perceptions in India:

  • Transition towards Strong Leadership: Recent years have witnessed a discernible transformation in Indian views on democracy, characterized by a diminishing preference for representative democracy and a growing inclination towards authoritative leadership.
    • In 2017, 44% of Indians favored representative democracy, a figure that declined to 36% by 2023.
    • Conversely, support for a commanding leader with substantial authority surged from 55% in 2017 to 67% in 2023.
  • Rising Endorsement of Expert Governance: Mirroring global trends, Indian perspectives on governance have witnessed a notable uptick in backing for rule by experts and authoritarian models.
    • Support for rule by experts skyrocketed from 65% to an impressive 82% during the same period.
    • Of significant note is the remarkable preference for military rule or governance under an authoritarian figure, with a striking 85% of Indians expressing support for such models by 2023.
  • Diverse Regional Outlooks: It's crucial to acknowledge the diversity in democratic perceptions across various regions and demographic cohorts within India.
    • While certain segments may lean towards authoritarian leadership, others remain steadfast in their commitment to democratic principles and institutions.
    • Factors such as education, socioeconomic status, and cultural heritage exert considerable influence on individuals' governance preferences.

Way Forward to Reinforce Democratic Foundations:

  • Engaging Citizens in Governance: Central to a robust democracy is the active participation of citizens in decision-making processes.
    • Governments should establish channels and platforms facilitating meaningful engagement in policymaking and public affairs.
    • Initiatives like town hall meetings, participatory budgeting, citizen assemblies, and digital feedback platforms can foster citizen involvement.
  • Ensuring Information Accessibility: Transparency and access to accurate information are cornerstone principles of democratic governance.
    • Governments must ensure unhindered access to information about government actions and policies.
    • Strengthening freedom of information laws, enhancing transparency mechanisms, and supporting investigative journalism can uphold government accountability.
  • Upholding Accountability and Justice: Democratic institutions must remain accountable to the populace and uphold the rule of law.
    • Governments should institute checks and balances, foster an independent judiciary, and implement effective oversight mechanisms to prevent power abuse.
    • Additionally, efforts to promote equality before the law and safeguard the rights of marginalized groups are essential.
  • Fostering Civic Engagement: Civil society organizations play a pivotal role in advocating for citizen rights and government accountability.
    • Governments should create an enabling environment for civil society to operate freely, safeguarding freedoms of association, expression, and assembly.
    • Collaboration between government and civil society can enhance democratic governance through dialogue and cooperation.
  • Promoting Ethical Leadership: Ethical leadership and public service are vital for democratic integrity.
    • Governments should cultivate a culture of ethical conduct among officials and public servants, implementing measures to combat corruption and promote transparency.
    • Holding individuals accountable for misconduct reinforces democratic legitimacy.
  • Embracing Responsive and Inclusive Policies: Democratic governments must prioritize policies addressing the needs of all citizens, especially marginalized groups.
    • Proactive efforts to promote social justice, economic equality, and inclusivity in decision-making processes are crucial.
    • Engaging diverse stakeholders and tailoring policies to ensure inclusivity is imperative for leaving no one behind.

Conclusion

The shifting democratic perceptions highlighted in both the Pew Research Centre survey and India's democratic context emphasize the importance of reevaluating global democratic systems. By acknowledging regional nuances, comprehending evolving attitudes, and emphasizing foundational reinforcement endeavors, nations can effectively address the complexities and potentials of democratic governance in the contemporary era.

Restoring Earth’s Right to ‘Good Health’

  • 23 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

The European Court of Human Rights found Switzerland guilty of violating the rights of women from KlimaSeniorinnen, stating that the government's emission control efforts were insufficient, failing to protect women from climate change impacts.

Context:

  • Courts worldwide are increasingly tasked with addressing the nexus between climate change and human rights, as evidenced by significant rulings such as those from the European Court of Human Rights in Switzerland and the Supreme Court of India.
  • These landmark decisions highlight the imperative of acknowledging climate change as a human rights issue and establishing crucial benchmarks for legal and policy responses to mitigate its detrimental effects on people and societies.

Legal Acknowledgment of Climate Change's Human Rights Impacts:

  • Recent rulings by the European Court of Human Rights against the Government of Switzerland and the Supreme Court of India have underscored the failure to safeguard vulnerable populations from the effects of climate change.
  • The European Court's decision highlighted the government's neglect in protecting elderly women from climate-related harm, while the Indian Supreme Court affirmed citizens' entitlement to freedom from adverse climate effects under constitutional guarantees.
  • Citing Articles 14 (equality before the law) and 21 (right to life and personal liberty) of the Indian Constitution, the Supreme Court emphasized individuals' right 'to be free from the adverse impacts of climate change.'
  • These legal judgments signify a significant step towards acknowledging climate change as a pivotal human rights concern.

The Escalating Human Rights Risks of the Global Climate Crisis:

  • The global climate crisis presents an imminent threat to human rights, imperiling individuals and communities worldwide.
  • The latest State of the Global Climate Report from the World Meteorological Organization presents compelling evidence of the intensifying impacts of climate change.
  • In 2023, numerous climate indicators soared to unprecedented levels, marking it as the hottest year on record.
  • This unparalleled warmth coincided with concerning trends such as heightened ocean heat accumulation, rising sea levels, diminishing Antarctic sea ice, and accelerated glacier retreat.
  • These indicators underscore the severe strain on our planet, with profound implications for human welfare.

India's Climate Action and Vulnerability:

  • Progress Amid Persistent Vulnerability: Despite notable advancements in climate action, India, among the world's fastest-growing economies, continues to confront significant vulnerability to climate change.
    • Having met two of its Nationally Determined Contribution (NDC) targets—reducing emissions intensity by 33% to 35% and achieving 40% cumulative non-fossil fuel electricity capacity—well ahead of schedule, India demonstrates proactive measures.
    • Nevertheless, the nation remains highly susceptible to climate-related adversities.
  • Population Concentration in Disaster-Prone Areas: A primary concern is India's demographic distribution, with over 80% of its populace residing in regions prone to climate-induced calamities like floods, cyclones, droughts, and heatwaves.
    • These events not only disrupt lives but also exacerbate existing socio-economic disparities, disproportionately impacting vulnerable groups such as small-scale farmers, rural communities, and marginalized populations.
  • Intersecting Challenges of Climate Change: Climate change intersects with broader socio-economic and environmental issues, compounding their repercussions.
    • Rapid urbanization and haphazard development intensify urban vulnerability to climate-driven disasters like flooding and landslides.

Frameworks to Strengthen India's Climate Action:

  • Embracing Comprehensive Legislation: India's climate governance could benefit from the adoption of a comprehensive regulatory framework dedicated to climate change.
    • This legislation would offer a unified structure for addressing diverse climate-related aspects, spanning mitigation, adaptation, finance, and capacity-building.
    • By enshrining climate objectives, targets, and strategies in law, such a framework can furnish legal clarity and consistency, guiding sustained planning and investment.
  • Insights from Global Climate Laws: Research from the London School of Economics and Political Science examined climate framework laws in 60 nations, spotlighting their pivotal role in shaping national climate agendas.
    • Countries like Germany, Ireland, New Zealand, Finland, South Korea, South Africa, and the Philippines have instituted robust climate legislation surpassing mere compliance with international obligations.
    • These laws have facilitated public resource mobilization, bolstered climate action capabilities, and fostered inter-sectoral cooperation.

Additional Measures for Enhanced Climate Governance in India:

  • Integrated Climate Policies: India's climate strategies should embrace an integrated approach, embedding climate considerations into broader development frameworks and decision-making processes.
    • This entails weaving climate adaptation and mitigation efforts throughout key sectors like agriculture, water management, energy, transportation, and urban development to foster a cohesive response to climate challenges.
  • Localized Solutions and Cross-Sector Collaboration: Tailored, localized climate actions, coupled with collaborative efforts across sectors, are vital for addressing the diverse and context-specific impacts of climate change.
    • Governments can craft targeted strategies to bolster resilience, mitigate risks, and advance sustainable development goals by engaging local stakeholders and fostering partnerships across sectors.
  • Harmonizing Climate and Sustainable Development Goals: Localized climate initiatives often align with broader Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), such as poverty eradication, food security, access to clean water, and gender equity.
    • Integrating climate considerations into local SDG agendas enables governments to leverage synergies, optimize resource use, and fortify community resilience and sustainability.
  • Empowerment of Civil Society: Civil society organizations (CSOs) play a pivotal role in advocating for climate action, environmental equity, and governmental accountability.
    • Empowering CSOs and fostering rights-based discourse on climate change are vital for fostering inclusive decision-making, transparency, and environmental justice.
  • Fostering Inclusivity and Representation: Promoting diversity and inclusivity within civil society is imperative to ensure the voices and perspectives of marginalized communities are heard and heeded in climate policymaking.
    • CSOs should aim to represent the interests of various stakeholders, including women, indigenous populations, youth, persons with disabilities, and other marginalized groups, in climate governance.
  • Advancing Rights-Centric Discourse: A rights-based approach to climate action acknowledges that climate change disproportionately impacts vulnerable communities, infringing upon their basic human rights to life, health, food, water, and livelihoods.
    • By framing climate change as a human rights issue, CSOs can advocate for policies that prioritize the needs of affected communities and champion environmental justice.

Conclusion

The alignment of legal rulings, scientific findings, and policy mandates emphasizes the pressing imperative to confront climate change as a human rights emergency.

By acknowledging the inseparable link between environmental health and human welfare, nations can pave the way toward climate resilience and equity.

Empowering communities, fortifying legal structures, and promoting cross-sectoral cooperation stand as pivotal measures in realizing a future liberated from the detrimental effects of climate change.

Legal Amendments Likely to Increase Medicine Costs without Improving Quality

  • 22 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

The amended rules will prolong the life of drugs on account of frivolous patenting, increase their prices, and make lives difficult for patients.

Context:

  • India's healthcare system depends largely on accessible medications, with the generic pharmaceutical sector crucial for delivering quality drugs at affordable rates.
  • The expense of medicines represents a substantial part of healthcare spending, with almost half of individuals' medical costs dedicated to purchasing prescriptions.
  • Yet, the considerable expenses associated with medications, largely influenced by patenting, create significant hurdles for obtaining vital treatments.

What is the Role of Generic Pharmaceutical Companies?

  • Generic pharmaceutical companies are pivotal in addressing the challenge of affordability by offering cost-effective alternatives to patented drugs.
  • India's generic industry has earned global recognition for its role in providing essential medications at accessible prices.
  • The development of India's patent laws has significantly influenced its pharmaceutical sector and its capacity to produce generic drugs.
    • Initially, the Indian Patent Act of the early 1970s limited patent protection to the manufacturing processes rather than the products themselves.
    • This approach facilitated the growth of the generic industry, positioning India as a major exporter of generic drugs by the late 1980s.
  • However, recent revisions to the Indian Patent Law pose a threat to this ecosystem and jeopardize access to affordable healthcare.

What is the Impact of the TRIPS Agreement on India's Pharmaceutical Industry?

  • The Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) Agreement, introduced in 1995, had a significant impact on India's pharmaceutical sector, shaping its development and global position. Key aspects of this impact include:
  • Transition to Product Patents: A critical change brought by TRIPS was the requirement for member countries to grant patents for both products and processes, including pharmaceuticals.
    • This shift from process to product patents posed challenges for India's thriving generic pharmaceutical industry, which had previously capitalized on producing affordable versions of patented drugs.
  • Challenges for India's Generic Industry: The introduction of product patents threatened India's generic pharmaceutical sector, renowned for its capacity to manufacture low-cost essential medicines.
    • These patents granted exclusive rights to inventors, restricting generic manufacturers' ability to produce and distribute affordable alternatives.
  • Pressure to Comply with International Standards: The TRIPS Agreement pressured India to align its intellectual property laws with international standards, encompassing pharmaceutical patent protection.
    • This necessitated amendments to India's Patent Act to comply with TRIPS obligations while preserving the interests of its generic pharmaceutical industry and public health priorities.
  • Preserving Access to Medicines: Despite TRIPS challenges, India implemented measures to safeguard access to affordable medicines.
    • Provisions like Section 3(d) of the Indian Patent Act, introduced in 2005, aimed to prevent granting frivolous patents for incremental innovations lacking significant therapeutic benefits.
    • This ensured compliance with TRIPS requirements while maintaining access to affordable medicines.
  • Balancing Innovation and Access: The TRIPS Agreement presented India with the challenge of balancing innovation and access to essential medicines.
    • While patents incentivize innovation and investment in research and development, they can restrict access to life-saving treatments, particularly in developing countries with limited healthcare resources.
  • Global Leadership in Generic Manufacturing: Despite the challenges posed by TRIPS, India emerged as a global leader in generic drug manufacturing.
    • Leveraging its manufacturing capabilities and adherence to TRIPS flexibilities, the country's generic pharmaceutical industry continued to thrive, supplying affordable medicines domestically and globally.

What is Section 3(d) of India's Patent Act?

  • Section 3(d) is a crucial provision in India's Patent Act that exemplifies the flexibilities embedded within the country's patent laws.
    • It tackles concerns related to "evergreening"—a practice used by pharmaceutical companies to extend patent life through minor modifications or incremental innovations.
  • The primary objective of Section 3(d) is to prevent the granting of patents for incremental innovations that lack significant therapeutic efficacy or novelty.
    • By doing so, it aims to protect access to generic versions of essential medicines and promote affordability.
  • Under Section 3(d), pharmaceuticals and chemical substances are eligible for patent protection only if they demonstrate enhanced efficacy compared to existing formulations.
    • This requirement ensures that patents are granted for inventions representing genuine advancements in therapeutic efficacy rather than minor modifications or variations of existing drugs.
  • Through Section 3(d), India's patent laws strike a balance between innovation and public health priorities, contributing to the overall well-being and access to medicines for its citizens.

What are the Contemporary Challenges in India's Patent Regime?

  • India's patent regime currently faces several challenges, including issues related to pre-grant opposition, competition, international trade agreements, and flexibilities in patent law. These challenges have implications for access to affordable medicines, the financial burden on patent opponents, and drug availability.
  • Threats to Pre-Grant Opposition: Amendments to the Indian Patent Rules have made filing opposition to patents at the pre-grant stage more challenging.
    • This change could lead to granting patents for inventions lacking genuine novelty or therapeutic efficacy.
  • Impact on Competition and Drug Prices: Limitations to the pre-grant opposition process may stifle competition in the pharmaceutical market and contribute to higher drug prices.
    • By hindering generic manufacturers and civil society organizations from challenging frivolous patents, the amendments impede the availability of affordable generic drugs.
  • Pressure from Pharma Majors and International Trade Agreements: These amendments reflect pressure from multinational pharmaceutical corporations, particularly Western and Japanese companies, seeking to align India's patent rules with their interests.
    • Their lobbying efforts aim to weaken India's patent regime, facilitating patent grants for incremental innovations and extending market exclusivity for their products.
  • Threats to Flexibilities in Patent Law: Amendments to India's patent rules threaten the flexibilities inherent in its patent law, including provisions such as Section 3(d) that set stringent patentability criteria based on enhanced efficacy.
    • Weakening these provisions undermines India's capacity to protect public health priorities and promote access to affordable medicines.
  • Financial Burden on Opponents of Patents: Imposing fees on patent opponents could deter patients, civil society organizations, and generic manufacturers from filing pre-grant oppositions.
    • This financial burden limits stakeholders' ability to safeguard public health interests and promote affordable medicines.
  • Impact on Compulsory Licensing and Drug Availability: The amendments also affect the issuance of compulsory licenses, crucial for ensuring access to medicines when patents hinder availability.
    • By weakening provisions that enable compulsory licensing and limit evergreening, the amendments impede efforts to address healthcare disparities and promote equitable access to essential medicines.

Conclusion

Access to affordable medicines is vital for public health and universal healthcare. Policymakers must preserve patent law flexibilities, promote competition, and protect patient interests to ensure healthcare systems uphold affordability, accessibility, and quality. Amendments to India's Patent Rules should balance innovation, intellectual property rights, and societal well-being, mitigating negative impacts on essential medicines and public health outcomes.

How Can India Revive its Investment Cycle

  • 20 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

Centre has been meeting its capex targets, but the trajectory of private sector and state governments is less certain.

Context:

  • Policymakers in India are grappling with the imperative task of revitalizing the investment cycle. Despite the central government's success in meeting capital expenditure (capex) targets, uncertainty clouds the trajectory of investments from the private sector and state governments.
  • Thus, a comprehensive examination of India's current investment landscape is essential, scrutinizing key indicators and trends to identify the hurdles and prospects in reigniting the investment momentum.

Overview of Investment Patterns:

  • Fluctuating Investment Rates: The investment rate, representing gross fixed capital formation as a percentage of GDP, has shown variability in recent years.
    • After dropping to 27.2% in 2020-21, there has been a slight improvement, with the rate climbing to 31.3% in 2023-24 from 30.8% in the preceding fiscal year.
    • This increase suggests a possible resurgence in investment sentiment and activity, albeit starting from a relatively low level.
  • Composition of Investments: Delving Deeper: Yet, a closer examination of investment composition reveals noteworthy nuances.
    • A significant part of the recent uptick in capital formation stems from dwelling construction, supported by government initiatives to bolster the housing sector.
    • While housing investments spur economic growth and job creation, diversification is essential for sustainable and equitable development.
  • Declining Investment in Plant and Machinery: Of particular concern is the diminishing share of investments in plant and machinery, crucial for fostering productivity, innovation, and competitiveness across sectors.
    • The allocation of investment to plant and machinery declined from 36% in 2017-18 to 30.7% in 2022-23, indicating a potential shift in investment priorities or hurdles in attracting investments in manufacturing and industrial domains.

Private Sector Investment:

  • Insights from CMIE Data: Examining private sector investment trends often involves analyzing data provided by the Centre for Monitoring the Indian Economy (CMIE), offering valuable insights into the investment intentions and actions of private enterprises.
  • Mixed Signals in Investment Intentions: Recent CMIE data reveals a nuanced picture of private sector investment in India.
    • While new investment announcements dipped to Rs 27.1 lakh crore in 2023-24 from the previous year's Rs 39 lakh crore, they still represented the second-highest figures in a decade.
    • However, it's essential to recognize that these announcements signify intentions rather than realized investments, potentially leading to disparities between planned projects and actual investments.
  • Prevalence of Private Sector Intentions: The bulk of investment intentions—around 85%—originated from the private sector, underscoring its pivotal role in driving investment dynamics.
    • Furthermore, foreign companies contributed 11% of the total investment intentions, reflecting a certain degree of confidence in India's business landscape among international investors.

Analyzing Investment Trends Across Sectors:

  • Power Sector Dynamics: Investment inflows into the power sector have surged, reflecting a strategic focus on bolstering infrastructure, particularly in renewable energy projects like solar and wind power, driven by initiatives such as the Production Linked Investment (PLI) scheme.
    • This expansion not only enhances energy security and environmental sustainability but also stimulates job creation and technological advancements.
  • Transportation Sector Insights: Investment intentions in transportation services, notably aviation, have risen sharply due to ambitious expansion plans by major airlines.
    • While these investments promise improved connectivity and economic growth, concerns persist about reliance on imported aircraft, emphasizing the need for initiatives to foster domestic manufacturing and technological capabilities.
  • Diverse Industry Investment Trends: Various industries, including chemicals, machinery, metals, and automotive sectors, have attracted substantial investment commitments, reflecting a broad spectrum of opportunities for private sector investment.
    • However, the absence of significant investments in consumer goods industries raises questions about the depth and breadth of sectoral investments.
  • Challenges in Consumer Goods: Consumer goods industries face challenges such as excess capacity, subdued demand, and high inflation, which dampen investment enthusiasm despite government incentives like the PLI scheme.
    • Lingering issues in job creation and rural demand further contribute to the subdued investment outlook in this segment.
  • Impact of State Government Spending: Reduced capital expenditure by state governments in 2022-23 to meet fiscal targets poses a challenge to the investment cycle, given their significant contribution to overall investments.
    • Budgetary constraints in state governments have a ripple effect on the broader investment landscape in the country.

Way Forward:

  • Promoting Sustainable Growth: While the rise in capital formation is encouraging, ensuring its sustainability and fostering long-term growth hinges on achieving a balanced distribution of investments across sectors.
    • Over-reliance on specific industries, like construction, may impede the economy's adaptability and hinder innovation and technological progress.
  • Policy Imperatives for Investment Stimulus: Effective policy measures are imperative to stimulate private sector investment and cultivate a favorable investment environment.
    • Streamlining regulatory frameworks, bolstering infrastructure, fostering innovation and entrepreneurship, and addressing sector-specific hurdles can incentivize private enterprises to invest in vital areas crucial for fostering economic growth and advancement."

Conclusion

Revitalizing India's investment cycle demands collaborative action from public and private stakeholders. Despite promising sectors, obstacles like sectoral disparities, muted consumer demand, and fiscal limitations at the state level impede a comprehensive rebound. Tackling these hurdles via tailored policies to spur demand, foster sectoral variety, and bolster the investment environment will be pivotal for nurturing enduring economic progress and advancement.

India’s Nuanced Approach in the South China Sea

  • 19 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

In March 2024, India’s External Affairs Minister, S. Jaishankar, articulated, in a joint statement during his visit to Manila, India’s full support for the Philippines in upholding its national sovereignty concerning the South China Sea.

Context:

  • During his visit to Manila in March 2024, India's External Affairs Minister reiterated India's steadfast support for the Philippines in safeguarding its national sovereignty amidst the ongoing South China Sea dispute.
  • This statement came against the backdrop of heightened tensions and frequent maritime incidents in the region throughout 2023.
  • Furthermore, a joint statement issued in 2023 by India and the Philippines emphasized the importance of China adhering to the rules-based maritime order and recognizing the 2016 ruling by the International Court of Justice (ICJ) in favor of the Philippines.
  • These statements reflect a notable shift in India's approach towards the South China Sea issue, departing from its previous stance of caution and neutrality.
  • India's evolving position on the South China Sea underscores its broader strategic and economic interests on the global stage, with a renewed emphasis on upholding international maritime law, sovereignty, and sovereign rights in the region.

About the South China Sea (SCS):

  • The South China Sea (SCS) is a pivotal body of water located in Southeast Asia, bordered by China to the north, Vietnam to the east and south, the Philippines to the west, and Borneo to the south.
  • It encompasses a myriad of shoals, reefs, atolls, and islands, with notable features including the Paracel Islands, the Spratly Islands, and the Scarborough Shoal.
  • Strategically situated, the SCS serves as a crucial maritime passage connecting the Indian Ocean and the Pacific Ocean via the Strait of Malacca.
  • It plays a vital role in global trade, with approximately one-third of all shipping traversing its waters annually, facilitating trillions of dollars in trade and serving as a linchpin for geopolitical dynamics.
  • Rich in marine biodiversity, the SCS harbors a third of the world's marine species, providing essential fisheries that contribute to the food security of Southeast Asian nations.
    • Additionally, the region is believed to possess vast reserves of oil and gas beneath its seabed, further heightening its economic significance.
  • With an estimated $3.4 trillion worth of ship-borne commerce passing through its lanes each year, including crucial energy supplies to nations like the United States, Japan, and South Korea, the South China Sea stands as one of the busiest and most consequential waterways on the planet.

Various Ongoing Disputes in the South China Sea (SCS):

There are multiple ongoing disputes in the South China Sea (SCS) involving several countries. These disputes revolve around territorial and maritime claims over islands, reefs, banks, and other features in the region.

  • Spratly Islands Dispute: The Spratly Islands are claimed by China, Taiwan, Vietnam, the Philippines, Malaysia, and Brunei.
    • These islands are strategically important due to their location in the middle of the South China Sea, as well as potential oil and gas reserves.
  • Paracel Islands Dispute: The Paracel Islands are claimed by China, Taiwan, and Vietnam.
    • China currently controls the islands, but Vietnam also asserts its sovereignty over them.
  • Scarborough Shoal Dispute: The Scarborough Shoal is a disputed territory between China, Taiwan, and the Philippines.
    • The shoal is rich in fishing resources and is strategically located near important shipping lanes.
  • Gulf of Tonkin Dispute: This dispute involves China, Taiwan, and Vietnam, who have overlapping claims over the boundaries in the Gulf of Tonkin.
  • Natuna Islands Dispute: Although geographically a part of the South China Sea, Indonesia claims sovereignty over the Natuna Islands, while China's "Nine-Dash Line" claim overlaps with Indonesia's exclusive economic zone (EEZ) near the Natuna Islands.
  • Senkaku Islands Dispute: In the East China Sea, the Senkaku Islands are disputed between China, Taiwan, and Japan, with Japan currently administering them.
  • These disputes stem from historical claims, economic interests, and strategic considerations, leading to tensions between the involved parties.

India’s Policy Shift:

  • Initially, India's engagement in the region was primarily motivated by economic considerations, in line with its Look East Policy.
    • This policy sought to strengthen economic linkages with Southeast Asia and secure vital energy resources essential for India's growing economy.
    • Demonstrating this economic focus, Indian state-owned enterprises like ONGC Videsh participating in oil and gas ventures in Vietnam's exclusive economic zones highlighted India's economic imperatives and its adherence to the principles of maritime resource exploration and exploitation within the framework of international law, particularly UNCLOS.
  • India's policy trajectory has since evolved from Look East to Act East, indicating a shift towards a more proactive and strategic stance in the Indo-Pacific region.
  • This shift reflects India's acknowledgment of the changing geopolitical landscape and the imperative for a comprehensive foreign policy approach.
    • The Act East Policy places greater emphasis on economic integration and underscores the importance of forging strategic partnerships and enhancing security cooperation with countries in the Indo-Pacific, including Vietnam, Malaysia, Singapore, and the Philippines.
  • Concurrently, India has augmented its capabilities through various measures such as forward deployment, mission-based operations, heightened maritime domain awareness, and the establishment of deep-water maritime infrastructure.

India's intricate dynamic with China:

  • The assertive behavior exhibited by China in the South China Sea (SCS) and its gradual encroachment strategy across various maritime domains, including the Indian Ocean, have sparked apprehension within India.
    • Chinese intelligence-gathering activities in the Eastern Indian Ocean have heightened India's vigilance, prompting a more proactive stance to address perceived threats to its maritime security.
  • Against the backdrop of escalating geopolitical tensions in the SCS, largely driven by China's assertive territorial assertions and militarization efforts, India's approach has undergone a nuanced yet less cautious evolution.
    • This transformation in India's stance toward the SCS is closely interlinked with its complex relationship with China.
    • Both nations have a history of longstanding border disputes, which escalated following the Galwan Valley clash in 2020.
    • China's periodic incursions into Indian territory and recent actions such as renaming Indian villages in Arunachal Pradesh further exacerbate these tensions.
  • The Galwan Valley incident prompted India to deploy a frontline warship to the SCS, showcasing India's asymmetric deterrence capabilities.
    • China's assertive stance and territorial claims in both the SCS and along India's land border pose significant challenges to regional stability.
  • India's strategic engagements, including regular naval exercises and enhanced military cooperation with Southeast Asian nations, serve dual purposes: reaffirming India's commitment to regional security and acting as a counterbalance to China's contentious assertions.

The ASEAN Perspective:

  • New Delhi's strategic recalibration stems from recognizing the critical importance of the South China Sea (SCS) for regional security and the global maritime order.
    • The disputes involving China and various ASEAN nations in the SCS directly impact the principles of freedom of navigation and overflight, which are essential not only for India's trade and energy transport but also for countries worldwide.
  • As an active participant in the Indo-Pacific region, India cannot afford to remain indifferent to such significant issues.
    • Its central role in the Indo-Pacific extends beyond the Indian Ocean to the broader maritime domain, where China's rise challenges the established order in unforeseen ways.
  • India's Indo-Pacific strategy prioritizes ASEAN centrality, despite internal differences within the regional grouping presenting challenges.
    • India's advocacy for a rule-based international maritime order, particularly its steadfast support for UNCLOS, stands in opposition to unilateral actions that undermine regional stability.
  • This principled stance, deeply rooted in India's foreign policy framework, indirectly counters China's expansive territorial claims and activities in the SCS, underscoring India's dedication to regional stability and security as a responsible stakeholder.

Navigating Challenges and Choices for India:

  • India encounters complexities in managing the South China Sea (SCS) disputes, especially given the divergent interests within ASEAN.
    • While ASEAN nations adopt varying approaches to disputes, India aims to strike a delicate balance between supporting regional partners and steering clear of direct entanglement in confrontational situations.
  • India is exploring a spectrum of options, including initiatives to bolster capacity, cooperation in defense matters, infrastructure development, and advocating for the preservation of international law in the SCS.

Conclusion:

India's recalibrated approach to the South China Sea disputes arises from strategic necessities, evolving geopolitical landscapes, and regional intricacies. The nuanced stance adopted by India towards the South China Sea is emblematic of its broader strategy, aimed at safeguarding its interests while actively participating in collective endeavors to uphold peace, stability, and the rule of international law across the Indo-Pacific region.

Supreme Court's Directive Sets Delhi Metro Back on Course with Clear Roadmap

  • 18 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

The case involving DMRC (Delhi Metro Rail Corporation) and DAMEPL (Delhi Airport Metro Express Pvt Ltd) which has been in and out of courts for over a decade, has concluded with the Supreme Court verdict on April 10.

Context:

  • On April 10, the Supreme Court delivered its verdict on the case concerning the Delhi Metro Rail Corporation (DMRC) and Delhi Airport Metro Express Pvt Ltd (DAMEPL), bringing it to a close.
  • This ruling holds exceptional importance within the legal sphere, setting a notable precedent for arbitration tribunals and courts.
  • Moreover, it carries significant implications for public service delivery via partnership models and demonstrates effective litigation strategies for infrastructure projects, contributing to India's future resilience.

What is the Dispute Between DMRC and DAMPEL?

  • The dispute between the Delhi Metro Rail Corporation (DMRC) and Delhi Airport Metro Express Pvt Ltd (DAMEPL) arises from the development and operation of the Airport Metro Express Line, a crucial infrastructure project in India's capital city, which began operations in 2011.
  • The partnership between DMRC and DAMEPL followed a public-private partnership (PPP) model, where DMRC was responsible for constructing civil structures such as tunnels, viaducts, and station buildings, while DAMEPL was in charge of laying tracks, overhead equipment, signaling, and procuring rolling stock.
  • Problems arose shortly after the line became operational.
    • In 2012, DAMEPL suspended operations on the line, citing defects in the civil engineering works executed by DMRC.
    • DAMEPL claimed that these defects compromised safety and functionality and demanded that DMRC rectify the issues within 90 days, threatening to treat the situation as a material breach of the agreement and terminate the contract if not addressed.
  • DMRC attempted to resolve the issues through conciliation proceedings, but these efforts proved unsuccessful.
    • Consequently, DAMEPL issued a notice of termination, asserting that DMRC had failed to remedy the defects.
    • This led to a breakdown in the relationship between the two parties and prompted legal battles.
  • Despite the challenges, DMRC and DAMEPL submitted a joint application in November 2012 to the commissioner of metro rail safety for inspection and permission to restart operations.
    • Train services were eventually restored on the line by DAMEPL in 2013, with train speeds on the line increasing to 80 km/h. However, in June of the same year, DAMEPL announced its unwillingness to continue operating the line and ceased operations almost immediately.
  • Recognizing the importance of the metro line for the public, DMRC stepped in to operate the nearly abandoned Airport Metro Express Line.
    • DMRC resumed train operations and provided other ancillary services to maintain public transportation on the line.
    • This intervention prevented a complete suspension of services and ensured continuity for commuters.

Findings of the Arbitration Tribunal:

  • The tribunal awarded DAMEPL Rs 2,782 crore with interest after concluding that the termination notification was legitimate.
  • In 2018, the Delhi High Court's single-judge bench maintained the award notwithstanding DMRC's protest.
  • The Division Bench of the Delhi High Court, responding to DMRC's appeal, criticized the arbitral tribunal's methodology, pointing out errors such as failing to consider safety considerations and failing to read contractual provisions. As a result, the arbitration decision was revoked.

Supreme Court's Intervention and Final Judgement:

  • Both DMRC and DAMEPL appealed to the Supreme Court through special leave petitions, leading to a significant legal process.
  • Initially, the Supreme Court overturned the High Court's ruling and reinstated the arbitral award in 2021.
  • However, following DMRC's curative petition, the Supreme Court revisited the case.
  • After a thorough examination, considering various factors including factual background and tribunal decisions, the Court found significant errors in the arbitral award.
  • Concluding that the award lacked coherence and resulted in serious injustice, the Court upheld the Division Bench's decision, deeming the award as flawed and illegal.
  • This reversal of its earlier decision restored the parties to the status quo as per the Division Bench's judgment.

Importance of the Supreme Court Verdict:

  • Establishing Precedent for Arbitration: The verdict sets a precedent for arbitration tribunals and courts, outlining the meticulous scrutiny required for arbitral awards.
    • It underscores the importance of coherence and evidence-based reasoning in such decisions, ensuring fairness and consistency in dispute resolution.
  • Ensuring Fairness and Justice: By reinstating the parties to the status quo as per the Delhi High Court Division Bench's judgment, the Supreme Court prioritizes fairness and justice in public-private partnership (PPP) projects.
    • This safeguards public utilities from undue financial strain and upholds the interests of all stakeholders involved in contractual disputes.
  • Promoting Accountability and Due Diligence: The ruling emphasizes accountability in infrastructure projects, stressing the need for due diligence and adherence to contractual obligations.
    • It underscores the responsibility of all PPP participants to act in good faith, particularly in managing critical public infrastructure, thereby fostering transparency and integrity.
  • Guiding Future Infrastructure Ventures: The judgment provides clarity for pending cases, especially in the infrastructure domain, offering a roadmap for handling disputes arising from PPP agreements.
    • It ensures that future projects benefit from transparent and equitable dispute resolution mechanisms, enhancing the efficiency and credibility of infrastructure development efforts.
  • Boosting Confidence in PPPs: By reaffirming the judiciary's commitment to legal integrity and fairness, the ruling instills confidence in both public and private entities engaging in PPPs.
    • This confidence is essential for attracting investment in infrastructure projects, driving economic growth, and modernizing India's infrastructure landscape.

Conclusion

The prolonged legal conflict between DMRC and DAMEPL highlighted the complexities and challenges inherent in PPP projects, spanning over a decade with various assertions from both sides. This case serves as a testament to the judiciary's pivotal role in preserving equity and integrity within PPP ventures, crucial for advancing the nation's infrastructure. Furthermore, it underscores the significance of adhering to principles of fairness in contractual disagreements and the enduring influence of legal precedents on the trajectory of public-private collaborations

Left Wing Extremism/Naxalism in India

  • 17 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

At least 29 Maoists were killed and three security personnel were injured in a gunbattle recently in a forest in Kanker district of Bastar division in Chhattisgarh.

Context:

  • In a significant development, at least 29 Maoists were neutralized, and three security personnel sustained injuries during a fierce gun battle in a forested area of the Kanker district in Chhattisgarh's Bastar division.
  • This successful joint operation, conducted by the District Reserve Guards (DRG) and the Border Security Force (BSF), marked the highest number of Maoist casualties recorded in a single operation within the Bastar region.
  • The operation involved a strategic collaboration between the DRG, a specialized anti-Naxal force, and the BSF, with a well-executed plan that allowed them to engage and ultimately overpower the Maoists.

What is Left Wing Extremism?

  • Left-Wing Extremism (LWE), also referred to as left-wing terrorism or radical left-wing movements, encompasses political ideologies and groups that aim to achieve substantial societal and political transformation through revolutionary methods.
  • These groups may resort to targeting government institutions, law enforcement agencies, or private property to advance their objectives.
  • India's LWE movement traces its origins back to the 1967 uprising in Naxalbari, West Bengal, which set the stage for the emergence of various left-wing extremist groups.
    • According to the Ministry of Home Affairs, LWE has impacted 90 districts across 10 states, with varying degrees of influence.

Maoist Presence Across India:

Maoist influence varies in intensity across different Indian states:

  • Severely Affected States: Chhattisgarh, Jharkhand, Odisha, and Bihar face significant Maoist presence and activities, with frequent attacks on security forces and civilians.
  • Partially Affected States: West Bengal, Maharashtra, and Andhra Pradesh experience a more moderate Maoist presence, with occasional incidents and clashes.
  • Slightly Affected States: Uttar Pradesh and Madhya Pradesh have a lower level of Maoist activity but are still considered areas of concern.
  • The Communist Party of India (Maoist) has been attempting to expand its influence in the southern states of Kerala, Karnataka, and Tamil Nadu, aiming to connect the Western and Eastern Ghats.
  • Additionally, incursions into Assam and Arunachal Pradesh have raised concerns about long-term strategic implications.

Factors Contributing to Left-Wing Extremism in India:

Several underlying factors contribute to the rise and persistence of Left-Wing Extremism (LWE) in India:

  • Inequitable Development: Many LWE-affected regions are among India's least developed areas, characterized by high poverty, unemployment, illiteracy, malnutrition, and social exclusion rates.
    • LWE groups often exploit the grievances of marginalized communities, particularly tribal populations, who have been deprived of land, forest, and mineral rights.
  • Marginalization: Naxalites primarily consist of Dalits, Adivasis, and other marginalized sections of society.
    • Maoist teachings deeply influence their leadership, with land reforms and economic development being key issues.
  • Governance Deficit: LWE-affected areas often suffer from inadequate governance, administration, and service delivery.
    • Weak or corrupt state institutions leave a vacuum that LWE groups can exploit.
    • These groups also use violence and intimidation to disrupt democratic processes, including elections, local governance, and development schemes.
  • Ideological Appeal: LWE groups claim to represent the interests of oppressed and exploited classes, promoting a radical ideology that rejects parliamentary democracy and advocates for armed revolution.
    • Drawing inspiration from Mao Zedong and the 1967 Naxalbari uprising, these groups may also have links to other extremist and separatist movements in India and abroad.
  • Globalization and Cultural Displacement: The impacts of globalization, such as cultural changes and displacement, can cause feelings of dislocation and alienation.
    • Left-wing extremist movements may offer identity and purpose to individuals marginalized by global forces.
  • Support Base: The Naxalite movement draws support from the landless, sharecroppers, agricultural laborers, Harijans, and tribals.
    • As long as these groups continue to face exploitation and social injustice, the Naxalite support base will persist.

The Challenges Posed by Naxalites to India:

The Naxalite movement presents several challenges to India's stability and development:

  • Vulnerability to External Threats: Naxalite activities expose India's internal vulnerabilities, potentially inviting external threats.
    • The CPI (Maoist) has close ties with Northeast insurgent groups, many of which have links to external forces hostile to India.
    • The CPI (Maoist) has also expressed solidarity with Jammu and Kashmir terrorist groups.
  • Impediments to Economic Development: Focusing on India's poor and marginalized regions, Naxalite activities hinder economic development efforts crucial for improving these areas' conditions.
    • Internal stability is essential for a nation's economic progress.
  • Additional Internal Security Expenses: Scarce resources are diverted towards defense and internal security to counter Naxalite threats, which could be better utilized for social development initiatives.
  • Adverse Impact on Governance: Naxalite domination in certain areas disrupts governance through violent tactics, such as killings, kidnappings, intimidation, and extortion.
    • This hampers the delivery of essential services to citizens in affected regions.

Steps Taken by the Government to Counter Left-Wing Extremism:

To tackle the challenges posed by Left-Wing Extremism (LWE), the Indian government has implemented various strategies and initiatives:

  • Deployment of Central Armed Police Forces (CAPFs): CAPF battalions and Naga Battalions (BNs) are deployed to support state police forces in LWE-affected areas, providing additional security and resources.
  • Security Related Expenditure (SRE) Scheme: The SRE scheme funds the recurring expenditures related to insurance, training, and operational needs of security forces, rehabilitation of surrendered LWE cadres, and awareness campaigns against violence.
  • Review and Monitoring Mechanisms: The Ministry of Home Affairs regularly monitors the LWE situation at multiple levels through various review and monitoring mechanisms.
  • Strengthening Intelligence Gathering: Intelligence capabilities at the central and state levels have been bolstered through measures like intelligence sharing via the Multi-Agency Centre (MAC) and State Multi-Agency Centre (SMAC) on a 24/7 basis.
  • Inter-state Coordination: Given the cross-border nature of Maoist operations, the government facilitates frequent meetings and interactions between officials from bordering LWE-affected districts to enhance inter-state coordination.
  • Countering Improvised Explosive Devices (IEDs): As IEDs are a significant threat, the Home Ministry has developed a Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) on explosives, IEDs, and landmines in affected areas, which has been shared with stakeholders for implementation.
  • Enhanced Air Support: State governments and CAPFs have received increased air support, including UAVs and helicopters, for anti-Naxal operations and casualty evacuations.

Progress and Impact of the Measures:

  • Over the past eight years, India has witnessed a substantial decrease in left-wing extremism violence and its geographical spread, thanks to the government's comprehensive measures:
  • The number of left-wing extremism-related incidents dropped significantly in 2022 compared to 2013, totaling 413.
  • Left-wing extremism-related deaths also experienced a substantial decline, with a 75% reduction from 397 in 2013 to 98 in 2022.
  • The year 2022 saw a 33% decrease in resultant deaths and a 68% decrease in security forces' casualties compared to 2021.

Way Forward:

  • Effective Implementation of PESA Act: Ensure proper and complete implementation of the Panchayats (Extension to Scheduled Areas) Act, 1996 (PESA) by issuing clear policy directives to empower gram sabhas.
    • Align the Act with the historical and traditional tribal way of life and address implementation gaps that Maoists exploit.
  • Tribal Empowerment and Representation: Foster tribal leadership by providing platforms for their voices to be heard and increasing representation in local governance structures and political processes.
    • Address tribal communities' aspirations and ensure policies accommodate their unique needs and perspectives.
  • Targeted Development Programs: Implement development programs addressing socio-economic issues faced by tribal communities, including infrastructure, healthcare, education, and employment opportunities. Involve local communities in participatory decision-making processes for initiatives.
  • Counter Maoist Propaganda: Develop communication strategies to expose the gap between Maoist rhetoric and actions.
    • Collaborate with local media, community leaders, and influencers to spread accurate information and counter misinformation.
  • Negotiation and Conflict Resolution: Explore avenues for peaceful negotiation with moderate Maoist factions, identifying root causes of discontent and involving neutral mediators, civil society organizations, and respected community leaders in peacebuilding efforts.
  • Human Rights Protection: Prioritize human rights protection in conflict zones, ensuring security measures align with the rule of law and minimizing collateral damage and civilian casualties.
  • Long-term Strategic Planning: Develop a comprehensive, long-term strategy focused on sustainable development, social justice, and inclusive governance to address underlying issues contributing to the insurgency.

Conclusion

There is a widely acknowledged perspective that effectively addressing the Naxal issue requires a balanced approach involving both developmental and security measures. It's crucial not to solely consider it as a law and order challenge, as innocent tribal communities residing in remote forest areas often become targets of Naxal intimidation. Priority lies in re-establishing governance in Naxal-affected regions, fostering their development, and empowering marginalized communities to lead secure, dignified, and improved lives

New Data Law, a Barrier to Journalistic Free Speech

  • 16 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

In August 2023, India enacted its first comprehensive data protection law, the Digital Personal Data Protection (DPDP) Act, 2023, with the government currently in the process of formulating rules and regulations for its implementation, anticipated to conclude post the general election.

Context:

  • In August 2023, India introduced its first comprehensive data protection law, the Digital Personal Data Protection (DPDP) Act, 2023.
  • While aimed at safeguarding personal data, its impact on journalistic freedom warrants examination, as the absence of exemptions for journalistic activities may threaten the foundational principles of a free press.

Provisions of Digital Personal Data Protection (DPDP) Act:

  • The Digital Personal Data Protection (DPDP) Act, 2023 is a landmark legislation aimed at regulating the collection, processing, storage, and use of personal data in India.
  • The Act establishes a comprehensive framework for lawful and transparent handling of personal data, seeking to safeguard individuals' privacy and data rights.

Key provisions of the DPDP Act, 2023 include:

  • Definition of personal data: Any information capable of identifying an individual, directly or indirectly.
  • Principles of data protection: Lawfulness, fairness, transparency, purpose limitation, data minimisation, accuracy, storage limitation, integrity, confidentiality, and accountability.
  • Data handlers: Distinction between data fiduciaries (determining processing purpose and means) and data processors (processing data on behalf of fiduciaries).
  • Consent: Requirement for explicit consent before processing personal data, with provisions for withdrawal.
  • Individual rights: Access, correction, erasure, and transfer of personal data.
  • Data localisation: Potentially mandating the storage and processing of certain sensitive data within India.
  • Oversight: Establishment of a Data Protection Board to monitor compliance and resolve grievances.
  • Non-compliance: Penalties and sanctions, including fines and legal consequences for violations.
  • Cross-border data transfers: Ensuring data protection standards comparable to India's when transferring data across borders.
  • Obligations for data fiduciaries and processors: Security measures, data breach notifications, and data impact assessments.
  • The DPDP Act, 2023 represents a significant step towards upholding individual privacy rights in India and ensuring responsible data management by government entities, organisations, and individuals alike.

Journalistic Exemptions in Data Protection Laws:

  • Traditionally, data protection laws include exemptions for journalistic activities, allowing journalists to access and report on personal data without consent for investigative purposes.
    • These exemptions ensure freedom of the press and facilitate accountability in society.
  • However, the Digital Personal Data Protection (DPDP) Act, 2023 does not provide such exemptions.
    • Previous drafts of the Act, including versions released by an expert committee on data protection (2018), the government (2019), and a Joint Parliamentary Committee (2021), contained provisions for journalistic activities.
  • The unexplained removal of these exemptions in the DPDP Act's final iterations (2022 and 2023) raises concerns over potential negative impacts on journalism and its role in maintaining transparency and accountability.
    • Addressing this absence of journalistic exemptions will be crucial to upholding the freedom of the press and protecting the public's right to information.

Challenges for Journalists under the DPDP Act:

  • Consent Requirements: Journalists are now obligated to secure consent from individuals before utilizing their personal data in news stories.
    • This could impede investigative reporting, as subjects may refuse consent, thereby obstructing access to crucial information.
  • Right to Erasure: The right to erasure permits individuals to demand the deletion of published stories containing their personal data.
    • This provision may result in the removal of significant investigative work, undermining transparency.
      • For instance, when reporting on a Member of Parliament (MP) and their activities, journalists often gather information such as meeting details, travel itineraries, and familial financial investments, all of which constitute personal data under the DPDP Act.
  • Obtaining consent for such data usage poses challenges, and even after publication, MPs can invoke the right to erasure, compelling journalists to delete pertinent stories.
  • Government Oversight: The Act grants the government authority to request information from data processors, potentially compromising the confidentiality of journalists' sources and research materials.
    • This governmental oversight may curtail the press's capacity to hold the state accountable.

Addressing Concerns and Potential Solutions for Journalistic Freedoms under the DPDP Act:

  • To ensure a balanced approach that protects personal data while preserving journalistic freedoms, addressing the concerns raised by the Digital Personal Data Protection (DPDP) Act is essential.
  • The following solutions could help achieve this goal:
  • Transparent Consultation: The removal of exemptions for journalistic activities highlights the need for open and transparent public consultations.
    • Although drafts of the DPDP Act were released for public input, the comments received were not made publicly available.
    • Greater transparency in the consultation process would enable better comprehension of stakeholder perspectives and inform more effective law-making.
  • Exemptions for Journalists: The central government should consider using its rule-making powers under the DPDP Act to exempt journalistic entities, including citizen journalists, from specific obligations within the Act.
    • This exemption would protect the freedom of the press and encourage a transparent and open environment for journalism.
  • Public Consultation: Implementing an open, transparent, and robust public consultation process could facilitate better understanding and consideration of various viewpoints.
    • This approach would lead to a more balanced and effective data protection law that upholds both personal data privacy and freedom of the press.

Conclusion

The Digital Personal Data Protection (DPDP) Act, 2023, is an essential step towards safeguarding personal data in India. However, its potential impact on journalistic free speech raises significant concerns that must be addressed.

To strike a balance between protecting individual privacy and upholding the fundamental principles of a free press, the government should consider implementing exemptions for journalists and fostering transparent consultation processes. These measures would enable a harmonious coexistence of personal data protection and journalistic freedoms, ensuring that both critical elements thrive in India's democratic landscape

Revealing Caste-based Inequalities in Indian Cities

  • 15 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

Despite Dr. B.R. Ambedkar's hopeful vision for India's cities, the urban fabric continues to be profoundly fractured by enduring caste-based divisions.

Context:

  • Caste has historically played a significant role in shaping the social fabric and geographical layout of communities throughout India.
  • This influence is palpable in the organization of Indian cities, where caste often dictates spatial arrangements and societal dynamics.
  • Despite entrenched obstacles, influential figures such as R. Ambedkar and Jyotirao Phule viewed urbanization as a potential catalyst for the liberation of Dalits.
  • Consequently, it becomes imperative to delve into Ambedkar's perspective on urbanization, the enduring prevalence of caste-based discrimination within urban environments, and the ongoing hurdles encountered by Dalits and Muslims concerning housing and access to public services in urban areas.

What was B. R. Ambedkar’s View on Urbanization?

  • A Pathway to Empowerment: B. R. Ambedkar, an eminent social reformer and advocate for Dalit rights, envisioned urbanization as a pathway to empowerment for marginalized communities in India.
    • He posited that the traditional social structures prevailing in Indian villages were inherently oppressive due to the rigid caste system, which predetermined individuals' social status and opportunities based solely on their birth.
  • Ambedkar contended that Indian villages served as the "working plant of the Hindu social order," perpetuating caste-based hierarchies that marginalized and subjugated Dalits.
    • Viewing urbanization as a means of dismantling this entrenched caste-based order, he saw cities as spaces where individuals could blend into anonymity amidst a diverse population, transitioning from a caste-oriented society to one structured more around class.
  • Disrupting Caste-Based Hierarchies: Ambedkar believed that this transition from a genealogy-based social structure to one centered on resource accumulation would weaken the systems of caste oppression that were deeply entrenched in rural areas.
    • Urban environments, he argued, would offer Dalits access to diverse economic opportunities and avenues for skilled labor, enabling them to enhance their social and economic status.
  • In cities, Dalits could potentially break free from the occupational constraints dictated by caste in villages, thereby fostering social mobility and economic independence.
    • Additionally, Ambedkar saw urban areas as hubs of greater political and social awareness, with educational institutions and opportunities for civic engagement that could empower marginalized groups to assert their rights and actively participate in democratic processes.
  • Urbanization Challenges and Ambedkar's Hope: Despite advocating for urbanization as a means of empowerment for marginalized communities, Ambedkar was cognizant of its inherent challenges.
    • He acknowledged the persistent presence of caste-based discrimination within urban settings, drawing from his encounters with adversity.
  • Ambedkar's personal experiences, such as his difficulties in securing housing in Baroda and encountering caste-based restrictions in textile mills, underscored the reality of caste-based biases in urban areas.
    • However, rather than succumbing to disillusionment, he maintained an optimistic outlook regarding the transformative potential of cities.
  • Ambedkar perceived urban environments as arenas where individuals could assert greater agency and autonomy in shaping their lives.
    • Despite the hurdles presented by caste-based discrimination, he remained hopeful that cities could provide avenues for marginalized groups to transcend social barriers and realize their full potential.

Endurance of Caste-Based Bias in Urban Environments:

  • Language of Purity-Pollution: Urban caste discrimination primarily manifests through the concept of purity-pollution, deeply ingrained in Hindu social practices.
    • This notion labels specific foods, behaviors, and individuals as pure or impure based on caste.
      • For instance, a 2021 survey revealed that non-vegetarian diets hinder rental housing access, reflecting prejudice against meat-eating castes.
  • Caste Segregation in Housing: The purity-pollution concept extends to housing practices, with Dalits and other lower castes facing discrimination in renting or purchasing urban homes.
    • Landlords and housing societies may reject them based on perceived cleanliness or dietary habits, leading to segregation and ghettoization.
  • State-Sanctioned Policies: Government policies have also perpetuated urban caste-based discrimination.
    • In March 2017, Uttar Pradesh restricted meat sales near religious places and mandated meat shops to conceal products from pedestrians.
    • Similar measures in Gujarat targeted street food vendors selling meat-based items, citing religious concerns.
    • These policies reinforce caste divisions by labeling meat as impure and associating it with certain castes.

Ambedkar's Vision, Discrimination's Impact, and Urban Space Inequity:

  • Enduring Significance of Ambedkar's Vision: Dr. B.R. Ambedkar's vision of urbanization as a means for Dalit liberation remains relevant today, emphasizing the continuing pursuit of social justice and equality in Indian cities.
    • His work highlights the need to address both historical and present-day caste-based discrimination to create inclusive urban environments.
  • Spatial Consequences of Discrimination: Caste-based discrimination significantly affects urban spaces by segregating Dalits and other marginalized groups into specific areas or neighborhoods.
    • These segregated zones often lack access to essential services and infrastructure, amplifying existing socioeconomic disparities within these communities.
  • Influence on Public Spaces: Discrimination based on caste extends to public spaces, with restrictions on food sales limiting lower castes' economic and social participation in city life.
    • Such policies contribute to exclusion and marginalization, shaping an environment detrimental to inclusivity and equity within urban landscapes.

Conclusion

Despite Ambedkar's hopeful vision of urbanization as a means to Dalit liberation, Indian cities have yet to fully realize this potential. While the shift to urban life has altered some aspects of caste oppression, new forms of discrimination have emerged and persisted, perpetuated by language, state policies, and institutional biases. This enduring struggle highlights the imperative of ongoing initiatives to combat caste-based discrimination and foster a more inclusive and equitable urban landscape in India.

A Reformed UNSC is not Possible Without India as a Permanent Member

  • 13 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

At a time when India is seriously advocating structural and functional reforms in the United Nations, the global forum’s president, Dennis Francis, has expressed optimism about India’s potential to secure a permanent seat on the UN Security Council.

Context:

  • Amid India's active promotion of structural and functional reforms within the United Nations, Dennis Francis, the president of the global forum, has voiced optimism regarding India's ability to secure a permanent seat on the UN Security Council.
  • The US and other Western countries sound extremely hollow when they pontificate on strengthening democracy and the fight against terrorism even as they keep India out of P5.

What is P5 Nations in the United Nations?

  • P5 refers to the Permanent Five or Permanent Members of the United Nations Security Council.
  • These are the five countries that have a permanent seat on the Security Council, granting them significant power within the UN.

The P5 members are:

    • China
    • France
    • Russia
    • United Kingdom
    • United States
  • Most of these countries were major victors of World War II and were seen as key players in maintaining international peace and security. 
  • They hold a special privilege within the Security Council:  the right to veto any resolution.
  • This means any one of these countries can single-handedly block a resolution, regardless of how many other countries support it.
  • The P5's power and influence is a subject of some debate. Some argue that it's necessary to maintain stability, while others believe it gives these countries too much control and hinders the UN's effectiveness.

Urgent Need for Overhauling the United Nations (UN):

  • Addressing the 76th UNGA in 2021, the Prime Minister of India underscored the imperative for 'comprehensive UN reforms,' stressing that 'outmoded structures' are inadequate to tackle contemporary challenges.
  • Issues such as climate change, counterterrorism efforts, and the attainment of sustainable development goals (SDGs) were not prioritized when the UN was established seven decades ago.
    • Today, they demand urgent attention.
  • The aftermath of World War 2 has spawned numerous conflicts that persist, undermining global peace and economic advancement.
  • The Covid-19 pandemic has laid bare the fragility of the world's healthcare systems.
  • In today's multipolar world, the UN's polarized and antiquated structure is ill-suited to meet the demands of global governance.
    • Cooperation among nations is essential to prevent the abuse of selective veto power by members pursuing hegemonic agendas.

Inconsistencies in Global Perceptions of India's UNSC Candidacy:

  • In 2023, as India's G20 presidency drew to a close, the country's foreign minister noted a positive international reception to India's bid for a permanent seat on the UNSC.
  • During bilateral discussions between the Prime Minister of India and the President of the USA, a joint statement emphasized India's stance on the need for a more inclusive and representative global governance structure through UN Security Council reform.
  • In the same statement, the US expressed support for India's candidacy for a non-permanent seat on the UNSC for the term 2028-2029.
  • Beyond the US, other voices echo the call for expanding non-permanent UNSC membership.
  • The Uniting for Consensus (UFC) group, comprising twelve nations, advocates for increasing the number of non-permanent elected UNSC members from 15 to 26.
  • Formed in 1990, the UFC opposes creating new permanent national seats, arguing that the current P5 arrangement stems from post-World War 2 circumstances, and creating additional privileged positions would be detrimental to UN membership's general interests.
  • Critics point out the inconsistency of Western nations, notably the US, a permanent UNSC member, advocating for democracy and counterterrorism while simultaneously excluding India, one of the oldest UN members and the largest democracy, from the P5.
  • China presents the primary obstacle to India's pursuit of a permanent UNSC seat.

China's Influence on UNSC Reform Efforts:

  • Italy-China Collaboration within UFC: In 2023, the Deputy Prime Minister of Italy engaged in discussions with his Chinese counterpart, focusing on bilateral agreements and the situation in Ukraine.
    • During this exchange, the Deputy Prime Minister of Italy commended the productive and consistent cooperation between China and Italy concerning UNSC reform, particularly their coordination within the Uniting for Consensus (UFC) group, where China holds an observer status.
    • The presence of China as an observer suggests dim prospects for those advocating genuine reforms and expansion of the P5.
  • China's Opposition to the G4 Group: Also in 2023, the G4 Group, consisting of India, Brazil, Japan, and Germany, convened during the 78th UNGA to deliberate on the UN reform process, particularly focusing on expanding the P5.
    • Their objective is to modernize the UN's structure, which has its roots in the aftermath of World War 2.
    • However, opposition from China, Russia, and South Korea regarding Japan's participation in the G4 due to historical issues stemming from World War 2 has caused friction and disagreement among the countries involved.
  • Acknowledging India's Role: Prime Minister Jawaharlal Nehru played a pivotal role in advocating for China's inclusion as a permanent member of the UN Security Council. Notably, both the US and the Soviet Union informally offered India the UNSC seat in the early 1950s.
    • Nehru emphasized China's significance within the framework of his foreign policy.
    • However, China's actions in Tibet and its conflict with India in 1962 shattered Nehru's perception of China's global role.
    • India now stresses the importance of resolving issues such as Tibet and territories like Xinjiang and Pakistan-occupied Kashmir.
    • As a permanent UNSC member, China should remember the circumstances that led to its membership and acknowledge its responsibilities to India.

Conclusion

The international community must acknowledge that without comprehensive restructuring and democratization, untethered from its historical constraints, the United Nations (UN) will struggle to address the complexities of contemporary geopolitics and foster genuine multilateralism. Without these reforms, the aspirations for peace and prosperity will remain elusive. What's urgently required is a revamped, credible, and inclusive UN 2.0 that can effectively safeguard global peace and security.

United Nations Security Council:

  • The Security Council has primary responsibility for the maintenance of international peace and security.
  • It has 15 Members, and each Member has one vote.
  • Under the Charter of the United Nations, all Member States are obligated to comply with Council decisions.
  • The Security Council takes the lead in determining the existence of a threat to the peace or act of aggression.
  • It calls upon the parties to a dispute to settle it by peaceful means and recommends methods of adjustment or terms of settlement.
  • In some cases, the Security Council can resort to imposing sanctions or even authorizing the use of force to maintain or restore international peace and security.

A Battle to Save Ladakh, and All of Humanity

  • 12 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

When climate activist Sonam Wangchuk took the stage in Leh, Ladakh recently, addressing a gathering of 30,000 individuals, his announcement of a 21-day climate fast resonated not only with the people of Ladakh but also with a global audience.

Context:

  • The Himalayan region, situated between India's neighbors Pakistan and China, encompasses Ladakh, where 97% of the population comprises indigenous tribes whose livelihoods primarily depend on agriculture and animal husbandry.
  • Despite its breathtaking beauty, this region grapples with various challenges, including the adverse effects of climate change, border tensions, and a surge in large-scale infrastructure projects.
  • As climate activist Sonam Wangchuk leads protests and fasts, it becomes imperative to grasp the broader context of the Himalayan ecosystem's vulnerability.

The Climate Change Challenge in the Himalayan Region:

  • Extreme Weather Events: Climate change manifests in more frequent and severe weather phenomena like heavy rainfall, cloudbursts, and flash floods.
    • These events trigger landslides, wreaking havoc on mountain communities by damaging infrastructure, crops, and property, and endangering lives.
  • Shifts in Monsoon Patterns: The region heavily relies on monsoon rains for agriculture and water supply.
    • Climate change-induced alterations in monsoon patterns disrupt rainfall timing, intensity, and distribution, jeopardizing agricultural cycles and economic stability.
  • Temperature Rise: Elevated temperatures impact both mountain and downstream ecosystems.
    • Snowmelt patterns alter, local biodiversity faces disturbance, and traditional farming and animal husbandry practices suffer.
  • Melting Glaciers: The Himalayas, often dubbed the Third Pole, harbor approximately 15,000 glaciers crucial to regional hydrology.
    • These glaciers feed vital rivers like the Indus, Ganga, and Brahmaputra, serving as lifelines for millions downstream.
    • However, accelerated glacier melt due to global warming poses threats such as rising river levels, heightened flood risks, and potential water scarcity.
  • Loss of Biodiversity: The Himalayan region hosts diverse flora and fauna, including many endemic species.
    • Climate change threatens this unique biodiversity through habitat loss, altered migration routes, and ecosystem stress.
  • Livelihood Impacts: Indigenous tribes and rural communities depend on farming and animal husbandry.
    • Climate change-induced disruptions, such as erratic weather and natural disasters, challenge their traditional livelihoods.

National Mission for Sustaining the Himalayan Ecosystem (NMSHE):

  • The National Mission for Sustaining the Himalayan Ecosystem (NMSHE) is one of the eight missions under the National Action Plan on Climate Change (NAPCC).
  • NMSHE is a multi-pronged, cross-cutting mission across various sectors.
    • It contributes to the sustainable development of the country by enhancing the understanding of climate change, its likely impacts, and adaptation actions required for the Himalayas- a region on which a significant proportion of India’s population depends for sustenance.
  • NMSHE seeks to facilitate the formulation of appropriate policy measures and time-bound action programs to sustain ecological resilience and ensure the continued provisions of key ecosystem services in the Himalayas.
    • NMSHE intends to evolve suitable management and policy measures for sustaining and safeguarding the Himalayan ecosystem along with developing capacities at the national level to continuously assess its health status.
  • Recognizing the importance of scientific and technological inputs required for sustaining the fragile Himalayan Ecosystem, the Ministry of Science and Technology has been given the nodal responsibility of coordinating this mission.
    • However, the mission involves valuable cooperation of the Indian Himalayan States, the Planning Commission, and the Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change to achieve its goals.

NMSHE's Role in Preserving the Himalayan Region:

  • Accelerated Infrastructure Development: Since Ladakh transitioned to a Union Territory, numerous large-scale infrastructure projects have been rapidly implemented, including road expansions, bridge constructions, tunnel installations, railway lines, and solar energy initiatives.
    • These endeavors, driven by entities such as the Border Roads Organisation (BRO) and the National Highways & Infrastructure Development Corporation Ltd. (NHIDCL), focus on promoting tourism and industrial growth.
  • Oversight of Previous Disasters: Despite past calamities in the Himalayan region, such as the catastrophic 2013 Kedarnath floods, and more recent incidents like the 2023 Joshimath disaster and the Silkyara tunnel collapse, there appears to be minimal reflection on previous warnings.
    • Expert committees have advocated for limitations on pilgrim numbers and constraints on hydroelectric projects in ecologically fragile areas, but these recommendations have often been disregarded.
  • Insufficient Attention to Concerns: Climate change activists have raised concerns about the inadequate consideration given to their suggestions, with little to no scrutiny conducted before approving multi-crore infrastructure projects.
    • Worries regarding risk assessment, safety protocols, and geological evaluations seem to be overlooked in the pursuit of rapid development.

How to preserve the Himalayan Ecosystem Safe?

  • Sustainable Development Practices: Conduct comprehensive environmental impact assessments before embarking on development projects to gauge potential ecosystem repercussions.
    • Design projects with a focus on minimizing environmental harm and adhering to sustainability standards.
    • Implement infrastructure projects with measures to reduce environmental disruption, such as using sustainable materials and employing low-impact construction methods.
  • Focused Policies on Biodiversity Conservation: Expand and fortify protected areas like national parks and wildlife sanctuaries to safeguard the region's diverse flora and fauna.
    • Establish and maintain wildlife corridors to facilitate safe animal migration and preserve genetic diversity, thus mitigating the risk of species extinction.
  • Community Involvement: Integrate traditional knowledge and practices of local communities into conservation initiatives to ensure cultural relevance and long-term sustainability.
    • Empower local communities to actively participate in conservation efforts, fostering greater engagement and ownership over preservation endeavors.
  • Climate Change Mitigation and Adaptation: Implement strategies to curb greenhouse gas emissions, such as promoting renewable energy sources and combating deforestation, to mitigate climate change impacts.
    • Support adaptation measures for local communities, including crop diversification and enhanced water management, to help them cope with evolving climate conditions.
  • Research and Monitoring: Continuously monitor the Himalayan ecosystem, including its flora, fauna, and physical processes, to detect early signs of ecological changes and inform conservation strategies.
    • Encourage interdisciplinary research on the region's ecology, climate, and geology to deepen understanding of ecosystem challenges and identify effective solutions.

Conclusion

It's crucial to recognize that while development is vital for economic progress, it should not be pursued at the cost of environmental harm and human well-being. The Himalayan region, renowned for its unparalleled biodiversity and rich cultural heritage, warrants thoughtful preservation and conservation efforts. It is incumbent upon all stakeholders to collectively assume the responsibility of safeguarding the future of this ecologically and culturally significant area.

The Advent Of A Holistic Approach To 'One Health'

  • 11 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

The ‘National One Health Mission’ is the result of the recognition that only a coordinated approach will ensure a better response to disease outbreaks.

Context:

  • In recent times, the intricate relationship among humans, animals, and the environment has gained significant attention, especially in light of the emergence of pandemics like COVID-19.
  • This interconnectedness is underscored by the impact of diseases such as lumpy skin disease, which affects both livestock productivity and trade, bridging the gap between domesticated and wild animal health.
  • Addressing these complex challenges, the Indian government has launched the 'National One Health Mission,' aimed at comprehensively tackling the interlinked domains of human, animal, and environmental health.

What is One Health?

  • One Health is an integrating idea that brings different sectors together to solve the health, productivity, and conservation challenges and has major implications for India.
    • It is a global topic and was endorsed during India's presidency of the G-20.
  • India with its diverse wildlife, one of the largest livestock populations, and high density of human population, carries heightened risks for inter-compartmental spread of diseases.
  • The Covid pandemic, recent outbreaks of Lumpy Skin Disease in cattle, and the constant threat of Avian Influenza show that it is not just about addressing diseases from the human health point of view (zoonosis) but we need to address the livestock and wildlife aspects.
  • This also opens opportunities for leveraging the complementarity and strengths that are inherent in each sector and devising integrated, robust, and agile response systems.

What is the National One Health Mission?

  • Initiated in July 2022, the National One Health Mission represents a comprehensive endeavor endorsed by the Prime Minister's Science, Technology, and Innovation Advisory Council (PM-STIAC).
  • With the participation of 13 ministries and departments, including the Department of Science and Technology, the Department of Biotechnology (DBT), and the Council of Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR), among others, this mission adopts a holistic approach towards One Health and pandemic preparedness.
  • A pivotal achievement within this mission is the establishment of the National Institute for One Health in Nagpur.
  • Functioning as the central coordinating body for both national and international One Health endeavors, this institute marks a significant milestone in the mission's implementation.
  • On December 11, 2022, the foundation stone of the institute was laid by the Prime Minister, symbolizing the commitment to advancing the principles of One Health and enhancing pandemic preparedness.

Objectives and Approaches of The National One Health Mission:

  • Seamless Surveillance Integration: The mission endeavors to establish an integrated surveillance system that seamlessly monitors health indicators across human, animal, and environmental sectors.
    • By amalgamating data from these domains, it can swiftly identify potential health hazards and respond proactively.
  • Coordinated Outbreak Management: Recognizing the necessity of a unified approach in outbreak response, the mission aims to institute protocols and frameworks facilitating collaboration among various sectors.
    • This coordinated effort enables effective resource and information sharing to mitigate the impact of diseases affecting multiple domains.
  • Collaborative Research and Development: Through fostering collaboration among scientific research institutions and government bodies, the mission fosters the development of innovative solutions for emerging health threats.
    • This includes the creation of vaccines, therapeutics, and diagnostics critical for pandemic preparedness and response.
  • Seamless Information Exchange: Effective communication and data sharing are imperative for a unified One Health approach.
    • The mission endeavors to facilitate seamless information exchange between sectors and stakeholders, ensuring timely and informed actions.
  • Preparedness for Future Pandemics: Building on past pandemic experiences, the mission seeks to develop strategies and frameworks to enhance the country's readiness for future health crises.
    • This involves proactive planning for potential pandemics and emerging diseases such as avian influenza or Nipah virus.
  • Resource Optimization: By leveraging the resources and expertise of multiple sectors and stakeholders, the mission aims to optimize resource utilization, including laboratory infrastructure, healthcare facilities, and scientific research capabilities.
    • This collaborative effort enhances efficiency and cost-effectiveness in addressing health threats.
  • Public Health Education and Awareness: The mission includes public education initiatives to raise awareness about the interconnectedness of human, animal, and environmental health.
    • Promoting an understanding of One Health principles encourages healthier behaviors and better preparedness for health emergencies.

Critical enabling activities of the One Health Mission:

  • The outcomes of the One Health Mission will be supported by critical enabling initiatives.
  • Many of these initiatives are ongoing and will be strengthened under the mission and several new activities that will facilitate the goals of the mission will be undertaken.?

Leveraging Laboratory Networks and Technological Integration in India's National One Health Mission:

  • Establishment of High-Risk Pathogen Laboratories: The mission is dedicated to creating a nationwide network of laboratories equipped to handle high-risk pathogens classified under Biosafety Levels 3 and 4.
    • These facilities provide a secure environment for studying infectious agents with pandemic potential.
  • Departmental Collaboration: By consolidating laboratories managed by diverse departments, the mission aims to foster a cohesive network capable of coordinating resources and expertise across sectors.
    • This integration enhances disease outbreak response, irrespective of its origin in human, animal, or environmental realms.
  • Optimized Resource Allocation: Pooling laboratory resources within a unified network ensures efficient utilization of infrastructure and personnel.
    • This collaborative approach enables swift responses to outbreaks and other health crises, maximizing available resources.
  • Interdisciplinary Research and Analysis: Encouraging collaboration among experts from various disciplines—including medicine, veterinary science, environmental science, and public health—the mission promotes comprehensive research and analysis of health threats across multiple sectors.
  • Integration of Artificial Intelligence (AI) and Machine Learning: Harnessing the power of AI and machine learning, the mission enhances epidemiological capabilities by analyzing vast datasets to detect patterns, trends, and potential health risks.
    • This technology enables timely interventions and enhances overall preparedness.
  • Utilization of Disease Modelling: Advanced modeling techniques are employed to forecast disease spread and potential outbreaks.
    • These models facilitate targeted measures for disease control and prevention.
  • Expansion of Genomic Surveillance: The mission broadens genomic surveillance efforts beyond COVID-19, encompassing other infectious diseases.
    • By analyzing genetic material from diverse sources like wastewater and animal congregations, scientists can monitor disease prevalence and identify emerging threats.
  • Capacity Building Initiatives: Emphasizing the importance of skill enhancement, the mission prioritizes capacity building across sectors in epidemiology, data analytics, and laboratory management.
    • Training programs ensure that professionals possess the necessary skills to effectively utilize new technologies and methodologies.

Conclusion

The concept of One Health transcends mere disease management, encompassing broader realms such as antimicrobial resistance, food safety, plant diseases, and the consequential impacts of climate change. Addressing intersectoral issues like One Health necessitates active involvement not only from diverse governmental agencies but also from non-governmental organizations, academia, the private sector, and ordinary citizens. By adopting an actionable framework rooted in collaboration and comprehensive engagement, we can advance toward the overarching objectives of 'One Earth, One Health' and 'Health for All.

Climate Crisis is Not Gender Neutral

  • 10 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

The climate crisis is far from “gender neutral” as women and men are affected differently by weather and climate and therefore need gender-sensitive information and services.

Context:

  • As the climate crisis intensifies, its disproportionate impact on women and girls becomes more evident, particularly in poverty-stricken regions.
  • This calls for a critical examination of the gender dimensions of climate change, recognizing women's increased vulnerabilities and the importance of incorporating gender perspectives in climate action strategies.
  • By doing so, we can develop effective solutions that address the unique challenges faced by women, ensuring a more equitable and sustainable approach to climate change mitigation and adaptation.

How Does Climate Change Impact Women?

  • Rural Livelihood Dependence on Agriculture: In many regions, particularly rural India, women play a central role in agricultural activities, forming the backbone of their communities' livelihoods.
    • However, the effects of climate change, such as erratic rainfall, droughts, and floods, pose significant threats to crop yields, directly impacting food security and income for these women.
    • Compounded by limited access to essential resources like land, credit, and technology, women face heightened vulnerabilities in navigating climate-related risks.
  • Health Risks Amplified by Climate Hazards: Women's health is uniquely susceptible to the challenges posed by climate change.
    • For instance, prolonged heatwaves increase the risk of complications during pregnancy, including preterm birth and eclampsia.
    • Moreover, exposure to indoor and outdoor air pollution exacerbates respiratory and cardiovascular diseases among women and unborn children, compromising their well-being.
  • Gender Dynamics in Extreme Weather Events: The rise in the frequency of extreme weather events, such as floods, droughts, and cyclones, has profound implications, particularly for vulnerable populations.
    • Reports highlight that a significant portion of Indian districts are susceptible to such disasters, placing women and children at heightened risk.
    • Emerging studies underscore a concerning correlation between these natural calamities and incidents of gender-based violence against women.
    • Additionally, disruptions in water access due to climate-induced changes affect women's ability to engage in productive activities and access healthcare, intensifying their workload and compromising their overall welfare.
  • Nutritional Challenges and Early Marriage: In regions prone to drought, women and girls face heightened risks of undernutrition due to food insecurity.
    • Data indicates that women residing in these areas are more likely to experience underweight conditions and are at a higher risk of entering early marriages, perpetuating cycles of poverty and gender inequality.

How to Empower Women in Climate Action?

  • Rich Tradition of Environmental Stewardship: Throughout history, women have been integral to environmental conservation efforts.
    • Across various communities, they serve as primary custodians of natural resources, managing land, water, and forests with a deep-rooted understanding of sustainability.
    • Their traditional knowledge and practices are invaluable assets for fostering biodiversity conservation and promoting climate-resilient agricultural techniques.
  • Boosting Agricultural Productivity and Food Security: Providing women farmers with equitable access to resources such as land, credit, and agricultural inputs unleashes their potential to enhance agricultural productivity and adapt to climate change.
    • Research indicates that closing the gender gap in agriculture could significantly increase crop yields and bolster food security.
    • Women's innate connection to smallholder farming systems enables them to innovate with cost-effective, environmentally friendly farming methods, thereby fostering resilience in agricultural practices.
  • Key Players in Local Adaptation Strategies: Women are pivotal to the success of community-based adaptation efforts, which prioritize building resilience to climate change at the grassroots level.
    • Through women's groups and collectives like Self-Help Groups (SHGs) and Farmer Producer Organizations (FPOs), communities mobilize, share knowledge, and implement adaptation measures.
    • These grassroots initiatives empower women to advocate for their rights in decision-making processes concerning natural resource management and climate resilience.
  • Inspiring Role Models and Catalysts for Change: Women leaders in climate action serve as inspirations and role models, paving the way for future generations of environmentalists and activists.
    • Their prominence in climate solutions not only challenges gender norms but also encourages greater participation of women and girls in STEM fields and environmental leadership roles.
    • By highlighting women's contributions to climate action, these role models empower others to pursue careers and opportunities in climate science, policy, and advocacy, fostering a more inclusive and impactful approach to addressing climate change.

Action Needed to Address the Gender Implications of Climate Change:

  • Immediate Protection Against Health Risks: Swift action is imperative to safeguard vulnerable populations, such as pregnant women, outdoor laborers, children, and the elderly, from health risks exacerbated by extreme weather events like heat waves.
    • Local authorities must develop and implement comprehensive heatwave response plans, incorporating early warning systems, establishing cooling centers, and adapting work and school schedules to mitigate heat-related illnesses and fatalities.
  • Improved Access to Safe Drinking Water: Climate-induced disruptions to water sources escalate water scarcity and endanger public health.
    • Immediate interventions are essential to enhance access to safe drinking water, particularly for women and girls responsible for water collection in many communities.
    • Investments in water infrastructure, rainwater harvesting systems, and water purification technologies are vital to alleviate the impacts of water scarcity on vulnerable populations.
  • Climate-Resilient Urban Planning: Urban areas face escalating vulnerabilities to climate-related hazards, including heatwaves, flooding, and air pollution.
    • Urban planning strategies emphasizing green infrastructure—such as parks, green roofs, and tree-lined streets—can mitigate the urban heat island effect and minimize exposure to extreme temperatures.
    • Moreover, measures to enhance air quality, like reducing vehicular emissions and promoting clean energy technologies, are crucial for safeguarding public health, particularly for women and children susceptible to respiratory and cardiovascular diseases.
  • Community-Centered Adaptation Efforts: Community-based adaptation initiatives, engaging local communities, including women's groups and grassroots organizations, are pivotal in bolstering resilience to climate change at the grassroots level.
    • These initiatives should prioritize the needs and aspirations of women and marginalized groups, empowering them in decision-making processes regarding adaptation planning and implementation.
    • Investments in building the capacity of local institutions and community leaders can amplify the efficacy and sustainability of adaptation endeavors.
  • Gender-Inclusive Climate Policies: National and sub-national climate policies must integrate gender-responsive approaches tailored to the distinct needs and priorities of women and girls.
    • Recognizing women as agents of change and empowering their participation in climate decision-making at all levels is essential.
    • Gender mainstreaming in climate policies ensures inclusivity, equity, and effectiveness in tackling the underlying drivers of vulnerability and inequality.

Conclusion

The disparities and vulnerabilities experienced by women and girls underscore the urgent need for inclusive and gender-responsive strategies in climate adaptation and mitigation endeavors.

By empowering women, we not only bolster resilience but also unlock innovative solutions crucial for combating the climate crisis. Thus, the integration of gender perspectives into climate action plans is imperative for forging a sustainable and equitable future for all

Indian Aviation, A Case of Air Safety at a Discount

  • 09 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

The government introduced revised Flight Duty Time Limitations (FDTL) Regulations, set to be implemented on June 1, 2024, but faced opposition from airline owners, prompting the DGCA to indefinitely defer the deadline.

Context:

  • The aviation sector in India faces a pivotal moment, balancing rapid growth with pressing safety issues.
  • The remarks from the Union Minister and the DGCA, highlighting safety as paramount, seem at odds with ongoing safety lapses.
  • Given the significance of safety measures, it's imperative to examine safety protocols, parameters, challenges, and regulatory shortcomings.

Key Provisions in the Revised FDTL Regulations of January 2024:

  • Extended Weekly Rest Periods for flight crew: The revised regulations mandate increased weekly rest periods from 36 hours to 48 hours for flight crew, thus ensuring sufficient time for recovery from cumulative fatigue.
  • Night Duty: The definition of night has been amended, and it now covers the period of 0000-0600 hours in the revised regulations vis-à-vis the period of 0000-0500 hours under the previous regulations.
    • This enhancement of one hour during the early morning will ensure adequate rest and also align the night duty period, which encompasses the Window of Circadian Low (WOCL) from 0200-0600 hours, i.e. the time during which the circadian body clock cycle is at its lowest in terms of alertness.
  • Maximum Flight Time, Maximum Flight Duty Periods, and Number of Landings during Night: The revised regulations have taken into consideration different types of operations across time zones.
    • The maximum flight time & maximum flight duty period for flight operations encroaching night have been restricted to 8 hours flight time & 10 hours flight duty period, respectively, and the number of landings has been limited to only two landings as compared to the maximum permissible 6 landings under previous regulations during night operations, thus enhancing flight safety.
  • Quarterly fatigue reports: In addition, DGCA has mandated that all airline operators submit quarterly fatigue reports after analysis, including the Action Taken on such reports.
    • Further, it has been stipulated that the fatigue reports shall follow a non-punitive and confidentiality policy.

What is the Fatigue Risk Management System (FRMS)?

  • The Directorate General of Civil Aviation (DGCA) is preparing to introduce a novel approach, known as the Fatigue Risk Management System (FRMS), to handle fatigue among flight crew.
  • The recent revision of Flight Duty Time Limitation (FDTL) regulations marks the initial phase of FRMS implementation in India.
  • FRMS represents a data-driven strategy aimed at enhancing the monitoring and documentation of flight crew fatigue.
  • The successful integration of FRMS hinges upon collaborative efforts from various stakeholders within the aviation sector, including regulators, airline operators, and flight crew, who must demonstrate readiness to embrace this new framework.
  • This transition necessitates rigorous oversight, meticulous record-keeping, and comprehensive reporting to uphold compliance with the FRMS framework.

The Imperative for Implementing Fatigue Risk Management System (FRMS):

  • The International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) has mandated the adoption of the Fatigue Risk Management System (FRMS) to address safety concerns.
  • Extensive analysis of accidents and serious incidents attributed to fatigue has underscored the critical role of adequate rest and sleep deprivation in impairing pilots' reaction times.
    • Countries like Japan, Singapore, and the United Kingdom prioritize flight crew fatigue management and emphasize regular rest periods to mitigate cumulative fatigue.
    • These nations implement a system where pilots receive two days off each week to reset their circadian rhythm and recuperate from prolonged flying hours, with additional rest upon returning from long-haul flights.
  • In contrast, existing Flight Duty Time Limitation (FDTL) regulations afford pilots only 30 days of annual leave and one day off per week, which pales in comparison to the leisure time granted to ground personnel.
  • Airline schedules often overlook human performance limitations, neglecting the fact that pilots, like any other individuals, require time with their families.
    • Thus, providing two days off per week is essential for maintaining a healthy work-life balance.

Other concerns in the aviation sector:

  • Runway End Safety Area (RESA): The absence of RESA at Kozhikode's Karipur airport has sparked warnings from the Minister for Civil Aviation about compromised passenger safety.
    • Recommended by the Aircraft Accident Investigation Bureau following a 2020 air crash, the Ministry has threatened to curtail runway length unless land is handed over to the Airports Authority of India (AAI).
    • As of April 2024, no land has been provided, and flights remain unrestricted.
  • Utilization of Pilots and Adherence to Safety Regulations: While the Directorate General of Civil Aviation (DGCA) sets minimum crew requirements, airlines can opt for lower flight time and duty hours.
    • Large aircraft orders often adhere to DGCA Civil Aviation Requirements for scheduled transport, which only specifies the minimum crew requirement.
    • The crew requirement would more than double under the Flight Duty Time Limitations (FDTL) CAR, but the DGCA does not monitor crew numbers based on these requirements.
    • This is primarily due to the potential impact of positive media coverage and the reputation of India's aviation industry.
  • Financial Stress on Pilots: Financial stress has been identified as a contributing factor to aircraft crashes, such as the Silkair crash in 1997 and the Egyptair crash in 1999.
    • However, authorities in India often fail to adequately address the dangers of financial stress among pilots.
    • A prime example is the recent merger of Vistara with Air India, where Vistara copilots faced a significant pay cut upon losing their command position, leading to increased financial strain.

Way Forward:

  • Implementing ICAO Annex 1 Standards: A crucial step towards a more robust aviation sector involves adopting the International Civil Aviation Organization's (ICAO) Annex 1 standards, facilitating the recognition of foreign licenses and issuance of Indian licenses based on specific criteria.
    • This streamlined process can attract experienced pilots, addressing shortages and elevating workforce competency.
  • Harnessing Retired Pilots' Expertise: Utilizing retired pilots in training roles, particularly within simulator training centers, allows India to tap into their valuable experience and knowledge to mentor the next generation of aviators.
    • By addressing training gaps and bolstering proficiency standards, this initiative enhances safety outcomes while supporting the professional growth of aspiring pilots.
  • Strengthening Monitoring and Compliance: Regulatory bodies, such as the Directorate General of Civil Aviation (DGCA), should fortify their monitoring mechanisms to ensure adherence to Flight Duty Time Limitations (FDTL) regulations and crew staffing requirements.
    • This vigilance aids in identifying instances of non-compliance, mitigating fatigue-related risks, and fostering collaboration with airlines to manage crew resources effectively.
  • Cultivating a Safety-Oriented Culture: Promoting a safety culture within the aviation industry is vital for achieving sustainable safety outcomes.
    • Stakeholders should prioritize safety initiatives, invest in training programs, and encourage open communication channels for reporting concerns.
    • This collaborative approach nurtures a safety-focused environment that benefits all parties and strengthens the overall aviation landscape.

Conclusion

The postponement of fatigue management regulations underscores the complexities of balancing safety concerns with commercial interests within India's aviation industry. To safeguard both flight safety and crew welfare, regulatory authorities must prioritize the implementation of rigorous fatigue management protocols and withstand industry pressures that jeopardize safety standards. It is only through a unified commitment to rectifying regulatory deficiencies and cultivating a culture of safety that India's aviation sector can maintain the utmost standards of flight safety and operational proficiency.

Shaping India’s path to inclusive health care

  • 08 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

World Health Day, which is observed every year on April 7, unites us around health equity, an essential topic at the heart of global health and justice.

Context:

  • World Health Day, commemorated every April 7th, underscores the significance of health equity, acknowledged as a basic human entitlement by the World Health Organization (WHO).
  • Hence, it is imperative to delve into the theme "My Health, My Right," delving into the hurdles and remedies in attaining health equity in India.
  • As a country contending with multifaceted socioeconomic inequalities in healthcare access and results, this exploration becomes pivotal.

What is Health Equity?

  • Health equity, as outlined by the WHO, embodies the principle that every person should have the opportunity to attain optimal health, irrespective of their social, economic, or environmental circumstances.
  • It extends beyond mere healthcare access, addressing underlying factors such as poverty, discrimination, and resource imbalances.
  • Considering Diverse Health Outcomes: A core tenet of health equity acknowledges that health results stem from a multifaceted interplay of elements, encompassing social, economic, and environmental determinants.
    • Individuals from disadvantaged backgrounds often encounter obstacles like financial constraints, transportation limitations, and sparse healthcare facilities.
  • The Vitality of Health Equity: Health equity holds paramount importance not only ethically but also from a public health standpoint.
    • Research consistently indicates that societies fostering greater health equity typically enjoy superior health outcomes, marked by lower morbidity and mortality rates, reduced healthcare expenditures, and heightened life expectancy.
    • Conversely, persistent health disparities may precipitate societal unrest, economic strains, and a squandered human potential.

Health Equity Challenges in India:

  • Addressing Urban-Rural Disparities: India contends with pronounced healthcare inequalities between urban and rural regions, where urban areas typically boast superior healthcare infrastructure and services, while rural communities encounter obstacles like limited access to facilities, healthcare professionals, and infrastructure, resulting in inferior health outcomes compared to their urban counterparts.
  • Navigating Overcrowded Urban Slums: Urban slums present profound challenges characterized by extreme poverty, overcrowding, unsanitary conditions, and inadequate access to clean water, fostering the spread of infectious diseases and escalating morbidity and mortality rates.
    • Moreover, deficient healthcare infrastructure exacerbates health disparities as residents grapple with limited access to essential services.
  • Tackling Socioeconomic and Caste Disparities: Marginalized groups, including Scheduled Castes, Scheduled Tribes, and economically disadvantaged populations, confront elevated rates of illness and death due to restricted healthcare access, diminished health literacy, and societal prejudice.
    • These disparities intertwine with broader determinants like education, employment, and housing, perpetuating disparities in health outcomes.
  • Confronting the Burden of Non-Communicable Diseases (NCDs): Non-communicable diseases (NCDs) such as cardiovascular ailments, diabetes, and cancer pose a mounting challenge to health equity in India, constituting a substantial portion of the disease burden.
    • However, marginalized communities often face barriers to accessing preventive measures and NCD treatment, amplifying health inequalities and exacerbating existing socioeconomic gaps.
  • Navigating Shortages in Healthcare Personnel: A severe shortage of healthcare professionals, with only 0.8 doctors per 1,000 individuals according to WHO data, exacerbates health challenges, particularly in rural areas where access to primary care is limited, resulting in delayed diagnoses, substandard treatment, and compromised health outcomes.
  • Confronting Infrastructure and Resource Limitations: Inadequate healthcare infrastructure, insufficient funding, and resource limitations pose formidable obstacles to health equity in India, with many public facilities lacking essential equipment, medications, and skilled personnel.
    • Furthermore, the unequal distribution of resources aggravates urban-rural healthcare disparities, exacerbating inequities in access to quality healthcare services.

Strategies and Measures to Advance Health Equity in India:

  • Enhancing Primary Healthcare Services: A pivotal approach to fostering health equity in India involves bolstering primary healthcare provisions, especially in rural and marginalized regions.
    • This entails augmenting the accessibility and availability of primary care facilities, fortifying the skills and capabilities of frontline healthcare personnel, and ensuring the delivery of essential health services encompassing preventive care, maternal and child healthcare, and management of chronic ailments.
    • Initiatives such as the National Rural Health Mission (NRHM) and the National Urban Health Mission (NUHM) strive to extend primary healthcare access and mitigate healthcare disparities between urban and rural locales.
  • Advocating for Universal Health Coverage: Universal health coverage (UHC) stands as a cornerstone in ensuring equitable access to indispensable healthcare services devoid of financial strains.
    • Endeavors like Ayushman Bharat, India's flagship health insurance program, aspire to furnish financial safeguarding to vulnerable segments by offering comprehensive coverage for hospitalization expenses.
    • By broadening the reach of quality healthcare services and alleviating out-of-pocket costs, UHC endeavors to redress discrepancies in healthcare accessibility and enhance health outcomes for all citizens.
  • Targeting Social Determinants of Health: Attaining health equity mandates a multifaceted approach that transcends healthcare interventions to address the underlying social determinants of health, encompassing poverty, education, housing, and employment.
    • Initiatives geared towards poverty mitigation, augmenting educational and sanitation access, and fostering livelihood opportunities can wield a transformative impact on health outcomes and help ameliorate health disparities.
    • Programs like the Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA) furnish rural households with employment prospects, thereby fostering enhanced socioeconomic circumstances and superior health outcomes.
  • Empowering through Health Literacy: Elevating health literacy assumes paramount significance in empowering individuals to make informed health decisions and pursue equitable healthcare access.
    • Integration of health education within prevailing healthcare schemes can heighten public consciousness and advocate for preventive healthcare practices.
  • Fostering Collaborative Endeavors: Efficacious collaboration among governmental bodies, civil society, healthcare providers, and international entities constitutes a linchpin in addressing health inequities.
    • By harnessing their respective competencies and resources, these stakeholders can conceptualize culturally sensitive health initiatives tailored to the distinctive requisites of diverse communities.

Conclusion

Realizing health equity in India necessitates coordinated endeavors spanning various sectors and involving diverse stakeholders. Through targeted interventions addressing socioeconomic health determinants, bolstering healthcare infrastructure, and fostering collaborative alliances, India can progress towards a future where equitable access to superior healthcare becomes a universal norm. The pursuit of health equity transcends moral imperatives, emerging as a pivotal prerequisite for fostering sustainable development and societal advancement.

India Planning to Adopt ‘Living Wage’ Instead of ‘Minimum Wage’ by 2025

  • 06 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

India is reportedly poised to replace the minimum wage with the living wage system, with the transition anticipated to occur by next year.

Context:

  • India is reportedly considering shifting from the minimum wage to the living wage by 2025.
  • India has approached the International Labour Organization (ILO) to help it chalk out a framework to assess and operationalize the living wages.
  • India has asked the ILO to help it in “capacity building, systemic collection of data and evidence of the positive economic outcomes resulting from the implementation of living wages”.
    • Earlier in March, the United Nations agency forged an agreement on the living wage, which was also endorsed by its governing body.
  • India, a founding member of the ILO and a permanent member of its governing body since 1922, passed the Code on Wages in 2019.

What is the Current Wage System in India?

  • National Floor Level Minimum Wage (NFLMW): Established under the Code on Wages 2019, the NFLMW is determined by the government, requiring establishments to set minimum wages not below this level.
  • Flexibility in Minimum Wage Standards: Section 5 of the Code on Wages 2019 prohibits employers from setting wages below the NFLMW, though states have the discretion to revise minimum wage rates as needed.
  • Presently, the National Floor Wage stands at Rs 178 per day.

What’s a Living Wage?

  • The International Labour Organization (ILO) defines the living wage as the level of remuneration “necessary to afford a decent standard of living for workers and their families, taking into account the country's circumstances and calculated for the work performed during the normal hours of work”.
  • This decent standard of living includes being able to afford food, water, housing, education, healthcare, transportation, clothing, and other basic needs including a provision for contingencies, says the Global Living Wage Coalition.
  • The goal of a living wage is to ensure the employees get an income enough for satisfactory living standards as well as reduce poverty.

What is Minimum Wage?

  • Minimum wage refers to the legally mandated lowest level of compensation that employers must pay employees for their work over a specified period.
  • While minimum wage endeavors to prevent low pay, living wage extends beyond by ensuring income is adequate to meet necessities like food, shelter, clothing, and other essentials, addressing the risk of workers falling below the poverty line despite earning minimum wages.
  • In India, minimum wage calculation factors in variables such as the state of employment, the skill level of the worker, the nature of their job, and other pertinent factors.

Living Wage vs Minimum Wage:

  • Definition: A living wage is the income required to meet basic needs and maintain a decent standard of living, while minimum wage is the lowest legally mandated compensation for workers.
  • Purpose: A living wage seeks to address the risk of workers falling below the poverty line, while minimum wage aims to prevent low pay.
  • Mandatory vs Voluntary: Minimum wages are legally required, whereas living wages are voluntary unless the government sets the minimum wage at the living wage level.
  • Calculation: Living wages consider basic necessities and a decent standard of living, while minimum wages factor in variables like skill level, state of employment, and job nature.

Pros and Cons of Living Wages:

  • Living wage is a divisive issue. Proponents of the living wage say people get paid more, leading to a rise in employee satisfaction.
  • A boost in employee morale is likely to result in higher productivity.
  • It also saves recruitment and training costs for companies as employee turnover falls.
  • On the other hand, critics of the concept say companies may cut back on hiring if forced to pay increased wages, creating more job losses.
  • Opponents also argue that imposing a living wage means creating a wage floor, which would hurt the economy by impacting businesses, especially those that cannot pay hiked salaries.

How Does Living Wage Benefit India?

  • India has over 500 million (50-crore) workers, of which 90 percent are in the unorganized sector, noted ET.
  • The national floor level minimum wage (NFLMW) – an amount below which no state government can fix the minimum wage – was Rs 178 per day or more depending on the location in 2023.
    • This was set at Rs 176 per day in 2017 and has not been changed since then.
  • Currently, some states pay workers in the unorganized sector even below the NFLMW.
  • The Code on Wages, 2019 was passed by Parliament states that the minimum wage cannot be fixed below the national wage floor.
  • However, this code, which is binding on all states, is yet to be implemented.
  • If India replaces the minimum wages with living wages, workers are expected to earn more.
  • According to the ILO, the living wage has to be calculated following its principles and wage-setting process.

Conclusion

India's pursuit of the Sustainable Development Goals by 2030 hinges on strategic shifts, such as transitioning from minimum to living wages, to uplift millions from poverty while safeguarding their welfare. This is particularly pertinent against the backdrop of escalating income inequality, highlighting the imperative for a revamped wage system. As poverty rates decline yet inequality persists, a more equitable approach to wages becomes paramount, underscoring India's commitment to inclusive growth and social justice.

International Labor Organization (ILO):

  • The International Labor Organization (ILO) is a specialized agency of the United Nations, founded in 1919 to promote social and economic justice through the establishment of international labor standards.
  • The ILO operates with a unique tripartite structure, allowing governments, employers, and workers to engage in dialogue and decision-making on labor matters.

Key Roles and Functions:

  • Setting International Standards: The ILO develops and adopts international labor standards in the form of conventions and recommendations, covering areas such as freedom of association, collective bargaining, child labor, forced labor, and non-discrimination.
  • Technical Assistance and Capacity Building: The organization provides support to member states in enhancing their labor administration, labor inspection, employment policies, and social protection systems.
  • Monitoring and Supervision: The ILO monitors the application of international labor standards in member states, offering guidance and assistance in their implementation.
  • Research and Knowledge Sharing: The organization conducts research, collects data, and disseminates information on labor-related topics, facilitating evidence-based policy-making and dialogue.
  • The ILO plays a critical role in promoting decent work, social justice, and labor rights worldwide, fostering cooperation among its 187 member states to address labor-related challenges and achieve sustainable development.
  • The ILO headquarters are located in Geneva (Switzerland).

How the Government Can Generate Employment Through Universal Healthcare

  • 05 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

As India approaches the 2024 elections, highlighting healthcare as a strategic investment rather than a fiscal burden can drive employment generation, bolster economic growth, and foster sustainable development.

Context:

  • With India gearing up for the upcoming general elections, recognizing healthcare as a crucial investment for national well-being and prosperity is essential.
  • Despite its pivotal role, healthcare tends to be sidelined in political discussions, necessitating a shift in focus.
  • Rather than perceiving healthcare as a financial burden, it should be considered a strategic investment.
  • Embracing healthcare as an investment offers substantial returns, contributing to human capital development, economic progress, and sustainable development.

What is Universal Health Care (UHC)?

  • Universal Health Care (UHC) embodies the principle that everyone should have access to quality healthcare regardless of financial situation.
  • It is regarded as a fundamental measure for promoting human equity, security, and dignity.
  • UHC has gained widespread acceptance as a primary goal of public policy globally, with numerous countries successfully implementing it, including wealthier nations and emerging economies like Brazil, China, Sri Lanka, and Thailand.
  • World Health Organization (WHO) defines universal healthcare as “all people and communities can use the promotive, preventive, curative, rehabilitative and palliative health services they need, of sufficient quality to be effective, while also ensuring that the use of these services does not expose the user to financial hardship.”

Challenges in Implementing Universal Health Care (UHC):

  • Inequitable Access to Health Insurance: Disparities in health insurance coverage persist, with the lowest wealth quintile and marginalized sections facing limited access to insurance, as indicated by NFHS-5 results.
  • Lack of Financial Protection: Despite initiatives like Janani Shishu Suraksha Karyakram, high out-of-pocket expenses, especially in urban areas, pose financial risks. NFHS data highlights significant disparities in expenditure across states.
  • Inclusion and Exclusion Errors in Health Insurance Policies: Inaccuracies in health insurance policies, including PMJAY, lead to the inclusion of ineligible and exclusion of eligible households, affecting coverage effectiveness.
  • Availability of Services: While PMJAY enlists hospitals, a significant portion is in the private for-profit sector, potentially limiting access to underserved areas.
  • Inadequate Infrastructure: Insufficient healthcare facilities, equipment, and medical supplies hinder UHC implementation, compounded by a shortage of specialists in CHCs.
  • Poor Health Education: Limited awareness about preventive health measures contributes to preventable illnesses, emphasizing the need for improved health education and promotion.

Steps For Achieving Universal Health Care (UHC):

  • Increase in Public Health Expenditure: Commitment to allocate 2.5% of GDP to health by 2025 is crucial.
    • However, the current central budget allocation for 2024-25 falls short at 28%.
  • Strategic Partnerships: The government must forge partnerships and incentivize the private sector to bridge healthcare gaps.
    • Initiatives like Ayushman Bharat Pradhan Mantri Jan Arogya Yojana (AB-PMJAY) illustrate this collaborative approach, covering over 60 crore people.
  • Reimbursement Rates Correction: Private sector participation is hindered by low reimbursement rates.
    • Differential pricing based on clinical excellence and infrastructure investment can encourage participation.
  • Infrastructure Development: Addressing the deficit of nearly 24 lakh hospital beds requires increased private sector investment, especially in tier 2 and 3 cities.
  • National Priority Status for Healthcare: Designating healthcare as a national priority sector can unlock funding opportunities and incentives, fostering growth and development.
  • Strengthening Primary Healthcare: Enhancing Health and Wellness Centers and including OPD care in health insurance coverage will improve health outcomes and reduce secondary and tertiary care burdens.
  • Prevention and Control of NCDs: Prioritizing interventions at the primary healthcare level can significantly reduce the burden of non-communicable diseases, preventing complications and hospitalizations.
  • Boosting Private Investment: Encourage and incentivize private sector investment in healthcare infrastructure, technology, and services to expand coverage and enhance healthcare accessibility and affordability for all citizens.

How Government can Generate Employment Through UHC in India?

Expanding the Healthcare Workforce: Universal healthcare will significantly increase the demand for healthcare professionals, creating millions of new jobs. This includes doctors, nurses, paramedics, technicians, pharmacists, and other support staff. The government can address this need by:

  • Scaling Up Medical Education: Increased investment in medical colleges and nursing schools is crucial.
    • This includes establishing new institutions, expanding existing ones, and introducing scholarship programs to attract talent.
    • Standards for medical education must be maintained to ensure a high-quality workforce.
  • Skill Development Initiatives: Developing a robust skill development ecosystem specific to healthcare is essential.
    • This involves creating standardized training programs for various healthcare professions.
    • Skill development should not be limited to clinical skills but also encompass areas like communication, empathy, and public health awareness.
  • Attracting and Retaining Talent: Competitive salaries, loan repayment programs, and career progression opportunities can incentivize students to pursue healthcare careers.
    • Additionally, considering the rural-urban divide, special incentives like higher pay and improved living conditions can attract healthcare professionals to serve in underserved areas.

Building a Robust Healthcare Infrastructure: Universal healthcare necessitates a well-developed healthcare infrastructure. This translates to significant job creation across various sectors:

  • Infrastructure Development: Building new hospitals, clinics, diagnostic centers, and public health centers requires construction workers, engineers, architects, and technicians.
  • Medical Equipment Manufacturing: Increased demand for medical equipment, from basic diagnostic tools to advanced technology, can incentivize local manufacturing.
    • This can create numerous jobs in production, maintenance, and research & development.
  • Pharmaceutical Industry: Universal healthcare will significantly raise the demand for pharmaceuticals.
    • This can boost domestic production, generating jobs in manufacturing, distribution, and research & development.

The Role of Public-Private Partnerships (PPPs):

  • The government cannot shoulder the entire responsibility alone. PPPs can play a vital role in expanding healthcare infrastructure and creating job opportunities:
  • Strategic Partnerships: Collaboration with private hospitals and clinics can leverage existing infrastructure and expertise.
    • The government can purchase services from the private sector, ensuring wider reach and quality care, while creating jobs within these institutions.
  • Incentivizing Expansion: Tax breaks, subsidies, and streamlined licensing processes can incentivize private players to expand their facilities and hire more staff.
    • This creates a multiplier effect, leading to job creation in construction, logistics, and other associated sectors.

Technology and its Role in Employment: Technology holds immense potential to improve healthcare delivery and create new job opportunities:

  • Telehealth and Digital Health Records: Investment in telemedicine infrastructure and digital health records can create jobs in IT, data management, and cybersecurity.
    • Additionally, telemedicine can bridge the gap in rural healthcare, requiring trained personnel to operate these services.
  • Medical Informatics: The use of big data and analytics in healthcare will require skilled professionals to collect, analyze, and interpret data to improve healthcare delivery and outcomes.

Conclusion

Universal healthcare in India can be a transformative force, not just for public health, but also for the nation's economic landscape. By strategically investing in workforce development, fostering public-private partnerships, and embracing technological advancements, India can unlock a vast employment potential. This not only creates a win-win for job creation and healthcare access but also paves the way for a healthier and more prosperous future for all Indians.

India's Declining Fertility Rate: Unveiling Opportunities Amidst Change

  • 04 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

The projection by the UN Population Division is that India will have a population of close to 1.7 billion by 2065 before it starts declining.

Context:

  • In recent findings, The Lancet has projected a decline in India's Total Fertility Rate (TFR) to 1.29 by 2051, contrasting with the government's technical group estimate of 1.94 for 2021-2025, and 1.73 for 2031-2035.
  • Additionally, the UN Population Division predicts India's population will be near 1.7 billion by 2065, surpassing The Lancet's projections.
  • These diverging forecasts suggest that India's population may stabilize below 1.7 billion well before 2065.

Insights into Demographic Projections:

  • According to the UN Population Division, India is expected to approach a population of nearly 1.7 billion by 2065, followed by stabilization. In contrast, The Lancet report forecasts a decline in the total fertility rate (TFR) to 1.29 by 2051.
  • These projections signal a significant evolution in India's population dynamics, suggesting broader implications beyond population size.
  • Government projections and data from NFHS 5 further corroborate this trend, indicating a declining trajectory in the TFR and hinting at the possibility of population stabilization occurring sooner than expected.

Implications of Decreasing Total Fertility Rate (TFR):

  • Economic Impact: The decline in TFR alters the age distribution, resulting in fewer children and more working-age adults.
    • Initially, this demographic shift presents an economic opportunity, fostering growth through increased productivity and surplus income.
  • Dependency Ratio: A reduced TFR lowers the dependency ratio, lessening the burden on the working-age population to support dependents.
    • This enhances economic productivity and allows for better resource allocation towards development endeavors.
    • However, aging populations may necessitate adjustments in healthcare and social welfare policies.
  • Labour Market Dynamics: Demographic changes influence employment patterns and wage structures.
    • A larger working-age cohort relative to dependents may increase labor supply, affecting wage levels.
    • Shifts from agriculture to other sectors may alter employment opportunities and skill requirements.
  • Social Welfare and Healthcare: Aging populations due to declining fertility rates require tailored social welfare and healthcare services.
    • This includes pension schemes, long-term care facilities, and healthcare programs addressing age-related ailments, essential for ensuring the well-being of the elderly.
  • Education and Human Capital: Decreasing TFR reduces the demand for primary and secondary education infrastructure.
    • However, investments in higher education and skill development become crucial to equip the smaller cohort of young adults with the necessary skills for a competitive workforce.

How India’s Decreasing Fertility Rate Poses Advantages:

  • Enhanced Labor Productivity: A declining total fertility rate (TFR) results in a demographic dividend, with a larger proportion of the population in the working-age bracket compared to dependents.
    • This surplus labor force can drive heightened productivity across various sectors, fostering innovation, specialization, and overall economic growth.
  • Capital Accumulation and Investment: Lower fertility rates prompt households to channel more resources towards the education and well-being of fewer children.
    • This leads to increased savings and investment at the household level, facilitating capital formation and investments in critical areas such as infrastructure, technology, and human capital.
  • Efficient Resource Allocation: Decreasing TFR necessitates a shift in resource allocation away from childcare and education expenses for larger families towards investments in education, skill development, and healthcare for a smaller number of children.
    • This reallocation optimizes the utilization of public funds and private investments, fostering human capital development and long-term productivity gains.
  • Regional Development and Urbanization: Declining fertility rates often coincide with urbanization and regional development, with urban centers emerging as economic hubs.
    • The concentration of populations in urban areas promotes economies of scale, knowledge sharing, and networking opportunities, stimulating entrepreneurship and industry growth.
  • International Competitiveness: A transition to lower fertility rates enhances a nation’s international competitiveness by cultivating a younger, better-educated workforce.
    • Such a workforce is more adept at adapting to technological advancements, competing in global markets, and attracting foreign investment.
    • Additionally, a favorable demographic profile can strengthen a country’s creditworthiness, investor confidence, and long-term economic resilience.

Way Forward:

  • Empowering Women and Marginalized Communities: Prioritize skill development initiatives, especially targeting women and underprivileged groups, to adapt to demographic shifts.
    • While declining fertility rates may ease pressure on educational systems, efforts must focus on reducing dropout rates in higher education and promoting women's workforce participation.
  • Sectoral and Geographical Workforce Redistribution: Respond to workforce transitions from agriculture to industrial and service sectors by implementing skill development programs, particularly for marginalized populations.
    • Facilitate spatial redistribution of labor, especially north-south migration, to balance labor markets, enhance working conditions, and promote wage equality.
  • Strengthening Healthcare Preparedness: With increasing life expectancy, anticipate challenges associated with an aging population and rising healthcare needs.
    • Develop robust healthcare infrastructure and formulate policies tailored to address the requirements of the elderly, ensuring effective utilization of the demographic dividend.

Conclusion

India stands at a crucial crossroads in its socio-economic evolution marked by its demographic transition. Addressing the challenges and opportunities inherent in this transition demands strategic policy interventions, emphasizing skill development, gender equality, labor reallocation, and healthcare readiness. By navigating this transition with foresight and flexibility, India can unlock its full potential for long-term growth and development, positioning itself effectively on the global landscape.

Ensuring Democracy: When Governments Listen to the Election Commission

  • 03 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

The Election Commission (EC) is extremely reasonable in matters that affect public welfare and the Government, and investigative agencies must respect that.

Context:

  • Recent concerns raised by two former heads of the poll panel have shed light on the actions of tax agencies during election periods.
  • In a democracy, free and fair elections are fundamental, safeguarding citizens' rights to freely choose their representatives without external pressure.
  • Given the significance of preserving the integrity of the electoral process, it is crucial to scrutinize actions that could potentially disrupt this process.
  • Such actions include the issuance of tax demands or IT notices to political parties, prompting a closer examination of precedents where the Election Commission intervened to maintain a fair and balanced electoral environment.

Impact of IT Notices on Opposition During Election Period:

  • Disruption of Level Playing Field (LPF) Through Financial Interference: The issuance of IT notices by tax agencies during election campaigns may be interpreted as efforts to undermine the democratic process by targeting specific political entities.
    • Freezing accounts, debiting funds, or issuing notices during this crucial period can significantly disrupt the financial resources and operational capacities of certain parties, thereby skewing the electoral landscape in favor of others.
    • Such interference compromises the core principles of democracy and electoral fairness, eroding public confidence in the integrity of the electoral process.
  • Influence on Voter Perception: The timing of these actions raises concerns about their potential impact on voter perceptions and election outcomes.
    • Voters may perceive such actions as politically motivated or aimed at influencing the electoral results, casting doubts on the fairness and impartiality of the electoral process.
    • Preserving the principles of neutrality, transparency, and fairness is vital in upholding democratic ideals and ensuring elections truly reflect the will of the people.
  • Operational Hurdles: Raids and enforcement activities by tax agencies pose significant operational challenges for political parties, diverting their focus and resources away from election campaigning.
    • Parties may find themselves compelled to address legal matters, respond to inquiries, and navigate tax regulations complexities, detracting from their ability to engage with voters and advocate their platforms effectively.
  • Undermining Confidence in the Electoral Process: The perception that tax agencies target specific parties or candidates during elections can undermine public trust in the fairness and impartiality of the electoral process.
    • Such actions may be viewed as politically driven attempts to sway election outcomes, fostering skepticism about the legitimacy of the electoral process and the credibility of election results.
  • Impact on Democratic Participation: Financial and operational challenges resulting from enforcement actions can discourage democratic engagement and participation among voters.
    • Perceived unfairness or bias in the electoral process may lead citizens to disengage from the democratic process, fostering disillusionment and apathy toward democratic participation.

Why Actions Against CMs, Congress Can Wait?

  • Traditionally, the Election Commission (EC) has adhered to the principle of postponing any actions that can be deferred until after the conclusion of elections.
  • It prompts a crucial question: would there be any significant harm in postponing these actions?
  • In the current scenarios involving the arrest of two chief ministers and the issuance of IT notices, including the freezing of accounts of an opposition party, delaying these actions until after the elections would likely result in no irreparable harm.
  • Conversely, proceeding with these actions during the election period could inflict irreparable damage on the two affected parties by severely hampering their electoral campaigns, both physically and financially.

Actions Taken by the Elections Commission (EC) Against Governments and Central Agencies to Preserve Level Playing Field (LPF):

  • Addressing Bias or Partiality: The EC has actively intervened to uphold fair and impartial elections, particularly in cases where central agencies faced allegations of bias or partiality.
    • During the 2019 Lok Sabha elections, the EC urged the Enforcement Directorate (ED) to maintain impartiality following complaints from opposition parties about the perceived misuse of central agencies by the ruling party.
  • Emphasizing Neutrality and Impartiality: The EC consistently underscores the principles of neutrality, impartiality, and non-discrimination in all enforcement actions during election periods.
    • Its commitment to maintaining the integrity of the electoral process is evident through its insistence on fair treatment for all parties involved.
  • Balancing Public Welfare with Electoral Neutrality: While ensuring fairness, the EC also demonstrates pragmatism in matters affecting public welfare.
    • For instance, during state elections, it permitted the Ministry of Petroleum and Natural Gas to announce a national reduction in petrol prices, deeming it beneficial to the wider public interest.
    • However, proposals such as increases in minimum support prices of certain foodgrains, perceived as potentially influencing voters, are disallowed during election periods to maintain electoral neutrality.
  • Promoting Transparency in the Electoral Environment: The EC's interventions aim to curtail the misuse of office by political leaders and ministers, fostering a transparent and equitable electoral environment.
    • The Model Code of Conduct (MCC) serves as a pivotal instrument in this endeavor, imposing restrictions on ruling parties to prevent undue advantages.
  • Providing Guidance to Political Entities: While primarily focusing on individuals, the EC also advises political parties to ensure adherence to the code of conduct.
    • For example, during overlapping budget sessions and election periods, state governments are encouraged to adopt a "vote on account" approach to avoid contravening the MCC with new schemes or projects.
  • EC's Influence in Goa By-Election, 2012: An illustrative instance of the EC's influence is its intervention in a by-election in Goa in 2012, where the Chief Minister intended to induct a probable candidate into the Council of Ministers before the election.
    • Despite possessing constitutional authority, the Chief Minister deferred the induction upon the EC's advice, acknowledging the moral authority of the Model Code of Conduct.
  • This exemplifies the delicate balance between various authorities in a parliamentary democracy, reinforcing India's electoral processes as models of integrity and fairness globally.

Conclusion

The Election Commission's proactive engagement with central agencies, advocating for the postponement of actions such as raids, freezing of accounts, and issuance of tax demands until after elections, serves as a cornerstone in upholding the principles of free and fair elections.

By intervening in such matters, the Election Commission reinforces its commitment to ensuring an impartial electoral process, reassuring voters of the integrity and fairness of elections.

Ultimately, safeguarding the integrity of elections is paramount to preserving democracy and fostering public trust in the electoral process.

Heat Waves and its Impacts in India

  • 02 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

The India Meteorological Department (IMD) has forecast a harsh and arid summer over a majority of regions of the country during April- June, with a high probability of heatwave episodes lasting as long as 10 to 20 days during the period.

Recent Prediction by India Meteorological Department (IMD):

  • Extreme Heat Outlook: India is anticipated to face extreme heat from April to June, with central and western regions likely to be most affected.
    • Expectations of 10 to 20 heatwave days across the country, exceed the normal range of four to eight days.
    • Regions including Gujarat, central Maharashtra, north Karnataka, Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh, Odisha, north Chhattisgarh, and Andhra Pradesh are forecasted to experience severe heatwaves in April.
  • Pre-Monsoon Rainfall Performance: Below-average pre-monsoon rainfall is expected this month, particularly impacting coastal, eastern, and southern India.
  • El Nino Conditions: El Nino conditions, marked by abnormal sea surface warming in the equatorial Pacific Ocean since last June, have the potential to reduce rainfall and increase temperatures, both locally in India and globally.
    • Despite El Nino conditions easing after peaking in December, persistent warm conditions continue to elevate global temperatures.
  • Recent Weather Conditions: February and March witnessed hotter-than-normal weather in southern India.
    • Heatwave conditions were reported in Maharashtra, northern Karnataka, Saurashtra-Kutch, and parts of Rajasthan during late March.
    • Maximum temperatures soared to 42.6 degrees Celsius in areas such as Akola in Maharashtra and Phalodi in Rajasthan.

What are Heat Waves?

  • Heatwaves entail prolonged periods of exceptionally hot weather, posing adverse effects on human health, the environment, and the economy.
  • Given India's tropical climate, the nation is especially susceptible to heat waves, which have witnessed increased frequency and intensity in recent times.

What is the Criterion for Declaring a Heat Wave?

For Plains and Hilly Regions:

  • Heatwave is recognized when the maximum temperature of a station reaches at least 40°C or higher for Plains and at least 30°C or higher for Hilly regions.
  • Determined based on Departure from Normal Heat Wave:
    • Departure from normal temperature ranges from 4.50°C to 6.40°C, with anything exceeding 6.40°C classified as a Severe Heat Wave.
  • Alternatively, based on Actual Maximum Temperature Heat Wave:
    • A heat wave is declared when the actual maximum temperature equals or exceeds 45°C, while a Severe Heat Wave is acknowledged if the actual maximum temperature equals or exceeds 47°C.
  • Declaration occurs when the above criteria are met in at least 2 stations within a Meteorological subdivision for a minimum of two consecutive days, with the declaration taking effect on the second day.

For Coastal Areas:

  • A heat wave may be identified when the maximum temperature departure from normal is 4.50°C or more, provided the actual maximum temperature registers at 37°C or higher.

Fatality Risk:

  • While high temperatures alone may not be lethal, it's the conjunction of elevated temperatures and humidity, known as the wet bulb temperature, that renders heatwaves perilous.
  • Increased moisture levels impede sweat evaporation and hinder body cooling mechanisms, leading to a rapid rise in internal body temperature, frequently resulting in fatal outcomes.

What are the Causes of Heatwaves?

  • Global Warming: A primary factor driving heatwaves in India is global warming, a consequence of sustained increases in Earth's average temperature linked to human activities like fossil fuel combustion, deforestation, and industrial operations.
    • Elevated temperatures and altered weather patterns can stem from this phenomenon.
  • Rapid Urbanization: Rapid urban expansion and the proliferation of urban landscapes contribute to the "urban heat island effect."
    • Urban areas, dense with population, structures, and concrete surfaces, absorb and retain heat, intensifying temperatures, particularly during heatwaves.
  • El Nino Influence: El Nino events, characterized by Pacific Ocean warming, exert global climatic impacts, triggering shifts in temperature, precipitation, and wind patterns.
    • The conclusion of a strong La Nina phase in the equatorial Pacific Ocean and the untimely onset of an El Nino event are anticipated factors contributing to the exceptionally hot forecast for the summer of 2023.

What are the Impacts?

  • Health Effects: Swift escalation in heat exposure can disrupt the body's ability to regulate temperature, resulting in various ailments such as heat cramps, heat exhaustion, heatstroke, and hyperthermia, potentially leading to fatalities or hospitalizations.
  • Water Resources Impact: Heatwaves exacerbate water scarcity issues in India, causing water bodies to dry up, diminishing water availability for agriculture and domestic use, and intensifying competition for water resources, fostering conflicts and influencing irrigation practices and water-reliant industries.
  • Energy Impact: Elevated temperatures heighten demand for cooling, straining power grids and heightening the risk of blackouts, disrupting economic operations, reducing productivity, and adversely affecting vulnerable communities without reliable access to cooling amenities during heatwaves.

How to Mitigate Extreme Heat Wave Events?

  • To mitigate the adverse effects of heat waves and climate change, a comprehensive action plan must be implemented at various levels:
  • Heat Wave Action Plan: Develop a long-term plan to protect human lives, livestock, and wildlife by prioritizing effective adaptation strategies and robust disaster management policies.
    • Ensure proper implementation of the Sendai Framework for Disaster Risk Reduction, with governments taking the lead and engaging multiple stakeholders.
  • Implementing Climate Action Plans: Commit to the National Action Plan for Climate Change (NAPCC) for inclusive growth and ecological sustainability.
    • Emphasize nature-based solutions that uphold ethical standards and promote intergenerational justice.
  • Sustainable Cooling: Adopt passive cooling technology to create naturally ventilated buildings, reducing the urban heat island effect in residential and commercial areas.
    • Consider adapting ancient Indian building designs, as recommended by the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC), to modern facilities.
  • Heatwave Mitigation Plans: Implement measures to prevent heat-related fatalities, including providing access to water, oral rehydration solutions, shade in public spaces, flexible working hours, and accommodations for outdoor workers.
    • Vigilant local administration and oversight by higher authorities are key to successful implementation.
  • By implementing these strategies and fostering collaboration among stakeholders, we can create a more resilient future that effectively addresses the challenges posed by heat waves and climate change.

Indian Meteorological Department (IMD):

  • India Meteorological Department is the country's National Meteorological Service.
  • It deals with all matters relating to meteorology, seismology, and associated subjects. 
  • IMD is headquartered in Delhi and operates hundreds of observation stations across India and Antarctica.
  • IMD units such as Forecasting Offices, Agrometeorological Advisory Service Centers, Hydro-meteorological Offices, Flood Meteorological Offices, Area Cyclone Warning Centers, and Cyclone Warning Centers are usually co-located with various observatories or meteorological centers.
  • IMD is also one of the six Regional Specialized Meteorological Centres of the World Meteorological Organization.
  • It is responsible for forecasting, naming, and distributing warnings for tropical cyclones in the Northern Indian Ocean region, including the Straits of Malacca, the Bay of Bengal, the Arabian Sea, and the Persian Gulf.
  • Nodal Ministry: Ministry of Earth Sciences of the Indian Government

India’s HIV/AIDS Response

  • 01 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

April 1, 2004, marked a significant moment in India's fight against HIV/AIDS as Free Antiretroviral Therapy (ART) was introduced for Persons Living with HIV (PLHIV).

Context:

  • April 1, 2004, stands as a landmark moment in India's approach to addressing the HIV/AIDS epidemic, as Free Antiretroviral Therapy (ART) was introduced for Persons Living with HIV (PLHIV).
  • This initiative, conceived in response to the pressing issues of access and affordability, has emerged as a crucial intervention in the fight against the disease.
  • As we commemorate this day, it is imperative to delve into the progression and significance of India's free ART program, shedding light on its transformative impact on the nation's response to the HIV/AIDS crisis.

HIV/AIDS's Emergence and Initial Challenges:

  • Inception of a Global Health Crisis: The emergence of HIV/AIDS in the early 1980s signaled the onset of a widespread health emergency with profound implications for populations worldwide.
    • Originally detected among groups in the United States, the disease swiftly traversed borders, reaching nations like India and beyond.
    • This era was characterized by uncertainty, anxiety, and a lack of comprehension regarding the novel virus, initially dubbed GRID (Gay-Related Immune Deficiency), later renamed HIV (Human Immunodeficiency Virus) and its associated illness AIDS (Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome).
  • Absence of Effective Treatments Resulting in Dire Consequences: During the initial stages of the epidemic, HIV/AIDS was synonymous with a dire prognosis, largely due to the absence of viable treatment options.
    • Marginalized communities, including men who have sex with men, intravenous drug users, and commercial sex workers, bore the brunt of the disease's impact.
    • However, as time progressed, it became evident that HIV/AIDS transcended boundaries of gender, sexual orientation, and socioeconomic status, affecting individuals from diverse backgrounds.
  • Pervasive Social Stigma: In addition to its grave health implications, HIV/AIDS precipitated significant social stigma and discrimination.
    • Individuals living with HIV/AIDS encountered marginalization, employment loss, and social exclusion from both their communities and families.
    • This pervasive stigma compounded the challenges associated with managing HIV/AIDS and impeded effective epidemic control efforts.
  • Limited Treatment Accessibility and Exorbitant Costs of Available ART: Despite the escalating recognition of HIV/AIDS as a global health threat, access to treatment remained scant, particularly in low- and middle-income nations such as India.
    • The approval of the first antiretroviral drug, AZT (zidovudine), by the US Food and Drug Administration (US FDA) in March 1987 marked a significant milestone.
    • HAART (Highly Active Antiretroviral Therapy) represented a breakthrough in disease management, combining multiple antiretroviral drugs to suppress viral replication and bolster immune response.
  • However, the exorbitant expenses associated with HAART, reaching up to $10,000 annually per patient, rendered it inaccessible to the majority of individuals living with HIV/AIDS, especially those residing in resource-constrained settings.

The Introduction of Free ART in India and its Impact:

  • In response to the pressing issues of limited access and affordability of HIV/AIDS treatment, the Indian government embarked on a significant initiative.
  • On April 1, 2004, the government initiated the provision of Free Antiretroviral Therapy (ART) for Persons Living with HIV (PLHIV).
  • The introduction of Free ART aimed to dismantle barriers to treatment and extend life-saving medication to all PLHIV, irrespective of their financial means.
  • By offering ART at no cost, the government endeavored to ensure that access to treatment would not be hindered by financial constraints, thereby addressing a crucial gap in healthcare accessibility.

Its Role in Curbing the Epidemic

  • Enhanced Treatment Accessibility: Over the past two decades, the initiative has undergone substantial expansion, witnessing a surge in the number of ART centers from less than 10 to approximately 700, catering to around 1.8 million PLHIV.
    • This proliferation has facilitated heightened treatment access for individuals living with HIV/AIDS nationwide, including those residing in remote and underserved regions.
    • A notable outcome of the Free ART endeavor has been the remarkable enhancement in health outcomes observed among PLHIV.
  • Significant Reduction in Mortality Risk and Transmission Rates: Timely and effective treatment accessibility has transfigured HIV/AIDS from a dire prognosis to a manageable chronic ailment for many.
    • By suppressing viral load and bolstering immune response, ART has not only extended the lifespan of PLHIV but also augmented their quality of life.
    • Moreover, the Free ART initiative has played a pivotal role in curbing HIV transmission rates by ensuring treatment access for PLHIV, thereby thwarting virus dissemination within communities.
    • Research indicates that efficacious ART can substantially mitigate HIV transmission risk, contributing to the overall decline in HIV prevalence.
  • Broader Societal Benefits: Beyond its direct impact on individuals grappling with HIV/AIDS, the Free ART initiative has yielded wider societal advantages.
    • By mitigating the disease burden and forestalling fresh infections, the initiative has alleviated the societal and economic repercussions of HIV/AIDS on families, communities, and healthcare systems.
  • Supplementary Measures and Patient-Centric Approach: The success of India's ART program extends beyond free medication provision.
    • Complementary initiatives, such as complimentary diagnostic services, prevention of parent-to-child transmission programs, and management of opportunistic infections, have played pivotal roles in curbing the HIV epidemic.
  • Furthermore, the program has adopted a patient-centric strategy, furnishing stable PLHIV with two to three months' worth of medicines to minimize clinic visits and enhance treatment adherence.

Challenges and Future Prospects:

  • Delayed Initiation and Attrition in Care: A notable portion of patients presents with advanced HIV illness, evidenced by low CD4 counts, impacting treatment efficacy.
    • Furthermore, attrition in care remains a concern, as some patients discontinue treatment upon feeling well, leading to interruptions and potential drug resistance development.
  • Logistical Hurdles and Infrastructure Deficiencies: Remote and underserved regions, including those with rugged terrain, encounter hurdles in accessing vital medications and healthcare provisions.
    • Fortifying the logistical network and infrastructure for dispensing ART drugs is imperative to sustain uninterrupted treatment access for all PLHIV.
  • Involvement of the Private Sector: While the public sector assumes a pivotal role in HIV/AIDS treatment provision, fostering collaboration with the private sector is crucial.
    • Leveraging the resources and infrastructure of private healthcare entities can expand ART accessibility and reach marginalized populations, including urban dwellers.
  • Interconnected Health Program Integration: Augmenting integration with other health initiatives, encompassing hepatitis, non-communicable ailments, and mental health, holds paramount importance.
    • Given PLHIV's propensity for concurrent ailments, comprehensive and integrated healthcare services necessitate intersectoral collaboration within the healthcare spectrum.
  • Realization of Ambitious NACP Phase 5 Objectives: The ongoing fifth phase of the National AIDS Control Programme (NACP) sets forth ambitious targets, envisaging an 80% reduction in annual new HIV infections and AIDS-related mortalities by 2025.
    • Achieving these milestones demands concerted endeavors to escalate testing, enhance treatment coverage, and secure viral suppression among PLHIV.

Conclusion

India's free ART initiative has successfully combated HIV/AIDS, demonstrating the power of accessible healthcare. Its achievements emphasize the importance of political will, funding, community engagement, and patient-centered care in tackling infectious diseases. Lessons from this program will guide future public health endeavors, improving outcomes for all

Prioritizing Africa in India's Global South Perspective

  • 30 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

As Africa houses three-fourths of humanity and over 39 percent of the global GDP, there's a growing call to reform existing structures towards a more inclusive and representative system focused on development.

Context:

  • President of India, Droupadi Murmu's trip to Mauritius underscored the significance of India's ties with African nations, particularly emphasizing Mauritius' role as a pivotal partner in the Indian Ocean Region.
  • This visit reflects India's expanding involvement in Africa, characterized by joint initiatives in community development and the inauguration of critical infrastructure projects.
  • As India endeavors to bolster its standing within the Global South, it becomes imperative to comprehend the diverse facets of the India-Africa relationship, analyzing the potential opportunities it offers and the necessity for enhanced collaboration.

Analyzing India's Comprehensive Engagement with Africa:

  • Investments and Trade: India's commitment to Africa is evidenced by its burgeoning investments, which soared to $98 billion in 2023, reflecting its confidence in Africa's economic potential and its dedication to nurturing enduring partnerships.
    • Bilateral trade between India and Africa has surged to $100 billion, spanning diverse sectors like agriculture, manufacturing, technology, and services, catalyzing economic growth and diversification in both regions.
  • Developmental Projects: India's involvement in Africa extends to diverse developmental initiatives, encompassing infrastructure, healthcare, education, agriculture, and renewable energy sectors.
    • By spearheading such projects, India not only fosters economic progress in Africa but also cements diplomatic ties and goodwill.
  • Export of Scalable Solutions: Drawing on its expertise in cost-effective and scalable solutions, India has played a pivotal role in addressing various challenges confronting African nations.
    • Through initiatives spanning from eco-friendly housing to solar energy technology, Indian entities contribute to poverty alleviation and sustainable development, bolstering India's reputation as a dependable partner committed to mutual progress.
  • Mutual Prosperity and Development: India and Africa mutually benefit by capitalizing on each other's strengths and resources.
    • While India's investments stimulate economic growth, generate employment, and facilitate technology transfer in Africa, African markets offer India access to vital natural resources, new markets, and strategic collaborations.
    • This symbiotic relationship fosters economic resilience, innovation, and inclusive growth in both regions.

The Strategic Significance of India's Advocacy for Africa's Representation in Global Arenas:

  • Enhancing Africa's Representation and Influence India's active advocacy for Africa's presence in global governance platforms underscores its dedication to amplifying the voices of developing nations.
    • Recognizing Africa's substantial population and economic contribution, India emphasizes the necessity of its representation for a fairer and more inclusive international system.
    • Initiatives like supporting the African Union's inclusion in the G20 highlight India's acknowledgment of Africa's pivotal role in shaping global agendas.
  • Driving Reform and Adaptation Amidst evolving global challenges, there's a growing impetus for adapting governance structures to address emerging issues and foster sustainable development.
    • India's push for Africa's participation in global forums reflects its commitment to reforming institutions like the United Nations, International Monetary Fund, and World Bank to better reflect the interests of developing nations.
  • Fostering Strategic Partnerships India's advocacy for Africa's representation in global governance is not only driven by altruism but also strategic considerations.
    • Recognizing Africa's increasing influence, India seeks to cultivate strategic partnerships with African nations to advance its global interests.
    • By supporting Africa's involvement in decision-making processes, India enhances its diplomatic influence and strengthens its position as a leading voice in the Global South.
  • Advancing Development Goals: Aligned with its broader development agenda, India's advocacy for Africa's representation in global governance focuses on priorities such as poverty alleviation, sustainable development, and inclusive growth.
    • By championing Africa's interests in international forums, India aims to address systemic inequalities and advocate for policies benefiting vulnerable populations.
    • This advocacy spans various domains, including trade, finance, climate change, and peace and security, reflecting India's commitment to fostering a more equitable world order.

Exploring India Africa's Rich Historical Bonds and Charting a Path for Future Collaboration:

  • Legacy of Colonialism and Struggle for Liberation: India's historical relationship with Africa is deeply rooted in its fight against colonialism, with both regions sharing similar experiences of exploitation and oppression under European rule.
    • India's support for African liberation movements during the colonial era solidified a bond based on shared values of freedom and sovereignty.
  • Cultural Exchange and People-to-People Connections: Centuries of interaction between Indian traders, scholars, and missionaries with African societies have left enduring cultural legacies, enriching both regions' traditions and languages.
    • Today, vibrant Indian communities contribute to Africa's cultural diversity and economic vitality, fostering mutual understanding and cooperation.
  • Commitment to Development and Capacity-Building: India's engagement with Africa in development cooperation dates back to its early days of independence, with a focus on providing technical assistance and capacity-building support.
    • Continued collaboration in sectors such as education, healthcare, agriculture, and infrastructure underscores India's enduring commitment to Africa's progress and prosperity.
  • Exploring Economic Opportunities and Innovation: With Africa emerging as a dynamic economic hub, India stands poised to deepen its economic ties by leveraging historical bonds and cultural affinities.
    • Opportunities abound for enhanced trade, investment, and technology exchange, benefiting both regions and driving sustainable development.
  • Forging Strategic Partnerships in a Changing Global Landscape: Amid geopolitical shifts, India and Africa have the chance to strengthen strategic alliances grounded in shared values and interests.
  • By aligning diplomatic efforts and leveraging their collective strengths, both regions can wield greater influence on global issues like climate change, terrorism, and pandemics, fostering a more equitable and inclusive world order.

Conclusion

The multifaceted partnership between India and Africa presents abundant prospects for economic, political, and social collaboration. In India's pursuit of leadership within the Global South, fostering closer ties with African nations emerges as imperative. Amidst the swiftly evolving global landscape, the alignment between India and Africa signifies a potential for mutual prosperity and advancement

Understanding India’s Coal Imports

  • 29 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

In recent years, the combination of unpredictable weather patterns and rapid economic growth has resulted in significant spikes in electricity demand, posing a challenge to reliably meet the escalating requirements.

Background:

  • India has grappled with the looming threat of electricity shortages in recent years, particularly exacerbated by rising temperatures amplifying the power demand.
  • While discussions on this matter typically revolve around the deficit in domestic thermal coal and the need for imports, a more thorough investigation uncovers intricate challenges concerning logistics and regulatory interpretation.
  • Therefore, it is imperative to delve into these dimensions, shedding light on the complexities of the situation and seeking solutions to tackle the root causes.

What are the Primary Causes of Domestic Thermal Coal Shortages?

  • Transportation Infrastructure Deficiencies: A critical challenge lies in the inadequacy of transportation infrastructure, notably the railway network, which predominantly facilitates coal transportation across India.
    • Despite substantial coal production, the limited capacity of railways often hampers timely delivery to power plants, contributing to delays and inefficiencies in the coal supply chain.
  • Geographical Disparities: Complicating matters, the distribution of coal mines and power plants across diverse regions adds another layer of complexity to logistics.
    • Power plants situated far from coal mines encounter heightened logistical hurdles, facing difficulties in securing a consistent coal supply due to increased transportation time and costs.
  • Storage and Handling Limitations: Insufficient storage and handling infrastructure at both mines and power plants exacerbate challenges in managing demand and supply fluctuations.
    • Inadequate storage capacity can lead to stockpiling issues, exacerbating delays and hindering efficient coal delivery.

Balancing Alternative Domestic Sources and Imports:

  • Exploration of Alternative Domestic Sources: While alternative coal sources, like auctions organized by Coal India Ltd., present a viable domestic option, they often receive less attention compared to imports.
    • These auctions enable power plants to procure coal domestically, albeit potentially at higher prices, yet remain overlooked in favor of imported coal.
    • However, auctions offer a feasible alternative, particularly for plants not hindered by logistical constraints in accessing coal from auction sites.
  • Narrow Focus on Imports: The discourse tends to prioritize imports as the default solution for coal shortages, neglecting the potential of domestic alternatives and failing to consider the broader implications of heavy reliance on imported coal.
  • Cost Implications: Importing coal entails additional costs, including transportation, handling, and import duties, resulting in higher variable costs for coal-based electricity.
    • These expenses are often transferred to consumers through elevated electricity tariffs, burdening both households and industries.
  • Regulatory Interpretation: Misinterpretation of Ministry of Power advisories recommending coal imports as mandates further blur the distinction between alternative sources and imports.
    • While these advisories may propose importing a certain percentage of coal, they should not be perceived as obligatory requirements but rather as guidelines to be tailored to each power plant's unique circumstances.
  • Less Emphasis on Domestic Procurement Enhancement: The emphasis on imports sidelines opportunities to improve domestic coal procurement and distribution processes.
    • Addressing logistical hurdles and streamlining administrative procedures could enhance the efficiency and reliability of India's domestic coal supply chain, potentially reducing the reliance on costly imports.

Regulatory Frameworks Influencing Responses to Electricity Shortages and Coal Procurement Strategies:

  • Clarifying Advisory Interpretations: An ongoing challenge in regulatory considerations involves clarifying interpretations of advisories from government entities like the Ministry of Power.
    • While these advisories may offer recommendations for addressing coal shortages, particularly through import suggestions, they should not be misconstrued as mandates.
    • Misinterpretation can lead to unnecessary costs and burdens on consumers, as power plants may feel compelled to comply with import recommendations, disregarding potentially viable domestic alternatives.
  • Forward-Thinking Regulatory Decision-Making: Regulatory bodies overseeing electricity generation and distribution must adopt a forward-thinking approach to decision-making.
    • This entails comprehensive assessments of regulatory measures' implications on stakeholders, including consumers, power producers, and distribution utilities.
    • Analysis should weigh the costs and benefits of various coal procurement strategies, encompassing factors like transportation costs, import duties, and environmental impacts.
  • Customized Approaches for Diverse Plant Settings: Recognizing the varied challenges among power plants regarding coal shortages, regulatory bodies should tailor measures to each plant's specific circumstances.
    • Pit-head plants, closer to coal mines, may have easier access to domestic coal and encounter fewer logistical constraints compared to plants situated farther away, necessitating heavier reliance on imports.
    • Regulatory interventions should thus be nuanced and adaptable rather than uniformly applied.
  • Balancing Cost-Efficiency and Reliability: Regulators face the critical task of balancing cost and reliability in electricity supply.
    • While imports may offer prompt solutions to coal shortages, they incur substantial costs affecting consumers.
    • Therefore, regulators must meticulously evaluate the potential cost savings of domestic procurement against the reliability and security of imported coal supply, ensuring transparency and equity in decision-making.
  • Long-Term Planning and Sustainability Integration: Regulatory considerations should encompass long-term planning and sustainability objectives alongside immediate coal shortage mitigation.
    • While addressing immediate needs is crucial, regulators must also contemplate the broader ramifications of coal procurement strategies on energy security, environmental sustainability, and renewable energy transition.
    • This necessitates a forward-looking approach aligning short-term actions with long-term sustainability objectives, facilitating India's transition to a resilient and sustainable energy framework.

Conclusion

Addressing electricity shortages in India necessitates a nuanced approach that considers both logistical hurdles and regulatory complexities. While importing coal may offer a temporary solution, it does not tackle the fundamental logistics inefficiencies. India can better navigate the challenges of power generation by addressing root causes and implementing tailored solutions, ensuring a more effective response to evolving weather patterns and increasing demand for electricity

WTO’s Investment Facilitation Negotiations Are Not Illegal

  • 28 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

One significant event during the 13th Ministerial Conference (MC13) of the World Trade Organization (WTO) in Abu Dhabi was the inability to ratify the agreement concerning investment facilitation for development (IFD). Despite garnering backing from over 70% of the membership, approximately 120 member countries, the agreement remained unadopted.

Context:

  • The recent 13th Ministerial Conference (MC13) of the World Trade Organisation (WTO) in Abu Dhabi unfolded a notable occurrence as the agreement on investment facilitation for development (IFD) failed to gain adoption.
  • Despite substantial backing from approximately 120 member countries, the IFD Agreement encountered resistance, particularly from India and South Africa.
  • In light of these events, it becomes imperative to delve into India's opposition to the IFD Agreement and its apprehensions regarding its alignment with WTO principles, especially concerning the intertwining of investment with trade and the procedural aspects of negotiation surrounding the agreement.

What is the IFD agreement?

  • The Investment Facilitation for Development (IFD) Agreement is a legally binding framework that aims to enhance investment flows and promote transparency in regulatory processes.
    • Finalized in November 2023, the agreement is the result of plurilateral negotiations initiated by 70 countries under the Joint Statement Initiative at the WTO in 2017.
  • Despite initial opposition from some countries, including India, the IFD Agreement gained significant support, with 120 nations pushing for its inclusion as a plurilateral agreement within Annex 4 of the WTO Agreement.
    • Although the WTO is primarily a multilateral trade organization, the allowance for plurilateral agreements under Article II.3 of the WTO Agreement sets the stage for binding commitments among participating WTO member countries.

Key objectives of the IFD Agreement include:

  • Regulatory Transparency: Increasing openness in investment policies and procedures to instill confidence and predictability in the investment landscape.
  • Streamlined Administrative Procedures: Simplifying investment-related processes and reducing red tape to attract and facilitate foreign investment inflows.
  • By creating a stable and transparent environment for international investments, the IFD Agreement aims to contribute to economic growth and development, catalyzing cooperation among participating WTO members without imposing obligations on non-signatory countries.

What are India’s Concerns?

  • India's resistance to the Investment Facilitation for Development (IFD) Agreement stems from concerns regarding its alignment with the WTO framework and the process undertaken to integrate it into the WTO rulebook.
  • Given the WTO's dispute settlement mechanism, which solely permits state-to-state legal claims, incorporating Investor-State Dispute Settlement (ISDS) appears infeasible.
  • This challenge contributed to India and South Africa's significant efforts to prevent the IFD Agreement from becoming an official component of WTO regulations.

India's primary apprehensions surrounding the IFD Agreement:

  • Integrating Investment into the WTO: India questions the compatibility and relevance of investment policies within the WTO's scope, particularly when considering existing platforms dedicated to investment negotiations.
  • Process-related Concerns: India argues that the procedure for incorporating the IFD Agreement into the WTO rulebook must be carefully scrutinized, ensuring adherence to established protocols and consensus-building among all member nations.
  • While the actual content of the IFD Agreement does not appear to be India's primary concern, the nation's stance underscores the importance of considering the broader implications of such agreements within the global trade and investment landscape.
    • As the international community navigates the complexities of investment facilitation and regulatory reform, the debate surrounding the IFD Agreement will continue to shape the future of multilateral cooperation and the evolution of the WTO's mandate.

Is Investment a Suitable Component of the WTO Framework?

  • India posits that investment's integration into the World Trade Organization (WTO) may not inherently translate to increased cross-border trade, contrasting with scholarly perspectives emphasizing the interconnectedness of trade and investment.
  • Citing the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD), it is highlighted that a substantial portion—70%—of international trade occurs within global value chains, underscoring the symbiotic relationship between trade and investment.
  • Contemporary free trade agreements like the Regional Comprehensive Economic Partnership (RCEP) and the Comprehensive and Progressive Agreement for Trans-Pacific Partnership exemplify this integration, featuring comprehensive investment provisions encompassing facilitation and protection measures.
  • Intriguingly, India's recent trade pact with the European Free Trade Association, despite including investment provisions focused on facilitation and promotion, underscores a pragmatic approach to incorporating investment elements, albeit with limitations.

Negotiating Process of the IFD Agreement:

  • India has emphasized the absence of a negotiating mandate regarding investment discussions.
  • India contends that the WTO's General Council's decision in 2004 ruled out talks on the nexus between trade and investment, a facet categorized under the 'Singapore issues' introduced during the 1996 WTO Singapore ministerial conference.
  • These discussions were explicitly excluded from the Doha round of negotiations initiated in 2001.
  • Additionally, India has pointed to the 2015 WTO Nairobi ministerial decision, which stipulates that launching negotiations on new issues multilaterally necessitates unanimous agreement among all member states.
  • India argues that since consensus wasn't reached among all nations to commence negotiations on an IFD Agreement, the ensuing negotiations and the resultant text presented for adoption are deemed illegitimate.

Key Questions Surrounding the IFD Agreement:

  • India's assertion of a negative mandate against initiating negotiations on the trade and investment relationship raises two critical queries warranting clarification.
  • Firstly, does this negative mandate extend to all facets of investment, including facilitation?
    • Notably, the shelved investment agreement proposed during the 1996 Singapore ministerial primarily addressed market access and investment protection, leaving ambiguity regarding whether the negative mandate encompasses all investment-related aspects within the WTO.
  • Secondly, does the negative mandate solely pertain to launching negotiations on new issues in a multilateral context?
    • The inquiry arises as to whether this prohibition extends to negotiations commenced on a plurilateral basis.
    • The negotiations for an IFD agreement were instigated on a plurilateral, not multilateral, basis.
  • Although Article X.9 of the WTO Agreement stipulates that adding an agreement to the existing set of Plurilateral Agreements listed in Annex 4 necessitates consensus exclusively, the agreement lacks provisions mandating consensus for initiating negotiations for a Plurilateral Agreement.

Way forward:

  • As the primary regulatory body for international trade, the World Trade Organization (WTO) is responsible for updating existing rules and establishing new ones.
    • However, reaching a consensus on decision-making within the WTO remains a significant challenge, often leading to legislative deadlock.
  • In this context, Preferential Agreements (PAs), such as the proposed Investment Facilitation for Development (IFD) Agreement, can serve as catalysts for reinvigorating the WTO's legislative function.
    • By fostering cooperation among subsets of WTO members, Preferential Agreements (PAs) can help circumvent the challenges of consensus-building within the broader organization.
  • As India continues its ascent to become the world's third-largest economy, it is increasingly critical for the nation to reassess its defensive posture toward PAs.
    • By recognizing the potential benefits of agreements like the IFD, India has the opportunity to demonstrate leadership on the global stage, support the revitalization of the WTO's legislative function, and contribute to a more collaborative and effective approach to international trade regulation.

Conclusion

The failure to ratify the IFD agreement at MC13 underscores the formidable challenges encountered by the WTO in navigating intricate matters such as investment facilitation. It underscores the divergent perspectives among member nations regarding the scope and nature of the WTO's role in governing global economic interactions. Closing these divergences becomes imperative for the WTO to adeptly address the evolving landscape of international trade and investment

Employment Scenario in India Grim - ILO

  • 27 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

According to the India Employment Report 2024 by the ILO and IHD, nearly 83% of the unemployed workforce comprises youth, with the percentage of educated unemployed youth more than doubling from 35.2% in 2000 to 65.7% in 2022.

India Employment Report 2024:

  • The India Employment Report 2024, the third installment in the series of publications by the Institute for Human Development focusing on labor and employment concerns, is conducted in collaboration with the International Labour Organization (ILO).
  • This report delves into the issue of youth employment, analyzing the evolving economic, labor market, educational, and skills landscapes in India over the past twenty years.
  • It sheds light on recent trends in the Indian labor market, showcasing both positive advancements and enduring challenges, including those exacerbated by the COVID-19 pandemic.

Key Insights from the India Employment Report 2024:

  • Drawing from data sourced from National Sample Surveys and Periodic Labour Force Surveys spanning 2000 to 2022, the report offers a comprehensive analysis of employment trends and the present landscape.

Employment Trends & Current Scenario:

  • Female labor market participation, after a notable decline in previous years, exhibited accelerated growth post-2019, particularly in rural regions.
  • A noticeable trend in the Indian labor market is the gradual shift of the workforce from agriculture to non-farm sectors.
  • Self-employment and casual employment dominate India's employment landscape, with approximately 82% of the workforce engaged in the informal sector, and nearly 90% informally employed.
  • While wages for casual laborers saw modest growth from 2012 to 2022, real wages for regular workers stagnated or declined.
  • Official surveys inadequately capture migration levels in India, expected to significantly rise along with urbanization in the future, reaching around 40% migration rate and a 607 million urban population by 2030.

Challenges of Youth Employment:

  • Despite a sizable working-age population, India's youth demographic, accounting for 27% of the total population in 2021, is projected to decline to 23% by 2036.
  • Each year, approximately 7-8 million youths join the labor force, presenting an opportunity for India to capitalize on the demographic dividend.
  • Youth labor market participation has historically been lower than adults, primarily due to higher education enrollment rates.
  • Youth unemployment witnessed a notable increase from 5.7% in 2000 to 17.5% in 2019, declining to 12.1% in 2022 post-lockdowns.

Recommendations:

  • The report underscores five key policy domains for comprehensive action, focusing on both general employment enhancement and youth-specific interventions:
    • Promoting job creation
    • Enhancing employment quality
    • Addressing labor market disparities
    • Strengthening skills and active labor market policies
    • Bridging knowledge gaps on labor market dynamics and youth employment.

What is the International Labour Organization (ILO)?

  • The International Labour Organization (ILO) is a United Nations (U.N.) agency.
  • The goal of the ILO is to advance social and economic justice by setting international labor standards.
  • The ILO has 187 member states and is headquartered in Geneva, Switzerland, with approximately 40 field offices around the world.
  • The standards upheld by the ILO are broadly intended to ensure accessible, productive, and sustainable work worldwide in conditions of freedom, equity, security, and dignity.

Understanding the ILO

  • It was founded in 1919 under the League of Nations and incorporated into the U.N. as a specialized agency in 1946.
  • The ILO is the first and oldest specialized agency of the U.N.
  • The organization’s goal is to serve as a uniting force among governments, businesses, and workers.
  • It emphasizes the need for workers to enjoy conditions of freedom, equity, security, and human dignity through their employment.
  • The ILO promotes international labor standards through its field offices in Africa, Latin America, the Caribbean, the Arab States, Asia and the Pacific, and Europe and Central Asia.
  • The organization provides training on fair employment standards, offers technical cooperation for projects in partner countries, analyzes labor statistics and publishes related research, and regularly holds events and conferences to examine critical social and labor issues.
  • The ILO was awarded the Nobel Peace Prize in 1969.
    • The organization was recognized for improving fraternity and peace among nations, pursuing decent work and justice for workers, and providing technical assistance to developing nations.
  • The labor standards set forth by the ILO have been published in 190 conventions and six protocols.
  • These standards recognize the right to collective bargaining, attempt to eliminate forced or compulsory labor abolish child labor, and eliminate acts of discrimination concerning employment and occupation.
  •  As a result, the protocols and conventions of the ILO are a major contributor to international labor law.

Structure:

  • A unique feature of the ILO is its tripartite character.
  • The membership of the ILO ensures the growth of the tripartite system in the Member countries.
  • At every level in the Organization, Governments are associated with the two other social partners, namely the workers and employers.
  • All three groups are represented in almost all the deliberative organs of the ILO and share responsibility for conducting its work.
  • The work of the Conference and the Governing Body is supplemented by Regional Conferences, Regional Advisory Committees, Industrial and Analogous Committees, Committee of Experts, Panels of Consultants, Special Conference and meetings, etc.

The three organs of the ILO are:

  • International Labour Conferences: General Assembly of the ILO – Meets every year in June.
  • Governing Body: Executive Council of the ILO. Meets three times a year in March, June, and November.
  • International Labour Office:  A permanent secretariat.

India & ILO:

  • India is a founder member of the International Labour Organization, which came into existence in 1919.
  • At present the ILO has 187 Members.

About the Institute of Human Development (IHD):

  • Founded in 1998 under the patronage of the Indian Society of Labour Economics (ISLE), the Institute of Human Development (IHD) is dedicated to fostering a society that embraces an inclusive social, economic, and political framework, devoid of poverty and deprivation.
  • IHD's core mission revolves around conducting research in diverse domains such as labor and employment, livelihood, gender, health, education, and various facets of human development.
  • Through its endeavors, IHD seeks to generate knowledge and insights that contribute to the advancement of human welfare and societal well-being.

TB-Mukt Bharat India's Fight Against Tuberculosis

  • 26 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

Even though World TB Day (March 24) has passed, recognizing the needs and interests of patients and communities must form the basis of disease elimination.

What is Tuberculosis?

  • Tuberculosis (TB) is an airborne bacterial infection caused by a type of bacteria called mycobacterium tuberculosis.
  • The infection primarily attacks our lungs and if not treated early, permanent lung damage can result.
  • Tuberculosis can also spread to other parts of the body such as the intestines, bones and joints, brain, skin, and other tissues of the body.
  • It can be classified into two categories:
    • Active tuberculosis (TB) and
    • Latent tuberculosis (TB).

Causes of Tuberculosis (TB):

  • Mycobacterium tuberculosis usually spreads from person to person through airborne droplets, which are produced when the infected person coughs, sneezes, speaks, or sings.

Signs & symptoms of Tuberculosis (TB):

  • A person with latent Tuberculosis (TB) cannot spread the infection to others as it is not contagious and may not show symptoms because their immune system is protecting them from getting sick.
  • However, latent TB can develop into active TB if that individual’s immune system cannot stop the bacteria from growing and starts showing symptoms such as:
    • Bad cough that lasts for 3 weeks or longer
    • Pain in chest
    • Coughing blood or sputum
    • Fever or night sweats
    • Weight loss or no appetite
    • Chills
    • Weakness

Diagnosis of Tuberculosis (TB):

  • Tuberculosis (TB) can be tested in two ways, namely skin test and blood test.
  • These two tests only tell if a person has TB or not; if the test is positive then other tests are needed to check if it is latent TB or active TB, such as chest X-ray or CT, or acid-fast bacillus tests (sputum tests).

Treatment of Tuberculosis (TB)

  • Both latent TB and active TB can be effectively treated with antibiotics, albeit requiring different durations of treatment.
  • Complete adherence to medication is imperative for curing TB; failure to complete the prescribed course may lead to the recurrence of illness and increased difficulty in recovery.
    • For latent TB, treatment typically involves a course lasting 3-9 months, comprising 1-2 antibiotics.
    • While active TB necessitates a more extensive regimen, with doctors prescribing 2 to 4 or more antibiotics for 6-9 months or longer.
  • Ensuring proper medication adherence is crucial for individuals with latent TB to prevent its progression to active TB.
  • In many cases, significant improvement is observed within weeks of initiating treatment, with the infection becoming non-contagious.
  • Therefore, completing the full course of medication is essential to safeguard oneself and others from tuberculosis.

What is drug-resistant Tuberculosis (TB)?

  • Drug-resistant TB is when the bacteria that causes TB becomes resistant to some or all the medications.
  • Once drug-resistant TB is developed, it is very difficult to treat it.
  • It may require more and different medications with a longer period of treatment.
  • Some injectable drugs can cause loss of hearing and balance problems.

Status of TB in India:

  • India bears approximately 27% of the global burden of tuberculosis (TB), making it the country with the highest TB burden worldwide.
  • Government of India aims to eliminate tuberculosis (TB) by 2025.
  • The theme for World Tuberculosis Day (March 24) in 2024 was the same as in 2023 “Yes, we can end TB”, which reflects the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) to eliminate TB by 2030.

Challenges Confronting India in TB Elimination:

  • Drug-resistant TB Cases: India grapples with a substantial burden of drug-resistant TB, including multidrug-resistant TB (MDR-TB), necessitating more expensive, specialized drugs and prolonged treatment durations.
  • Diagnostics and Case Detection: Accurate and timely TB diagnosis remains a challenge, particularly in areas lacking access to modern diagnostic tools, leading to reliance on older, less reliable methods.
  • Poor Primary Healthcare and Infrastructure: Limited access to healthcare facilities, especially in rural and remote regions, results in delayed diagnosis and treatment, facilitating TB transmission within communities.
  • Stigma and Awareness: Stigma surrounding TB may deter individuals from seeking timely healthcare, while inadequate awareness about the disease perpetuates its prevalence.
  • Private Sector Engagement: With a significant portion of healthcare services provided by the private sector, effective TB control necessitates coordinated efforts and standardized treatment protocols between the public and private sectors.
  • Treatment Adherence: Ensuring patient adherence to the full course of TB treatment, which involves prolonged antibiotic courses, poses a significant challenge.
  • Vulnerable Populations: Certain demographics, such as migrant workers, urban slum dwellers, and individuals residing in overcrowded conditions, face heightened TB risks, requiring targeted interventions.

Initiatives by the Government of India to Eradicate TB:

  • National Tuberculosis Elimination Program (NTEP): A National Strategic Plan (2017-25) aims to eliminate TB from India by 2025.
  • Pradhan Mantri TB Mukt Bharat Abhiyan (PMTBMBA): Introduced in 2022, this initiative provides community support to TB patients, offering nutritional, diagnostic, and vocational assistance.
  • Revised National Tuberculosis Control Program (RNTCP): Launched in 1997, RNTCP has been continuously revised and strengthened to combat TB effectively.
  • Universal Drug Susceptibility Testing (DST): Efforts have been intensified to ensure universal access to drug susceptibility testing, enabling early detection of drug-resistant TB strains for tailored treatment.
  • Ni-kshay Portal: An online platform established to monitor notified TB cases effectively.
  • Introduction of New Drugs: Drugs like Bedaquiline and Delamanid for treating drug-resistant TB are provided free of cost to TB patients.
  • Research and Development (R&D) for Treatment: Studies are ongoing to explore shorter anti-tubercular drug courses, aiming to reduce treatment duration.
  • Vaccine Development: Trials are being conducted to evaluate the effectiveness of vaccines such as Immuvac and VPM1002 in preventing TB, offering promising avenues for future TB prevention strategies.

Global Efforts to Eradicate TB:

  • End TB Strategy: spearheaded by the World Health Organization (WHO), it provides a roadmap for countries to reduce TB incidence by 80%, and TB deaths by 90%, and eliminate catastrophic costs for TB-affected households by 2030.
  • World Development Report (1993): Published by WHO, it highlighted TB treatment for adults as the most cost-effective among all developmental interventions.
  • The Global Fund: a global initiative aimed at defeating HIV, TB, and malaria, striving for a healthier, safer, and more equitable future worldwide.
  • The Stop TB Partnership: a collaborative effort involving expertise from diverse country, regional, and global partners, dedicated to transforming the TB landscape and achieving the goal of ending TB by 2030.
  • Sustainable Development Goal 3: part of the United Nations' Sustainable Development Goals, it targets to end the TB epidemic by 2030, reflecting a commitment to global health and well-being.

Way Forward:

  • Development and Widespread Adoption of an Adult TB Vaccine: Prioritizing the research and development of an effective vaccine against TB for adults.
    • Ensuring widespread distribution and utilization of the vaccine to bolster TB prevention efforts globally.
  • Cost Reduction of Anti-TB Drugs: Implementing strategies to lower the production costs of essential anti-TB medications.
    • Making these drugs more accessible and affordable to all individuals in need, regardless of economic status.
  • Innovation in TB Treatment: Investing in research and development to create injection-free and orally-administered TB medications.
    • Expanding treatment options to enhance patient compliance and improve treatment outcomes.
  • Integration of AI-Assisted Radiology: Leveraging artificial intelligence (AI) technology to facilitate rapid and accurate TB diagnosis.
    • Promoting the use of handheld radiology devices equipped with AI algorithms, allowing for quick TB detection with high accuracy rates, thereby streamlining diagnostic processes and improving patient care.

Navigating the Global Waterscape, and Its Challenges

  • 22 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

In the context of climate change-related pressures, the world also needs to foster improved cooperation over water-sharing.

Context:

  • The global water crisis remains a critical issue, with roughly two billion people lacking access to clean water, threatening individual and collective well-being.
  • Water has been a determining factor in civilizations' prosperity and decline throughout history.
  • Ancient Mesopotamian cities experienced conflicts over fertile land and water resources, illustrating the age-old struggle for water.
  • As the 31st World Water Day approaches in 2024, themed "Leveraging Water for Peace," the United Nations emphasizes the significance of water diplomacy to tackle contemporary water challenges and secure a sustainable future for all.

Water Diplomacy in a Time of Extremities:

  • Encouraging Collaborative Governance: Water diplomacy underscores the necessity of collaborative governance mechanisms to effectively tackle shared water challenges.
    • By uniting relevant stakeholders—governments, local communities, NGOs, and international agencies—collaborative governance frameworks foster dialogue, information exchange, and joint decision-making.
    • These mechanisms pave the way for sustainable water management policies and strategies that prioritize the needs and interests of all involved parties.
  • Ensuring Fair Water Allocation: At the core of water diplomacy lies the principle of equitable water allocation among riparian states.
    • Acknowledging that water resources transcend political boundaries, water diplomacy advocates for fair distribution, considering the needs, rights, and vulnerabilities of all stakeholders.
    • Through negotiated agreements and treaties, riparian states can establish frameworks for sharing water resources, managing competing demands, and peacefully resolving disputes.
  • Promoting Regional Stability and Peace: Effective water diplomacy contributes to regional stability and peace by mitigating conflicts over shared water resources.
    • By fostering cooperation and understanding among neighboring states, water diplomacy builds trust, enhances security, and reduces tensions stemming from water-related disputes.
    • Additionally, collaborative water management initiatives foster cross-border cooperation, economic integration, and diplomatic relations, bolstering broader efforts to uphold peace and stability in conflict-prone regions.
  • Embracing Inclusive Approaches: Inclusive water diplomacy involves engaging a diverse array of stakeholders, including indigenous communities, civil society organizations, academia, and the private sector.
    • Recognizing the importance of marginalized groups' contributions and perspectives, inclusive approaches promote social equity and transparency in decision-making processes.
    • By integrating local knowledge, cultural practices, and community priorities, inclusive water diplomacy enhances the legitimacy and efficacy of governance frameworks.
  • Preventing and Resolving Conflicts: Water diplomacy plays a pivotal role in preventing and resolving conflicts arising from competing water interests.
    • Through proactive diplomacy, early warning systems, and confidence-building measures, riparian states can address potential sources of tension and defuse conflicts before they escalate.
    • Moreover, mechanisms for peaceful dispute resolution, such as arbitration and mediation, enable states to resolve water-related disputes through dialogue and negotiation, averting coercive or confrontational measures.

Strategic Approaches for Tackling Rural Water Challenges in India:

  • Enhancing Infrastructure: A primary strategy involves developing water infrastructure like wells, hand pumps, boreholes, and piped systems to improve access to safe water and sanitation facilities in rural areas.
    • Investment in constructing and maintaining such infrastructure can reduce waterborne diseases, leading to better health outcomes.
  • Encouraging Community Engagement: Engaging local communities in planning, implementing, and managing water projects is crucial for their sustainability and success.
    • Empowering rural residents through participatory water management committees and user associations can promote ownership of water resources, efficient practices, and conflict resolution.
  • Conservation and Management Practices: Promoting conservation and management practices is vital for maximizing water efficiency in rural areas.
    • Techniques like rainwater harvesting, groundwater recharge, watershed management, and soil moisture conservation can reduce reliance on unpredictable water sources and build climate resilience.
  • Incorporating Technological Innovations: Leveraging technology can significantly improve water access and management in rural areas.
    • Solar-powered pumps, drip irrigation systems, and water-efficient technologies can enhance agricultural productivity, while monitoring applications and remote sensing can enable real-time resource management.
  • Policy Support and Interventions: Government support is essential in addressing rural water needs through adequate funding, regulatory frameworks for equitable water distribution, and legislation to protect water resources and promote sustainable practices.
    • Policy coherence across the agriculture, health, and environment sectors is crucial for tackling the interconnectedness of water, food security, and rural development.

Addressing Transboundary Water Challenges:

  • Highlighting the Significance of Transboundary Waters: The report underscores the prominence of transboundary waters, noting that a substantial portion of the world's freshwater resources, including those in India, are shared across borders.
    • India's extensive landmass boasts a network of long rivers, vital not only for its own needs but also shared with neighboring countries.
    • However, the South Asian region has witnessed a significant deterioration in water quality in recent years, particularly in rivers like the Meghna, Brahmaputra, Ganga, and Indus, as highlighted in the 2024 report.
  • The Need for Sophisticated Cross-Border Water Governance: Addressing these challenges requires a sophisticated approach to cross-border water governance, promoting effective and equitable allocation of water resources among nations that share them.
    • It is imperative to develop robust mechanisms for cooperation and coordination to manage shared waters sustainably.
  • Global Perspective on Transboundary Cooperation: According to a 2021 UNESCO progress report on Sustainable Development Goal indicator 6.5.2, titled "Progress on transboundary water cooperation," out of UNESCO's 194 member states and 12 associate members, 153 countries are classified as water-sharing nations.
    • Remarkably, transboundary waters account for 60% of the world's freshwater flows.
    • However, only 24 of these 153 countries have achieved a 100% cooperation agreement on their shared waters, indicating the pressing need for enhanced collaboration.
  • Ensuring Collective Well-being and Peace: While significant progress has been made in fostering peace over time, the scarcity of freshwater poses a threat to our collective well-being and peace.
    • This issue is not only crucial for achieving the 2030 Agenda and Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) but also for maintaining stability and harmony among nations.
    • Effective transboundary cooperation in the sustainable management of water resources is essential to realize benefits across various sectors, including health, food and energy security, disaster resilience, education, improved standards of living, employment, economic development, and the preservation of ecosystem services.

Conclusion

As the global struggle for clean water access continues for approximately two billion people, the ever-increasing demand for this precious resource directly impacts our collective well-being and peace. In order to build a sustainable future, we must prioritize water conservation efforts that transcend political boundaries, fostering regional cooperation and stability. By recognizing the urgency of this challenge, we can work together to ensure a secure and equitable water supply for generations to come.

Inter-Ministerial Joint Workshop on “Blue Economy”

  • 23 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

Recently, the Ministry of Earth Sciences (MoES) organized a consultative workshop in New Delhi today on the Blue Economy Pathways study report status.

Context:

  • The Ministry of Earth Sciences (MoES) has collaborated with the World Bank to conduct a technical study and compile a report titled 'India’s Blue Economy: Pathways for resource-efficient, inclusive, and resilient growth in India.'
  • This report aims to explore global best practices in Blue Economy implementation, develop an ocean accounting framework, enhance institutional capacity, and propose innovative finance mechanisms in alignment with India's Blue Economy Policy framework.

What is the Blue Economy?

  • The blue economy, or the ocean economy, is a term used to describe the economic activities associated with the oceans and seas.
  • The World Bank? defines the blue economy as the “sustainable use of ocean resources to benefit economies, livelihoods, and ocean ecosystem health”.
  • The activities? commonly understood to represent the blue economy include maritime shipping, fishing and aquaculture, coastal tourism, renewable energy, water desalination, undersea cabling, seabed extractive industries and deep sea mining, marine genetic resources, and biotechnology.
  • The blue economy is estimated to be worth more than US$1.5 trillion? per year globally.
  • It provides over 30 million jobs and supplies a vital source of protein to over three billion people.

How do the Oceans Contribute to Sustainable Development?

  • There is a Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) dedicated to oceans: number 14, ‘Life Below Water?’ aims to conserve and sustainably use the oceans, seas, and marine resources.
  • It sets out seven targets for a sustainable ocean economy by 2030. So far, progress toward reaching these goals has been limited?.
  • There have been some small improvements in the sustainability of fisheries and an expansion of Marine Protected Areas (MPAs), but these cover only around 7.5% of the oceans.

How are the Oceans Governed?

  • Governance of the ocean and the blue economy is both complex and potentially difficult to implement, which has led to fragmented approaches to the sharing of marine resources between nations and impeded understanding of the environmental impacts of the blue economy.
  • Ocean-related regulations apply to Exclusive Economic Zones (EEZs), which include territorial waters, archipelagos, and the area of sea that extends 200 nautical miles out from countries’ coastlines.
  • The remaining area is called the High Seas? (or ‘open ocean’) and accounts for 64% of the world’s oceans.

Importance of the Blue Economy:

  • Economic Prosperity: The Blue Economy offers substantial avenues for economic advancement across various sectors including fisheries, aquaculture, tourism, maritime transport, renewable energy, and biotechnology.
  • Sustainable Resource Management: It advocates for the responsible and sustainable utilization of marine resources such as fish stocks, minerals, and energy sources, ensuring their availability for present and future generations.
  • Renewable Energy Development: By fostering the exploration of renewable energy sources like offshore wind, wave, and tidal energy, the Blue Economy reduces reliance on fossil fuels, thereby combating climate change.
  • Tourism Boost: Coastal and marine tourism serves as a cornerstone of the Blue Economy, stimulating revenue generation, and job creation, and bolstering local economies in coastal areas.
  • Climate Change Mitigation: Healthy oceans play a pivotal role in regulating the planet's climate.
    • Through conservation efforts and sustainable practices, the Blue Economy aids in mitigating climate change impacts by preserving coastal ecosystems and reducing carbon emissions.
  • Biodiversity Protection: Through the promotion of sustainable practices and responsible resource management, the Blue Economy contributes to the conservation of marine biodiversity, safeguarding endangered species and habitats.

Challenges Facing the Blue Economy:

  • Pollution and Environmental Degradation: India's coastal regions confront significant pollution stemming from industrial discharge, untreated sewage, agricultural runoff, and plastic waste.
    • This pollution adversely impacts marine ecosystems, biodiversity, and the long-term sustainability of marine industries.
  • Overexploitation of Marine Resources: Illegal, unreported, and unregulated (IUU) fishing practices exacerbate resource depletion, leading to diminished fish stocks and jeopardizing the livelihoods of coastal communities.
  • Climate Change Impacts: The effects of climate change, such as rising sea levels, ocean acidification, and alterations in oceanic conditions, pose threats to fisheries, aquaculture, coastal infrastructure, and marine biodiversity.
  • Maritime Security Challenges: India's maritime security faces multifaceted challenges including piracy, illegal trafficking, maritime terrorism, and territorial disputes, necessitating robust security measures.
  • Limited Institutional Capacity and Infrastructure: Effective management and sustainable development of the blue economy require robust institutional frameworks, governance mechanisms, and infrastructure.
    • However, India grapples with capacity constraints, inadequate funding, bureaucratic inefficiencies, and regulatory gaps, hindering optimal resource management and development.

India's Blue Economy:

  • India's Blue Economy, encompassing its vast coastline and Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ), holds immense potential for driving sustainable growth and development.
  • With a coastline stretching 7,517 km and an EEZ covering over two million square kilometers, India is endowed with abundant living and non-living resources.
  • Although currently contributing approximately 4% to the nation's GDP, India's Blue Economy is projected to experience significant expansion with improved mechanisms and infrastructure.
    • Furthermore, the coastal economy plays a crucial role in sustaining the livelihoods of over four million fisherfolk and other coastal communities.

Four key industries are poised to propel India's Blue Economy forward:

  • Fishing: Leveraging the rich marine resources to enhance fisheries production and promote sustainable fishing practices.
  • Aquaculture: Developing innovative techniques to foster the cultivation of aquatic organisms, contributing to food security and livelihood opportunities.
  • Ports: Investing in port infrastructure and capacity building to facilitate maritime trade, cargo handling, and logistics efficiency.
  • Shipping: Strengthening the shipping industry to support global commerce, transportation, and connectivity while ensuring environmental sustainability

Government Initiatives Promoting Blue Economy:

  • Sagarmala Programme: The Sagarmala Programme, a flagship initiative, focuses on modernizing India's ports, improving port connectivity, and driving port-led development.
    • It prioritizes logistics optimization, coastal shipping promotion, and the establishment of coastal economic zones to stimulate economic expansion and employment generation.
  • National Policy Framework: The government has devised a comprehensive National Policy Framework for the Blue Economy, outlining a strategic path for the sustainable development and management of marine resources.
    • It aims to integrate sectors like fisheries, aquaculture, shipping, tourism, and renewable energy to foster holistic growth.
  • National Marine Fisheries Action Plan (NMFAP): This plan encompasses strategies to enhance fishery resources assessment, upgrade infrastructure and technology in the fisheries sector, and encourage aquaculture development.
  • Integrated Coastal Zone Management (ICZM): The government has initiated the Integrated Coastal Zone Management Program to foster sustainable development and conservation of coastal ecosystems.
  • Blue Economy Cell: The Ministry of Earth Sciences has instituted a dedicated Blue Economy Cell to streamline research, policy formulation, and implementation of Blue Economy endeavors.
  • Marine Spatial Planning (MSP): India is actively developing Marine Spatial Planning frameworks to ensure the efficient and sustainable utilization of marine space.

Conclusion

India's Blue Economy is on the brink of substantial expansion in the coming years.

With the government's proactive Blue Economy Mission, there's potential for this sector to emerge as a key economic driver, contingent upon effective policy implementation.

Aligned with the government's broader vision outlined in the 'Vision of New India by 2030', the Blue Economy policies are geared towards securing enduring economic benefits, fostering job creation, promoting equity, and safeguarding environmental sustainability.

India's Bhutan Policy: Balancing Regional Allies in the Shadow of Dragon

  • 21 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

India and Bhutan decided on Wednesday to postpone a state visit by Prime Minister Narendra Modi to Thimphu this week because of bad weather.

Context:

  • The planned visit to Bhutan on 21-22 March by the Indian prime minister however had to be postponed due to inclement weather conditions over Paro airport.
  • Notwithstanding the sudden intervention by nature, the visit which was otherwise planned amid an electioneering time, showcases the importance that New Delhi is imparting to an important friend and neighbour.
  • The importance of Bhutan for India can be immediately gauged from the manner in which China is seeking to woo its southern neighbour away from the ambit of Indian influence.

Background of India-Bhutan Relations:

  • India and Bhutan have maintained a special bilateral relationship based on mutual trust, goodwill, and understanding.
    • This unique partnership is founded upon the Treaty of Friendship and Cooperation, first signed in 1949 and subsequently renewed in 2007.
    • The treaty has provided a strong framework for the two nations to develop close political, economic, and cultural ties.
  • A significant aspect of the enduring bond between India and Bhutan lies in their spiritual kinship.
    • Bhutan regards India as the "gyagar," acknowledging its role as the sacred birthplace of Buddhism.
    • This deep cultural and religious connection has helped foster resilience and camaraderie between the two nations, further cementing their historical friendship.

Why does Bhutan Hold Significant Importance for India?

  • India and Bhutan have maintained strong bilateral relations rooted in shared cultural heritage, political cooperation, economic ties, and social connections.

Cultural Bonds:

  • Buddhist Heritage: With India being the birthplace of Lord Buddha, Bhutanese monks frequently visit significant Buddhist sites such as Nalanda, Bodh Gaya, and Rajgir, fostering spiritual connections.
  • Open Border Policy: The open border encourages regular exchanges of travellers for work, tourism, shopping, and medical care, further strengthening cultural ties.

Political Cooperation:

  • High-Level Visits: Frequent political exchanges at the ministerial level, including visits by the Indian Prime Minister and the King of Bhutan, sustain and strengthen bilateral relations.
  • Doklam Crisis: During the 2017 crisis, Bhutan granted access to Indian army personnel to resist Chinese incursions, demonstrating mutual trust and cooperation.
  • Civilian Award: Bhutan conferred its highest civilian award on Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi in 2021, recognizing his contributions to the friendship between the two nations.

Economic Partnerships:

  • Financial Assistance: India has provided financial aid to Bhutan since the 1960s, supporting its five-year plans, for agriculture, irrigation, health, industrial development, road transport, energy, and education.
  • Trade and Commerce: The 1972 Agreement on Trade and Commerce, revised in 2016, promotes free trade, with India being Bhutan's largest trading partner, exceeding $1422 million in bilateral trade in 2021-22.
  • Vaccine Maitri Initiative: Bhutan was the first country to receive Indian-made Covishield vaccines, with 550,000 doses gifted during the COVID-19 pandemic.
  • Hydropower Collaboration: A vital cooperation area generating significant revenue, hydroelectric projects are covered under a 2006 bilateral agreement, with four operational projects supplying 2136 MW of electricity to India and two more under construction.

Social Connections:

  • Education: Approximately 1,000 scholarships are provided annually to Bhutanese students in Indian universities for engineering and medicine, fostering knowledge exchange.
  • Indian Diaspora: 50,000 Indians working in Bhutan contribute to fields such as education, arts, and health.

Environmental Importance:

  • Carbon-Neutral Commitment: As one of the few countries committed to carbon neutrality, Bhutan has found a key partner in India to achieve this goal through renewable energy, forest conservation, and sustainable tourism initiatives.

New Cooperation Areas:

  • Space: Joint development of the India-Bhutan SAT small satellite aims to help manage Bhutan's natural resources, promoting scientific collaboration.
  • Fintech: Launching the RuPay Card enables full interoperability, with Bhutan as the second country to launch India's BHIM app for cashless payments.
  • E-learning: Integrating Bhutan's DrukRen with India's National Knowledge Network facilitates information access for universities and research institutions in both countries, fostering educational cooperation.

What are the Challenges in India-Bhutan Relations?

  • Despite their close ties, India-Bhutan relations face several challenges that must be addressed to maintain a strong partnership.

China's Growing Influence:

  • Chinese Presence: China's increasing influence in Bhutan, particularly near the disputed Bhutan-China border, has raised concerns in India, traditionally Bhutan's closest ally.
    • While Bhutan and China have not established diplomatic relations, their friendly exchanges can potentially shift the balance of power in the region.

Border Disputes:

  • Incidents of Incursions: While the 699 km India-Bhutan border has been largely peaceful, recent incursions by Chinese forces have created flashpoints, such as the 2017 Doklam standoff in the India-China-Bhutan tri-junction.
    • Any escalation of these border disputes could strain India-Bhutan relations and challenge their traditional security cooperation.

Hydropower Projects:

  • Bhutan's hydropower sector is a key economic pillar, with India playing a significant role in its development.
    • However, some Bhutanese have expressed concerns over the perceived disproportionate benefits for India.
    • These concerns have led to public opposition in Bhutan against Indian involvement in the sector, which could impact bilateral relations.

Trade Issues:

  • Trade Imbalance: India accounts for over 80% of Bhutan's imports and exports, raising concerns about the significant trade deficit.
    • Bhutan seeks greater access to the Indian market for its products to reduce the trade deficit, which could require further negotiation and collaboration between the two countries.
  • To navigate these challenges, both India and Bhutan must address these concerns through open dialogue, strategic cooperation, and mutually beneficial agreements to maintain their strong and enduring partnership.

Strategies for Strengthening Indo-Bhutan Relations:

  • To further enhance the bilateral ties between India and Bhutan, several approaches can be adopted to address potential challenges and promote mutual growth such as:
  • Diplomatic Engagement: India should regularly discuss with Bhutan to comprehend its evolving foreign policy objectives and concerns.
    • Continual support for Bhutan's sovereignty and development needs is vital to allay any apprehensions of India as a threat.
  • Expanded Economic Assistance: India can provide increased economic aid, trade advantages, and infrastructural development to shield Bhutan from succumbing to China's debt-trap tactics.
  • Fortifying Defense Collaboration: India should address existing impediments in the relationship and reinforce defence and security cooperation with Bhutan to ensure mutual safety and counter potential Chinese influence effectively.
  • Promoting Regional Cooperation: India and Bhutan are members of various regional organizations like SAARC, BIMSTEC, and BBIN.
    • Strengthening regional cooperation mechanisms will ensure Bhutan's interests are adequately represented in these forums, enhancing overall regional stability and prosperity.

Conclusion

Bhutan is perhaps one of the most important allies that India has in its neighbourhood. Time has proven its relationship with India. However, recent times have witnessed changing dynamics in the Himalayan kingdom’s polity. Focusing on diplomatic engagement, bolstering economic support, strengthening military ties, and fostering regional cooperation will pave the way for a prosperous and secure future. Also, corrective and course-correction measures that are being undertaken by India to implement its Neighbourhood First policy are laudable.

Key Facts about Bhutan:

  • Geography: Nestled between India and China, Bhutan is a landlocked country characterized by majestic mountains and verdant valleys.
    • Thimphu is the capital city of Bhutan.
  • Political System: Bhutan transitioned to democracy in 2008, following its inaugural democratic elections. The King of Bhutan serves as the Head of State.
  • Official Name: Referred to as the 'Kingdom of Bhutan', its Bhutanese name is Druk Gyal Khap, translating to the 'Land of the Thunder Dragon'.
  • River: The Manas River, stretching over 376 km, holds the title of Bhutan's longest river. It flows through the Himalayan foothills, forming a transboundary river between southern Bhutan and India.
  • Government system: Bhutan follows a parliamentary monarchy system.
  • Borders: Bhutan shares borders with only two countries: India and Tibet (an autonomous region of China).

Addressing the Persistent Issue of Gender Pay Disparity

  • 20 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

A recent World Bank Group report highlighted that women globally earn only 77 cents for every dollar earned by men, underscoring the persistent gender pay gap where women, on average, earn less than men.

Context:

  • The World Bank Group's recent report sheds light on the persistent issue of the gender pay gap, revealing that women globally earn only 77 cents for every dollar their male counterparts earn.
  • This disparity has been a contention, with critics sometimes questioning its existence.
    • However, the International Labour Organisation regards the gender pay gap as a tangible indicator of inequality between men and women.
  • While various reports present different figures, it is crucial to acknowledge the underlying factors that contribute to this gap and work towards eradicating them to achieve equitable pay for all individuals, regardless of gender.

How is the Gender Pay Gap Calculated?

  • The International Labour Organization (ILO) defines the gender pay gap as the difference between the average wage levels of all working women and men in the labor market, whether they are paid a monthly salary, hourly wage, or daily wage.
    • It is crucial to note that this gap does not exclusively represent the wage disparity between men and women with similar qualifications and job responsibilities.
    • Rather, it encompasses the overall earnings difference between all working women and men.
  • While the concept of "equal pay for equal work" advocates for equitable compensation for men and women with the same qualifications and job duties, the gender pay gap reflects broader income disparities.
  • There is no single, universally agreed-upon method for calculating the gender pay gap.
    • Different organizations and studies may produce varying figures due to their distinct approaches.
  • Understanding the various factors contributing to the gender pay gap and addressing them through appropriate policies and initiatives is vital for achieving gender equality in the workforce and ensuring fair compensation for all workers.

Methodological Differences and the Persistence of the Gender Pay Gap:

  • The variation in reported gender pay gaps can be attributed to the distinct methodologies employed by different organizations and studies.
    • For instance, Pew Research used hourly wages to calculate the disparity. At the same time, the US Bureau of Labor Statistics utilized weekly wages, considering only full-time workers, defined as those working at least 35 hours per week.
    • Such differences in approach can lead to varying estimates of the gender pay gap.
  • Despite these discrepancies in methodology, it is essential to recognize that the gender pay gap is a persistent issue in most countries and industries.
    • While the extent of the gap may differ across studies, the underlying reality is that income disparities between men and women continue to be a prevalent challenge.

What are the Root Causes of the Gender Pay Disparity?

  • The gender pay gap can be attributed to several interconnected factors that perpetuate income inequality between men and women.
  • Firstly, women's lower labor force participation rate is influenced by prevailing gender stereotypes and societal expectations about gender roles.
    • The International Labour Organization (ILO) reveals that the global labor force participation rate for women stands at just under 47%, compared to 72% for men.
    • In India, the 2011 Census reported a workforce participation rate of 25.51% for women, against 53.26% for men.
  • Secondly, even when women join the workforce, they are often concentrated in lower-paying sectors or job roles.
    • The ILO's Women in Business and Management report found that fewer women occupy management and leadership positions, particularly at higher levels.
    • They are more likely to work in support functions such as human resources and financial administration, leading to a lower average salary compared to male managers.
  • A Georgetown University survey in 2013 further highlighted that the top 10 highest-paying professions, primarily in engineering and computer science, were dominated by men, while women were overrepresented in the 10 lowest-paying professions, such as arts and education.
  • Additionally, women are more likely to work part-time due to limited full-time employment opportunities and family responsibilities.
    • In 73 countries, based on 2018 data, women outnumbered men as part-time workers.
    • The ILO explains that part-time work often lacks proportional benefits to full-time positions, impacting women's overall remuneration over time.
  • Other institutional and socioeconomic factors, such as the traditional view of men as breadwinners, lower investments in women's education, and concerns over safety in commuting and the workplace, also contribute to the gender pay gap.
  • Addressing these underlying issues and promoting gender equity in the workforce is essential to bridging the gender pay gap and achieving fair compensation for all individuals.

Understanding the Implications of the Gender Pay Gap:

  • Analyzing the gender pay gap through various demographic factors reveals patterns that provide valuable insights into income disparities between men and women.
    • For example, women in their mid-30s and 40s often experience a decline in earnings compared to men in similar positions and professions.
  • Critiques of the 77% statistic argue that it overlooks the "motherhood penalty," where unmarried women earn 95 cents or more for every dollar a man makes.
    • This penalty suggests that women face career growth setbacks when they take breaks to raise children, highlighting an area requiring attention to promote equal opportunities.
  • The 2023 Sveriges Riksbank Prize in Economic Sciences winner, Claudia Goldin, extensively researched pay equality and argued that traditional gender roles force men to "step up" in their careers while women "step back" for family responsibilities.
    • This dynamic ultimately disadvantages both genders, as men miss out on family time, and women sacrifice their careers.
  • Efforts to close the gender pay gap, such as implementing maternity and paternity leave policies and flexible work arrangements, have shown promise in reducing income disparities.
  • However, the pace of progress varies, emphasizing the need for continued attention and innovation in promoting equal opportunities for all workers.

Conclusion

The gender pay gap continues to pose significant challenges across nations and industries. Examining demographics and career stages reveals important patterns that underline disparities between men's and women's earnings. Addressing inequalities, such as the "motherhood penalty," and transforming traditional work structures are vital for achieving equal opportunities. While policies like parental leave and flexible work arrangements have shown promise, sustained commitment to innovation and reform is crucial for fostering lasting progress and a more equitable professional environment.

The Role of NFHS Data in Formulating Policies for Women's Financial Inclusion

  • 19 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

Financial inclusion awareness programmes must give special attention to women in households not headed by women.

Context:

  • Financial inclusion is a key driver for realizing a more sustainable and inclusive future, as it directly influences the achievement of eight out of the 17 United Nations' Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs).
  • Despite its importance, inequalities continue to exist, with India's subpar performance in the Global Gender Gap Report 2023 underscoring significant gaps in the economic realm.
  • To address these disparities, particularly for women in India, it is vital to conduct a comprehensive evaluation of the complex aspects of financial inclusion.
  • Insights can be drawn from multiple sources such as the World Bank's Global Findex Database and the National Family Health Survey (NFHS), ultimately paving the way for targeted interventions and improved financial access for all.

What is Financial Inclusion?

  • Financial inclusion is a method of offering banking and financial services to individuals.
  • It aims to include everybody in society by giving them basic financial services regardless of their income or savings.
  • It focuses on providing financial solutions to the economically underprivileged.
  • The term is broadly used to describe the provision of savings and loan services to the poor in an inexpensive and easy-to-use form.
  • It aims to ensure that the poor and marginalized make the best use of their money and attain financial education.
  • With advances in financial technology and digital transactions, more and more startups are now making financial inclusion simpler to achieve.

The Role of Financial Inclusion in Advancing Women's Empowerment:

  • Financial inclusion not only facilitates women's access to bank accounts but also drives broader economic participation and empowerment.
  • By offering women avenues for savings, credit, and investment, financial inclusion empowers them to manage risks, build assets, and seize socio-economic opportunities.
  • In doing so, it bolsters women's resilience to economic uncertainties, fosters greater household welfare, and promotes economic stability, thereby illustrating its pivotal role in driving gender equity and sustainable development.

Insights from NFHS Data on Women's Financial Inclusion Progress:

  • The NFHS data offers a comprehensive understanding of the multi-faceted dimensions of financial inclusion among women in India.
  • Over the past two decades, several indicators point towards a significant improvement in women's economic empowerment and access to financial services including:

Financial Autonomy and Decision-making:

  • A notable aspect highlighted by the NFHS surveys is the increasing financial autonomy among women.
  • There has been a marked shift towards greater control over financial resources, with more women possessing self-operated bank accounts and playing an active role in financial decision-making within their households.
  • This trend signifies a positive step towards women's economic independence, contributing to their overall empowerment and well-being.

Awareness and Utilization of Micro-Credit Programs:

  • Micro-credit schemes have emerged as a key facilitator of financial assistance for women entrepreneurs and small business owners in rural India.
  • The NFHS data indicates a growing awareness of these programs among women, with an increasing number utilizing micro-credit facilities to support their economic activities.
  • This underscores the importance of targeted interventions and support mechanisms in promoting women's access to formal credit sources, fostering entrepreneurship, and generating income at the grassroots level.

Access and Utilization of Formal Banking Services:

  • An analysis of factors such as education, occupation, and household characteristics reveals key determinants of women's financial inclusion.
  • The NFHS data emphasizes the pivotal role of education in enabling women's awareness and utilization of financial services.
  • Similarly, occupation and access to electronic media also significantly influence women's access to formal banking channels and digital financial tools.
  • These insights underscore the need for targeted interventions and policy measures to address disparities and barriers, ensuring inclusive financial access, particularly among marginalized and vulnerable groups of women.

Advances in Global Financial Inclusion and India:

  • Financial inclusion has become a key enabler of economic growth and development worldwide, with India demonstrating substantial progress in this arena.
  • According to the World Bank's Global Findex Database, there has been a significant increase in adult ownership of bank accounts globally between 2011 and 2020.
  • India's commendable growth of 42 percentage points during this period exemplifies the success of targeted interventions promoting financial access, particularly for marginalized communities such as women.
  • This upward trend emphasizes the importance of continued efforts in fostering inclusive financial systems to ensure sustainable development and shared prosperity.

The Influence of Government Initiatives on Financial Inclusion:

  • India's commitment to advancing financial inclusion has resulted in substantial progress, particularly in reducing the gender gap in account ownership.
    • The introduction of the Pradhan Mantri Jan Dhan Yojana (PMJDY) in 2014 played a pivotal role in this achievement, offering universal access to banking services, including savings accounts, remittances, and overdrafts to underserved communities such as women in rural and urban areas.
    • By January 2024, PMJDY had facilitated the opening over 28 crore accounts for women, significantly contributing to bridging the gender gap in financial access.
  • Furthermore, government initiatives like the Deendayal Antyodaya Yojana and the National Rural Livelihood Mission (DAY-NRLM) have been instrumental in fostering women's economic empowerment and participation in the formal financial sector.
    • These schemes provide opportunities for skill development, entrepreneurship training, and access to credit, enabling women to establish and sustain livelihoods.
  • In addition, social protection programs such as the Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana and Pradhan Mantri Matru Vandana Yojana offer financial assistance and support during critical life stages such as pregnancy and homeownership.
    • Collectively, these initiatives have played a vital role in promoting women's economic independence and overall well-being, underscoring the importance of continued efforts towards inclusive financial systems.

Challenges and Way Forward:

  • While significant progress has been made in advancing financial inclusion, several challenges remain, requiring concerted efforts and multi-stakeholder collaboration to address. Key areas of focus include:
  • Enhancing Financial Literacy: Despite the expansion of banking services, a significant proportion of the population, particularly in rural and marginalized communities, lack adequate knowledge and understanding of financial products and services.
    • By promoting targeted education and awareness campaigns, we can empower individuals to make informed financial decisions and fully utilize available resources.
  • Bridging the Digital Divide: The potential of digital financial services to enhance access and convenience is immense.
    • However, disparities in internet connectivity, smartphone ownership, and digital literacy create barriers to their effectiveness.
    • Expanding digital infrastructure and promoting digital literacy initiatives are critical to ensuring equitable access to digital financial services for all segments of society.
  • Promoting Inclusivity of Marginalized Communities: Systemic barriers continue to hinder the meaningful participation of marginalized communities, including women, minorities, and persons with disabilities in the financial ecosystem.
    • These barriers are multifaceted, encompassing social, cultural, and economic factors.
    • To overcome these challenges, tailored interventions and affirmative action programs are necessary, fostering an enabling environment that promotes their inclusion and empowerment.
  • Advancing through Collaboration: A collaborative approach involving multiple stakeholders, including government agencies, financial institutions, civil society organizations, and grassroots initiatives, is indispensable in advancing financial inclusion.
    • By coordinating efforts, leveraging resources, and implementing holistic solutions, we can collectively navigate the path ahead, overcoming challenges, and ensuring inclusive and sustainable financial systems for all.

Conclusion

Advancing financial inclusion for women in India is essential for fostering inclusive growth and sustainable development. While initiatives like PMJDY and DAY-NRLM have made significant strides, concerted action is necessary to tackle remaining disparities and fully leverage women's economic potential. By emphasizing education, digital literacy, and tailored awareness initiatives, India can unlock fresh opportunities for women's economic empowerment, thereby advancing the agenda of inclusive growth and prosperity.

Many elections, AI’s dark dimension

  • 18 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

With a series of elections to be held across the world in 2024, the potential of AI to disrupt democracies cannot be dismissed.

Context:

  • The rapid advancement of Artificial Intelligence (AI) marks a significant turning point in human history.
  • With the rise of Generative AI (GAI), the possibility of achieving Artificial General Intelligence (AGI) becomes increasingly feasible, raising questions about its potential to mimic human abilities.
  • Thus, exploring AI's profound influence on human life, particularly within electoral contexts and broader societal realms, is imperative.

What is Generative AI (GAI)?

  • Generative AI, short for Generative Artificial Intelligence, represents a branch of artificial intelligence focused on creating new content rather than simply processing or analyzing existing data.
    • Unlike traditional AI systems, which are designed to recognize patterns or make predictions based on historical data, generative AI models have the capability to generate new data that resembles real-world examples.
  • These models work by learning patterns and structures from large datasets and then using that knowledge to create new content.
    • They can produce various types of content, including images, text, audio, and even video.
      • For example, a generative AI model trained on a dataset of human faces can generate realistic-looking images of faces that have never existed before.
  • One of the key technologies behind generative AI is deep learning, particularly a type of neural network called a generative adversarial network (GAN).
    • In a GAN, two neural networks are pitted against each other: a generator and a discriminator.
    • The generator creates new data samples, while the discriminator tries to distinguish between real and fake data.
    • Through this adversarial process, the generator learns to produce increasingly realistic content.
  • Generative AI has a wide range of applications across various industries.
    • In the field of art and design, it can be used to generate new artwork, music, or even fashion designs.
    • In entertainment, it can create realistic characters and environments for video games and movies.
    • In healthcare, it can generate synthetic medical images for training diagnostic algorithms.
  • However, the technology also raises ethical concerns, such as the potential for misuse, copyright issues, and the creation of fake content.

The Role of Artificial Intelligence (AI) in Shaping Electoral Landscapes:

  • A Transformative Influence- AI's Ascendancy in Politics: The integration of artificial intelligence (AI) into electoral processes represents a profound transformation in global political dynamics.
    • As nations gear up for elections, the incorporation of AI technologies introduces new variables that require a reassessment of conventional campaign methodologies and voter outreach strategies.
    • In the context of upcoming elections, including India's extensive seven-phase general election, AI emerges as a decisive factor influencing electoral trajectories.
    • The deployment of Generative AI, with its ability to conduct dynamic simulations and replicate real-world interactions, presents unprecedented opportunities and challenges for political stakeholders and the electorate.
  • Harnessing AI for Campaign Innovation and Voter Engagement: Political entities and candidates are leveraging AI-driven tools to analyze vast datasets, craft targeted messaging, and optimize campaign blueprints.
    • AI-powered predictive analytics empower parties to pinpoint swing voters, tailor messages to specific demographics, and deploy resources more precisely.
    • Additionally, AI-enabled sentiment analysis of social media platforms furnishes real-time insights into voter attitudes and emerging concerns, informing campaign narratives and responsiveness strategies.
    • Moreover, AI's impact extends beyond campaign frameworks to encompass voter engagement and mobilization endeavors.
    • Through AI-driven chatbots, personalized interactions with voters are facilitated, addressing inquiries, disseminating information, and fostering voter participation.

What are the Concerns Regarding AI's Impact on Electoral Integrity?

  • Challenges Posed by Deep Fakes: The expanding presence of AI within electoral arenas prompts apprehensions regarding its implications for democratic processes and the integrity of elections.
    • The emergence of 'Deep Fake' technology, capable of generating convincingly realistic yet fabricated audio, video, and textual materials, presents a formidable obstacle in identifying and combatting misinformation and disinformation campaigns.
    • Deep fakes produced by AI possess the capacity to deceive voters, manipulate public opinion, and erode trust in democratic institutions, thus distorting the integrity of electoral outcomes.
  • Impact on Public Discourse and Decision-making: Moreover, the utilization of AI-powered algorithms in social media platforms for content curation and recommendation purposes raises concerns regarding filter bubbles, echo chambers, and algorithmic bias.
    • These algorithms, driven by AI, may inadvertently amplify divisive content, perpetuate existing biases, and contribute to the segmentation of public discourse, consequently influencing voter perceptions and decision-making processes.

What are AI Influences its challenges, and Mitigation Strategies?

  • As artificial intelligence (AI) permeates various spheres of society, including electoral contexts, addressing the concept of AI influence becomes increasingly critical.
  • AI influence refers to the ability of AI-driven tactics to shape human behavior and decision-making processes, often without individuals' explicit awareness or consent.
  • Challenges in Addressing AI Influence: A primary challenge in addressing AI influence is mitigating its impact on electoral dynamics.
    • AI-powered algorithms can analyze extensive data sets to predict and influence voter behavior, potentially affecting electoral outcomes in ways that may not align with democratic principles or voter preferences.
    • To counter this, safeguards must be implemented to prevent undue AI-driven influence on electoral processes and outcomes.
  • Promoting Transparency and Accountability: Transparency and accountability are crucial in addressing AI influence.
    • Electoral authorities and policymakers should establish clear guidelines and regulations governing the use of AI in political campaigns and voter engagement efforts.
    • This includes mandates for disclosing the use of AI-driven algorithms, data sources, and methodologies in campaign strategies, enhancing public awareness and understanding of AI's role in elections.
  • Protecting Democratic Values: Efforts to combat AI influence should prioritize safeguarding democratic values and electoral integrity.
    • Measures must be implemented to detect and mitigate AI-driven manipulation, such as disinformation campaigns, deep fakes, and algorithmic bias.
    • Collaborative approaches involving electoral authorities, technology firms, civil society organizations, and academia are essential to develop effective tools and techniques for detecting and countering AI-driven threats to electoral integrity.
  • Empowering Voter Literacy: Promoting media literacy and digital literacy among voters is crucial for combating AI influence.
    • By equipping voters with the skills to critically evaluate information sources, distinguish fact from fiction, and identify manipulation tactics, individuals can resist the influence of AI-driven propaganda and make informed voting decisions.
    • Educational initiatives, public awareness campaigns, and media literacy programs are vital for enhancing voter resilience against AI-driven misinformation and manipulation.

Additional Measures for Ensuring Electoral Integrity:

  • Incorporating Ethical Guidelines into AI Governance: Furthermore, the ethical dimensions of AI governance should inform the development and application of AI technologies within electoral contexts.
    • Ethical AI governance frameworks should prioritize principles such as fairness, transparency, accountability, and adherence to democratic values.
    • This entails conducting comprehensive risk assessments, ensuring transparency and explainability in algorithms, and establishing mechanisms for independent oversight and accountability.
  • Adopting Proactive Strategies: Policymakers, electoral authorities, and civil society actors should embrace proactive strategies to uphold electoral integrity and democratic principles in the age of AI.
    • Implementing robust regulatory frameworks, transparency mandates, and oversight mechanisms is crucial for mitigating the risks associated with AI-driven manipulation and disinformation campaigns.
    • Furthermore, investments in digital literacy initiatives and media literacy programs can empower voters to critically assess information sources, distinguish between fact and fiction, and resist manipulation efforts.

Way Forward:

  • The risks associated with AI pose a substantial threat, surpassing concerns regarding biases in its design and development.
  • AI systems inherently tend to manifest adversarial traits, for which effective mitigation strategies have yet to be fully realized.
  • Beyond electoral implications, India's position as a digital frontrunner necessitates a cautious approach towards AI adoption, recognizing both its potential advantages and disruptive capabilities.
  • While AI offers numerous benefits, it is imperative for the nation and its leaders to acknowledge its potential for malevolence.
  • India's prominence in digital innovation presents both opportunities and challenges, as the advancement of AI, including AGI, brings both advantages and risks.
  • Addressing the complexities of AI policy requires amplifying democratic voices and resisting the tendency to cede policymaking authority to a select few tech conglomerates.

Conclusion

The emergence of AI marks a significant milestone in human evolution, impacting electoral dynamics and social harmony in profound ways. While AI offers remarkable progress, it demands careful oversight to minimize its disruptive effects and uphold democratic values. As we venture into the realm of AI, wise decision-making and forward-thinking are essential to steer toward a future characterized by ethical AI governance and conscientious innovation.

Model Code of Conduct comes into force: Lok Sabha Elections 2024

  • 16 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

Recently, the Election Commission of India (ECI) announced that the country would vote in seven phases from April 19 to June 1 and the results will be announced on June 4. With this, the Model Code of Conduct (MCC) comes into effect.

What is the Model Code of Conduct (MCC)?

  • The Model Code of Conduct (MCC) is a set of guidelines published by the Election Commission of India (EC) for political parties and candidates to set standards of conduct during the election campaign and polling.
  • It also explains how parties can lodge complaints to the EC observers in case of dispute and instructs how the Ministers of the parties in power must conduct themselves when the MCC is in force.
  • In 2019, a new addition regarding election manifestos was added, instructing parties to not issue promises which were ‘repugnant to the ideals of the Constitution’.

Is the Model Code of Conduct (MCC) Legally Binding?

  • The MCC evolved as part of the ECI’s drive to ensure free and fair elections and was the result of a consensus among major political parties.
    • It has no statutory backing.
    • Simply put, this means anybody breaching the MCC can’t be proceeded against under any clause of the Code.
    • Everything is voluntary.
    • The EC uses moral sanction or censure for its enforcement.
  • The ECI can issue a notice to a politician or a party for an alleged breach of the MCC either on its own or based on a complaint by another party or individual.
    • Once a notice is issued, the person or party must reply in writing, either accepting fault and tendering an unconditional apology or rebutting the allegation.
    • In the latter case, if the person or party is found guilty subsequently, he/she can attract a written censure from the ECI, something that many see as a mere slap on the wrist.
  • However, several actions are listed as ‘electoral offenses’ and ‘corrupt practices’ under the Indian Penal Code (now known as Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita) and the Representation of the People Act, 1951 such as:
    • Causing tension between castes, religious or linguistic communities
    • Appealing to caste or communal feeling to secure votes
    • Using places of worship for election propaganda
    • Bribing/intimidating/impersonating voters
    • Canvassing within 100 meters of polling booths
    • Transporting voters to and from polling stations
    • Disrupting public meetings
    • Serving or distributing liquor on polling day
    • Holding public meetings 48 hours before the closing of polls
  • These actions will attract appropriate punishment as per these laws.

Previous Model Code of Conduct ‘Violations’:

  • During the 2023 Madhya Pradesh Assembly elections, Priyanka Gandhi Vadra was questioned by the ECI for alleging that Prime Minister Narendra Modi favored his "big industrialist friends" during an election rally.
  • In 2017, both BJP and Congress accused each other of violating the MCC during the Gujarat polls.
  • In 2014, Amit Shah and Azam Khan were banned from campaigning by the ECI during the Lok Sabha polls under Article 324 of the Constitution for inflammatory speeches, which was lifted after they apologized and pledged to follow the Code.

When Does MCC Come Into Force and End?

  • The MCC comes into force immediately when the election schedule is announced by the Election Commission and remains in operation till the election process is complete, i.e. results are announced.
  • The MCC applies to all elections to the Lok Sabha and State Assemblies.
  • It is also applicable for State Legislative Council elections from Local Bodies, and Graduates’ and Teachers’ Constituencies.
  • It is enforced throughout India in case of General elections, and the State up for polls in case of Legislative Assembly elections.

Who Is Bound by It?

  • All organizations, committees, corporations, and commissions (e.g. Transport authorities, Jal boards) funded wholly or partially by the Centre or State are bound by the MCC.
  • While listed political parties and candidates are bound to follow the MCC, even non-political organizations that hold campaigns favoring a political party or candidate are bound to follow specific guidelines mentioned by the EC.

How is the MCC Enforced?

  • Before holding polls for the General or State Assembly elections, the Election Commission issues guidelines to the government to shift out all officers including police who are posted in their home district, and who have completed/completed three out of four years in that district to ensure no interference.
  • The MCC is then implemented by the newly appointed officials and nodal EC officers monitor compliance.
  • No election campaigning is allowed within the constituency 48 hours before the close of polls.

What Restrictions Does the Model Code of Conduct Impose?

  • The MCC contains eight provisions dealing with general conduct, meetings, processions, polling day, polling booths, observers, the party in power, and election manifestos.
  • As soon as the code kicks in, the party in power, whether at the Centre or in the states, should ensure that it does not use its official position for campaigning.
    • Hence, no policy, project, or scheme can be announced that can influence voting behavior.
  • The party must also avoid advertising at the cost of the public exchequer or using official mass media for publicity on achievements to improve chances of victory in the elections.
  • The code also says the ministers must not combine official visits with election work or use official machinery for the same.
  • The ruling party cannot use government transport or machinery for campaigning.
  • It should also ensure that public places such as maidans etc., for holding election meetings, and facilities like the use of helipads are provided to the opposition parties on the same terms and conditions on which they are used by the party in power.
  • The issue of advertisement at the cost of the public exchequer in the newspapers and other media is also considered an offense.
  • The ruling government cannot make any ad-hoc appointments in government, public sector undertakings, etc., which may influence the voters.
  • Political parties or candidates can be criticized based only on their work record and no caste and communal sentiments can be used to lure voters.
  • Mosques, Churches, Temples, or any other places of worship should not be used for election campaigns.
  • Bribing, intimidating, or impersonation of voters is also barred.
  • Holding public meetings during the 48 hours before the hour fixed for the closing of the poll is also prohibited.
    • The 48 hours is known as “election silence”.
    • The idea is to allow a voter a campaign-free environment to reflect on events before casting her vote.

What are the Guidelines for Poll Manifestos?

  • Manifestos must not contain anything repugnant to the ideals enshrined in the Constitution.
  • They must reflect the rationale for welfare scheme promises and indicate ways to meet the financial requirements for it.
  • The manifesto documents must not be released during the prohibitory period (when MCC kicks in).

How are Violations Dealt With?

  • Any complaint regarding elections should be brought to EC observers, the Returning Officer, the local magistrate, the Chief Electoral Officer, or the Election Commission itself.
  • In response, any directions issued by the EC, Returning Officer, or District Election Officer shall be strictly complied with.

In issuing AI advisory, MEITY becomes a deity

  • 15 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

The Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology (MeitY) reportedly issued an advisory on 1 March 2024 (Advisory) to “intermediaries” and “platforms” hosting artificial Intelligence (AI) including generative AI-based models.

Context:

  • The Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology (MEITY), previously recognized as the Department of Electronics and IT (DEITY), has come under scrutiny regarding its endeavors to govern technology and the Internet.
  • It is imperative to examine MEITY's recent advisory regarding generative Artificial Intelligence (AI), exploring its legal foundation, uncertainties, and repercussions for technology regulation in India.

What is the Recent Advisory by MEITY on AI Regulation?

  • Regarding the Regulation of AI Technologies: The advisory urges tech firms to ensure that their AI models, including Large Language Models (LLMs) and Generative AI, prevent users from hosting or displaying unlawful content, addressing concerns about potential misuse.
  • Quality Assurance and Testing: It stresses the use of reliable and tested AI models while cautioning against deploying under-tested or unreliable ones without explicit permission from the Government of India, aiming to uphold quality standards and mitigate associated risks.
  • Advisory on Transparency and Accountability: The advisory highlights the importance of transparency and accountability in AI deployment, recommending appropriate labeling of AI models to acknowledge potential fallibility or unreliability, reflecting a broader commitment to ethical AI practices and user awareness of associated limitations and risks.

Analysis of Ambiguity Regarding the Legal Status of Government Advisory:

  • Lack of Statutory Authority: The uncertainty surrounding the legal status of MEITY's advisories is a key issue in assessing the government's regulatory power and its impact on stakeholders.
    • Unlike established regulatory bodies such as SEBI, MEITY lacks explicit statutory powers to issue binding directives or advisories.
    • This absence of a specific legal framework leads to interpretation challenges and questions about the enforceability of MEITY's directives.
  • Uncertainty on MEITY’s Advisory Power: The IT Act of 2000, which primarily governs technology regulation in India, does not grant MEITY the authority to issue advisories on emerging technologies like AI.
    • While the IT Act addresses electronic records, digital signatures, and cybersecurity, it does not specify MEITY's mandate to regulate AI or other technological advancements.
  • Lack of Defined Terms and References: The term "advisory" lacks a precise definition under the IT Act or other relevant legislation, allowing MEITY to issue directives that carry the weight of official recommendations without a clear legal foundation.
    • This ambiguity leaves stakeholders, including technology firms and legal experts, uncertain about the legal consequences of non-compliance with MEITY's advisories.
    • Furthermore, MEITY's advisories often lack explicit citations of legal authority or references to specific legislative provisions, contributing to perceptions of arbitrary regulatory actions.
  • Compliance Challenges: In the absence of clear penalties or enforcement mechanisms tied to MEITY's advisories, compliance becomes discretionary rather than obligatory.
    • This situation underscores the ambiguity surrounding the legal standing of MEITY's regulatory directives, raising concerns about accountability and procedural fairness in technology regulation.

Additional Concerns Regarding Government’s Advisory on AI:

  • Transparency Issues and Hasty Policymaking: MEITY's advisories, particularly those related to AI regulation, exhibit a pattern of expedited policymaking driven by media events, lacking thorough evaluation or stakeholder input.
    • Released with limited transparency, these advisories fail to provide comprehensive information, undermining the credibility of MEITY's regulatory decisions.
  • Ambiguous Terminology and Ministerial Clarifications: The recent AI advisory introduces vague terms like "bias prevention" and proposes an AI model licensing system without clear definitions or legal framework.
    • Ministerial clarifications on social media platforms add to the confusion, leaving terms undefined and enforcement mechanisms uncertain.
    • This ambiguity contributes to stakeholder uncertainty and undermines legal clarity.
  • The decline in Administrative Standards and Overreach: MEITY's reliance on advisory regulations marks a decline in administrative standards, sidestepping formal legislative processes and stakeholder consultations.
    • The extension of IT Rules, 2021, to regulate digital content further illustrates regulatory overreach.
    • Additionally, the influence of social media metrics on policy decisions reflects a departure from deliberative governance.
  • Threat to Freedom of Expression: MEITY's regulatory actions, including AI governance advisories and social media content moderation directives, risk infringing on online freedom of expression.
    • The vague and arbitrary nature of these directives may lead to self-censorship among individuals and organizations, fearing repercussions for expressing dissent or challenging government policies.
    • This suppression of free speech undermines democratic discourse and diversity in the digital realm.
  • Expansion of Surveillance and Control Measures: Digital authoritarianism often entails expanding state surveillance and control over online activities.
    • MEITY's regulatory efforts, such as implementing IT Rules, 2021, and proposing AI governance measures, could facilitate heightened government surveillance and online content censorship.
    • This erosion of digital privacy rights jeopardizes individual autonomy and fosters a climate of apprehension and self-censorship among internet users.
  • Impact on Innovation and Technological Advancement: MEITY's regulatory overreach and legal ambiguity pose substantial obstacles to innovation and technological progress in India.
    • Uncertainty surrounding compliance obligations and enforcement mechanisms discourages investment and innovation in emerging fields like AI.
    • Moreover, burdensome regulatory requirements may stifle entrepreneurship and impede the growth of India's technology sector.

Why Regulate the AI Sector?

  • The regulation of Artificial Intelligence (AI) represents an evolving landscape as governments navigate the potential benefits and pitfalls of this influential technology.

Reasons for Regulation:

  • Risk Management: AI carries the potential for bias, discrimination, privacy breaches, and safety concerns. Regulations serve to mitigate these risks effectively.
  • Transparency and Understandability: Many AI systems operate opaquely, complicating comprehension of their decision-making processes. Regulations can foster transparency and clarity.
  • Establishing Accountability: Regulatory frameworks can delineate clear lines of responsibility for the creation, deployment, and utilization of AI systems.
  • Building Public Confidence: Well-defined regulations can instill public confidence in AI technologies, promoting their conscientious development and application.

Way Forward:

  • Unified Effort: Combating the challenges posed by digital authoritarianism demands a unified effort to uphold democratic principles, foster transparency and accountability, and protect fundamental rights in the digital realm.
  • Scrutiny of MEITY’s Regulatory Measures: MEITY's regulatory initiatives must undergo thorough scrutiny and oversight to ensure alignment with democratic norms and respect for individual liberties.

Conclusion

MEITY's advisory regulations raise pertinent questions regarding its legal jurisdiction, transparency, and impact on technological advancement in India. The ambiguity in terminology, swift policy formulation, and reliance on social media for dissemination weaken the credibility and efficacy of regulatory measures. Addressing these concerns necessitates a reassessment of MEITY's regulatory strategy and a commitment to transparent, inclusive governance practices.

 

India’s R&D Funding, Breaking Down the Numbers

  • 14 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

The announcement in the interim Budget for 2024-25, of a corpus of ?1 lakh crore to bolster the research and innovation ecosystem within the country, has sparked enthusiasm within the scientific and research communities.

Context:

  • In the current scenario, the recent allocation of a substantial ?1 lakh crore in India's Interim Budget for 2024-25 to enhance the research and innovation ecosystem underscores the nation's dedication to advancing scientific pursuits.
  • Additionally, the decision to expand the iconic slogan 'Jai Jawan Jai Kisan' to 'Jai Jawan, Jai Kisan, Jai Vigyan, Jai Anusandhan' signifies a renewed focus on research and innovation as essential elements of development.
  • Evaluating the present state of India's research and development (R&D) landscape, including its funding, output, and the potential impact of recent initiatives on nurturing a conducive environment for research and innovation, is imperative.

Current Outlook of India's R&D Landscape:

  • Gross Expenditure on Research and Development: India's R&D sector has witnessed substantial growth, with Gross Expenditure on Research and Development (GERD) increasing from ?6,01,968 million in 2010-11 to ?12,73,810 million in 2020-21.
    • Despite this growth, India's research investment as a percentage of GDP remains at 0.64%, lagging behind major developed and emerging economies like China (2.4%), Germany (3.1%), South Korea (4.8%), and the United States (3.5%).
  • Academic Talent: Despite the relatively lower GDP allocation for R&D, India has emerged as a key producer of academic talent, annually producing an impressive 40,813 PhDs, ranking third globally after the United States and China.
  • Research Output: India's research output remains substantial, ranking third globally with over 3,00,000 publications in 2022, showcasing the nation's robust research ecosystem and its dedication to advancing knowledge across various fields.
  • Innovation: India demonstrates commendable performance in patent grants, securing the sixth position globally with 30,490 patents granted in 2022.
    • While this number is lower compared to the U.S. and China, it reflects India's evolving innovation landscape and its potential for further growth in intellectual property creation.
  • Major Sponsors: In India, GERD is primarily driven by the government sector, including the central government (43.7%), State governments (6.7%), Higher Education Institutions (HEIs) (8.8%), and the public sector industry (4.4%), with the private sector industry contributing only 36.4% during 2020–21.
  • Investment in R&D: According to R&D statistics (2022-23) from the Department of Science and Technology, India's total investment in R&D reached $17.2 billion in 2020-21.
    • Within this sum, 54% ($9.4 billion) is allocated to the government sector, predominantly utilized by four key scientific agencies — the DRDO (30.7%), the Department of Space (18.4%), ICAR (12.4%), and the Department of Atomic Energy (11.4%).

Major Challenges Facing R&D:

  • Private Sector Inertia: Despite India's significant Gross Expenditure on Research and Development (GERD), private industries contribute only 37% of the country's R&D funding, reflecting a discrepancy compared to the global trend where business enterprises typically contribute over 65%.
  • Low Participation by Higher Education Institutions (HEIs): HEIs play a minor role in R&D investment, contributing only 8.8% ($1.5 billion), limiting their potential contribution to research and innovation.
  • Brain Drain: Talented researchers often migrate to countries with better research infrastructure and funding opportunities, leading to a loss of skilled manpower and hindering R&D progress.
  • Inadequate Education and Training: The education system may fail to adequately equip students with the requisite skills and knowledge needed to excel in R&D, posing a challenge to innovation and scientific advancement.
  • Bureaucratic Hurdles: Complex procedures and bureaucratic red tape can impede research initiatives, delaying progress and discouraging potential investors from engaging in R&D activities.
  • Limited Collaboration with Academia: A gap exists between academic research and industry needs, hampering the effective transfer of knowledge and technology, and inhibiting the development of innovative solutions to real-world problems.

Proposed Measures:

  • Embrace a Collaborative Approach: Fostering collaboration among the government, business enterprises, and Higher Education Institutions (HEIs) is imperative to harness the full potential of science, technology, and innovation for driving economic growth and technological progress.
  • Promote Public-Private Partnerships: Encouraging collaboration between academia and industry can facilitate the translation of research findings into commercial applications, bridging the gap between theoretical knowledge and practical implementation.
  • Optimize Resource Allocation: Directing resources towards safeguarding intellectual property rights and addressing technical challenges can unlock new markets and spur innovation.
  • Provide Government Subsidies to Stimulate Private Sector Investment: Implementing government initiatives such as tax incentives and grants can incentivize increased private sector investment in Research and Development (R&D), bolstering India's R&D ecosystem and fostering stronger industry-academia partnerships for knowledge exchange and innovation.
  • Prioritize Skill Development: Reforms in education that prioritize the development of critical thinking, problem-solving, and research skills are essential to nurture a workforce capable of driving innovation and scientific advancement.
  • Streamline Bureaucratic Processes: Simplifying regulatory procedures and regulations can expedite research projects, attract investments, and create a conducive environment for R&D activities.
  • Incentivize Innovation: Introducing government schemes and awards to recognize and reward innovative research endeavors can incentivize scientists, researchers, and businesses to pursue groundbreaking innovations that contribute to societal progress and economic development.

Government Initiatives:

  • National Deep Tech Startup Policy (NDTSP): Recent initiatives, such as the National Deep Tech Startup Policy (NDTSP) and the Anusandhan National Research Foundation (ANRF) Act, signal a strong commitment to fostering research and innovation.
    • The NDTSP aims to incentivize private sector engagement in R&D, while the ANRF Act seeks to bridge the R&D investment gap and nurture a robust research culture within HEIs.
  • Anusandhan National Research Foundation (ANRF) Act: Enacted to address India's persistent R&D investment gap, this legislation aims to cultivate a thriving research culture within Higher Education Institutions (HEIs) and drive innovation across various sectors.
  • UchhatarAvishkarYojana (UAY): Geared towards promoting innovation that addresses industry needs and enhances India's manufacturing competitiveness, UAY fosters collaboration between academia and industry, both domestically and internationally, to drive advancements in research and technology.
  • Impacting Research Innovation & Technology (IMPRINT): This initiative endeavors to tackle pressing engineering challenges by facilitating interdisciplinary research collaborations and translating knowledge into practical solutions across ten designated technology domains.
  • Establishment of Research Parks: Research parks established at premier institutes such as IIT Delhi, IIT Guwahati, and IIT Kharagpur serve as platforms for fostering collaboration between academia, industry, and entrepreneurial ventures, facilitating the establishment of R&D units, and promoting innovation.
  • Impact of Recent Initiatives: These initiatives, coupled with the allocation in the interim Budget, are poised to drive India's research and innovation agenda forward, particularly in burgeoning industries.

Way Forward:

  • India's technological and manufacturing ambitions rely on a pivotal transformation within its R&D domain, necessitating a dual-pronged strategy:
  • Encouraging active participation from the private sector, alongside
  • Strengthening the research infrastructure within academia.
  • Embracing a multifaceted approach that engages a spectrum of stakeholders is imperative to confront the challenges and unlock the full potential of R&D, fostering India's economic expansion and global competitiveness.
  • Drawing insights from the R&D frameworks of developed nations while leveraging India's inherent strengths in agile decision-making and strategic alignment could catalyze a formidable evolution within its R&D landscape.

Conclusion

While significant strides have been made, there is a need for increased funding, stronger industry-academia collaboration, and policy measures to incentivize private sector involvement. Recent initiatives such as the NDTSP and the ANRF Act represent positive steps towards realizing India's potential as a powerhouse of research and innovation. By creating a conducive environment for research and innovation, India can pave the way for sustainable development and prosperity in the years to come.

CAA Rules go against equality, federalism and India’s Constitution

  • 13 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

Although protecting persecuted individuals is commendable, the ideal solution is to grant refugee status to all, irrespective of their religious affiliation.

Context:

  • India has been engaged in heated discussions over the Citizenship Amendment Act (CAA) since its inception in 2019.
  • The recent issuance of Rules under the CAA by the Union government has sparked renewed debates concerning its impact on India's constitutional secularism.
  • Amid these discussions, it is crucial to assess the CAA's provisions, their effects on citizenship, and the wider socio-political consequences they carry.

Concerns Surrounding the Citizenship Amendment Act:

  • Selective Approach to Citizenship: The Citizenship Amendment Act (CAA) of 2019 amends India's Citizenship Act of 1955 and introduces a selective approach to granting citizenship.
    • This selective approach is a significant point of contention, as it differentiates between individuals based on their religious identity.
  • Preferential Treatment for Certain Religious Groups: The CAA expedites the citizenship process for undocumented immigrants belonging to Hindu, Sikh, Buddhist, Jain, Parsi, and Christian communities from Pakistan, Afghanistan, and Bangladesh.
    • However, the Act explicitly excludes Muslims from these provisions, which has led to considerable debate and criticism.
  • Violation of Secular Principles: Critics argue that the CAA violates the secular principles enshrined in India's Constitution.
    • Secularism, a foundational tenet of India's democratic ethos, mandates that the state remain neutral in matters of religion and guarantee equal rights and protections to all citizens, regardless of their faith.
  • Discriminatory Nature: The CAA's exclusion of Muslims from its purview has been perceived as discriminatory and runs counter to India's historical commitment to religious pluralism and tolerance.
    • This discriminatory nature has sparked widespread protests and highlighted deep divisions within Indian society regarding citizenship, identity, and secularism.
  • Upholding Constitutional Principles: The protests against the CAA underscore the importance of upholding constitutional principles and safeguarding the rights of all citizens, irrespective of their religious affiliation.
    • This controversy serves as a reminder of the need for inclusive and non-discriminatory policies that respect the diversity of India's population.

Potential Implications of the Notified Rules under the Citizenship Amendment Act:

  • Streamlined Citizenship Process: The notified Rules streamline the citizenship application process by providing clear procedures and documentation requirements.
    • This standardization can potentially expedite the citizenship-granting process, allowing eligible individuals to secure legal status more efficiently.
  • Lenient Proof Requirements: The Rules offer leniency in requirements for proof of nationality and residence, accepting various documents as evidence.
    • This flexibility may enable more individuals to establish their eligibility for citizenship under the CAA.
  • Centralisation of Authority: The notified Rules centralize the citizenship-granting process at the national level, with an empowered committee formed by the Union government now responsible for processing applications.
    • This centralisation consolidates power at the national level, potentially reducing the role of local authorities in decision-making and grassroots-level accountability.
  • Legal and Constitutional Challenges: The Rules are likely to face legal and constitutional challenges, particularly regarding their compatibility with India's constitutional principles and international legal standards.
    • Critics argue that the CAA and its accompanying Rules violate the constitutional guarantee of equality before the law (Article 14) by discriminating based on religion.
  • Contradictions and Regional Discontent: The implementation of the CAA has exposed internal contradictions within India's citizenship laws, particularly in the case of Assam.
    • The discrepancy between Section 6A of the Citizenship Act, 1955, and the provisions of the CAA has fuelled discontent among local communities and complicated the citizenship landscape.
  • Overall, the notified Rules under the Citizenship Amendment Act have significant implications for the citizenship-granting process, the balance of power between national and local authorities, and the interpretation of constitutional principles.
  • As the legal and societal debates surrounding the CAA continue, these implications will likely shape the discourse on citizenship and belonging in India.

Moving Toward Inclusive Solutions: Addressing the Concerns Raised by the Citizenship Amendment Act:

  • To address the concerns raised by the Citizenship Amendment Act (CAA) and its accompanying Rules, it is crucial to adopt a more inclusive approach that aligns with international humanitarian norms and India's commitment to secularism.

Here are some steps that can be taken:

  • Inclusive Protection for Persecuted Individuals: Instead of granting citizenship based on religious affiliation, India should consider offering refugee status to all persecuted individuals, regardless of their religion.
    • This approach would be in line with international humanitarian norms and would uphold the principle of secularism enshrined in India's Constitution.
  • Ratification of International Conventions: Ratifying international conventions such as the Geneva Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees would demonstrate India's commitment to protecting vulnerable populations and ensuring their rights.
    • This step would also bring India in line with global standards for refugee protection.
  • Reevaluation of the Citizenship Amendment Act: Given the concerns surrounding the CAA's compatibility with constitutional principles and its potential for discrimination, it is essential to reevaluate the Act's provisions.
    • This process should involve a thorough examination of the CAA's impact on vulnerable communities and its alignment with India's democratic values.
  • Upholding Constitutional Values: To ensure that the CAA and other legislation adhere to India's core values, it is crucial to reaffirm the principles of equality, non-discrimination, and secularism as outlined in the Constitution.
    • Policies and laws should be crafted to uphold these principles and protect the rights of all individuals, irrespective of their religious affiliation.
  • By taking these steps, India can work toward addressing the concerns raised by the Citizenship Amendment Act and foster a more inclusive approach to citizenship that aligns with the nation's historical commitment to diversity and pluralism.

Centre notifies implementation of Citizenship Amendment Act Rules

  • 12 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

More than four years after Parliament passed The Citizenship (Amendment) Act, 2019, the Ministry of Home Affairs on Monday notified the Rules to implement the law.

Context:

  • The Citizenship Amendment Act (CAA) of 2019 amended the Citizenship Act of 1955 to provide a pathway to Indian citizenship for migrants belonging to Hindu, Sikh, Buddhist, Jain, Parsi, or Christian communities who entered India before December 31, 2014, from Pakistan, Afghanistan, or Bangladesh.
  • The law was enacted amidst nationwide protests, particularly in Assam, and was officially notified on January 10, 2020.
  • However, the implementation of the CAA was delayed due to the absence of accompanying rules and regulations.
    • To address this issue, the Union government issued an order on May 28, 2021, empowering district collectors in 13 districts with significant migrant populations to accept citizenship applications from the groups specified in the 2019 amendment.
  • The CAA has been a subject of controversy and criticism, with opponents arguing that it violates the secular principles of the Indian constitution by excluding Muslims from its purview.
  • Supporters of the law contend that it offers relief to persecuted minorities from neighboring countries.
  • As the rules for the CAA have now been put in place, its implementation is anticipated to be a significant development in the ongoing discussions surrounding citizenship and immigration in India.

About the Citizenship (Amendment) Act (CAA) 2019:

  • The Citizenship (Amendment) Act (CAA) of 2019 is a significant amendment to India's Citizenship Act of 1955.
    • It aims to provide a pathway to citizenship for Hindu, Sikh, Parsi, Buddhist, Jain, and Christian immigrants from Pakistan, Afghanistan, and Bangladesh who have faced religious persecution and have been residing in India without documentation.
  • The CAA reduces the residency requirement for citizenship from 11 years to 5 years for eligible immigrants who entered India before December 31, 2014.
    • The Act also includes provisions for the cancellation of Overseas Citizen of India (OCI) registration in cases where the individual has violated any provision of the Citizenship Act or other applicable laws.
  • The CAA applies to individuals who have been compelled to seek shelter in India due to religious persecution.
    • However, the Act does not apply to certain areas, such as regions covered by the Sixth Schedule of the Indian Constitution (which deals with autonomous tribal-dominated regions in Assam, Meghalaya, Tripura, and Mizoram) and states with an inner-line permit regime (Arunachal Pradesh, Nagaland, and Mizoram).
  • The implementation of the CAA has faced delays due to opposition in several states, including Assam and Tripura.
    • The Act has sparked protests and legal challenges, with critics arguing that it violates the secular principles of the Indian Constitution and excludes certain persecuted groups, such as the Rohingya from Myanmar, Tibetan Buddhists from China, and Tamils from Sri Lanka.
  • The CAA has been a subject of intense debate, with supporters claiming it offers relief to persecuted minorities and opponents asserting that it discriminates against Muslims and undermines India's secular fabric.
    • The Supreme Court is currently considering multiple petitions challenging the constitutional validity of the CAA.

Citizenship Amendment Rules, 2024:

  • The Citizenship Amendment Rules, 2024 lay out a clear process for eligible refugees from Pakistan, Afghanistan, and Bangladesh to seek Indian citizenship through registration or naturalization.
    • The process begins with the submission of an application, along with an affidavit confirming the accuracy of the information provided and an affidavit from an Indian citizen vouching for the applicant's character.
  • Applicants must also provide a declaration of their familiarity with one of the languages listed in the Eighth Schedule of the Indian Constitution.
    • The application is to be submitted electronically to an empowered committee via a district-level committee, as notified by the central government.
    • The district-level committee, headed by a designated officer, is responsible for verifying the submitted documents and administering the oath of allegiance to the applicant.
  • Supporting documents that must be provided by applicants include:
    • A passport issued by the governments of Pakistan, Afghanistan, or Bangladesh
    • A birth certificate
    • Any form of identity document
    • Land or tenancy records; or any document proving that the applicant's parents, grandparents, or great-grandparents were citizens of one of the three countries.
      • These documents remain valid even beyond their expiration dates.
  • Proof of entry into India before December 31, 2014, is also required.
    • Acceptable supporting documents for this include:
    •  visa and immigration stamp
    • A registration certificate from the Foreigners Regional Registration Officer (FRRO)
    • A slip issued by the Census enumerators in India
    • A government-issued license or certificate
    • A permit in India (including a driving license
    • Aadhaar number, or ration card), or a marriage certificate issued in India.
  • Once an application is approved, the applicants will be issued a digital certificate, granting them Indian citizenship.
    • These rules provide a structured pathway for eligible refugees from the specified countries to obtain citizenship in India, offering them a chance at a new beginning and a sense of belonging in their adopted homeland.

The Mains issues and challenges associated with the CAA of 2019:

  • Legal challenge: The CAA has been challenged in the Supreme Court by the Indian Union Muslim League (IUML) and others on the grounds of discrimination and violation of fundamental rights.
  • Right to equality: Critics argue that using religion as a criterion for citizenship eligibility violates Article 14 of the Constitution, which guarantees equality before the law and equal protection under the law.
  • Targeting of Muslims: Concerns have been raised that the CAA, in conjunction with the National Register of Citizens (NRC) in Assam, may disproportionately affect Muslims and lead to their exclusion from citizenship.
  • Secularism: The use of religion as a basis for citizenship is seen by some as a violation of the principle of secularism, which is a fundamental feature of the Indian Constitution.
  • Conflict with Assam Accord: The CAA's cutoff date for determining citizenship contradicts the Assam Accord of 1985, which set a different date for identifying foreigners in the state, leading to protests and opposition in Assam and other northeastern states.
  • Widespread protests: The CAA has sparked protests across India, reflecting the complexities and sensitivities surrounding the issue of citizenship and the challenge of balancing the needs of persecuted minorities with upholding constitutional principles and addressing regional concerns.

What is the Government’s Stand?

  • The government's position on the Citizenship Amendment Act (CAA) is that Muslims have been excluded from the list of "persecuted" minorities because they constitute the majority in the Islamic countries of Pakistan, Afghanistan, and Bangladesh.
    • According to the government, the CAA aims to provide citizenship to those who have faced religious persecution in these countries.
  • However, this rationale is subject to scrutiny, as there are other persecuted minorities in these countries and elsewhere who have not been included in the CAA.
    • For instance, Tamil Hindus in Sri Lanka, Rohingya Muslims in Myanmar, and minority Muslim sects like Ahmadiyyas and Hazaras in Pakistan and Afghanistan also face persecution in their respective countries.
  • The exclusion of these groups from the CAA raises questions about the criteria used to determine which minorities are considered persecuted and eligible for Indian citizenship under the Act.

What’s Next?

  • The court will have to look into two issues:
    • Whether the special treatment given to the so-called “persecuted minorities” from the three Muslim-majority neighboring countries only is a reasonable classification under Article 14 of the constitution for granting citizenship, and
    • Whether the state is discriminating against Muslims by excluding them.
  • The Supreme Court has earlier held that the law has to clear two legal hoops to pass the equality test when it is challenged on the grounds of Article 14.
    • First, any differentiation between groups of persons must be founded on an “intelligible differentia”, and
    • Second, “that differentia must have a rational nexus to the object sought to be achieved by the Act”.
  • The SC can strike down a classification if it is found to be arbitrary. The court recently struck down the electoral bonds scheme on the ground that it was “manifestly arbitrary” — that is, “irrational, capricious or without an adequate determining principle”.

Voters must know who funds political parties. This is the right that Supreme Court has protected

  • 11 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

The Supreme Court of India has recently mandated the public disclosure of all pertinent information regarding corporate funding of political parties, with the State Bank of India and other entities directed to comply with the court's directive.

Context:

  • The recent landmark ruling by the Supreme Court's Constitution Bench, led by the Chief Justice of India, represents a pivotal moment in Indian democracy.
  • This ruling specifically addresses the legality of the Electoral Bond Scheme (EBS) initiated through the Finance Act of 2017.
  • Beyond its immediate implications, the verdict underscores fundamental principles such as equality, transparency, and proportionality concerning corporate contributions to election funding.

What is the Supreme Court verdict on the Electoral Bond Scheme?

  • Nullification of Electoral Bond Scheme: The Supreme Court declared the Electoral Bond Scheme (EBS) unconstitutional, citing concerns over unrestricted donations, anonymity of contributions via promissory notes, and exemption of corporate donors from disclosure obligations.
    • This underscores the imperative of transparency in corporate election financing, aligning with constitutional rights outlined in Article 14 (equality) and Article 19(1)(a) (right to information).
  • Immediate Cessation of Electoral Bonds and Disclosure Mandates: The Court mandated the immediate cessation of electoral bonds and directed all pertinent authorities to disclose relevant information dating back to April 12, 2019.
    • The State Bank of India's request for an extension was met with skepticism, prompting a contempt petition against them for non-compliance.
  • Guidelines on Legislative Passage via Money Bill Route: While the verdict didn't specifically address the Speaker's authority to classify bills as money bills, it offered guidance suggesting that not all legislative determinations qualify as financial or economic decisions.
    • This challenges the presumption of constitutionality and underscores the need for a nuanced approach in evaluating bills passed via the money bill route.

What is the Reason Behind SC's Scrutiny of Electoral Bond Scheme (EBS)?

  • Elimination of Donation Caps: The court closely examined the EBS due to its elimination of donation caps imposed on political parties, as outlined in the Finance Act 2017.
    • This removal of restrictions allowed for unrestricted inflow of funds into electoral campaigns, posing a potential threat to the democratic principle of a level playing field.
  • Anonymity of Donations via Promissory Notes: An area of concern highlighted by the court was the provision in the EBS allowing for anonymous donations to political parties through promissory notes issued by recognised banks.
    • This mechanism raised significant issues regarding transparency and accountability, as it enabled substantial financial backing to political entities without disclosing the identity of the contributors.
  • Exemption of Corporate Donors from Disclosure Requirements: The EBS faced scrutiny for exempting corporate donors from the obligation to disclose their contributions in balance sheets, a highly contentious feature.
    • This exemption created opacity surrounding corporate funding of political parties, undermining the transparency necessary for a robust democratic process.

SC’s Analysis of the Proportionality Doctrine: Its Implications on Legislative Goals and the Restriction of FR

  • Evolution of the Proportionality Doctrine: The judgment highlights the proportionality doctrine as a tool for self-discipline in constitutional judicial review, aimed at balancing governmental powers with individual rights
    • Serving as a foundational aspect of constitutional discipline, it establishes parameters applicable to all governance institutions.
  • Differentiation Between Manifest Arbitrariness and Reasonable Exercise of Power: A crucial distinction is drawn between manifest arbitrariness and the reasonable exercise of power, with the court emphasizing that restricting a fundamental right does not equate to abrogating it entirely.
    • This distinction safeguards against arbitrary exercise of governmental authority, stressing the necessity for reasonable and proportionate limitations on rights.
  • Legitimate Goals and Appropriate Means: Applying the proportionality test, the court scrutinizes the legislative objectives behind the Electoral Bond Scheme, mandating that any restriction on a fundamental right must serve a legitimate goal and utilize suitable means.
    • Questions are raised regarding the legitimacy of curbing black money as a specific ground under Article 19(2), emphasizing the need for the state to justify its actions with reasonable objectives.
  • Nexus Between Law and Stated Objectives: Introducing the concept of a reasonable nexus, the court holds that laws should demonstrate a rational connection between means employed and objectives sought to be achieved.
    • This requirement ensures that restrictions on fundamental rights are directly related to their intended purpose, avoiding arbitrary infringements.
  • Balancing Conflicting Rights: A notable development is the introduction of the double proportionality test, addressing conflicts between equal rights such as donor privacy and voter information and influence.
    • The court mandates a secondary proportionality assessment to ensure that any infringement on one right is justified and not disproportionate in impact.
  • Alternative Measures and Judicial Restraint: While advocating proportionality, the court suggests alternative measures to achieve legislative goals, such as setting up electoral trusts or imposing caps on corporate funding.
    • Additionally, it exercises judicial restraint, respecting the autonomy and powers of the executive and legislative branches.
  • Chief Justice M C Chagla's Warning: The judgment recalls Chief Justice M C Chagla's 1958 caution regarding the influential role of big business and money in democracy, highlighting a long-standing concern about corporate influence.
    • Chagla's foresight underscores the judiciary's role in preventing improper or corrupt influence, emphasizing the need to safeguard democratic values.
  • Historical Perspectives by the CJI: Chief Justice Chandrachud's historical perspective underscores the judiciary's responsibility to prevent improper influences on democracy, advocating for a proactive role in safeguarding democratic values.
    • The court's assertion aligns with the idea of acting as a check against attempts to compromise the democratic process, particularly by powerful corporate entities.

Conclusion

The Supreme Court's nullification of the Electoral Bond Scheme is a staunch defense of democratic principles. By rejecting elements that undermine transparency, equality, and accountability, the court reaffirms core democratic values. This landmark ruling signifies a crucial juncture in India's legal narrative, establishing a precedent for safeguarding democracy against opaque financial influences.

Gender equality as the plank of sustainable development

  • 09 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

Though women have a crucial role in energy access, production, and consumption, they face barriers that limit their participation and impact in the energy sector.

Context:

  • Gender equality and women's empowerment discussions have surged in recent times.
  • Yet, the interconnectedness of gender equality and sustainable energy development is frequently neglected.
  • Hence, there's a crucial need to delve into the intricate relationship between these areas, recognizing their pivotal contribution to attaining Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs).

The Crucial Role of Gender Equality in Sustainable Energy:

Gender equality is not just a matter of social justice; it is also a prerequisite for sustainable development. Women play a crucial role in energy access, production, and consumption. Yet, they often face significant barriers that limit their participation and impact in the energy sector. This gender disparity not only hampers individual opportunities but also hinders overall economic growth and environmental sustainability.

  • Foundational Role in SDGs: Gender equality is intricately linked with SDGs like SDG5 (gender equality), SDG7 (clean energy), and SDG12 (climate action), serving as a cross-cutting enabler for overall SDG success.
  • Impact on Clean Energy Access: Studies consistently demonstrate that gender equality and women's empowerment are essential for achieving universal access to sustainable energy.
    • Recognizing women's active participation in the energy sector is crucial for devising inclusive policies and strategies for clean energy access.
  • Strategic Alignment with Climate Action: Gender equality is integral to climate action, as reflected in its inclusion in SDG12.
    • Empowering women in the energy sector fosters sustainable and climate-resilient practices, supporting efforts to combat environmental degradation.
  • Social Justice and Economic Development: Gender equality in sustainable energy transcends SDGs, embodying principles of social justice.
    • Addressing gender disparities in energy access not only aligns with moral imperatives but also drives broader economic growth and prosperity.

Gender Equality in Energy Access:

  • Household Responsibilities: Women predominantly manage household energy tasks like cooking, heating, and lighting.
    • However, energy infrastructure tends to reach women last, leading to a lack of access to modern energy sources, forcing reliance on harmful alternatives like biomass and kerosene.
  • Disproportionate Impact: The absence of clean and reliable energy sources exposes women and children to household air pollution, contributing to 3.2 million premature deaths annually, with 60% affecting women and children, according to the World Health Organization (WHO).
  • Energy Poverty: Limited access to modern energy perpetuates energy poverty, exacerbating health risks associated with household air pollution and hindering socio-economic development.
  • Gender Disparity in the Energy Sector: Despite representing 48% of the global labor force, women constitute only 32% of full-time employees in the renewable energy sector and a mere 22% in the overall energy sector.
  • Educational Barriers: Gender disparities in educational access hinder women from acquiring technical skills and training necessary for employment in the energy sector, further perpetuating gender inequality.
  • Limited Opportunities: Women face restricted opportunities to pursue technical roles within the energy sector, contributing to the underrepresentation of women in positions of leadership and decision-making.
  • Inequitable Policies: Company policies within the energy sector often fail to promote gender diversity and equality, perpetuating systemic barriers to women's advancement and participation in the industry.

What are the Economic Benefits of Empowering Women in the Energy Sector?

  • Increased Productivity and Efficiency: Empowering women in the energy sector can lead to increased productivity and efficiency.
    • Diverse teams that include women bring different perspectives, problem-solving approaches, and innovative ideas, enhancing overall productivity in the workplace.
  • Enhanced Decision-Making and Problem-Solving: Women's inclusion in decision-making processes within the energy sector can lead to more effective problem-solving and decision-making.
    • Research indicates that diverse teams, including gender-diverse ones, tend to make better decisions by considering a wider range of perspectives and factors.
  • Talent Retention and Recruitment: Promoting gender diversity and inclusion in the energy sector can help attract and retain top talent.
    •  Organizations that prioritize gender equality are often perceived as more desirable workplaces, leading to improved recruitment and retention rates.
  • Access to Untapped Talent Pool: Empowering women in the energy sector provides access to an untapped talent pool, thereby addressing skills shortages and labor market gaps.
    • By tapping into the skills and expertise of women, energy companies can enhance their competitiveness and adaptability in a rapidly evolving industry.
  • Economic Growth and Sustainable Development: Gender equality in the energy sector contributes to broader economic growth and sustainable development.
    • Women's participation in the workforce, particularly in high-growth sectors like energy, stimulates economic activity, drives innovation, and fosters inclusive growth.
  • Increased Financial Performance: Companies with greater gender diversity at all levels, including leadership positions, tend to outperform their less diverse counterparts financially.
    • Research suggests that organizations with diverse leadership teams achieve higher financial returns, indicating a positive correlation between gender diversity and financial performance.
  • Reduction in Gender Pay Gap: Empowering women in the energy sector can help reduce the gender pay gap and promote equitable compensation practices.
    • By ensuring equal pay for equal work and addressing barriers to women's advancement, energy companies can create fairer and more inclusive workplaces.

Way Forward:

  • Address Gender Disparity in the Energy Sector: Transform perceptions regarding women's roles in the energy sector and integrate gender considerations into energy policies at all levels.
    • Stakeholders including governments, non-state actors, international institutions, and philanthropic organizations must collaborate to create an enabling environment and implement innovative solutions.
    • This approach not only enhances access to clean energy but also fosters women's meaningful participation in the sustainable energy transition.
  • Promote Entrepreneurship and Collective Initiatives: Support initiatives like the Energy Transitions Innovation Challenge (ENTICE) that empower individuals, particularly women, to initiate entrepreneurial ventures and drive collective action for sustainable energy.
    • Explore opportunities in Distributed Renewable Energy (DRE) initiatives, which are being implemented by various state governments in India in partnership with philanthropic organizations.
    • DRE initiatives can rapidly deliver affordable energy access, alleviate women's daily burdens, and enhance their productivity.
  • Leverage Inspirational Initiatives: Draw inspiration from initiatives such as Solar Mamas launched by Barefoot College in India, which empowers illiterate women to become solar engineers.
    • These initiatives not only bring clean energy solutions to communities but also promote women's economic empowerment and leadership in the energy sector.

Conclusion

It is important to recognise that the dialogue on gender and energy has clearly shifted from women being identified as part of vulnerable groups to acknowledging them as key agents of change and decision makers across the energy sector. Gender-responsive and women-led initiatives have been successful in the clean energy space. That is why, this is the right time to harness the power of women and energy to create a more inclusive, prosperous, and sustainable world for present and future generations.

Can a justice system without women bring justice to women?

  • 08 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

The latest India Justice Report (IJR) points out that the gender gap remains wide in each of the subsystems that make up the justice delivery system — police, judiciary, prisons, legal aid, and human rights commissions.

Background:

  • Diversity stands as a fundamental cornerstone of institutional efficacy globally, with gender inclusivity serving as a pivotal measure of dedication to this principle.
  • As International Women’s Day is celebrated today (8th March), it becomes imperative to assess the status of gender diversity within India's justice delivery system, as underscored in the recent findings of the India Justice Report (IJR).
  • The data underscores a stark gender disparity within different subsystems, prompting inquiries into the extent of justice institutions' dedication to cultivating inclusivity.

Gender Disparities in India's Justice Delivery System as Revealed by the India Justice Report (IJR):

  • Systemic Inequities: The IJR underscores pervasive gender gaps within every facet of the justice delivery system, encompassing the police, judiciary, prisons, legal aid, and human rights commissions.
    • This comprehensive analysis illuminates the systemic nature of the issue, indicating that gender disparities are not isolated incidents but rather entrenched throughout the justice system.
  • Quotas and Limited Progress: While quotas have aided in women's inclusion, their impact appears concentrated in lower-level positions within the justice system.
    • Despite affirmative action measures, women's representation in higher-ranking roles remains disproportionately low.
  • Numerical Underrepresentation: The IJR's analysis reveals a stark reality, with only approximately three lakh women active in the justice delivery system.
    • This numerical underrepresentation not only indicates inadequate representation but also suggests underlying structural barriers hindering women's full participation.
  • Gender Disparity in the Judiciary: Within the judiciary, data indicates a concerning trend where women's presence diminishes significantly as one ascends the hierarchy.
    • While women comprise 35% of subordinate judges, this percentage drastically declines to 13% in high courts, with a notable lack of women in the Supreme Court.
  • Leadership Void: The absence of a female Chief Justice of India, despite decades of existence, underscores persistent barriers preventing women from ascending to the highest echelons of the judiciary.
    • Similarly, women's representation in chief justice positions in high courts remains disproportionately low.
  • NHRC's Gender Imbalance and Limited Women Representation: The NHRC, entrusted with upholding fairness and justice, demonstrates a glaring lack of gender diversity, having never had a female commissioner.
    • This absence of women in decision-making roles within a human rights commission highlights institutional disregard for gender representation.
  • Similar gender imbalances extend to state commissions, with few women serving as members or holding leadership positions, emphasizing the systemic nature of gender disparity within these crucial institutions.

What are the Potential Factors Contributing to Disparity?

  • Institutional Apathy and Lack of Initiative: The absence of women in pivotal roles within these commissions reflects not only a numerical deficit but also a lack of proactive efforts to address and rectify this imbalance.
    • Findings from the IJR suggest a notable apathy within these institutions, where fostering gender diversity is often overlooked or relegated to a secondary concern.
  • Complacency: State commissions, akin to the NHRC's shortcomings, fail to exemplify gender inclusivity.
    • The IJR's data paints a discouraging picture, with only a few commissions demonstrating a willingness to appoint women to decision-making positions.
    • The absence of proactive measures perpetuates an institutional culture indifferent to the value of diverse perspectives and experiences.
  • Deflection of Responsibility: Decision-makers within these institutions often deflect responsibility instead of addressing the root causes of gender disparity.
    • Excuses citing "difficulties" in "accommodating" more women serve as common deflection tactics, diverting attention from the urgent need to challenge existing institutional structures and cultures hindering women's entry and retention.

What are the Possible Benefits of Diversity Within the Justice Delivery System?

  • Global Research Insights: Research worldwide consistently highlights the positive outcomes of diverse and inclusive work environments.
    • The IJR echoes this global perspective, emphasizing that the integration of women and other diversities can reshape institutional culture within the justice system.
    • It challenges conventional practices by introducing fresh perspectives, experiences, and methodologies that contribute to a more comprehensive understanding of complex issues.
  • Internal Cultural Transformation: Incorporating women into traditionally male-dominated institutions disrupts established norms and cultivates a culture of openness.
    • This transformation extends beyond numerical representation, fostering the integration of diverse viewpoints, communication styles, and problem-solving approaches.
    • Women, as essential contributors, can drive a shift towards more collaborative, empathetic, and innovative decision-making processes.
  • Improved Public Perception: Inclusive institutions not only benefit internally but also enhance public trust and perception.
    • A justice delivery system that mirrors the diverse population it serves becomes more responsive, credible, and reflective of societal values.
    • This alignment between the institution and the public fosters trust and inclusivity, strengthening the legitimacy and effectiveness of the justice system.

Way Forward:

  • Institutional Readiness: Initiating institutional change necessitates preparedness. Justice administrators are urged to proactively tackle systemic obstacles impeding women's inclusion.
    • This entails conducting a thorough assessment of current structures, policies, and practices to identify and dismantle barriers obstructing women's full and equitable participation at all levels of the justice system.
  • Leading Through Example: The absence of a female Chief Justice of India and the scarcity of women in judiciary leadership roles underscore the imperative for a transformative shift.
    • Institutions must actively advocate for and facilitate women's ascension to leadership positions, challenging entrenched biases and breaking the glass ceiling that historically hindered their advancement.
  • Reassessing Recruitment and Retention Strategies: There is a pressing need to critically reassess recruitment and retention practices within the justice delivery system.
    • This entails a comprehensive review of hiring procedures, promotion criteria, and initiatives to ensure gender-equitable treatment throughout individuals' careers.

Conclusion

To achieve justice, barriers must be dismantled, equal opportunities ensured, and the institutional biases perpetuating gender disparities acknowledged. Upholding equality mandates justice institutions to address systemic impediments hindering women's inclusion, transcending superficial measures. Decision-makers must lead by example, reassess practices, and implement strategies fostering gender balance and inclusivity within the justice system.

The National Credit Framework makes education system more flexible

  • 07 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

The evolving academic landscape necessitates exploration of credit system challenges and transformative impacts of initiatives like the National Credit Framework (NCrF) and the Academic Bank of Credits (ABC).

Context:

  • In the realm of academia, the credit system serves as a cornerstone for quantifying students' learning endeavors and accomplishments.
  • Consequently, as the educational landscape evolves, it becomes imperative to delve into the importance of credits, address challenges stemming from credit incompatibility, and examine the transformative potential of initiatives such as the National Credit Framework (NCrF) and the Academic Bank of Credits (ABC).

What is the Need for the National Credit Framework (NCrF)?

  • The limitations encountered by the pre-NEP credit system highlighted the urgent need for a more adaptable and versatile approach to earning credits.
  • It became evident that existing credit systems, although a progression towards flexible education, did not sufficiently cater to the modern demand for interdisciplinary studies and the diverse goals of students.
  • As a pivotal move towards reshaping the educational paradigm, the University Grants Commission (UGC) unveiled the National Credit Framework (NCrF) in April 2023.

What is the National Credit Framework (NCrF)?

  • The National Credit Framework (NCrF) heralds a paradigm shift in academic structuring, redefining the traditional notion of the academic year and credit allocation.

Framework Components:

  • The NCrF comprises three principal verticals:
    • The National School Education Qualification Framework (NSEQF),
    • The National Higher Education Qualification Framework (NHEQF), and
    • The National Skills Qualification Framework (NSQF).

Provisions:

  • Integration of Academic and Vocational Education: The NCrF emphasizes the integration of academic and vocational education, aligning with the National Education Policy (NEP) to ensure equivalence and coherence between the two education streams.
  • Credit System: A credit system based on 'notional learning hours' is introduced, wherein students must accrue a minimum of 40 credits per year, with each semester accounting for 20 credits.
    • Notional hours encompass various academic activities, including attending classes, studying for assessments, and completing assignments and homework.
    • Students are expected to accumulate a total of 160 credits over their schooling period, with 120 credits attainable upon completion of a three-year bachelor's degree and 320 credits upon completion of a Ph.D.
  • Credit Acquisition Mechanisms: The NCrF introduces various mechanisms for credit acquisition, extending beyond traditional academic pursuits.
    • Credits can be earned through participation in Olympiads, science quizzes, internships, and employment during college.
  • Credit Levels: The framework delineates credit levels ranging from level 1 to level 8, with specific levels associated with different stages of education.
    • Higher education spans levels 4.5 to 8, while vocational education and training encompass levels 1 through 8.
  • Aadhaar-Enabled Student Registration: An Aadhaar-enabled student registration system is implemented, providing students with an Academic Bank of Credit (ABC) account for depositing degrees and credits.
    • This system includes a knowledge locker akin to DigiLocker, ensuring secure storage of academic credentials.

What is the Significance of Credits in Students' Academic Journey”?

  • Capturing Learning Effort and Achievement: Credits serve as tangible markers of students' academic journeys, encapsulating not just the knowledge acquired but also the dedication and effort invested in their educational pursuits.
    • By assigning numerical values to credits, institutions can systematically evaluate students' engagement and accomplishments.
  • Linkage to Curricular Activities: Beyond conventional classrooms, credits extend their influence to encompass various curricular activities such as internships, research projects, and community service.
    • Acting as a unifying thread, credits seamlessly integrate these diverse experiences into the broader academic narrative, ensuring that students' educational endeavors embrace practical applications and real-world scenarios.
  • Acknowledgment of Skill Acquisition and Development: Recognizing that education encompasses more than just the accumulation of facts, credits play a crucial role in acknowledging skill acquisition and development.
    • Whether it involves honing critical thinking abilities, enhancing communication skills, or mastering technical expertise, credits become a measure of students' holistic growth.
    • This emphasis on skills not only prepares students for professional challenges but also aligns education with the evolving demands of the contemporary workforce.
  • Systematic Monitoring and Assessment: Credits serve as a guiding compass for both students and educational institutions, offering a systematic mechanism to monitor and assess academic progression.
    • Through credit-based systems, institutions can quantify learning outcomes within a structured qualification framework.
    • This systematic approach enables a nuanced understanding of academic advancement, allowing institutions to identify strengths, address weaknesses, and tailor educational strategies accordingly.
  • Measurement of Quantification within a Qualification Framework: One of the primary roles of credits is to provide a quantifiable measure within a qualification framework.
    • This facilitates the standardization of educational achievements and enables easy comparison and recognition of academic accomplishments.
    • Credits thus serve as a universal language that transcends institutional boundaries, fostering a cohesive understanding of academic excellence.

Challenges Encountered by the Pre-NEP Credit-Based System (Choice Based Credit System [CBCS]):

  • Compatibility Issues between CBCS and Semester System: Despite efforts by the University Grants Commission (UGC) to address rigid educational structures through the implementation of CBCS and semester systems, challenges arose in their compatibility.
    •  These initiatives aimed to introduce flexibility but faced hurdles in implementation and effectiveness.
    •  Incompatibilities within the CBCS model and semester mechanisms hindered seamless student mobility between educational institutions and programs.
  • Lack of Exploratory Educational Experience: Despite intending to offer students a varied and exploratory educational experience, CBCS faced criticism for perceived inflexibility.
    • Critics argued that it limited students' ability to delve into a wide range of learning objectives.
    • The rigid structure of CBCS was viewed as a constraint rather than an enabler, raising concerns about fostering interdisciplinary learning and accommodating diverse academic pursuits.
  • Shortcomings in Providing Student Autonomy: Another challenge was the perceived inadequacy in providing autonomy to students.
    • Pre-NEP credit systems did not effectively empower students to participate in diverse academic pursuits.
    • Constraints imposed by existing credit structures hindered students' ability to customize their educational journeys based on individual interests, thereby limiting the realization of a personalized and dynamic learning experience.

Conclusion

The integration of the NCrF and ABC signifies a monumental shift in the Indian education landscape, emphasizing flexibility, inclusivity, and holistic learning. This transformative initiative resonates with the objectives of the National Education Policy, heralding a future of dynamic and adaptable education systems tailored to meet the diverse needs and aspirations of both students and educators.

 

 

Green jobs and the problem of gender disparity

  • 06 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

Increasing women’s representation in green jobs will lead to benefits such as boosting a low-carbon and environmentally sustainable economy

Context:

  • The worldwide movement towards low-carbon development presents India with a distinctive opportunity for progress.
  • Nevertheless, this transition brings forth a gender disparity challenge, as men tend to transition to green jobs more rapidly than women.
  • Hence, it's crucial to delve into the gender aspects of India's green transition, highlighting the imperative for women's empowerment and gender equality in climate initiatives.

What are Green Jobs?

  • Green jobs represent a category of employment directly benefiting the planet and contributing to overall environmental well-being.
  • These roles are geared towards mitigating the negative environmental impact of various economic sectors and advancing the creation of a low-carbon economy.
  • Occupations involving renewable energy, resource conservation, and the promotion of energy-efficient practices fall under this umbrella.
  • The International Labour Organization characterizes green jobs as 'decent jobs that contribute to the preservation or restoration of the environment.'
  • They encompass diverse sectors such as manufacturing, construction, renewable energy, energy efficiency, and automobiles, historically characterized by lower female representation.

Gender Disparity in Green Jobs:

  • Globally, men tend to transition to green jobs at a faster pace than women.
  • Despite India's significant increase in renewable energy capacity by 250% between 2015 and 2021, women constitute only 11% of workers in the solar rooftop sector.
  • The Annual Survey of Industries 2019-20 reveals that women workers are predominantly concentrated in industries like apparel, textile, leather, food, and tobacco.
  • According to a Confederation of Indian Industry (CII) 2019 report, men make up 85% of the workforce in sectors such as infrastructure, transport, construction, and manufacturing.
  • A 2023 study by the Skill Council for Green Jobs indicated that 85% of green skills training was provided to men, with over 90% of women expressing belief that social norms hinder their participation in such training.
  • Restrictive social norms contributing to this disparity include perceptions that women are unsuitable for certain technical roles, safety concerns, lower representation in science, technology, engineering, and mathematics (STEM) subjects, and familial constraints.

Advantages of Women's Engagement in Green Jobs:

  • Addressing Gender Bias in the Labour Market: Increased representation of women in green jobs acts as a potent remedy to entrenched gender biases in the labor market.
    • By entering traditionally male-dominated sectors like manufacturing, construction, and renewable energy, women challenge stereotypes and reshape societal perceptions of gender roles.
  • Expanded Economic Opportunities: Women's greater involvement in green jobs opens up expanded economic avenues for them.
    • Participation in sectors such as renewable energy and energy efficiency enables women to access high-growth industries, fostering both economic growth and personal financial stability.
    • Beyond economic benefits, engagement in green jobs offers opportunities for women's advancement in technical and social spheres, exposing them to innovative technologies, sustainable practices, and networking opportunities.
  • Empowerment of Women's Agency: The transition to green jobs empowers women by granting them agency over their economic destinies.
    • In roles contributing to environmental preservation or restoration, women find alignment with a broader sense of purpose, fostering a deeper connection to their work and its societal impact.
  • Contribution to Long-Term Gender Empowerment: Participation in green jobs extends beyond immediate economic gains, contributing to the enduring empowerment of women.
    • By breaking into historically imbalanced sectors, women pave the way for future generations, inspiring young girls to pursue careers in STEM fields.
  • Promotion of Environmental Stewardship: Women's involvement in green jobs resonates with their recognized role as custodians of the environment.
    • With a nuanced understanding of the interconnectedness of social and ecological systems, women offer unique perspectives to the development and implementation of sustainable practices within green industries.

Way Forward:

  • Addressing Data Gaps: Rectifying the lack of data is imperative to understand the landscape of women's participation in green jobs in India.
    • Initiatives should focus on mapping emerging areas for green growth and collecting sex-disaggregated data on green jobs to enhance women's engagement.
    • Conducting gender analysis, gathering gender statistics through periodic labor force surveys, and mobilizing additional resources can shed light on the present and future impact of low-carbon transitions on women workers and entrepreneurs. 
  • Supporting Women Entrepreneurs: Gender-targeted financial policies and products tailored to the needs of women entrepreneurs can catalyze their entry into the green transition market.
    • Measures such as collateral-free lending, financial literacy training, and establishing supportive networks are crucial to unlock their potential.
    • Developing appropriate tools to assess creditworthiness, facilitate loan disbursement, and reduce operational costs for women-owned businesses is essential.
  • Promoting a Gender-Just Transition: A comprehensive strategy for a gender-just transition encompasses employment, social protection, reduction of care work burden, and skill development.
    • Collaboration among government, private sectors, and stakeholders is essential to harness innovation, technology, and finance for women entrepreneurs and workers.
    • Businesses must prioritize gender justice to mitigate barriers and promote equitable job opportunities for a fair transition.

Conclusion

As India navigates its green transition, prioritizing women's empowerment and gender equity in climate actions is essential for unlocking the co-benefits of a low-carbon and environmentally sustainable economy. Bridging the gender gap in green jobs requires concerted efforts to address social norms, collect gender-disaggregated data, and implement inclusive policies. This is not only an economic imperative but a crucial step towards building a socially equitable and inclusive future for all.

India's Journey to Net-Zero Amidst Mineral Shortages and Technological Challenges

  • 05 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

By 2030, India wants to set up 500 GW of non-fossil fuel power generating capacity but the problem is that the availability of the minerals is not enough. One needs to process it and manufacture the final product which also means access to technology.

Background:

  • As the world shifts towards decarbonization and faces growing demand for critical minerals, governments worldwide are strategically securing access to these vital resources.
  • In alignment with this trend, the Indian government has amended mining laws to encourage private sector involvement in the extraction and processing of critical minerals.

Importance of Critical Minerals:

  • Driving Decarbonization and Clean Energy Technologies: Critical minerals are pivotal for clean energy technologies such as solar PV plants, wind farms, and electric vehicles, essential for global decarbonization efforts.
    •   According to the International Energy Agency (IEA), a substantial portion of minerals like copper, rare earths, nickel, cobalt, and lithium will be crucial for meeting Paris Agreement targets.
  • Transforming the Transportation Sector: Electric vehicles (EVs) rely heavily on critical minerals like lithium, cobalt, and nickel for their battery production.
    •  As countries shift towards EV adoption, the demand for these minerals is expected to soar, driving sustainable transportation initiatives.
  • Essential in Consumer Electronics: Critical minerals are vital for producing consumer electronics such as smartphones, laptops, and tablets.
    • Rare earth elements and other minerals enable the miniaturization and enhanced performance of electronic devices.
  • Supporting the Construction Industry: Critical minerals contribute to the production of high-strength alloys, cement, and other building materials in the construction sector.
    • These minerals enhance the durability and efficiency of construction materials, promoting sustainability in infrastructure projects.
  • Ensuring Defence and National Security: In the defense sector, critical minerals are indispensable for advanced weaponry and communication systems.
    • Securing a stable supply of these minerals is critical for maintaining national security and technological superiority.
  • Vital for Fertilizers and Agriculture: Minerals like phosphorus and potassium are essential components in fertilizers, crucial for enhancing crop yields and ensuring global food security.
  • Crucial for Industrial Magnets: Neodymium, praseodymium, and dysprosium, critical minerals, are crucial for manufacturing magnets used in various industries.
    • These magnets are integral components in technologies ranging from electric motors to medical devices.

Geopolitical Dynamics of Critical Minerals and Global Ramifications:

  • Economic Dynamics: The geographical concentration of critical mineral resources in select countries like Australia, China, the Democratic Republic of Congo (DRC), Indonesia, and Chile fosters economic dependencies.
    • Nations with substantial reserves enjoy advantages in revenue generation, job creation, and overall economic development, potentially leading to global economic disparities.
  • Geopolitical Power Play: The strategic significance of critical minerals turns their extraction and processing into geopolitical instruments, enabling nations to wield influence on the global stage.
    • China, notably, has leveraged its dominance in rare earths to exert political pressure, exemplified by restrictions on exports to countries such as the US and Japan.
    • China's control over critical minerals, coupled with its monopolized processing capacity, carries significant geopolitical implications, prompting international collaborations like the US-led Minerals Security Partnership (MSP) to secure supply chains and reduce dependence on authoritarian regimes.
  • Supply Chain Vulnerability: The concentration of critical mineral resources in specific regions raises concerns about the vulnerability of global supply chains.
    • Political instability, trade conflicts, or other geopolitical events in major producing nations can disrupt the supply of critical minerals, adversely affecting industries reliant on them.

India's Objectives and Hurdles in Acquiring Critical Minerals:

  • Pursuit of Decarbonization Goals and Energy Transition: India has outlined ambitious objectives for decarbonization, aiming for net-zero emissions by 2070 and establishing 500 GW of non-fossil fuel power generation capacity by 2030.
    • Embracing renewable energy sources, electric vehicles, and sustainable practices underscores India's dedication to combatting climate change.
  • Heavy Reliance on Imports: Despite possessing identified reserves, India heavily depends on imports to meet its demand for critical minerals.
    • This import dependency presents significant challenges, exposing the nation to global market fluctuations, supply chain disruptions, and potential geopolitical tensions.
  • Strategic Agreements for Exploration: Acknowledging the necessity to reduce import reliance, India has forged strategic agreements, such as the one with Australia, to jointly explore critical minerals like lithium and cobalt.
    • Collaborations with resource-rich nations aim to secure access to raw materials and diversify sources beyond traditional suppliers.
  • Lack of Domestic Processing Capacity: Identifying critical minerals marks only the initial step; subsequent processing and manufacturing require advanced technology and infrastructure.
    • India encounters challenges in building domestic processing capacity, contributing to an extended gestation period before achieving self-reliance.
    • Apart from raw material availability, accessing advanced processing technology remains crucial, emphasizing the importance of technology transfer and collaborative ventures with proficient countries.
  • Participation in International Collaborations: India's engagement in the US-led MSP illustrates its dedication to fostering strategic partnerships for securing the critical minerals supply chain.
    • The MSP encompasses countries with critical mineral deposits and access to processing technology, fostering a collective endeavor to surmount challenges.

Noteworthy Actions Undertaken by the Indian Government:

  • Identification of Critical Minerals: In July 2023, India took a significant stride by identifying a list of 30 critical minerals, distinct from rare earths.
    • Each mineral was selected based on criteria such as disruption potential, substitutability, cross-cutting usage, import reliance, and recycling rates.
    • The identified minerals are predominantly concentrated in states and union territories, including Bihar, Gujarat, Jharkhand, Odisha, Tamil Nadu, Uttar Pradesh, Chhattisgarh, and Jammu and Kashmir.
  • Amendment of Existing Mining Laws: Subsequently, in November 2023, the Indian government amended existing mining laws to facilitate private sector participation in the auction of 20 blocks containing critical minerals and rare earths.
    • This amendment signifies a notable shift in India's mineral sector, unlocking opportunities for private enterprises to engage in the extraction and processing of these vital resources.

Conclusion

There is a mounting concern that the limited access to critical minerals could pose a substantial obstacle to India's ambitious journey towards decarbonization. The achievement of decarbonization objectives hinges on surmounting challenges associated with import reliance, processing capabilities, and technological advancements.

A women’s urban employment guarantee act

  • 04 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

Recently, there has been growing concern about the urban employment scenario for women in India, revealing a significant gap between the demand for employment and the opportunities available to urban women.

Context:

  • According to the Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS), there has been a notable rise in women's workforce participation in India, increasing from 22% in 2017-18 to 35.9% in 2022-23.
  • Despite this growth, India's female labor force participation rate (FLFPR) remains lower than the global average of 47% and lags behind countries like China, which boasts an FLFPR of 60%.
  • While there has been progress, the FLFPR in India still presents a considerable gap.

Rural Areas:

  • The FLFPR in rural areas has shown significant improvement, rising to 41.5% in 2022-23 from 24.6% in 2017-18.

Urban Areas:

  • In urban regions, the FLFPR has also experienced growth, increasing to 25.4% in 2022-23 from 20.4% in 2017-18.
  • However, women's employment rates in urban areas stood at 22.9% in the last quarter of 2023.

What is the Current Situation (Unmet Employment Demand)?

  • The current landscape highlights a substantial unmet demand for employment among urban women, indicating a disparity between urban and rural areas.
  • Urban areas exhibit a notably higher proportion of unemployed women actively seeking employment compared to their rural counterparts, with an unemployment rate of 9% in urban regions versus 4% in rural regions.

Two Categories of Unemployment:

  • Unemployment manifests in two forms: individuals actively seeking employment and those desiring to work but not engaging in active job-seeking.
  • Underutilized Potential: Approximately 25% of urban women have attained higher secondary education, a stark comparison to the 5% in rural areas, suggesting significant untapped potential.
    • The low urban employment rates among women underscore the underutilization of their skills and qualifications.
  • Role of MGNREGA and Deendayal Antyodaya Yojana National Rural Livelihood Mission (DAY-NRLM): Initiatives like MGNREGA and DAY-NRLM have played a vital role in empowering women financially in rural settings, with over half of the MGNREGA workforce comprising women.
  • However, urban settings present unique challenges. Social norms, safety concerns, and inadequate transportation options pose significant barriers to urban women's workforce participation.

Causes of Urban Unemployment Among Women in India:

  • Challenges of Social Norms and Safety: Urban women face barriers to entering the workforce due to entrenched social norms, safety concerns, and inadequate transportation options, which hinder their participation.
  • Gender-Based Occupational Segregation: Gender-based segregation of occupations and sectors persists in India, leading to limited growth in job opportunities for women and reduced participation rates.
  • Economic Impacts: The rapid adoption of new technologies in response to the pandemic has resulted in widespread unemployment, particularly due to business closures and job losses.
    • This has widened the skill gap among job seekers.
  • Population Growth: The increasing population and labor force contribute to rising unemployment in India, making it challenging for economic growth to keep pace with population expansion.
  • Insufficient Investment: Insufficient investment in unorganized sectors, Micro, Small, and Medium Enterprises (MSMEs), and rural development exacerbates unemployment among women.
    • Combined with safety concerns and regressive social norms, this leads to underemployment or unemployment.
  • Financial Burden: Calculations suggest that funding 150 days of work per year at ?500 daily wages would cost around 1.5% of the GDP. Factoring in material and administrative expenses, this could increase to around 2%.

Proposed Solutions:

  • Government Initiatives: The government has introduced protective provisions in labor laws to ensure equal opportunities and a supportive work environment for women.
  • Need for Women's Urban Employment Guarantee Act (WUEGA): To address urban unemployment comprehensively, there is a call for a national-level Women's Urban Employment Guarantee Act (WUEGA) and a Decentralized Urban Employment and Training Scheme akin to MGNREGA for rural women.

Vision for Women's Urban Employment Guarantee Act (WUEGA):

  • The vision for WUEGA entails women comprising at least 50% (ideally 100%) of the program management staff, fostering gender inclusivity and empowerment at all levels of decision-making.
  • Involving women and local communities in program management can enhance the constitutional principle of decentralization, ensuring grassroots participation and ownership.
  • Every worksite under WUEGA would be equipped with essential facilities, including childcare services, to support working mothers and promote their participation in the workforce.
  • Job opportunities provided by WUEGA will be accessible within a 5-km radius of each participant's residence, with free public transportation available for women, ensuring ease of access to employment opportunities

What are Some Key Urban Employment Initiatives?

  • Atmanirbhar Bharat Rojgar Yojana (ABRY): Launched under Atmanirbhar Bharat package 3.0, ABRY incentivizes employers to create new employment opportunities while providing social security benefits and addressing employment loss during the Covid-19 pandemic.
  • Pradhan Mantri Garib Kalyan Rojgar Abhiyaan (PMGKRA): PMGKRA focuses on providing immediate employment and livelihood opportunities to distressed individuals, emphasizing the creation of public infrastructure and livelihood assets in rural areas.
  • Deendayal Antyodaya Yojana-National Urban Livelihoods Mission (DAY-NULM): DAY-NULM aims to alleviate poverty and vulnerability among urban poor households by facilitating access to self-employment and skilled wage employment opportunities.
  • Women-led Waste Management: In Karnataka, women-led initiatives in waste management have empowered women to manage waste collection and drive 'Swacch' vehicles, leading to successful outcomes and increased acquisition of driving licenses among women.
  • Pradhan Mantri Rojgar Protsahan Yojana (PMRPY): PMRPY incentivizes employers to generate new employment opportunities, thereby contributing to job creation across various sectors.
  • National Career Service (NCS) Project: NCS offers comprehensive career-related services including job matching, career counseling, vocational guidance, and information on skill development courses, internships, and apprenticeships.
  • PM Street Vendor’s AtmaNirbhar Nidhi (PM SVANidhi): PM SVANidhi provides collateral-free working capital loans up to ?10,000 with a one-year tenure to approximately 50 lakh street vendors, enabling them to restart their businesses post the Covid-19 lockdown.

Way Forward:

  • Existing urban work opportunities, such as plantation and harvesting reeds on floating wetlands, should be expanded and tailored to local needs through inclusive community consultations.
  • Introducing incentives, such as automatic inclusion in welfare boards, can serve as a mechanism to provide essential benefits like maternity entitlements, pensions, and emergency funds, thereby promoting economic security and social welfare for women.
  • Closing gender gaps and empowering women align with the Sustainable Development Goals, underscoring not just ethical and constitutional obligations but also the potential for women's increased workforce participation to drive economic growth.
  • Addressing societal norms and challenges that hinder women's workforce participation is crucial for fostering an inclusive and equitable work environment.
  • Furthermore, the implementation of additional initiatives and policies aimed at promoting women's participation in the workforce will play a pivotal role in advancing the female labor force participation rate in India.

 

India's Surprising GDP Growth Rate

  • 02 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

India's gross domestic product (GDP) growth for the third quarter (October-December) of the fiscal year 2023-24 has surpassed expectations, coming in at 8.4% compared to the estimated 6.7%.

News Summary:

  • India's economy saw a growth of 8.4% in the December quarter compared to the same period last year, surpassing the 7.6% growth recorded in the previous quarter and the forecast of 6.7% as per a Reuters poll of economists.
  • Further, the NSO pegged a higher GDP growth rate of 7.6% for the entire fiscal year, up from the initial estimate of 7.3%.
  • To comprehend India’s unexpected growth, it is imperative to delve into the diverse aspects of the country's economic landscape, and evaluating the factors underpinning this surprising growth is equally crucial, including consumption patterns, savings dynamics, and investment trends.

What are the Factors Driving India’s Growth Surplus?

  • Enhanced Economic Momentum: Initially estimated at 7.3 percent, the GDP growth set a promising tone for the fiscal year.
    • However, the subsequent second advance estimate, incorporating third-quarter data, surpassed expectations.
    • This signals a bolstered economic momentum, notably fueled by increased net taxes contributing significantly to the growth trajectory.
  • Impact of Rising Net Taxes and Subsidies: An essential aspect of this growth narrative is the comparison between gross value added (GVA) and GDP growth.
    • While GDP growth stands impressively at 7.6 percent, GVA, excluding net tax effects, registers a slightly lower 6.9 percent.
    • This nuanced distinction underscores the influence of net taxes and subsidies on overall economic performance.
    • Furthermore, with an average growth rate of 8.2 percent for the first three quarters, extrapolations suggest a projected fourth-quarter growth of approximately 5.9 percent.
  • Effective Policy Measures and Financial Resilience: Despite GDP figures still below pre-pandemic levels, concerted domestic efforts and policy initiatives have steered the economy toward a 7 percent growth trajectory.
    • A significant factor contributing to this progress is the reinforced state of banking and corporate balance sheets, indicative of the efficacy of strategic policy interventions.

Assessment of Challenges and Expected Downturn:

  • Impact of High-Interest Rates: The enduring prevalence of high interest rates presents a formidable obstacle to sustained economic advancement.
    • Elevated interest rates have the potential to deter borrowing and investment, thereby affecting both consumer expenditure and corporate expansion initiatives.
    • This concern is further compounded by the limited effectiveness of monetary policy, given that inflation projections persist above the Reserve Bank of India's (RBI) 4% target.
  • Normalisation of Net Tax Effects: The current fiscal period has significantly contributed to GDP growth from the escalation of net taxes (taxes minus subsidies).
    • However, there is an anticipation that the net tax influence on GDP will revert to normal levels in the upcoming year.
    • This normalization implies that the impetus provided by the net tax element to the economic growth rate may diminish, potentially leading to a slowdown.
  • Influence of Global Economic Conditions: India's economic performance is intricately intertwined with global economic circumstances.
    • Uncertainties prevailing in the global market, such as trade tensions, geopolitical dynamics, and external disruptions, could trigger spill-over ramifications on India's economy.
    • Consequently, external factors beyond the nation's jurisdiction may exert influence on the overall economic outlook.

Private Consumption, Household Savings, and Evolving Trends:

  • Disparities in Growth: The growth disparity between rural and urban areas is notable, with rural consumption likely trailing urban consumption.
    • This discrepancy can be attributed primarily to the disproportionate impact of high food inflation on rural households.
    • The sluggish growth of agriculture, at a mere 0.7%, underscores the challenges faced by the rural economy, where food inflation significantly affects discretionary spending.
  • Impact of Food Inflation: High food inflation has exerted a considerable influence on consumption patterns, particularly in rural regions.
    • Nominal food consumption spending surged by 13% last year, indicative of the inflationary pressure on essential commodities.
    • This trend is expected to persist, impacting purchasing power and discretionary spending across both rural and urban landscapes.
  • Shifting Consumption Patterns: Household consumption expenditure data reflects a gradual shift towards non-food items over time, mirroring rising per capita income and evolving consumer preferences.
    • This transition underscores the necessity to recalibrate weights in the consumer price index basket, which currently reflects consumption patterns from 2011-12.
  • Household Savings: Disaggregated data reveals that household savings constitute a substantial portion, comprising 61% of total savings in the economy.
    • Despite its prominence, the share of household savings in GDP declined to 18.4% in 2022-23, indicating changing trends in savings composition.
    • Household savings are further categorized into financial and physical savings, with financial savings, including bank deposits and securities, witnessing a significant decline to 5.3% of GDP in 2022-23.
    • Conversely, physical savings, driven by borrowings for assets like houses, have increased, reflecting evolving preferences and market dynamics.

Analysis of Investment Trends: Public, Corporate, and Household:

  • Private Corporate Investment Patterns: The data indicates a stagnant trajectory in private corporate investments, with no clear signs of revival evident in the fiscal year 2022-23.
    • This stagnation raises concerns, as private sector investments play a pivotal role in propelling economic growth, fostering job creation, and stimulating innovation.
  • Public and Household Investment Dynamics: In contrast to private corporate investments, both public and household investments have exhibited substantial growth during the fiscal year 2022-23.
    • Public investments, often influenced by government policies and infrastructure projects, contribute significantly to economic development.
    • On the other hand, household investments, encompassing expenditures on residences and durable goods, serve as indicators of consumer confidence and economic stability.

Way Forward:

  • Mitigating Policy Uncertainty: The government must mitigate policy uncertainty and streamline compliance costs.
    • A stable and foreseeable policy landscape is indispensable for fostering private-sector investments.
    • Addressing these concerns is paramount to cultivating an environment conducive to long-term corporate strategizing and sustained economic expansion.
  • Encouraging a Comprehensive Revival of Private Investments: Recognizing the pivotal role of a comprehensive revival of private investments in sustaining high growth rates over the medium term is imperative for the government.
    • While the government's emphasis on infrastructure development and targeted initiatives like the Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) scheme has yielded positive outcomes, a more holistic approach is warranted to invigorate investments across diverse sectors of the economy.

Conclusion

India's unexpected GDP growth, underpinned by resilient domestic fundamentals and strategic policy emphasis, necessitates a nuanced examination of various economic facets. As India traverses through these multifaceted dimensions, focused attention on private corporate investments, consumption trends, and savings dynamics emerges as pivotal for achieving sustained and inclusive economic progress. Furthermore, the government's role in ensuring policy stability and minimizing compliance burdens emerges as a decisive factor in unlocking the full potential of India's economic prowess.

 

 

 

Understanding the World of the Informal Waste Picker

  • 01 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

1st March is celebrated as International Waste Pickers Day in memory of the massacre in Colombia in which 11 workers were brutally killed at the University of Barranquilla.

Context:

  • 1st March is celebrated as International Waste Pickers Day in memory of the massacre in Colombia in which 11 workers were brutally killed at the University of Barranquilla.
  • While these individuals play vital roles in waste management, they endure systematic marginalization, health risks, and a lack of legal safeguards.
  • Hence, delving into the often unnoticed realm of informal waste pickers in India becomes imperative to grasp their indispensable yet overlooked contributions to waste management systems.

What is the Informal Sector in Waste Management?

  • The International Labour Organization (ILO) defines the informal sector in waste management as ‘individuals or small and micro-enterprises that intervene in waste management without being registered and without being formally charged with providing waste management services’.
  • These workers are the primary collectors of recyclable waste, playing a critical role in waste management and resource efficiency by collecting, sorting, trading, and sometimes even reinserting discarded waste back into the economy.
  • Yet, they face systemic marginalization due to non-recognition, non-representation, and exclusion from social security schemes and legal protection frameworks.

What Does the Data Reveal?

  • Although precise figures on informal waste pickers are elusive, the Centre for Science and Environment suggests that approximately 5%–2% of the urban population worldwide is involved in the informal waste economy.
  • A significant portion comprises vulnerable demographics such as women, children, and the elderly, many of whom are disabled, residing within the most impoverished urban communities. Tragically, they frequently endure instances of violence and sexual harassment.
  • According to the Periodic Labour Force Survey 2017-18, India's urban workforce includes nearly 1.5 million waste pickers, with approximately half a million being women.

What are the Challenges Faced by Informal Waste Pickers?

  • Systemic Marginalization: Informal waste pickers, predominantly consisting of women, children, and the elderly, face profound marginalization within the waste management ecosystem.
    • According to the Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS) 2017-18, India's urban workforce includes nearly 1.5 million waste pickers, with half being women.
    • Engaging in hazardous work, these individuals collect an average of 60 kg to 90 kg of waste daily without adequate safety measures.
    • Their marginalized position within the caste hierarchy exacerbates their vulnerability, leading to health issues such as dermatological and respiratory problems, as well as frequent injuries.
  • Economic Instability: Irregular employment, low wages, and susceptibility to exploitation contribute to a cycle of poverty that is challenging to break.
    • The 2023 report from the Alliance of Indian Waste Pickers (AIW) underscores the impact of private sector involvement in municipal solid waste management.
    • With the adoption of expensive machinery and competitive rates offered to waste generators, private entities marginalize informal pickers, forcing them into hazardous waste collection activities such as scavenging in dump sites.
    • This not only heightens health risks but also undermines their income and social standing.
  • Lack of Recognition and Representation: The invisibility of informal waste pickers within policy and legal frameworks exacerbates their plight.
    • Despite playing a vital role in waste management systems, they are often overlooked in decision-making processes.
    • Their contributions are not acknowledged, and they lack representation in discussions regarding waste management policies, leaving them without legal protections, social security, and a voice in shaping the systems they contribute to.
  • Exclusion from Formal Waste Management Systems: The involvement of private entities in municipal solid waste management, while introducing technological advancements, further isolates informal waste pickers.
    • Dump sites are frequently restricted, limiting their access and pushing them into greater vulnerability.
    • As highlighted by the AIW, the privatization of waste management sidelines informal pickers, posing threats to their health, income, and overall well-being.
    • This exclusionary approach deepens the gap between formal and informal waste management sectors.

What is the Significance of Informal Waste Pickers in Plastic Management?

  • Global Impact: Waste pickers play a pivotal role in plastic waste management worldwide, responsible for collecting and recovering up to 60% of all plastic waste, as emphasized in the 2022 World Economic Forum report.
  • Underrecognized Contribution: Despite their vital role in sustainable recycling efforts, waste pickers' contributions often go unacknowledged, and they struggle to secure adequate livelihoods.
  • Quantifiable Contribution: Reports from the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP) and Pew indicate that informal waste pickers gathered 27 million metric tonnes of plastic waste in 2016 alone, constituting 59% of all plastic material collected for recycling. This significant effort prevents plastic from ending up in landfills or oceans.
  • Relevance in India: With increasing per capita plastic waste generation in India, the role of waste pickers becomes even more crucial. India is among the top 12 countries responsible for 52% of the world's mismanaged waste, according to a recent CPCB report.
  • Utilizing Traditional Knowledge: Waste pickers possess valuable traditional knowledge about waste handling, which could greatly enhance the effectiveness of Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR) systems if incorporated effectively.
  • Rethinking EPR Frameworks: Given their substantial contribution, it is imperative to reassess the formulation of EPR norms to ensure the inclusion and empowerment of millions of informal waste pickers within the new legal framework.

What is the Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR)?

  • EPR presents a hopeful framework by shifting the burden of waste management from municipal bodies to commercial waste producers.
  • It marks a departure from conventional "end-of-the-pipe" waste management strategies, incentivizing producers to embrace environmentally friendly practices, minimize waste production, and engage in recycling initiatives.
  • In principle, EPR can promote social inclusivity by recognizing the contributions of informal waste pickers and grassroots stakeholders.

Challenges and Considerations Regarding EPR with Informal Waste Pickers:

  • Implementation Challenges: Despite its positive aims, the practical application of EPR has raised concerns about its impact on the informal waste sector.
    • Globalizing and Organizing Women in Informal Employment (WIEGO) notes that EPR guidelines often redirect waste away from the informal sector, jeopardizing the livelihoods of informal waste pickers and potentially leading to widespread displacement.
    • The aspiration for social inclusion through EPR faces a harsh reality, where the informal sector, vital to waste management, risks marginalization.
  • Neglect of Informal Waste Pickers: The Alliance of Indian Waste Pickers (AIW) has observed a significant oversight in both the formulation and execution of EPR guidelines in India.
    • While stakeholders identified in the guidelines include various entities such as the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), producers, brand owners, industry associations, civil society organizations, and citizens, there is a glaring absence of specific inclusion of informal waste pickers or their representative organizations.
    • This omission contradicts the principles of social justice and sustainability that EPR aims to uphold.
  • Conflict Between Solid Waste Management Rules and EPR Guidelines: A conflict arises between the Solid Waste Management Rules of 2016 and the EPR Guidelines of 2022, exacerbating the challenges faced by informal waste pickers.
    • While the former mandates the involvement of waste pickers in municipal solid waste management systems, the latter fails to prioritize their participation.
    • This discrepancy highlights the necessity for a cohesive and integrated approach to waste management policies, wherein the rights and contributions of informal waste pickers are duly recognized and safeguarded.

Way Ahead:

  • Revisiting EPR Policies: To realize the potential of EPR in achieving sustainable waste management and social equity, a reevaluation of its policies is essential.
    • Acknowledging the traditional knowledge held by waste pickers and involving them in decision-making processes can augment the efficacy of EPR frameworks.
    • Furthermore, stakeholders, including producers and policymakers, should actively collaborate with informal waste pickers and their representative bodies to facilitate a fair and equitable transition.
  • Plastic Treaty and Equitable Transition: On a global scale, waste pickers play a significant role in sustainable recycling, collecting, and recovering up to 60% of all plastic waste.
    • Despite their invaluable contributions, their labour is often undervalued, and they struggle to sustain themselves financially.
    • As the global community prepares for the imminent Plastic Treaty aimed at addressing plastic pollution, it is imperative to ensure a just transition for these workers.
    • This entails recognizing their contributions and safeguarding their livelihoods, thereby fostering a more inclusive and equitable approach to plastic management.

Conclusion

As India grapples with escalating plastic waste generation, the imperative of integrating informal waste pickers into waste management frameworks becomes ever more pronounced.

Given the valuable traditional knowledge held by these workers, there is a clear opportunity to bolster the effectiveness of EPR systems through a reevaluation of EPR norms and the active engagement of millions of informal waste pickers within a legal framework. It is essential for international collaboration and local endeavours to intersect, prioritizing the recognition, protection, and empowerment of these often overlooked workers. This convergence holds the potential to foster a more inclusive and robust waste management ecosystem.

 

Are States getting funds they are entitled from the Centre?

  • 29 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

The recent agitations by the governments of Kerala and Karnataka, and the support extended by several State governments, have highlighted many disquieting issues in the practice of fiscal federalism in India.

Context:

  • The recent protests by the governments of Kerala and Karnataka, supported by several other state governments, have brought to light several concerning issues regarding fiscal federalism in India.
  • These protests underscore the pressing need for the newly constituted 16th Finance Commission (FC) to approach the matter with seriousness and innovation to address grievances related to growing vertical and horizontal inequalities in resource allocation.

What is Fiscal Federalism?

  • Fiscal federalism refers to the distribution of financial authority and obligations among various tiers of government within a nation.
  • It encompasses considerations like determining the roles and responsibilities of the central and state governments in delivering services, devising mechanisms for revenue generation and allocation among these entities, and establishing fair and efficient systems for transfers or grants distribution to promote equity and effectiveness.

Fiscal Federalism in India:

  • The framers of the Constitution stipulated that the Central government would share its tax revenues with the states and provide grants from the Consolidated Fund based on a formula determined by the Finance Commission every five years.
  • India operates under a three-tier federal tax system, delineating the powers of the Central government, state governments, and local bodies to levy taxes.
  • The Central government possesses the authority to impose taxes on individual and corporate incomes, along with indirect taxes like central goods and services tax (CGST), integrated goods and services tax (IGST), and customs duties. Additionally, it collects surcharges and cesses on various taxes.
  • State governments are responsible for levying state goods and services tax (SGST), stamp duties, land revenue, state excise duties, and professional taxes.
  • Local bodies exercise jurisdiction over taxes such as property or house taxes, tolls, and utility taxes on services like electricity and water.

What are the Constitutional Provisions?

  • The Constitution of India outlines the taxation authority of both the Union and States, categorizing them into the Union List and the State List respectively (as outlined in the Seventh Schedule under Article 246).
    • Initially, there was no taxation provision in the Concurrent List.
  • However, with the introduction of GST, the need for a concurrent taxation framework arose, leading to the insertion of Article 246A (as the 101st Amendment in August 2016).
  • This amendment empowered the Union to legislate for CGST (Central GST) and IGST (Integrated GST), while the States were granted the authority to enact SGST laws.
  • Article 270 of the Constitution outlines the mechanism for distributing net tax proceeds collected by the Union government among the Centre and the States.

What are the Concerns with the States?

  • Growing Vertical and Horizontal Inequalities: States have raised concerns about increasing disparities both vertically, pertaining to the sharing of resources between the Union and States, and horizontally.
    • The Union government's inclination to retain a larger share of its proceeds outside the divisible pool has exacerbated these inequalities.
  • Retention of Proceeds: The Union government's practice of withholding a greater portion of its proceeds from the divisible pool has diminished the share allocated to States, contravening mandates from successive Finance Commissions.
  • Proliferation of Cesses and Surcharges: Various cesses and surcharges, such as the Agriculture Infrastructure and Development Cess, have been introduced by the Union government, leading to an expansion of these revenue streams.
    • This expansion has resulted in a larger portion of the gross tax revenue being excluded from net proceeds, thereby depriving States of their rightful share.
  • Financial Exclusion of States: Over the period from 2009-10 to 2023-24, the Union government collected a substantial cumulative amount of ?36.6 lakh crore through cesses and surcharges, all of which remained unshared with the States.
    • The imposition of cesses and surcharges has faced criticism from the Comptroller and Auditor General (CAG), further highlighting concerns about their impact on state finances.

Way Forward

  • Rectifying disparities in resource sharing and addressing the proliferation of cesses and surcharges are critical imperatives for the 16th Finance Commission (FC).
  • The FC should proactively address historical imbalances in vertical devolution by compensating States appropriately and ensuring accurate estimates of "net proceeds" in budgetary documents.
  • Moreover, it should consider providing lump sum untied grants to States to offset shortfalls in devolution over the past decade.
  • Simultaneously, legislative measures must be enacted by the Union government to impose strict limits on the collection of cesses and surcharges, ensuring their automatic expiration after a defined period and preventing their rebranding under different names.
  • Furthermore, States must adhere to the principles of fiscal federalism by allocating sufficient resources to local bodies and promoting dynamic and transparent development initiatives at the grassroots level.

What is the Finance Commission?

  • The Finance Commission is constituted by the President under Article 280 of the Constitution, mainly to give its recommendations on the distribution of tax revenues between the Union and the States and amongst the States themselves.
  • Two distinctive features of the Commission’s work involve redressing the vertical imbalances between the taxation powers and expenditure responsibilities of the center and the States respectively and equalization of all public services across the States.

Functions of the Finance Commission:

  • It is the duty of the Commission to make recommendations to the President as to the distribution between the Union and the States of the net proceeds of taxes which are to be:
    • Divided between them and the allocation between the States of the respective shares of such proceeds;
    • The principles which should govern the grants-in-aid of the revenues of the States out of the Consolidated Fund of India;
    • The measures needed to augment the Consolidated Fund of a State to supplement the resources of the Panchayats in the State based on the recommendations made by the Finance Commission of the State;
    • The measures needed to augment the Consolidated Fund of a State to supplement the resources of the Municipalities in the State based on the recommendations made by the Finance Commission of the State;
    • Any other matter referred to the Commission by the President in the interests of sound finance.
  • The Commission determines its procedure and has such powers in the performance of its functions as Parliament may by law confer on them.

Appointment of the Finance Commission and Qualifications for Members:

  • The Finance Commission is appointed by the President under Article 280 of the Constitution.
  • As per the provisions contained in the Finance Commission Act, 1951 and The Finance Commission (Salaries & Allowances) Rules, 1951, the Chairman of the Commission is selected from among persons who have had experience in public affairs, and the four other members are selected from among persons who:
    • (a) are, or have been, or are qualified to be appointed as Judges of a High Court; or
    • (b) have special knowledge of the finances and accounts of the Government; or
    • (c) have had wide experience in financial matters and administration; or
    • (d) have special knowledge of economics

How are the recommendations of the Finance Commission implemented?

  • The recommendations of the Finance Commission are implemented  as under:
    • Those to be implemented by an order of the President:
    • The recommendations relating to the distribution of Union Taxes and Duties and Grants-in-aid fall in this category.
    • Those to be implemented by executive orders:
    • Other recommendations to be made by the Finance Commission, as per its Terms of Reference

When was the first Commission Constituted and how many Commissions have been Constituted so far?

  • The First Finance Commission was constituted under the chairmanship of Shri K.C. Neogy on 6th April 1952.
  • 15th Finance Commissions have been Constituted so far at intervals of every five years.
  • The 16th Finance Commission was constituted on 31 Dec 2023 with Shri Arvind Panagariya, former Vice-Chairman, NITI Aayog as its Chairman.
    • The 16th Finance Commission is required to submit its recommendations by October 31st, 2025.
  • However, the recommendations of the 15th FC cover the six years up to 31st March 2026.

 

Sustainable Practices and Urging for Eco-Friendly Elections in India

  • 28 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

In August 2023, ahead of the Assembly elections in five States, the Election Commission of India (ECI) voiced its concern over the environmental risks associated with the use of non-biodegradable materials in elections.

Context:

  • The Election Commission of India (ECI) has emphasized the environmental impact of traditional election materials, urging a shift towards eco-friendly practices, particularly given India's status as the world's largest democracy.
  • India must prioritize environmental sustainability in its electoral procedures, recognizing successful eco-friendly initiatives in Kerala, Sri Lanka, and Estonia, and strategizing a comprehensive green transition involving diverse stakeholders.

Why Conducting Elections Require a Paradigm Shift?

  • Unrecognized Environmental Impact of Elections: The emissions generated by campaign flights in the 2016 US presidential elections underscore the substantial carbon footprint linked to conventional election methodologies.
    • Conventional election practices, marked by paper-based materials, energy-intensive rallies, and disposable items, contribute to environmental harm and affect public health.
    • Given the colossal scale of India's elections, these concerns become more pressing, calling for a shift towards eco-friendly election processes.
  • Startling Research Findings: Recent research from Estonia (2023) pinpoints transportation to and from polling booths as the primary contributor to carbon emissions in elections, closely followed by the operational footprint of polling booths.
    • Adopting digital voting systems has the potential to slash the overall carbon footprint by as much as 40%.

What are Some Successful Models of Eco-Friendly Elections?

  • Pioneering Initiatives in Kerala and Goa: During the 2019 general election, the Kerala State Election Commission spearheaded efforts to eliminate single-use plastic materials from campaign activities.
    • Subsequently, the Kerala High Court enforced a ban on non-biodegradable materials, leading to the adoption of eco-friendly alternatives like paper posters and wall graffiti.
    • Collaborative endeavors between government bodies and district administrations in Thiruvananthapuram ensured the implementation of green election practices, including training sessions for election workers in rural areas.
    • In 2022, the Goa State Biodiversity Board showcased eco-friendly election booths crafted from biodegradable materials by local artisans during the Assembly elections.
  • Innovative Strategies from Sri Lanka: In 2019, the Sri Lanka Podujana Peramuna (SLPP) party initiated the world's first carbon-sensitive, environmentally friendly election campaign.
    • This groundbreaking campaign measured carbon emissions from campaign vehicles and electricity usage, offsetting them by planting trees across districts with public participation.
    • By addressing the immediate carbon footprint of the campaign and raising awareness about the importance of forest cover, Sri Lanka set a notable example for sustainable election practices.
  • Estonia's Digital Voting Model: Estonia pioneered digital voting as an online alternative, significantly enhancing voter participation while reducing environmental impact.
    • The success of Estonia's approach underscores the feasibility of digital voting, complemented by stringent security measures, as an eco-friendly and voter-centric solution.

A Roadmap for Sustainable Green Elections:

  • Political Leadership and Digital Campaigning: Political parties should enact legislation mandating eco-friendly election practices, integrating them into the Model Code of Conduct governing campaign activities.
    • Encouraging the adoption of digital platforms for campaigning and door-to-door outreach can substantially reduce the carbon footprint associated with traditional public rallies.
  • Incentivizing Sustainable Practices and Infrastructure Development: Offering incentives for political parties to use sustainable materials like natural fabrics and recycled paper in place of plastic and paper-based campaign materials, alongside supporting waste management and local artisans.
    • Government investment in digital voting infrastructure, particularly in rural areas, ensures reliable internet access and accessible digital devices for all voters.
  • Role of the Election Commission of India (ECI) with Government Backing: The ECI can advocate for digital voting systems, highlighting their environmental benefits and addressing security concerns through comprehensive measures.
  • Public Awareness and Civil Society Engagement: Civil society organizations can lead public awareness campaigns, educating citizens about the environmental impact of traditional election methods and advocating for eco-friendly alternatives.
    • Monitoring the implementation of green initiatives and advocating for transparency and accountability in the electoral process.
  • Media's Advocacy Role: Media outlets can spotlight the environmental consequences of conventional election methods through investigative reporting and by showcasing successful eco-friendly initiatives.
  • Global Collaboration for Sustainable Elections: Collaborating with countries like Sri Lanka and Estonia, which have successfully implemented eco-friendly election practices, to share insights and support international platforms for exchanging best practices in sustainable electoral initiatives.

Hurdles and Potential Solutions for Conducting Eco-Friendly Elections:

  • Technology Barriers: Ensuring a seamless transition to digital voting demands robust technological infrastructure, particularly in remote regions where connectivity may be sparse.
    • Upholding the integrity and security of digital systems is paramount, requiring comprehensive safeguards against cyber threats and manipulation to uphold public trust.
  • Financial Impediments: Embracing eco-friendly materials and technologies entails significant initial investments, posing challenges for governments constrained by budgetary limitations.
    • Competing priorities may hinder the allocation of funds toward sustainable electoral practices, despite their long-term environmental advantages.
  • Cultural Shifts and Public Doubts: Cultural norms often associate physical polling booth presence with democratic participation, necessitating efforts to shift perceptions towards digital methods.
    • Addressing public skepticism regarding new technologies, particularly concerns about security and reliability, requires proactive measures to build trust and confidence.
  • Promoting Transparency and Accountability: The adoption of eco-friendly and digital strategies must be accompanied by transparent processes and robust auditing mechanisms.
    • Establishing clear protocols for auditing new practices fosters accountability and addresses concerns about fairness and impartiality, enhancing public trust.
  • Tackling Logistical Complexities: Executing large-scale electoral reforms demands meticulous planning and coordination across various stages.
    • From sourcing eco-friendly materials to training personnel, addressing logistical challenges systematically is essential for smooth implementation.

Conclusion

Adopting environmentally conscious electoral practices represents not only an imperative for India but also a chance to lead by example on the global stage. Harmonizing high-level policies with ground-level efforts and engaging various stakeholders—political entities, Election Commissions, governments, citizens, media, and civil society—can position India as a trailblazer in conducting sustainable elections. This transformative approach not only integrates environmental responsibility but also reinforces the connection between ecological stewardship and the core tenets of democracy.

An expansive land management policy is overdue

  • 27 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

The global economic impact of land degradation on ecosystem services amounts to an estimated $6 trillion annually.

Context:

  • Land plays a crucial role across various human endeavors, offering ecological, economic, social, and cultural benefits.
  • However, the multi-faceted nature of land is often overlooked in management practices, leading to heightened stress, degradation, and environmental strain.
  • Globally, land degradation results in annual losses of ecosystem services estimated at USD 6 trillion.
  • The 14th Conference of Parties (COP14) of the United Nations Convention to Combat Desertification (UNCCD), held in New Delhi in 2019, highlighted the widespread challenge of land degradation faced by different nations and emphasized the importance of achieving Land Degradation Neutrality (LDN).

What is Land Degradation?

  • Land degradation refers to the deterioration of the quality and productivity of land resources, typically caused by human activities and natural processes.
  • It involves the loss of soil fertility, reduction in vegetation cover, depletion of water resources, and overall decline in the capacity of the land to support various ecosystem functions and human activities.
  • Land degradation can take various forms, including soil erosion, desertification, deforestation, salinization, and contamination by pollutants.
  • It poses significant environmental, economic, and social challenges, impacting agricultural productivity, food security, biodiversity, and the livelihoods of millions of people around the world.
  • Addressing land degradation is crucial for sustainable land use, environmental conservation, and the well-being of present and future generations.

What is the Current Status of Land Degradation in India?

  • From 2015 to 2019, UNCCD data reported that 30.51 million hectares of India's land had degraded, accounting for 9.45% of the nation's total landmass by 2019, up from 4.42% in 2015.
  • During this period, 251.71 million Indians, constituting 18.39% of the population, were exposed to land degradation, with 854.4 million individuals experiencing drought from 2015 to 2018.
  • According to the Desertification and Land Degradation Atlas of India, published by the Space Applications Centre (SAC) of the Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO), the extent of land degradation and desertification in India reached 97.84 million hectares in 2018-19.
  • This atlas offers state-wise data on degraded land, aiding in the planning and execution of initiatives aimed at land restoration by providing crucial data and technical insights.

Global Scenario:

  • Land degradation exhibits significant regional variations, with Sub-Saharan Africa, Western and Southern Asia, Latin America, and the Caribbean witnessing degradation rates surpassing the global average between 2015 and 2019.
  • In Eastern and Central Asia, Latin America, and the Caribbean, over 20% of the total land area faced severe degradation by 2019.
  • Since 2015, Sub-Saharan Africa saw its degraded land increase from 6.7% to 14.63%, while Western Asia and Northern Africa experienced a rise from 3.78% to 7.18%.

What are the Different Causes of Land Degradation?

  • Deforestation: Driven by population growth and resource demand, deforestation weakens soil structure, making it prone to erosion by wind and water.
    • Deforestation is particularly rampant in areas like Maharashtra, Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh, and Gujarat.
  • Mineral Processing: Industries such as limestone grinding and ceramic production release substantial dust, settling in surrounding areas and contributing to land degradation.
  • Soil Erosion: Processes like water flow, wind, rainfall, and landslides strip away the fertile topsoil layer, leaving behind less fertile subsoil, and rendering land unsuitable for cultivation and agriculture.
  • Overgrazing: Excessive grazing by animals removes grass cover, making soil susceptible to erosion by wind and water.
    • This phenomenon, common in hilly areas like Maharashtra, Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh, and Gujarat, disrupts soil structure and fertility.
  • Over-Irrigation: In states like Punjab, Haryana, and Uttar Pradesh, excessive irrigation leads to soil salinity and alkalinity, diminishing its fertility and suitability for agriculture.
  • Mining Sites: After mining activities, abandoned sites leave deep scars and harmful materials that degrade the soil, rendering it unsuitable for productive use.
    • Deforestation due to mining in states like Chhattisgarh, Jharkhand, Madhya Pradesh, and Odisha exacerbates land degradation.
  • Industrial Effluents: Waste disposal from industries is a significant source of land and water pollution, contributing to land degradation.
  • Mining and Developmental Projects: Large-scale clearing of forests for mining and construction projects further accelerates land degradation under the guise of development.
  • Commercial Exploitation of Forests: High-value trees and plants are harvested for economic gain, disrupting soil-plant interactions essential for soil stability.
    • Overgrazing, mining, agricultural expansion, floods, and forest fires are key drivers of deforestation, exacerbating land degradation.
  • Desertification: Human activities and climate change contribute to desert-like conditions in arid or semi-arid regions, leading to the spread of sand onto fertile agricultural lands, reducing soil fertility, and hampering agricultural productivity.

Challenges in the Management of Land Degradation in India:

  • India with only 2.4% of the world’s geographical area and more than 17% of the world's population experiences several land management challenges.
  • Arable land in India is around 55% of the total geographical area and forest cover accounts for another 22%.
    • The rest is desert, mountains, etc.
  • Around 30% of the total geographical area is degraded land.
  • Access to agricultural land continues to be an important livelihood issue as a significant share of the population depends on agriculture for their sustenance.
  • Development targets and the demand for land to accommodate the growing population, infrastructure, rapid urbanization, and social, cultural, and environmental aspects are placing unprecedented pressure on land.
    • This is resulting in more competition among farmers and between agriculture and other land resource-based sectors, as well as land use conflicts, escalation of land prices, and changing land rights.
  • Across the country, natural areas are being squeezed and ecological functions are being lost.
  • Not only does this adversely affect the livelihood opportunities of the people who directly depend on environmental resources, but also the buffering effects of natural ecosystems in the face of disasters such as floods and droughts, temperature rise, and environmental pollution are severely compromised.
  • Climate change has brought with it another set of challenges.
  • In India, current land management practices are sectoral with each department following its own approach.
    • Land management falls under the purview of State governments.
  • Further, cultural land is privately owned and land-use decisions are constitutionally vested with the owner.
  • Apart from this administrative complexity, the challenges to adopting and implementing appropriate land management practices in the country include knowledge gaps, a short-term planning bias, a fragmented approach, a lack of action for unforeseen events, and regulatory barriers.

What Steps Need to be Taken for Land Management?

  • Set up a Multi-stakeholder Platform: As a critical mechanism to achieving sectoral integration and addressing these challenges, it is imperative to set up a multi-stakeholder platform at the district and sub-district levels to bring together farmers, other land managers, policymakers, civil society organizations, business leaders, and investors under a common platform.
    • Article 243ZD (1) of the Constitution provides for district planning committees to consolidate plans from panchayats and municipalities.
    • This committee may be activated in the direction of preparing a land management plan, covering both agricultural and non-agricultural sectors.
  • Landscape Approach: A landscape approach will be useful in this context as it will provide deep insights to assess the potential of land and the scope of allocation and reallocation of land for appropriate uses.
    • This will help with evaluation, negotiation, trade-off, and decision-making.
    • A climate-smart landscape approach will contribute to climate objectives, increased agricultural production, improved local livelihoods, and the conservation of biodiversity.

Government Initiatives to Combat Land Degradation and Desertification in India:

  • Desertification and Land Degradation Atlas of India, published by Space Applications Centre (SAC) Indian Space Research Organisation, Ahmedabad, which provides the extent of land degradation and desertification in India, states that the land degradation and desertification in the country has been estimated to be 97.84 million hectares in 2018-19.
    • It provides state-wise areas of degraded land which is helpful in the planning and implementation of schemes aimed at the restoration of land by providing important data and technical inputs.
  • An online portal has been developed with the help of Space Application Center(SAC), Ahmedabad for visualization of degraded areas of land with the processes causing degradation.
  • A Centre of Excellence has been envisaged at the Indian Council for Forestry Research and Education (ICFRE) Dehradun for enhanced South-South Cooperation.
    • It aims at knowledge sharing, promotion of best practices, sharing India’s experiences with cost-effective and sustainable land management strategies, developing ideas for transformative projects and programs, and capacity building.

Way Forward:

  • Advancing Integrated Landscape Management: Despite existing on-ground experiences, there is a lack of systematic institutional support for this approach, highlighting the need for concerted efforts to promote it.
  • Embracing the Value of Landscape: Echoing the European Landscape Convention's recognition of landscape as vital for individual and societal well-being, greater emphasis should be placed on understanding and preserving landscapes.
  • Recognizing the Role of Sustainable Land Management: Reports like the U.K. Parliamentary Office of Science and Technology's assessment underscore the importance of managing land sustainably for environmental benefits, including addressing climate change, ensuring food security, and mitigating biodiversity loss.
  • Parliamentary Action in India: Indian lawmakers can spearhead discussions on the evolving challenges of integrated land management practices and play a pivotal role in crafting policies for long-term sustainability.
  • This necessitates the involvement of stakeholders at all levels, fostering collaboration horizontally and vertically across the spectrum.

 

Preserving Democratic Integrity Through Privacy Safeguards in the Digital Age

  • 26 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

The big data economy, powered by massive datasets and unprecedented levels of personal information has fundamentally altered how a country conducts elections, and how people vote.

Background:

  • The emergence of the big data economy has significantly altered the landscape of elections and individual voting patterns, offering both benefits and challenges.
  • As the general elections approach in two months, it becomes imperative to delve into the far-reaching effects of extensive datasets on political scenarios.
  • Equally important is a comprehensive understanding of the privacy implications, emphasizing the critical necessity for robust data protection measures, especially in anticipation of the upcoming elections in India.

What are the Challenges Arising from Big Data's Influence on Elections?

  • Precision Targeting and Tailoring: Big data enables political campaigns to engage in micro-targeting, tailoring messages and campaign content to specific demographics or individual voters.
    • By analyzing extensive datasets, candidates gain insights into voters' preferences, behaviors, and opinions, facilitating highly customized outreach efforts across various communication channels.
  • Lack of Transparency and Consent: A significant concern is the opacity surrounding collecting, processing, and utilizing personal information.
    • Voters often lack awareness of databases containing detailed personal data and the extent to which it's used for political purposes.
    • Informed consent becomes elusive, as individuals are unaware of how their data is harnessed, limiting their ability to control its usage.
  • Reinforcement of Power Dynamics: The abundance of data amplifies the power of political entities to influence voters through targeted messaging and strategic communication.
    • Candidates can craft narratives tailored to specific groups, addressing issues and concerns discerned from data analysis.
    • This sophisticated targeting extends beyond demographic attributes, delving into personal preferences and habits.
  • Risks of Manipulation and Exploitation: While big data offers campaign efficiency and targeted communication, it also presents risks of manipulation and exploitation.
    • Unethical practices, such as the strategic dissemination of misinformation to exploit voter sentiments, can undermine the integrity of the electoral process.
    • Information asymmetry between political entities and voters raises concerns about privacy invasion and democratic principles.

 What are the Consequences of Social Media and Networks Effects?

  • Network Effect: The network effect, central to social media platforms, describes the increasing value and utility of a network as more users join.
    • Larger user bases offer enhanced connectivity, content creation, and interaction opportunities, drawing individuals to these platforms.
  • Profound Data Collection and User Profiling: Social media platforms thrive on comprehensive data collection, going beyond basic demographics to create detailed user profiles.
    • Users' interactions provide valuable insights into their preferences, behaviors, and associations, enabling targeted advertising and personalized content delivery.
  • Lack of Transparency in Data Practices: Users often lack awareness of the extent and granularity of data collected by social media platforms, raising concerns about privacy invasion and potential misuse.
    • Limited transparency results in minimal user control over data utilization, highlighting the need for greater transparency and accountability.
  • Algorithmic Personalization and Decision-Making: Algorithms drive personalized user experiences on social media platforms, curating content based on collected data.
    • While personalization enhances user satisfaction, it also introduces concerns regarding algorithmic biases and selective information presentation, influencing user perspectives and behaviors.
  • Commercialization and Data Exploitation: Social media platforms monetize user data through direct sales or personalized advertising, leveraging extensive user profiling for targeted marketing.
    • While this practice benefits platforms economically, it sparks ethical debates surrounding the commercialization and commodification of user information.

The Indian Data Protection Act has Critical Flaws.:

  • India’s Data Protection Act has not yet come into force. Its critical flaws include:
  • Absence of Limitations on Government’s Powers to Access Data: The Act lacks clear limitations on governmental powers to access data, raising concerns about potential misuse and infringing on citizens' right to privacy.
    • This ambiguity undermines the fundamental principle of safeguarding individuals from unwarranted surveillance.
  • Lack of Independence for the Data Protection Board: The absence of proper checks and balances compromises the independence and effectiveness of the Data Protection Board, leaving it vulnerable to external influences and pressures.
    • Instances of withholding information by authorities, citing the Data Protection Act, underscore the potential for confusion and misuse during this transitional phase.
  • Challenges in Enforcement and Redressal: The non-functional status of the Data Protection Board exacerbates challenges in enforcement and redressal mechanisms.
    • Individuals lack a reliable channel for seeking recourse in privacy violations, further complicating the protection of individual rights.
  • Deficiencies in Actionable Rights: The Act needs to adequately address individual rights, notably omitting essential provisions such as the right to compensation.
    • This limitation restricts individuals' ability to seek appropriate remedies for privacy infringements, weakening the overall efficacy of the data protection framework.

Way Forward:

  • Seizing the Opportunity for Improvement: The forthcoming rules to operationalize the Data Protection Act represent a pivotal moment to address existing shortcomings and enhance privacy safeguards.
    • Engaging stakeholders through multi-stakeholder consultations is imperative to ensure a comprehensive and diverse range of perspectives informs the regulatory framework.
  • Placing Individuals at the Core: Prioritizing the impact on individuals is paramount in shaping the rules.
    • By emphasizing individuals' rights and privacy concerns, the regulatory framework can better serve the needs and interests of citizens.
    • Sustained and inclusive consultation processes must remain ongoing, fostering an environment conducive to incorporating feedback from diverse stakeholders.
  • The urgency for Legislative Reforms: While the rules offer avenues for corrective action, the imperative for legislative reforms cannot be overstated.
    • Foundational flaws, particularly concerning governmental powers and the independence of the Data Protection Board, necessitate substantive changes at the legislative level.
    • Striking a delicate balance between feasibility and inclusivity is essential to avoid hasty amendments that may compromise the integrity and effectiveness of the data protection regime.

Conclusion

As India approaches elections, the need for a people-centric data protection framework becomes evident, striking a delicate balance between the advantages of digitization and the preservation of privacy and democratic values. Emphasizing inclusive and rights-based models is crucial in effectively addressing the complexities presented by the big data landscape, fostering a resilient and equitable digital future that cannot be underestimated.

Upholding Constitutional Values: A Call Beyond Celebration

  • 23 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

While SC judgments on electoral bonds and Chandigarh mayoral election are welcome, they ought not to merely be an episodic legitimisation of the façade of constitutionalism.

Recent Indian Supreme Court Rulings Questioning Government Actions:

  • Invalidating the Electoral Bonds Scheme: The Supreme Court ruled the electoral bonds scheme unconstitutional, posing a challenge to a major government initiative concerning political funding.
  • AAP Victory in Chandigarh Mayoral Election: The Court affirmed the Aam Aadmi Party's (AAP) victory in the Chandigarh mayoral race, overturning a local electoral outcome and directly challenging administrative actions in the election process.

Analyzing the Supreme Court's Balancing Act:

  • Observe the Executive's Activities to Sustain Its Own Lawfulness: The Supreme Court of India, as the highest judicial authority, bears the weighty responsibility of interpreting and upholding the Constitution.
    • In fulfilling this duty, it frequently engages in a precarious balancing act, striving to negotiate the intricacies of challenging executive decisions while safeguarding its own credibility.
    • This intricate dance between the judiciary and the executive mirrors the broader constitutional framework, wherein checks and balances play a pivotal role in preventing the dominance of any single branch.
  • Significance of Upholding Legitimacy: A fundamental aspect of this delicate balancing act is the imperative to avoid antagonizing the executive to the extent that it imperils the Court's legitimacy.
    • The Court recognizes that maintaining this delicate equilibrium is indispensable for the institution’s continued existence.
    • A collapse in the Court's credibility could undermine the very fabric of the constitutional order it endeavours to uphold.
    • This consideration often influences the Court's deliberations, prompting careful consideration of the potential ramifications for its stature.

What are the Issues with the Court's Balancing Act Against the Executive?

  • The Court grapples with the intricate balance between its roles as a legal arbiter and guardian of constitutional integrity, particularly when confronted with executive actions that may encroach upon constitutional principles.
  • Recent decisions, like invalidating the electoral bonds scheme, highlight the Court's assertion in safeguarding democratic norms while cautiously avoiding confrontation to preserve its legitimacy.
  • However, concerns arise when the Court's reluctance to challenge the executive overshadows its commitment to constitutional values, potentially legitimizing authoritarian agendas.
  • Maintaining a facade of constitutionalism can lead to questions regarding the Court's consistent commitment to curbing executive power.
  • The Court must uphold constitutional principles robustly, even if it means challenging the executive's authority uncomfortably, to ensure justice and democracy prevail.
  • Success in this delicate balancing act lies not only in the decisions rendered but also in the Court's unwavering dedication to justice and democracy, despite formidable executive pressures.

Analysing Political Culture, Public Sentiment, and the Court's Influence:

  • Disparity Between Legal Pronouncements and Public Opinion: Recent Supreme Court rulings against government initiatives, such as invalidating the electoral bonds scheme, fail to resonate as significant concerns within public sentiment, highlighting a disconnection between legal decisions and public perception.
  • Normalization of Institutional Decline: The lack of public outcry over decisions challenging government actions reflects a worrying normalization of institutional decay, where issues like electoral malpractice are perceived as minor errors rather than threats to democracy.
  • Aestheticization of Politics: Rather than prompting political concern, events like the Chandigarh mayoral race are often viewed as entertainment, illustrating a shallow engagement with political developments that overlook their implications for governance.
  • Opposition Fragmentation and Political Dynamics: The Opposition's fragmented state impedes its ability to leverage judicial decisions against the government, weakening efforts to hold the ruling party accountable and allowing it to diminish the significance of adverse legal rulings.
  • Courts' Influence on Political Culture: While the Court delivers commendable decisions, it operates within a political culture seemingly immune to the erosion of democratic norms, limiting its ability to shape broader perceptions.
    • Legal victories, though sound, struggle to spark the necessary public mobilization to impact the prevailing political climate.

Way Ahead:

  • Embracing Civic Courage and Critical Inquiry: Amidst institutional erosion and a dearth of political engagement, there is a pressing need for civic courage, critical thinking, and a commitment to holding the government to account.
    • Instances of institutional impropriety, whether through overreach, repression, or communalisation, often fail to provoke a robust public response.
    • The reluctance to critically engage with such issues perpetuates a political climate where even pro-democracy decisions are seen as rare anomalies rather than normative outcomes.
    • As such, the public's reception of these rulings becomes pivotal in shaping their enduring impact.
  • Calling for a Reassessment of Institutional Roles: Recent legal verdicts must be part of a broader effort to challenge the consolidation of authoritarianism and communalism.
    • The prevailing political climate necessitates critically reassessing institutional roles in fostering genuine accountability.

Conclusion

Recent Supreme Court rulings, while potentially positive, warrant cautious consideration amid broader institutional challenges. Navigating issues like legitimacy balancing, fragmented opposition, and institutional normalization presents formidable obstacles. The enduring impact of these decisions hinges on both public reception and the Court's steadfast dedication to constitutional principles, determining whether they signify substantive progress or fleeting glimpses of hope amidst broader democratic challenges in India.

 

India Allows 100% Foreign Direct Investment in Space Sector

  • 22 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

Recently, the government of India has approved the amendment in the Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) policy for the space sector.

Context:

  • India’s space industry, though nascent compared to global leaders such as the US, Russia, and China, has made significant strides in cutting-edge technologies, as evidenced by successful missions like Chandrayaan-3, Aditya-L1, and XpoSat.
  • These achievements have not only demonstrated India’s economic prowess in space technology but have also positioned the Country favourably on the global map.
    • However, the sector faces challenges, particularly in funding.
  • Despite the sector’s expansion from 10 to 150 startups within three years, the absence of a substantial domestic investor pool interested in space ventures, which are inherently slow to yield returns, has hindered growth.
  • The only other way out was to look at Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) policy.
  • According to experts, “India stands at a critical juncture in its space journey.
  • With strategic investments in infrastructure and manufacturing, alongside fostering innovation and education, India can achieve its goal of a US$44 billion space economy by 2033, enhancing its position as a global leader in space technology and services.

What is the Current Status of India’s Space Sector?

  • India's expertise in the space sector is globally acknowledged, with achievements ranging from cost-effective satellite construction to launching foreign satellites.
  • Aligned with its commitment to the Geneva Conference on Disarmament (1979), India advocates for the peaceful and civilian utilization of outer space, opposing any militarization efforts.
  • The Indian Space Economy is valued at approximately $8.4 billion, constituting around 2-3% of the global space economy.
  • ISRO stands as the 6th largest space agency globally, boasting an impressive success rate.
    • India also ranks 5th worldwide in the number of private space companies, with over 400 such entities.
  • Budgetary Allocation: The Department of Space has witnessed a nominal 4% increase in its allocation in the Interim Union Budget for 2024-25, rising from ?12,545 crore to ?13,043 crore.
  • Future Projections: Implementation of the Indian Space Policy 2023 could propel the Indian space economy to reach $44 billion by 2033.
  • Growth in Space Start-Ups: The number of Space Start-Ups has surged from just 1 in 2014 to 189 in 2023, as reported by the DPIIT Start-Up India Portal.
    • Investment in Indian Space Start-Ups has concurrently risen to $124.7 million in 2023.

Key Changes in FDI Policy:

  • With the privatization of space launches, India aims for a significant five-fold increase in its share of the global launch market.
  • The recent changes in the FDI policy reflect a more welcoming approach to foreign investment.
  • Specifically, the satellite sector which used to have strict rules has now been split into different parts each with its own limits on how much foreign investment is allowed.
  • Launch Vehicles and Associated Systems/Subsystems: Foreign investment up to 49% is permitted under the automatic route with government approval mandated for anything beyond this threshold.
    • This includes activities related to the establishment of spaceports for spacecraft launches and receptions.
  • Satellite Manufacturing and Operation: The automatic route allows for up to 74% FDI covering satellite manufacturing, operation, satellite data products and both the Ground Segment and User Segment.
    • Approval from the government is required for FDI exceeding 74% in these activities.
  • Manufacturing of Components and Systems/Subsystems: Foreign investors are now allowed to invest up to 100% in manufacturing components and systems for satellites, ground segments and user segments through the automatic route.
  • The decision to liberalize FDI norms in the space sector stems from a strategic vision outlined in the Indian Space Policy 2023.
  • By fostering a more investor-friendly environment the government aims to tap into the potential of non-government entities (NGEs) encouraging them to invest in Indian companies within the space domain.
  • This move is expected to drive technological advancements, scale up operations globally and boost India's position in the global space economy.

Recent Advancements in the India’s Space Sector:

  • Indian Space Policy 2023: This policy delineates the roles and responsibilities of entities like ISRO, NewSpace India Limited (NSIL), and private sector players with the aim of bolstering involvement from research, academia, startups, and industry.
  • Strategic Proposals by SIA: The Space Industry Association – India (SIA-India) has recommended in its Pre-Budget Memorandum for FY 2024-25 a substantial increase in India's space budget.
  • Defence Space Agency (DSA): India inaugurated its Defence Space Agency (DSA) alongside the Defence Space Research Organisation (DSRO), tasked with developing space-based weapons to counter adversaries.
  • Defence Space Mission Launch: The Indian Prime Minister unveiled the Defence Space Mission during the Defence Expo 2022 in Gandhinagar.
  • Expansion of Satellite Manufacturing: India's satellite manufacturing sector is forecasted to grow to USD 3.2 billion by 2025, up from USD 2.1 billion in 2020.
  • SAMVAD Program: ISRO introduced the SAMVAD Student Outreach Program at its Bengaluru facility, aimed at fostering space research among young minds.
  • The objective is to bolster India's expanding space program, encourage private sector participation, drive technological innovation, and position the nation as a prominent player in the global space landscape.

Importance of Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) in the Space Sector:

  • Advancement in Space Missions: India's achievements in space missions have positioned it as a reliable provider of cost-effective space solutions globally, with FDI expected to further enhance technological capabilities and expand operations.
  • Boost to Manufacturing: Encourages the establishment of manufacturing facilities within India, aligning with the government's 'Make In India' initiative and bolstering domestic manufacturing capabilities.
  • Private Sector Engagement: FDI facilitates greater private sector involvement in India's space endeavours, transitioning from ISRO-driven initiatives to leveraging space technology for commercial applications and fostering industry participation.
  • Integration into Global Value Chains: Expected to integrate Indian companies into global value chains, enabling them to contribute significantly to the global space economy.
  • Technology Uptake and Global Collaboration: FDI promotes the absorption of advanced technology and facilitates global integration, enabling companies to enhance product sophistication, scale operations globally, and increase their share in the global space economy.
  • Enhanced Business Environment: FDI policy reforms improve the Ease of Doing Business in India, attracting greater FDI inflows and fostering investment, income, and employment growth.
  • Stimulus for Research and Innovation: FDI in the space sector stimulates technology transfer, fosters research collaborations, and encourages innovation, driving advancements in space technology and applications.

What are the Challenges?

  • Limited Investor Engagement: Investors show limited interest in the later stages of space tech development, likely due to perceived high risks and long-term investment horizons.
  • Talent Shortage: The space tech sector faces a shortage of skilled professionals, highlighting the need for expanded talent development initiatives.
  • Policy Ambiguity: Ambiguous policies in the space sector create uncertainty, necessitating clear and consistent regulatory frameworks to attract foreign investment.
  • Streamlining FDI Procedures: Simplification of foreign direct investment processes is essential to remove barriers and encourage investor participation in the space industry.
  • High Capital Requirements: Space technology ventures demand substantial capital investments, posing challenges for startups and smaller enterprises in accessing necessary funds.
  • Competition Concerns with ISRO: Foreign investors express reservations due to competition concerns with ISRO, highlighting the importance of addressing perceived conflicts of interest to instil investor confidence.

Conclusion

The amendment in the FDI policy on the space sector heralds a new era of growth and opportunity for India’s space industry. By opening doors to foreign investment, India aims to leverage private sector participation to enhance its space capabilities, drive innovation, and foster economic development. The policy reform underscores India’s commitment to becoming a global leader in space exploration and technology.

Having panchayats as self-governing institutions

  • 21 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

There is a need to educate elected representatives and the public on the significance and the need for panchayats to be able to survive on its own resources

Context:

  • Three decades have passed since the enactment of the 73rd and 74th Constitutional Amendment Acts, designed to institutionalize local bodies as entities of local self-government.
  • Presently, the degree of devolution in India's Panchayati Raj institutions exhibits variations among states, with some making substantial strides and others trailing behind.
  • Therefore, there is a pressing need to scrutinize the fiscal devolution dimension, underscoring the pivotal role of state government commitment in enhancing the effectiveness of Panchayati Raj institutions at the grassroots level.

What is the Local Self Government?

  • The system of local self-government, more commonly known as ‘panchayats’, had been established to empower the grassroots of democracy in India.
  • Panchayats or local-self rule is a three-tier system in each state which has elected bodies at the village, taluk and district levels.
  • The concept of panchayats has been present in Indian society since ancient times.
  • Over the centuries the concept has undergone various changes and modifications and in the recent past has taken the form of panchayati raj institutions after decentralization reforms in the early 1990s.
  • These institutions for grassroots-level democracy were formally included in the Constitution through the 73rd and 74th Amendments Act in 1993.
  • The constitutional amendments also ensured the reservation of one-third of all elected positions for women in both rural and urban areas.
  • Derived from the Central Act, various State Panchayati Raj Acts have incorporated provisions for taxation and revenue collection.
  • The main idea of setting up local-self government institutions was to enable and empower the local people to manage their affairs by being a part of the decision-making process and participating in the implementation of policies in a more effective manner.

The Present State of Fiscal Devolution of Panchayats:

  • Reliance on External Funds: The 73rd and 74th Constitutional Amendments Acts underscored the importance of fiscal devolution, urging Panchayati Raj institutions and urban local bodies to achieve financial self-sufficiency.
    • These amendments explicitly stated the necessity for local bodies to generate their own revenues to reduce reliance on grants from higher levels of government.
    • However, the current scenario indicates that Panchayati Raj institutions still heavily depend on external funding, with only 1% of their revenue originating from taxes.
  • Panchayats' Struggle to Generate Revenue Through Taxation: The data highlights the challenge that, despite constitutional provisions, Panchayats are not effectively utilizing taxation as a primary revenue source.
    • Merely 1% of revenue is generated through taxes, while a significant 80% is sourced from the Central government and 15% from the States.
    • This disparity raises concerns about the commitment of state governments to decentralization and the overall efficacy of devolution initiatives implemented over the past three decades.
  • Centralization of Financial Resources Despite Constitutional Emphasis on Fiscal Devolution: Despite the constitutional emphasis on fiscal devolution, the centralization of financial resources remains a persistent issue.
    • Panchayats are envisioned as self-governing entities with the authority to raise their own revenue, yet the reality paints a different picture.
    • The disproportionate distribution of revenue indicates a lack of fiscal empowerment at the grassroots level, undermining the fundamental principles of local self-government.

What are the Challenges Faced by Panchayati Raj Institutions in Revenue Generation?

  • Dependency on Grants: The reliance on grants is exacerbated by the heightened allocations from Central Finance Commissions (CFC).
    • A comparative analysis reveals a significant increase in grants disbursed through the 14th and 15th CFCs, amounting to ?2,00,202 crore and ?2,80,733 crore, respectively.
    • This substantial influx of grants has inadvertently diminished incentives for generating own-source revenue.
    • Panchayats, buoyed by augmented financial assistance, have gradually shifted focus away from revenue generation, fostering a culture of dependence on external funds.
  • The Culture of Entitlement: A prevalent cultural mindset fosters resistance to taxation, with individuals expecting a range of services and benefits without contributing financially to the sustenance of Panchayats.
    • This aversion to taxation arises from the belief that public services should be provided without imposing a direct financial burden on the local populace.
  • Dilemma of Elected Representatives: Elected representatives, crucial to the functioning of Panchayati Raj institutions, grapple with their own set of challenges.
    • There exists a tangible apprehension among these representatives that levying taxes might adversely affect their popularity and electoral prospects.
    • This fear often results in hesitancy to take decisive steps towards revenue generation.
    • Addressing this challenge necessitates targeted efforts to educate elected representatives about the enduring benefits of financial self-sufficiency and its positive impact on local development endeavours.
  • Decline in Tax Collection: Tax collection, which stood at ?3,12,075 lakh in 2018-19, dwindled to ?2,71,386 lakh by 2021-2022.
    • This downward trend raises concerns, signalling a waning commitment to financial autonomy at the local level.
    • Similarly, non-tax revenue also experienced a decline from ?2,33,863 lakh to ?2,09,864 lakh during the same period.
    • These patterns underscore the imperative for revitalized efforts in revenue generation and a departure from grant dependency.

Government's Efforts to Implement Constitutionally Mandated Fiscal Devolution:

  • Establishment of an Expert Committee: To address this challenge, the Ministry of Panchayati Raj constituted an expert committee tasked with examining the own source of revenue (OSR) of rural local bodies.
    • The committee's findings delineate various revenue-generating avenues accessible to Panchayati Raj institutions through State Acts.
    • These mechanisms include property tax, land revenue cess, stamp duty surcharge, tolls, professional tax, advertisement tax, and user charges for essential services like water, sanitation, and lighting.
    • While these avenues exist, their effective implementation is imperative for Panchayats to attain financial autonomy.
  • Focus on Effective Taxation Mechanisms: The report underscores the significance of establishing an enabling environment for taxation, encompassing decisions on tax and non-tax bases, enactment of robust tax management and enforcement laws, etc.
    • This strategic approach aims to empower Panchayats to fully leverage their revenue generation potential.
    • While taxation constitutes a vital aspect of fiscal devolution, the report also acknowledges the potential of non-tax revenue streams, including Fees, rent, income from investment sales and hire charges,
  • Along with revenue from innovative initiatives such as rural business hubs, commercial ventures, renewable energy projects, carbon credits, CSR funds, and donations.
  • Diversification of revenue sources can bolster the financial resilience of Panchayati Raj institutions, reducing their reliance on grants.

The Role of Gram Sabhas:

  • Gram sabhas have a significant role in fostering self-sufficiency and sustainable development at the grass-roots level by leveraging local resources for revenue generation.
  • They can be engaged in planning, decision-making, and implementation of revenue-generating initiatives that range from agriculture and tourism to small-scale industries.
  • They have the authority to impose taxes, fees, and levies, directing the funds towards local development projects, public services, and social welfare programmes.
  • Through transparent financial management and inclusive participation, gram sabhas ensure accountability and foster community trust, ultimately empowering villages to become economically independent and resilient.
  • Thus, gram sabhas need to promote entrepreneurship, and foster partnerships with external stakeholders to enhance the effectiveness of revenue generation efforts.

Way Forward:

  • Education and Awareness: There is a pressing need to raise awareness among elected representatives and the public about the importance of revenue generation for developing Panchayats as self-sustaining institutions.
    • Ultimately, the dependency syndrome for grants has to be minimised and in due course, panchayats will be able to survive on their own resources.
    • Achieving this goal requires concerted efforts at all levels of governance, including the state and central levels.
  • Promotion of Entrepreneurship: Gram Sabhas plays a crucial role in promoting entrepreneurship and fostering partnerships with external stakeholders to bolster revenue generation efforts.
    • Encouraging entrepreneurial ventures within local communities can stimulate economic growth and reduce dependency on external funding.
  • Collaboration and Support: Panchayats need to collaborate closely with higher tiers of governance and external stakeholders to enhance their revenue generation capabilities.
    • This collaborative approach can facilitate the implementation of innovative initiatives and the efficient utilization of resources, thereby fostering financial self-reliance among Panchayats.

 

Greece’s gateway to Asia, India’s gateway to Europe

  • 20 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

The state visit by Greek Prime Minister Kyriakos Mitsotakis to India will be another important step in building a strategic relationship between India and Greece — a process which began with the historic visit of the Indian Prime Minister, Narendra Modi, to Greece in August 2023.

Context:

  • The upcoming state visit of Greek Prime Minister Kyriakos Mitsotakis to New Delhi signifies a pivotal milestone in the ongoing initiatives to forge a strategic partnership between Greece and India.
  • This diplomatic initiative follows the landmark visit of the Indian Prime Minister to Greece in August 2023, which generated enthusiasm among Greek political and business circles.
  • The anticipation surrounding the visit of the Greek Prime Minister underscores the mutual dedication to enhancing bilateral relations and collaboration across diverse sectors.

Historical Connections:

  • India and Greece share a rich historical bond spanning more than 2500 years, characterized by cultural exchanges and a mutual embrace of democratic values.
  • Presently, their bilateral relations are multifaceted, covering political, economic, and military cooperation.
  • Trade Routes: Ancient maritime trade routes linked the Indus Valley Civilization with the Aegean region, facilitating the exchange of commodities such as spices, textiles, and intellectual ideas.
    • Archaeological evidence, including the discovery of Indus seals in Mesopotamia, suggests the existence of trade connections between the two civilizations.
  • Alexander the Great (326 BCE): Alexander's conquest of parts of northwest India fostered cultural and diplomatic exchanges between Greece and India.
    • Greek philosophies and ideologies potentially influenced various aspects of Indian art, mathematics, and astronomy during this period.
  • Indo-Greek Kingdoms (2nd century BCE – 1st century CE): Hellenistic kingdoms established in northwest India witnessed a fusion of Greek and Indian cultures.
    • This blending is evident in Gandhara art, which exhibits Greco-Buddhist influences and serves as a testament to the cultural interplay between the two civilizations.

The Current Status of Bilateral Relations between India and Greece:

  • Steady Progress in Bilateral Relations: While India and Greece share a historical connection and mutual enthusiasm, the pace of their bilateral cooperation has been characterized by gradual progress.
    • In this context, it is essential to delve into the various facets of collaboration, recognizing both the positive developments and the need for enhanced momentum.
  • Military Cooperation: Over time, military collaboration between the two nations has witnessed notable advancements.
    • Joint exercises involving the Indian Navy, Indian Air Force, and the Greek armed forces have been conducted, underscoring a shared commitment to fostering mutual understanding and coordination.
    • Reciprocal exercises are in the pipeline, illustrating an ongoing endeavour to deepen military bonds.
    • These joint military endeavours not only bolster regional security but also signify an increasing level of confidence and collaboration between the armed forces of Greece and India.
  • Economic Engagement: On the economic front, there have been significant instances of collaboration signalling a burgeoning partnership.
    • For instance, an Indian construction company has joined forces with a prominent Greek construction firm to undertake a significant project: the construction of a new airport on the island of Crete.
    • Such initiatives highlight the potential for cross-border investments and partnerships that can contribute to economic development and diversification.

Advancing Economic Reforms And Greece's Role:

  • Greece's proactive stance in promoting deeper EU-India relations adds another layer of importance to ongoing economic reforms.
  • As Greece endeavours to swiftly finalize the EU-India bilateral trade and investment agreement (BTIA), it underscores its dedication to establishing a conducive environment for heightened economic cooperation.
    • The BTIA is poised to act as a catalyst, providing a structured framework for trade and investment, thereby nurturing closer economic bonds between the EU and India.

A Path to Closer Ties: Economic Reforms in Greece

  • The economic facet of the Greece-India relationship assumes greater prominence as Greece, under the leadership of Prime Minister Kyriakos Mitsotakis, embarks on substantial economic reforms.
  • Over the past half-decade, the Mitsotakis administration has implemented measures aimed at steering the Greek economy towards a more sustainable growth trajectory.
  • This transformation positions Greece not only as a dependable eastern frontier of the European Union (EU) but also as a potential linchpin in broader geopolitical and economic strategies.

IMEEC Corridor: A Vision of Significance

  • As Greece solidifies its role in the Eastern Mediterranean, the concept of establishing the India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor (IMEEC) emerges as a compelling vision.
  • The IMEEC embodies a comprehensive economic initiative aimed at seamlessly connecting India, the Middle East, and Europe, thereby stimulating trade, investment, and economic collaboration.
  • This ambitious proposition aligns with the shared vision of both nations to deepen their economic bonds and explore novel avenues for cooperation.

The Geopolitical Significance of the Indo-Greek Relationship:

  • A Robust Foundation Rooted in Historical Bonds: The historical backdrop of the evolving ties between Greece and India (with diplomatic relations established in 1950) enriches their contemporary diplomatic endeavours.
    • Furthermore, these diplomatic exchanges acquire significance amidst India's ascent as a global power, being perceived not only as an enduring ally but also as a dynamic and influential player on the world stage.
  • Contemporary Diplomacy: The momentous visit of the Indian Prime Minister to Greece in August 2023 served as a watershed, laying the groundwork for enhanced collaboration.
    • The enthusiasm witnessed in Greece, particularly among political and business circles, underscores the perceived opportunities in forging a strategic partnership with India.
  • Strategic Importance of Both Nations' Locations: The geopolitical relevance of this burgeoning relationship is amplified by the strategic locations of Greece and India.
    • Situated in regions pivotal to the global system, both nations grapple with geopolitical complexities and volatility.
    • Recent events in the Red Sea highlight the interconnectedness of the East Mediterranean, where Greece is positioned, and the Indian Ocean region, accentuating the imperative for collaboration to promote security, stability, and prosperity.
  • A Strategic Vision: Gateway to Europe and Asia: The Greek Prime Minister's assertion that "India will find no better gateway to Europe than my country, and for Greece, there is no better gateway to Asia than a close strategic relationship with India" encapsulates the acknowledgement of each nation's unique role in bridging the other's region.
    • This pragmatic understanding not only acknowledges geographical realities but also reflects a strategic vision to leverage mutual strengths for collective advancement.

Way Forward to Enhance Indo-Greek Relations:

  • Promoting Cross-Cultural Understanding: By expanding university student exchange programs, deliberate steps will be taken to familiarize the younger generation with the cultures, traditions, and educational systems of both nations.
    • This fosters not only cross-cultural appreciation but also establishes a groundwork for future collaborations and friendships.
  • Fostering Cultural Exchanges: Cultural exchanges serve as a cornerstone in fortifying the bonds between Greece and India.
    • Through the promotion of cultural events, exhibitions, and festivals, both countries create platforms for their citizens to immerse themselves in and celebrate the richness of each other's cultural heritage.
    • These initiatives act as bridges, connecting hearts and minds, and nurturing a sense of shared identity and mutual respect for cultural diversity.
  • Media Collaboration: Bridging Information Gaps: Media collaboration emerges as a pivotal avenue to bridge geographical distances and keep the citizens of both nations abreast of developments, cultural nuances, and societal trends.
    • Joint efforts in media, including co-productions, cultural documentaries, and news coverage, facilitate a nuanced understanding of each other's realities.

Conclusion

The swift exchange of visits between the political leadership of Greece and India underscores their commitment and the urgency in advancing their strategic partnership. As the world navigates through a pivotal year in 2024, the onus lies on policymakers and businesses to capitalize on this momentum and fortify the strategic partnership between Greece and India.

The Cost of Legal MSP is Greatly Exaggerated (Indian Express)

  • 17 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

Farmers have resumed protests without a specific trigger, unlike their previous march against contentious farm laws. Their main demand is a legal guarantee for Minimum Support Prices (MSP).

Context:

  • The renewed protest by farmers, advocating for a legal assurance of Minimum Support Prices (MSP), underscores the enduring battle for agricultural sector stability.
  • Amidst this, it's crucial to delve into the intricacies of MSP, address prevailing misconceptions, and explore the advantages of formalising this system.

What is the Minimum Support Price (MSP)?

  • MSP (Minimum Support Price) is the cost at which the government buys crops from the farmers, to guarantee farmers against any sharp fall in agricultural income.
  • It is declared by the Government based on the proposal of the Commission for Agricultural Cost and Prices (CACP), at the start of the planting season.
  • This mechanism aims to protect small and marginal farmers from financial losses and ensure an adequate supply of food grains for public distribution across India.
  • Since its inception in 1966-67 for wheat, the MSP framework has expanded to cover various essential food crops, facilitating their availability to the public through subsidized rates under the public distribution system.
    • However, only a small percentage, approximately 6% or less, of farmers are able to sell their produce at prices higher than the MSP.

Is the MSP Different in different states?

  • Because of the variety in irrigation and wages, the expense of a similar yield changes from one state to another.
  • However, there is no draft of the local Minimum Support Price, so there is one MSP for the whole country.

Significance of Minimum Support Price: 

  • Fixed Remunerations: The farmers are financially insured against the impulses of price fall in the market.
    • It gives security to farmers from crop loss and price uncertainty.
  • Help in Decision Making: MSPs are reported toward the start of the planting season, this assists farmers with settling on the best choices of crop that they should plant.
    • This development data assists the farmer with settling on the best choice with regards to which yield to plant for the most extreme monetary advantage inside the restrictions of his agricultural land size, environment, and irrigation framework.
  • Crop Diversification: The MSP declared by the Government of India without precedent for 1966-67 for wheat has reached out to around 24 crops at the present.
    • This has urged the farmers to develop these different crops to maximize their agricultural income.
  • Price Limitations for Private Purchasers: MSP conveys a value message to advertise that if vendors don’t offer higher than MSP costs the farmer may not sell them his produce.
    • In this manner, it goes about as an anchor or benchmark for agricultural produce.
    • It guarantees the market costs won’t be radically lower than the Minimum Support Price.
  • Commercial Crops: MSP is utilized as an instrument to boost the creation of explicit food crops which is short in supply.
    • MSP spurs farmers to develop commercial crops and expand creation on a commercial basis.
  • Purchasing Power Enhancement: MSP provides fixed amounts in framers’ hands which makes them financially stable.
    • It helps in upgrading the buying limit and updating the style of living of farmers and their families.

Challenges in Implementation of MSP:

  • Selective Intervention and Limited Coverage: Despite the annual announcement of MSP for 23 crops, actual implementation tends to be selective, primarily focusing on major crops like rice and wheat.
    • This limited coverage undermines the broader objective of ensuring stability across various agricultural commodities.
  • MSP Implementation Bias: The unequal application of MSP, favouring specific crops, marginalizes farmers cultivating other essential commodities.
    • This bias exacerbates regional disparities and impacts the economic well-being of farmers engaged in non-major crop cultivation.
  • Disconnect Between Market Price and MSP: The disparity between market prices and MSP poses a significant challenge, as government intervention is triggered primarily when market prices fall below the MSP.
    • Inconsistent intervention exacerbates uncertainties for farmers, leading to financial distress during market downturns.
  • Perceived Government Apathy: Farmers perceive a lack of genuine interest or urgency from the government in effectively implementing MSP.
    • This perceived apathy breeds distrust and frustration among farmers, fueling demands for a legal guarantee to ensure consistent and widespread implementation.
  • Political Hesitation and Decision-Making Delays: While there is political consensus supporting a legal guarantee for MSP, successive governments have hesitated to formalize this mechanism.
    • Delayed decision-making perpetuates uncertainties in the agricultural sector, undermining the effectiveness of MSP as a stabilizing force.

What Does a Legal Guarantee of MSP Mean and What Obstacles in Legalising MSP?

  • It means that anyone paying less than the price set by the government for crops could be criminally charged.
    • Currently, there is an MSP for 23 crops.
    • However, the highest procurement by the government is of wheat and rice.
  • According to experts, if MSP is legally guaranteed, the government will have to pay it regardless of supply and demand dynamics.
    • At the moment, about 60 per cent of the total field crop production in India comes from wheat and paddy.
  • Fiscal Concerns: Misconceptions regarding the fiscal implications of guaranteeing MSP have posed obstacles to its legalization.
    • Despite the political consensus, concerns over perceived excessive fiscal burdens have deterred governments from formalizing MSP.
  • Prevalent Misconceptions: There is a prevalent misconception that legalizing MSP necessitates government procurement of all agricultural produce, which is inaccurate.
    • Government intervention is required only when market prices dip below MSP, and it does not entail the procurement of the entire marketable surplus.
  • Misunderstanding of Procurement Costs and Subsidies: The cost of procuring rice and wheat is often misconstrued as the cost of the MSP program, whereas it primarily serves as a subsidy to consumers rather than farmers.
    • For other crops, government procurement is not a cost unless sold with a subsidy, with the actual cost being the difference between economic cost and issue price.

Potential Advantages of Legalising MSP:

  • Ensuring Uniform Implementation: Formalizing Minimum Support Prices (MSP) establishes a clear legal framework, ensuring consistent application across all crops.
    • This move addresses current issues of selective intervention, providing farmers with a dependable safety net.
  • Promoting Inclusive Agricultural Growth: Expanding MSP coverage to various crops ensures that price stability benefits all segments of the farming community.
    • Small and marginal farmers cultivating diverse crops can access MSP protection, fostering inclusive agricultural development.
  • Reducing Farmer Vulnerability: Formalizing MSP reduces farmers' susceptibility to market fluctuations by guaranteeing a minimum income for their produce.
    • This assurance enables farmers to navigate uncertainties with confidence, knowing that government intervention is assured during price downturns.
  • Boosting the Rural Economy: A secured MSP contributes to farmers' economic well-being, leading to increased rural income.
    • This upliftment stimulates the rural economy by generating demand for goods and services, fostering growth across multiple sectors.
  • Clarifying Consumer Subsidies: Formalization helps distinguish between procurement costs and consumer subsidies, often conflated as MSP program expenses.
    • This clarity aids policy discussions and ensures targeted subsidy allocation, benefiting both farmers and consumers.
  • Facilitating Strategic Government Operations: A legal framework empowers the government to conduct strategic operations in domestic and international markets.
    • Through controlled sales during periods of high market prices, the government can manage inflation, ensuring price stability for consumers.

Conclusion

The legalization of MSP presents a holistic remedy to the agricultural sector's woes.

Beyond ensuring uniform application, it fosters diversification, inclusivity, and economic robustness, ultimately benefiting farmers and bolstering rural prosperity. By dispelling misconceptions and tackling apprehensions, policymakers can pave the way toward a more secure and prosperous future for our farmers.

 

Supreme Court Strikes Down Electoral Bonds Scheme (Indian Express)

  • 16 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

A five-judge Constitution Bench of the Supreme Court on Thursday unanimously struck down the Centre’s electoral bond scheme which facilitates anonymous political donations for being unconstitutional.

 

Context:

  • A five-judge Constitution Bench of the Supreme Court on Thursday unanimously struck down the Centre’s electoral bond scheme which facilitates anonymous political donations for being unconstitutional.
  • It underscored that the scheme violates the right to information under Article 19(1)(a) of the Constitution.
  • Additionally, the Apex Court nullified several amendments introduced by the government in vital laws to streamline corporate donations to political parties.
    • These amendments were incorporated through The Finance Act, 2016, and The Finance Act, 2017, preceding the implementation of the EBS in January 2018.
  • The decision followed petitions from the Communist Party of India (Marxist) and NGOs Common Cause and ADR.

Key Highlights of the SC Judgement:

  • Protection of Voters' Right to Information: The court emphasized that access to information regarding political party funding is crucial for informed voting.
    • It argued that economic disparities lead to political inequalities, as financial resources often translate into greater political influence and access to policymakers.
    • Thus, the Electoral Bonds Scheme (EBS) was deemed to violate Article 19(1)(a) of the Constitution, safeguarding freedom of speech and expression.
  • Disproportionate Restrictions on Curbing Black Money: While acknowledging the importance of curbing black money, the court found the restrictions imposed by the EBS disproportionate.
    • It clarified that restrictions on the Right to Information (RTI) should align with Article 19(2) of the Constitution, which outlines reasonable restrictions on freedom of speech and expression.
    • Curbing black money was not deemed a valid reason for such restrictions.
  • Right to Donor Privacy: The judgement delved into the notion of donor privacy, particularly regarding political contributions.
    • It affirmed that the right to informational privacy encompasses political affiliation.
    • However, it clarified that privacy does not extend to contributions aimed at influencing policies, emphasizing genuine political support over attempts to obscure motives, especially those of corporate entities.
  • Limits on Corporate Political Contributions: The court declared unlimited political contributions by companies unconstitutional.
    • It highlighted the disproportionate influence of corporations on the political process compared to individuals.
    • Contributions from companies were viewed as business transactions aimed at securing benefits, which undermined the democratic process and equality in political participation.

What was the Existing System Before the Introduction of EBS?

  • Before the enactment of The Finance Act 2016 and The Finance Act 2017, political funding operated under a different framework:
  • Contribution Declarations: Political parties were mandated to declare all contributions exceeding Rs 20,000 without any exceptions.
    • Detailed records of donations exceeding Rs 20,000 were required for taxation purposes.
  • Limits on Corporate Donations: Companies were subject to a cap on their political contributions, restricted to a maximum of 7.5% of their average net profits from the preceding three years.
  • Amendments through The Finance Act 2017: The Finance Act of 2017 brought significant changes to political funding regulations by amending key legislations like the Representation of the People Act, 1951, the Income-tax Act, 1961, and the Companies Act, 2013.
    • These amendments introduced electoral bonds, altering the landscape of political party funding:
  • Introduction of Electoral Bonds: Electoral bonds were introduced, effectively removing donation limits for companies.
    • The requirement to declare and maintain records of donations made through electoral bonds was eliminated, streamlining the process of political contributions.

Supreme Court Verdict:

  • The recent Supreme Court verdict has reinstated the legal framework that existed before the enactment of the Finance Act, 2017, impacting various statutes:
  • Representation of the People Act, 1951: The original Section 29C of the Act mandated political parties to report all donations exceeding Rs 20,000, specifying whether they were from individuals or companies.
    • Amendments introduced by the Finance Act, 2017 exempted donations via Electoral Bonds from this reporting requirement.
    • The Supreme Court overturned this amendment, asserting that the original provision effectively balanced voters' right to information with donors' right to privacy.
  • Companies Act, 2013: Section 182(1) previously limited corporate donations to political parties to 7.5% of average net profits over three years.
    • Section 182(3) requires disclosure of all political contributions made by companies.
    • Amendments removed the donation cap and reduced disclosure requirements.
    • The Supreme Court struck down these changes, citing concerns about unchecked corporate influence in electoral processes.
  • Income-tax Act, 1961: Section 13A(b) mandated political parties to maintain records of donations above Rs 20,000, including donor details.
    • Amendments exempted Electoral Bond contributions from these reporting requirements and introduced new donation methods.
    • The Supreme Court ruled that exempting Electoral Bond donations from record-keeping violated voters' right to information and struck down both amendments.

Supreme Court's Directives:

  • Instructions to SBI: SBI is instructed to immediately halt the issuance of any further electoral bonds.
    • Provide detailed information on electoral bonds purchased by political parties since April 12, 2019, to the Election Commission of India (ECI) by March 6.
    • Furnish specifics including the purchase date, purchaser's name, and bond denomination for each transaction.
  • Election Commission's Obligations: The ECI is directed to publish all received data from SBI on its official website by March 13, 2024.
  • Return of Electoral Bonds: Electoral bonds within the 15-day validity period, yet to be encashed by political parties, must be returned.
    • The issuing bank will then reimburse the amount to the purchaser's account.

Evaluation of the Latest Ruling:

  • The recent Supreme Court ruling establishes a rigorous standard for the state to justify its interference with fundamental rights, even when pursuing a conflicting right.
  • It mandates that the state must prove that its action is the "least restrictive" and that no other methods of equal effectiveness exist to achieve its goal.
  • Traditionally, the judicial balance between two fundamental rights has often favoured one right over the other.
  • In numerous instances, the court has prioritized public interest over individual fundamental rights, thereby granting the state considerable authority.
  • For instance, in 2018, the Supreme Court curtailed the right to protest near Delhi’s Jantar Mantar to uphold the right to a peaceful residence and the state's regulatory power over such activities.

What are Electoral Bonds and Why Were They Introduced?

  • An electoral Bond is a type of financial instrument that functions like a Promissory Note and an interest-free banking tool.
  • Any Indian citizen or organisation registered in India can buy these bonds after fulfilling the Know Your Customer (KYC) norms laid down by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI).
    • Before the introduction of Electoral Bonds, political parties in India relied heavily on donations from individuals and corporate entities to fund their election campaigns and day-to-day activities.
  • The need for electoral reforms to address these concerns was highlighted by various stakeholders, including civil society organisations, electoral watchdogs, and the judiciary.
  • In response, the government initiated efforts to reform the electoral system and enhance transparency in political funding.
  • Electoral Bonds were introduced in India through the Finance Act, of 2017, as a means of reforming political funding and promoting transparency.

Key Features of Electoral Bonds:

  • Anonymity: One of the key features of Electoral Bonds is the anonymity of the donor.
    • Unlike traditional forms of political donations, where the identity of the donor is disclosed to the public and the receiving political party, Electoral Bonds allow donors to remain anonymous.
    • This was intended to protect the privacy and security of donors and shield them from potential retribution or harassment.
  • Denominations: Electoral Bonds are available in various denominations ranging from ?1,000 to ?1 crore (10 million).
    • Donors can purchase these bonds from notified banks in India, with the State Bank of India (SBI), the largest public sector lender in the country, being the only authorised institution to issue Electoral Bonds.
  • Validity: Electoral Bonds have a validity period within which they must be redeemed.
    • As per the existing regulations, the bonds have a validity of 15 days from the date of issuance.
    • This timeframe is designed to ensure that the bonds are promptly encashed by the receiving political parties.
  • Transparency: While the identity of the donor remains anonymous, the sale and redemption of Electoral Bonds are recorded electronically by the issuing bank.
    • This electronic tracking system is intended to enhance transparency in the overall process of political funding and enable regulatory authorities to monitor the flow of funds.

WTO Pressure on Indian Farm Subsidies Amid Farmer's Protest for MSP (Indian Express)

  • 15 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

The government might find it challenging to meet the protesting farmers' demand for a legal guarantee of (MSP) due to India's farm subsidies being scrutinised at the (WTO), especially with criticism from a group of 19 influential agricultural exporting countries.

Background:

  • After independence, our country struggled to produce enough food for its large population as the agriculture sector was in a poor state.
  • To address this challenge, we either had to import grains, which incurred significant costs, or rely on aid from other nations.
  • In 1960, the government took steps toward self-sufficiency. They introduced high-yielding seeds, promoted the use of fertilisers, and improved agricultural machinery.
  • At the same time, the government supported rice and wheat cultivation by offering farmers a Minimum Support Price (MSP).
    • This ensures that farmers receive a fair price; if they can't sell their crops for a better price in the market, the government will buy them at a favourable rate.
  • However, there's currently tension between India and the WTO regarding these subsidies.

Green Revolution

  • The Green Revolution, initiated in the 1960s, aimed to enhance agricultural productivity and bolster the nation's economy.
  • India embraced technological and industrial advancements in agriculture during this era.
  • This included the adoption of high-yield seeds, modern farming equipment, irrigation systems, pesticides, and fertilisers to transform the agricultural landscape.
  • The green revolution helped India move from a state of importing grains to a state of self-sufficiency.

Causes of Tensions Between India and the WTO:

  • India's actions in this realm have stirred discontent among other nations, who perceive India's practices as unfair trade manoeuvres.
    • The government's practice of procuring crops from farmers at low prices and subsequently exporting them at reduced rates to global markets has drawn criticism.
  • Developed countries have lodged complaints, alleging multiple instances of India breaching WTO regulations by providing subsidies amounting to 60-70% of the total crop value.
  • While the WTO permits governments to offer subsidies to farmers, it imposes restrictions, allowing developed countries to provide up to 5% and developing countries up to 10% of the total value in subsidies.

What are the WTO Regulations on Farm Subsidies?

  • The WTO regulations on farm subsidies aim to promote fair competition and prevent global trade distortion.
  • These regulations establish limits on the types and levels of subsidies that member countries can offer to their agricultural sectors.
  • Levels of Subsidies:

Green Box:

  • These subsidies have minimal impact on trade distortion.
  • They are not specific to particular products and are generally permissible under WTO rules.
  • Examples include funding for research, environmental conservation, and direct income support for farmers facing challenges such as crop loss or natural disasters.

Amber Box:

  • These subsidies promote excessive production and distort international trade.
  • Examples include input subsidies like those for seeds, fertilisers, and Minimum Support Price (MSP).
  • WTO restricts these subsidies, capping them at 5% for developed countries and 10% for developing countries.

Blue Box:

  • These subsidies, akin to Amber Box subsidies, aim to limit production.
  • Currently, only a few countries, such as Norway and Iceland, utilise these subsidies.
  • The WTO does not impose any limits on these subsidies.

Why India's Agricultural Subsidy Programs Encounter Challenges in the WTO?

  • India's agricultural subsidies face hurdles at the WTO due to the organisation's rules, which do not consider subsidies on a per-farmer basis, disadvantageous to developing countries like India.
    • For instance, although India's per-farmer subsidy is significantly lower compared to countries like the US, the WTO regulations focus on total subsidy amounts.
  • In 2019-20, India's subsidies exceeded the 10% limit relative to its total rice production, despite the per-farmer subsidy being relatively modest at $300 compared to the US's $40,000 per farmer.
  • While India is safeguarded by the 'Peace Clause' established during the WTO's Bali ministerial in 2013, certain ambiguities in the clause leave India vulnerable to disputes.
  • Consequently, new schemes must adhere to the 10% subsidy ceiling, foregoing protection under the 'Peace Clause'.

Criticism of India’s Agricultural Subsidies by Influential Agricultural Exporting Countries:

  • The Cairns Group, which includes countries like Australia, Brazil, and Canada, has raised concerns about the level of subsidisation in India’s public stockholding (PSH) program.
  • They argue that India's agricultural support measures are significantly subsidised, leading to distortions in global food prices and negatively impacting food security in other nations.
  • Last year, the group circulated a comprehensive proposal aimed at reducing trade-distorting agricultural support among WTO members, advocating for a halving of the total global entitlement/subsidies.
  • This proposal sparked tensions among developing nations, with India among those affected.
  • Essentially, the Cairns Group is advocating for India to either dismantle or scale back its Minimum Support Price (MSP) scheme, prompting India to seek stronger legal protection for its MSP program.

Upcoming Challenges for the Government of India:

  • In pursuit of greater flexibility in providing agricultural support, India is actively advocating for a permanent solution at the forthcoming inter-ministerial summit in Abu Dhabi.
  • However, the entrenched impasse on politically sensitive issues between developed and developing nations makes resolution unlikely.
  • Farmers' groups in India advocate for removing agriculture from the purview of the WTO, but this approach could present challenges and hinder India and other developing nations from regulating subsidies provided by developed countries.
  • The government faces a dilemma, as it grapples with peer pressure at the WTO while simultaneously facing demands for Minimum Support Price (MSP) from farmers.
  • The call for better MSP support isn't limited to Punjab farmers; farmers across the nation are seeking similar assurances.
  • Furthermore, if farmers in Punjab and Haryana shift away from agriculture, it could pose a threat to the country's food security.

Way Forward

  • While India currently avoids disputes on the subsidy matter at the WTO due to the non-functionality of the Dispute Settlement Body (DSB), member countries will continue to scrutinise India's adherence to subsidy limits.
  • As a result, India must advocate not only for adjustments to the formula used to calculate the food subsidy cap within the WTO but also for the inclusion of programs implemented after 2013 under the protection of the 'Peace Clause'.

Inauguration of BAPS Temple in UAE by PM Modi: Exploring Its Unique Features, Architecture, and Significance (Indian Express)

  • 14 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

During his two-day visit to UAE, Prime Minister Modi will inaugurate the BAPS Swaminarayan temple in Abu Dhabi, the first Hindu temple in the Gulf nation.

Context:

  • Prime Minister Modi on Wednesday inaugurated the (BAPS) temple, the first-ever Hindu temple in the United Arab Emirates (UAE).
  • The iconic stone temple is located in Abu Mureikhah, near Al Rahba off the Dubai-Abu Dhabi Sheikh Zayed Highway.
  • The inauguration of the 108-ft high temple marks a significant moment for the Hindu community in UAE and the two countries’ bilateral ties.

What is BAPS?

  • Bochasanwasi Shri Akshar Purushottam Swaminarayan Sanstha (BAPS) is a socio-spiritual Hindu organisation founded on the principles of practical spirituality.
  • The temple was built by the organisation, a denomination of the Swaminarayan Sampradaya, a Vaishnav sect of Hinduism.
  • With over 3,850 centres globally, BAPS has garnered national and international recognition, including affiliation with the United Nations.
  • Through vows of abstinence and purity, BAPS fosters a foundation for humanitarian endeavours, caring for societies, families, and individuals.

What Does BAPS Do?

  • The BAPS Swaminarayan Sanstha views spirituality as its core mission. Through gradual steps, it strives to draw individuals closer to God.
  • In collaboration with BAPS Charities, the organization extends its outreach globally, addressing diverse humanitarian needs.
    • From education to healthcare and environmental concerns, practical solutions are offered to real-world problems, impacting lives on both macro and micro scales.
  • BAPS has a network of around 1,550 temples across the world, including the Akshardham temples in New Delhi and Gandhinagar, and Swaminarayan temples in London, Houston, Chicago, Atlanta, Toronto, Los Angeles, and Nairobi.

Who is Swami Narayan?

  • Bhagwan Swaminarayan’s life and work have not only influenced communities in Gujarat, India but have affected change throughout the world. 
  • He reestablished Hindu Sanatan Dharma, cleansing traditions and rituals of the impurities that had seeped in over time. 
  • His contributions have been hailed by Hindus and dignitaries of other faiths as truly transforming the lives of millions of individuals. 
  • He improved societal standards and, most importantly, the innate nature of people, eradicating them from lust, anger, greed, and envy. 
  • Bhagwan Swaminarayan’s teachings transcended borders, rejuvenating Hindu traditions worldwide.

What are the Features of the (BAPS) Temple?

  • The Abu Dhabi temple is a traditional stone Hindu temple with seven shikhars.
  • Built in the traditional Nagar style, the temple’s front panel depicts universal values, stories of harmony from different cultures, Hindu spiritual leaders and avatars.
  • Spread over 27 acres, the temple complex is on 13.5 acres
    • The 13.5 acres of land was gifted by Sheikh Mohammed Bin Zayed Al Nahyan, the President of the UAE in 2019.
  • The height of the temple is 108 ft, its length 262 ft and its width 180 ft.
  • While the external facade uses pink sandstone from Rajasthan, the interior uses Italian marble.
  • A total of 20,000 tonnes of stones and marble were shipped in 700 containers for the temple.
    • More than Rs 700 crore was spent on the temple’s construction.
  • The temple has two central domes, Dome of Harmony and Dome of Peace, emphasizing human coexistence through the carvings of earth, water, fire, air, and plants.
  • A Wall of Harmony, one of the largest 3D-printed walls in the UAE, features a video showcasing key milestones of the temple’s construction.
    • The word ‘harmony’ has been written in 30 different ancient and modern languages.
  • The seven shikhars (spires) are representative of the seven Emirates of the UAE.
  • Other amenities include an assembly hall with a capacity of 3,000 people, a community centre, exhibitions, classrooms, and a majlis venue.

What are the Key Architectural Features?

  • The temple was judged the Best Mechanical Project of the Year 2019 at the MEP Middle East Awards, and the Best Interior Design Concept of the Year 2020.
  • Among the key architectural features are 96 bells and galumphs installed around the path leading to the temple.
    • These 96 bells are a tribute to Pramukh Swami Maharaj’s 96 years of life.
    • Nano tiles have been used, which will be comfortable for visitors to walk on even in the hot weather.
  • On the top left of the temple is a stone carving of the scene of Pramukh Swami Maharaj envisioning the temple in Abu Dhabi in 1997.
  • Non ferrous material (which is more vulnerable to corrosion) has been used in the temple.
  • While many different types of pillars can be seen in the temple, such as circular and hexagonal, there is a special pillar, called the ‘Pillar of Pillars’, which has around 1,400 small pillars carved into it.
  • Buildings surrounding the temple are modern and monolithic, with their colour resembling sand dunes.
  • Deities from all four corners of India have been featured in the temple.
    • These include Lord Ram, Sita, Lakshman and Hanuman, Lord Shiv, Parvati, Ganpati, Kartikeya, Lord Jagannath, Lord Radha-Krishna, Akshar-Purushottam Maharaj (Bhagwan Swaminarayan and Gunatitanand Swami), Tirupati Balaji and Padmavati and Lord Ayappa.
  • The temple also has some special features, like a ‘holy river’ surrounding it, for which waters from Ganga and Yamuna have been brought in.
    • The river Saraswati has been depicted in the form of white light.
    • A Varanasi-like ghat has been created where the ‘Ganga’ passes.
  • Apart from 15 value tales from Indian civilisation, stories from the Maya civilisation, Aztec civilisation, Egyptian civilisation, Arabic civilisation, European civilisation, Chinese civilisation and African civilisation have been depicted.

What is the Significance of the Temple?

  • A Muslim king donated land for a Hindu Mandir, where the lead architect is a Catholic Christian, the project manager a Sikh, the foundational designer a Buddhist, the construction company a Parsi group, and the director comes from the Jain tradition.

Religious Significance:

  • First Hindu stone temple in Abu Dhabi: This marks a historic milestone for the Hindu community in the UAE, providing them with a dedicated place of worship and cultural centre.
  • Symbol of religious tolerance: The temple's inauguration signifies the UAE's growing acceptance and appreciation of religious diversity, fostering interfaith dialogue and understanding.

Cultural Significance:

  • Strengthens India-UAE ties: The temple stands as a symbol of the strong cultural and diplomatic relations between India and the UAE, promoting mutual understanding and cooperation.
  • Promotes Indian culture: The temple serves as a platform to educate the UAE community about Indian art, architecture, and traditions, fostering cultural exchange and appreciation.

Social Significance:

  • Provides a sense of belonging: The temple offers a space for the Hindu community to gather, celebrate festivals, and connect with their cultural roots, fostering a sense of belonging and identity.
  • Promotes social integration: The temple's open-door policy welcomes people of all faiths, encouraging social interaction and understanding between different communities in the UAE.
  • Strengthens social fabric: The temple's emphasis on values like compassion, service, and community engagement contributes to strengthening the social fabric of UAE society.

Overall, the BAPS Swaminarayan Mandir in Abu Dhabi represents a significant step forward in religious tolerance, cultural exchange, and community building in the UAE. It serves as a testament to the growing understanding and appreciation between India and the UAE, and its impact will be felt for generations to come.

Gender Gap In STEMM and Government Efforts to Address It (Indian Express)

  • 13 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

Principal Scientific Advisor to the Government of India Prof Ajay Kumar Sood launched Science for Women-A Technology & Innovation (SWATI), a portal aimed at representing girls in STEMM (Science, Technology, Engineering, Mathematics & Medicine).

Background:

  • Gender inequality in the science sector has persisted as a significant issue, prompting a series of interventions to rectify this imbalance.
  • Hence, delving into the trajectory of endeavours to narrow the gender divide in Indian science becomes crucial, particularly with the introduction of SWATI (Science For Women- A Technology & Innovation).
    • This portal seeks to establish an extensive repository of female scientists across the nation, marking a significant milestone in this ongoing journey.

What is the SWATI Portal?

  • SWATI Portal is a pioneering initiative aimed at establishing a unified online platform dedicated to showcasing Indian Women and Girls in STEMM (Science, Technology, Engineering, Mathematics & Medicine).
  • The database hosted on the SWATI Portal serves as a valuable resource for informing policy decisions aimed at addressing gender disparities in STEMM fields.
  • Developed, hosted, and maintained by the National Institute of Plant Genome Research (NIPGR), New Delhi, SWATI Portal stands out as the first-of-its-kind initiative in India.

Objectives:

  • To significantly expand the scope of representation, encompassing every Indian woman in science across various career stages and disciplines, spanning both academia and industry.
  • Facilitating robust and enduring research on equality, diversity, and inclusivity issues in India through the establishment of a comprehensive and searchable database.
  • Sections within the portal include categories such as Icons (Padma/Shanti Swarup Bhatnagar/Stree Shakti Science Samman awardees), Directors, Secretaries, Academy Presidents, Faculty from Indian Universities, and personnel from autonomous organizations including S&T Ministry, CSIR, DBT, DST, MHRD, UGC, GATI, and KIRAN.

The 2004 INSA Report and the Systematic Discrimination in Indian Science:

  • Recognition of Disparity: In 2004, the Indian National Science Academy (INSA) released a pivotal report that reshaped discussions on gender disparities in Indian science.
    • This landmark document departed from conventional discourse by not only highlighting the gender gap but also delving into the complex layers of discrimination, including caste-related issues.
    • Notably, the report garnered governmental endorsement, marking a significant acknowledgement of the imperative to investigate and rectify gender imbalances in the scientific domain.
  • A nuanced Approach to Gender Disparity: The report transcended simplistic narratives, unveiling evidence of workplace bias rooted not only in gender but also in caste dynamics.
    • This holistic perspective offered insights into the multifaceted challenges encountered by women in science, challenging prevalent assumptions that attributed the gender gap solely to familial responsibilities.
    • Of particular significance was the collaboration between scientists and social scientists, fostering a deeper understanding of the societal dimensions of gender disparities within the scientific realm.
    • This interdisciplinary synergy represented a departure from the traditional isolation of the scientific community from social science discourse on gender equality.
  • Proposed Solutions and Recommendations: Advocating for proactive measures, the report underscored the need for collective action from policymakers, academia, and the scientific community to redress gender imbalances.
    • By providing a comprehensive analysis of the hurdles faced by women in science, the INSA report laid the groundwork for subsequent initiatives, transcending surface-level assessments.
    • Its recommendations influenced the trajectory of gender-related endeavours in the Indian scientific landscape, catalyzing a series of initiatives aimed at fostering inclusivity and equity.

Next Steps and Obstacles: Handling the Complicated Environment:

  • National Conference of Women Scientists: Concurrently, the Department of Science and Technology (DST) convened a national conference in 2008, gathering over a thousand women scientists in response to the INSA report.
    • During this event, the Science and Technology Minister unveiled ambitious support measures, including flexible work arrangements, childcare facilities, research grants, and housing options.
    • However, the execution of these pledges encountered obstacles, with the envisioned standing committee failing to materialize, resulting in the delayed realization of promised advancements.
  • IASc Report on Women's Attrition in Science: In 2010, IASc conducted a comprehensive survey on the factors contributing to women leaving the scientific field.
    • The findings, based on responses from approximately 800 scientists, unveiled a multifaceted array of reasons, with women emphasizing organizational challenges alongside familial and societal pressures.
    • These challenges included inflexible schedules, inadequate infrastructure, and pervasive discrimination, underscoring the necessity for systemic reforms rather than attributing departures solely to individual choices.
  • Launch of "Lilavati's Daughters": Following the INSA report, the Indian Academy of Sciences (IASc) published "Lilavati's Daughters" in 2008, a compilation aimed at spotlighting the accomplishments of women in science and dispelling stereotypes.
  • Discrepancies Between Intentions and Actions: The disparity between announced initiatives and their implementation underscored bureaucratic obstacles impeding progress.
    • The stalling of the proposed standing committee exemplified bureaucratic hurdles that hindered the translation of well-intentioned policies into tangible outcomes for women in science.

Newer Strategies to Tackle Gender Disparity in Indian Science:

  • Gender Advancement for Transforming Institutions (GATI): GATI introduces a progressive approach to addressing gender disparities, departing from conventional methods.
    • Its charter, reflecting evolving gender discourse, embraces more inclusive language and practices.
    • Recognizing transgender identities and advocating for gender-neutral parental leave, GATI acknowledges the diverse spectrum within the scientific community.
  • Science, Technology, and Innovation Policy (STIP) 2020: The draft STIP 2020 signifies a shift towards a more inclusive science policy paradigm.
    • By integrating provisions for transgender inclusion and advocating for gender-neutral parental leave, STIP 2020 aims to foster an environment supportive of scientists across genders.
  • SWATI: Science for Women- A Technology & Innovation: SWATI, unveiled on International Women's Day 2021 by the former Department of Biotechnology (DBT) chief, Renu Swarup, promises to be a pioneering platform.
    • Initially described as a portal dedicated to women scientists in DBT and its Autonomous Institutions, SWATI holds potential as a vital resource for advancing gender equality in the scientific sphere.
    • However, detailed information about SWATI has been scarce until recent developments.

Is SWATI a Fresh Start or a Familiar Cycle?

  • The introduction of SWATI signifies a commitment to integrating women into the domains of science and technology, recognizing their invaluable contributions.
  • However, scepticism arises from past initiatives that initially generated excitement but ultimately faltered.
  • Despite this, several aspects of SWATI instill optimism. The platform's inclusivity extends to all genders beyond the male binary, emphasizing support for scientists with diverse gender identities.
  • Unlike previous endeavours, SWATI adopts a flexible approach, eschewing rigid criteria such as mandatory PhD qualifications, and acknowledging the diverse roles women play in science, regardless of formal degrees.

Conclusion

While the introduction of SWATI offers hope for progress in gender equity within Indian science, it's crucial to maintain a balance of optimism and caution. The effectiveness of SWATI will be determined by its transformation from a concept into a resilient and transparent platform capable of comprehensively addressing the multifaceted challenges confronting women in the scientific realm.

A Privileged Strategic Partnership, Without a Gulf (The Hindu)

  • 12 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

PM Modi is scheduled to pay an official visit to the United Arab Emirates (UAE) from February 13-14, 2024 which will include inaugurating a temple built by the Bochasanwasi Shri Akshar Purushottam Swaminarayan Sanstha in Abu Dhabi.

Background:

  • The upcoming official visit of the Indian Prime Minister to the United Arab Emirates (UAE) scheduled for February 13-14, 2024, signifies a pivotal moment in the evolving rapport between the two countries.
  • This visit offers an opportunity to examine the diverse dimensions of the strategic partnership between India and the UAE, encompassing diplomatic, economic, cultural, and geopolitical connections that have matured over time.
  • The Prime Minister will address the World Government Summit in Dubai as the ‘Guest of Honour’.

The Nature of India-UAE Special Diplomatic Relations:

  • Elevated Diplomatic Engagements and Mutual Gestures: The essence of the India-UAE strategic partnership in diplomacy is marked by a sequence of notable visits, reciprocal actions, and joint endeavours, underscoring the depth of their association.
    • The forthcoming seventh visit of the Indian Prime Minister to the UAE, scheduled for February 13-14, 2024, reinforces the diplomatic bonds between the two countries.
  • Personal Connection: The close and amicable bond between Prime Minister Modi and UAE President Sheikh Mohamed bin Zayed Al Nahyan serves as a cornerstone in diplomatic interactions.
    • This personal connection has evolved through frequent encounters, discussions, and collaborative initiatives across various domains.
    • Their shared vision acts as a catalyst for expanding cooperation across diverse sectors.
  • Special Collaborative Ventures: The diplomatic cooperation extends beyond regular interactions to encompass special events and joint initiatives that highlight the importance of their partnership.
    • For instance, the felicitation of the UAE President in Gandhinagar during the Vibrant Gujarat Summit is a notable instance.
    • This reciprocal gesture underscores the mutual respect and camaraderie between the leaders.
  • Global Environmental Endeavours: Both nations actively contribute to global endeavours addressing climate change.
    • Their joint involvement in the Global Green Credit Initiative underscores their dedication to environmental sustainability.
    • This shared commitment to global issues demonstrates a diplomatic convergence that transcends bilateral interests, positioning India and the UAE as responsible global participants.
  • Strategic Partnerships: The strategic alignment between India and the UAE is evident in their engagement in various international forums and alliances.
    • Their participation in the West Asian Quad (I2U2) and the India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor highlights a shared commitment to regional stability and economic progress.
    • These partnerships further solidify their diplomatic collaboration in shaping geopolitical dynamics.
  • Crisis Management: The diplomatic ties between India and the UAE are tested during critical junctures, such as the ongoing conflict in Gaza.
    • The scheduled visit presents an opportunity for both leaders to discuss pressing regional issues, showcasing their dedication to addressing challenges and preserving regional stability.
  • People-Centric Diplomacy: Cultural exchanges and people-to-people connections significantly contribute to diplomatic relations.
    • Instances like the UAE conferring the Order of Zayed on Prime Minister Modi and India's role as the 'Guest of Honour' at the Abu Dhabi Festival underscore the cultural aspects of the partnership.
    • Such gestures foster mutual understanding and goodwill among the citizens of both nations.

Additional Highlights of the UAE-India Strategic Partnership:

  • Energy Security: The UAE's role as a vital partner in India's energy security is underscored by agreements on strategic oil reserves stored in India and collaborations on crude oil storage facilities.
    • The partnership between Indian Strategic Petroleum Reserves Ltd and the Abu Dhabi National Oil Company reflects a shared commitment to securing energy resources.
  • Defence and Security Collaboration: Both nations actively engage in defence and security cooperation, demonstrating mutual trust and a dedication to regional stability.
    • Instances such as India's special invitation to the OIC Foreign Ministers’ Meeting and the UAE's participation in the G-20 summit under India’s presidency exemplify a unique level of diplomatic understanding.
  • Cultural and People-to-People Connections: Cultural exchanges, exemplified by India's role as the 'Guest of Honour' at the Abu Dhabi Festival and the conferral of the Order of Zayed on PM Modi, strengthen people-to-people bonds.
    • Initiatives like the establishment of the IIT Delhi Abu Dhabi campus and the opening of a UAE consulate in Hyderabad further enrich the cultural and educational facets of the partnership.
  • The BAPS temple: Constructed on a generous donation of a 27-acre land parcel by the UAE President
    • It stands as the UAE's second prominent Hindu temple, following the inauguration of the Hindu Temple in Dubai in 2022.
  • Geopolitical Alignment: Both countries' participation in significant groupings like I2U2 and the India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor underscores their shared geopolitical interests.
    • The UAE's involvement in the corridor, aimed at linking India to Europe, presents a potential alternative to China’s Belt and Road Initiative.
  • Fintech: The RuPay card, an integral part of India’s Digital Public Infrastructure (DPI), has been operational in the UAE since 2019.           Starting from July 2023, transactions using the Indian rupee have been facilitated at Dubai’s airports.
  • Regional Dynamics: The ongoing conflict in Gaza introduces an additional layer of complexity to regional dynamics, offering an opportunity for leaders to address pressing issues.

Way Forward:

  • Both nations maintain close coordination within the region and participate in several significant groupings, including the I2U2.
  • The UAE's involvement in the India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor (IMEEC) infrastructure project, established during the G-20 summit in Delhi, aims to link India to Europe via the Arabian peninsula.
    • This corridor presents a potential alternative to China’s Belt and Road Initiative.
  • India boasts numerous strategic partnership agreements globally, yet none exhibit the depth of convergence and mutual respect as the one with the UAE.
  • While India acknowledges and appreciates the UAE’s regional role, the UAE also acknowledges India's forthcoming 'global leadership' role.
  • Both nations anticipate the continued strengthening of this privileged strategic partnership in the years to come.

Conclusion

The India-UAE strategic partnership exemplifies the extensive and varied connections that have developed over time. Spanning diplomatic, economic, and cultural spheres, as well as shared geopolitical goals, this relationship serves as a paradigm of harmony and mutual regard.

With a shared vision for continued advancement, the privileged strategic partnership is positioned for further enhancement in the future.

 

The Call for a Progressive Outlook in India's Bilateral Investment Treaties (Indian Express)

  • 10 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

While presenting the interim Union budget, Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman stated that India will be negotiating Bilateral Investment Treaties (BITs) with its trade partners to boost the inflow of foreign direct investment.

Background:

  • India's economic terrain is undergoing a significant shift following the Finance Minister's announcement of plans to negotiate Bilateral Investment Treaties (BITs) during the interim Union budget presentation.
  • This decision arrives at a critical juncture, coinciding with India's struggle to address declining levels of foreign direct investment (FDI) and the aftermath of adopting the 2016 Model BIT.
  • Given these circumstances, it becomes imperative to explore the evolution of India's BITs, assess the implications of the 2016 model, and analyze the recent policy shift to gauge its potential impact on FDI.

Evolution of Bilateral Investment Treaties (BITs) in India:

  • Origins of BITs in India (1990s): During the mid-1990s, India embarked on a significant economic policy shift by initiating Bilateral Investment Treaties (BITs) to attract foreign direct investment (FDI) and create an enabling environment for economic growth.
    • The primary aim was to demonstrate India's commitment to protecting investments made by individuals and companies from partner countries.
    • The signing of the first BIT between India and the UK in 1994 laid the groundwork for a series of agreements that would play a pivotal role in India's global economic integration.
  • Expansion of BITs as Economic Diplomacy (Late 90s to 2000s): BITs in India evolved into strategic tools to mutually encourage and safeguard investments in each other's territories.
    • As India sought to position itself as a premier investment destination, these treaties became instrumental in signaling its dedication to safeguarding the rights and interests of foreign investors.
    • This period witnessed a proliferation of BITs, reflecting India's acknowledgement of the importance of foreign capital in stimulating domestic industries and infrastructure development.
  • Emerging Challenges and Disputes (2010s): The significance of BITs became evident in 2010 with the settlement of the first-ever investor treaty claim in India.
    • Subsequent events, including the unfavorable award in the Australia-India BIT dispute (White Industries v Republic of India) in 2011, underscored the complexities and challenges associated with managing disputes arising from these agreements.
    • By 2015, India found itself embroiled in 17 known BIT claims, with the Cairn Energy Plc case being particularly notable.
    • These challenges prompted a critical reassessment of India's approach, leading to the adoption of the 2016 model BIT.
  • Adoption of the 2016 Model BIT and Policy Shift: The adoption of the 2016 model BIT signalled a significant shift in India's approach to BITs.
    • It was viewed as a protective measure, resulting in the termination of numerous existing treaties.
    • However, the 2016 model BIT faced criticism for its exclusion of key international law principles, such as 'fair and equitable treatment' and 'most favoured nation.'
  • Additionally, it introduced a requirement for investors to exhaust local remedies before resorting to international arbitration, potentially delaying the dispute resolution process.

Issues with the 2016 Model of BIT and their Consequences:

  • Protective Nature: The introduction of the 2016 Model BIT marked a significant shift in India's approach to bilateral investment treaties, aiming for greater protection.
    • Positioned as a response to past disputes, it led to the termination of numerous existing treaties, signalling a desire to recalibrate engagement terms with foreign investors.
    • However, concerns arose about its potential impact on India's attractiveness as an investment destination.
  • Absence of Key International Law Doctrines: Criticism was directed at the 2016 model BIT for deviating from established international law doctrines.
    • Notably, it lacked principles like "fair and equitable treatment" and "most favoured nation," raising doubts about fairness and protection for foreign investors.
    • This omission complicated the interpretation and enforcement of investment agreements, adding uncertainty for investors.
  • Requirement for Exhausting Local Remedies: The 2016 model BIT introduced a requirement for investors to exhaust local remedies before pursuing international arbitration.
    • While this aimed to promote domestic dispute resolution, it created delays and challenges.
    • Investors found navigating local legal systems time-consuming and ineffective, potentially discouraging investment.
  • Adverse Impact on FDI and Renegotiation Challenges: The consequences of the 2016 model BIT were evident in declining FDI in India.
    • FDI equity inflows dropped by 24% to $20.48 billion in April-September 2023, reflecting investor concerns.
    • The termination of existing treaties and challenges with the new model hindered India's ability to renegotiate terms, affecting its attractiveness to foreign investors.
    • The Cairn Energy Plc case, resulting in a significant award against India, highlighted the difficulties under the 2016 model BIT.

Government Recommendations and Policy Reforms Following Challenges with the 2016 BIT Model:

  • Acknowledgement of Limitations and Policy Adjustment: Recognizing the constraints and hurdles posed by the 2016 Model BIT, the Indian government has signalled a shift towards more adaptable and practical strategies.
    • The announcement during the presentation of the interim Union budget, highlighting the negotiation of Bilateral Investment Treaties with trading partners, signifies a departure from rigid approaches.
    • This acknowledgement underscores the necessity for a nuanced approach that considers evolving international investment dynamics and global economic shifts.
  • Parliamentary Standing Committee Proposals: In 2021, the Parliamentary Standing Committee on External Affairs proposed several key recommendations to reevaluate the existing BIT framework.
    • These recommendations aimed to tackle challenges associated with the 2016 model BIT and foster a more investor-friendly environment.
    • One notable recommendation emphasized the importance of timely dispute resolution through pre-arbitration consultations and negotiations.
    • This proactive stance aims to streamline the dispute-resolution process and alleviate pressure on both foreign investors and the Indian legal system.
  • Addressing India's Contract Enforcement Ranking: India's low ranking in contract enforcement, currently at 163 out of 190, remains a significant concern.
    • Recognizing the link between an efficient legal framework and foreign investment attractiveness, recommendations from the Parliamentary Standing Committee serve as a call to action.
    • A timely review of treaties and alignment with global best practices becomes crucial to improving the ease of doing business, reinforcing India's commitment to fostering an investment-friendly climate.
  • Free Trade Agreement (FTA) with the UK: As part of ongoing policy reforms, India is working towards finalizing a free trade agreement (FTA) with the UK.
    • This strategic endeavour has undergone over 14 rounds of negotiations, with disputes being a major obstacle.
    • The proposed FTA is expected to eliminate the requirement for exhausting local remedies, offering a mechanism for swift dispute resolution through international arbitration.
  • This pragmatic approach acknowledges the importance of rapid dispute resolution in nurturing international trade relationships.

Conclusion

Achieving a $5 trillion economy hinges on robust international trade and secure investments in India. A forward-looking strategy for BITs is essential to attract and maintain long-term foreign investments, and the government's recent initiative is a positive move. Nevertheless, adopting a more tailored approach, rather than a one-size-fits-all model, is necessary to facilitate rapid yet sustainable growth in cross-border flows.

 

Contribution of Dr MS Swaminathan Towards Indian Agriculture (Indian Express)

  • 09 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

Recently, Prime Minister Modi announced that the agriculture scientist M S Swaminathan will be honoured with the Bharat Ratna.

Who was MS Swaminathan?

  • Monkomb Sambasivan Swaminathan (MS Swaminathan) was born on August 7, 1925, in Kumbakonam, Madras Presidency (now Tamil Nadu).
  • He was an agronomist, agricultural scientist, plant geneticist, administrator, and humanitarian.
  • He was known as the ‘father of the Green Revolution’ in India.
  • Swaminathan began his career in 1949 researching the genetics of potatoes, wheat, rice, and jute.
    • He played a crucial role in developing high-yielding varieties of paddy that helped ensure India’s low-income farmers produced more yield.
  • Also known as the ‘father of economic ecology’ by the United Nations Environment Programme, he worked with agriculture ministers including C Subramaniam and Jagjivan Ram during the 1960s and 70s for the success of the ‘Green Revolution’ in India.
    • An initiative that paved the way for an exponential rise in the productivity of wheat and rice through the adaptation of chemical-biological technology.
  • Career: Swaminathan also held administration positions in various agricultural research laboratories.
    • He served as the director general of the Indian Council of Agricultural Research and International Rice Research Institute.
    • He also worked as the principal secretary of the Ministry of Agriculture in 1979.
    • Later, he also served as the President of the International Union of the Conservation of Nature and Natural Resources.
    • In 2004, Swaminathan was appointed as chairman of the National Commission on Farmers.
  • Awards and Recognition: He was awarded with the Ramon Magsaysay Award in 1971 and the Albert Einstein World Science Award in 1986.
    • He was awarded the first World Food Prize in 1987, following which he set up the MS Swaminathan Research Foundation in Chennai.
    • Swaminathan has also been conferred with the Padma Shri, Padma Bhushan, and Padma Vibhushan - the three most prestigious awards.
    • Apart from these, he was also given the H K Firodia Award, the Lal Bahadur Shastri National Award, and the Indira Gandhi Prize.
  • Swaminathan also contributed to various agricultural and environmental initiatives globally.
    • He was named one of the 20 most influential Asians of the 20th century by Time magazine.
  • He also served as a Member of Parliament in the Rajya Sabha from 2007 to 2013.
  • MS Swaminathan passed away in September 2023 at the age of 98.
  • His decision to focus on ensuring India's food security led him to become a key figure in the Green Revolution of the 1960s, which transformed India from a food-deficient nation to one of the world's leading agricultural producers.
    • His collaboration with Nobel laureate Norman Borlaug introduced high-yielding varieties of wheat and rice, saving millions from starvation.
  • Dr Swaminathan's transformative influence on Indian agriculture began to emerge when he championed the introduction of high-yielding crop varieties.
    • His visionary approach was instrumental in pioneering the Green Revolution in India when the country was still grappling with poverty and a lack of social security.
  • The impact of Dr. Swaminathan's efforts was nothing short of revolutionary.
  • India's food production skyrocketed, and the nation moved from a state of food scarcity to food self-sufficiency.
  • His work not only averted potential famines but also elevated the economic conditions of countless farming communities.

How MS Swaminathan Contributed to the Green Revolution?

  • MS Swaminathan was greatly influenced by Mahatma Gandhi's teachings of selfless service to the poor and the nation.
  • He was very much influenced by the 1943 Bengal famine, which killed up to three million people and realised the need to improve agriculture and food security in India.
  • After Swaminathan’s work on rice, he and other scientists worked on doing the same to enhance productivity for the wheat crop.
  • India had to get Norin dwarfing genes from Norman Borlaug in Mexico to enhance the productivity and adaptability of its wheat crops.
    • These genes, known for their ability to produce shorter wheat plants, were instrumental in the Green Revolution, as they helped increase yield potential and improve resistance to lodging (falling over) in wheat plants.
    • By acquiring these genes, India aimed to replicate the success of the Green Revolution and address food security challenges by boosting wheat production.
  • Norman Borlaug was an American scientist who was working on developing more productive crop varieties.
    • It led to him winning the Nobel Peace Prize in 1970 for his work in developing High Yielding Varieties (HYVs) of wheat.
  • Many researchers and scientists were involved in this work but there isn’t any doubt that the basic strategic vision underpinning the Green Revolution in India, introducing a new genetic strain or ‘plant type’ responsive to increased fertiliser and water application came from MS Swaminathan.
  • The problem with the traditional wheat and rice varieties was that they were tall and slender.
    • These ‘lodged’ – fell flat on the ground — when they grew and their heads were heavy with well-filled grains produced in response to high fertiliser doses.
    • Through Swaminathan’s research on rice, a reduction in plant height was sought to make them less lodging-prone but this was not easy to do.
  • His strategy of developing semi-dwarf wheat varieties using mutagenesis exposing plants to chemicals or radiation to introduce desirable modifications in their DNA did not, however, work.
    • The lowering of plant heights led to a simultaneous reduction in the size of the grain-bearing panicles or earheads.
  • The search for an ideal variety led him to contact American scientist Orville Vogel.
    • He played a role in developing a ‘dwarf wheat’ called Gaines, which had a high yield.
    • It contained dwarfing genes from a dwarf wheat called the Norin-10.
  • Vogel agreed but was unsure of the wheat’s potential in the Indian climate and thus advised Swaminathan to approach Norman Borlaug, who had incorporated the same dwarfing genes through Vogel’s lines into his spring wheat varieties in Mexico that were better suited for India.
    • Borlaug also later visited India, after Swaminathan proposed so to the Indian Agricultural Research Institute, allowing for the wheat breeding programme to commence.
  • In 1963, they began a serious effort to breed dwarf wheat and within five years, this initiative led to what became known as the "Wheat Revolution."
    • Indira Gandhi, the then Prime Minister of India, released a special stamp to mark the achievement.

The Side Effects of the Green Revolution:

  • Despite its landmark role in achieving food sufficient in India, the Green Revolution has been criticised on multiple counts, such as:
    • Benefiting the already prosperous farmers as it was introduced in states with higher productivity.
  • Swaminathan recognised such issues as early as January 1968, addressing the Indian Science Congress at Varanasi.
  • He highlighted concerns about the rapid spread of a few high-yielding crop varieties replacing diverse local ones, leading to potential problems like soil degradation, desertification, excessive pesticide use, and unsustainable groundwater extraction.
    • Unfortunately, many of these concerns have materialised today.
  • He also lent his support to farmers as the head of the National Commission on Farmers from 2004-06, he recommended that the Minimum Support Price at which farmers sell their crops to the government should be at least 50 per cent more than the weighted average cost of production.
  • For his contributions, Swaminathan was awarded the first World Food Prize Laureate in 1987, for “developing and spearheading the introduction of high-yielding wheat and rice varieties into India during the 1960s when that country faced the prospect of widespread famine.
  • Wheat production doubled in just a few years, making the country self-sufficient and saving millions from extreme food deprivation.

Significance of Union Budget's Deep Tech & Research Funding (Indian Express)

  • 08 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

In her Interim Budget speech, Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman announced a Rs 1 lakh crore fund to provide long-term, low-cost or zero-interest loans for research and development.

Context:

  • Finance Minister, Nirmala Sitharaman in her Interim Budget speech, announced a Rs 1 lakh crore fund to provide long-term, low-cost, or zero-interest loans for research and development.
  • A new scheme to strengthen deep-tech capabilities in the defence sector that is likely to be followed up later was also announced.
  • The separate announcements on the fund and defence deep tech are intricately linked and must be seen together with the government’s other plans for the R&D sector.

What is Deep Tech?

  • Deep tech refers to advanced and disruptive technologies, many of which are still under development, that have the potential to trigger transformative change and provide solutions for the future.
  • The term is used to describe cutting-edge research in nanotechnology, biotechnology, material sciences, quantum technologies, semiconductors, artificial intelligence, data sciences, robotics, 3D printing, etc.

What are the Advantages of Deep Tech?

  • These technologies are expected to play a key role in addressing complex global challenges like climate change, hunger, epidemics, energy access, mobility, physical and digital infrastructure, and cyber security including:
  • Economic Implications: Advanced capabilities in deep tech are also likely to enhance productivity drive economic growth create jobs in coming years, and offer a competitive advantage to countries with strong foundations in these areas.
  • Opportunities for India: With its large base of relatively high-quality science and engineering manpower and a fairly well-established technology culture, India feels it is well-placed to be one of the frontrunners in these areas.
  • Potential Benefits: There is scope to contribute to the development of these technologies, which can ensure early adoption, shares in intellectual property, indigenous know-how, and self-reliance.
    • Major associated benefits in terms of spin-off technologies, trained manpower, entrepreneurship and technology exports can accrue as well.

Initiatives by the GOI to Build a Deep Tech Ecosystem

  • Over the past few years, the government has tried to incentivise research in some of these areas by setting up a National Mission on Transformative Mobility and Battery Storage and, more recently, a National Quantum Mission.

National Mission on Transformative Mobility and Battery Storage:

  • This mission is aimed at fostering innovation in the mobility and energy storage sectors.
    • The government encourages research and development in electric vehicles, advanced battery technologies, and sustainable mobility solutions through focused platforms and financial incentives.
    • It targets challenges related to environmental sustainability and energy efficiency.

National Quantum Mission:

  • Recognizing the transformative potential of quantum technologies, the government has initiated the National Quantum Mission.
    • This effort concentrates on promoting research and development in quantum computing, communication, and sensing.
    • Quantum technologies hold promise for revolutionizing various industries, and the mission aims to position India as a leader in global quantum advancements.

National Deep Tech Startup Policy (NDTSP):

  • In addition to mission-oriented strategies, the government has devised a policy framework to create a conducive environment for deep tech companies.
    • The NDTSP addresses specific challenges faced by technology startups and aims to nurture a thriving ecosystem for their growth.
    • Currently awaiting government approval, it embodies a comprehensive approach to cultivating a vibrant deep-tech startup ecosystem in India.
  • Objectives and Key Components of NDTSP: The NDTSP is designed to achieve several objectives, including:
    • Competitiveness: Fostering innovation to enable startups to compete globally.
    • Collaboration: Facilitating partnerships between startups and international counterparts.
    • Incentives: Providing appropriate incentives for companies investing in innovation and research.

The policy outlines key components to achieve its goals, such as:

  • Funding Opportunities: Creating avenues for long-term funding to support sustained innovation.
  • Intellectual Property Rights: Establishing a simplified yet robust intellectual property rights regime.
  • Tax Incentives: Offering tax incentives to encourage investment in deep tech startups.
  • Regulatory Framework: Developing a conducive regulatory environment to streamline operations.
  • Standards and Certifications: Establishing standards and certifications to ensure quality and reliability.
  • Talent Nurturing: Focusing on nurturing talent through skill development and educational initiatives.
  • Industry-Academia Collaboration: Facilitating linkages between industry, research centres, and educational institutions to promote knowledge exchange.

The Challenge of Funding in Deep Tech Research:

  • Challenges in Research Funding Landscape: There's a persistent concern within the scientific community regarding the need for more research funding.
    • India's investment in research lags behind the global average, particularly in comparison to scientifically advanced nations that serve as direct competitors.
  • Disparity Between Targets and Actual Spending: For more than two decades, the Indian government has set a target of allocating at least 2% of the GDP for research and development.
    • Despite an increase in absolute spending, the proportion of GDP dedicated to research has dwindled in recent years.
    • Currently, India allocates a mere 0.65% of its national GDP to research and development activities, significantly below the global average of approximately 1.8%.

Government's Initiatives to Address the Funding Challenges:

  • Harnessing Public-Private Collaboration: Recent governmental directives reflect a recognition that significant boosts in research and development expenditure may only be attainable through effective partnerships with the private sector.
    • Initiatives are underway to forge synergies among industry, research laboratories, and educational institutions, aimed at bolstering both research activities and the financial resources available to support them.
  • Introduction of the National Research Foundation (NRF): The establishment of the National Research Foundation (NRF), operational in recent times, stands as a key component of this strategy.
    • With an objective to tackle the funding hurdle, the NRF is set to procure approximately 70% of its Rs 50,000 crore allocation over the next five years from the private industry.
    • This collaborative model is envisioned to cultivate a more sustainable and resilient ecosystem for deep tech research and development in India.

The 1 Lakh Crore Fund: Anticipations, Enthusiasm, and Doubts:

  • Anticipations: The provision of a Rs 1 lakh crore fund for financing research and development is deemed crucial in fortifying the research landscape.
    • This fund holds particular promise for startups and private sector ventures in need of initial funding to kickstart their projects.
    • Anticipations are high that these initiatives will gain momentum with the injection of funds.
  • Enthusiasm and Doubts: While the government expresses optimism regarding the potential impact of this substantial fund, there exists scepticism within the scientific community.
    • Past expectations of significant private sector contributions to research have not materialized, leading to uncertainties and reservations among researchers.
    • Scientists argue that there's an imbalance in expectations, with excessive reliance on the private sector without a corresponding increase in government funding.
    • The unpredictability and inadequacy of private-sector financing present significant challenges.
    • Currently, the government appears to heavily rely on the success of its new funding initiatives for research.
  • However, the budgetary allocations for science and research departments in the Interim Budget show only nominal increases.

Conclusion

  • The recent initiative promises startups and other private sector ventures access to seed funding, offering potential benefits for their projects, yet, to boost R&D expenditure, fostering deeper partnerships with the private sector is essential. Initiatives are underway to enhance collaboration among industry, research laboratories, and educational institutions, aiming to diversify research activities and amplify available funding.

Union's Control of Financial Flows to State Governments (Indian Express)

  • 07 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News

The Union government’s moves, which reduce the aggregate financial transfers to States, are weakening cooperative federalism.

Background:

  • The fiscal dynamics between the Union government and the states in India have experienced notable shifts since the tenure of the 14th Finance Commission (FC) award period (2015-16).
  • Official data indicates a trend of diminishing financial transfers from the Union government to the states.
  • Thus, it becomes imperative to analyze the nuances of these financial transfers, delving into the deviations from the recommendations of FCs, their repercussions on states, and the potential ramifications for federal fiscal policies.

An Evaluation of Deviation from Finance Commission Recommendations:

  • Recommendation of Substantial Shift in Devolution by 14th FC: Recognising the imperative of empowering the States, the 14th FC recommended a significant increase in the devolution of Union tax revenues.
    • Specifically, the recommendation was to devolve 42% of Union tax revenues to the States, marking a substantial 10 percentage points increase from the preceding 13th FC's suggestion.
    • This ambitious shift was intended to enhance the financial autonomy of the States, aligning with the principles of cooperative federalism.
  • Deviation from FC Recommendations by the Union Government: Instead of adhering to the recommended increase, there has been a consistent reduction in financial transfers to the States.
    • This deviation is particularly perplexing given that the 15th FC retained the recommendation of 41%.
    • It excluded the devolution to Jammu and Kashmir (J&K) and Ladakh, which were reorganized as Union Territories.
    • If the shares of J&K and Ladakh are included, the recommended devolution should stand at 42%.
  • The Dynamics of Financial Transfers of Tax Revenue: The analysis of tax revenue provides a critical understanding of dynamics of financial transfers between the Union government and the States.
    • The Finance Commissions recommend the States' share based on the net tax revenue of the Union government.
    • It is derived after accounting for various factors such as collection costs, revenue assigned to Union territories, and the impact of cess and surcharge.

Analysis of Tax Revenue Disparities:

  • Contrasting Trends in States' Share: A Departure from FC Guidelines: The Fourteenth and Fifteenth Finance Commissions recommended states' shares of 42% and 41%, respectively, of the net tax revenue.
    • However, the actual share of gross tax revenue stood at only 35% in 2015-16, dwindling further to 30% in the 2023-24 Budget Estimate.
    • This discrepancy assumes significance, particularly against the backdrop of a significant surge in the Union government's gross tax revenue, soaring from ?14.6 lakh crore in 2015-16 to ?33.6 lakh crore in 2023-24.
  • Disparities in Revenue Growth: The more than two-fold increase in the Union government's gross tax revenue over this period starkly contrasts with the doubling of states' share in Union tax revenue.
    • This discrepancy raises concerns regarding equitable resource distribution.
    • Essentially, the widening gap between the Union government's revenue generation and states' share indicates a disproportionate augmentation in the former's fiscal capacity.
  • Declining Grants-in-Aid: The disparity becomes more evident when analyzing grants-in-aid to states, another statutory grant recommended by the Finance Commission.
    • The absolute amount of grants-in-aid declined from ?1.95 lakh crore in 2015-16 to ?1.65 lakh crore in 2023-24.
    • Consequently, the collective share of statutory financial transfers in the Union government's gross tax revenue witnessed a notable decline, plummeting from 48.2% to 35.32%.

Potential Factors Contributing to Decreasing States’ Share:

  • Calculation Methodology: One of the primary factors behind the dwindling share of states in gross revenue lies in the calculation method.
    • The net tax revenue, used to determine states' share, excludes revenue collections under cess and surcharge, revenue from Union Territories, and tax administration expenditure.
  • Role of Cess and Surcharge: In 2015-16, revenue collection through cess and surcharge accounted for 5.9% (?85,638 crore) of gross tax revenue, increasing to 10.8% (?3.63 lakh crore) by 2023-24.
    • This notable surge underscores the Union government's strategic utilization of cess and surcharge to channel funds for specific sectoral schemes, enhancing its financial autonomy.
  • Exclusion of States from Cess and Surcharge Revenues: The revenues generated through these additional levies are not shared with states, highlighting a more centralized control over financial resources by the Union government.
    • This selective exclusion limits resources available for devolution to states, potentially impacting their financial autonomy.

Centralization of Public Expenditure and Its Implications:

  • Union Government’s Routes of Financial Transfer: Apart from traditional financial transfers like tax devolution and grants-in-aid, the Union government employs Centrally Sponsored Schemes (CSS) and Central Sector Schemes (CSec Schemes) for direct financial transfers to states.
  • Influencing State Priorities Through CSS: Under CSS, the Union government proposes schemes and provides partial funding, compelling states to align their priorities with those proposed by the Union government.
    • The allocation for CSS has substantially increased from ?2.04 lakh crore to ?4.76 lakh crore between 2015-16 and 2023-24, although actual financial transfers to states under CSS remain lower than allocated funds.
  • CSec Schemes and Exclusive Control: Fully funded by the Union government, CSec Schemes operate in sectors where the Union government holds exclusive legislative or institutional controls.
    • The significant increase in allocation for CSec Schemes from ?5.21 lakh crore to ?14.68 lakh crore between 2015-16 and 2023-24 underscores the Union government's preference for such schemes.
  • Potential Bias in Resource Allocation: The decentralized implementation of CSec Schemes grants the Union government considerable latitude in allocating financial resources, raising concerns about potential bias in resource distribution.
  • Challenges for Cooperative Federalism: The downward revision of states' share in Union tax revenue from 42% to 41%, despite recommendations by the 15th Finance Commission, poses challenges to cooperative federalism.
    • Future discussions before the 16th Finance Commission might continue to address such challenges, potentially impacting collaborative federalism.

Conclusion

The evolving financial landscape between the Union government and states in India underscores the imperative for a comprehensive review of the fiscal architecture. Deviations from Finance Commission recommendations, increasing reliance on non-statutory transfers, and potential biases in resource allocation challenge the principles of cooperative federalism. Addressing these issues is essential to ensure equitable distribution of resources and foster collaborative governance between the Union and states, thus reinforcing the foundation of cooperative federalism for inclusive and sustainable development across the nation.

How to restore WTO’s authority (Indian Express)

  • 05 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News

Since the end of 2019, WTO’s crown jewel, the appellate body (AB) stands crippled because the US has single-handedly blocked the appointment of new members.

Context:

  • The 13th ministerial meeting of the World Trade Organization (WTO) is scheduled in Abu Dhabi, presenting a chance to tackle the persistent crisis in the Dispute Settlement Mechanism (DSM).
  • The effectiveness of WTO's key component, the DSM, has diminished since late 2019, mainly due to the United States obstructing the appointment of new Appellate Body (AB) members.
  • Despite the implications of this crisis, there exist specific options for developing countries that could offer potential solutions to rejuvenate the DSM.

What is the World Trade Organization (WTO)?

  • The WTO is an international institution responsible for overseeing global trade rules among nations.
  • With 164 member countries (including Liberia and Afghanistan, the most recent additions in 2016) and 25 observer countries and governments, it officially commenced operations on January 1, 1995, replacing the 1948 General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) in accordance with the 1994 Marrakesh Agreement.

Organizational Structure:

  • The highest authority within the WTO is the Ministerial Conference, comprising all member states, typically meeting biennially with a consensus-driven decision-making approach.
    • Daily operations are managed by three bodies, sharing the same membership:
  • General Council:
    • Functions as the primary decision-making body.
    • Convenes as the Dispute Settlement Body (DSB) when addressing disputes between WTO members.
  • Dispute Settlement Body (DSB):
    • Empowered to establish dispute settlement panels.
    • Refers matters to arbitration.
    • Adopts reports from panels, Appellate Body, and arbitration.
    • Monitors the implementation of recommendations and rulings, authorizing concession suspension in cases of non-compliance.
    • Exclusive authority to make decisions, while panels and the Appellate Body can only offer recommendations.
  • Trade Policy Review Body:
    • Operates with terms of reference distinct from the General Council and DSB.
    • Assesses the trade policies of member countries through periodic reviews.
    • This structure ensures effective governance and dispute resolution within the WTO framework, emphasizing consensus in decision-making processes.

The Importance of the Appellate Body (AB):

  • Enforceable Decision-Making:nThe Appellate Body (AB) holds the authority to review and, if necessary, overturn legal findings and interpretations by WTO panels.
    • This enforceable nature ensures a conclusive resolution to trade disputes, fostering stability and predictability in international trade relations.
  • Mandatory Jurisdiction: The AB's jurisdiction spans all WTO member countries, creating a mandatory framework for resolving disputes.
    • Member nations are obligated to participate in the AB process, reinforcing the foundation of a rules-based international trading system.
  • Advocacy for Equitable Practices: By addressing disputes and upholding compliance with WTO rules, the AB contributes to the promotion of fair and equitable trade practices.
    • This approach establishes a level playing field for both developed and developing nations, supporting inclusivity and sustainable economic growth.

Challenges in the Dispute Settlement Mechanism (DSM):

  • Appellate Body's Paralysis: Since late 2019, the AB, integral to the DSM, has been practically non-functional due to the blockage of new member appointments, primarily led by the United States dissatisfied with previous dispute outcomes.
    • This obstruction erodes the binding nature of the dispute resolution process, creating a legal void.
  • Evasion of Compliance: With the AB inoperable, countries have found a loophole to evade compliance with WTO panel rulings.
    • Nations can appeal into the void, rendering the DSM ineffective and contradicting its purpose of providing a binding and enforceable resolution to trade disputes.
  • Prolonged Dispute Resolution: The absence of a functioning AB leads to delays in resolving trade disputes.
    • Without a binding appellate process, disputes may linger, contributing to economic uncertainties and potential retaliatory actions among trading partners.
  • Undermining Rules-Based Trade: The DSM crisis jeopardizes the concept of a rules-based international trading system.
    • The inability to enforce agreed-upon rules diminishes predictability and stability crucial for global economic growth through trade.

Potential Measures for Developing Countries to Sustain a Functional Two-Tiered DSM:

  • Participation in the European Union-led MPIA: Developing countries can explore joining the European Union-led multi-party Interim Appeal Arbitration Arrangement (MPIA) as an initial option.
    • This arrangement formalizes the arbitration mechanism already available under the WTO, providing appellate review for panel reports.
    • However, the MPIA's voluntary nature poses challenges, leading to ad hoc tribunals and limited adoption of awards by all WTO members.
  • Creation of a Restricted AB with Limited Powers: Considering the opposition to the AB by the United States, an alternative is formulating a diluted AB with constrained powers.
    • Limiting the AB's authority in various ways, such as deference to parties in dispute and non-persuasive value of rulings, may be explored.
    • However, a diluted AB could contradict the intended role of the DSM in providing security and predictability to the multilateral trading regime.
  • Resurrecting the AB with an Opt-Out Provision: Scholars Robert Howse and Wenhua Ji propose resurrecting the AB with a critical modification—allowing countries to opt out of compulsory AB jurisdiction.
    • Countries opting out would be excluded from participating in the appellate process, settling disputes solely through a single-tier panel jurisdiction.
  • Critics express reservations about altering the intrinsic nature of a two-tier binding DSM but acknowledge the need to safeguard the AB's integrity.

Conclusion

In addressing the WTO DSM crisis, developing countries, including India, confront a complex decision-making process.

While restoring the AB to its original form is ideal, the suggested resurrection with an opt-out provision offers a pragmatic compromise, recognizing challenges while preserving the AB's legitimacy.

As WTO member countries gather in Abu Dhabi, the way forward requires thoughtful consideration of trade-offs to balance DSM effectiveness with accommodating diverse interests in the global trade landscape.

Major Takeaways From Interim Budget (2024-25) (The Hindu)

  • 02 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman presented her sixth Union Budget for the next financial year (2024-25), which differed from previous budgets as it was an interim budget.

What is the Interim Budget?

  • The Interim Budget serves as a transitional financial plan presented by the incumbent government in an election year, bridging the period between the dissolution of the Parliament and the formation of a new government.
  • This budgetary measure is necessitated by constitutional requirements outlined in Article 112 of the Indian Constitution, which mandates the submission of an annual financial statement to both Houses of Parliament.
  • This statement outlines the anticipated receipts and expenditures of the Government of India for the upcoming fiscal year and requires approval from both Houses.
  • However, in an election year, the prospect of a change in government following the polls prevents the presentation of a full-fledged budget by the incumbent administration.
  • Consequently, the need arises for an interim budget to address the financial requirements during the transitional period.
  • While there is no specific constitutional provision for an interim budget, the government seeks approval from the Lower House for the funds necessary for the transition period (April - July) through the votes on account provision.

Features and Components of Interim Budget:

  • During the presentation of an interim budget, the Finance Minister provides an overview of the current state of the Indian economy, including its fiscal status and revised estimated growth for the upcoming year.
  • This presentation encompasses details of both planned and non-planned government expenditures and revenues.
  • While the government refrains from introducing major schemes that could sway voters or presenting an Economic Survey, it retains the authority to revise tax rates within the framework of the interim budget.
  • Similar to the Union budget, the interim budget is presented to both Houses of Parliament on February 1 by the Finance Minister, subjected to debate and voting in the Lok Sabha, and subsequently forwarded for Presidential approval.
  • Despite its interim nature, the interim budget remains valid for the entire fiscal year, serving as a crucial transitional arrangement until the presentation of a full-fledged budget by the new government.

What is Vote on Account?

  • Article 116 of the Constitution empowers the Lower House to authorize advance grants for estimated expenditures during a portion of a financial year through legislative approval.
    • This mechanism, known as a vote on account, facilitates the continuity of government operations during transitional periods.
  • A typical vote on account encompasses the allocation of funds for essential expenses such as salaries, ongoing projects, and other necessary expenditures of the Central government.
  • Notably, it does not entail modifications to tax rates.
  • Additionally, a standard vote on account remains effective for a period of two months, with the possibility of extension for up to four months as required.

Major Takeaways from the Interim Budget (2024-25) - Part I:

  • No Change in Taxation: The Interim Budget maintains existing tax rates without proposing any changes to direct or indirect taxes, including import duties.
  • Withdrawal of Outstanding Direct Tax Demands: A significant initiative in the Interim Budget is the proposal to withdraw outstanding direct tax demands, benefiting taxpayers with demands up to Rs. 25,000 for the period up to the financial year 2009-10, and up to Rs. 10,000 for financial years 2010-11 to 2014-15.
    • This measure is expected to benefit approximately one crore taxpayers.
  • Tripled Direct Tax Collections: Over the past decade, direct tax collections have more than tripled, accompanied by a substantial increase in the number of return filers.
    • The new tax regime ensures no tax liability for taxpayers with income up to Rs. 7 lakh.
    • Additionally, corporate tax rates for existing domestic companies have been reduced from 30% to 22%, and for certain new manufacturing companies to 15%.
  • Improvements in Taxpayer Services: The government's focus on enhancing taxpayer services has led to a transformation in the assessment system and simplified tax return filing processes.
    • The average processing time for returns has been significantly reduced from 93 days to just 10 days.
  • GST Compliance Relief: The implementation of GST has streamlined compliance for trade and industry, resulting in a reduction in logistics costs and taxes, and ultimately lowering prices for consumers.
    • The GST base has doubled, with monthly gross GST collections nearly doubling to Rs. 1.66 lakh crore.
  • Customs Facilitation Measures: Several steps have been taken in customs to facilitate international trade, including a substantial decrease in import release times at Inland Container Depots, air cargo complexes, and seaports over the last four years.
  • White Paper Announcement: The government will release a white paper to provide insights into the period until 2014, aiming to draw lessons from past challenges and policy decisions.

Interim Budget (2024-25)- Part II:

  • Increased Capital Expenditure: The Interim Budget allocates an 11.1% increase in capital expenditure for the upcoming year, amounting to Rs. 11,11,111 crore, representing 3.4% of the GDP.
    • This investment aims to build on previous capital expenditure growth and stimulate economic growth and employment.
  • Projected Real GDP Growth: India's Real GDP is projected to grow at 7.3% in FY 2023-24, reflecting the economy's resilience and healthy macroeconomic fundamentals despite global challenges.
    • International agencies forecast India's continued growth between 6.1% and 6.7% in 2024-25.
  • Robust GST Collection and Revenue Outlook: Strong economic activity has bolstered revenue collections, with gross GST revenues surpassing the Rs. 1.6 lakh crore mark for the seventh time.
    • Total receipts, excluding borrowings, are estimated at Rs. 30.80 lakh crore, reflecting strong growth momentum and formalization in the economy.
  • Support for State Governments: The Interim Budget extends support to state governments through schemes such as interest-free loans for capital expenditure and provisions for milestone-linked reforms.
  • Fiscal Consolidation and FDI Inflow: Efforts towards fiscal consolidation aim to reduce the fiscal deficit to below 4.5% by 2025-26, with market borrowings estimated to be lower than the previous fiscal year.

Additionally, the government highlights a significant increase in FDI inflows over the past decade.

  • Developmental Achievements: The Interim Budget underscores various developmental initiatives, including poverty alleviation programs, support for entrepreneurs through schemes like PM Mudra Yojana, housing initiatives, and promotion of startups through financial assistance.
  • Infrastructure Development in Railways and Aviation: The budget outlines plans for major economic railway corridor programs and enhancements in aviation infrastructure, reflecting the government's commitment to improving transportation and connectivity.
  • Committee on Population Growth Challenges: A high-powered committee will be formed to address challenges arising from rapid population growth and demographic changes, aligning with the goal of 'Viksit Bharat' (Developed India).

What are Other Announcements and Strategies in the Budget?

  • During the presentation of the Interim Budget, Union Finance Minister Smt. Nirmala Sitharaman unveiled plans to increase the capital expenditure outlay for the next year by 11.1 percent to approximately Rs. 11 lakh crore, constituting 3.4 percent of the GDP.
  • The Interim Budget introduces a range of announcements and strategies, signaling the trajectory and developmental approach aimed at realizing the vision of a 'Viksit Bharat' (Developed India) by 2047.
  • In a series of announcements, Smt. Nirmala Sitharaman underscored the government's commitment to empowering the eastern region and its populace, positioning it as a significant catalyst for India's overall economic growth which includes:
  • Boost in the Technology Sector: A corpus of Rs 1 lakh crore will be established through a fifty-year interest-free loan to facilitate long-term financing or refinancing for research and innovation in emerging technology domains.
    • This initiative aims to incentivize the private sector to significantly enhance research and innovation efforts.
  • Railway Infrastructure Development: The budget outlines plans for three major economic railway corridor programs focusing on energy, mineral, and cement corridors, port connectivity corridors, and high-traffic density corridors.
    • Additionally, the conversion of forty thousand normal rail bogies to Vande Bharat standards will enhance safety, convenience, and passenger comfort.
  • Aviation Sector Expansion: With the number of airports doubling to 149, and five hundred and seventeen new routes serving 1.3 crore passengers, the aviation sector demonstrates significant growth.
    • Indian carriers have proactively placed orders for over 1000 new aircraft, indicating a robust expansion in the aviation industry.
  • MGNREGA Allocation: A substantial increase in allocation for the Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA) scheme is proposed in the Interim Budget for 2024-25, with Rs. 86,000 crore allocated compared to Rs. 60,000 crore in the previous fiscal year.
  • Subsidy Rationalization: The interim budget aims to reduce the subsidy bill on essential commodities like food, fertilizer, and fuel, with the projected subsidy falling to a five-year low of approximately Rs. 3.8 lakh crore in 2024-25.
    • Notably, the fertilizer subsidy is being reduced with expectations of improvements in the global situation and increased domestic production.
  • Demographic Challenges Addressed: Recognizing the challenges posed by rapid population growth and demographic changes, the government announces the formation of a high-powered committee.
    • Tasked with comprehensive consideration and recommendations, this committee aligns with the goal of 'Viksit Bharat' (Developed India) by addressing demographic challenges effectively.

Conclusion

The Interim Budget serves as a transitional financial plan presented by the government during an election year, addressing various sectors such as railways, tourism, healthcare, technology, aviation, green energy, aquaculture, and housing. However, it is important to note that the incoming government will present its comprehensive budget after the newly elected Lok Sabha, delineating the government's financial strategy for the entire fiscal year.

 

 

Navigating the Risks and Benefits Associated with Internationalisation of Government Bonds (The Hindu)

  • 03 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

There is a serious underestimation of the risks involved in the internationalisation of bond markets and currencies of emerging economies.

Context:

  • In recent times, there have been noticeable changes in the global financial landscape, specifically regarding the inclusion of government bonds from emerging economies in global indices.
  • It is crucial to evaluate the actions taken by J.P. Morgan, Bloomberg, and FTSE Russell in incorporating Indian local currency government bonds (LCGBs) into global indices amidst these developments.
  • Exploring the reasons behind these moves and understanding the potential advantages and risks associated with such initiatives is essential.

J.P. Morgan's Influence on India's Financial Landscape:

  • The inclusion of Indian local currency government bonds (LCGBs) in J.P. Morgan's Government Bond Index-Emerging Markets (GBI-EM) Global index suite in September 2023 marked a significant milestone.
  • This step not only underscored India's financial stature but also raised expectations within the Indian financial sector.
  • It spurred interest from other major index providers such as Bloomberg-Barclays and FTSE Russell.
  • Subsequently, Bloomberg Index Services announced in January 2024 that India's fully accessible route (FAR) bonds would be incorporated into the Bloomberg Emerging Market Local Currency Index, further bolstering this trend.
  • All eyes are now on FTSE Russell, highlighting the increasing influence and anticipation of reforms in India's government bond market.

What is the Process of Opening Local Bond Markets?

  • Opening local bond markets to foreign investors is a strategic move by emerging economies to bolster their global financial integration.
  • In India, this journey began in 2019 and gained momentum by 2020 with the introduction of the fully accessible route (FAR).
  • Despite facing challenges like delays due to government policies on capital gains taxes and local settlement, the core policy remained unchanged, showcasing a dedication to promoting global financial inclusivity.

Advantages of Internationalising Bond Markets:

  • Reduced Reliance on Domestic Institutions: By integrating local currency government bonds into global indices, emerging economies like India aim to lessen their dependence on domestic financial institutions.
    • This diversified funding base can contribute to financial stability.
  • Stability in Funds Tracking Indices: Inclusion in global indices can result in a more stable inflow of funds, as funds tracking indices typically have a longer investment horizon compared to short-term speculative flows.
    • This stability can help mitigate volatility in local financial markets, providing a secure environment for both domestic and foreign investors.
  • Lower Cost of Public Borrowing: Increased demand for local currency government bonds from global investors may lead to a decrease in domestic interest rates.
    • As a result, the cost of public borrowing for the government can decline.
  • Relief for Local Financial Institutions: Higher participation by foreign investors in local bond markets can alleviate the balance sheets of local financial institutions holding these bonds.
    • This increased liquidity may encourage more lending and private investment.
  • Mitigation of "Original Sin": Bond market internationalization helps mitigate the "original sin" problem faced by emerging economies, where they are unable to borrow internationally in their currencies.
    • By issuing bonds in their currencies, these countries shift the exchange rate risk onto international lenders, potentially avoiding widespread private insolvencies during sharp currency declines.

Risks Involved with Internationalising Bond Markets:

  • Loss of Control and Heightened Interest Rate Risks: Internationalizing bond markets poses the risk of losing control over long-term interest rates, leaving emerging economies more vulnerable to global interest rate fluctuations.
    • This can negatively impact domestic bond markets and overall economic stability.
  • Exchange Rate Volatility and Spillover Effects: Increased participation by foreign investors exposes local currency bond markets to exchange rate volatility.
    • During periods of global risk aversion or liquidity challenges, adverse spillover effects can occur, as seen in events like the Lehman collapse in 2008 and recent shifts in U.S. monetary policy.
  • Volatility in Inflows of Local Currency Bonds: Instances such as the rapid exit of investors from local currency assets in Malaysia during 2014-15 and the total withdrawal of foreigners from the bond market in Türkiye since Spring 2018 underscore the unpredictability of capital flows.
    • These sudden stops and exits can lead to large reserve losses and currency declines, highlighting the potential for rapid market fluctuations.

Efforts by the Inter-Departmental Group (IDG) and RBI to Integrate Government Bonds into Global Indices:

  • Indian LCGBs Integration into Global Indices: The RBI's journey towards internationalization commenced in October 2022 with an Inter-Departmental Group (IDG) report outlining efforts to integrate Indian local currency government bonds (LCGBs) into global indices.
  • Diversification of Funding Channels: The inclusion of Indian LCGBs in global indices aims not only to attract foreign capital but also to diversify funding sources, reducing reliance on domestic institutions and tapping into large international resources.
  • Stability Enhancement and Investment Allocation: The IDG report highlights the potential benefits of LCGB inclusion in global indices, such as enhancing the stability of funds tracking these indices.
    • This stability can foster a more predictable investment environment, attracting long-term investors and improving investment allocation within the Indian financial market.
  • Rupee Internationalization Beyond Bonds: Integrating LCGBs into global indices is just one aspect of a broader effort to internationalize the Indian rupee, as outlined in the IDG report.
    • Another crucial component involves allowing banking services in the rupee (INR) outside the country.

Moving Forward:

  • Striking a Delicate Balance: While the opening of local bond markets presents abundant opportunities, it necessitates careful balancing.
    • Countries must balance the attraction of foreign capital with the management of potential risks.
  • Drawing from Past Experiences: The experiences of Malaysia and Türkiye offer valuable lessons, emphasizing proactive management of offshore markets to prevent excessive speculation and maintain currency stability.
    • These lessons underscore the importance of regulatory vigilance, timely interventions, and a balanced approach to fostering internationalization while preserving macroeconomic stability.

Conclusion

The process of opening local bond markets marks a crucial stride for emerging economies aiming for deeper integration into the global financial realm.

Recent developments involving J.P. Morgan, Bloomberg, and FTSE Russell underscore the growing recognition of India's financial market potential.

As India embarks on this journey, it must adeptly navigate complexities, carefully weigh risks and benefits, and adapt to the evolving global financial landscape for enduring success and stability.

The Evolution and Powers of the Deputy Chief Minister (Indian Express)

  • 01 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

Currently, there are 26 deputy CMs across 14 states. The post, not mentioned in the Constitution, is nevertheless a long-standing feature of Indian politics.

Context:

  • The tradition of appointing a deputy CM in Indian politics is a well-established practice, typically arising from political negotiations, especially in coalition governments or situations where a single leader lacks undisputed authority within the ruling party or support across key interest groups in the state.
  • This trend is gaining prominence, evident in the four out of five states that underwent elections in November—Madhya Pradesh, Rajasthan, Telangana, and Chhattisgarh—all currently having deputy CMs.
  • With the exception of Tamil Nadu and Kerala, most major states also feature the position of deputy CM.

What is the Post of Deputy CM?

  • Article 163(1) of the Constitution says “There shall be a Council of Ministers with the Chief Minister at the head to aid and advise the Governor in the exercise of his functions”.
  • Neither Article 163 nor Article 164 mentions the post of Deputy Chief Minister.
  • The post of Deputy CM is understood as being equivalent in rank to that of Cabinet Minister (in the state).
  • The Deputy CM enjoys the same pay and perks as a Cabinet Minister.

Across Various States:

  • At least 13 other states in the country apart from Bihar currently have Deputy CMs.
  • The other states include:
    • Maharashtra, Haryana, UP, Karnataka, Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh, Chhattisgarh, Telangana, Himachal Pradesh, Meghalaya, Nagaland, Arunachal Pradesh and Andhra Pradesh
  • The highest of these is in Andhra Pradesh, with Chief Minister Y S Jagan Mohan Reddy having five Deputy CMs.

A Brief History of the Deputy CM Post:

  • Perhaps the first Deputy CM in India was Anugrah Narayan Sinha, who was the most important leader of the Congress in Bihar after the first Chief Minister of the state, Dr Srikrishna Singh (Sinha).
  • Deputy CMs were seen in more states, especially after the reduction of Congress’s near-total dominance in national politics after 1967.
  • Bihar: Anugrah Narayan Sinha remained Deputy CM until his death in 1957.
    • Karpoori Thakur became the second Deputy CM of Bihar in 1967, in the state’s first non-Congress government led by Mahamaya Prasad Sinha.
  • Uttar Pradesh: Ram Prakash Gupta of the Bharatiya Jana Sangh (BJS) became Deputy Chief Minister in the Samyukta Vidhayak Dal (SVD) government that came to power in 1967 with Chaudhary Charan Singh as Chief Minister.
    • This experiment was repeated in the next government under Chief Minister Chandra Bhanu Gupta of the Congress — when Kamalapati Tripathi was sworn in as Deputy CM in February 1969.
    • Both Ram Prakash Gupta and Tripathi went on to become CMs themselves.
  • Madhya Pradesh: Virendra Kumar Saklecha of the BJS became Deputy CM in the SVD government led by Govind Narain Singh who came to power in July 1967.
  • Haryana: Haryana has had a tradition of Deputy CMs; Chaudhary Chand Ram, a Jat leader from Rohtak, was the first to hold this position in the short-lived government led by Rao Birender Singh.

What are the Powers of the Deputy CM?

  • More than the post of deputy chief minister, it is the nature of portfolios allocated to a deputy chief minister that decides how much weight the person carries in the cabinet.
  • Chief ministers are often seen to keep most of the important portfolios like home and vigilance with themselves.
    • If it's a coalition government, then senior leaders of the largest coalition partner usually get finance and revenue.
  • The chief minister is also the sole authority on the transfer and posting of Class-I officers in the state.
    • The deputy chief minister does not have a say in this matter.
  • The deputy chief minister gets the same pay and perks as enjoyed by other cabinet-rank ministers in the government.
    • They, however, enjoy tax-free pay and perks.
  • In the matters of administration, the deputy chief minister holds no authority to see the files earmarked for the chief minister.
    • In fact, the deputy chief minister is required to route all files pertaining to the portfolios allocated to her to the chief minister for clearance.
  • The deputy chief minister cannot claim to preside over a cabinet meeting on her own or issue directions to other departments than allocated to her by the chief minister.
  • The deputy chief minister, like any other minister, needs to seek clearance from the chief minister for expenditure over and above the budget allocated to her departments.
  • Yet, deputy chief ministers are politically significant.
  • It conveys the political weight the party - in the case of the coalition government - or the leader carries in the ruling dispensation.
    • This is virtually a declaration that the leader who is appointed as deputy chief minister is Number 2 in the government.
  • This aside, the number of deputy chief ministers in a government reflects factions in the ruling dispensation that need to be balanced for survival or the government's hitch-free run.
  • Even in oath-taking, the Constitution does not provide for a separate oath for the deputy chief minister or deputy minister.

What are the Concerns?

  • Lack of constitutional backing and unclear roles can allow the Chief Minister to exploit the position arbitrarily.
  • Unlimited appointments of Deputy CMs may lead to excessive appeasement of coalition partners.
  • Duplication of roles with Cabinet ministers could create governance and administrative challenges.

What Lies Ahead?

  • There's a need to clearly define the roles and responsibilities of Deputy CMs.
  • Implementing a limit on the number of Deputy CMs per Chief Minister could streamline the role.
  • It's essential to raise political awareness among Indian citizens about this position.

Deputy Prime Ministers:

  • India has also seen several Deputy Prime Ministers — a post that was first held by Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel when Jawaharlal Nehru was Prime Minister.
    • Nehru and Patel were the two tallest leaders of the Congress at the time and were also seen as representing two different streams of thinking within the party.
  • Among those who held the position subsequently were Morarji Desai, Charan Singh, Chaudhary Devi Lal, and Lal Krishna Advani.
  • Devi Lal’s appointment as Deputy PM in VP Singh’s government in 1989 was challenged in court on the ground that “the oath administered to him as such was not…in accordance with the prescription of the Constitution”.
    • In K M Sharma vs Devi Lal and Ors (1990), the Supreme Court upheld Devi Lal’s appointment “in view of the clear statement made by the learned Attorney General that Respondent No. 1 (Devi Lal) is just a Minister like other members of the Council of Ministers, though he has been described as Deputy Prime Minister.
    • The description of him as Deputy Prime Minister does not confer on him any powers of the Prime Minister”.

 

Hybrid Vehicles Could be a Cleaner Solution for India than EVs for the Next Decade (Indian Express)

  • 31 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

Calculations by HSBC Research show overall carbon emissions are lower in hybrids compared to electrics. India's electric mobility plan is currently focused on battery electrics. But as global examples show, there are challenges to the wider adoption of EVs in India.

Context:

  • HSBC Research recommends India prioritize hybrid vehicles as a crucial step towards full electrification over 5-10 years.
  • Hybrid cars offer lower emissions compared to traditional and electric vehicles, with emissions likely to converge within a decade.
  • Combining internal combustion engines with onboard electric motors, hybrids provide a balanced propulsion approach.
  • This strategy aligns with India's sustainability goals, bridging the gap towards complete electrification in transportation.

Why does Hybrid Vehicles are a Good Medium-term Solution?

  • Hybrid vehicles are an effective medium-term solution for India's transportation needs as it progresses towards full electrification.
  • Hybrids, along with compressed natural gas cars, offer practical advantages over the next 5-10 years.
  • They are deemed critical not only for cost-effectiveness but also for India's decarbonization efforts.
    • Hybrids emit 133 g/km of total (well-to-wheel) carbon emissions, compared to 158 g/km for electric vehicles, making hybrids at least 16% less polluting.
  • This analysis factors in not just tailpipe emissions but also considers emissions from vehicle operations (tank-to-wheel) and the entire lifecycle, including crude mining, refining, and power generation.

For How Long Is This Situation Expected to Hold?

  • The convergence of emissions between electric vehicles (EVs) and hybrids is anticipated within 7-10 years.
    • Currently, in India, non-fossil fuel sources account for 26% of power generation, with a blended emission rate of 716g/kWh.
    • The emissions from hybrid cars and EVs will align once non-fossil fuel power generation in India reaches 44%.
  • Even with a projected 40% share of non-fossil fuels by 2030, hybrids are predicted to emit 8% less than EVs, although this reduction will be half of the current 16%.

What are the Challenges Faced by Battery Electric Vehicles (BEVs)?

The global push for battery electric vehicles (BEVs) faces several challenges:

  • Upfront Subsidy: BEV adoption, as seen in Norway, the US, and China, heavily relies on state subsidies.
    • However, in countries like India, direct subsidies often benefit middle or upper-middle-class buyers, raising equity concerns.
  • Charging Infrastructure: Investing in charging networks, as demonstrated by Norway and China, significantly boosts EV adoption.
    • However, India's charging infrastructure lags, with only about 2,000 operational public charging stations, posing a challenge, especially considering the dominance of two- and three-wheelers.
  • Electricity Source: Unlike countries with renewable-heavy grids, India largely relies on coal-fired plants.
    • This raises questions about the environmental benefits of EVs and highlights the need for cleaner energy generation.
  • Value Chain: India's reliance on lithium-ion batteries exposes the vulnerability in the global supply chain, primarily dominated by a few countries.
    • Diversification strategies are crucial to mitigate risks and ensure sustainable battery production.

What are the Difference Between Hybrid and Electric Vehicles?

  • Hybrid Vehicles: Hybrid vehicles utilize a combination of an internal combustion engine (usually gasoline-powered) and an electric motor.
    • These vehicles can operate on both gasoline and electricity, either separately or in tandem.
    • The environmental impact of hybrid vehicles is typically lower than that of traditional gasoline-powered vehicles due to their ability to switch to electric power, reducing fuel consumption and tailpipe emissions.
    • However, they still rely partially on fossil fuels and produce emissions during combustion.
  • Electric Vehicles: Electric vehicles (EVs) are powered solely by electricity stored in batteries.
    • They produce zero tailpipe emissions, making them cleaner and more environmentally friendly than hybrid vehicles and traditional internal combustion engine vehicles.
      • However, the overall environmental impact of EVs depends on factors such as the source of electricity generation.
    • If the electricity comes from renewable sources like solar or wind, EVs can have a significantly lower environmental footprint compared to hybrid vehicles.

Does Electric Vehicles Pollute More than Hybrid Vehicles?

It's not accurate to say that electric cars pollute more than hybrid cars in general. However, there are specific contexts where electric cars might appear to have a higher environmental impact than hybrids.

  • One such context is during the manufacturing process. Electric cars typically require large batteries, which involve the extraction of raw materials like lithium and cobalt.
    • The extraction and processing of these materials can result in environmental degradation and pollution.
    • Additionally, the manufacturing process for electric cars may require more energy compared to hybrid vehicles.
  • Another factor is the source of electricity used to charge electric cars.
    • If the electricity comes from fossil fuels like coal or natural gas, then the overall environmental impact of electric cars may be higher than that of hybrids, which can partially rely on gasoline.
    • However, as renewable energy sources like solar and wind power become more prevalent, the environmental benefits of electric cars increase significantly.
  • In terms of operational emissions, electric cars produce zero tailpipe emissions, while hybrids emit pollutants when running on gasoline.
    • However, hybrids still produce fewer emissions than traditional gasoline-powered vehicles.

What About Other “Clean Vehicles”?

  • Apart from electric cars, hydrogen fuel cell vehicles offer another zero-emission alternative.
  • Unlike electric vehicles, which draw power from charging stations, hydrogen fuel cell cars generate electricity internally.
  • They utilize a fuel cell that combines hydrogen from an onboard tank with oxygen from the air, emitting only water vapour and warm air.
  • While hydrogen fuel cell cars hold promise for decarbonizing industries like aviation and shipping, they face challenges.
  • They are less common and pricier than electric cars, with lower energy efficiency.
  • Moreover, the environmental impact of hydrogen production varies: "green hydrogen" sourced from renewable energy is scarce, while most hydrogen is currently derived from "grey" or "blue" processes, which involve emissions or carbon capture complexities.

Conclusion

While hybrid vehicles offer a transitional solution, electric vehicles remain pivotal in reducing emissions. Overcoming challenges in charging infrastructure and energy sourcing is vital for maximizing their environmental benefits. Hydrogen fuel cell vehicles show promise but require significant advancements. A holistic approach, including innovation and policy support, is crucial for realizing the potential of clean mobility solutions.

 

 

Populism and Health Inequality in India (The Hindu)

  • 30 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

A fair and effective health system requires freedom from political influence, focusing on policymaking and implementation driven by scientific evidence and long-term objectives.

Background:

  • Within India's diverse landscape, where bustling cities coexist with serene villages, there's a subtle yet crucial struggle unfolding in the realm of public health.
  • Despite its significance, this battle often takes a backseat to the allure of curing illnesses. While disease prevention holds paramount importance, political attention tends to gravitate towards visible and immediate achievements such as constructing new medical facilities, offering affordable treatments, and managing crises.
  • Hence, there arises a pressing need to examine the challenges and deficiencies within the existing democratic approach to public health, emphasizing the necessity for evidence-based strategies geared towards long-term objectives.

What is the Present Condition of Public Health and Nutrition in India?

  • According to the 5th National Family Health Survey 2019-21:
    • 35.5% of children under 5 exhibited stunted growth.
    • 32.1% were underweight.
    • The prevalence of anaemia among children aged 6-59 months rose from 58.6% to 67.1%.
    • Among women aged 15-19 years, the prevalence of anaemia increased from 54.1% to 59.1%.
    • These statistics underscore a notable disparity in public health endeavours.

The Incongruity of the Democratic Process in India's Public Health:

  • Emphasis on Infrastructure and Immediate Relief: The inclination towards constructing new hospitals and providing subsidized treatments reflects democratic governance in India.
    • While these initiatives address immediate healthcare needs, their impact on sustained population health still needs to be improved.
    • During health crises, political leaders often prioritize emergency response strategies, swiftly mobilizing state resources.
    • However, many of these measures yield minimal impact due to insufficient follow-through beyond public announcements.
  • Preferring Emergency Response over Vital Preventive Measures: Budget constraints often limit the effective implementation of announced initiatives, raising concerns about their long-term sustainability and impact.
    • This emphasis on visible achievements can overshadow critical areas like sanitation, disease surveillance, and public health education.
    • Yet, these aspects are vital for maintaining population health and averting disease outbreaks.
    • The significance of quieter victories achieved through preventive measures, such as eradicating diseases like smallpox and controlling polio, often goes unnoticed despite their substantial contributions to public well-being.

A Case Study of Dengue Illustrating This Dilemma

  • Immediate Response Emphasis: During dengue outbreaks, political leaders often prioritize swift relief actions, such as establishing relief camps and offering symptomatic treatments.
    • This reactive stance arises from the urgency of the situation and the imperative to alleviate the immediate suffering of affected communities.
    • However, the lack of emphasis on preventive measures can perpetuate a cycle of recurrent outbreaks, straining healthcare resources further.
  • Overlooking Underlying Causes and Prevention: The focus on emergency relief efforts may overshadow the significance of long-term strategies, including studying vector bionomics, developing vaccines, and enhancing public health infrastructure.
    • Consequently, the current approach falls short of averting future outbreaks and burdens the healthcare system.
    • Research and development in these realms are imperative. For instance, despite limitations, the existing dengue vaccine underscores the necessity for further exploration.
    • Additionally, climate change impacts mosquito breeding and movement patterns, necessitating adaptations in public health strategies.

What are the challenges in Public Health in India:

  • Prioritizing Short-Term Gains: Political leaders often prioritize initiatives promising immediate results, like constructing new hospitals and offering subsidized treatments, over long-term public health strategies.
  • Budgetary Limitations: Despite announcements, the impact of these short-term measures is limited due to constraints in budget allocation and implementation beyond public announcements.
  • Neglect of Vital Areas: Critical aspects such as sanitation, disease surveillance, and public health education are often overlooked, despite their significance in maintaining population health and preventing disease outbreaks.
    • For example, in the case of Dengue, relief efforts overshadow long-term strategies like vector control and vaccine development.
  • Profit-Driven Pharmaceutical Sector: The profit-oriented nature of the pharmaceutical industry sidelines public health priorities, leading to disparities in medicine availability, particularly concerning diseases like tuberculosis, which disproportionately affect socio-economically disadvantaged populations.
  • Lack of Holistic Approach: Addressing public health challenges necessitates interdisciplinary expertise from fields like environmental science, sociology, urban planning, and economics.
    • However, India's current approach remains predominantly physician-centric, overlooking broader societal and environmental factors.

What Steps Can Be Taken?

  • Prioritize Research and Development: Emphasize research, particularly in vaccine development and understanding the influence of climate change on disease vectors, to inform proactive public health strategies.
  • Depoliticize Health Decision-Making: Ensure that public health policies are driven by scientific evidence and long-term objectives rather than short-term political considerations.
  • Enhance Nutrition Support: Increase investments in nutrition programs, recognising their significant long-term benefits for health and productivity.
  • Adopt a Holistic Approach: Implement a comprehensive public health management strategy that encompasses preventive measures, policy development, community health initiatives, and environmental health considerations.
  • Grant Autonomy to Health Ministries: Consider granting health ministries greater autonomy, potentially placing them directly under the leadership of elected officials such as Chief Ministers or Prime Ministers, similar to India’s space and atomic energy departments, to facilitate more effective decision-making and implementation processes.

Conclusion

Although democracy itself is not detrimental to public health, the existing approach within democratic frameworks frequently lacks effectiveness. There is a pressing requirement to rethink public health governance, prioritizing evidence-based, comprehensive, and forward-looking strategies that cater to both present and future health requirements.

Targeting Imperfect Global University Rankings for National Security is Debatable, but Inevitable (Indian Express)

  • 29 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

The drafting of India’s first National Security Strategy document includes a provision to expedite domestic defense manufacturing, while concurrently aiming to elevate ten Indian universities into the ranks of the global top 100.

Context:

  • As India develops its first National Security Strategy, the main goal is to speed up the production of defense equipment indigenously.
  • But with the world changing, it's becoming more obvious that there's a strong connection between knowledge and weapons.
  • Technologies like drones, satellite internet, and artificial intelligence are being used in both civilian and military areas, blurring the lines between them.
  • So, it's important for our strategy to adapt to these changes and make sure we're prepared for the future.

Examining Geopolitical Changes and Technological Boundaries:

  • Reviewing Economic Integration: Previously, the United States played a crucial role in accelerating China's integration into the global economy.
    • However, the recognition of the strategic implications of advanced technologies has prompted a reevaluation of this approach.
    • The concept of safeguarding critical technological advancements for national security reasons, as advocated by the U.S. National Security Advisor, suggests a shift towards placing foundational technologies behind a high fence.
  • Scrutinizing Friend Shoring: The notion of friend shoring, which involves maintaining economic partnerships between countries with conflicting interests, is facing increased scrutiny.
    • Recent statements from the White House Economic Council Director regarding concerns over a Japanese company with Chinese operations acquiring a U.S. steel company highlight growing apprehensions surrounding economic ties with potential adversaries.
  • China's Response and Technology Restrictions: In response to perceived threats to its technological sovereignty, China has implemented measures to restrict the use of certain foreign technologies.
    • Notably, Tesla cars and Apple phones have been prohibited from Chinese army bases due to concerns regarding sophisticated surveillance features such as cameras, microphones, and cloud backups.
  • Xi Jinping's Dual Circulation Strategy: Under Xi Jinping's leadership, China has embraced a dual circulation strategy, emphasizing the utilization of Chinese technologies whenever possible and resorting to foreign technologies only when necessary.
    • This strategic approach reflects a deliberate effort to reduce dependence on external sources, aligning with broader objectives of technological self-sufficiency.
  • Challenges in Indo-Pak Relations and China's Evolving Approach: India grapples with ongoing geopolitical challenges, particularly from Pakistan, which remains steadfast in its decades-old conflict stance.
    • China's evolving policy towards prioritizing domestic technologies mirrors shifts in the global landscape.

Technology Advancements Through Military-University Collaborations: A Historical Context

  • MIT's Impact in World War II: During World War II, the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) emerged as a crucial centre for pioneering research and technological breakthroughs that significantly influenced the war effort.
    • Led by Vannevar Bush, MIT's School of Engineering transitioned to chair the National Defense Research Committee and the Office of Scientific Research and Development in 1939, facilitating seamless collaboration between academia and the military.
    • MIT's contributions during this period were extensive, ranging from radar development for various applications to the creation of the Long-Range Navigation (LORAN) system.
    • This collaboration demonstrated how academic institutions swiftly responded to wartime demands, providing technological solutions with lasting impacts.
  • The Birth of Silicon Valley: The post-World War II era witnessed the continuation of military-university collaborations, notably contributing to the genesis of Silicon Valley.
    • Frank Terman, an MIT doctoral student under Vannevar Bush and later the dean of Stanford's engineering school, played a pivotal role in fostering connections between academia and the military.
    • Terman's influence was instrumental in nurturing Silicon Valley into a global epicentre of technological innovation.
  • Symbiotic Alliance Between Academia and Defense: The historical collaboration between universities and the military underscores the symbiotic relationship between academic research and national defence.
    • These partnerships, forged during critical historical moments, not only drove technological progress but also underscored the vital role of knowledge exchange between academia and the military in fostering strategic innovation.

Rethinking the Value of Global University Rankings

  • Challenges with Ranking Methodologies: Critics often challenge the validity of global university rankings, suggesting they prioritize popularity over genuine educational excellence.
    • Common metrics like peer surveys can introduce biases and may not accurately reflect an institution's academic prowess.
    • Additionally, certain metrics may not capture the full spectrum of educational quality, raising concerns about the reliability of rankings.
  • Limitations in Evaluation Criteria: Global rankings tend to focus heavily on research output and international reputation, neglecting other crucial aspects such as teaching quality.
    • This incomplete assessment overlooks the diverse educational goals and values of institutions, leading to an ideological bias in the rankings.
    • A more comprehensive evaluation framework that considers a broader range of factors is needed to provide a holistic view of educational excellence.
  • Importance of Global Rankings: While facing criticism, global university rankings remain significant in the academic sphere.
    • Many universities worldwide set goals to improve their rankings, using them as benchmarks for management decisions and promotional efforts.
    • Institutions frequently devise strategies and allocate resources based on their standing in these rankings.

 Evaluating India's University Ranking Objectives: A Strategic Necessity

  • Strategies for Enhancement - Government Initiatives Encompass: Selecting and investing in 20 government universities to establish research centres equipped with substantial resources, including extensive research facilities and industry liaison offices.
    • Streamlining resources by consolidating Research Laboratories and integrating independent research facilities into the top 20 government institutions to promote collaborative research endeavours.
    • Redirecting government research funding primarily towards universities, mirroring the approach of established bodies like the U.S. National Institute of Health and National Science Foundation.
    • Promoting corporate-university research partnerships through financial incentives, such as tax incentives for companies engaging in research activities at Indian institutions.
  • Strategic Alliances with Defense Endeavors: The government's intent to collaborate with defence initiatives, as indicated by the proposed Defence Technology Council, underscores the alignment between academic excellence and national security objectives.
    • Establishing strategic alliances with universities can enhance project management efficiency, addressing concerns highlighted by the Comptroller and Auditor General (CAG) regarding timelines in defence projects.

Conclusion

India's National Security Strategy must evolve in response to shifting geopolitics and technological advancements. It is essential to prioritize the elevation of universities to global stature, recognizing the interconnectedness of knowledge, defence, and national security.

Through strategic initiatives that tackle challenges and foster collaboration between academia and government, India can establish itself as a significant player in the ever-changing global security landscape.

 

The Indian government is currently drawing out an AI Mission that may soon head for Cabinet approval and could outlay more than Rs 10,000 crore. (Indian Express)

  • 27 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

To dissuade concerns that Europe is overregulating artificial intelligence (AI), which could stifle innovation in the bloc, the European Commission has released a set of rules to enable start-ups and other businesses to access hardware – such as supercomputers and computing capacity – for them to build large- scale AI models

Context:

  • To address concerns about excessive regulation stifling innovation in Europe, the European Commission has introduced rules allowing startups and businesses to access hardware, like supercomputers, to develop large-scale AI models.
  • This supports the EU's new AI Act, designed to promote trustworthy AI across the region.
  • India is also considering a similar initiative to provide computing capacity for startups, aiming to establish high-capacity data centres through a public-private partnership model.
  • Access to computing power is crucial for building advanced AI systems, alongside innovative algorithms and datasets, especially challenging for smaller businesses to obtain.

What is Artificial Intelligence (AI)?

  • Artificial Intelligence (AI) refers to the simulation of human intelligence processes by machines, particularly computer systems.
  • These processes include learning, reasoning, problem-solving, perception, and language understanding.
  • AI technologies enable machines to analyze large amounts of data, recognize patterns, and make decisions or predictions based on that data.
  • There are several types of AI, including narrow or weak AI, which is designed for specific tasks like speech recognition or playing chess, and general or strong AI, which aims to perform any intellectual task that a human can do.
    • Machine learning, a subset of AI, involves training algorithms to recognise patterns in data and make predictions or decisions without being explicitly programmed to do so.
  • AI has applications across various industries, including healthcare, finance, transportation, and manufacturing.
  • It is used for tasks such as medical diagnosis, fraud detection, autonomous vehicles, and predictive maintenance.
  • As AI technology continues to advance, it holds the potential to revolutionize many aspects of society, improving efficiency, productivity, and decision-making processes.

What is Europe’s AI Innovation Plan?

  • The European Commission has introduced a set of initiatives aimed at assisting European startups and small businesses in creating reliable AI technology.
  • These initiatives encompass various measures to foster innovation among startups, including a proposal to grant special access to supercomputers for AI startups and the wider innovation community. The plan includes:
    • Acquiring, upgrading and operating AI-dedicated supercomputers to enable fast machine learning and training of large general-purpose AI (GPAI) models.
    •  Facilitating access to the AI dedicated supercomputers, contributing to the widening of the use of AI to a large number of public and private users, including start-ups and SMEs.
    •  Supporting the AI startup and research ecosystem in algorithmic development, testing evaluation and validation of large-scale AI models.
    •  Enabling the development of a variety of emerging AI applications based on GPAI models.

How is the EU’s Plan Similar to India’s?

  • The Indian government is currently outlining an AI Mission, which is expected to undergo Cabinet approval soon, with a budget exceeding Rs 10,000 crore.
    • As part of this initiative, the government aims to develop its own 'sovereign AI,' enhance computational capabilities domestically, and provide compute-as-a-service to Indian startups.
    • Capacity building will be pursued both within the government and through a public-private partnership model, emphasizing India’s goal to capitalize on the forthcoming AI boom as a vital economic driver.
  • Overall, the country aims to establish a computing capacity ranging from 10,000 to 30,000 GPUs (graphic processing units) through the PPP model, in addition to 1,000-2,000 GPUs facilitated by the PSU Centre for Development of Advanced Computing (C-DAC).
    • The government is exploring various incentive structures for private companies to establish computing centres in the country, including capital expenditure subsidies, operational expense-based incentives, and a "usage" fee model.
  • The government intends to transform the GPU assembly into a digital public infrastructure (DPI), allowing startups to access its computational capacity at a reduced cost, without having to invest in GPUs, which are typically the largest expense in such operations.

Why is the EU especially enabling AI Innovation?

  • Until now, the most prominent advancements in AI have been spearheaded by American companies like OpenAI and Google, along with emerging ventures such as Perplexity and Anthropic.
  • Europe, which has traditionally prioritized regulating technologies with a focus on human rights, has faced criticism from the industry for potentially overregulating AI even before its widespread adoption across the continent.
    • Unlike the US, where numerous American companies have made significant strides in offering hardware services to businesses, Europe has identified a need to facilitate access to hardware resources for AI development.
  • This move by the European Commission follows the introduction of an AI Act last year, which has faced criticism.
    • The legislation aims to establish safeguards for AI usage within the EU, including clear guidelines for its adoption by law enforcement agencies and provisions empowering consumers to report any perceived violations.
    • Additionally, the AI Act imposes stringent restrictions on facial recognition technology and the use of AI to influence human behaviour, while also outlining severe penalties for companies found in breach of these regulations.
  • Moreover, the legislation stipulates that governments can employ real-time biometric surveillance in public areas only in cases involving serious threats, such as terrorist attacks.

European Commission (EC)

  • The European Commission is the European Union's executive body and represents the interests of Europe as a whole.
    • It drafts proposals for new European laws.
    • It manages the day-to-day business of implementing EU policies and spending EU funds.
  • It is made up of 27 commissioners (one from each member state) and is based in Brussels.
    • Each member state nominates a commissioner, but the nominated candidates must be approved by the European Parliament.
    • The Parliament must also approve the President of the European Commission.
  • The current President of the European Commission is Ursula von der Leyen.
  • Commissioners do not represent their countries. Instead, they have a field of responsibility.
  • To assist the commissioners in the performance of their duties, there is a staff of about 32,000 people employed by the Commission.
    • This staff comes from all of the Member States and includes policy officers, translators, lawyers and researchers.

What does the European Commission do?

  • Legislation – The Commission initiates legislation. It makes proposals for laws that are sent to the European Parliament and Council of the European Union for approval.
  • Upholding EU law – The Commission can take action against businesses or states that are failing to comply with EU law.
  • Policy – The Commission is the executive of the EU. It manages policies and drafts budgets.
  • Representation – The Commission represents the EU in negotiations with other countries or organisations.
  • The Commission meets once a week to adopt proposals, finalise policy papers and make decisions.
    • Decisions are taken by a simple majority vote.

Turkey Finally Backs Sweden’s NATO Bid: Why the Opposition, why it changed its stance (Indian Express)

  • 25 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

Turkey’s parliament ratified Sweden’s Nato membership bid recently, clearing the biggest remaining hurdle to expand the Western military alliance after 20 months of delay.

News Summary:

  • Turkey's parliament ratified Sweden's NATO membership bid recently, clearing the biggest remaining hurdle to expand the Western military alliance after 20 months of delay.
  • Sweden and Finland applied to join in May 2022, following Russia's invasion of Ukraine.
    • The two countries feared for their security.
  • Finland - which has a 1,340km land border with Russia - became a Nato member in April 2023.
  • Turkey had been blocking Sweden's application because it said the country had refused to hand over members of militant groups such as the Kurdistan Workers' Party (PKK).
  • Sweden's bid for membership was finally approved by the Turkish parliament on 23 January.
  • Now, Sweden only needs Hungary's parliament to approve its membership.
  • For a nation to become a member of the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO), the consent of all current member countries is required.
  • Turkey has been a member of NATO since 1952.

Why does Sweden want to join NATO?

  • Sweden has not fought a war in two centuries, staying neutral through the two World Wars and the Cold War.
  • In recent years, while it joined the European Union and collaborated with NATO, it showed no intention of actually joining the military alliance its powerful neighbour, Russia, is hostile to.
  • However, this neutrality had to be abandoned after Russia invaded Ukraine.
  • With public opinion increasingly in favour of joining NATO, both Sweden and Finland applied for membership in 2022.
  • While Finland’s bid was cleared, Sweden ran into stiff opposition from Turkey’s President Recep Tayyip Erdogan and Hungary’s Prime Minister Viktor Orban.
  • Once a country is a NATO member, an attack on its territory is considered an attack on the US-led alliance, and all 31 members are obliged to defend each other.

Why was Turkey opposing Sweden’s bid?

  • Turkey had accused Sweden of going soft on groups it sees as terrorists, such as the Kurdish militant outfit the Kurdistan Workers’ Party (PKK).
    • Quran-burning protests held in Sweden, which its government says are protected under freedom of speech laws, further soured its relationship with Turkey.
  • Erdogan had also linked Turkey’s support to Sweden with the US agreeing to sell 40 F-16 fighter jets to Ankara. While the US had not said the deal would depend on Turkey’s Sweden actions, the sale is expected to go through now.

What will Sweden bring to NATO?

  • Once Sweden becomes a member, almost all of the Baltic Sea coastline, except that in Russia’s control, will become NATO territory.
  • This will provide the alliance with strategic bases close to Russia, make supply lines more streamlined, and make it easier to defend assets in the sea.
  • Sweden’s military, though numerically small, is modern and experienced in past NATO missions. Importantly, it has advanced aircraft and submarine capabilities.

What is NATO?

  • Established in the aftermath of World War II, the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) is an intergovernmental military alliance between 28 European countries and 2 North American countries and is headquartered in Belgium.
  • It implements the North Atlantic Treaty, which is a system of collective security, where its member states agree to mutual defence in response to an attack by any external party.
  • The most recent member to be added was Finland on 4 April 2023.
  • Since its founding on April 4, 1949, the admission of new member states has increased the alliance from the original 12 countries to 30.

Background:

 In the event of a possible attack by Germany, a Treaty of Alliance and Mutual Assistance was signed by France and the United Kingdom in 1947.

  • Later next year, the alliance was expanded to include Belgium, the Netherlands, and Luxembourg, in the form of the Western Union.
  • In 1949, talks for the new military alliance which would include North America resulted in the signing of the North Atlantic Treaty.
  • The Treaty included the members of the Western Union and the United States, Canada, Portugal, Italy, Norway, Denmark and Iceland.
  • In May 1955, West Germany was permitted to rearm militarily, as they joined NATO, which was a major factor in the creation of the Soviet Union-dominated Warsaw Pact, delineating the two opposing sides of the Cold War.
  • In October 1990, East Germany became part of the Federal Republic of Germany and the alliance, and in November 1990, the alliance signed the Treaty on Conventional Armed Forces in Europe (CFE) in Paris with the Soviet Union.
  • The treaty mandated specific military reductions across Europe, which continued after the collapse of the Warsaw Pact in February 1991 and the dissolution of the Soviet Union, which removed the de facto main adversaries of NATO.
  • The Treaty was largely dormant until the Korean War initiated the establishment of NATO to implement it, by means of an integrated military structure, which included the formation of Supreme Headquarters Allied Powers Europe in 1951, adopting the Western Union's military structures and plans.

 What is the Purpose of NATO?

  • According to NATO, its purpose is to guarantee the freedom and security of its members through political and military means.
    • By political, it means the organisation promotes democratic values and enables members to consult and cooperate on defence and security-related issues to solve problems, build trust and, in the long run, prevent conflict.
    • Militarily, NATO says it is committed to the peaceful resolution of disputes, and if diplomatic efforts fail, it has the power to undertake crisis-management operations, under the collective defence clause - Article 5 of the Washington Treaty or under a United Nations mandate, alone or in cooperation with other countries.
  • Article 5 of the North Atlantic treaty, requiring member states to come to the aid of any member state subject to an armed attack, was invoked for the first and only time after the September 11 attacks, after which troops were deployed to Afghanistan.

The Role of NATO in the Russia-Ukraine Conflict:

 Among the 30 countries in the organisation, Ukraine is not a member, even though it has included three former Soviet republics -- the Baltic states of Estonia, Latvia, and Lithuania.

  • In 2008, NATO appeared to open the door to membership to two more former Soviet republics when its heads of government declared that Georgia and Ukraine "will become members of NATO."
  • Neither has formally received eventual membership, with a lack of consensus among members.
    • Russian President Vladimir Putin demanded that Ukraine never join the alliance as he seeks to limit NATO’s presence in Eastern Europe.
  • Days before Putin announced a military operation in Ukraine in February 2022, he in a televised address linked the current crisis directly to Russia's Nato demands, which include a guarantee that the organisation stop expanding to the East and pull back its infrastructure from Eastern European countries that joined after the Cold War.
  • If the conflict goes beyond Ukraine and impacts Nato members, it could lead the organisation to invoke its mutual self-defence clause, i.e.,  Article 5 of the Nato treaty.

Why Punjab moved SC against the expansion of BSF jurisdiction (Indian Express)

  • 24 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

The Supreme Court is set to hear the dispute over the expansion of the Border Security Force (BSF) jurisdiction in Punjab.

Context:

  • The Supreme Court will hear petitions filed by the Punjab government against the Centre’s notification expanding the jurisdiction of Border Security Forces (BSF) to 50 km from the international border in Punjab.
  • This comes after the Centre in 2021 decided to expand the BSF’s jurisdiction to undertake search, seizure and arrest within a larger 50-kilometre stretch from the International Border compared to the earlier limit of 15 kilometres.
  • The Centre had also decided to decrease the BSF’s area of operation in Gujarat from 80 kilometres from the border to just 50 kilometres.

What is the Border Security Force (BSF)?

  • The BSF was established on 1 December 1965 after the India-Pakistan war.
  • With a strength of about 2.65 lakh personnel, it has 192 operational battalions and deployed along the Pakistan and Bangladesh borders.
  • It is the country’s largest border force and one of the Central Armed Police Forces of the Union of India under the administrative control of the Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA).
    • The other forces include the Indo-Tibetan Border Police (ITBP), the Sashastra Seema Bal (SSB) and the Assam Rifles, Central Industrial Security Force (CISF), Central Reserve Police Force (CRPF) and National Security Guards (NSG).
  • It also contributes dedicated services to the UN peacekeeping Mission by sending a large contingent of its trained manpower every year
  • The BSF is meant to secure India’s borders with its neighbouring nations and is empowered to arrest, search and seize under a number of laws, such as the Criminal Procedure Code, the Passports Act, the Passport (Entry into India) Act, and the NDPS Act, to name a few.

Why was the BSF Jurisdiction Extended?

  • Section 139(1) of the BSF Act allows the central government, through an order, to designate an area “within the local limits of such area adjoining the borders of India” where members of the BSF can exercise powers to prevent offences under any Acts that the central government may specify.
    • Prior to the notification issued in October 2021, the BSF could exercise its powers within 15 kilometres of the border in Punjab, West Bengal and Assam.
    • The Centre expanded this to within 50 kilometres of the border.
  • The notification states that, within this larger 50-kilometre jurisdiction, the BSF can only exercise powers under the Criminal Procedure Code, the Passport (Entry into India) Act and the Passports Act.
    • For other central legislations, the 15-km limit remains.
  • This expansion was in response to the increased use of drones and Unmanned Aerial Vehicles, which have long-range capabilities and enable surveillance and the smuggling of arms and fake currency.
    • The ‘menace of cattle smuggling’ and smugglers often seek refuge outside BSF jurisdiction.
  • The centre also claimed that the notification makes the BSF jurisdiction uniform across states, as the 50-kilometre limit was already in place in Rajasthan.
    • The same notification reduced the jurisdiction in Gujarat from 80 km to 50 km.

Why Punjab Challenged This Act?

  • The state of Punjab filed an ‘original suit’ against the central government in the Supreme Court in December 2021 and alleged that the extension of the territorial jurisdiction of BSF encroaches upon its own constitutional jurisdiction.
    • The Supreme Court has ‘original jurisdiction’ in disputes between the central government and states under Article 131 of the Constitution, which means cases of this kind can only be heard for the first time at the SC “to the exclusion of any other court”.
  • The Punjab government claimed that expanding the jurisdiction of the BSF would compromise the state’s exclusive powers to legislate on matters involving the police and public order.
    • These powers are provided in Entries 1 and 2 of the State List under Article 246 of the Constitution.
    • They also claimed that the notification was issued without consulting with any of the states concerned.

How did Other States Respond?

  • The states at the time had decried the move as an “irrational decision”, a “direct attack on federalism” and an attempt to “interfere through Central agencies”.
  • Punjab and West Bengal denounced the move with the respective state Assemblies even passing resolutions against the Centre’s decision.

What are the Challenges Associated with Expanding Jurisdiction?

  • Public Order vs. Security of State: Maintaining public order and policing, signifying peace, safety, and tranquillity, falls within the purview of State Governments (Entry 1 and Entry 2 of the State list, respectively).
    • However, if a severe public disorder poses a threat to the security or defence of the State or the nation itself (Entry 1 of the Union list), it becomes a matter of concern for the Union Government as well.
  • Federalism Strain: Issuing notifications without state government concurrence may be seen as an infringement on state powers.
    • The Punjab Government argues that such notifications amount to the Centre encroaching under the pretext of security or development.
  • Impact on BSF Operations: The extension of jurisdiction to policing in the hinterland contradicts the role of a border guarding force.
    • This shift could potentially undermine the BSF's ability to fulfil its primary duty of guarding the international border.

Issues Specific to Punjab:

  • Overlapping Powers: The extended 50 km jurisdiction grants concurrent power with state police over every cognizable offence under the Indian Penal Code (IPC).
    • In a relatively small state like Punjab, this extension encompasses all major cities.
  • In other states like Gujarat and Rajasthan, where the extension might be considered, Gujarat has substantial marshland, and extending jurisdiction there might be reasonable as it doesn't encompass major urban centres.
    • Similarly, in Rajasthan, the presence of a desert reduces the impact of jurisdiction extension.

Way Ahead

  • Emphasis on State Consent: Considering the security dynamics in India's vicinity, the existing collaboration between Central armed forces and State civil authorities remains suitable.
    • Nonetheless, consulting with the State Government before deploying armed forces by the Union Government is recommended, whenever possible.
  • State Empowerment: Each State Government, in coordination with the Union Government, should devise both short-term and long-term strategies to fortify its Armed Police.
    • The aim is to achieve substantial self-reliance in managing Armed Police matters, necessitating the Central armed forces' intervention only during exceptionally severe disturbances.
  • Regional Collaboration: Neighboring States can collaboratively establish a framework for utilizing each other's Armed Police in times of necessity through consensus.
    • The Zonal Council stands out as the most apt platform for States within a zone to reach a consensus and formulate such arrangements.

Tax contribution by States needs to be revisited (The Hindu)

  • 23 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?`

During a NITI Aayog meeting chaired by the Prime Minister, Chief Ministers voiced their apprehensions regarding the declining revenues of the states.

Context:

  • The Finance Commission holds a crucial role in suggesting the distribution formula for States' allotment of Union tax revenue.
  • The formulation has witnessed changes over time in terms of the inclusion and significance of different factors, with tax contribution emerging as a central point of debate.
  • It is essential to underscore the historical context, principles of equity and efficiency, and the repercussions of integrating the Goods and Services Tax (GST) regime into the distribution formula

What is the Finance Commission?

  • The Finance Commission is a constitutional body responsible for providing recommendations on the distribution of tax revenues among the Union and the States, as well as among the States themselves.
  • The President constitutes the Finance Commission under Article 280 of the Constitution.
    • It is established at the end of every fifth year, or earlier if deemed necessary.
  • Qualifications and Selection: Parliament, through legislation, determines the qualifications for Commission members and the selection process.
    • The Finance Commission (Miscellaneous Provisions) Act, 1951, addresses these aspects.
  • Mandate: The Commission's duties include making recommendations to the President on the distribution of tax proceeds between the Union and States, principles guiding grants-in-aid, measures to enhance State Consolidated Funds, and any other financial matters referred by the President in the interest of sound finance.
  • Composition: The Commission comprises a Chairman and four members appointed by the President.
  • Member Qualifications: The Chairman is selected from individuals with experience in public affairs, while the four other members are chosen from those with qualifications such as being former or eligible High Court Judges, and possessing expertise in government finances, administration, or economics.
  • Tenure: Each member serves a specified term, as determined by the President, and is eligible for reappointment.
  • Non-Binding Recommendations: The recommendations of the Finance Commission are advisory and not binding on the government.

The History and Evolution of the Distribution Formula:

  • The historical development of the Finance Commission's distribution formula has played a pivotal role in shaping India's fiscal federalism.
  • Initially focusing on personal income tax and Union excise duties, the formula underwent substantial changes with the introduction of the 10th Finance Commission, reflecting a more nuanced understanding of fiscal relations between the Union and States.
  • Expansion of Revenue Streams with the 10th Finance Commission: The introduction of the 10th Finance Commission marked a significant transformation as all Central tax revenues were consolidated, expanding the range of revenue streams in the distribution formula.
    • This departure from the earlier approach acknowledged the necessity for a comprehensive framework to address the intricate fiscal dynamics among the States.
  • Equity and Efficiency as Guiding Principles: The distribution formula shifted its focus to prioritise equity and efficiency.
    • Equity considerations aimed to rectify imbalances by allocating larger shares to revenue-scarce and high-expenditure States, while the efficiency principle rewarded states demonstrating proficiency in revenue collection and spending practices.
    • This departure from the earlier needs-based criteria recognized the importance of incentivizing states to enhance fiscal capacities for the country's overall economic well-being.
  • Dynamic Interplay of Equity and Efficiency: The ongoing normative debate within the Indian fiscal framework is exemplified by the dynamic interplay between equity and efficiency in successive Finance Commissions' recommendations.
    • Striking the right balance between these principles remains a complex task, and the formula has evolved to reflect the changing priorities of fiscal federalism.
  • Inclusion of Various Indicators: While early Finance Commissions incorporated indicators such as population, per capita income, and area in the distribution formula, a notable shift towards a more comprehensive and consolidated approach has occurred since the 10th Finance Commission.
    • The convergence of income tax and Union excise duties into a single formula from the 10th Finance Commission onward aimed to streamline the approach and ensure consistency across different revenue sources.

Evaluating Efficiency Indicators in the Distribution Formula:

  • Tax contribution serves as an efficiency indicator, offering insights into a state's developmental level and economic structure.
    • Historically, it has been assigned a relatively modest weight, ranging from 10% to 20% within the distribution formula.
  • In the early commissions, population, a key indicator of expenditure needs, played a dominant role, commanding weights between 80% and 90%.
  • From the year 2000 onward, the distribution formula incorporated tax effort and fiscal discipline as efficiency indicators, each carrying approximately 15% weight.
    • However, these indicators encountered challenges stemming from their instability, influenced by discretionary tax policies and unexpected shifts in tax bases.

The Reasons to Consider Petrol Consumption and GST in the Distribution Formula as Efficiency Measures:

  • Petroleum Consumption as a Supplementary Indicator: In addition to GST, considering petroleum consumption as an efficiency indicator adds depth to the formula.
    • Union excise duty and sales tax on petroleum products, excluded from GST, significantly contribute to the national exchequer.
    • The stable and consistent nature of relative shares of petroleum consumption across states makes it an attractive supplementary indicator for assessing a state's contribution to specific tax categories.
  • Stability and Uniformity in GST Contributions: In contrast to previous indicators, GST provides a unified tax system that minimizes variations in tax efforts among states.
    • While the absolute amount of GST revenue generated may vary based on the size and economic structure of each state, the relative contributions remain stable over time.
    • This stability is crucial for establishing a fair and consistent measure of a state's efficiency, particularly in revenue collection.
  • Accurate Reflection of State's Tax Base through GST Revenue: The implementation of the Goods and Services Tax (GST) has transformed India's taxation landscape, introducing a consumption-based destination tax system that is equally divided between State and Central governments.
    • This structure offers a unique opportunity for a precise estimation of a state's tax contribution.
    • The inherent symmetry in GST ensures that the State GST accrual mirrors the Central GST accrual to the Union government from that state, making GST a stable and reliable measure of a state's tax base.
  • Exclusion of Discretionary Policies in GST: One significant advantage of incorporating GST into the distribution formula is its insulation from discretionary tax policies.
    • Unlike tax effort, which can be influenced by state-specific policy decisions, GST reflects the accurate tax base of a state, unaffected by varying policy choices.
    • This characteristic makes GST a more objective and reliable indicator of a state's contribution to the national exchequer.
  • Linkage to Income Levels: A compelling rationale for including both GST and petroleum consumption lies in their indirect reflection of the relative differences in the incomes accrued to the residents of a state.
    • Consumption patterns are inherently tied to income levels, making the shares of CGST and Union excise duty accurate proxies for assessing both personal and corporate income tax contributions.
  • Proposal for Weightage Increase: Given the fair and accurate nature of GST and petroleum consumption as efficiency metrics, there is a strong proposal for the 16th Finance Commission to assign a more substantial weightage to these indicators.
    • A weightage of at least 33% has been suggested, considering the significant role these indicators play in reflecting a state's contribution to the national exchequer.

Conclusion

The transformation of the Finance Commission's distribution formula has moved from a reliance on population-centric indicators to embracing efficiency measures. The introduction of the GST regime, coupled with stable indicators such as petroleum consumption, offers an opportune moment to reassess the distribution formula. As the 16th Finance Commission contemplates the next formula, assigning appropriate weight to tax contribution as an efficiency indicator can guarantee a fair and accurate portrayal of states' contributions to the national exchequer.

WTO dispute settlement body revival faces delays over country differences: GTRI (Indian Express)

  • 22 Jan 2024

 

Why is it in the News?

Reinstating a fully functional WTO dispute settlement body to resolve trade disputes between countries could take longer than expected as there continue to be wide differences between developed and developing countries over the issue, a GTRI report said recently.

Context:

  • According to the GTRI report, an economic think tank, restoring a fully functional WTO dispute settlement body may take longer due to significant differences between developed and developing countries on the issue.
  • This comes as the 164-member World Trade Organization (WTO) will gather next month in Abu Dhabi for the 13th ministerial conference (MC) to resolve different issues such as reforms in dispute settlement mechanisms, agriculture-related matters, etc.

Highlights of the GTRI Report:

  • Escalating Protectionism: The absence of a functional dispute settlement body has fueled a surge in protectionist measures.
    • Since 2017, the US has obstructed the appointment of new judges to the WTO's seven-member appellate court, citing perceived harm to its interests.
  • Delicate Balancing Act: Addressing India's appeals for an effective appellate body, special and differential treatment (S&DT) provisions, and fairness must be delicately balanced with the concerns of other members.
    • This includes considerations such as transparency and legal certainty, demanding significant compromise and negotiation.
  • Complex Consensus Building: Reforming the dispute settlement system proves challenging as developed and developing nations hold divergent priorities and concerns.
    • Achieving a consensus requires navigating through intricate negotiations.
  • Disproportionate Impact on the US: The proper functioning of the WTO Appellate Body disproportionately affects the US, given that over a quarter of all WTO disputes involve challenges to US laws or measures.

What is the Global Trade Research Initiative (GTRI)?

  • Global Trade Research Initiative (GTRI) is a research Group focused on Climate Change, technology and trade
  • GTRI aims to create high-quality and jargon-free outputs for governments and industry from the perspective of development and poverty reduction.
  • Mr Ajay Srivastava is the Founder of GTRI.

What is the World Trade Organization?

  • The World Trade Organization (WTO) is an international organization that deals with the rules of trade between countries.
  • It was founded in 1995 as a successor to the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), which, since 1948, had governed trade rules until the establishment of the WTO.
  • The WTO describes its principal function as being to provide a forum for its members to negotiate on trade issues.
  • It operates a body of rules in the form of WTO agreements.
  • It provides a dispute settlement mechanism (DSM) to resolve disagreements over the rules between members.
  • The WTO has many roles:
    • It operates a global system of trade rules, acts as a forum for negotiating trade agreements, settles trade disputes between its members and it supports the needs of developing countries.
  • All major decisions are made by the WTO's member governments:
    • either by ministers (who usually meet at least every two years) or by their ambassadors or delegates (who meet regularly in Geneva).
  • Decision-making:
    • All major decisions within the WTO are made by its member governments.
    • The top decision-making body is the Ministerial Conference, which typically convenes every two years.
    • Day-to-day decisions are overseen by the General Council, which meets regularly in Geneva.
  • Membership
    • The WTO has over 160 members, representing 98% of world trade.
    • Joining the WTO requires aligning economic and trade policies with its rules and negotiating entry terms with the existing membership.
  • Budget:
    • The WTO derives most of the income for its annual budget from contributions by its members.
    • These contributions are based on a formula that takes into account each member's share of international trade.
  • Director-General:
    • Ngozi Okonjo-Iweala is the seventh Director-General of the WTO.
    • She took office on 1 March 2021, becoming the first woman and the first African to serve as Director-General.
    • Her term of office will expire on 31 August 2025.
  • The primary purpose of the WTO is to open trade for the benefit of all.

About the WTO Dispute Settlement Body (DSB):

  • The WTO Dispute Settlement Body (DSB) deals with disputes between WTO members.
  • It was created in Article 2 of the Dispute Settlement Understanding (DSU) administers World Trade Organization (WTO) dispute settlement proceedings.
  • The DSB consists of all WTO members, usually represented by Ambassadors or equivalent.
  • It makes decisions on trade disputes between governments that are adjudicated by the Organization.
  • The DSB has the sole authority to establish “Panels” of experts to consider the case and to accept or reject the Panels’ findings or the results of an appeal.
  • The DSB uses a special decision procedure known as "reverse consensus" or "consensus against" that makes it almost certain that the Panel recommendations in a dispute will be accepted.
  • The process requires that the recommendations of the Panel should be adopted "unless" there is a consensus of the members against adoption.
  • The DSB monitors the implementation of the rulings and recommendations and has the power to authorize retaliation when a country does not comply with a ruling.

Why is the WTO Dispute Settlement Body (DSB) Inoperative?

  • The WTO's dispute settlement system faces a critical challenge as its appeals mechanism is currently non-operational.
  • The root cause lies in the United States objection to the appointment of new judges to the Appellate Body, citing concerns about judicial overreach.
  • Consequently, a significant number of panel reports are left in limbo, with appeals going unanswered and disputes lingering without resolution.
  • This impasse creates a formidable obstacle for WTO members seeking to enforce their obligations through complaints against measures they perceive as violations.

Conclusion

The WTO's dispute resolution mechanism grapples with a formidable crisis, rendering it largely nonfunctional due to the U.S.'s opposition to new Appellate Body judges. This impasse leaves disputes unresolved, severely limiting members' ability to enforce obligations. As the organization grapples with this crisis, finding a resolution becomes paramount to restore the efficacy of international trade agreements and uphold the WTO's core principles.

The problem with India’s science management (The Hindu)

  • 20 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

As India remoulds its scientific establishment, the utility of scientists being given administrative tasks needs to be questioned.

Context:

  • Sustained economic progress which can satisfy national ambition is invariably fuelled by scientific advances translated into deployable technologies.
  • This has been the inevitable global experience since the onset of the Industrial Revolution.
  • The government is overhauling India’s science establishment, which includes setting up the new National Research Foundation (NRF) and restructuring the Defence Research and Development Organisation (DRDO).
  • In this scenario, a frank assessment of the current administrative ability to simultaneously optimise Indian science’s efficiency and resilience is necessary.

What are the Problems with India’s Scientific Advancement?

India has a long and rich history of scientific innovation. However, in recent years, the country's science management has come under increasing scrutiny. There are several problems with India's science management including:

  • Lack of Funding in Research and Development (R&D): One of the most pressing issues is a lack of funding.
    • India spends a relatively small percentage of its GDP on research and development, compared to other developed countries.
      • For instance, India allocates only about 0.7% of its GDP to R&D, a considerably lower figure compared to global leaders like the United States (3.5%) and China (2.4%).
    • This lack of funding has led to a brain drain of talented scientists, who are leaving India in search of better opportunities.
  • Budgetary Challenges: The modest commitment to R&D stems from broader budget constraints, competing priorities, and a historical emphasis on immediate socio-economic needs.
    • This presents a challenge in fostering a robust scientific ecosystem on a limited budget.
  • Lack of Coordination: Another problem with India's science management is a lack of coordination.
    • There are many different government agencies and departments that are involved in science and technology, but there is often a lack of communication and cooperation between them.
    • This can lead to duplication of effort and a waste of resources.
  • Inadequacies in Budget Allocation by Scientific Administration: The current scientific administration struggles to identify and invest in high-impact projects.
    • For instance, in 2022, the Indian Space Research Organisation ranked eighth in space launches, lagging in key technologies.
    • Similar setbacks are evident in nuclear energy, genomics, robotics, and artificial intelligence.
  • Lack of Strategic Planning and Execution: Beyond expenditure, the challenge extends to strategic planning and execution of scientific projects.
    • Failure to adapt swiftly to emerging technologies and allocate resources judiciously has resulted in India falling behind in crucial fields.
  • Inconsistent Long-Term Funding: A major concern is the absence of consistent long-term funding for vital projects, especially when faced with occasional setbacks.
    • Steady funding, despite occasional failures, is crucial for a resilient and effective scientific management system.
  • Finally, India's science management is often criticized for being too bureaucratic. The process of getting funding for research projects can be long and complex, and it can be difficult for scientists to get the support they need to succeed.

The Role of Senior Scientists in India’s Science Administration:

  • Diverse Responsibilities Impacting Focus: Senior scientists in India often juggle multiple responsibilities, including academic pursuits, administrative duties, and leadership positions.
    • This dispersion of focus can lead to inefficiencies and a lack of dedicated attention to critical administrative tasks.
  • Lack of Administrative Skills: The assumption that successful scientists can seamlessly transition into effective administrators overlooks the distinct skills required for scientific work versus administration.
    • Managing institutions, allocating resources, and making organizational decisions demand specific skills not necessarily possessed by accomplished scientists.
  • Insufficient Training for Administrative Roles: Inadequate training makes it challenging for scientists to excel in administrative roles.
    • Tasks like metric selection, conflict resolution, and setting priorities require skills not inherently developed through scientific training.
    • Administration involves translating policy into outcomes, a skill not typically prioritized in scientific training.
  • Conflicts of Interest and Quality Control Issues: The dual roles of scientists as academics and administrators can result in conflicts of interest within institutions.
    • Academic rivalries, bureaucratic challenges, and compromised quality control may emerge, leading to issues like plagiarism, unethical publication practices, and compromised scientific outcomes.
  • Nationwide Transfer System Absence: The absence of a nationwide transfer system for scientists and science administrators exacerbates issues such as competition and egotism.
    • The lack of mobility within the system can contribute to internal divisions and hinder the progress of scientific careers and projects.
  • Internal Control Challenges: Allowing individuals within the system to regulate it can lead to clear drawbacks, impacting the impartiality and effectiveness of science administration in India.

Challenges in India's Science Administration: A Historical Perspective

  • Concentration of High-End Equipment: Economic constraints post-independence led India to concentrate on high-end scientific equipment, notably in institutions like the IITs.
    • This concentration birthed gatekeepers, controlling access to critical resources and establishing a hierarchical structure where a few institutions wielded disproportionate influence.
  • Gatekeepers and Institutional Captures Concept: Over time, these gatekeepers solidified their positions, accumulating power, government support, and institutional control.
    • This system created an environment where young scientists navigated a complex web of influence, paying tributes to those controlling vital resources.
  • Impact on Scientific Careers: The gatekeeping system not only influenced resource access but also shaped career trajectories.
    • The nexus between institutional power and individual careers became pivotal, with appointments, awards, and international recognition often tied to maintaining favourable relations with gatekeepers.
  • Normalization of Unethical Practices: The gatekeeping system has normalized unethical practices within Indian science.
    • High plagiarism rates, paid publications in questionable journals, and undisclosed dealings for government funding have become ingrained, compromising the ethical standards of scientific research.
  • Stifling Genuine Scientific Outcomes: This erosion of ethical standards doesn't just compromise research quality but stifles genuine scientific outcomes.
    • Scientists in conflict with this system face hurdles, hindering promising careers and perpetuating a culture where personal connections often outweigh merit.

A Comparative Analysis of the U.S. Model and Indian Science Administration:

  • U.S. Model: In the U.S., scientists chosen for administrative roles are identified early in their careers and undergo targeted training for managerial tasks.
    • The emphasis is on maintaining a distinct separation between scientific pursuits and administrative responsibilities.
  • Indian Scenario: In contrast, India's science administration traditionally involves senior scientists taking up administrative roles without a clear separation between scientific and administrative functions.
    • This integrated approach poses challenges, as the skill sets needed for effective scientific research often differ significantly from those crucial for efficient administration.

Conclusion

As India pursues economic and strategic progress, challenges in science management hinder its research and development, causing a lag in innovation compared to other developed nations. To remedy this, increasing funding for research and development is crucial, along with enhancing coordination among government agencies and streamlining the funding process for research projects. By addressing these issues, India has the potential to emerge as a global leader in science and technology, bringing substantial benefits to its economy and society.

Resistance to medicines on the rise, Govt urges docs to mention reason when prescribing antibiotics (Indian Express)

  • 19 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

With antimicrobial resistance on the rise, the Union Health Ministry has urged doctors to write down the exact reason when prescribing antibiotics.

New Summary:

  • The Union Health Ministry urged all doctors in medical colleges and medical associations to make it a mandatory practice to "write indication/reason/justification" while prescribing antibiotics.
  • The Director General of Health Services also appealed to all pharmacists to strictly implement Schedule H and H1 of the Drugs and Cosmetics Rules and stop the over-the-counter sale of antibiotics.
  • Antimicrobials are listed under Schedule H and H1 of the Drugs and Cosmetics Act, both of which are categories of medicines that cannot be sold without a prescription.

What is Antimicrobial Resistance?

  • According to the World Health Organisation (WHO), antimicrobial resistance occurs when bacteria, viruses, fungi and parasites change over time and no longer respond to medicines.
  • This makes infections harder to treat, increasing the risk of disease spread, severe illness and death.
    • As a result, the medicines become ineffective and infections persist in the body, increasing the risk of spreading to others.
  • AMR affects countries in all regions and at all income levels.
    • Its drivers and consequences are exacerbated by poverty and inequality, and low- and middle-income countries are most affected as per WHO.
  • Currently, AMR is one of the top global public health threats facing humanity.
    • It is estimated that bacterial AMR was directly responsible for 1.27 million global deaths in 2019 and 4.95 million deaths were associated with drug-resistant infections.
  • According to the Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR), 1.25 million lives were lost to drug resistance in 2019.
  • India has one of the highest rates of antimicrobial resistance worldwide.
    • Despite being prescription drugs, antibiotics are commonly available over-the-counter (OTC) at retail pharmacies.
  • In a recent survey, conducted by the National Centre for Disease Control (NCDC) under the Union Health Ministry, over half of the antibiotics prescribed in the country cause antimicrobial resistance.
  • Treatment failures also lead to longer periods of infectivity and the prohibitively high cost of second-line drugs may result in failure to treat these diseases in many individuals.

Scenarios in Which Antimicrobials are Most Commonly Misused?

  • There are two common scenarios in which antimicrobials are misused or overused even by doctors.
    • One is when they cannot make a diagnosis on whether an infection is caused by a bacteria or virus and prescribe antibiotics to err on the side of caution.
    • Two, when they know it is a bacterial infection but want to avoid secondary infection.
      • This is where antibiotics can be conserved because very few people get such secondary bacterial infections.
  • In the case of a serious patient, who is admitted to the hospital, broad-spectrum antibiotics may be prescribed for 48 hours, during which they can be tested for which pathogen is causing the infection.
    • The antibiotics needed to be switched after that.
  • Prescription for antimicrobials before and after a procedure or surgery is another way that antibiotics are commonly overused.
    • Just a single dose of antibiotic 60 to 120 minutes before surgery is enough to prevent surgical site infections.
  • However, doctors end up prescribing antibiotics for seven to 14 days.
    • If proper sterilization of equipment, and preparation of the surgical site are done, infections cannot happen.
    • Shaving the surgical site before surgery should be avoided because it can lead to abrasions that can get infected

The Result of Antimicrobial Overuse and Misuse?

  • Common infections are not curable anymore.
  • Tuberculosis and urinary tract infections have become multi-drug resistant.
  • In hospitals, infections are resulting in longer treatment times with the use of costlier and more toxic antibiotics.
    • Despite all efforts and successful surgeries, people are dying

Factors contributing to Antimicrobial Resistance (AMR):

  • Unnecessary Prescriptions: In many cases, antibiotics are prescribed when they are not necessary or are not used correctly.
    • This can lead to the survival and proliferation of resistant bacteria.
  • Agricultural use: The use and overuse of antimicrobials in agriculture, including to promote growth and prevent disease in livestock, is also a major contributor to the development and spread of AMR.
  • Selective pressure: In the presence of antimicrobials, microbes that carry resistance genes can survive, replicate, and quickly dominate the microbial population.
  • Mutation: Rapid microbial reproduction allows for swift-evolution, and mutations during replication may aid individual microbes in surviving antimicrobial exposure.
  • Inappropriate use: Unnecessary and injudicious use of antibiotic fixed dose combinations may lead to the emergence of bacterial strains resistant to multiple antibiotics.
  • State of the Environment: There is growing evidence that the environment plays a key role in the development, transmission and spread of AMR. Its proliferation is linked to the triple planetary crisis of climate change, nature and biodiversity loss, pollution and waste.
    • For example, higher temperatures, storms and floods can fuel the spread of bacterial, viral, parasitic, fungal and vector-borne diseases.
    • Severe weather events can also cause wastewater and sewage to overwhelm treatment plants, allowing untreated sewage rich in antimicrobial-resistant microbes to contaminate surrounding communities.
    • As well, wastewater laced with medicines, including that from animal production facilities, hospitals and pharmaceutical companies, can feed drug resistance.

Measures Taken by the Government of India to Address AMR:

  • National Action Plan on AMR: The National Action Plan on Containment of Antimicrobial Resistance (NAP-AMR) was launched in 2017.
    • Emphasis is placed on a One Health approach, involving various stakeholder ministries/departments.
  • AMR Surveillance and Research Network (AMRSN): ICMR has set up the AMR Surveillance and Research Network (AMRSN) comprising 30 tertiary care hospitals, both private and government.
    • Its purpose is to generate evidence and capture trends and patterns of drug-resistant infections in the country.
  • Research and International Collaboration: Initiatives by ICMR aim to develop new drugs and medicines through international collaborations.
    • This is intended to strengthen medical research in the field of AMR.
  • Red Line Campaign: The Union health ministry initiated the "Red Line Campaign."
    • It urges people not to use medicines marked with a red vertical line, including antibiotics, without a doctor’s prescription.
    •  The campaign aims to discourage unnecessary prescription and over-the-counter sales of antibiotics, addressing drug resistance for diseases like TB, malaria, urinary tract infections, and HIV.

Way Forward

  • Antimicrobials have saved countless lives and are essential to modern medicine but we need to use them more judiciously.
  • Healthcare professionals should only prescribe antibiotics when necessary and at the right dosage and duration.
  • The use and overuse of antibiotics in agriculture must also be limited.
  • Countries must adopt the One Health approach, which recognizes that the health of people, animals, plants and the environment are interdependent.
  • Preventative measures, such as improving water, sanitation and hygiene, as well as putting in place strong international and national regulatory frameworks to enforce controls on the sale and distribution of antibiotics, will go a long way in reducing AMR.

Conclusion

AMR is a global problem; therefore, international cooperation among nations is essential. Developing multi-stakeholder national action plans is key. Countries must also work together on strategies, information sharing and surveillance of antimicrobial use and resistance. However, fixing the AMR crisis is not just dependent on governments alone. Pharmaceutical companies, the chemical industry, regulators, municipal governments, human and animal healthcare professionals and students, scientists and the public all have a role to play.

How the legal debate over sub-categorisation among SCs has evolved over the years (Indian Express)

  • 19 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

A seven-judge constitution bench headed by Chief Justice of India D Y Chandrachud will start to hear the case on the sub-categorisation among Scheduled Castes (SCs) from next week.

News Summary:

  • The Union government has established a five-member committee of Secretaries, led by the Cabinet Secretary.
  • The committee is tasked with evaluating and devising an equitable approach for the distribution of benefits, programs, and initiatives to the most disadvantaged communities among the 1,200 Scheduled Castes across the nation.
    • These communities have often been overshadowed by relatively more advanced and dominant ones.

Key aspects of the committee include:

  • Purpose: The committee will focus solely on strategies such as special initiatives and directing existing schemes toward marginalized communities.
  • Mandate: It strictly refrains from delving into matters of reservation or determining the SC quota for employment and education, as these issues are considered sub-judice.
  • Composition: The committee comprises Secretaries from the Home Ministry, Law Ministry, Tribal Affairs Ministry, and Social Justice Ministry.

About Schedule Caste (SC):

  • Scheduled castes are those castes/races in the country that suffer from extreme social, educational and economic backwardness arising out of the age-old practice of untouchability and certain others on account of lack of infrastructure facilities and geographical isolation, and who need special consideration for safeguarding their interests and for their accelerated socio-economic development.
  • These communities were notified as Scheduled Castes as per provisions contained in Clause 1 of Article 341 of the Constitution.
  • Article 341 of the Indian Constitution grants the President the authority to declare certain castes and classes as Scheduled Castes in a state or union territory.
    • It also empowers Parliament to include or exclude any caste or tribe from this list.
  • Article 342 of the Constitution defines "Scheduled Castes" as castes, races, tribes, or parts of, or groups within such castes, races, or tribes as deemed under Article 341.

What is the Sub Categorisation of Caste?

  • Sub Categorisation of Caste involves the additional classification of broader caste groups into sub-groups, considering various criteria.
  • The call for Caste Sub-Categorization has emerged as certain castes and communities aim for acknowledgement and specific privileges based on distinctive characteristics, historical backgrounds, or socio-economic status.
  • This approach aims to acknowledge and address the diversity within larger caste groups, targeting specific sub-groups perceived as socially and economically disadvantaged for more tailored benefits.

The Legal Aspect of Caste Sub-Categorization:

  • Over the past two decades, several states, including Punjab, Bihar, and Tamil Nadu, have attempted to introduce state-level reservation laws to sub-categorize Scheduled Castes (SCs).
    • However, all these plans are currently stuck in the courts as the Supreme Court forms a larger Constitution Bench to make a decision.
  • E. V. Chinnaiah v State of Andhra Pradesh (2004): In this case, the apex court determined that once a community is included in the Presidential List for Scheduled Castes under Article 341 of the Constitution, they become part of a single, larger class of people for reservation purposes.
    • The Bench emphasised that the state lacked the legislative power to create sub-classifications within this single class, as it would violate the Right to Equality.
    • According to the Constitution, only Parliament can make these lists, and the President can notify them.
  • In 2020, another Supreme Court bench, consisting of five members, in the Davinder Singh case unanimously declared that sub-categorization is constitutionally valid and suggested that a larger constitutional bench rule on the matter.

Sub-Categorization of Scheduled Castes (SCs):

  • In the Telangana Assembly election, PM Modi pledged to address the demand for sub-categorization of Scheduled Castes (SCs).
    • The Madiga community, the most populous among SC communities in Telangana, raised this concern, asserting that their representation share was being overshadowed by another SC community, the Malas.
  • Since 1994, the Madiga community has advocated for the sub-categorization of SCs, leading to the establishment of the Justice P. Ramachandra Raju Commission in 1996 and a National Commission in 2007.
    • Both commissions concluded that there are potential ways to resolve this issue.
  • Currently, a seven-judge Constitution Bench of the Supreme Court is gearing up to commence hearings on this matter.
    • The Supreme Court will determine whether sub-categorization among SCs and Scheduled Tribes is permissible.
    • The focus of the hearing is on the constitutionality of sub-categorization among SCs for breaking up reservations in jobs and education set aside for them.
  • Simultaneously, the government panel will explore "other ways to address their grievances.

Debate Over Sub-Categorization within SCs:

  • Supporting Arguments: One key argument favouring the sub-categorization of Scheduled Castes (SCs) revolves around the existing disparities among these communities.
    • The contention is that graded inequalities persist, with certain SC communities having limited access to essential facilities.
    • Consequently, the more forward communities within the SCs tend to consistently benefit, potentially sidelining the more backward ones.
    • To address this, proponents argue for sub-categorization, providing separate reservations for the more disadvantaged communities within the broader SC category.
  • Opposing Perspectives: Arguments against sub-categorization assert that allocating separate reservations within these categories might not effectively tackle the root cause of the issue.
    • Critics argue that the primary aim of sub-categorization was to ensure representation at all levels.
    • However, even if reserved positions are available at higher levels, the most backward SCs may lack sufficient candidates to be considered.
    • Therefore, it is suggested that existing government schemes and benefits should first reach these underserved sections before contemplating sub-categorization.
  • Additionally, legal experts emphasize the importance of concrete data to support sub-categorization.
  • They highlight the need for a comprehensive caste census, encompassing each community and sub-community along with their socio-economic data.
  • According to these experts, a caste census provides the empirical basis required for the government to justify sub-categorization, determining the specific additional share of benefits needed by each community.

What is the Union Government’s Stand?

  • In 2005, the Union government explored the legal aspects of sub-categorization within Scheduled Castes (SCs).
  • The then Attorney General of India suggested that this could be a viable option only if unquestionable evidence indicated its necessity.
  • During this period, both the National Commission for Scheduled Castes (NCSC) and the National Commission for Scheduled Tribes (NCST) expressed the view that a constitutional amendment might not be essential.
  • They pointed out that Article 16(4) of the Constitution already empowered states to formulate special laws for any backward classes deemed under-represented.
  • Furthermore, they emphasized the urgency of ensuring the prioritized implementation of existing schemes and benefits rather than merely allocating a quota within the existing quota.

Govt disburses Rs 4,415 crore under PLI scheme; low job creation a concern (Indian Express)

  • 18 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

Recently, the central government has disbursed an incentive amount of Rs 4,415 crore under its flagship Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) schemes for as many as eight sectors.

News Summary:

  • The central government, through its flagship Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) schemes, has disbursed an incentive amount of Rs 4,415 crore until October in the current fiscal year across eight sectors.
    • In the fiscal year 2023-24, Rs 1,515 crore has been disbursed, compared to Rs 2,900 crore in 2022-23 when payments under the scheme commenced.
  • The government aims to achieve a disbursal target of Rs 11,000 crore by the end of this fiscal year.
    • According to official statements, the employment generation, both direct and indirect, has exceeded 6.78 lakh.
  • As of now, 746 applications have received approval in 14 sectors, with an expected investment exceeding Rs 3 lakh crore.
    • Notably, 176 MSMEs are among the beneficiaries of the PLI schemes, particularly in sectors like pharma and telecom.

What is the Production Linked Incentive Scheme (PLI)?

  • Production-linked incentive (PLI) schemes were first introduced in India in March 2020, mainly targeting three industries – Mobile Manufacturing and Electric Components, Pharmaceutical and Medical Device Manufacturing.
  • The PLI concept has since expanded to 14 sectors to boost India’s manufacturing capabilities and encourage export-oriented production.
  • The PLI schemes aim to develop capacities in the local supply chain, introduce new downstream operations, and incentivise investments into high-tech production.
  • Mechanism: Under the PLI scheme, both domestic and foreign companies receive financial incentives for manufacturing within India, with rewards calculated as a percentage of their revenue over up to five years.
  • Targeted Sectors: The 14 sectors covered by the scheme include mobile manufacturing, medical devices, automobiles and auto components, pharmaceuticals, drugs, speciality steel, telecom & networking products, electronic products, white goods (ACs and LEDs), food products, textile products, solar PV modules, advanced chemistry cell (ACC) batteries, and drones and drone components.
  • Incentive Structure: Incentives are determined based on incremental sales, with certain sectors like advanced chemistry cell batteries, textile products, and the drone industry having calculations considering sales, performance, and local value addition over five years.
    • Emphasizing research and development (R&D) investments aims to align the industry with global trends and enhance competitiveness in the international market.

Performance of the PLI Schemes:

  • Positive Export Growth: India has experienced a substantial boost in mobile handset exports, doubling from Rs 45,000 crore in FY22 compared to FY21, and further estimating exports to reach Rs 90,000 crore in FY23.
    • Additionally, in the pharmaceutical industry, India has successfully manufactured 35 active pharmaceutical ingredients (APIs), reducing reliance on imports, particularly from countries like China.
    • Overall, the PLI schemes have contributed to exports exceeding Rs 3.2 lakh crore, notably driven by sectors such as electronics, pharmaceuticals, food processing, and telecom.
  • Challenges in Implementation: Despite positive outcomes, the implementation of PLI schemes has faced sluggish progress.
    • In the fiscal year 2021-22, the government disbursed a mere Rs 10 crore in incentive payouts for mobile handsets, white goods (ACs and LEDs), and the food processing industries combined.
    • However, this figure increased to Rs 2,874 crore in 2022-23, according to DPIIT.
    • During the initial two years of the seven-year initiative, only 1.46 per cent of the total Rs 1.97 lakh crore incentive outlay was disbursed.
    • Some major industries are yet to fully embrace the scheme or initiate significant activities under it.
  • Limited Job Creation: The slow start in implementation has resulted in a lower-than-projected number of jobs created.
    • While the PLIs were anticipated to generate 6 million new jobs over seven years, the actual figure stands at approximately 300,000 jobs, representing only 5 per cent of the total projection, between 2020 and early 2023.

Challenges in the PLI Scheme:

  • Assembly Emphasis Over Value Addition: The subsidy structure within the Mobile and allied Component Manufacturing segment of the PLI scheme primarily incentivizes the completion of phone assembly in India, neglecting the consideration of the actual value added through manufacturing processes.
    • Consequently, many mobile phone components are still imported, encompassing critical elements such as display screens, cameras, batteries, and printed circuit boards.
  • WTO Constraints and Limited Value Addition: India faces constraints imposed by WTO rules, preventing the tying of PLI subsidies to domestic value addition.
    • While India aspires to produce chips domestically, the intricate nature of chip manufacturing and the inability to mandate significant domestic value addition present challenges to realising this goal.
  • Ambiguity in Incentive Disbursement: Despite the establishment of an Empowered Committee to oversee fund disbursement across various sectors, the process lacks transparency and clear criteria.
    • The absence of well-defined parameters for ministries and departments to determine incentive allocations raises concerns about the fairness and effectiveness of the scheme.
  • Absence of a Centralized Database: A notable deficiency in the PLI scheme is the lack of a centralized database that comprehensively captures critical information such as increased production, exports, and the creation of new jobs.
    • This information gap complicates the evaluation process, introducing administrative complexities.
    • The resulting ambiguity impacts transparency, potentially leading to mischief, thereby weakening the overall policy structure.

Way Forward

The government should evaluate the efficacy of the PLI scheme, taking into account factors such as job creation, cost per job, and the identified challenges contributing to its limited success. Before expanding the scheme to encompass additional sectors, a thorough understanding of its limitations is essential, along with proactive measures to address the underlying issues.

 

Supreme Court to hear Thackeray group's plea against speaker’s decision refusing to disqualify MLAs (The Hindu)

  • 17 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

The Maharashtra Assembly Speaker has refused to disqualify 40 MLAs of the Eknath Shinde faction after recognising it as the real Shiv Sena.

What happened in Maharashtra?

  • In June 2022, a faction of the Shiv Sena headed by Eknath Shinde moved with 37 of the 55 MLAs and claimed to be the real Shiv Sena. It appointed Bharat Gogawale as its whip.
  • However, the UBT faction claimed that they were the original political party and that Sunil Prabhu of its faction would continue to be the whip.
  • The Speaker has now recognised the Eknath Shinde faction as the real Shiv Sena and held the appointment of whip by this group as valid.
  • This was based on the strength of members of the Shinde faction and the party’s 1999 constitution.
  • The Speaker based on this ruling refused to disqualify 40 MLAs of the Shinde faction.
  • He also refused to disqualify 14 MLAs of the UBT group as the whip instructions from Bharat Gogawale could not be physically served on them.

What is Defection?

  • Defection refers to the act of a legislator shifting allegiance from one political party to another, embodying elements of revolt, dissent, and rebellion by an individual or a party.
  • In the political context, it manifests as a scenario wherein a member of a political party relinquishes their allegiance and aligns with a different political entity.
  • Historically termed as 'floor crossing,' this phenomenon finds its roots in the British House of Commons, symbolised by a legislator physically changing sides from the Government to the Opposition or vice versa.
  • In India, the defections of legislators during the 1960s and 70s from their parent parties created political instability in many States, bringing down elected governments.
    • Therefore, to ensure the stability of elected governments, the 52nd constitutional amendment introduced the ‘anti-defection’ law through the Tenth Schedule in 1985.

About the Anti-Defection Law:

  • The Tenth Schedule of the Constitution, also known as the anti-defection law, was added to prevent political defections.
  • The rationale for curbing such defections was that they undermined the foundations and principles of Indian democracy.
  • The law disqualifies legislators for violating the will of their political party.
  • In the 37 years, the law has been in place, while individual defections may have reduced, en masse defections continue.
  • However, the presence of the Anti-Defection Law has also undermined democracy by inhibiting legislators from exercising their choice and ability to function independently, and restricted decision-making in legislatures to a few who control political parties.

Features of the Anti-Defection Law:

  • Disqualification on grounds of defection: A legislator belonging to a political party will be disqualified if he:
    • (i) voluntarily give up his party membership, or
    • (ii) votes/abstains to vote in the House contrary to the direction issued by his political party.
    • A member is not disqualified if he has taken prior permission of his party, or if the voting or abstention is condoned by the party within 15 days.
    • Independent members will be disqualified if they join a political party after getting elected to the House.
    • Nominated members will be disqualified if they join any political party six months after getting nominated.
  • Exemptions in cases of merger: Members are exempted from such disqualification when at least two-thirds of the original political party merges with another political party. Further:
    • (i) The members must have become members of the party they have merged with/into, or
    • (ii) they should have not accepted the merger and chose to function as a separate group.
  • Decision-making authority: The decision to disqualify a member from the House rests with the Chairman/Speaker of the House.
    • In the Kihoto Hollohan case (1993), the Supreme Court held that the presiding officer, while deciding a question under the Tenth Schedule, functions as a tribunal.
    • Hence, his decision like that of any other tribunal, is subject to judicial review on the grounds of mala fides, perversity, etc.

Advantages of Anti-Defection Law:

  • Enhances political stability by curbing legislators' inclination to switch parties.
  • Facilitates democratic realignment through party mergers within the legislature.
  • Mitigates corruption and reduces non-developmental expenditures associated with irregular elections.
  • Offers constitutional recognition to the existence of political parties, marking a significant milestone.

Criticism of the Anti-Defection Law:

  • Limited Independence: The ADL restricts legislators from acting independently, contradicting the essence of parliamentary democracy by penalizing independent actions.
  • Party Alignment Constraints: Legislators are bound by the official stance of their party on any issue, limiting their flexibility and autonomy.
  • Reduced Constituency Accountability: By preventing parliamentarians from switching parties, the ADL diminishes accountability to both the Parliament and the constituents.
  • Defence Through Splitting: The law allows a defence against disqualification through party splits, where one-third of legislators moving with a breakaway group avoids disqualification.
  • Misinterpretation Challenges: The ADL is prone to misinterpretation, as seen in instances like Maharashtra, highlighting the absence of authoritative legal interpretations.
  • Ambiguity in Splits: Recent occurrences show opposition members breaking away in small groups to join the ruling party, raising questions about disqualification when more than 2/3rd of the opposition defects.
  • Attraction of Office: Critics argue that ideological defection is rare in India, with legislators often defecting due to the lure of office rather than ideological shifts.

Recommendations from Various Committees on ADL:

  • Dinesh Goswami Committee on Electoral Reforms (1990): Disqualification should be confined to cases where a member voluntarily relinquishes party membership.
    • Abstention from voting or voting against the party whip in a confidence or no-confidence motion should warrant disqualification.
    • The President/Governor, advised by the Election Commission, should decide disqualification matters.
  • Law Commission (170th Report, 1999): Eliminate provisions exempting splits and mergers from disqualification.
    • Treat pre-poll electoral fronts as political parties under the anti-defection law.
    • Political parties should issue whips only in situations jeopardizing the government.
  • Constitution Review Commission (2002): Bar defectors from holding public office or any remunerative political post for the remaining term.
    • Consider the vote cast by a defector to topple a government as invalid.
  • Election Commission: Decisions under the Tenth Schedule should be made by the President/Governor, guided by the binding advice of the Election Commission.

Important Judgment Regarding Anti-Defection Law:

  • Kihoto Hollohan Case: In the Kihoto Hollohan case, the Supreme Court affirmed the overall validity of the Anti-Defection Law, except for the aspect related to judicial review, which was deemed unconstitutional.
  • Shri Rajesh Verma v. Shri Mohammad Shahid Akhlaque Case: The court, in the Shri Rajesh Verma v. Shri Mohammad Shahid Akhlaque case, established that publicly opposing one's original party and supporting another party constitutes a de facto resignation from the original party.
  • Mannadi Satyanarayan Reddy v Andhra Pradesh Legislative Assembly Case: In the Mannadi Satyanarayan Reddy v Andhra Pradesh Legislative Assembly case, the court addressed the jurisdiction of the Speaker or Presiding Officers in deciding questions related to defection.
    • The court clarified that there is no provision in the Tenth Schedule limiting the Speaker's exercise of jurisdiction to decide such questions.

What are the reforms needed?

  • The Supreme Court in Sadiq Ali versus Election Commission of India (1971), laid down the three-test formula for determining which faction is to be recognised as the original political party by the Election Commission.
    • These are the aims and objects of the party;
    • Its affairs as per the party’s constitution reflect inner party democracy; and
    • The majority in the legislative and organisation wings.
  • The first test is subject to competing claims by rival groups.
  • But it is the lack of inner party democracy that results in most of these defections.

The Election Commission in February 2023, recognised the Eknath Shinde faction as the real Shiv Sena, solely based on votes polled by legislators supporting Eknath Shinde in the Maharashtra Assembly elections of 2019. An authoritative Supreme Court judgment in these matters and the setting up of an independent tribunal to decide on the disqualification of members will reduce the ambiguities surrounding the Tenth Schedule. The real reform required is institutionalising internal democracy through regular inner-party elections in our political parties with strict monitoring by the Election Commission.

India’s multidimensional poverty rate is down to 11.28% in 2022-23 from 29.17% in 2013-14 (Indian Express)

  • 16 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

The share of India’s population living in multidimensional poverty is estimated to have fallen to 11.28 per cent in 2022-23 from 29.17 per cent in 2013-14, according to a discussion paper released by NITI Aayog on Monday.

Context:

  • According to the NITI Aayog’s discussion paper, multidimensional poverty in India declined from 29.17% in 2013-14 to 11.28% in 2022-23, with about 24.82 crore people moving out of this bracket during this period.
  • The national multidimensional poverty measures simultaneous deprivations across three equally weighted dimensions of health, education, and standard of living that are represented by 12 sustainable development goals-aligned indicators, according to NITI Aayog.

Key Highlights of the MPI in India Since 2005-2006:

  • Overall Decline in Multidimensional Poverty: As per the NITI Aayog discussion paper, India's multidimensional poverty has decreased from 29.17% in 2013-14 to 11.28% in 2022-23.
    • The trend signifies the upliftment of 24.82 crore people from this bracket during the specified period.
  • State-wise Decline: "Uttar Pradesh registered the largest decline in the number of poor with 5.94 crore people escaping multidimensional poverty during the last nine years followed by:
    • Bihar at 3.77 crore
    • Madhya Pradesh at 2.30 crore and
    • Rajasthan at 1.87 crore.
  • NITI Aayog's approach to measuring multidimensional poverty involved considering 12 indicators aligned with the sustainable development goals.
    • These indicators encompass crucial aspects such as nutrition, child and adolescent mortality rates, maternal health, educational attainment, access to basic amenities like clean cooking fuel, sanitation, safe drinking water, electricity, and housing, as well as possession of assets and bank accounts.
  • "Significant initiatives covering all dimensions of poverty have led to 24.82 crore individuals escaping multidimensional poverty in the last 9 years.
    • As a result, India is likely to achieve its SDG target of halving multidimensional poverty well before 2030.
  • The report emphasized impactful programs, such as Poshan Abhiyan and Anemia Mukt Bharat, which have markedly improved accessibility to healthcare services, significantly reducing deprivation.
    • Managing one of the globe's largest food security initiatives, the targeted Public Distribution System (PDS) under the National Food Security Act encompasses 81.35 crore beneficiaries, ensuring the distribution of food grains to both rural and urban populations.
  • "The government's persistent dedication and resolute commitment to enhancing the lives of the most vulnerable and deprived have been instrumental in this accomplishment.

What is Multidimensional Poverty?

  • Poverty can have several negative effects at once. Some of these include inadequate nutrition or health, a lack of power or clean water, low-quality employment, or insufficient education.
  • The true nature of poverty cannot be fully captured by concentrating only on one aspect, such as income.
  • Multidimensional Poverty, as a metric, goes beyond income or consumption alone.
    • It encompasses deprivations in education and access to essential infrastructure, considering factors beyond the monetary aspect.
    • The measurement is conducted at the $2.15 international poverty line, as defined by the World Bank (in 2017 purchasing power parity terms), ensuring a comprehensive assessment of poverty that extends beyond monetary value.

What is the National Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI)?

  • Prepared By: NITI Aayog
  • Objective: The aim is to gauge poverty across various dimensions, complementing existing statistics based on per capita consumption expenditure.
  • Purpose of the National MPI: Provides an enhanced, high-level overview of poverty at the national level.
    • Acts as a complement to monetary poverty measures.
    • Furnishes information crucial for shaping effective policy initiatives.
    • The MPI is founded on the individual or household profile of overlapping or "joint" deprivations experienced by each person.
  • Key Features: Serves as an incentive for leaving no one behind and prioritizing the most marginalized.
    • Adaptable to the national context and maintains transparency.
  • Credible Methodology: India's national MPI employs a methodology developed by the Oxford Poverty and Human Development Initiative (OPHI) and the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP), aligning with the globally accepted and robust standards used in the publication of the Global Multidimensional Poverty Index.
  • Three Macro Dimensions: The National MPI is structured around three macro dimensions, each with specific indicators and weights, outlined below –

Significance of the MPI:

  • Crucial Public Policy Instrument: The establishment of India's National MPI introduces a pivotal public policy instrument that monitors multidimensional poverty, facilitating evidence-based and targeted interventions to ensure inclusivity and prevent any individuals from being left behind.
  • Assesses the Efficacy of Multi-Sectoral Interventions: It offers valuable insights into the effectiveness of multi-sectoral interventions aimed at addressing diverse facets of poverty.
  • Encompasses Diverse Deprivations: Notably, functioning as a metric for multidimensional poverty, it captures the myriad and simultaneous deprivations experienced by households.
  • Comprehensive Analysis Across All Tiers: This report conducts a thorough analysis of the headcount ratio and intensity of multidimensional poverty, encompassing national, State/UT, and district levels.

Conclusion

The National MPI in India has been conceived as an all-encompassing tool, expediting purpose-driven initiatives to gauge and systematically eliminate multidimensional poverty. The dimensions of the index have demonstrated their efficacy in identifying and facilitating precise policy interventions aimed at achieving targeted goals.

NITI Aayog

  • NITI Aayog, established on January 1, 2015, succeeded the Planning Commission with a distinctive focus on a 'Bottom-Up' approach.
  • Embracing the vision of 'Maximum Governance, Minimum Government' and echoing the ethos of 'Cooperative Federalism,' NITI Aayog serves as a dynamic institution facilitating collaborative decision-making.

Functional Components: NITI Aayog operates through two principal hubs-

  • Team India Hub: This hub is a crucial interface, fostering effective communication and collaboration between the states and the central government.
    • It plays a pivotal role in aligning the diverse interests of different regions in the spirit of cooperative federalism.
  • Knowledge and Innovation Hub: This hub is dedicated to enhancing the intellectual capacity of NITI Aayog. It functions as a think tank, driving innovative ideas and knowledge creation to inform policy decisions and contribute to the overall development agenda.

INDICES of NITI Aayog:

  • Composite Water Management Index
  • District Hospital Index
  • Export Preparedness Index
  • Global Innovation Index
  • India Innovation Index
  • Multidimensional Poverty Index
  • School Education Quality Index
  • SDG India Index
  • State Energy Index
  • State Health Index

Muizzu asks India to withdraw troops by March 15: Why are Indian soldiers in Maldives? (Indian Express)

  • 15 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

Maldivian President Mohamed Muizzu has asked India to withdraw its military personnel from his country by March 15, a senior official said in Male on Sunday, nearly two months after Maldives sought their removal.

Context:

  • Maldives President Mohamed Muizzu has asked India to withdraw its military personnel from the Indian Ocean archipelago nation by mid-March.
  • A high-level core group, set by both nations, to negotiate the withdrawal of troops held its first meeting at the Foreign Ministry in Male on Sunday with Indian High Commissioner Munu Mahawar present.
  • President Muizzu had, during his presidential campaign, asserted that he would accomplish the removal of Indian troops from the Maldives, and had made a formal request to India to withdraw its military personnel soon after assuming office.

How many Indian troops are in the Maldives?

  • India does not have a large military presence in the Maldives contrary to claims by “India Out” protesters that thousands of Indian troops were stationed.
  • There are only 88 Indian military personnel in the Maldives, according to the latest government figures.
    • They have been based there for more than a decade.

What are Indian troops doing in the Maldives?

  • India and Maldives have been allies and defence cooperation has been a crucial part of the relationship.
  • Indian soldiers have been training Maldivian troops in combat and reconnaissance and helping in rescue operations.
  • According to the terms of the bilateral agreement between the two nations, Indian officers were sent to train the Maldivian National Defence Force.
  • The Indian troops are unarmed and mostly assist the Maldivian government with search and evacuation operations, (and) medical evacuation operations.
  • From January 2019 until late 2023, 495 lives have been saved because of medical evacuations and special training conducted by the Indian personnel in the Maldives with the help of two helicopters gifted by India.
  • Also, at least 50 joint search and rescue missions have been conducted.

Have Indian troops conducted military operationss in the Maldives?

  • Yes, Indian troops conducted one military operation in the Maldives in November 1998 called “Operation Cactus”.
  • A group of Maldivians led by businessman Abdullah Luthufi attempted a coup to overthrow the government of Maumoon Abdul Gayoom.
    • They had the backing of Sri Lanka’s People’s Liberation Organisation of Tamil Eelam (PLOTE), a Tamil secessionist group.
  • At least 80 mercenaries of the group entered Male on 3 November 1988 on board a hijacked Sri Lankan fighter.
    • They captured key infrastructure – airports, ports, television and radio stations.
    • While Gayoom was escorted to a safe house, the mercenaries took several hostages including ministers.
  • As the situation escalated in the Maldives, India’s chief of army staff General VN Sharma got a call from the foreign service officer at the Prime Minister’s Office.
    • He asked if the Indian army could help as there was an emergency in the Maldives.
  • Indis agreed and three armed forces – the army, navy, and air force came to the neighbour's rescue.
    • Two hostages were among 19 killed during Operation Cactus.
    • The rest of the casualties were mercenaries.
  • India, thus, helped in thwarting a major political crisis in the Indian Ocean Region.

Anti-India sentiments among a section of the Maldives’ population:

  • In 2020, the “India Out” campaign started as on-ground protests in the Maldives which later spread widely across social media platforms.
    • By the second half of 2021, it had developed into an active and visible political campaign.
  • The supporters of the campaign had claimed that it had been started to protest against what they called Indian military presence in the country.
  • They had actively targeted all aspects of India-Maldives bilateral relations.
  • During the International Yoga Day celebration in 2022, organised by the Indian High Commission in the capital Male which was held at the Galolhu Stadium was disrupted by a group around 150 of protesters.
    • The mob attacked participants practising yoga and vandalised property.

What are the major factors behind the fear and suspicion?

  • The controversy started after two Dhruv Advanced Light Helicopters were given by India to the Maldives in 2010 and 2015.
    • These were used for search and rescue operations, maritime weather surveillance and for airlifting patients.
    • However, some in Progressive Party of Maldives  (PPM) hinted that India was attempting to create a military presence in Maldives as these were military choppers.
  • The other causes of concern are the perceived lack of transparency in dealings with India under the rule of Ibrahim Mohamed Solih and the reliance on India for maritime security.
  • UTF Harbour Project: Under this agreement, India was to develop and maintain a coastguard harbour and dockyard at Uthuru Thilafalhu, a strategically located atoll near the capital Malé.
    • Sections of Maldivian media had speculated that the UTF project would be turned into an Indian naval base.

India-Maldives Bilateral Relations:

  • India and Maldives share strong ties encompassing ethnic, linguistic, cultural, religious, and commercial dimensions, fostering close and multi-faceted relations.
  • The historical trajectory of their relationship is marked by significant milestones:
  • Diplomatic Relations: India, recognizing Maldives' independence in 1965, established diplomatic ties promptly.
    • During the 1988 coup attempt, India's rapid intervention under Operation Cactus solidified trust and laid the groundwork for enduring bilateral relations.
    • Timely assistance during natural calamities, such as the 2004 Tsunami and the 2014 water crisis, showcased India's commitment to the well-being of the Maldives.
    • The Swift dispatch of medical aid in 2020 during a measles outbreak demonstrated India's continuous support.
  • Security and Defence Cooperation: A comprehensive Defence Action Plan was signed in April 2016, consolidating defence collaboration.
    • India plays a crucial role in training the Maldivian National Defence Force, meeting 70% of their training needs over the last decade.
    • Annual Defence Cooperation Dialogues, initiated in July 2016, underscore the strategic partnership.
  • Development Cooperation: India's significant developmental contributions include projects like:
    • Indira Gandhi Memorial Hospital
    • Maldives Institute of Technical Education (now Maldives Polytechnic)
    • India-Maldives Faculty of Hospitality & Tourism Studies
    • Technology Adoption Programme in the Education Sector
    • National College for Police and Law Enforcement
    • Infrastructure & Connectivity Projects under Exim Bank Line of Credit ($800 million)
  • Economic and Trade Relations: India emerged as Maldives' second-largest trade partner in 2022, with bilateral trade totalling $501.82 million.
    • In November 2022, India provided financial assistance of US$ 100 million to address economic challenges.
    • The RBI-Maldives Monetary Authority Currency Swap Agreement in December 2022 further strengthened economic ties.
  • Tourism and Indian Community: Indians constitute the largest group of tourists in the Maldives, with over 200,000 visitors in 2023.
    • The Indian community, the second-largest expatriate group, contributes significantly to various sectors, with approximately 22,000 individuals.
    • Notably, 25% of doctors and teachers in the Maldives are Indian nationals.
    • The India-Maldives relationship continues to evolve, reflecting shared values, mutual interests, and a commitment to fostering prosperity and stability in the region.

What does President Muizzu want?

  • Muizzu is a pro-China leader and wants Indian troops to leave the country.
  • This was among the pre-poll promises he made during his campaign.
  • His main theme was about an alleged threat to the Maldives’ sovereignty by some Indian military personnel on an island, part of his party’s years-long “India out” strategy.
  • After his just-concluded visit to China, President Muizzu, announced plans to reduce the country’s dependency on India, including securing imports of essential food commodities and medicine and consumables from other countries.
  • Maldives is also reportedly reviewing more than 100 bilateral agreements with India signed by the previous government.

Way Forward

The trajectory of India-Maldives relations is shaped by evolving geopolitical dynamics, leadership shifts, and shared regional interests. India's steadfast commitment to the Maldives involves going beyond customary measures to foster a comprehensive partnership. Any abrupt actions jeopardizing this carefully cultivated alliance would potentially inflict more harm on the Maldives than on India. Recognizing and proactively addressing these challenges, both nations can skillfully navigate the intricacies of their relationship, paving the way for a more robust, resilient, and mutually advantageous partnership in the future.

To combat climate challenges, the Finance Commission needs to step up (Indian Express)

  • 13 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

As the union government constituted the 16th Finance Commission (FC), experts recommend including variables related to climate change, beyond forest cover.

Background:

  • In the contemporary era, India has gained prominence as a key participant in global initiatives aimed at addressing climate change and promoting increased forest coverage.
  • This engagement has not only positively impacted environmental sustainability but has also strengthened the adaptability of communities and ecosystems.
  • In addressing the hurdles presented by climate change, the concept of fiscal federalism, with a specific focus on the role of the Finance Commission (FC), has emerged as a crucial factor in encouraging states to prioritize conservation endeavours.

Role of the Finance Commission in Fiscal Federalism and Forest Conservation:

  • Promoting Conservation Initiatives: The Finance Commission's role has been pivotal in actively promoting and incentivizing state-led efforts towards forest conservation.
  • Through dedicated fund allocations, the Commission acknowledges the inherent connection between vibrant forests, sustainable ecosystems, and the overall national well-being.
  • Financial backing serves as a catalyst, motivating states to prioritize conservation endeavours while safeguarding their economic interests.
  • Balancing Revenue Capacities and Expenditure Needs: Beyond their biodiversity significance, forest resources represent valuable economic assets for states.
  • The Finance Commission recognizes that preserving existing forests and augmenting forest cover density directly impact the revenue capacities and expenditure requirements of states.
  • Finding an equilibrium between economically exploiting forest resources and ensuring their conservation becomes essential for achieving both environmental sustainability and economic prosperity.

Previous Instances of Finance Commission Initiatives in Forest Conservation:

  • The Finance Commission’s formulae for tax sharing have evolved since the first one, constituted in 1951, for the period 1952-1957.
    • Since then, FCs have been constituted at intervals every five years with the 16th one currently being implemented.
  • Initially, the formula for distributing tax among states respectively, known as horizontal devolution, gave significant weightage, around 80% to 90%, to the population of the states, meaning states with higher populations were given a higher share of the tax.
    • Then, the 7th FC drastically reduced the weightage assigned to the population to 25% and increased the weightage given to equity, in which income, land area, and sometimes infrastructure and fiscal discipline too, played a significant role in determining how much each state would receive from the central government.
  • Similarly, there have been changes in determining the funds allocation for environmental initiatives.
    • The 12th FC (2005-10) dedicated Rs 1,000 crore for forest conservation across states.
    • The 13th FC (2010-15) enhanced this allocation to Rs 5,000 crore.
      • However, it is important to note that these grants comprised less than 0.05% of the total funds transferred from the central government to the states.
  • Ecological Fiscal Transfers (EFT) – where public revenue is shared based on ecological indicators – were introduced in 2015 with the 14th FC which incorporated forest cover as a criterion for tax devolution, allocating it a weightage of 7.5% in the distribution formula for the tax-transfer during the period 2015-16 to 2019-2020.
    • The 14th FC (2015 to 2020) considered several recommendations and replaced the grants with a more prominent placement for the forestry sector — it dedicated 7.5 per cent of the divisible central tax pool to ecology and forests.
      • The allocation was based on the forest cover in each state.
  • The 15th FC (2021–22 to 2025–26) extended this share to 10 per cent.
  • Having mobilised and distributed over Rs 4.5 lakh crore to states against not only their forest cover but also forest density, the 15th FC effectively became the largest payment for ecosystem services (PES) systems in the world.
    • The Commission also gave grants to combat air pollution.
  • The fiscal transfers that are earmarked for a specific department or programme have traditionally been much smaller than fiscal transfers to the general state budget.
    • For example, the specific-purpose grants for forestry under the 12th and 13th FC were a fraction of the general-purpose transfers (those not assigned to specific purposes) that followed under the 14th and 15th FC.
  • The formula-based finance commission transfers are unconditional and are not tied to the Department of Forest or Ecology.
  • Whether there is a need for conditions to ensure the funds are invested in the environment, at least in principle, the enticement of receiving larger general-purpose transfers should motivate states to invest in forest protection.
  • Since 2005, the central government has been sharing annual forest grants with states.
    • These grants serve as both compensation and incentive mechanisms.
    • However, it remains unclear to what extent these grants have contributed to the increased forest cover in the states.

Addressing Complexities in the Intersection of Fiscal Federalism and Environmental Conservation:

  • Harmonizing Conservation Costs and Economic Imperatives: Balancing conservation expenses with economic necessities becomes challenging, particularly for states grappling with financial constraints.
    • The substantial opportunity costs linked with forest preservation may strain state budgets, presenting a hurdle in garnering widespread commitment.
  • Innovating Financing Models for Conservation: Traditional financing models for conservation may prove inadequate or unsustainable in the long term.
    • Overreliance on grants can create dependencies, hindering the development of self-sustaining mechanisms for conservation.
  • Addressing Climate-Induced Economic Vulnerabilities: The repercussions of climate change pose considerable threats to economic stability, especially for states heavily dependent on climate-sensitive sectors.
    • Unpredictable weather patterns, floods, and forest fires can intensify existing vulnerabilities.
  • Strategically Allocating Resources: The Finance Commission encounters the intricate task of strategically allocating resources to maximize both environmental and economic advantages.
    • Ensuring targeted funding for critical conservation initiatives while aligning with state development objectives demands a nuanced approach.
  • Integrating Environmental Goals with Fiscal Capacity: States may grapple with aligning their environmental objectives with fiscal capabilities, potentially creating a gap between aspirations and implementation.
  • Ensuring Equitable Participation: A potential risk exists where states with greater fiscal capacities may disproportionately benefit from conservation incentives, potentially exacerbating existing economic disparities.

The Potential Role of 16th Finance Commission's:

  • Integrating Climate Considerations into Tax Devolution Framework: The 16th Finance Commission has the potential to bring about a transformative shift by integrating climate vulnerability and emission intensity as pivotal factors in the tax devolution formula.
    • This alignment directly supports India's Nationally Determined Contributions (NDCs) under the Paris Agreement, providing states with robust fiscal incentives to actively contribute to national climate goals.
  • Implementing Performance-Based Grants for Key Sectors: Recognizing the instrumental role of specific sectors in achieving NDCs and Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), the 16th Finance Commission could contemplate introducing performance-based grants.
    • These grants, which are specifically designed to help areas like renewable energy, sustainable land and forest management, and air pollution efforts, provide states with focused financial assistance and motivate them to take proactive steps toward change.
  • Addressing Emission Reduction Challenges: Prioritizing emission reduction, the commission can focus on decarbonizing critical sectors like energy and transport.
    • This entails incentivizing states to embrace clean energy practices and fostering innovation to tackle persistent issues like crop burning.
    • Through strategic fund allocation, the 16th Finance Commission can drive tangible progress in mitigating emission sources.
  • Funding Innovations for Ecological Challenges: Allocating funds to innovative solutions for ecological challenges induced by climate change becomes a crucial role for the 16th Finance Commission.
    • Whether supporting mangrove restoration to counter weather vagaries or addressing the escalating incidents of forest fires, the commission can catalyze research, development, and implementation of sustainable strategies.
  • Utilizing Scientific Data for Informed Decision-Making: Leveraging advanced technology, the 16th Finance Commission can utilize scientific data, pollution inventories, and remote sensing to assess state vulnerabilities and mitigation efforts.
    • This data-driven approach ensures that fiscal decisions are rooted in empirical evidence, enabling the commission to design an effective and equitable performance-based system for fund allocation.
  • Transforming into a Leader in Climate Readiness: Going beyond its traditional fiscal role, the 16th Finance Commission has the potential to evolve into a leader in India's climate readiness.
    • This transformation involves active participation in designing and implementing a fiscal blueprint that balances economic growth with environmental imperatives, guiding policies that meet present needs without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own.

Conclusion

In the current juncture where India grapples with the intertwined paths of economic advancement and environmental safeguarding, the Finance Commission's significance in fiscal federalism cannot be overstated.

The 16th Finance Commission, poised to influence tax distribution principles and stimulate climate-conscious endeavours, emerges as a pivotal player in fostering a harmonious equilibrium between economic progress and ecological conservation.

By adopting strategic measures and pioneering innovative strategies, the Finance Commission has the potential to evolve into a formidable catalyst in India's pursuit of climate resilience.

 

Why has South Africa taken Israel to the International Court of Justice? (Indian Express)

  • 12 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

What is the case before the World Court?

  • South Africa brought a case against Israel to the ICJ on December 29, under the UN’s 1948 Genocide Convention.
  • South Africa argued that Israel, in its ongoing Gaza assault, has transgressed from the provisions of Article 2 of the Convention.
    • This article defines the term “genocide” to mean “acts committed with intent to destroy, wholly or partly, a national, ethnic, racial, or religious group”.
  • The ICJ will eventually decide whether Israel is committing genocide or not — this may take years.
    • But first, it will decide whether it has jurisdiction on this matter and whether the alleged acts fall under the 1948 Convention.
  • South Africa has also sought interim relief for the Palestinians and asked the ICJ to order Israel to immediately suspend all military operations in Gaza, as an interim measure.
  • While the court’s rulings are legally binding, it has no way to enforce them.
  • Nonetheless, its opinions carry weight with the UN and other international institutions.

What is the International Court of Justice (ICJ)?

  • The ICJ is the principal judicial organ of the United Nations that settles legal disputes between States in accordance with international law.
  • Established in 1945 through the United Nations charter, the ICJ commenced its operations in April 1946.
  • It is located at the Peace Palace in The Hague, Netherlands, distinguishing it from the other six principal UN organs situated in New York, USA.
  • The ICJ specializes in settling legal disputes between states and providing advisory opinions on legal questions referred to by authorized United Nations organs and specialized agencies, all in accordance with international law.

Structure:

  • Comprising 15 judges, elected for nine-year terms by the United Nations General Assembly and the Security Council, the Court ensures a simultaneous but separate voting process by these organs.
    • To be elected, a candidate must secure an absolute majority of votes in both bodies.
    • To maintain continuity, one-third of the Court is elected every three years, with judges eligible for re-election.
    • The Court is supported by a Registry, its administrative organ, and operates in English and French as its official languages.

Regional Distribution of Judges:

  • The 15 judges are distributed across regions as follows:
    • Three from Africa.
    • Two from Latin America and the Caribbean.
    • Three from Asia.
    • Five from Western Europe and other states.
    • Two from Eastern Europe.

Indian Judges at ICJ:

  • Four Indians have been members of the ICJ so far.
  • Justice Dalveer Bhandari, former judge of the Supreme Court, has been serving at the ICJ since 2012.

Independence of Judges:

  • In contrast to other international organizations' organs, the ICJ is unique in its composition, as it is not made up of government representatives.
  • The Court's members are independent judges who, prior to assuming their duties, make a solemn declaration in open court, pledging to exercise their powers impartially and conscientiously.

Jurisdiction and Operations:

  • The ICJ functions as a global court with a dual jurisdiction—addressing legal disputes between states submitted by them (contentious cases) and providing advisory opinions on legal questions referred to it by United Nations organs and specialized agencies (advisory proceedings).
  • In contentious cases, only states that are members of the United Nations and have become parties to the Statute of the Court, or those that have accepted its jurisdiction under specific conditions, can participate.
    • The judgments rendered in these cases are final, binding on the involved parties, and not subject to appeal.
    • At most, there may be provisions for interpretation or, in cases of newly discovered facts, revision.

What is the Genocide Convention?

  • The Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide, commonly known as the Genocide Convention, serves as a foundational instrument in international law, officially defining the crime of genocide for the first time.
  • According to the provisions of the Genocide Convention, genocide is deemed a crime applicable both in times of war and peace.
    • This pivotal human rights treaty marked a historic milestone as the initial treaty adopted by the United Nations General Assembly on 9 December 1948.
    • It symbolizes the global commitment to the principle of 'never again,' echoing the collective resolve of the international community in the aftermath of the atrocities witnessed during the Second World War.
  • The definition of genocide outlined in the Convention has gained widespread acceptance on both national and international fronts, finding incorporation into significant legal frameworks, including the 1998 Rome Statute of the International Criminal Court (ICC).
    • The Rome Statute, a pivotal development, introduced four core international crimes: genocide, crimes against humanity, war crimes, and the crime of aggression—all of which are explicitly stated to be exempt from any statute of limitations.
  • Crucially, the Genocide Convention imposes on State Parties the responsibility to undertake measures for the prevention and punishment of genocide.
    • This includes the enactment of relevant legislation and the punishment of perpetrators, irrespective of their status as constitutionally responsible rulers, public officials, or private individuals (Article IV).
  • Both South Africa and Israel are parties to the Convention.

How often do such cases come before the ICJ?

This is not the first case the court will hear under the Genocide Convention.

  • In 2022, Ukraine filed a case against Russia, and in 2019, the Gambia filed a case against Myanmar with respect to the Rohingya.
  • The Myanmar case was the first time that a State invoked the court’s jurisdiction to seek redress for genocidal acts committed against the citizens of another state.
    • The court agreed that the Gambia had standing to bring the case.
  • Like the Gambia, South Africa has based its jurisdiction under obligations erga omnes partes — that is, as a party to the Convention, it can bring this case because of its community interest in preventing genocide.

What will happen now?

  • South Africa’s case appears to meet the threshold for the court to make a provisional measures order.
    • The Court must be satisfied it has prima facie jurisdiction; there is a “plausible” link between the rights asserted by South Africa and the measures it requests; and a risk of irreparable harm and urgency.
  • That order will come within weeks and will have legal significance for all States that are parties to the Genocide Convention because such an order is binding on all States, even though the court lacks enforcement mechanisms.
  • Israel has called the case “baseless” and a “blood libel”, and called on the international community to reject it.
    • The United States, Hungary, and Guatemala have done so.
  • Palestine has welcomed South Africa’s case, as have the 57 Organisation of Islamic Cooperation (OIC) countries, Malaysia, Turkey, Jordan, Bolivia, Venezuela, Mexico, Bangladesh, Namibia, Nicaragua, and some others.
  • France has stated that it will support the court’s decision and India has not issued any statement.

 

After ECI guidelines, charting a path to disability inclusion in politics (Indian Express)

  • 10 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

Recently, the Election Commission of India released an advisory for political parties to follow disability-sensitive terminologies and be more inclusive of persons with disabilities.

Context:

  • On December 21, the Election Commission of India released a significant advisory, encouraging political parties to embrace terminology that is sensitive to disability issues.
  • This initiative is designed to enhance communication that is inclusive of individuals with disabilities, guarantee the accessibility of information, and advocate for inclusion within the structures of political parties.
  • This proactive measure is especially noteworthy in light of recent instances where national leaders have used disparaging language about disabilities in their election speeches, contributing to the creation of an "attitudinal barrier" as defined by the Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act, 2016.
    • For example, in September 2023, Tamil Nadu leader A Raja compared Sanatan Dharma to people with leprosy and HIV in a derogatory manner.

What is Disability?

  • Disability is characterized by a limitation or absence of capacity to engage in typical human activities, often resulting from an impairment.
  • According to the United Nations Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities (UN CRPD), individuals with disabilities are those facing long-term physical, mental, intellectual, or sensory challenges, which, in conjunction with societal barriers, hinder their complete involvement in community life.
  • This issue holds substantial importance in public health, particularly in nations undergoing development, such as India.
  • The International Day of Persons with Disabilities, marked on December 3rd by the United Nations, is dedicated to globally raising awareness about challenges related to disabilities.

About the Rights of Persons with Disabilities (PwD) Act, 2016:

  • An Important Legislative Framework for PwD: This legislation plays a significant role in safeguarding and advancing the rights and privileges of persons with disabilities (PwD).
    • Replacing the Persons with Disabilities (Equal Opportunities, Protection of Rights and Full Participation) Act, 1995, the 2016 Act marks a significant stride toward promoting the rights and inclusivity of persons with disabilities across India.
  • Rights and Entitlements: Clearly articulating the rights and entitlements of persons with disabilities, the Act ensures their right to equality, protection against discrimination, and active participation in society.
  • Education: The Act guarantees free education for persons with disabilities up to 18 years of age and advocates for inclusive educational practices.
  • Employment: Promoting equal opportunities, the Act prohibits discrimination and mandates both government and private sector establishments to reserve a designated percentage of jobs for persons with disabilities.
  • Reservation in Higher Education: The Act advocates for the reservation of seats in higher educational institutions for persons with disabilities.
  • Special Employment Exchanges: Recognizing the importance of facilitating employment, the Act mandates the establishment of special employment exchanges.
  • Accessibility: Highlighting the significance of barrier-free access, the Act stresses the need for inclusive designs in public buildings, transportation, and information and communication technologies.
  • Healthcare: Ensuring access to affordable and quality healthcare services, the Act prioritizes the healthcare needs of persons with disabilities.
  • Legal Capacity: Acknowledging the right to equal recognition before the law, the Act supports the decision-making capacity of persons with disabilities.
  • Social Security: The Act advocates for social security and welfare measures to support the well-being of persons with disabilities.
  • National and State Advisory Boards: To oversee effective implementation, the Act calls for the establishment of National and State Advisory Boards.
  • Offences and Penalties: Prescribing penalties for offences against persons with disabilities, the Act ensures accessible legal proceedings for their protection.

Important Features of the Disability-Inclusive Communication Guidelines from ECI:

  • Prohibition of Ill-Health Terminologies: The guidelines emphasize refraining from using ill-health terminologies when referring to individuals with disabilities.
    • This prohibition aims to counteract the use of language that may stigmatize or marginalize people with disabilities, as demonstrated by instances such as Tamil Nadu leader A Raja's derogatory comparison in September 2023, highlighting the urgent need for corrective measures.
  • Prevention of Dehumanization and Stereotyping: Another vital aspect of the guidelines is the call to avoid dehumanizing portrayals and the perpetuation of stereotypes related to Persons with Disabilities (PwDs).
    • Instances of national leaders using disability as a demeaning tool during election speeches underscore the deep-rooted problem these guidelines aim to address.
    • By discouraging language that fosters stereotypes, the guidelines work to dismantle attitudinal barriers identified under the Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act, 2016.
  • Recognition of Legal Implications: The advisory acknowledges the legal implications of violating these communication guidelines.
    • Breaches, especially in disability-inclusive communication, could subject political parties and their members to action under section 92 of the Rights of PwD Act.
    • This section, a punitive provision for offences against PwDs, underscores the severity of the issue.
    • Therefore, the guidelines not only aim to enhance communication but also contribute to legal measures protecting the rights and dignity of PwDs.

Ideas to Improve the Effectiveness of ECI's Guidelines:

  • Need for a Uniform Mandate: Despite the critical nature of these guidelines, a thorough analysis reveals a potential area for improvement.
    • While guidelines within the disability-inclusive communication category use mandatory language like ‘should’ and ‘shall,’ others, especially those related to inclusion within the political party framework, employ discretionary terms such as ‘may.’
    • To bolster their impact, a uniform mandate across all categories is essential, establishing a consistent and enforceable framework for political parties.
  • Incorporate Guidelines into Model Code of Conduct (MCC): These guidelines are not yet part of the MCC.
    • The advisory notes that a breach of guidelines related to disability-inclusive communication could lead to action under section 92 of the Rights of PwD Act, but it remains unclear whether other breaches will invoke this provision.
    • Section 92 serves as a punitive measure for offences against PwDs, and the guidelines should be integrated into the MCC, similar to gender guidelines, to fortify their enforcement.
  • Address Ambiguity in Phraseology: There is some ambiguity within the guidelines regarding specific phraseology, such as the mention of words like "blind," "deaf," and "dumb" as incorrect terminologies.
    • While their translation in Hindi or another language might be derogatory, these are technical terms for people with visual, hearing, and speech disabilities.
    • A detailed list of disability-sensitive words and phraseology, aligned with the UN Disability Inclusion Strategy, could guide the ECI in providing clarity.
  • Incorporate a Chapter on Political Inclusion in the National Policy: The draft National Policy for PwD released last year lacked a dedicated chapter on political inclusion.
    • The ECI advisory emphasizes that political parties must strive to include PwDs at all levels and adhere to accessibility norms.
    • To catalyze the political inclusion of PwDs, a dedicated chapter on political inclusion should be integrated into the national policy, aligning with the principles of Article 29 of the UN Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities.
  • Creation of a Database on Legislators with Disabilities: Currently, there is no data on the number of legislators with disabilities, and the ECI's nomination forms lack a column on disability.
    • This absence of data significantly contributes to the political exclusion of PwDs.
    • The ECI must address this gap, possibly by introducing a column on disability in nomination forms and affidavits during elections, as a second step towards fostering the political inclusion of PwDs.

Conclusion

The Election Commission of India's recent advisory introducing disability-sensitive guidelines for political parties marks a significant stride towards fostering inclusivity in the political sphere. Nevertheless, to unlock the complete potential of these guidelines, key improvements are imperative. These include adopting a uniform and obligatory language, integrating the guidelines into the Model Code of Conduct (MCC), and adopting a holistic approach to political inclusion within national policies. By addressing these facets, India has the opportunity to shape a more inclusive political landscape that upholds and empowers individuals with disabilities.

The UGC has issued revised guidelines on Mulya Pravah 2.0 – Inculcation of Human Values and Professional Ethics in Higher Education institutions (The Hindu)

  • 09 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

The University Grants Commission (UGC) has been issuing regulations, guidelines and directives at breakneck speed that some of the important ones miss drawing the attention of the higher education community.

Context:

  • The University Grants Commission (UGC) has introduced Mulya Pravah 2.0 to enhance the ethical landscape of higher education institutions.
  • This evolved guideline, succeeding its 2019 predecessor, aims to instil human values and professional ethics, actively combating unethical practices that have permeated various institutions.
  • The primary focus involves constructing value-based institutions that resonate with fundamental duties and constitutional values, urging a commitment to integrity and ethical conduct.

What is Mulya Pravah?

  • Officially notified in 2019, Mulya Pravah aims to instil human values and professional ethics within higher education institutions.
  • Its explicit objective is to cultivate value-based institutions by guiding individuals and institutions toward fostering profound respect for fundamental duties, constitutional values, and a strong connection with the country.

What is Mulya Pravah 2.0?

  • Mulya Pravah 2.0, a revised guideline by the University Grants Commission (UGC), is designed to foster ethical practices and human values within higher education institutions.
  • Its inception was prompted by revelations from a survey among human resource managers, uncovering unethical practices like favouritism, sexual harassment, and gender discrimination in various organisational processes.
  • The primary objective of this guideline is to construct value-based institutions by nurturing a sense of respect for fundamental duties, and constitutional values, and fostering a connection to the nation.

Key Features of Mulya Pravah 2.0:

  • Addressing Unethical Practices: Mulya Pravah 2.0 confronts the prevalent unethical practices identified in higher education institutions, as uncovered by a survey involving human resource managers.
    • These malpractices encompass favouritism, sexual harassment, gender discrimination, inconsistent discipline, lack of confidentiality, and unscrupulous dealings with vendors for personal gain.
    • While acknowledging that such issues may extend beyond higher education, this guideline serves as a commendable initiative toward fostering ethical conduct.
  • Emphasis on Transparency: A pivotal aspect of Mulya Pravah 2.0 is its advocacy for absolute transparency in administration. Decision-making within higher education institutions is expected to be guided solely by institutional and public interest, free from biases.
    • The guideline stresses the elimination of discriminatory privileges and underscores the importance of penalizing corruption.
    • It urges the establishment of a conducive culture and work environment, aligning actions with the best interests of the institution.
  • Guidelines Emphasize Upholding Values: Mulya Pravah 2.0 mandates that higher education institutions uphold values such as integrity, trusteeship, harmony, accountability, inclusiveness, commitment, respectfulness, belongingness, sustainability, constitutional values, and global citizenship.
    • This intervention is timely, considering the diminishing prevalence of these values. Officers in universities are entrusted with ensuring strict adherence to these values both in letter and spirit.
  • Guidelines Remind Institutions to Act in the Best Interest: Mulya Pravah 2.0 serves as a reminder for stakeholders to act in the best interest of their institution, fostering a conducive culture and work environment for teaching, learning, and research while developing the potential of the institution.
    • It explicitly states that officers and staff must refrain from misappropriating financial and other resources.
    • Additionally, it calls for a refusal to accept gifts, favours, services, or other items from any entity that may compromise the impartial performance of duties.

What are the Challenges in the Effective Implementation of Mulya Pravah 2.0?

  • Sincerity and Commitment of Higher Education Regulators: The mere issuance of guidelines may prove insufficient if higher education regulators lack sincere commitment to enforce the provisions of Mulya Pravah 2.0.
    • The UGC must demonstrate unwavering determination, setting a precedent by exhibiting zero tolerance for any form of corruption or ethical violations within the academic sphere.
  • Institutional Resistance to Change: Established norms and practices within higher education institutions may resist the infusion of Mulya Pravah 2.0's principles, as institutional cultures can be deeply ingrained.
    • Overcoming institutional inertia requires proactive efforts by university administrators, faculty, and other stakeholders to embrace and implement the ethical guidelines.
  • Lack of Monitoring Mechanisms: Effective implementation requires robust monitoring mechanisms to track and evaluate adherence to the guidelines at various levels.
    • The absence of a comprehensive monitoring framework may lead to laxity, allowing unethical practices to persist unchecked.
  • Resistance from Internal Stakeholders: Faculty, staff, and student unions might resist the guidelines, perceiving them as an imposition on their autonomy or a threat to established practices.
    • Overcoming resistance necessitates effective communication, collaboration, and building consensus among all internal stakeholders.
  • Balancing Transparency and Confidentiality: The guideline's emphasis on maintaining confidentiality might clash with the broader societal demand for transparency in higher education institutions.
    • Striking a delicate balance between the two is crucial to avoid potential conflicts and ensure the right to information is not compromised.
  • Undefined Parameters and Ambiguities: Some aspects of Mulya Pravah 2.0, such as what constitutes a dignified manner for raising issues, lack clear definitions.
    • Ambiguities in the guideline could lead to misinterpretations, allowing room for manipulation and misuse.
  • Legal and Regulatory Compliance: Ensuring that institutions adhere to the legal and regulatory framework while implementing Mulya Pravah 2.0 is essential.
    • Non-compliance or overlooking legal aspects may render the guideline ineffective or subject to legal challenges.
  • Cultural and Regional Variations: Higher education institutions exhibit diverse cultural and regional variations, influencing the reception and interpretation of ethical guidelines.
    • Tailoring the implementation strategy to accommodate these variations is vital for the guidelines to resonate across different contexts.
  • Inadequate Training and Awareness Programs: The success of Mulya Pravah 2.0 depends on the understanding and active participation of all stakeholders.
    • Insufficient training and awareness programs may result in a lack of clarity regarding the guidelines, reducing their impact.

What Steps Can Be Taken to Improve Governance in Higher Education Institutions (HEIs)?

  • Addressing the Issue of Confidentiality: The guideline should advocate for institutions to promptly publish agendas, proceedings, and minutes of meetings held by their decision-making bodies, sub-committees, and standing committees.
    • Furthermore, institutions are encouraged to make their annual reports and audited accounts accessible to the public.
    • This proactive disclosure can act as a deterrent against malpractices and contribute significantly to rebuilding public trust in institutional operations.
  • Addressing Teachers’ Associations: Recognizing the significant impact teachers have on students' character, personality, and careers, Mulya Pravah 2.0 emphasizes that teachers should serve as role models.
    • This involves exhibiting good conduct and maintaining high standards of dress, speech, and behavior for students to emulate.
    • While the guideline underscores the expectation for teachers to adhere to university rules and policies, it does not explicitly address the role or function of teachers' associations, which warrants attention for a comprehensive approach.
  • Clarity on the Definition of 'Dignified Manner' for Unions and Support: Mulya Pravah 2.0 anticipates the support of staff and student unions in development activities while urging them to raise concerns in a dignified manner.
    • However, the guideline lacks a clear definition or explanation of what constitutes a 'dignified manner.'
    • This absence leaves room for potential misuse, allowing the provision to be wielded in ways that may threaten, silence, or undermine the collective voices of stakeholders.
    • A clear definition is crucial to avoid such misinterpretations and promote a healthy collaborative environment.

Conclusion

Mulya Pravah 2.0, introduced by the University Grants Commission, represents a commendable stride in instilling ethical values within higher education. Nonetheless, addressing its challenges necessitates inclusive discussions with all stakeholders. Effective implementation is imperative for realizing its potential to enhance the quality and sustainability of decisions within the educational sphere.

Why is child marriage still high in West Bengal? (The Hindu)

  • 08 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News

A recent study on child marriage in India published in the Lancet noted the overall decrease in child marriage across the country but pointed out that four States, mainly Bihar (16.7%), West Bengal (15.2%), Uttar Pradesh (12.5%), and Maharashtra (8.2%) accounted for more than half of the total headcount burden of child marriages in girls.

Key Findings of the Report:

  • In a recent study published in the Lancet Global Health, findings reveal that one in five girls and one in six boys in India are still marrying below the legal age.
  • Utilizing data from five National Family Health Surveys spanning 1993 to 2021, researchers underscore the urgent need for strengthened national and state-level policies to eradicate child marriage by 2030.
  • Notable disparities in the prevalence of girl and boy child marriages across states and Union Territories were observed during the study period.
  • While all states, except Manipur, showed a decline in girl child marriage between 1993 and 2021, specific states like Bihar, West Bengal, Uttar Pradesh, and Maharashtra accounted for over half of the total burden.
  • For boys, Gujarat, Bihar, West Bengal, and Uttar Pradesh accounted for more than 60% of the burden.
  • Jharkhand exhibited the largest percentage increase in child marriage headcount (53.1%) between 1993 and 2021.
  • Despite most states and Union Territories witnessing a decrease in the headcount of girl child marriage, Uttar Pradesh demonstrated the most substantial absolute decrease, contributing to about one-third of the nationwide decrease from 1993 to 2021
  •  Conversely, West Bengal saw the largest absolute increase, with over 500,000 more girls married as children during the same period.

What is Child Marriage?

  • Child marriage is a social phenomenon prevalent in some Indian societies, where adults marry young children, usually girls under the age of fifteen.
  • Another form involves parents arranging future marriages for children who only meet when reaching marriageable age, at which point the wedding ceremony occurs.

Child Marriages in India have undergone significant change:

  • From 47.4% in 2005-06, child marriage decreased to 26.8% in 2015-16.
  • In the last five years, it further declined by 3.5% points, reaching 23.3% in 2020-21, as per the latest National Family Health Survey-5 data.
  • Despite an overall trend of decline, the current rate of 23.3% remains distressingly high in a country with a population of 141.2 crore.
  • Eight states surpass the national average in child marriage prevalence, with West Bengal, Bihar, and Tripura having over 40% of women aged 20-24 married below 18, according to NFHS data.
  • Some states, like Madhya Pradesh (23.1% in 2020-21 from 32.4% in 2015-16), Rajasthan (25.4% from 35.4%), and Haryana, have demonstrated a reduction in child marriages.

What is the Global Scenario?

  • UNICEF data reveals that annually, 12 million girls enter childhood marriages.
  • The 2030 UN Sustainable Development Goals target the eradication of harmful practices, including child, early, and forced marriages, along with female genital mutilations, under goal 5.
  • Despite notable progress in South Asia over the past decade, where the risk of a girl marrying before 18 has decreased by over a third, dropping from nearly 50% to below 30%, the advancements are insufficient, and progress remains uneven.

Impact of Child Marriage:

  • Beyond being a human rights violation and a recognized form of sexual and gender-based violence, child marriage significantly affects maternal and child health.
    • A recent tragedy at Murshidabad Medical College and Hospital saw 10 infants die within 24 hours, with the majority born with extremely low birth weight.
    • Murshidabad, an economically challenged district, grapples with a high prevalence of child marriages in West Bengal.
  • NFHS-5 highlights that 55.4% of women aged 20-24 years in the district are married before the age of 18, marking an increase from NFHS-4, which reported a figure of 53.5%.

Legal Measures in India:

  • Various laws, such as the Prohibition of Child Marriage Act, 2006, and the Protection of Children from Sexual Offences Act, 2012, work toward safeguarding children from human rights violations.
  • The Prohibition of Child Marriage (Amendment) Bill, 2021 aims to raise the minimum marriage age for women from the current 18 years to 21 years.

Reasons to Raise the Minimum Age of Marriage for Females:

  • Addressing Education and Employment Disparities: Women often face inequalities in accessing education and employment due to early marriages.
    • Early marriage can restrict women from pursuing education and economic opportunities.
    • Raising the minimum age for marriage can encourage more women to pursue higher education and seek employment.
  • Impact of Early Marriage on Women's and Children's Health: Early marriages and subsequent early pregnancies have significant implications for the nutritional levels, overall health, and mental wellbeing of both mothers and children.
    • Underage mothers are more vulnerable to reproductive health challenges, malnutrition, postpartum hemorrhage, and susceptibility to sexually transmitted diseases.

Govt. Initiatives for Preventing Girl Child Marriage:

  • Beti Bachao Beti Padhao: Among various girl child welfare schemes, Beti Bachao Beti Padhao is widely recognized.
    • Translating to "Save the Girl Child, Educate the Girl Child," it focuses on women empowerment and creating an inclusive ecosystem.
    •  The scheme aims to promote the safety of girl children before and after birth.
  • Sukanya Samriddhi Yojana (SSY): Launched in 2015, SSY promotes the welfare of girl children.
    • It encourages parents to invest in funds for the girl's future studies and marriage expenses.
  • Balika Samriddhi Yojana: This central government scheme supports girls in financially vulnerable sections.
    • Ensures the enrollment and retention of girl children in primary and secondary schools, emphasizing quality education.

Revival of the tiger: A joint effort, a cultural renaissance (Indian Express)

  • 06 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

Jim Corbett Tiger Reserve has achieved success through comprehensive conservation strategies, including habitat protection, community involvement, and ecological sustainability. The reserve's efforts focus on maintaining a balance between wildlife conservation and the well-being of local communities, showcasing a commitment to the coexistence of both nature and people.

Background:

  • India has a profound history of forest and wildlife conservation, marked by a notable achievement at the Corbett Tiger Reserve (CTR) in Uttarakhand.
  • CTR has seen the successful implementation of comprehensive efforts and strategies, resulting not only in a remarkable rise in the tiger population but also establishing itself as a global exemplar in wildlife management.

About Jim Corbett National Park:

  • Established in 1936 as Hailey National Park, Jim Corbett National Park holds the distinction of being India's first national park.
  • In 1973, it gained Tiger Reserve status, becoming the pioneer in the Project Tiger initiative.
  • Nestled in the Shivalik hills of the Himalayas, Corbett Tiger Reserve spans across the Pauri Garhwal, Nainital, and Almora districts of Uttarakhand.
  • Renowned for its global record, it proudly hosts the highest tiger density, reaching 260 in 2022, a notable increase from 231 four years earlier.

Cultural and Economic Significance of Tigers in India:

  • Beyond ecological importance, the tiger carries profound cultural and historical significance in India.
  • The resurgence of tiger populations, particularly at CTR, represents a cultural revival and the renewed embrace of conservation values.
  • The thriving eco-tourism industry illustrates the economic interdependence between local communities and tigers, highlighting the profound connection between wildlife and people at CTR.

An Overview of Effective Biodiversity and Tiger Conservation Plan at CTR:

  • Implementation of a Comprehensive Strategy: CTR owes its success to the meticulous execution of the Tiger Conservation Plan, focusing on the well-being of both tiger populations and broader biodiversity.
    • Spanning 1288.31 sq km across Uttarakhand, CTR showcases the plan's efficacy in nurturing a flourishing ecosystem.
  • Clear Division of Core and Buffer Zones: The foundation of the Tiger Conservation Plan lies in delineating core and buffer zones within the reserve, offering wildlife a sanctuary.
    • Core zones provide undisturbed habitats crucial for breeding, while buffer zones minimize conflicts between human settlements and wildlife.
  • Increase in Tiger Population: Recent statistics highlight a significant rise in CTR's tiger population, from 231 to 260 in just four years.
    • This surge underscores the plan's success, safeguarding not only tigers but also the overall health and balance of the forest ecosystem.
  • Maintenance of Rich Biodiversity: CTR's success extends beyond tiger numbers, encompassing a biodiverse landscape that attracts researchers, conservationists, and tourists.
    • The diverse flora and fauna contribute to ecological balance, fostering harmonious coexistence between predator and prey.
  • Promotion of Ecotourism and Conservation: CTR's vibrant ecosystem has made it a hub for ecotourism, creating economic opportunities for local communities.
    • Tourists contribute to both nature appreciation and the local economy, making conservation and tourism mutually beneficial.
  •  Effective Grassland and Water Management: CTR employs a nuanced approach to grassland management with 27 grassland types, crucial for sustaining prey species.
    • Strategic water management, including solar-pump-fed waterholes, supports diverse wildlife needs, ensuring a sustainable ecosystem.
  • Dedicated Forest Staff: The dedicated forest staff, comprising foot-soldiers, mahouts, and guards, are integral to CTR's success.
    • Initiatives like timely wages and enhanced safety measures underscore the importance placed on the well-being of these unsung heroes.
  • Focus on Wildlife Corridors and Habitat Protection: CTR prioritizes wildlife corridors for gene pool exchange, aligning with the Tiger Conservation Plan's recommendations.

Human-Wildlife Conflict at CTR:

  • Increasing Incidents and Challenges: The upsurge in conflicts between humans, elephants, and tigers at CTR stems from factors like habitat encroachment, limited animal corridors, and the behavioral conditioning of predators.
    • Straying milch and domestic animals from villages become easy prey for tigers, leading to predatory behavior towards humans, especially in buffer forest areas.
  • The Complexity of 'Wicked Problems': Described as a 'wicked problem' due to its intricate nature, human-wildlife conflict at CTR requires a nuanced and context-specific approach.
    •  CTR emphasizes the significance of every solution attempt, recognizing that there's no one-size-fits-all remedy, and continuous adaptation and innovation are essential for evolving conflict scenarios.

Strategies Implemented for Human-Wildlife Conflict Mitigation and Co-Existence Promotion at CTR:

  • Forest Department Initiatives: Proactive measures by the forest department at CTR have successfully eliminated poaching activities, particularly along the sensitive southern boundary.
    • Dedicated foot soldiers, along with digital surveillance through the electronic-eye project, have played a pivotal role in reducing wildlife threats.
  • Community Engagement Strategies: Community engagement is fundamental to CTR's approach to resolving human-wildlife conflicts.
    • Local stakeholders actively participate in conservation through initiatives like the Living with Tigers program, engaging villagers and school children in behavioral and response awareness.
    • This educational effort aims to deepen understanding of wildlife behavior patterns and promote practices that enhance safety for both humans and animals.
  • Provision of Economic Incentives for Conservation: The forest department has initiated projects offering economic incentives for conservation, such as the beehive-fencing project.
    • Strategically placing beehives along village-forest borders, the resulting Corbee Honey brand is managed by local Eco Development Committees (EDCs), fostering economic cooperation and coexistence with local stakeholders.

Conclusion

  • Corbett Tiger Reserve emerges as a triumph in wildlife conservation, embodying a comprehensive and integrated approach. Through careful habitat management and community engagement, CTR exemplifies the promise of sustainable coexistence between humans and wildlife. As an integral chapter in India's conservation story, the ongoing success of the reserve relies on the collaborative endeavors of the forest department, local communities, and passionate conservation advocates.

To avoid worst-case scenarios, the need for fiscal correction is all the more vital this election year (The Hindu)

  • 05 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News

The recent observations by the International Monetary Fund (IMF) sparked reactions from the Indian Government in which it states that India’s general government debt, including the Centre and States, could be 100% of GDP under adverse circumstances by fiscal 2028.

Context:

  • India’s economic landscape has undergone scrutiny as the International Monetary Fund (IMF) made two noteworthy observations.
  • The IMF report not only acknowledged India’s effective inflation management but also presented a balanced outlook for the country’s economic growth.
  • To analyze the IMF’s insights on India’s economic situation, one must understand the broader global context in which these observations were made.

Insights from the IMF on India's Economic Landscape:

Exchange Rate Reclassification:

  • A pivotal observation by the IMF is the reclassification of India's exchange rate regime from floating to a stabilised arrangement.
  • This reclassification raises questions about the flexibility of the currency and its alignment with market forces, indicating a perception of a more controlled and stabilised environment, potentially influenced by central bank (RBI) interventions.

Debt Sustainability Concerns:

  • The IMF expresses significant concerns about the long-term sustainability of India's debts.
  • The report projects that, under adverse circumstances, India's general government debt could reach 100% of GDP by fiscal 2028.
  • This highlights the imperative for careful debt management strategies, particularly as India confronts substantial investment requirements to meet climate change mitigation targets and enhance resilience to climate stresses and natural disasters.
  • It's crucial to note that these IMF insights are framed within the global context of increasing public debts, recognizing that India's economic challenges are interconnected within a complex web of global economic phenomena.

The Global Debt Scenario in a Broader Context:

Dual Nature of Debt: Accelerator vs. Drag on Development:

  • Globally, government borrowings have been instrumental in fostering development, supporting infrastructure projects, social programs, and economic growth.
  • However, the IMF's concerns emphasize the potential drawbacks of this strategy, as limitations in accessing financing, rising borrowing costs, currency devaluations, and sluggish growth can transform debt from a catalyst into a hindrance.
  • The United Nations' assertion that countries face a challenging dilemma between servicing their debt or serving their people encapsulates the inherent difficulty in managing debt for sustainable development.

Surging Global Public Debt Trends:

  • According to the UN, global public debt has surged more than fourfold since 2000, surpassing the tripling of global GDP over the same period.
  • In 2022, global public debt reached USD 92 trillion, with developing countries contributing nearly 30% to the total, and China, India, and Brazil accounting for a significant portion (70%).
  • The acceleration of debt in developing nations over the past decade is attributed to heightened development financing needs exacerbated by the COVID-19 pandemic, the cost-of-living crisis, and the impact of climate change.

Asymmetric Burden on Developing Countries:

  • The burden of debt is unevenly distributed between developed and developing nations, with developing countries often facing higher interest rates even without considering exchange rate fluctuations.
  • This well-documented disparity reveals that countries in Africa, for instance, borrow at rates four times higher than the United States and eight times higher than Germany, undermining the debt sustainability of developing economies.

Increasing Debt Levels and the IMF's Perspective:

  • The number of countries grappling with high levels of debt has surged from 22 in 2011 to 59 in 2022, highlighting persistent debt challenges in developing nations.
  • The IMF's projections for India should be understood in the broader context of a global debt conundrum.

Challenges Facing India's Economic Landscape:

Increasing Public Debt:

  • The central government's debt, amounting to ?155.6 trillion, constitutes 57.1% of GDP as of March 2023, with state government debts accounting for about 28% of GDP.
  • Despite claims by the Finance Ministry that India's public debt-to-GDP ratio has marginally increased from 81% in 2005-06 to 84% in 2021-22, the 2022-23 figures indicate a return to 81%, surpassing targets set by the Fiscal Responsibility and Budget Management Act (FRBMA).

Balancing Public Debt for Sustainability:

  • A significant challenge for India lies in achieving a delicate balance to ensure that public debt remains within sustainable levels.
  • IMF projections indicate that India's general government debt, inclusive of both central and state governments, could reach 100% of GDP by fiscal 2028 under adverse circumstances, underscoring the need for meticulous debt management strategies.

Stagnant Credit Ratings:

  • Despite being acknowledged as the fastest-growing major economy globally, India's sovereign investment ratings have remained stagnant since August 2006.
  • Both Fitch Ratings and S&P Global Ratings have maintained India's credit rating at 'BBB-' with a stable outlook, the lowest investment-grade level, attributed to factors like weak fiscal performance and a burdensome debt stock.

Emerging Fiscal Challenges:

  • Disruptions caused by the COVID-19 pandemic contribute to the current high debt-GDP ratio, with potential fiscal slippage in FY24 according to India Ratings and Research.
  • Increased expenditure on employment guarantee schemes and subsidies, such as a higher fertiliser subsidy and overspending on the MGNREGA, pose challenges to fiscal stability.

Managing Short-Term Challenges and Election Dynamics:

  • As India approaches general elections, increased subsidies are expected, but questions arise about the impact on employment growth and livelihoods in rural areas.
  • Navigating these short-term challenges in an election year becomes a critical test for maintaining fiscal discipline and avoiding worst-case scenarios.

Way Forward:

  • While the exchange rate reclassification raises potential concerns about excessive management, the focus on debt sustainability underscores the broader call for prudence in managing fiscal policies.
  • The IMF's observations highlight the delicate balancing act India must perform—maintaining a stable exchange rate while ensuring long-term debt sustainability.
  • There is a pressing need for new and preferably concessional sources of financing, increased private sector investment, and the implementation of carbon pricing or equivalent mechanisms to address long-term risks.

Conclusion:

Navigating the multifaceted challenges outlined by the IMF, India finds itself at a crucial juncture, necessitating a strategic approach to economic management. The IMF's observations, addressing concerns about debt sustainability and the reclassification of the exchange rate regime, underscore the importance of nuanced decision-making and long-term planning.

Qatar court drops death penalty for 8 Indians, Govt says sentences reduced (Indian Express)

  • 29 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

A Qatar court has reduced the death sentences awarded to eight former Indian Navy personnel last month in connection with an alleged case of espionage.

What is the Case?

  • Arrest of Eight Navy Personnel: On August 30, 2022, eight former Indian Navy personnel, accompanied by two others, were apprehended under undisclosed charges and subsequently placed in solitary confinement.
    • These individuals were affiliated with Al Dahra Global Technologies and Consultancy Services, a defense services provider company.
    • Sources indicate that the Indian nationals were privately engaged with the company to supervise the induction of Italian small stealth submarines U2I2.
    • The company's previous website, now defunct, mentioned its provision of training, logistics, and maintenance services to the Qatari Emiri Naval Force (QENF).
  • Charges Against the Men: The specific charges against the individuals have not been publicly disclosed; however, media reports suggest that the eight Indians are accused of espionage on behalf of Israel.
  • Death Penalty for Navy Veterans: In March 2023, after multiple unsuccessful bail pleas, the trial for the Navy veterans commenced, culminating on October 26, 2023, with the imposition of the death sentence on all eight men.
  • India's Appeal: In November 2023, the Ministry of External Affairs (MEA) announced the filing of an appeal, revealing that its legal team possessed details of the charges.
    • The Indian ambassador in Doha visited the incarcerated individuals on December 3, providing consular access.
    • This access occurred shortly after Prime Minister Modi met Qatar’s Emir Sheikh Tamim bin Hamad Al-Thani during the COP28 summit in Dubai on December 1.

What Options Has India Explored?

  • One avenue involves legal challenges, a step that has been acknowledged and has temporarily mitigated the sentence.
  • Concurrently, India has actively utilized diplomatic channels to engage with the Qatari authorities.
  • The families have submitted a mercy plea to the Emir of Qatar, leveraging the tradition of pardons granted during Ramadan and Eid, with support from the Indian government.

India-Qatar Bilateral Relations:

  • Economic Ties: In recent years, the trade volume between India and Qatar has witnessed fluctuations.
    • During the fiscal year 2015-2016, trade between the two nations reached an impressive $10 billion.
    • However, recent years have seen a slight decline in trade due to falling gas and oil rates in the international market.
  • Trade Statistics and Import Dependence: In the fiscal year 2022-23, India's total imports from Qatar amounted to $16.81 billion, primarily in fossil fuels like liquefied petroleum gas (LPG), plastics, and petrochemical products.
    • Conversely, India's exports to Qatar during the same fiscal year were valued at $1.97 billion, covering items such as cereals, copper articles, iron and steel products, vegetables, fruits, spices, and processed food items.
  • Investment Interests and Collaborative Projects: Qatari authorities, particularly the Qatar Investment Authority, express interest in investing in India, focusing on infrastructure development, roads, highways, economic corridors, and projects related to gas and fertilizers.
    • India reciprocates with a keen interest in direct investments in liquefied natural gas, chemical industries, fertilizer production, urea, petrochemicals, and infrastructure projects.
  • India's Growing Energy Needs: India, with its growing energy needs, has a robust energy partnership with Qatar, dating back to a 1990 agreement.
    • This commitment involves India purchasing 7.5 million tonnes of LNG annually for 25 years.
    • The collaboration was further strengthened in December 2015, with Qatar agreeing to augment its LNG supply to India by an additional one million tonnes annually.
  • Collaboration in Defence Affairs: India's defense collaboration with Qatar focuses on training, mutual participation in conferences and events, and visits by Indian Navy and Coast Guard vessels.
    • Notably, the joint naval exercise 'Zair-Al-Bahr' showcases significant cooperation between the Indian and Qatari Navies.
    • Both nations are committed to combating the financing of terrorism.
  • Cultural Interaction: The Indian Cultural Centre (ICC) plays a crucial role in overseeing Indian community associations in Doha.
    • Qatar's role as a co-sponsor of the United Nations General Assembly Resolution designating June 21 as the International Day of Yoga is highly valued by India.
  • Indian Diaspora in Qatar: The Indian community in Qatar, numbering approximately 700,000, constitutes the largest expatriate group.
    • Their contributions span diverse sectors, including projects related to the Qatar 2022 FIFA World Cup, and annual remittances to India are estimated at around 750 million dollars.
  • Indispensable Role of Qatar as an LNG Supplier: The cornerstone of the bilateral trade relationship lies in liquefied natural gas (LNG), where Qatar plays a pivotal role by meeting 80% of India's LNG requirements.
    • India imported a total of 19.85 million tonnes of LNG in the fiscal year 2022-23, with approximately 54% of this LNG.
    • This significant reliance on Qatar, both through long-term contracts and spot purchases, underscores the challenge of diversifying India’s sources of LNG.

Challenges in India-Qatar Bilateral Relations:

  • BJP Spokesperson's Controversy: The initial strain in the relationship arose in June 2022 when BJP spokesperson Nupur Sharma made derogatory references to the Prophet on a TV show.
    • Qatar was the first country to object and demanded a public apology from India.
  • Jailing of Navy Personnel: The second significant challenge involves the imprisonment of eight ex-Navy personnel.
    • This development caught New Delhi off guard, particularly given the substantial Indian expatriate community in Qatar, where 800,000 Indians live and work.
  • Israeli-Gaza Conflict: The news of the death penalty for the Indians coincided with heightened tensions in the Middle East due to the Israeli bombardment of Gaza.
    • Qatar, with its strong sympathy for the Palestinians, has played a mediating role, including securing the release of American hostages from Hamas captivity.
    • Qatar's diplomats are actively engaged as regional mediators in the ongoing crisis.

Maximizing Opportunities for Strengthened Relations:

  • Safeguarding Expatriate Workers: India must engage in negotiations aimed at ensuring the protection of the rights and well-being of its expatriate workers in Qatar, who have encountered various labour-related challenges.
  • Cultural Exchange and Soft Power: Recognizing the widespread popularity of Bollywood among Qataris, India should actively explore diverse avenues for cultural exchange to amplify its soft power influence.
    • This cultural diplomacy can serve as a bridge for deeper understanding between the two nations.
  • Cooperation in the Education Sector: The presence of esteemed Western universities in Qatar presents an opportunity for Indian students to access quality education abroad without the usual constraints of long distances and high living costs.
    • Strengthening cooperation in the education sector can further elevate the resilience and depth of the India-Qatar relationship, even in the face of seemingly intractable diplomatic challenges.
  • Collaborative Environmental Sustainability: India and Qatar can forge a collaborative path towards fostering a cleaner and more energy-efficient environment.
    • Joint efforts in environmental sustainability can contribute to shared global goals.

Indian banks reports card: Asset quality improves to fresh 10-year high, balance sheet grows by highest in 9 years (The Hindu)

  • 28 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

Indian banks continued to show improvement in their asset quality, with the gross non-performing asset (GNPA) ratio reaching a new decadal low as of September-end, according to a report by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI).

Key Points from the 'Trend and Progress of Banking in India' Report:

  • The Gross Non-Performing Assets (GNPA) ratio of Scheduled Commercial Banks (SCBs) reached a decade-low of 3.9% by the end of March 2023, further declining to 3.2% by the end of September 2023.
  • In the fiscal year 2022-23, approximately 45% of the reduction in Gross Non-Performing Assets (GNPAs) of SCBs was attributed to recoveries and upgrades.
    • The consolidated balance sheet of banks witnessed a notable growth of 12.2% in 2022-23, marking the highest in 9 years.
  • The share of Public Sector Banks (PSBs) in the consolidated balance sheet decreased from 58.6% in March 2022 to 57.6% in March 2023, while private banks saw an increase from 34% to 34.7%.
    • As of March 2023, PSBs accounted for 61.4% of total deposits and 57.9% of total advances.
  • With inflation persisting above the target, there is a possibility that monetary policy could remain in restrictive territory for an extended period.
  • Acknowledging the growing interconnectedness between banks and Non-Banking Financial Companies (NBFCs), the report suggests that NBFCs diversify their funding sources and reduce reliance on bank funding.
  • The central bank expresses concerns about banks lending to borrowers with influence, highlighting moral hazard issues that may compromise pricing and credit management.
  • The Indian banking system is well-positioned for improvement, boasting better asset quality, high capital adequacy, and robust profitability.
  • The financial indicators of NBFCs are anticipated to strengthen further, contributing to the overall resilience of the financial sector.

What are Non-Performing Assets (NPAs)?

  • Non-performing assets (NPAs) refer to loans or advances in which the principal or interest payments have been overdue for a period exceeding 90 days.
    • In the context of banks, loans are considered assets due to the significant income generated through interest payments.
  • When borrowers, whether individuals or corporations, fail to meet their interest obligations, the asset turns 'non-performing' for the bank, as it ceases to contribute to the bank's earnings.
  • As per the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) guidelines, banks must publicly disclose their NPAs and report them to the RBI regularly.

The classification of NPAs includes:

    • Substandard assets: Loans that have been non-performing for up to 12 months.
    • Doubtful assets: Assets that have remained in the substandard category for a period of 12 months.
    • Loss assets: Assets deemed uncollectible, with little value, making their continuation as bankable assets unwarranted.
  • NPA Provisioning involves setting aside a certain percentage of the loan amount as a provision.
    • The standard rate of provisioning in Indian banks ranges from 5-20%, depending on the business sector and borrower's repayment capacity.
    • In the case of NPAs, Basel-III norms require 100% provisioning.

Key metrics for understanding the NPA situation include Gross NPA (GNPA) and Net NPA (NNPA):

  • GNPA: Represents the total value of gross NPAs for a bank in a specific quarter or financial year.
  • NNPA: Obtained by subtracting the provisions made by the bank from the gross NPA, providing the precise value of NPAs after specific provisions.
    • NPA Ratios express NPAs as a percentage of total advances, offering insights into the recoverability of total advances. For example:
  • GNPA ratio: The ratio of total GNPA to total advances.
  • NNPA ratio: Utilizes net NPA to determine the ratio to total advances, considering the specific provisions made by the bank.

Government and RBI Initiatives to Address NPAs:

To tackle the issue of Non-Performing Assets (NPAs), the Indian government has implemented a series of comprehensive measures in collaboration with the Reserve Bank of India (RBI).

  • Establishment of a Bad Bank: National Asset Reconstruction Ltd (NARC), operates as an asset reconstruction company with the primary objective of purchasing distressed loans from banks, thereby alleviating them of the burden of NPAs.
    • Once acquired, NARC endeavors to sell these problematic loans to distressed debt buyers.
    • Additionally, the government has established the India Debt Resolution Company Ltd (IDRCL) to facilitate the sale of stressed assets in the market.
  • Empowering Banks through the SARFAESI Act, 2002: The Securitization and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest (SARFAESI) Act, enacted in 2002, empowers banks and financial institutions to take possession of collateral assets and execute their sale for the recovery of outstanding dues.
    • Crucially, this process does not necessitate intervention from the court.
    • The SARFAESI Act also provides provisions for enforcing security interests, allowing banks to issue demand notices to defaulting borrowers.
  • Holistic Approach with the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC), 2016: The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC) establishes a comprehensive framework for the resolution of insolvency and bankruptcy in India.
    • It is designed to expedite the resolution process for stressed assets, fostering a creditor-friendly environment.
    • Under the IBC, both debtors and creditors have the authority to initiate insolvency proceedings against defaulting borrowers.
    • The creation of the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) and the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (IBBI) ensures effective oversight of the resolution process.

Significance of NPA Recovery:

  • The recovery of NPAs assumes paramount importance in safeguarding the interests of depositors and stakeholders.
  • Emphasizing compromise settlements, the focus should be on achieving maximum dues recovery with minimal expenses and within an expedited timeframe.
  • In the pursuit of compromise settlements, public sector banks are urged to prioritize the interests of the tax-paying public over the borrowers.
  • This aligns with the broader goal of ensuring that resolutions serve the greater public good.

 

PLI is good for high-end manufacturing, but industrial policy is the best bet for mass job creation (Indian Express)

  • 27 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

  • While India has experienced positive outcomes from liberalization efforts, it is important to acknowledge a significant shortcoming—the country did not successfully establish a robust manufacturing foundation and underwent premature de-industrialization.
  • It's crucial to recognize that no nation has achieved industrialization solely through deregulation.
  • To facilitate the structural transformation of the economy, the implementation of a well-crafted industrial policy becomes imperative, with thoughtfully selected import restrictions serving as a key component of this policy mechanism.

The Make in India (MII) Initiative and Its Goals:

  • Make in India Campaign: Officially inaugurated by Prime Minister Modi in September 2014, the Make in India campaign is a strategic effort aimed at advancing manufacturing, attracting foreign direct investment (FDI), fostering innovation, and generating employment opportunities within the nation.

Objectives of the Make in India:

  • Advancing Manufacturing: The initiative strives to elevate India's status to a global manufacturing hub by encouraging both domestic and international companies to establish manufacturing units within the country.
  • Attracting Foreign Investment: Make in India seeks to allure foreign direct investment by streamlining the business environment, simplifying regulatory norms, and providing incentives to foreign companies for investing in India's manufacturing sector.
  • Infrastructure Enhancement: Emphasizing infrastructure development, the campaign focuses on improving key elements such as roads, ports, and logistics to ensure the seamless operation of manufacturing units.
  • Skill Development: Recognizing the pivotal role of a skilled workforce in a thriving manufacturing sector, Make in India incorporates initiatives to enhance the skill sets of the Indian workforce, aligning them with the requirements of modern manufacturing.
  • Innovation and Technology: The campaign places a significant emphasis on fostering innovation and integrating modern technology into manufacturing processes.
    • This strategic approach aims to enhance efficiency and competitiveness in the manufacturing sector.

Differentiating Made in India (MII) from Previous Policies:

  • The Make in India campaign, launched in 2014, represents a departure from the self-sufficiency doctrine that India adopted in the 1970s.
    • It does not bring back memories of the licensing raj or import-substituting industries of the past.
  • While concerns have been expressed about the implementation of Make in India, particularly in certain sectors where tariff duties are raised to provide protection and incentivize the establishment of domestic industries, it is crucial to note that the campaign is fundamentally different.
    • Worries about a potential spread of protectionist tendencies to other sectors, though possibly overstated, are not entirely unfounded, especially for those who experienced the challenges of the 1970s and 1980s.
  • During those years, indiscriminate protectionism led to shortages, black markets, and widespread rent-seeking, all ostensibly in the name of the poor and distributive justice.
    • Producers who benefited from such protection actively advocated for its continuation.
    • Importantly, considering that an average mobile phone manufactured in India consists of 80-85 percent imported content (India Cellular and Electronics Association, 2022), it is empirically evident that Make in India significantly differs from the concept of self-sufficiency.
  • Given these empirical distinctions, it is imperative to move beyond baseless comparisons and recognize the unique nature of the Make in India initiative.

Evaluation of Commitments and Performance of Make in India:

  • A Sizeable Domestic Market Falls Short of Competitiveness in Exports: Make in India (MII) encompasses two related concepts, namely Made in India and Make for India, with MII serving as the foundational and overarching policy.
    • While Made for India focuses on manufacturing for the domestic market, it is essential to recognize that a substantial domestic market alone does not substitute for the crucial aspect of export competitiveness.
      • Historical examples, such as Japan, Korea, and China, underscore that export competitiveness has been a common feature of nations that have experienced significant economic growth.
  • The necessity of an Effective Make in India Operation: Made in India functions as a branding strategy, promoting manufacturers rooted in Indian factors of production—land, labor, capital, entrepreneurship, technology, etc.
    • However, the success of Made in India hinges on the effectiveness of the broader Make in India operation.
  • Alignment with National Manufacturing Policy (NMP 2011): Make in India was launched as a follow-up to prior initiatives, particularly the National Manufacturing Policy (NMP) of 2011, which aimed to cultivate a robust and competitive manufacturing sector.
    • The NMP 2011 identified challenges such as inadequate physical infrastructure, a complex regulatory environment, and insufficient availability of skilled manpower hindering manufacturing growth.
    • The policy set ambitious targets, including raising the manufacturing contribution to GDP from a stagnant 15 percent since the 1980s to at least 25 percent and generating 100 million additional jobs.
  • Dynamic Objectives of Make in India: Beyond the objectives outlined in the NMP 2011, Make in India aspires to elevate India into a global design and manufacturing export hub.
    • In essence, Make in India envisions a transformation where India becomes a manufacturing powerhouse catering to the global market.

Requirement for Supplementary Industrial Policy Measures During Ongoing PLI Implementation:

  • Diversified Articulation Beyond Production Linked Incentive (PLI): Beyond the current implementation of the Production Linked Incentive (PLI) scheme, there is a crucial need for an additional industrial policy tailored to sectors such as toys, readymade garments, and footwear.
    • A more nuanced and sector-specific articulation of industrial policies is essential to meet the unique requirements of diverse sectors.
  • Emphasis on Job Creation: Industrial policy must prioritize job creation, especially in a country abundant in labour but with average educational attainments and skills.
    • Policies should be designed to create productive job opportunities, particularly focusing on labour-intensive manufacturing and opening avenues for women in the workforce.
  • Addressing the Jobless Growth Critique: Acknowledging the criticism of jobless growth, the absence of quality jobs with social protection has contributed to this narrative.
    • Industrial policies should explicitly target mass job creation, considering both job quality and the provision of social protection.
  • Navigating the Challenges of Inclusive Policy Formulation: The government should confront the complexities of formulating industrial policies that foster mass job creation, especially in comparison to policies solely focused on exports.
    • Inclusive policies that align with the overarching goal of creating high-quality jobs and ensuring social protection are essential.
  • Treating Job Creation as the Benchmark: The effectiveness of industrial policies should be assessed based on their impact on mass job creation in India.
    • This underscores the significance of addressing concerns related to jobless growth and prioritizing policies that generate inclusive and high-quality employment opportunities.
  • Confronting Labor Market Challenges: India's labour market research indicates the prevalence of low-paying, low-productivity, and largely informal jobs in the unorganized sector.
    • With more than 99 percent of India's 63 million micro, small, and medium enterprises (MSMEs) in the unorganized sector, there is limited flexibility for creating productive jobs.
  • The assessment of how Make in India, complemented by other policies, has addressed these challenges is crucial.
    • However, the lack of frequent and short-interval official data poses a significant hurdle, necessitating attention to enhance policy efficacy through more regular and timely data collection.

Conclusion

A thorough examination of the nation's circumstances and capabilities is imperative for effective government decision-making.

  • India must formulate an industrial policy that extends the advantages of technological advancements beyond just the privileged laptop class.
  • However, it is essential to exercise caution in steering discussions on industrial policy, avoiding the pitfalls of showmanship, theoretical oversimplification, or misleading historical comparisons.
  • The global landscape demands that India adopt a substantive industrial policy, placing a genuine emphasis on the significance of manufacturing.
  • In this context, it is evident that there is no substitute for a well-considered and serious industrial policy.

Women participation in NREGS continues to rise, by 59% this fiscal (Indian Express)

  • 26 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

As per the Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS), published by the Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation, the female Labour Force Participation Rate has increased in the country in recent years.

News Summary:

  • Recent data highlights a significant surge in women's engagement in the Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme (MGNREGS), reaching its highest point in a decade.
    • In the fiscal year 2022-23, women accounted for 57.47% of person-days, showcasing a notable increase from the previous year's 54.82%.
  • Analyzing the broader landscape, statistics from the NREGS portal for the period up to December 24, 2023, reveal that out of a total of 238.62 crore person-days, women contributed 141.37 crore person-days, constituting an impressive 59.25%.
  • The Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS), conducted by the Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation, provides further insights into the evolving dynamics of female labor force participation in the country.
    • Notably, the Female Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR) has witnessed a substantial uptick in recent years, particularly in rural areas.
    • In the rural context, the LFPR soared to 30.5% in 2022-23 (July-June), a significant leap from 18.2% recorded in 2017-18.
  • Complementing this positive trend, the female unemployment rate has experienced a noteworthy decline, dropping to 1.8% in 2022-23 from 3.8% in 2017-18.
    • These statistics collectively underscore a positive trajectory in women's participation and employment, signaling progressive changes in the socio-economic landscape.

What is Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA)?

  • The National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (NREGA) came into effect in September 2005.
    • In 2009, an amendment renamed the Act to the Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA).
  • Mandate: MGNREGA is designed with the primary objective of offering a minimum of 100 days of guaranteed wage employment within a financial year to every rural household whose adult members willingly engage in unskilled manual labor.
    • The operationalization of this guarantee is facilitated through the Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme (Mahatma Gandhi NREGS).
  • Funding Structure: As a Centrally-Sponsored Scheme, MGNREGS receives joint financial backing from both the Central government and the State governments.
    • This collaborative funding approach underscores the shared commitment to addressing rural employment challenges.
  • Administrative Oversight: The Ministry of Rural Development is the overseeing authority responsible for the implementation and management of MGNREGS, emphasizing the central role of rural development in realizing the objectives of this significant initiative.

Key Characteristics of the Program:

  • Enshrined Legal Entitlement: MGNREGA establishes a legal assurance for wage employment, granting every rural household the right to enroll in the program. Notably, the scheme mandates that at least one-third of its beneficiaries must be women. Legal provisions are in place to address situations where work is not provided on demand or when there are delays in wage payments, ensuring accountability and fair compensation.
  • Demand-Driven Structure: This initiative operates on a demand-driven framework, responding to the explicit requests for work from wage-seekers. The provision of employment is triggered by the expressed demand, creating a responsive system that aligns with the needs of the community.
  • Decentralized Implementation Model: State governments wield the authority to establish rules and modify relevant state schemes, fostering a decentralized mode of implementation. Gram Panchayats (GPs) play a crucial role by executing at least 50% of the work in terms of cost. Decision-making processes, including plans for works, site selection, and the order in which each task is initiated, occur in open assemblies of the Gram Sabha, ensuring community involvement and transparency.
  • Parliamentary Accountability: An Annual Report, compiled by the Central Employment Guarantee Council (CEGC), detailing the outcomes of MGNREGA, is mandated to be presented annually to the Parliament by the Central Government. The CEGC, established under Section 10 of MGNREGA, is chaired by the Union Minister for Rural Development.
  • Nationwide Coverage: MGNREGA extends its coverage across the entire country, with the exception of districts that boast a one hundred percent urban population, reflecting its comprehensive reach and impact.

Key Accomplishments of the MGNREGA Scheme:

Achievements in 2022-23:

  • Employment opportunities were provided to 11.37 crore households.
  • A total of 289.24 crore person-days of employment were generated, with specific allocations as follows:
    • 56.19% for women
    • 19.75% for Scheduled Castes (SCs)
    • 17.47% for Scheduled Tribes (STs).

What are the Challenges in Implementing the Scheme?

  • Delay and Insufficiency in Funds Disbursement: Many states have not adhered to the mandated 15-day wage disbursement timeline under MGNREGA.
    • Moreover, workers face a lack of compensation for delayed wage payments, transforming the scheme into a supply-based program.
    • Consequently, worker interest in participating has waned.
    • Evidence, including a Ministry of Finance admission, points to insufficient funds as a key factor behind delays in wage payments.
  • Caste-Based Disparities: Notable discrepancies in payment delays exist along caste lines.
    • While 46% of payments to Scheduled Caste (SC) workers and 37% to Scheduled Tribe (ST) workers were completed within the stipulated seven days, non-SC/ST workers experienced a dismal 26% compliance.
    • The adverse effects of caste-based disparities are particularly pronounced in economically challenged states like Madhya Pradesh, Jharkhand, Odisha, and West Bengal.
  • Ineffective Role of Panchayati Raj Institutions (PRIs): Gram Panchayats, lacking autonomy, struggle to implement the act efficiently. Limited decision-making authority hampers their effectiveness in executing MGNREGA.
  • High Number of Incomplete Projects: Delays in project completion and irregular project inspections pose challenges to MGNREGA.
    • Additionally, concerns regarding the quality of work and asset creation persist within the scheme.
  • Fabrication of Job Cards: Issues related to the existence of fake job cards, inclusion of fictitious names, missing entries, and delays in updating job cards contribute to administrative challenges within the program.

Way Forward

  • Enhanced Coordination among Government Departments: Improved collaboration is essential among various government departments and the development of a streamlined mechanism for the allocation and measurement of work.
    • This will contribute to a more efficient and transparent execution of projects.
  • Addressing Gender Pay Disparities: Efforts should be directed towards rectifying discrepancies in payouts, particularly addressing the gender pay gap.
    • Currently, women in the sector earn, on average, 22.24% less than their male counterparts, emphasizing the need for gender-inclusive policies and fair remuneration practices.
  • Prompt Commencement of Public Works: State governments should ensure the prompt initiation of public works in every village.
    • Workers arriving at worksites should be swiftly provided with employment opportunities, minimizing delays and optimizing the scheme's effectiveness.
  • Empowering Gram Panchayats: Gram Panchayats should be equipped with ample resources, authority, and responsibilities to sanction works, meet demands for employment, and authorize timely wage payments.
    • This empowerment is crucial to eliminate delays in payments and enhance the efficiency of grassroots administration.
  • Convergence with Other Government Initiatives: MGNREGA should be strategically aligned and integrated with other government schemes, such as the Green India initiative and Swachh Bharat Abhiyan.
    • This convergence will maximize the impact and effectiveness of these programs, fostering a synergistic approach towards holistic rural development.

French President Emmanuel Macron to be chief guest for 2024 Republic Day parade (Indian Express)

  • 23 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

FRENCH President Emmanuel Macron will visit India as Chief Guest for the 75th Republic Day celebrations, the Ministry of External Affairs said Friday, days after it became clear that US President Joe Biden will be unavailable.

Context:

  • The Ministry of External Affairs in India has announced that French President Emmanuel Macron is set to honour the 75th Republic Day celebrations as the Chief Guest.
  • This decision comes in the wake of the unavailability of US President Joe Biden, marking the sixth occasion where a French leader will partake in the Republic Day festivities.

An Overview of  Bilateral Relations Between France and India:

  • Since the establishment of diplomatic ties in 1948, India and France have enjoyed 75 years of close and friendly relations.
  • In 1998, India and France elevated their diplomatic relationship to a Strategic Partnership which completed 25 years in January 2023.
  • This Strategic Partnership, the first for France outside the EU, has been instrumental in the comprehensive growth of the India-France relationship.

Key Elements of India-France Cooperation:

  • Economic Ties: Both nations share substantial bilateral investments and engage in trade and commercial cooperation, particularly in sectors like IT corridors, smart cities, railways, capital and trade exchanges, and skill development.
    • Bilateral trade witnessed a notable 7.72% increase, reaching $13.4 billion in 2022-23
  • Defence Partnership: The Agreement on Defence Cooperation, initially signed in 2006 and extended for an additional decade in 2016, serves as the overarching framework for all collaborative defence activities between India and France.
  • Space Collaboration: The Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) and the French Space Agency (CNES) collaborate on various joint research programs and satellite launches.
    • An example is the successful launch of the GSAT-24 communication satellite in June 2022.
  • Civil Nuclear Cooperation: Formalized in 2008, the agreement on civil nuclear cooperation endorses joint efforts.
    • India's involvement in ITER, a multinational initiative constructing an experimental fusion reactor in Cadarache, France, further solidifies this partnership.
  • Trilateral Engagements: Beyond bilateral discussions, both nations engage in separate trilateral institutional exchanges, with India participating in dialogues alongside Australia and France collaborating with the UAE.
  • Marine and Maritime Partnership: The Indo-French Maritime Cooperation, guided by the India-France Roadmap on Blue Economy and Ocean Governance adopted in 2022, underscores joint efforts in marine and maritime domains.
  • Digital Collaboration: The India-France Roadmap on Cybersecurity and Digital Technologies, a result of the 2019 visit by the Prime Minister of India to France, underlines the commitment to digital cooperation.
  • Cultural and Tourism Relations: Numerous Indo-French cultural associations orchestrate events across France.
    • For instance, the 'Namaste France' cultural festival organized by the Government of India in 2016 showcased the rich cultural tapestry.
  • Indian Community in France: Comprising around 109,000 individuals, including NRIs, the Indian community in mainland France has roots in French enclaves like Puducherry, Karaikal, Yanam, Mahe, and Chandernagore.
  • Unified Stand on NATO+: Both nations share a stance against the NATO-plus partnership plans, with France publicly expressing disapproval and India rejecting the notion, emphasizing that NATO is not a template applicable to its geopolitical context."

Agreement Between India and France on Various Global and Regional Matters:

  • UN Security Council and UN Reforms: France has consistently endorsed India's pursuit of a permanent seat on the UN Security Council and the broader reforms within the United Nations.
  • Support in International Groups: France played a crucial role in India's inclusion in significant international forums such as the Missile Technology Control Regime (MTCR), Wassenaar Arrangement (WA), and Australia Group (AG).
    • Furthermore, France continues to back India's bid to join the Nuclear Suppliers Group (NSG).
  • Reciprocal Support in Regional Organizations: India actively supported France's membership in the Indian Ocean Rim Association (IORA), and in turn, France backed India's observer status in the Indian Ocean Commission (IOC).
  • Joint Efforts Against Terrorism: Both nations have consistently condemned terrorism and are committed to collaborating for the adoption of the Comprehensive Convention on International Terrorism (CCIT) within the United Nations framework.
  • Shared Concerns on Climate Change: There is a significant convergence of views between India and France on issues related to climate change, renewable energy, and sustainable development.
    • An illustrative instance is the joint announcement of the creation of the International Solar Alliance (ISA) during the 2015 Paris COP21.
    • This alliance aims to promote solar energy as a crucial resource in transitioning away from fossil fuels.

Challenges in the Bilateral Relationship:

  • Trade Limitations: Although the diplomatic relations between France and India are positive, the absence of a Free Trade Agreement (FTA) poses a hurdle, restricting the full realization of trade potential.
    • Additionally, the slow progress on the India-EU Broad-Based Trade and Investment Agreement (BTIA) exacerbates this challenge.
  • Divergent Approaches in Defence and Security Cooperation: Despite a robust defence partnership, differences in priorities and approaches between India and France may influence their defence and security cooperation.
    • India's regional focus and adherence to a "non-aligned" policy could occasionally clash with France's global interests.
  • Intellectual Property Rights Concerns: France has expressed apprehensions regarding India's perceived inadequate protection of intellectual property rights.
    • This concern has implications for French businesses operating within India, creating a point of contention in the bilateral relationship.

Importance of India’s Invitation to the French President for the 75th Republic Day Celebrations:

  • The selection of the French President as the chief guest for the 75th Republic Day celebrations in New Delhi is driven by a multifaceted set of considerations, incorporating strategic, diplomatic, business, global geopolitical, and bilateral engagement imperatives.
  • This year holds particular significance as both nations commemorate the 25th anniversary of the India-France Strategic Partnership.
  • The reciprocal nature of high-level visits underscores the strength of the relationship: the Indian Prime Minister was the Guest of Honour at the Bastille Day Parade in Paris on July 14, 2023, and President Macron visited India for the G-20 Summit on September 8-9, 2023.
  • Notably, in 2022, the Indian Prime Minister made a special stopover in Paris, marking the first meeting between world leaders and President Macron after his re-election for a second term.
    • This visit followed the Indian PM's return from Denmark.
  • In essence, India's invitation to the French President serves as a significant gesture, symbolizing and reinforcing the profound depth of the bilateral relationship between the two nations.

 

Good Governance Day: Last-mile delivery, leaving no one behind is key to growth (Indian Express)

  • 25 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

Good Governance Day 2023 is being celebrated today on the birth anniversary of former Prime Minister Atal Bihari Vajpayee, which falls on December 25th.

About Good Governance Day:

  • December 25 marks the birth anniversary of the late Prime Minister and Bharatiya Janata Party leader, Atal Bihari Vajpayee.
  • Origin: In 2014, the Prime Minister of India Narendra Modi declared December 25 as "Good Governance Day" to be celebrated nationwide.

Significance of Good Governance Day:

  • Raising Governance Awareness: Good Governance Day aims to raise awareness among citizens regarding government accountability and efficient administration.
  • Equitable Treatment of Citizens: This day emphasizes the fair and prompt delivery of various government services to ensure equitable treatment for the country's residents.
  • Advancement of e-Governance: National Good Governance Day endeavors to advance "e-Governance" with the official event slogan being "Good Governance through e-Governance.

What is Good Governance?

  • Governance encompasses the decision-making process and the subsequent implementation (or lack thereof) of those decisions.
    • It manifests in various contexts, including corporate governance, international governance, national governance, and local governance.
  • It is characterized as "the manner in which power is exercised in the management of a country's economic and social resources for development."
    • This concept, rooted in historical perspectives, was elaborated by Chanakya in the Arthashastra.
  • Foundation of Citizens Centric Administration: The cornerstone of a citizens-centric administration lies in the principles of good governance, emphasizing transparency, accountability, and equitable societal development.

8 Principles of Good Governance:

  • Participation: Ensures the inclusion of diverse perspectives, including men, women, vulnerable sections, backward classes, minorities, etc.
    • Upholds freedom of association and expression.
  • Rule of Law: Impartial enforcement of the legal framework, particularly in human rights laws.
    • A foundation for preventing the 'law of fish,' where the strong prevail over the weak.
  • Consensus Oriented: Facilitates decision-making that aims for a common minimum acceptable to everyone, fostering a broad consensus.
    • Mediates differing interests toward a mutually beneficial outcome.
  • Equity and Inclusiveness: Strives for an equitable society, ensuring opportunities for all to enhance or maintain their well-being.
  • Effectiveness and Efficiency: Focuses on processes and institutions that yield results meeting the community's needs.
    • Maximizes the effective utilization of community resources for optimal output.
  • Accountability: Demands accountability from governmental institutions, private sectors, and civil society organizations to the public and institutional stakeholders.
    • Aims for governance that serves the betterment of the people.
  • Transparency: Requires accessible, understandable, and monitored information.
    • Advocates for a free media and public access to information.
  • Responsiveness: Dictates that institutions and processes serve all stakeholders within a reasonable timeframe.

What is the Significance of Good Governance?

  • Safeguarding Public Interests: The implementation of good governance practices is crucial for safeguarding the interests of the public.
  • Optimal Resource Utilization: Good governance empowers organizations to maximize the efficient utilization of available resources, facilitating the delivery of high-quality services.
  • Ensuring Checks and Balances: Through good governance practices, mechanisms are established to prevent the undue exercise of power and authority, maintaining a system of checks and balances.
  • Facilitating Public Engagement: The active involvement of the public in the governance process becomes achievable when good governance practices are firmly in place.

What are the Challenges to Good Governance in India?

  • Corruption: The pervasive level of corruption in India is widely recognized as a substantial impediment to enhancing the quality of governance.
  • Empowerment of Women: The inadequate representation of women in government institutions and related sectors poses a significant challenge to achieving gender equality.
  • Delayed Justice: Ensuring timely justice for citizens is a fundamental right, but numerous factors, such as a shortage of personnel and logistical resources within the legal system, contribute to delayed justice.
  • Criminalization of Politics: The intertwining of the political process with criminal elements and the collaboration between politicians, civil servants, and business entities negatively impact public policy formulation and governance.
  • Centralization of Administrative System: Efficient functioning of lower-level governments, particularly Panchayati Raj Institutions (PRIs), depends on adequate empowerment.
    • The existing challenges involve insufficient devolution of funds and personnel to carry out constitutionally assigned functions.

What are the Initiatives for Enhancing Good Governance in India?

  • National e-Governance Plan: With a vision to make government services easily accessible to the common man, the National e-Governance Plan aims to ensure efficiency, transparency, and reliability of services at affordable costs.
    • The plan focuses on meeting the basic needs of the public through widespread service delivery outlets.
  • Good Governance Index (GGI): Launched by the Ministry of Personnel, Public Grievances & Pensions, GGI serves as a comprehensive tool to evaluate the state of governance in the country.
    • It systematically analyzes the impact of various interventions initiated by State Governments and Union Territories.
  • Right to Information Act, 2005: This crucial legislation plays a pivotal role in fostering transparency within governance by granting citizens the right to access information.
    • The Right to Information Act, 2005, empowers individuals to seek and receive information, contributing to a more transparent and accountable system.

About Atal Bihari Vajpayee

  • Atal Bihari Vajpayee, the 10th Prime Minister of India, distinguished himself not only as a statesman but also as a revered poet and literary figure.
  • His association with the Rashtriya Swayamsevak Sangh (RSS), the ideological precursor of the BJP, further shaped his political journey.
  • Early Life: Born on December 25, 1924, in Gwalior, Madhya Pradesh, Vajpayee joined the RSS in 1939, transitioning into a full-time role in 1947.
    • His literary prowess led him to collaborate with Deen Dayal Upadhyaya on various publications, marking the beginning of his impactful career.
  • Political Ascension: Vajpayee assumed the role of national president of the Jana Sangh in 1968 following Deen Dayal Upadhyaya's demise.
    • His political journey commenced with his election to the Lok Sabha from the Balrampur seat in the 1957 general election, where his eloquence positioned him as a defender of Jana Sangh's policies.
  • Key Political Milestones: Post-emergency, Vajpayee played a vital role in the formation of the Janata Party, securing victory in the 1977 general elections and subsequently serving as the External Affairs Minister.
    • The transformation of Jana Sangh into the Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP) in 1980 marked a significant phase under his leadership, with the party gaining electoral prominence.
  • Political Tenures: Vajpayee's political career saw him elected ten times to the Lok Sabha and twice to the Rajya Sabha, representing constituencies such as Balrampur, New Delhi, Gwalior, and Lucknow.
    • His administrative journey commenced as the External Affairs Minister in 1975, with commendation for his UN General Assembly speech in Hindi.
  • Prime Ministerial Stints: Vajpayee served as the Prime Minister of India in three distinct tenures:
    • A brief 13-day term in 1996
    • 13-month period from 1998 to 1999, and
    • A full term from 1999 to 2004.
  • Notable Achievements: Vajpayee's administration left an indelible mark with achievements such as the Pokhran Nuclear Test, success in the Kargil War, the implementation of the Golden Quadrilateral project, the Pradhan Mantri Gramin Sadak Yojana, and the Sarva Siksha Abhiyaan.
  • Diplomatic Outreach: Vajpayee's diplomatic efforts included a groundbreaking bus journey to Lahore to meet with Pakistani Prime Minister Nawaz Sharif, signaling a commitment to improving relations.
  • Honors and Recognition: Atal Bihari Vajpayee was bestowed with prestigious honors, including the Bharat Ratna in 2015, recognition for his role in the Bangladesh Liberation War, and the Order of Ouissam Alaouite from Morocco.
    • Additionally, the Government of India designated his birth anniversary as Good Governance Day in 2014.

WHO prequalifies a second malaria vaccine, a significant milestone in preventing the disease (WHO)

  • 22 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

The World Health Organization (WHO) on Thursday added the R21/Matrix-M malaria vaccine, developed by Oxford University and manufactured by Serum Institute of India, to its list of prequalified vaccines.

News Summary:

  • The R21/Matrix-M malaria vaccine, developed by Oxford University and produced by the Serum Institute of India, has received prequalification from the World Health Organization (WHO), marking a significant step in global efforts to combat malaria.
  • This achievement follows the prequalification of the RTS, S/AS01 vaccine in July 2022, making R21 the second malaria vaccine to gain the WHO's approval.
    • Prequalification means larger access to vaccines as a key tool to prevent malaria in children.
  • The WHO employs rigorous international standards during the prequalification process, conducting a comprehensive evaluation to ensure the safety, efficacy, and adherence to global manufacturing standards of the vaccines.
  • Ongoing measures, such as regular re-evaluation, site inspections, and targeted testing, are implemented to uphold prequalified vaccines’ continued safety and effectiveness.

What is a Prequalified Vaccine?

  • The World Health Organization (WHO) defines a prequalified vaccine as one that has successfully completed a comprehensive three-step process prior to approval.
    • Thorough Data Evaluation: The first step involves a meticulous examination of relevant data associated with the vaccine.
    • Sample Testing: The second step includes rigorous testing of vaccine samples.
    • Manufacturing Site Inspection: The final step encompasses an inspection of the pertinent manufacturing sites by WHO.
  • Only when the outcomes of these steps are positive does the vaccine earn inclusion in the WHO list of Prequalified Vaccines?

What is Malaria?

  • Malaria is an infectious disease caused by the Plasmodium parasite, transmitted to humans through the bites of infected female Anopheles mosquitoes, which are active mainly during the night.
  • While there are numerous types of Plasmodium parasites, only five affect humans and cause malaria.
  • Plasmodium falciparum: Predominantly found in Africa, it is the most common and lethal malaria parasite globally, responsible for the majority of malaria-related deaths.
  • Plasmodium vivax: Primarily found in Asia and South America, this parasite causes milder symptoms than Plasmodium falciparum but can persist in the liver for up to three years, leading to potential relapses.
  • Plasmodium ovale: Relatively uncommon and typically found in West Africa, this parasite can remain dormant in the liver for several years without causing symptoms.
  • Plasmodium malariae: Rare and primarily found in Africa.
  • Plasmodium knowlesi: Extremely rare and identified in certain parts of Southeast Asia.

Malaria Transmission:

  • Upon being bitten by an infected mosquito, the Plasmodium parasite enters the bloodstream, travels to the liver, and matures.
  • It then re-enters the bloodstream, invading red blood cells where it undergoes multiplication.
  • Periodically, infected blood cells burst, releasing more parasites into the bloodstream.
  • While mosquitoes can become infected by biting an already infected person, malaria does not spread directly from person to person.

Symptoms of Malaria:

  • The signs and symptoms of malaria encompass fever, chills, general discomfort, headache, nausea, vomiting, diarrhoea, abdominal pain, muscle or joint pain, fatigue, rapid breathing, rapid heart rate, and cough.
  • Recognizing these symptoms is crucial for prompt diagnosis and treatment.

What is the Status of Malaria in India?

  • Given its predominantly tropical climate, a significant portion of India has a historical prevalence of malaria, and the country holds the distinction of being where Nobel Prize winner Sir Ronald Ross discovered the malaria parasite cycle involving Anopheles mosquitoes as the definitive host.
  • While India has made substantial progress in the direction of malaria elimination, there remains a considerable journey ahead.
  • According to the World Malaria Report 2023, India contributed to 66% of malaria cases within the World Health Organization’s South-East Asia region in 2022.
  • Additionally, India and Indonesia jointly accounted for approximately 94% of all malaria-related deaths in the region last year.
  • The report highlighted that nearly 46% of all cases in the region were attributed to Plasmodium vivax, a protozoal parasite and human pathogen.

What are the Challenges in Malaria Elimination?

  • Eliminating malaria in India faces several challenges, primarily stemming from the predominant engagement of the private sector in diagnosing and treating the disease.
    • This sector often encounters issues related to misdiagnosis and mistreatment.

Key challenges include:

  • Limited Regulation in the Private Sector: Private doctors and clinics operate without an obligation to adhere to government guidelines, utilize recommended drugs, or report malaria cases to state authorities.
  • Disproportionate Malaria Treatments in the Private Sector: In 2015, a substantial 86 million malaria treatments were procured in the private sector, in stark contrast to the meagre 2 million in the public sector.
  • Proliferation of Artemisinin Monotherapy: The private sector annually acquires nearly 10 million injections of Artemisinin Monotherapy, a treatment strongly discouraged in India and globally due to its role in accelerating the development of lethal drug resistance.
  • Irony of Drug Misuse: Remarkably, India, the largest supplier of high-quality approved malaria drugs globally, grapples with the ironic misuse of malaria drugs within its own borders.

Challenges in Creating a Malaria Vaccine:

The progress toward developing a malaria vaccine encounters various impediments:

  • Absence of a Conventional Market: The absence of a conventional market poses a significant hindrance to the development of a malaria vaccine.
  • Limited Developer Engagement: The involvement of only a few developers further complicates the landscape for malaria vaccine development.
  • Technical Complexity: The technical intricacies associated with creating a vaccine against a parasitic infection, such as malaria, present substantial challenges.
  • Complexity of Malaria Parasites' Life Cycle: Malaria parasites exhibit a complex life cycle, and there exists a limited understanding of the intricate immune response to malaria infection.
  • Genetic Complexity of Malaria Parasites: The genetic complexity of malaria parasites, generating thousands of potential antigens, adds an additional layer of difficulty to the development of an effective vaccine.

Initiatives Taken by India for Malaria Eradication:

  • Since 2000, India has successfully reduced malaria cases by more than half and malaria-related deaths by over 66%.
  • In 2016, the country introduced its inaugural National Framework for Malaria Elimination (2016-2030), outlining a vision for a malaria-free nation by 2027 with complete elimination targeted by 2030.
  • In 2019, the Government of India demonstrated its commitment by increasing funding for the National Vector Borne Disease Control Programme by over 25%.
  • Furthermore, India augmented its support as a donor to the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis, and Malaria, reaffirming its dedication to combating these vector-borne diseases on a global scale.

Lok Sabha passes three criminal law Bills: Here are the key changes (Indian Express)

  • 21 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

Three new criminal code bills, focusing on justice rather than punishment, were passed by the Lok Sabha on Wednesday.

Context:

  • Lok Sabha has passed by voice vote the three Bills that aim to overhaul the country's criminal justice system by replacing colonial-era laws.
  • The three bills passed are:
    • The Bharatiya Nyaya (Second) Sanhita - replace the Indian Penal Code (IPC)
    • Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha (Second) - replace Code of Criminal Procedure (CrPC)
    • Bharatiya Sakshya (Second) Sanhita - replace the Indian Evidence Act
  • According to the Home Minister, Amit Shah, the three new bills seek to establish a justice system based on Indian thinking and will free people from the colonial mindset and its symbols.

Background:

  • Bill Presentation in August 2023: In August 2023, the Union government introduced  three Bills in Parliament intending to revitalize the country's criminal justice system.
    • The Bills in question were the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita Bill, 2023 (BNS), the Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha Sanhita Bill, 2023 (BNSS), and the Bharatiya Sakshya Bill, 2023 (BSB).
  • Referral to Parliamentary Standing Committee: The three Bills underwent scrutiny as they were referred to the Parliamentary Standing Committee on Home Affairs for a thorough review and recommendations.
    • After three months of meticulous deliberation, the committee released reports on each Bill—BNS, BNSS, and BSB—suggesting necessary changes.
  • Opposition Dissent on Hindi Titles: A notable point of contention arose during the committee's proceedings, particularly regarding the Hindi nomenclature of the Bills.
    • Opposition members contested that the vernacular titles contravened Article 348, which stipulates English as the official language for courts and legislative matters.
    • Despite opposition dissent, the parliamentary committee sanctioned the Hindi titles for all three Bills.
  • Introduction of Revised Versions: After the committee's recommendations, on December 12, the three Bills were withdrawn from Parliament.
    • In a prompt response, revised iterations of the Bills were promptly introduced for further consideration.

Why were new bills deemed necessary?

  • Colonial Legacy: From 1860 to 2023, the nation's criminal justice system operated under British-imposed laws.
    • These laws, formulated during colonial times, use outdated language and concepts that may not accurately represent current social norms and values.
  • Advances in Technology: The evolution of technology has introduced new aspects to crime, evidence, and investigation, necessitating a response from the legal framework.
  • Simplification and Streamlining: Over time, the laws have become intricate, confusing legal practitioners, law enforcement agencies, and the general public.
    • Simplifying and streamlining the legal framework is seen as a way to enhance transparency and understanding.
  • Evidence Collection and Presentation: The Indian Evidence Act predates the era of modern forensic science and technological tools, highlighting the need for an update in this regard.
  • Reports and Recommendations: Various reports, including those from the department-related Parliamentary Standing Committee on Home Affairs (146th report), emphasized the necessity for a comprehensive review of the country's criminal justice system.
    • Earlier reports (111th and 128th) had also underscored the need for reforms in criminal laws.

About Bharatiya Nyaya (Second) Sanhita (BNS II) Bill, 2023:

The BNS II Bill brings about significant modifications in the treatment of various offences, including criminal conspiracy, mob lynching, death by negligence, organized crimes, and terrorist acts.

  • Life Imprisonment: While the BNS defined life imprisonment as 'imprisonment for life,' BNS II retains this phrase alongside the newer definition.
  • Terrorist Acts: BNS II removes vague language, focusing on innovative acts such as damaging critical infrastructure, undermining monetary stability, and using force against public functionaries.
  • Terrorist Act Offenses: In BNS II, the possession of property derived from a terrorist act is punishable only if acquired 'knowingly.'
  • Harboring a person who committed a terrorist act is punishable if done 'knowingly' or 'voluntarily.'
  • Criminal Conspiracy: BNS II modifies Clause 61 to include conspiracy with 'common intention.'
  • Mob Lynching: The minimum punishment of seven years for mob lynching, as in BNS, is removed in BNS II.
    • Murder by a group based on identity markers incurs life imprisonment or death, plus a fine.
  • Organized Crimes: BNS II adds organized crimes, including kidnapping, extortion, and cybercrime committed on behalf of a syndicate. Petty organized crime is also now an offence.
  • Changes in Offenses: Sedition is no longer an offence in BNS II, replaced by a new offence endangering the sovereignty, unity, and integrity of India.
    • Community service is explicitly defined as court-ordered work benefiting the community, and serving as a punishment for offenders.
  • Supreme Court Conformity: BNS II aligns with Supreme Court decisions, omitting adultery as an offence and introducing life imprisonment as a penalty for murder or attempt to murder by a life convict.
  • Sexual Offenses: BNS II retains provisions from the Indian Penal Code (IPC) on sexual offences against women, increasing the age threshold for major classification in gang rape from 16 to 18 years.
    • It criminalizes sexual intercourse with a woman through deceitful means or false promises.

About Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha (Second) Sanhita (BNSS2) Bill, 2023:

  • The Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha (Second) Sanhita, 2023 (BNSS2) is designed to supplant the Criminal Procedure Code, 1973 (CrPC), which delineates the procedures for arrest, prosecution, and bail within the Indian legal framework.
  • The CrPC, originally enacted in 1861 to streamline India's diverse legal systems, underwent a significant overhaul in 1973.
    • The comprehensive revision led to the introduction of the present CrPC, incorporating changes such as the provision for anticipatory bail.
  • The BNSS2 Bill aims to introduce several amendments to the existing CrPC framework, particularly addressing aspects related to trials, investigations, and other procedural matters.
    • The proposed changes reflect an effort to modernize and enhance the efficiency of the criminal justice system in alignment with contemporary needs.

Key Features of the Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha (Second) Sanhita (BNSS2) Bill, 2023:

  • Detention of Undertrials: According to the BNSS2, the provision of releasing an accused on a personal bond after spending half of the maximum imprisonment period does not apply to offences punishable by life imprisonment or if proceedings are pending in more than one offence.
  • Medical Examination: Unlike the CrPC, which restricts medical examinations to certain cases, the BNSS2 expands the scope, allowing any police officer to request an examination, broadening accessibility.
  • Forensic Investigation: The BNSS2 introduces a mandatory forensic investigation for offences carrying a minimum sentence of seven years.
    • Forensic experts are empowered to collect evidence on-site, documented through mobile phones or electronic devices.
    • In the absence of local facilities, states can utilize facilities in other states.
  • Signatures and Finger Impressions: While the CrPC empowers magistrates to order specimen signatures or handwriting, the BNSS2 extends this to include finger impressions and voice samples.
    • Notably, these samples can be collected from individuals not yet arrested.
  • Timelines for Procedures: The BNSS2 establishes clear timelines for various procedures.
    • For instance, medical practitioners examining rape victims must submit their reports to the investigating officer within seven days, ensuring a more expedited legal process.

Bharatiya Sakshya (Second) Bill, 2023:

  • Admissibility of electronic evidence: Section 61 of the original Bill allowed the admissibility of electronic evidence by underscoring that an electronic record shall have the same legal effect as a paper record.
    • However, there was no requirement for a certificate under section 63 (corresponding to the requirement of a certificate under section 65B of the Indian Evidence Act).
    • This provision has now been revised to state that the admissibility of an electronic record is subject to section 63.

Criticism of the Bill:

Experts have flagged that the three revised Bills present a missed opportunity to rectify extensive overcriminalisation and wider police powers that aggravate state control.

  • The provision of the Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha (Second) Sanhita, 2023, which permits police custody beyond the initial 15 days of arrest endangers civil liberties.
    • The massive expansion of the possible duration of police custody in the BNSS strikes at the very heart of civil liberties protection.
  • The BNSS expands the maximum limit of police custody under general criminal law from 15 days to either 60 days or 90 days (depending on the nature of the offence).
    • Under current law, police custody is limited to the first 15 days of arrest.
  • The expansion under the proposed BNSS heightens the risk of exposure to police excesses.
  • Given widely acknowledged concerns about the safety of arrested persons in police custody, and the heightened risk of coerced and fabricated evidence after prolonged detention, this provision of the BNSS is a shocking expansion of police powers.

In a creative interpretation of Article 200, the Chief Justice of India’s recent judgment has also protected the entire constitutional system from the depredations of Governors (The Hindu)

  • 20 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

CJI Chandrachud creatively interprets Article 200 in a landmark ruling on the Governor's role in bill assent, State of Punjab vs Principal Secretary, November 10, 2023.

Context:

  • On November 10, 2023, the Chief Justice of India (CJI) delivered a significant judgment in the case of State of Punjab vs Principal Secretary to the Governor of Punjab, offering an interpretation of Article 200 of the Indian Constitution.
  • The focal point was the first provision of Article 200, addressing a Governor's choices when presented with a Bill for assent following its passage by the State Legislature.

Article 200 Of The Indian Constitution:

  • Article 200 of the Indian Constitution delineates four possible actions for a Governor when a legislature-passed Bill is submitted for assent.
  • These actions include:
    • Give his assent
    • Withhold his assent
    • Return the bill for reconsideration
    • Reserve the bill for the President’s consideration (In instances where the bill introduced in the state legislature endangers the position of the state High Court.)
  • If the legislature reapproves the Bill with or wthout any amendment, the Governor must grant assent.
  • Alternatively, the Governor may reserve the Bill for the President's consideration, and the President then decides whether to grant or withhold assent under Article 201.
    • Notably, no specific timeframe is specified for the President's decision on the Bill.

Perspectives on the Discretionary and Absolute Nature of the Governor's Power:

  • Most of the commentators of the Constitution, like D.D. Basu and others, have held the view that the Governor’s power to withhold assent under this Article has a finality about it, and once assent is withheld, the Bill dies a natural death.
  • They were also of the view that the option of sending the Bill back to the Assembly for reconsideration under the first proviso is discretionary and not mandatory.

Interpretation of Article 200 Pronounced by the CJI:

  • The recent interpretation of Article 200 by the Chief Justice of India (CJI) introduces a distinct viewpoint.
  • Unlike the traditional understanding, the CJI associates the act of withholding assent with mandatory reconsideration.
  • This interpretation challenges the presumption of the Governor's absolute authority to withhold assent.
  • According to the CJI's judgment, the Governor's decision to withhold assent is coupled with the obligation to promptly return the Bill to the Assembly for an immediate reevaluation.
  • In this context, the judgment asserts that, once the Governor chooses to withhold assent, the sole recourse is to send the Bill back to the Assembly for swift reconsideration, leaving the Governor with no alternative but to eventually grant assent.
  • This nuanced interpretation aligns with the imperative of ensuring a deliberate and obligatory reconsideration process when the Governor opts to withhold assent to a legislative Bill.

The Importance of the CJI’s Interpretation:

  • Preserving Legislative Rights: This ruling, coupled with the Chief Justice of India's approach, safeguards the legislature's authority in the law-making process, preventing potential misuse by appointed Governors and upholding the constitutional system.
  • Evolution in Understanding Governor’s Powers: The CJI's interpretation signifies a progression in comprehending the Governor's powers, underlining the necessity for continual assessment and refinement of constitutional interpretations.
  • Enhanced Clarity in Article 200: The Supreme Court of India has unequivocally stated that Governors cannot delay the decision on the Bills.
    • Consequently, the top court's verdict has brought increased clarity to Article 200, compelling Governors to promptly decide on presented Bills.

Issues Still Regarding the Governor's Power:

  • Reservation of Bills for President's Consideration: A potential area for exploitation by Governors remains in reserving Bills for the President's consideration, providing an absolute option.
    • The critical query pertains to the types of Bills Governors can forward to the President, with the second provision of Article 200 specifying Bills that must mandatorily be reserved.
    • These are Bills that deviate from the powers of the High Court, jeopardizing its constitutionally designated role.
  • Lack of Categorization for Bills: The Constitution lacks a reference to specific categories of Bills for the President's consideration.
    • Consequently, Governors may seemingly exercise discretion in sending any Bill to the President.
    • Recent instances, such as in Kerala, where the Governor withheld action on eight Bills for over two years, or in Tamil Nadu, where Bills were sent to the President against the Constitution after reconsideration by the Assembly, highlight the absence of clear categorization.
  • Ambiguities in Governor's Actions: The Constitution's ambiguity allows Governors to act in ways that may contradict its provisions, as seen in instances where Bills were sent to the President against the Constitution's mandate.
    • Such actions place the fate of Bills in the hands of Union government officials, raising concerns about the potential misuse of gubernatorial discretion.

Evaluation of Constitutional Aspects Regarding Governor's Authority in Reserving Bills:

  • Constitutional Framework: In the current political context, there arises a significant inquiry into a Governor's discretion in reserving Bills for the President's consideration, a matter not explicitly addressed in the Constitution.
  • Implicit References: Two constitutional provisions indirectly touch upon this issue—Article 213 deals with ordinance-making powers and Article 254(2) concerning State laws in the Concurrent List.
    • Article 213 empowers Governors to issue ordinances with presidential instructions when deeming it necessary to reserve a Bill's provisions.
    • This implies a requirement for Governors to exercise judgment within the constitutional framework.
  • The use of "deemed it necessary" suggests that Governors are expected to follow constitutional principles rather than acting arbitrarily in deciding to reserve Bills.
    • Article 254(2) states that State laws on Concurrent List items prevail with presidential assent, even if conflict with existing central laws.
    • It indicates that a Bill on a Concurrent subject requires presidential assent only if it contradicts central laws; it does not mandate sending every such Bill to the President.
  • Presidential Jurisdiction and Governor's Duty on State Subjects: In the federal legislative structure, the President lacks authority to scrutinize and assent to Bills exclusively related to State subjects, underscoring the Governor's constitutional responsibility.
    • Sending a Bill on State matters to the President might be viewed as an abdication of the Governor's constitutional duty, given that State List subjects are beyond the President's purview.

Conclusion

The absence of explicit provisions raises constitutional uncertainties concerning a Governor's discretionary authority in reserving Bills for the President. As constitutional interpretations evolve, there's a demand for clarity on the scope of a Governor's discretion in reserving Bills, aligning with federal principles and legislative autonomy. It's crucial to note that a Governor is not personally accountable for government actions, and the constitutional validity of a law falls within the court's jurisdiction, beyond the influence of the Governor or President.

 

 

PM Modi is in Varanasi to participate in the Viksit Bharat Sankalp Yatra events, and inaugurate the second edition of the Kashi Tamil Sangamams (Indian Express)

  • 18 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

PM Modi recently participated in the Viksit Bharat Sankalp Yatra events and inaugurated the second edition of Kashi Tamil Sangamam in Varanasi.

What is Viksit Bharat Sankalp Yatra?

  • The Viksit Bharat Sankalp Yatra is a government initiative being undertaken across the country, to raise awareness about and track the implementation of flagship central schemes, such as Ayushman Bharat, Ujjwala Yojana, PM Suraksha Bima, PM SVANidhi, etc.
  • On the occasion of the Janjatiya Gaurav Divas, marking the birth anniversary of tribal icon Birsa Munda, Prime Minister Modi flagged off the Viksit Bharat Sankalp Yatra from Khunti, Jharkhand.
  • It has four aims:
    • Reach out to the vulnerable who are eligible under various schemes but have not availed of benefits so far.
    • Dissemination of information and generating awareness about schemes.
    • Interaction with beneficiaries of government schemes through their personal stories/ experience sharing; and
    • Enrolment of potential beneficiaries through details ascertained during the Yatra.
  • The program involves various Union ministries and state governments.
    • In a short span of one month, the Yatra has reached over 2.50 crore citizens across 68,000 Gram Panchayats, with nearly 2 crore individuals taking the Viksit Bharat Sankalp.

What is Kashi Tamil Sangamam?

  • Kashi Tamil Sangamam celebrates many aspects of the historical and civilisational connection between South and North India.
  • Aligned with the National Education Policy 2020, which emphasizes cultivating a modern yet culturally rooted mindset, the policy encourages the fusion of traditional Indian Knowledge Systems with contemporary knowledge.
  • This integration has yielded enriching outcomes, such as incorporating Yoga and Ayurveda into modern medicine, employing technology for traditional crafts, blending ancient Vaastushilpa with modern archaeology, and creatively interpreting classical Raagas.
  • Recognizing the value of rediscovering and integrating ancient knowledge into modern thinking, the month-long Kashi-Tamil Sangamam has been initiated.
  • This endeavour promotes direct interaction among scholars, experts, and practitioners from diverse fields, fostering the exchange of expertise and best practices.

About Kashi-Tamil Sangamam:

  • An initiative by the Government of India under the "Azadi ka Amrit Mahotsav" and in line with the "Ek Bharat Shreshta Bharat" spirit, Kashi-Tamil Sangamam underscores unity amid the cultural diversity of states and Union Territories.
  • The program aims to celebrate, reaffirm, and rediscover the enduring connections between Tamil Nadu and Kashi, two ancient seats of learning.
  • This initiative provides a platform for individuals from various walks of life, including scholars, students, and philosophers, from both regions to converge, share their knowledge, culture, and best practices, and learn from each other's experiences.
  • IIT Madras and BHU serve as the implementing agencies for the program.
  • Following the inaugural edition in 2022, this year's Kashi-Tamil Sangamam is scheduled to take place from December 17 to December 31.

Cultural Significance:

  • In the 15th century, King Parakrama Pandya, the ruler of the Madurai region, aspired to construct a temple dedicated to Lord Shiva.
    • To fulfil this vision, he embarked on a journey to Kashi (Uttar Pradesh) to acquire a lingam.
  • During his return journey, he paused to rest under a tree.
    • To his surprise, when he attempted to resume the journey, the cow carrying the lingam steadfastly refused to move.
    • Recognizing this as a divine sign, Parakrama Pandya chose to install the lingam at that very spot, giving rise to what is now known as Sivakasi in Tamil Nadu.
  • For those unable to make the pilgrimage to Kashi, the Pandyas thoughtfully erected the Kasi Viswanathar Temple in present-day Tenkasi, situated in the southwestern part of Tamil Nadu near the state's border with Kerala.

What is the reason for choosing Tamil Nadu and Kashi?

  • Despite their geographical separation, Kashi and Tamil Nadu share profound and vibrant historical connections that have endured through the centuries.
    • Renowned as embodiments of Indian culture, these regions have been revered by many for their cultural richness.
  • Historically, seekers of knowledge from various places, including Kashi, Prayagraj, Ayodhya, and Gorakhpur, in the north, and Kanchipuram, Puducherry, Madurai, Thanjavur, Rameshwaram, Srirangam, Kanyakumari, Thoothukudi, Tirunelveli, and the Tamraparani River in the south, have been drawn to these regions as significant knowledge hubs.
  • The ancient ties between these two knowledge centres are evident in various aspects of life, including recurring themes in literature and the presence of the name "Kashi" in numerous villages in Tamil Nadu.
  • Notably, Saint Kumaragurupara from Tamil Nadu showcased audacity in negotiating with the Sultanate of Kashi, even bringing a lion to his courtyard to reclaim Kedarghat and secure a site for the consecration of the Vishweshwara Lingam.
    • His literary contribution, "Kashi Kalambakam," is a grammatical composition of poems on Kashi.
  • King Adhiveera Rama Pandiyan of the Pandya Dynasty, after a pilgrimage to Kashi, dedicated a Shiva Temple in Tenkasi, Tamil Nadu, and composed "Kashi Kandam," a Skanda Purana in Tamil poetic verses.
    • Exploring and rediscovering the profound links between these two centres promises to yield essential knowledge in both intellectual and practical domains.

 

78 Opposition MPs suspended, most ever in a day: Why this happened, what Parliament rules say (Indian Express)

  • 19 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

In a major escalation of tensions between the Opposition and the government, 78 MPs were suspended from both Houses of Parliament on Monday, taking the total number of suspended MPs in this session to 92, both figures unprecedented in the history of the Indian Parliament. Opposition leaders termed it a “murder of democracy.”

Why were the MPs suspended?

  • The MPs in both Houses were suspended for disrupting Parliamentary proceedings while protesting the December 13 Parliament security breach.
  • 78 Opposition MPs were suspended from both Houses of Parliament on Monday, taking the total number of parliamentarians suspended during the ongoing Winter Session to 92.
  • Of the 78 Opposition MPs, 33 were suspended from Lok Sabha and 45 from Rajya Sabha, marking the highest number of suspensions in a day.
  • This comes just days after 14 Opposition lawmakers were suspended from Parliament for similar reasons.
  • The suspension of 78 Opposition MPs in a single day has overtaken the previous such instance of large-scale suspension of MPs in 1989 when 63 MPs had been suspended.

Why do MPs Disrupt Parliament?

  • There is an old tradition, irrespective of which party or alliance is in opposition, of MPs causing a ruckus inside Parliament.
  • “Over the years, four broad reasons have been identified for disorder in legislatures.
    • the lack of time available to MPs for raising important matters
    • the unresponsive attitude of the government and retaliatory posture by Treasury benches
    • deliberate disruption by parties for political or publicity purposes, and
    • the absence of prompt action against MPs disrupting Parliamentary proceedings.
  • Over the decades, the say the Opposition has in deciding the Parliamentary calendar has been reducing.
  • Not only does the Government set the agenda in Parliament and decide how much time will be dedicated to any issue, but Parliamentary procedure also prioritises government business over other matters.
  • Parliament has not updated its rules over the last 70 years in this regard.
  • All parties have disrupted Parliament — and their view on disruptions has been determined almost always by whether they are in power or not.

Who Can Suspend the MPs?

  • The Presiding Officer — the Speaker of LS and Chairman of RS — plays a major role in meting out suspensions.
    • In Lok Sabha, the Speaker acts in accordance with Rules 373, 374, and 374A of the Rules of Procedure and Conduct of Business.
    • In Rajya Sabha, the Chairman acts as per Rules 255 and 256 of the Rules.
  • The procedure in both Houses is largely similar.

Under what circumstances can MPs be suspended from Lok Sabha?

  • Rule Number 373, as outlined in the Rules of Procedure and Conduct of Business, grants the Speaker the authority to promptly instruct a Member to withdraw from the House if their conduct is deemed grossly disorderly.
    • Any Member ordered to withdraw must comply immediately and remain absent for the remainder of the day's sitting.
  • Rule Number 374 empowers the Speaker to name a Member who persistently and willfully obstructs the business of the House or disregards the authority of the Chair.
    • Once named, the Speaker, upon a motion being made, shall expeditiously put forth the question of suspending the Member from the service of the House for a duration not exceeding the remainder of the session.
    • It is necessary for a Member suspended under this rule to leave the House premises immediately.

What are the rules for suspending MPs from the Rajya Sabha?

  • In Rajya Sabha, the suspension of members is regulated by Rule 256.
  • Unlike Lok Sabha, the Chairperson of Rajya Sabha lacks the authority to unilaterally suspend a member.
  • Instead, suspension can only occur through a motion presented to the House.
  • Rule 256(2) specifies that the Chair, upon naming a member, initiates a motion to suspend the said member for the duration of the remaining session.
  • While the Chair lacks the power to independently suspend a member, they retain the authority to instruct the member to leave the House, as stipulated by Rule 255.
  • This rule empowers the Chairman to direct the immediate withdrawal of any member whose conduct is deemed grossly disorderly, with the member obliged to absent themselves for the remainder of the day's meeting.

While these rules have mostly remained unchanged since 1952, in 2001, the Lok Sabha further empowered the Speaker to deal with “grave and disorderly conduct.” As per the new rule (Rule 374A), an MP “named” by the Speaker shall automatically stand suspended for a period of five days or the remaining part of the session. This rule removes the need for the House to pass a motion for suspension. Notably, the Rajya Sabha has not incorporated this provision in its procedures.

How Long Can MPs Be Suspended?

  • Mild offences are punished by admonition or reprimand, with the latter being the more serious of the two punishments.
    • After this comes the punishment of “withdrawal.”
  • As per Rule Number 373 in Lok Sabha’s Rules of Procedure and Conduct of Business: “The Speaker, if he is of the opinion that the conduct of any Member is grossly disorderly, may direct such Member to withdraw immediately from the House, and any Member so ordered to withdraw shall do so forthwith and shall remain absent during the remainder of the day’s sitting.”
  • However, continuing to disregard the Presiding Officer’s directions can invite the punishment of suspension.
    • A member can be suspended, at the maximum, for the remainder of the session only.
    • Moreover, the House, at any point in time, can reinstate a suspended member by passing a motion.
  • In cases of extreme misconduct, the House may expel a member “to rid the House of persons who are unfit for membership.”

Is Suspending MPs Common Practice?

  • While it is a strong step, it is not uncommon. However, the number of suspensions has gone up over the last few years.
  • At least 149 suspensions have been meted out, both Houses included, since 2019, compared with at least 81 in 2014-19, and at least 36 in 2009-14.
  • “In most cases, disorders in the House arise out of a sense of frustration felt by members due to lack of opportunities to make his point or clear his chest of grievances of the people that move him or out of the heat of the moment.
  • “What is more difficult to tackle is planned parliamentary offences and deliberate disturbances for publicity or for political motives.
  • In many ways, it falls on the Presiding Officer to maintain a crucial balance in the House.

Conclusion

While maintaining the essential enforcement of the Speaker's supreme authority for the smooth conduct of parliamentary proceedings, it is imperative to underscore that the Speaker's role is primarily centred around managing the House rather than asserting dominance over it. A viable solution, therefore, needs to be devised with a focus on long-term sustainability, adherence to democratic values, and alignment with the dynamic and evolving context of India.

Beyond Jammu and Kashmir: Why many states in India enjoy special provisions (Indian Express)

  • 16 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

On December 12, 2023, a unanimous decision by a 5:0 majority of Supreme Court judges clarified that Article 370 of the Indian Constitution is a facet of asymmetric federalism and does not imply internal sovereignty.

What is Asymmetric Federalism?

  • Asymmetric federalism involves the uneven distribution of powers and relationships within the political, administrative, and fiscal domains among the federal units comprising a federation.
  • This asymmetry can manifest in both vertical (between the center and states) and horizontal (among the states) dimensions.
  • It can arise not only from constitutional provisions but also from the practical implementation of administrative, political, and fiscal systems within a federation.
  • India's founding fathers acknowledged the importance of a diverse governance model that respects the unique cultural differences across the nation, allowing for a blend of self-rule within the framework of shared governance.

Why is it stated that India practices Asymmetric Federalism?

  • India's administrative structure comprises the Centre and the States as primary forms of administrative units.
    • However, additional forms exist, each designed to cater to specific local, historical, and geographical contexts.
  • In addition to the Centre and the States, India features Union Territories with a legislature, as well as Union Territories without a legislature.
    • Notably, territories like Puducherry and Delhi possess legislatures, while others under the Centre lack legislatures or a ministerial council for advisory purposes.
  • Even among territories with legislatures, distinctions arise.
    • Puducherry holds legislative powers over matters in the State List or Concurrent List applicable to the Union Territory.
    • In contrast, Delhi, with a similar scope, has exceptions in three areas: police, land, and public order are beyond its jurisdiction.
      • However, Parliament retains overriding powers over laws enacted by the Assembly in Union Territories.
  • Much like the non-identical powers of the Centre and the States, variations exist in the relationships between certain States and other constituent units of the Indian Union and the Centre.
  • This introduces a noticeable asymmetry in the functioning of India's federal system.

What is Article 370 of the Indian Constitution?

  • The most prominent illustration of asymmetry in Centre-State relations was evident in the special status enjoyed by Jammu and Kashmir until August 6, 2019, when the President announced the cessation of its special privileges.
  • Under Article 370, the State had the authority to maintain its separate Constitution, establish its criteria for 'permanent residents,' restrict outsiders from owning property, and have the prerogative to not automatically apply any Indian law to its territory.
    • Specific approval by its Assembly was required for the operation of Indian laws.
  • Jammu and Kashmir had the autonomy to formulate its Penal and Criminal Procedure Codes.
  • The President had the authority to notify, at intervals, the constitutional provisions that could be extended to the State, with or without modifications.

Is Jammu and Kashmir the only state to enjoy special powers under the constitution?

  • No, its not the only Indian state to enjoy such special provisions — 11 other states still continue to do as per the Indian Constitution.
  • The Part XXI of the Constitution consists of articles on Temporary, Transitional and Special Provisions of some states, other than Jammu and Kashmir.
    • In the Part, apart from Article 370, there are also Articles 371, 371A, 371B, 371C, 371D, 371E, 371F, 371G, 371H, 371I, and 371J – which provide special provisions to Maharashtra, Gujarat, Andhra Pradesh, Karnataka, Goa and six of the seven sister states of North East India — Nagaland, Assam, Manipur, Sikkim, Mizoram, Arunachal Pradesh.
  • However, Article 371I and Article 371E which deal with Goa and Andhra Pradesh respectively, do not offer any such special provisions to the state – and stand out from the rest.
  • Articles 370 and 371 have been the part of Indian Constitution since it came into force on January 26, 1950.
    • But Articles 371 A- I was incorporated later through various amendments under Article 368, which is described as the “power of Parliament to amend the Constitution and procedure therefor”.

The states and the Articles under which they enjoy special provisions:

  • Maharashtra and Gujarat (Article 371): The Governor of Maharastra has a special responsibility to establish “separate development boards” for regions like Vidarbha and  Marathwada, in Maharashtra; while Gujarat has the power to do so in Saurashtra and Kutch.
    • This was done to ensure “equitable allocation of funds for developmental expenditure over the said areas”, and “equitable arrangement providing adequate facilities for technical education and vocational training, and adequate employment opportunities” under the state government.
  • Nagaland (Article 371A): In Nagaland, the Indian Parliament cannot legislate in matters of Naga religion or social practices, Naga customary law and procedure, administration of civil and criminal justice involving decisions according to Naga customary law, and ownership and transfer of land and its resources, without the state Legislative Assembly’s nod.
    • These provisions were included in the Constitution after a 16-point agreement between the Centre and the Naga People’s Convention in 1960, which led to the creation of Nagaland in 1963.
    • It also gives the Governor a special responsibility for law and order situations in Nagaland, especially in case of internal disturbances occurring in the Naga Hills-Tuensang Area.
    • Also, there is a provision for a 35-member Regional Council for Tuensang district, which elects the Tuensang members in the Assembly.
    • A member from the Tuensang district is Minister for Tuensang Affairs.
  • Assam (Article 371B): Quite like Nagaland, The President of India may provide for the constitution and functions of a committee of the state Legislative Assembly consisting of members elected from the tribal areas of the state.
  • Manipur (Article 371C): Similar to Assam here as well, the President may provide for the constitution and functions of a committee of elected members from the Hill areas of the state in the Assembly for the modifications to be made in the rules of business of the Government.
    • It also entrusts “special responsibility” to the Governor to ensure its proper functioning, and report to the President every year regarding the administration of the Hill Areas of the State.
  • Andhra Pradesh (Article 371D, 371E): The President of India must ensure “equitable opportunities and facilities for the people” or ensure reservation in the matter of government jobs, education and other schemes by the state government.
    • The President also has power for direct recruitment to posts in any local cadre of the state government, and admissions in any university or educational institution in the state.
    • He is also entrusted for setting up an administrative tribunal outside the jurisdiction of the High Court to deal with issues of appointment, allotment or promotion in state civil services.
    • Article 371E allows the establishment of a Central University in Andhra Pradesh by a law of Parliament.
  • Sikkim (Article 371F): The Article gives Sikkim to hold a Legislative Assembly of minimum 30 members, notwithstanding anything this the Constitution.
    • These members shall elect the representative of Sikkim in the Indian Parliament.
    • To protect the rights and interests of various sections of the population of Sikkim, Parliament may provide for the number of seats in the Assembly, which may be filled only by candidates from those sections.
    • The Governor of the state also has “special responsibility for peace and for an equitable arrangement for ensuring the social and economic advancement of different sections of the population”.
    • It also states that any existing laws in Sikkim during its formation shall continue, and any adaptation or modification shall not be questioned in any court.
  • Mizoram (Article 371G): According to the Article, the Legislative Assembly of AP should not contain less than 40 members.
    • Apart from that, similar to Nagaland in Mizoram as well the Parliament can not make laws on “religious or social practices of the Mizos, Mizo customary law and procedure, administration of civil and criminal justice involving decisions according to Mizo customary law, ownership and transfer of land” unless the state Assembly decides to do so.
  • Arunachal Pradesh (Article 371H): This article vests the Governor with special responsibility for law and order of the state, but he will have to consult the Council of Ministers in the state before exercising his individual judgment.
    • However, if a matter arises where the Governor is required to act in the exercise of his individual judgment, then it should be considered as final and “shall not be called in question.”
  • Karnataka (Article 371J): Article 371J allows the establishment of a separate development board for the backward districts in the Hyderabad-Karnataka region — similar to the provisions made for Maharashtra and Gujarat.
    • This board will have to report to the state Assembly every year.
    • It also ensures reservation for people of this region, in government jobs and education.

Allahabad HC allows survey of Mathura Idgah: What is this plea in the Sri Krishna Janmabhoomi case (Indian Express)

  • 15 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

The Allahabad High Court on Thursday allowed the primary survey of the Shahi Idgah complex adjacent to the Shri Krishna Janmabhoomi Temple in Uttar Pradesh's Mathura by a court-monitored three-member team of advocate commissioners.

Context:

  • The Allahabad High Court recently approved the survey of the Shahi Idgah complex in Uttar Pradesh's Mathura.
    • Petitioners claim that the Shahi Idgah adjoining the Krishna Janmabhoomi temple in Mathura holds signs suggesting that it was a Hindu temple once.
  • The Krishna Janmabhoomi-Shahi Idgah case is the second temple-mosque dispute in which the high court has allowed to conduct a survey over the past months.
  • Earlier, a survey was ordered in the Gyanvapi-Kashi Vishwanath temple dispute in Varanasi.

What is Krishna Janmabhoomi-Shahi Idgah case?

  • The mosque was built by Aurangzeb in 1670 on the site of an earlier temple.
  • The area was regarded as nazul land — non-agricultural state land owned by the Marathas, and then the British.
  • Before the mosque was built, Raja Veer Singh Bundela of Orchha had also built a temple on the same premises in 1618.
  • In 1815, Raja Patni Mal of Benaras bought the 13.77 acres in an auction from the East India Company.
  • The Raja’s descendants — Rai Kishan Das and Rai Anand Das — sold the land to Jugal Kishore Birla for Rs 13,400, and it was registered in the names of Pandit Madan Mohan Malaviya, Goswami Ganesh Dutt, and Bhiken Lalji Aattrey.
  • The Shri Krishna Janmabhoomi Trust was set up by Birla, and it acquired the ownership rights over the Katra Keshav Dev temple.
  • In 1951, the 13.77 acres were placed in the trust, with the condition that the “trust property will never be sold or pledged.”
  • In 1956, the Shri Krishna Janmasthan Sewa Sangh was set up to manage the affairs of the temple.
    • In 1977, the word ‘Sangh’ in the registered society’s name was replaced with ‘Sansthan.’

What is the Latest Plea in the Sri Krishna Janmabhoomi-Shahi Idgah Case?

  • The latest application was filed by the Hindu side, seeking a survey of the Shahi Idgah mosque — which was allowed by a Bench of Allahabad High Court recently.
  • The petition pleads that the High Court passes an order directing the UP Sunni Central Waqf Board and the Shahi Idgah mosque committee “to remove the construction raised by them encroaching upon the land” in dispute.
    • The petition further asks the court to direct the two opposing parties to hand over the land to the Shree Krishna Janmbhoomi Trust within the time provided by the court.
  • The plea further seeks an order restraining the Waqf Board and the mosque committee, and that people on their behalf from entering into the premises of the 13.37 acres of land at Katra Keshav Dev City and District Mathura.
  • It also says that a “compromise agreement” dated October 12, 1968, between the Shri Krishna Janmasthan Seva Sansthan — the temple management authority, a registered society under law — and the Trust Shahi Masjid Idgah – was “illegal and void”.
    • The reasoning behind this, as per the plea is that “society Shree Krishna Janmasthan Seva Sangh had no right over the property involved”.
  • The petition filed by the Hindu side says that “it is a matter of fact and history that Aurangzeb ruled over the country and had issued orders for demolition of a large number of Hindu religious places and temples including the temple standing at the birth place of Lord Shree Krishna at Katra Keshav Dev, Mathura in the year 1669-70 AD”.
  • “The army of Aurangzeb partly succeeded in demolishing Keshav Dev Temple and a construction was forcibly raised showing the might of power and said construction was named Idgah Mosque.
  • The petition also says that “the order (for demolition) passed by Aurangzeb finds a place in the Official Court Bulletin (Akhbaraat) of January – February 1670”.

What are the counterclaims from the Muslim side?

  • The Muslim side claimed that “the Shahi Idgah Mosque does not fall within the ambit of 13.37 acres land at Katra Keshav Dev”.
  • “The place of birth of Lord Krishna does not lie beneath the Mosque. The claim of the plaintiffs is based on guesswork and is not substantiated by any documentary evidence.

The case so far and Gyanvapi order:

  • At least a dozen cases were filed in courts in Mathura by different petitioners.
    • A common thread in all the petitions is a prayer for the removal of the mosque from the 13.77-acre complex.
  • The latest Mathura order is similar to the one in Varanasi’s Gyanvapi Mosque, also built adjacent to a venerated Hindu temple.

What Happened in the Case of the Gyanvapi Mosque?

  • Last year in the month of May, a videographic survey of the Kashi Vishwanath temple-Gyanvapi mosque was completed by a Commission appointed by the local court.
    • During the survey proceedings, a structure which the Hindu side claimed was a “shivling”, and the Muslim side claimed was a “fountain”, was found to be inside the mosque premises.
  • Subsequently, a scientific survey of the Gyanvapi mosque complex was ordered by the Varanasi district court.
  • This time, the District and Sessions Judge AK Vishvesha had directed the ASI to “undertake scientific investigation/survey/excavation at the property in question.
  • The survey was halted after the mosque committee approached the Allahabad High Court, and then the Supreme Court, seeking a stay on the survey.
  • Both the courts cleared the decks for the survey which was resumed on August 4 amid tight security arrangements.
  • The ASI teams have been surveying the campus since.
  • Recently, the Varanasi district court granted some more time to the Archaeological Survey of India (ASI) to submit the findings of the court-ordered scientific survey of the Gyanvapi mosque premises.

Multidimensional Poverty Index reduction under the NDA is flawed (The Hindu)

  • 08 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

The Multidimensional Poverty Index exaggerates the National Democratic Alliance’s success in fighting deprivation.

Context:

  • Some critics argue that the initiatives undertaken by the NDA Government might not have comprehensively tackled the various dimensions of poverty.
  • Additionally, there are concerns that the reported successes may not be accurately reflected in the Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI), raising questions about its alignment with the ground reality of deprivation.
  • It is crucial to delve deeper into the methodologies and criteria employed for measuring multidimensional poverty to ascertain their resonance with the nuanced challenges confronted by the population.
  • Nobel Laureate Amartya Sen introduced a comprehensive and innovative outlook on well-being, emphasizing capabilities and functionings, commonly referred to as the capability approach.

What is Amartya Sen's Capability Approach?

  • Amartya Sen's Capability Approach serves as a normative framework for assessing individual well-being and societal arrangements.
    • Rather than focusing on happiness, preferences, or resources, this approach directs attention to the genuine opportunities and freedoms available to individuals in realizing lives aligned with their values.
  • Sen's Capability Approach comprises two central elements: functionings and capabilities.
    • Functionings represent valuable states of being and doing that an individual can attain, such as good health, education, or social engagement.
    • On the other hand, capabilities encompass the array of alternative functionings that individuals can choose from within their personal and social contexts.
  • Illustratively, an individual's capability may extend to being either well-nourished or undernourished, contingent upon factors like access to food and dietary choices.
    • Sen argues that the capability approach offers a superior means of evaluating human welfare compared to other approaches like utilitarianism and resourcism, which he deems either excessively narrow or insufficiently attuned to the diversity and intricacy of human experiences.
  • Utilitarianism centres around choices leading to the greatest happiness or satisfaction of desires, while resourcism concerns the distribution of resources like income, wealth, or goods in society.
    • According to Sen, the ultimate aim of development should be the expansion of people's capabilities, surpassing mere considerations of income or utilities.
  • Amartya Sen's Capability Approach has notably influenced the development of the Human Development Index.

What is the Human Development Index (HDI)?

  • HDI serves as a statistical tool employed to assess a country's overall achievements across its social and economic dimensions.
  • It is published by the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP).
  • It stands as the second most widely utilized indicator for gauging economic progress, following national income statistics (GDP).
  • Components: HDI comprises three key components, namely:
    • Health, quantified by life expectancy at birth;
    • Education, determined by a combination of mean years of schooling and expected years of schooling; and
    • Income, evaluated by gross national income per capita (at purchasing power parity).
  • Calculation: The ultimate score is computed as a geometric mean of the aforementioned three categories.

What is the Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI)?

  • The Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI) is an indicator of poverty that takes into account diverse aspects of well-being, extending beyond monetary considerations or income alone.
    • Originating from collaborative efforts between the Oxford Poverty and Human Development Initiative (OPHI) and the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP), the MPI offers a holistic perspective on poverty by incorporating a range of factors contributing to deprivation.
  • In assessing poverty, the MPI identifies individuals or households as multidimensionally poor when they experience deprivation across various indicators within different dimensions of well-being.
    • These dimensions typically encompass health, education, and the standard of living. By considering a broad spectrum of factors, the MPI provides a nuanced and comprehensive understanding of poverty.

What is the Current Status of MPI?

  • Regrettably, the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP) has chosen to adopt a capabilities-based approach to formulate a comprehensive measure of human development, applying uniform weights to the three primary components—health, education, and standard of living, along with their sub-indices.
    • Under this methodology, both NITI Aayog and the UNDP recently released the National Multidimensional Poverty Index/MPI: A Progress Review 2023, mirrored in the UNDP Report titled "Making Our Future: New Directions for Human Development in Asia and the Pacific," unveiled on November 7, 2023.
  • However, these reports share the same shortcomings as the UNDP human development index, primarily stemming from aggregation with uniform weighting.
    • Notably, the narrative surrounding the MPI exacerbates these distortions.
  • Surprisingly, the MPI 2023 estimates indicate a nearly halved value for India's national MPI and a decline from 24.85% to 14.96% between 2015-16 and 2019-21.
    • This substantial reduction of 9.89 percentage points suggests that approximately 135.5 million people have transitioned out of poverty during this period.
    • Furthermore, the intensity of poverty, gauging the average deprivation among individuals in multidimensional poverty, decreased from 47.14% to 44.39%.

Why the Reduction in MPI Numbers Under the Current Government is Flawed?

  • Misleading and Inadequate Information: The MPI relies on data from the National Family Health Surveys (NFHS) 4 and 5, which are deemed insufficiently detailed for accurate estimation.
    • NFHS 5 data is particularly questionable due to its suppression, driven by discrepancies in open defecation estimates conflicting with official claims of complete elimination.
  • Ideally, combining NFHS 4 and 5 with the 75th Round of the National Sample Survey (NSS) on household consumption expenditure should have provided a more comprehensive perspective.
    • However, this was abandoned as leaked poverty estimates indicated an increase.
  • Compounding the skepticism is the profound impact of the COVID-19 pandemic in 2020-21.
    • The widespread loss of livelihoods, reverse migration fatalities, and inadequate access to vaccines and medical care have created a substantial economic shock, hindering India's recovery.
    • For instance, GDP growth has plummeted from 8% in 2015-16 to 3.78% in 2019-20, reaching -6.60% in 2020-21, along with a decline in per capita income.
  • Greater Emphasis on Covariates: Comparing the elasticities of MPI with respect to various covariates reveals that the most significant reduction in MPI is attributed to higher State per capita income.
    • However, due to a drastic income decrease, MPI has spiked.
    • Urban location follows in importance, with a 1% increase resulting in a 0.90% MPI increase, reflecting the challenges associated with rural-urban migration and the growth of substandard living conditions.
  • Both healthcare and education expenditure are associated with lower MPI, with education exhibiting a higher elasticity, implying that a 1% increase in education spending reduces MPI more than a comparable increase in healthcare spending.
  • Reduction Between 2015 and 2019-21 is Considerably Lower than the Official Estimate:
    • Some research suggests that the reduction between 2015 and 2019-21 is notably lower than the official estimate, standing at 4.7 percentage points compared to the reported 9.89 percentage points.
    • A selective review of MPI estimates indicates a rise in poverty in Uttar Pradesh, India's most populous state, by over seven percentage points.
    • Among states that went to elections in November (Chhattisgarh, Madhya Pradesh, Mizoram, Rajasthan, and Telangana), MPI fell in Chhattisgarh (by over six percentage points), in Rajasthan (by two percentage points), and significantly in Madhya Pradesh (by about eight percentage points).

What Steps Should Be Taken in order to Improve MPI?

  • Adjustment for Income Variability: Given the substantial decrease in State per capita income causing a surge in MPI, consider implementing mechanisms to account for income fluctuations.
    • This may involve incorporating smoothing techniques or introducing a lagged income variable to capture economic effects over time.
  • Dynamic Impact of Urban-Rural Migration: Recognize the dynamic impact of factors on urban locations, particularly in light of the reverse migration during the COVID-19 pandemic.
    • Develop models that reflect changing patterns of rural-urban migration and its influence on living conditions and MPI.
  • Focus on Education Expenditure: Emphasize expenditure on education, as both healthcare and education spending are linked to lower MPI.
    • Notably, the elasticity of education is higher, suggesting that a 1% increase in education reduces MPI more than a comparable increase in healthcare.
    • Given the reported decline in state-level educational expenditure, a rise in MPI is likely.
  • Mitigate the Impact of MPs with Criminal Cases: Recognize and address the correlation between the share of Members of Parliament with criminal cases and higher MPI.
    • Explore strategies such as policy initiatives to curb corruption, enhance transparency, and address challenges posed by criminal elements within legislative bodies.
    • Studies indicate that when the share of MPs with criminal cases exceeds 20%, the MPI tends to be higher.
  • Sensitivity Analysis: Conduct sensitivity analyses to test the robustness of the MPI model.
    • This involves varying key parameters to understand how changes in inputs impact results, providing insights into the stability and reliability of MPI calculations.
  • Policy Recommendations: Utilize findings to inform policy recommendations targeting identified drivers of poverty.
    • Advocate for policies promoting income stability, targeted investments in education and healthcare, and measures to combat corruption and criminality within legislative bodies.

Conclusion

Enhancing the Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI) requires proactive measures. Addressing income variability, acknowledging dynamic urban-rural migration impacts, and prioritizing education expenditure is pivotal. Additionally, mitigating the influence of MPs with criminal cases and conducting sensitivity analyses for robustness are essential steps. Ultimately, informed policy recommendations should focus on promoting income stability, targeted investments in education and healthcare, and tackling corruption to advance holistic poverty reduction strategies.

ECI members to have the same status as SC judges: Why Govt has chosen to make U-turn on proposed Bill (Indian Express)

  • 13 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

Following protests by former Chief Election Commissioners (CECs) and Opposition parties, the Centre on Tuesday moved amendments which sought to retain the status of the Election Commissioners (ECs) on par with Supreme Court Judges.

Context:

  • In response to protests from former Chief Election Commissioners (CECs) and Opposition parties, the Centre introduced amendments on Tuesday aiming to preserve the equivalence of status for Election Commissioners (ECs) with Supreme Court Judges.
    • Earlier, the Chief Election Commissioner and Other Election Commissioners (Appointment, Conditions of Service and Term of Office) Bill, 2023, first introduced in Rajya Sabha on August 10, had sought to downgrade their salaries, perks and allowances, aligning them with those of a Cabinet Secretary.
  • The Bill, along with the amendments, was discussed and passed by voice vote in just over four hours in Rajya Sabha on Tuesday, after the Opposition staged a walkout.
    • The Bill is yet to be introduced in Lok Sabha.
  • The Bill regulates the appointment of the CEC and two ECs by constituting a three-member selection committee comprising the Prime Minister, the Leader of the Opposition and a Cabinet Minister.
    • Till now, the CEC and ECs were appointed by the President on the advice of the government, as there was no law enacted for the purpose.

Key Highlights of the New Bill:

  • Exclusion of CJI and Inclusion of Cabinet Minister: The bill proposes the removal of the Chief Justice of India from the selection panel, replacing the position with a Cabinet Minister nominated by the Prime Minister.
    • The Leader of Opposition in Lok Sabha is designated as a member of the selection committee.
  • Selection Criteria: The Election Commission of India (ECI) will comprise a Chief Election Commissioner (CEC) and other Election Commissioners (ECs) selected from individuals who have held a position equivalent to Secretary to the Government of India.
    • Emphasis on integrity, knowledge, and experience in election management.
  • Selection Process: A Search Committee, led by the Law Minister, will propose a list of names to the selection committee.
    • The Selection Committee, chaired by the Prime Minister, includes the Leader of Opposition or the leader of the largest Opposition party in Lok Sabha, and a Cabinet Minister appointed by the Prime Minister.
    • The Selection Committee may consider individuals beyond the Search Committee's recommendations.
  • Terms and Tenure: The term of CEC and ECs remains at 6 years or until the age of 65, whichever comes earlier.
    • The salary of CEC and ECs aligns with that of a Supreme Court judge.
  • Repeal of 1991 Act: The bill repeals the Election Commission (Conditions of Service of Election Commissioners and Transaction of Business) Act, 1991, which guided the functioning of the ECI.
  • Decision-Making within ECI: Business of the ECI should ideally be conducted unanimously; in case of a difference of opinion, the majority's decision prevails.
  • Removal Process: CEC's removal aligns with the procedure and grounds applicable to a Supreme Court judge.
    • Removal of election commissioners is subject to the recommendation of the CEC.
  • Protection Clause: The bill introduces a provision safeguarding current and former CECs and election commissioners from civil or criminal proceedings related to their official duties.

The Supreme Court's Stance on Election Commission Appointments:

  • A Constitution Bench comprising five judges addressed multiple petitions advocating a selection process akin to that of the Central Bureau of Investigation (CBI) Director.
  • In March 2023, the Court unanimously criticized the existing system where the Centre appoints members of the election watchdog.
  • Citing Article 324(2) of the Constitution, the Court urged Parliament to enact legislation specifying the criteria for selection, terms of service, and tenure for the Chief Election Commissioner (CEC) and Election Commissioners (ECs).
  • Pending legislative action, the apex court constituted a panel consisting of the Prime Minister, the Chief Justice of India, and the leader of the opposition to carry out these appointments.

What happens now?

  • Since no vacancy has emerged in the ECI since the Supreme Court order of March, no appointments have been made through the mechanism laid down by the court.
    • The next vacancy is expected to arise in February 2024, when EC Anup Chandra Pandey will retire.
  • Meanwhile, the amendments that are set to be moved by Law Minister are expected to restore the equivalence with a Supreme Court judge.
  • According to the amendments proposed by the Minister, the status of the EC would be kept the same as that of a Supreme Court judge, with the same salary, dearness allowance and leave encashment rules.

Election Commission of India (ECI):

  • The Election Commission of India (ECI) is an independent and permanent constitutional body entrusted with the responsibility of conducting impartial and transparent elections in India.
  • Constitutionally empowered, the ECI oversees and directs elections for Parliament, state legislatures, the president, and the vice-president of India.

Key Functions of the ECI:

  • Delimiting electoral constituencies nationwide.
  • Regularly updating and revising electoral rolls, enrolling eligible voters.
  • Announcing election schedules, scrutinizing nomination papers, and fixing election dates.
  • Granting recognition to political parties and allocating election symbols.
  • Advisory role in post-election disqualification matters for sitting members.
  • Enforcing the Model Code of Conduct during elections to prevent unfair practices.

Composition:

  • Comprising a Chief Election Commissioner (CEC) and two Election Commissioners (ECs).

Appointment Process:

  • The President appoints the CEC and ECs under Article 324(2), based on the advice of the Union Council of Ministers led by the Prime Minister.

Tenure and Conditions:

  • Commissioners serve a term of 6 years or until age 65, whichever is earlier, with conditions similar to a Supreme Court judge.

Removal Safeguards:

  • The CEC enjoys security of tenure, removable only in the same manner and on the same grounds as a Supreme Court judge. Other commissioners can be removed on the CEC's recommendation.

 

That many of these unapproved or banned FDCs contain antibiotics is cause for concern given the growing antibacterial microbial resistance in India (The Hindu)

  • 09 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

A group of academics from India, Qatar and the United Kingdom recently published a worrying new study in the Journal of Pharmaceutical Policy and Practice on the volume of unapproved and even banned fixed dose combinations (FDC) of antibiotics being sold in India.

News Summary:

  • In the Journal of Pharmaceutical Policy and Practice, a group of academics from India, Qatar, and the United Kingdom recently released a concerning new study on the amount of antibiotics that are being sold in India that are not allowed or even prohibited as fixed dosage combinations (FDCs).
  • The analysis, which makes use of pharmaceutical industry sales data, shows that in 2020, 60.5% of FDCs containing antibiotics (or 239 formulations) were unapproved, and another 9.9% containing 39 formulations were being distributed in the nation even though they were prohibited.
  • The fact that antibiotics are present in so many of these illicit or prohibited FDCs is concerning given the rising incidence of antimicrobial microbial resistance (AMR) in India.

What are the Fixed Dose Combinations (FDCs) Drugs?

  • FDCs are combinations of one or more known drugs and can be useful in treating some diseases since the combination can improve patient compliance.
    • For instance, if a patient has to take three different medications for a particular treatment, she may forget to take one.
    • But if all three medications are combined into one tablet or one syrup, the chance of her forgetting to take one or two of the drugs is reduced.
  • For diseases such as AIDS, it is well documented that FDCs have proven to be very useful in improving patient compliance, which at the end of the day improves treatment outcomes.

Concerns with FDCs Drugs?

  • Making FDCs is not an easy job, even though most consist of drugs with known safety and efficacy profiles.
  • All drugs have side effects. When formulated together, there is a possibility that the active ingredient or excipients (inactive ingredients) may affect how each drug functions.
    • For example, the drugs may interact in a way to reduce the therapeutic efficacy of each active ingredient, or, worse, the drugs may interact with each other to create a more toxic element, often called metabolites.
  • This is why all FDCs must go through a scientifically designed approval process where such interactions can be evaluated.

Advantages of Fixed Dose Combinations:

  • FDCs increase patient adherence, streamline treatment, and optimize the advantages of the combined therapeutic actions of the two medications.
  • Treatment for infectious diseases: A significant portion of India's population is afflicted with infectious diseases.
    • FDCs are very helpful in the treatment of infectious disorders when it is customary to administer numerous antimicrobial drugs, such as HIV, malaria, and tuberculosis.
    • Additionally useful in chronic diseases, FDCs are especially beneficial when co-occurring disorders are common.
  • Affordability and accessibility: FDCs have particular benefits over single entity preparations, including improved efficacy, a lower likelihood of side effects, potentially lower costs, and easier distribution logistics that are pertinent to resource-constrained scenarios like those in India.

Challenges Associated with Fixed-Dose Combinations (FDCs):

  • Increased Risk of Side Effects: Combining multiple active ingredients in FDC drugs heightens the risk of adverse drug interactions and increases susceptibility to side effects.
  • Patients may exhibit heightened sensitivity or allergic reactions to specific components, posing challenges in identification and management due to the fixed combination.
    • For instance, a single FDC drug containing Paracetamol, Bromhexine, Phenylephrine, Chlorpheniramine, and Guaiphenesin may elevate the risk of side effects like drowsiness, dizziness, and increased blood pressure.
  • Regulatory Challenges: Regulating FDC drugs prove challenging due to the complexities associated with evaluating the safety and efficacy of multiple active ingredients in a single formulation.
    • Maintaining quality control and standardization for FDC drugs becomes more demanding compared to single-component medications.
  • Overuse and Misuse: FDC drugs can contribute to the overuse and misuse of medications.
    • Patients might unknowingly consume multiple active ingredients unnecessarily or in inappropriate combinations, leading to potential health risks.
  • Lack of Evidence-based Clinical Data: Approval of some FDC drugs may be based on limited or insufficient clinical evidence supporting their efficacy and safety profiles.
    • The absence of robust scientific data raises concerns about the appropriateness and reliability of FDC drugs for specific medical conditions.

Why are FDCs banned in India?

  • Patients may not need that many drugs; thus, they are subjected to additional side effects.
  • Some drug doses have to be individualized based on the patient's condition.
    • This is not possible when using FDCs.
  • Some companies have been selling FDCs in India under this pretext without consulting the central government, as seen with the cefixime-azithromycin combination, which has already been banned.
  • These non-essential FDCs, therefore, do more harm than good by encouraging irrational and indiscriminate prescribing of multiple drugs than necessary.

Some Examples of (Banned Fixed-Dose Combination) Drugs in India:

  • Fixed dose combination of Aceclofenac + Paracetamol + Rabeprazole
  • Fixed dose combination of Nimesulide + Diclofenac
  • Fixed dose combination of Nimesulide + Cetirizine + Caffeine

How is the Pharmaceutical Industry Exploiting Loopholes in India's Legal Framework?

  • Pharmaceutical companies in India use these FDCs to escape liability under multiple laws without much concern for public health.
    • One such law is the Drugs (Prices Control) Order (DPCO), under which the government fixes the prices of individual drugs.
    • Since drug combinations were traditionally not covered under the DPCO, the pharmaceutical industry decided that making FDCs provided an easy way to escape the remit of the DPCO.
  • Motivated solely by market-driven pragmatism rather than a commitment to public health, the Indian pharmaceutical industry introduced an extensive array of FDCs lacking any discernible medical rationale.
    • For example, anti-inflammatory drugs were combined with vitamins, anti-histamines were combined with anti-diarrhoeal agents, penicillin was combined with sulphonamides, and vitamins were combined with analgesics.
  • These were combinations not found in any other country.

The pharmaceutical industry benefited in two ways.

  • Firstly, the wide range of FDCs in the market meant no standards were set by bodies like the Indian Pharmacopoeia Commission, shielding manufacturers from quality testing and potential legal consequences.
    • Essentially, the pharmaceutical industry could dictate its testing standards when FDCs were sampled for government testing.
  • Second, the FDC approach provides companies with a justification for higher drug prices. For instance, if multiple companies sell azithromycin individually, they must compete and lower prices.
    • However, combining it with another drug in an FDC allows them to market it as a unique solution, justifying higher prices until competitors introduce similar products.
    • This system rewards pseudo-innovation rather than true medical breakthroughs, allowing dubious FDCs to command elevated prices, supported by doctors who may presume regulatory oversight.

Is there any Regulatory Framework Addressing the Issue of FDCs?

  • The FDC problem has been on the regulatory radar since 1978 when the first government committee studied the issue and admitted that we had a problem on our hands.
  • At the time, there was no system under the colonial-era Drugs and Cosmetics Act, 1940 to vet drugs for safety and efficacy before their sale in India.
  • This meant that each State drug controller could hand out manufacturing licences for any drug formulation and there was little that the central government could do to stop their sale.
  • In 1982, Parliament changed the law to give the central government the power to “prohibit” the manufacture of specific drugs that lack therapeutic value or justification.
  • Later in 1988, the central government amended the rules to introduce a new requirement for manufacturers of all “new drugs”, including FDCs, to submit proof of safety and efficacy to the Drugs Controller General of India (DCGI) who heads the Central Drugs Standard Control Organization (CDSCO).
  • These amendments also made it clear that State drug controllers could not grant “manufacturing licences” for “new drugs” that are not approved for safety and efficacy by the DCGI.

Is Unabated Licensing Undermining FDC Regulation in India?

  • Despite clear legal provisions, State drug controllers continue to overlook regulations, issuing manufacturing licenses for Fixed-Dose Combinations (FDCs) not approved by the DCGI with impunity.
    • Manufacturers selling these unapproved FDCs technically expose themselves to prosecution by the Central government for violating the law.
  • Rather than pursuing criminal prosecutions, the Ministry of Health is engaged in a reactive approach, frequently utilizing its powers under Section 26A to prohibit the manufacturing of specific FDCs.
    • Since 1983, 444 orders have been issued under this provision, primarily targeting FDCs. Many of these orders have become entangled in intricate legal disputes, with inconsistent court decisions further complicating the regulatory landscape.

Conclusion

The fact that these academics have discovered 239 unapproved FDCs being sold in 2020 in just one category of FDCs more than 42 years after the problem was first flagged is an astonishing indictment of the incompetence of the drug regulatory framework in India. As they point out in their paper, unregulated FDCs may end up contributing to the AMR problem in India. The Ministry of Health needs to take immediate action.

Today, India is poised at the moment and GDP that China was in in 2007. Does it have the same gumption? (Indian Express)

  • 14 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

If India slowly but steadily raises its development cooperation budget to less than 0.5 per cent of its GDP by 2030, it will still have put around $70 billion into the global system. India is already the voice of the Global South; it will become the bank of the Global South.

Context:

  • In 2007, China's GDP stood at approximately $3.6 trillion. Fast-forward to the present, India's GDP has reached $3.7 trillion or potentially more, framing a significant context for a crucial juncture in Indian diplomacy under the current leadership.
  • As India wraps up its transformative diplomatic year in 2023, highlighted by its G20 presidency, it becomes imperative to reflect on the geopolitical lessons drawn from China's rise post the 2008 financial crisis.

Global South and India:

  • Global South represent a group of countries primarily located in Asia, Africa, and Latin America which are referred to as "developing" or "underdeveloped".
    • Global North on the other hand is completely opposite to this- developed, high per capita income, higher life expectancy and having a strong voice in various multilateral organizations.

Significance of the Global South:

  • Economic Projections: By 2030, three out of the four largest economies are anticipated to emerge from the Global South (China, India, Japan, Indonesia).
  • BRICS Dominance: The GDP of BRICS nations, measured in terms of purchasing power, now surpasses that of the G7 countries.
  • Increased Intra-South Trade: Intra-South trade has surged, constituting over a quarter of global trade.
  • Addressing Global Challenges: Collaborating with Global South nations is crucial for tackling issues like climate change, inequality, malnutrition, and energy security.
  • Foreign Direct Investment: Outflows of foreign direct investment from the South contribute significantly to global flows.

India's Initiatives as a Global South Leader:

  • Multilateral Reforms: India advocates for the reform of multilateral institutions to enhance inclusivity.
  • Aarogya Maitri Project: Providing medical supplies to disaster-affected countries.
  • Global South Diplomacy: Initiatives like the Global South Young Diplomat Forum and the Global South Centre of Excellence for R&D.
  • Educational Support: Offering Global South Scholarships for students pursuing higher education in India.
  • While India possesses the potential and political will to lead the Global South, it must also strive to narrow the gap between the Global North and South, aligning with its vision of 'Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam'—The World is One Family."

The Rise of China to Geoeconomic Prominence: An Analysis

  • China's Strategic Moves During the Financial Crisis: Back in 2007, China had not yet achieved the geo-economic prominence it now holds.
    • However, despite having a GDP lower than India's today, it swiftly emerged as a pivotal nation during the global financial crisis in 2008.
  • Countries worldwide sought to deepen their ties with China, aiming to secure a special standing in their diplomatic relations with the People's Republic.
  • China's strategic advantage lies in its provision of institutional and geo-economic responses.
    • These responses included the establishment of a development bank, the initiation of a cross-continental lending program, and the catalyzation of infrastructure projects without the legacy constraints associated with Western agencies.
    • This marked the beginning of what later evolved into the Belt and Road Initiative.
  • China's Role as a Crucial Non-Western Alternative: In 2008, China capitalized on its economic potential to amass significant economic and political influence, a position it has maintained ever since.
  • This was achieved by positioning itself as a vital addition to the global order.
    • While the US grappled with post-crisis recovery and the Eurozone faced internal challenges, China emerged as a symbol of stability and economic dynamism.
  • The world, in search of an extra engine for growth and an additional source of investment, welcomed China as a crucial alternative outside the Western world.
  • Hence, China's adept strategic manoeuvres not only offered a remedy during the financial crisis but also solidified its status as an indispensable centre of geopolitical power on the global stage.

Does India Possess Enough Resources to Continue China's Ascent the Path?

  • Unleashing India's Potential for Global Influence: India is in a similar position and has a comparable GDP. This is the foundation that Indians must comprehend in order to grasp their current position in the world as we approach 2024.
  • Recent history shows us that a $4 trillion economy, comparable to India's, can have a significant impact.
  • It can make a place for itself beside economies that are four or five times larger than its own, such as the US, the EU, and China, with foresight and deft diplomacy.
  • A Unique Opportunity for India: In 2024, as Europe stagnates, the US withdraws, and China faces internal issues and sees a nominal decline in its share of the global economy, there is real potential for India.

What Additional Advantages India Can Provide Along China's Lines?

  • Momentum-Focused Additionalities: Unlike China's case, India's aspirations for additionalities require momentum more than extraordinariness.
    • With its trajectory set on a green and digital future, in contrast to China's manufacturing dominance, India aims to leverage its $4 trillion economy to wield influence comparable to a $15 trillion economy.
  • Systematic Approach to Additionalities: India's quest for additionalities should emulate China's approach from 15 years ago, emphasizing a systematic roadmap.
    • This roadmap, outlining India's unique proposition, signals that its economy is positioned to exert significant influence globally.
  • Dedicated Development Finance Institution: To meet global corporate needs beyond trade finance, India should establish an outward-focused development finance corporation, mirroring China's China Development Bank.
    • This institution should carry a distinct global imagery and play a pivotal role as a major source of development finance.
  • Strategic External Engagement: Collaborating with like-minded partners, India should strategically map priority infrastructure, connectivity routes, business hubs, and developmental projects.
    • This external engagement approach aligns with the vision for India's global role and positions 2024 as the year to articulate a comprehensive world map reflecting this vision.

Priorities for India's Upcoming Government in the Years Ahead:

  • Information Technology (IT) and Innovation: Demonstrate India’s global potential, following the model set by China in 2007 and during the 2008 financial crisis.
    • Leverage the established status as a global IT hub to propel software services and technology exports to new heights.
  • Entrepreneurship and Start-ups: Sustain and enhance the flourishing start-up ecosystem through supportive policies and funding.
    • Capitalize on the growing number of Unicorns (over 100) as a testament to India's entrepreneurial prowess.
  • Strategic Location: Leverage India's strategic geographical location as a gateway between the Middle East, Europe, and Asia for enhanced international trade.
    • Strengthen India's role in the India-Middle East Europe corridor, offering an alternative trade route to the Middle East and Europe.
  • Key Reforms and Policies: Continue the momentum of economic reforms aimed at improving the business environment and ease of doing business.
    • Build on initiatives such as Make in India and Goods and Services Tax (GST) to streamline processes and stimulate economic activity.
    • These strategic focus areas can propel India’s global standing, foster innovation, and contribute to sustained economic growth.

As India enters a transformative phase in 2024, its capacity to translate economic momentum into global influence becomes pivotal for its role in the changing geopolitical scenario.

Drawing insights from China's ascent, a strategic roadmap, systematic methodologies, and visionary diplomacy emerge as crucial elements for reshaping the global order.

India's trajectory toward becoming the bank of the Global South hinges on its ability to contribute significantly to global growth, institutions, and security through strategic additions.

 

Cyclone Michaung to make landfall in Tamil Nadu: What is a cyclone — and its different types? (Indian Express)

  • 02 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

Cyclone Michaung: The deep depression currently over the Bay of Bengal is likely to intensify into a cyclonic storm within the next 24 hours, bringing heavy rain to coastal Tamil Nadu and Andhra Pradesh.

News Summary:

  • The India Meteorological Department (IMD) has issued a warning as Cyclone Michaung looms over the Bay of Bengal and the South Andaman Sea.
    • It is the fourth tropical cyclone of the year over the Bay of Bengal.
  • With the potential to intensify, the cyclone is expected to make landfall in and around Tamil Nadu on December 4, prompting concerns and precautionary measures across southern India.
  • Govt. has issued an ‘orange’ alert over Tamil Nadu, as well as coastal and interior Andhra Pradesh, and issued advisories to fishermen in coastal areas, urging them to suspend activities in the sea for safety reasons.

What is a Cyclone?

  • A cyclone is a large-scale system of air that rotates around the centre of a low-pressure area. It is usually accompanied by violent storms and bad weather.
  • As per NDMA, a cyclone is characterised by inward spiraling winds that rotate anticlockwise in the Northern Hemisphere and clockwise in the Southern Hemisphere.
  • The National Disaster Management Authority (NDMA) classifies cyclones broadly into two categories: tropical cyclones and extratropical cyclones.

What are Tropical Cyclones?

  • Tropical cyclones is a weather phenomenon formed only over warm ocean waters near the equator.

Formation:

  • When warm, moist air over the ocean rises upward from near the surface, a cyclone is formed.
  • When the air rises up and away from the ocean surface, it creates an area of lower air pressure below.
  • It causes the air from surrounding areas with higher pressure to move towards the low-pressure area which further leads to the warming up of the air and causes it to rise above.
  • As the warm, moist air rises and cools the water in the air forms clouds.
  • The complete system of clouds and wind spins and grows, along with the ocean's heat and water evaporating from the ocean surface.
  • As the wind system rotates with increasing speed, an eye gets formed in the middle.
  • The centre of a cyclone is very calm and clear with very low air pressure.
  • The difference in temperature between the warm, rising, and cooler environment causes the air to rise and become buoyant.
  • When the wind speed is 39 mph (63 kmph), the storm is called a "tropical storm".
  • Whereas when the wind speed reaches 74 mph (119 kmph), the storm is officially a "tropical cyclone" or hurricane.
  • Annually, around 70 to 90 cyclonic systems develop all over the globe.
  • The Coriolis force causes the wind to spiral around a low-pressure area.
  • As the presence of Coriolis force is negligible in the equatorial belt between 5 degrees north and 5 degrees south latitudes, hence cyclonic systems do not develop in this region.

What are Extratropical Cyclones?

  • Extratropical cyclones are also known as mid-latitude depressions, temperate cyclones, frontal depressions, and wave cyclones.
  • They occur in the mid-latitudinal region, between 35° and 65° latitude, in both hemispheres.
  • These cyclones move from west to east, especially during the winter seasons, when polar and tropical air masses meet and create fronts.

Formation of Extratropical Cyclones:

  • Temperate cyclones form following the Polar Front theory.
    • This theory explains that warm-humid air from the tropics meets cold-dry air from the poles, forming a polar front.
    • The denser and heavier cold air pushes up the warm air, creating instability and low pressure at their meeting point.
    • This low pressure results in a void that surrounding air rushes in to fill.
    • Due to the Earth's rotation, a cyclone is formed at the center of these interactions.
  • Extratropical cyclones are less intense compared to the more severe cyclones or hurricanes in tropical regions, which develop in areas with more consistent temperatures.

How are Tropical Cyclones Named?

  • The meteorologist gives each tropical cyclone a name to avoid confusion, according to the World Meteorological Organisation.
  • In general, tropical cyclones are named according to the rules at the regional level.
    • For the Indian Ocean region, a formula for naming cyclones was agreed upon in 2000.
    • Thirteen countries in the region - Bangladesh, India, Iran, Maldives, Myanmar, Oman, Pakistan, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Sri Lanka, Thailand, United Arab Emirates, and Yemen - contributed a set of names, which are assigned sequentially whenever a cyclonic storm develops.
  • Worldwide, there are six regional specialised meteorological centres (RSMCs) and five regional Tropical Cyclone Warning Centres (TCWCs) mandated for issuing advisories and naming tropical cyclones.
  • The names are chosen to be easy to remember and pronounce, and they must not be offensive or controversial.
  • They are also chosen from a variety of languages so that people from different regions can identify with them.
    • Cyclone Michaung, for example, is one of the names proposed by Myanmar, which means "strength and resilience".
  • The responsibility of choosing a name for a cyclone in the North Indian Ocean falls upon the Indian Meteorological Department, in accordance with the decree issued by the World Meteorological Organisation (WMO).
  • The naming system has evolved over time. In the early years of the practice, the names were chosen alphabetically, with one name assigned to each letter of the alphabet.
  • However, this system was found to be confusing and difficult to remember, so the current system of pre-defined names was introduced.
  • In the Atlantic and Southern hemispheres (Indian Ocean and South Pacific), tropical cyclones receive names in alphabetical order, alternating between women’s and men's names.
  • In the Northern Indian Ocean, nations began using a new system for naming tropical cyclones in 2000.
    • Names are listed alphabetically country-wise and are neutral gender-wise.
  • The name list is proposed by the National Meteorological and Hydrological Services of WMO Members of a specific region and approved by respective tropical cyclone regional bodies at their annual or biennial sessions.

How are Cyclones Classified?

  • Cyclones are categorized on the basis of the strength of the winds by the Indian Meteorological Department (IMD):
    • Depression: Wind speeds of between 31–49 km/h
    • Deep Depression: Between 50-61 km/h
    • Cyclonic Storm: Between 62–88 km/h
    • Severe Cyclonic Storm: Between 89-117 Km/h
    • Very Severe Cyclonic Storm: Between 118-166 Km/h
    • Extremely Severe Cyclonic Storm: Between 166-221 Km/h
    • Super Cyclonic Storm: Above 222 Km/h

Indian Meteorological Department (IMD):

  • Established in 1875, the India Meteorological Department (IMD) serves as the National Meteorological Service of the country and is the primary government agency for meteorology and related subjects.
  • The Director General of Meteorology leads the department, overseeing its operations.

Key Features:

  • The IMD operates under the Ministry of Earth Sciences (MoES) and has its headquarters in New Delhi.
  • There are six Regional Meteorological Centres, each headed by a Deputy Director General, located in Mumbai, Chennai, New Delhi, Calcutta, Nagpur, and Guwahati.

IMD's Mandate:

  • Conduct meteorological observations and provide current and forecast meteorological information for activities such as agriculture, shipping, aviation, and offshore oil explorations.
  • Issue warnings for severe weather phenomena, including tropical cyclones, norwesters, duststorms, heavy rains and snow, and cold and heat waves.
  • Supply meteorological statistics essential for agriculture, water resource management, industries, oil exploration, and other nation-building activities.
  • Conduct and promote research in meteorology and related disciplines.

Bucking global trends, Malaria cases and deaths have continued to decline in India. (Indian Express)

  • 04 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

  • The recently released World Malaria Report shows that the number of cases and deaths due to the mosquito-borne infection India have continued to decline.

About the World Malaria Report 2023:

Every year, the World Health Organization (WHO) releases a report on malaria worldwide. This report gives us the latest information about how malaria is being controlled and reduced globally.

Global Malaria Trends:

  • The number of malaria cases had dropped from 243 million to 233 million globally between 2000 and 2019.
  • However, the number of malaria deaths also remained higher than the pre-pandemic levels.
    • There were 608,000 deaths reported in 2022 as compared to 576,000 cases in 2019.

Climate Change Challenge:

  • This time, the report talks about how climate change and malaria are connected. Changes in temperature, humidity, and rainfall can affect the mosquitoes that carry malaria.

Other Challenges:

  • Besides climate change, things like conflicts, humanitarian crises, and problems with drugs and insecticides also make it hard to control malaria.

Positive Takeaway:

  • The report shares some positive news, too. It talks about the first malaria vaccine, RTS, S/AS01, being used in three African countries.
  • And now, in October 2023, WHO recommended another safe and effective malaria vaccine, R21/Matrix-M.
  • Having two vaccines should help more people get protection, especially in Africa.
  • Some countries with low malaria cases are also making progress towards getting rid of malaria. In 2022, 34 countries had less than 1000 cases, compared to only 13 countries in 2000.

What does the Report Say About India?

  • According to the World Malaria Report, India accounted for 66% of malaria cases in the World Health Organization’s South-East Asia region in 2022.
  • India and Indonesia accounted for about 94% of all malaria deaths in the region last year, the World Health Organization said.
  • The report said that nearly 46% of all cases in the region were caused by Plasmodium vivax, a protozoal parasite and a human pathogen.
  • According to World Malaria Report 2023, the number of cases and deaths due to the mosquito-borne infection India have continued to decline.
    • With an estimated 33.8 lakh cases and 5,511 deaths, India saw a decline of 30% in malaria incidence and 34 per cent in mortality in 2022, compared to the previous year.
  • India’s downward trend was reflected in the larger WHO South East Asian region that remained on track to achieving the 2030 target of reducing cases and deaths by 90%.

What is the Reason Behind India’s Success Story?

  • As per experts, a focus on providing primary healthcare to the remotest areas, surveillance that is now being backed by digital data, and better handling of extreme weather events such as cyclones have been key to India’s success.
  • Good preventive practices, use of effective tools to keep the mosquito population in check, use of point of care tests for quick diagnosis, and good management of the malaria cases have been key to reducing cases and deaths due to malaria over the years.
  • There has been a lot of investment in insecticide mosquito nets, antimalarial drugs, and point of care tests to quickly detect the disease.
    • Urbanisation also reduces incidence of malaria by reducing breeding grounds for most mosquitoes that spread the disease.”
  • States such as Odisha that regularly see extreme weather events such as cyclones are now well prepared to handle it, thereby reducing incidences of malaria associated with such events.

Climate Change and Malaria:

  • The malaria parasite and mosquito are both extremely sensitive to temperature, humidity, and rainfall.
  • The report says that climate change can not only directly increase geographies for malaria spread, but also indirectly affect the impact of the disease by reducing access to healthcare facilities and timely treatment.
  • Climate change is likely to lead to an increase in temperatures, with newer areas especially in the Himalayan belt suitable for the spread of the disease.
    • High risk zones will also emerge in states that face very high rainfall periodically.     
    • Planning for the disease should also take into account such extreme weather events as better planning for them can reduce incidence of malaria.
  • Almost half of the five million additional malaria cases reported globally in 2022, 2.1 million, were from Pakistan that witnessed an extreme flood.
    • The standing water after the floods became ideal breeding ground for mosquitoes and led to a five-fold increase in malaria cases in Pakistan.
    • The floods destroyed infrastructure and isolated millions, hindering medical access and increasing disease risk.
  • With increasing frequency of such extreme weather events, the annual report for the first time focused on climate change and malaria.

Need for Improved Surveillance:

  • With fewer cases being reported, there has to be intensified efforts to find and treat the scattered cases.
    • “When the burden of disease is higher, any intervention in areas reporting most of the cases results in drastic reduction in numbers.
    • However, when the numbers go down, the cases are scattered and difficult to find.
    • This is where the role of surveillance comes in
  • It is important to have real-time digital data of these cases to help local administrations better plan the interventions.

Challenges Ahead:

  • While India is doing well when it comes to malaria, issues such as resistance may derail it from its target of elimination by 2030.
    • The biological threats include drug resistance, insecticide resistance, gene deletions in parasites which make diagnosis difficult.
  • Another challenge is vivax malaria, which accounts for over 40 per cent of malaria cases in India.
    • The vivax plasmodium is known to hide in the liver and cause recurrent infections.
    • To treat, a 14-day course of therapy has to be taken.
    • Experts say the challenge with that is many do not complete the treatment and stop taking the drug once they feel better.
  • To achieve the malaria elimination target of 2030, there has to be emphasis on strengthening of surveillance as well as tailoring of malaria interventions at sub-national level which should be data driven.
  • In addition updating policies and adopting new tools as per national and subnational need in line with WHO guidance is critical.

Government Initiatives to Control Malaria in India:

  • From 2000 onward, India has successfully reduced malaria cases by over 50% and malaria-related deaths by more than 66%.
  • In 2016, India implemented its inaugural National Framework for Malaria Elimination (2016-2030).
  • The objective is to achieve a malaria-free nation by 2027, with complete elimination by 2030.
  • In 2019, the Indian government significantly boosted funding for the National Vector Borne Disease Control Programme by over 25%.
  • Additionally, India increased its support as a donor to the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis, and Malaria.

What is Malaria and how is it Spread?

  • Malaria is an illness caused by the Plasmodium parasite, primarily transmitted to humans through bites from infected mosquitoes, specifically female Anopheles mosquitoes.
  • These mosquitoes are often referred to as "night-biting" mosquitoes because they typically bite between dusk and dawn.
  • While there are various types of the Plasmodium parasite, only five can cause malaria in humans.
    • Plasmodium falciparum: Most common in Africa, responsible for the majority of malaria deaths globally.
    • Plasmodium vivax: Predominant in Asia and South America, causing milder symptoms and potential for relapses due to lingering in the liver.
    • Plasmodium ovale: Uncommon and typically found in West Africa, can persist in the liver for several years without symptoms.
    • Plasmodium malariae: Rare and mainly present in Africa.
    • Plasmodium knowlesi: Very rare and located in parts of Southeast Asia.

How Malaria Spreads?

  • Female Anopheles mosquitoes transmit the Plasmodium parasite during their bites, primarily occurring between dusk and dawn.
  • When an infected mosquito bites a person, the parasite enters the bloodstream and travels to the liver.
  • After developing in the liver, the infection re-enters the bloodstream, invading red blood cells (RBCs).
  • The parasites multiply within the RBCs, causing them to burst at regular intervals, releasing more parasites into the blood.
  • While mosquitoes can become infected by biting an already infected person, malaria does not spread directly from person to person.

How to read the NCRB 2022 report on crime in India (Indian Express)

  • 05 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

  • The National Crime Records Bureau (NCRB) released its annual report on crime in India for the year 2022 on Sunday (December 3).
  • The report is a compilation of data on reported crime from across the country, and provides the big picture of broad trends in crime registration.
  • Reports by the NCRB, which functions under the Union Ministry of Home Affairs, include statistics on offences ranging from crimes against women to economic and financial crimes.

What does the 2022 NCRB report say?

  • Overall Crime Statistics: In 2022, a total of 58,24,946 cognizable crimes, including 35,61,379 Indian Penal Code (IPC) crimes and 22,63,567 Special & Local Laws (SLL) crimes, were officially recorded.
    • This marked a 4.5% decrease in case registrations compared to the challenging pandemic year of 2021.
  • The crime rate has declined: The crime rate, indicating crimes registered per lakh population, saw a decline from 445.9 in 2021 to 422.2 in 2022.
    • This shift is considered a more insightful indicator, recognizing that absolute crime numbers tend to rise with population growth.
  • Increase in crime against women: Crime against women witnessed an uptick in 2022, with 4,45,256 reported cases, reflecting a 4% increase from the figures recorded in 2021.
    • Notably, the major share of these crimes under IPC sections included 'Cruelty by Husband or His Relatives' (31.4%), 'Kidnapping & Abduction of Women' (19.2%), and 'Assault on Women with Intent to Outrage her Modesty' (18.7%).
  • Increase in reporting of cybercrime: Cybercrime reporting witnessed a substantial surge, increasing by 24.4 percentage points compared to 2021, with a total of 65,893 cases.
    • Predominantly, 64.8% of these cases involved fraud, followed by extortion (5.5%), and sexual exploitation (5.2%).
  • Significant increase in suicides cases: Suicides reported during 2022 increased by 4.2% compared to 2021, totaling 1,70,924 cases.
    • Major contributing factors were 'Family Problems (other than marriage-related problems)' (31.7%), 'Marriage Related Problems' (4.8%), and 'Illness' (18.4%), collectively accounting for 54.9% of total suicides.
    • The overall male-to-female ratio of suicide victims stood at 71.8:28.2.

What are the headline trends in state-wise data in the report?

  • The states/ UTs reporting the highest chargesheeting rate under IPC crimes are Kerala (96.0%), Puducherry (91.3%), and West Bengal (90.6%).
  • This is the percentage of cases in which the police reached the stage of framing charges against the accused, out of the total true cases (where a charge sheet was not laid but a final report submitted as true, plus the total cases chargesheeted).

Does this mean that these states are more crime-prone than others?

  • Not necessarily. The NCRB report underlines that the data record the incidence of registered crime, not the actual occurrence of crime.

  • This is an important distinction — and also an acknowledgement of the fact that there are limitations to the data.
  • So, when reported crimes against women in Delhi rose significantly in the aftermath of the 2012 bus gangrape case, it may have been a reflection of increased awareness about the need for registering crimes, both among those affected and the police, rather than an actual increase in the incidence of crime against women.

What are the limitations to the data compiled by NCRB?

  • Data Reflects Registered Crimes, Not Actual Occurrence: The NCRB report captures registered crimes, not the actual occurrence of crime.
    • Instances like the reported rise in crimes against women in Delhi post the 2012 bus gangrape may indicate increased awareness rather than an actual surge in crime.
  • Limitations Due to Principal Offence Rule: NCRB employs the Principal Offence Rule, counting the most severe crime in a single FIR.
    • This may lead to undercounting, as in cases like 'Murder with Rape' being categorized as 'Murder' rather than rape.
  • Local-Level Inefficiencies Impact Report Accuracy: Inefficiencies at the local level influence report accuracy as the NCRB data relies on submissions from local sources.
    • The recording of details in an FIR, for example in suicide cases, depends on the understanding of the local police officer visiting the scene.
  • Socio-Economic Causative Factors Not Captured: The NCRB acknowledges the omission of socio-economic causative factors or reasons for crimes in its data compilation.
    • Important factors influencing criminal behavior may be overlooked.
  • Factors Affecting Data Collection: Certain groups may refrain from reporting crimes due to reasons such as fear of an uncooperative or hostile response from the police.
    • Shortage of police officers or unfilled vacancies at the local level can hinder effective data collection.
    • These limitations underscore the need for a nuanced interpretation of NCRB data, recognizing the potential biases and gaps inherent in its compilation process.

About National Crime Records Bureau (NCRB):

  • The NCRB was established in January 1986 as a body mandated to compile and keep records of data on crime.
  • It’s headquartered is in New Delhi and is part of the Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA), Government of India.
  • It was set up based on the recommendation of the National Police Commission, 1977 and a Task force, 1985.

Function of the NCRB:

  • The NCRB functions as a crucial repository, aiding investigators in tracing crimes and criminals.
  • It serves as a national warehouse for fingerprint records, encompassing both Indian and foreign criminals.
    • This facilitates the identification and tracking of interstate criminals through fingerprint searches.
  • Entrusted in 2009, the NCRB is responsible for monitoring, coordinating, and implementing the Crime and Criminal Tracking Network & Systems (CCTNS) project.
  • In 2017, the NCRB introduced the National Digital Police Portal, empowering police officers to search for criminals or suspects in the CCTNS database.
    • Additionally, it provides citizens with services like online complaint filing.

Reports Published:

  • Apart from the esteemed Crime in India report, the NCRB publishes:
    • Prisons Statistics India Report.
    • Accidental Deaths and Suicides
    • Prison Statistics
    • Reports on Missing Women and children in India

Compilation of Data for NCRB Reports:

  • For the NCRB’s flagship annual Crime in India reports, information is obtained from the police forces of 36 states and Union Territories.
    • Similar data are furnished for 53 cities with populations exceeding 10 lakh each as per the 2011 Census, by respective state-level crime records bureaus.
  • The information is entered by state/UT police at the level of the local police station, and is validated at the levels of the district and state, and finally, by the NCRB.

How to Enhance the Effectiveness of NCRB's Operations:

  • States should leverage NCRB's data in crafting their annual police strategies, ensuring its multi-dimensional use in crime control to achieve tangible outcomes.
  • Despite the connection of 16,390 police stations on CCTNS, it's crucial for central agencies like the CBI, NCB, and NIA to integrate with it, fostering comprehensive data sharing.
  • It is imperative for all agencies to promptly join the CCTNS, striving for 100 percent completeness in data to enhance the network's efficiency.
  • With the conclusion of phase 2 of ICJS, there is an opportunity to augment its utility further.
  • This can be achieved through the integration of cutting-edge technologies such as Artificial Intelligence, Blockchain, analytical tools, and an enhanced fingerprint system.

Canada Needs to See India – Not Just the Diaspora (Indian Express)

  • 22 Sep 2023

Why is it in News?

The Canadian Prime Minister's statement in Parliament, accusing Indian agents of the death of Hardeep Singh Nijjar, has significantly strained India-Canada relations. Rebuilding trust will necessitate a thorough and open political dialogue on the role and politicization of Canada's Indian diaspora and its impact on bilateral relations.

Recent Developments Leading to the Current Standoff:

  • Death of Khalistan Tiger Force (KTF) Chief:
  • Hardeep Singh Nijjar, wanted by the Indian government, was killed in a shooting in Surrey in June.
  • The National Investigation Agency (NIA) had announced a Rs 10 lakh reward for Nijjar in 2022, accusing him of conspiring to kill a Hindu priest in Jalandhar, Punjab.
  • G20 Summit Discussions:
  • During the G20 Summit in Delhi, the Canadian PM and the Indian PM discussed Khalistani extremism.
  • The Canadian PM raised concerns about foreign interference in Nijjar's murder and sought India's cooperation in the investigation.
  • The Indian PM expressed deep concerns about ongoing anti-India activities by extremist elements in Canada.
  • Canadian Parliament Statement and Diplomatic Expulsions:
  • Canada's PM accused "agents of the Indian government" in Nijjar's killing.
  • Canada expelled the top Indian diplomat, the head of RAW, from the country.
  • In response, the Indian government summoned the High Commissioner of Canada and expelled a senior Canadian diplomat from India.

The Evolution of India-Canada Relations:

  • During the Cold War:
  • During the Cold War, India and Canada enjoyed a positive relationship, driven by their shared Commonwealth status and common views on the importance of the United Nations, multilateralism, and global development.
  • However, differences arose during Cold War conflicts like Korea, Hungary, and Vietnam, straining relations. India's pursuit of a nuclear program also added complexity.
  • Post-Cold War (1980s):
  • Increasing immigration from India began to improve relations, but limited opportunities for trade and security cooperation hindered substantial diplomatic engagement.
  • Post-1998:
  • Significant efforts were made to reinvigorate the relationship after 1998 when Canada rejected India's nuclear status.
  • Current Status:
  • Today, the focal point of the relationship is investment and trade.
  • However, it's important to note that certain segments of the diaspora community harbor strong negative sentiments towards India, reject its territorial integrity, and aim to fragment it.

Canada's Role in Straining India-Canada Relations:

  • Failure to Address Anti-India Activities:
  • Canada's reluctance to take action against anti-India activities on its soil has contributed to the deterioration of relations.
  • The Canadian PM's emphasis on the rule of law overlooks the impact of individuals like Nijjar and his separatist associates, who have engaged in activities affecting both Canada and India.
  • Instances of violence against Indian diplomats were not adequately addressed, and some individuals continued vandalizing places of worship in Canada while disregarding Indian legal processes, as seen during the farmer protests.
  • Appeasement of Diaspora Politics:
  • The Canadian government, both Liberal and Conservative parties, has shown sympathy toward Khalistani groups and other diaspora elements, influencing its foreign policy.
  • These policies have accommodated diaspora groups using Canadian soil for activities that pose risks to the interests and security of other nations, notably India.

Significance and Hurdles in Engaging with the Indian Diaspora:

  • Importance to the Indian Economy and Strategic Relations:
  • The current Indian government has intensified diaspora engagement, encouraging them to invest in India's economic development.
  • Wealthy NRIs play a crucial role in sending remittances, establishing networks, and contributing ideas to India.
  • Diaspora support has strengthened India's strategic alliances, including with the US, and has furthered national initiatives like Make in India and Digital India.
  • Challenges:
  • The Indian government is concerned about the views of pro-Khalistan groups within the diaspora, which challenge India's territorial integrity and criticize its treatment of ethnic minorities.
  • These challenges are growing, posing a significant issue for Indian foreign policy that traditionally had a strategic perspective on most diaspora groups.
  • Indian PM's foreign visits are increasingly met with civil society groups advocating for human rights.
  • Recent pro-Khalistan protests in the US, UK, Canada, and Australia have become
  • increasingly contentious and sometimes violent.

Realigning India's Diaspora Engagement:

  • The digital age has reshaped the way Indian immigrants connect with their homeland, influencing their political views, language preferences, and ideological inclinations.
  • Ideas disseminated online can have cross-border consequences, as evident in the Khalistani context.
  • In the era of social media, the impact and influence of diaspora groups are magnified.
  • India should move beyond conventional approaches that emphasize engaging and mobilizing the Indian diaspora for national objectives.
  • It's essential to recognize that certain groups actively oppose India's interests and foreign policy goals.

Steps to Improve India-Canada Relations:

  • Focus on Engaging India, Not Diaspora Politics:
  • The root cause of strained India-Canada relations lies in a problematic form of diaspora politics, where Canadian political parties engage with and appease groups involved in anti-India activities.
  • Canadian governments should prioritize national security and foreign policy interests over short-term electoral gains, moving away from this type of diaspora politics.
  • Ottawa should engage with New Delhi without viewing it solely through the lens of diaspora politics.
  • Establish a Political Agreement:
  • India is essential for Canada's Indo-Pacific strategy to remain relevant.
  • Both nations have shared interests in upholding the international order, managing China's rise, collaborating on climate change, global health, and addressing challenges related to digital technologies.
  • Addressing these challenges requires a political agreement that considers how both countries perceive Canada's Indian diaspora and curbs any negative influences, particularly those fueling India's separatist agenda.

In conclusion, bridging the gap between Ottawa and Delhi requires addressing India's concerns and establishing direct communication with India. This divide should be measured not only in terms of geography but also in terms of mindset.

SBI allows interoperability of UPI and Central Bank Digital Currency (CBDC) (The Economic Times)

  • 06 Sep 2023

Why in the News?

The State Bank of India has announced the implementation of UPI interoperability in its Digital Rupee (eRupee) also called Central Bank Digital Currency (CBDC).

Context:

  • Banks are making it possible for Unified Payments Interface's (UPI) Quick Response (QR) codes to work seamlessly with their central bank digital currency (CBDC) or e? applications.
  • Interoperability means that the payment system can function smoothly alongside other payment systems.
  • It enables system providers and participants from different systems to conduct, process, and settle payment transactions across systems without the need for involvement in multiple systems.
  • As a result of this interoperability, users of the retail digital rupee will be able to make transactions by scanning any UPI QR code at a merchant's establishment.
  • Additionally, merchants can now accept digital rupee payments through their existing UPI QR codes.
  • This integration of UPI and CBDC is part of the Reserve Bank of India's (RBI) ongoing pilot project to promote the adoption of the retail digital rupee (e?-R).

What does UPI QR code-CBDC interoperability mean?

  • Interoperability between UPI and the digital rupee ensures that all UPI QR codes can now be used seamlessly with CBDC apps.
  • Initially, during the launch of the pilot for the retail digital rupee, e?-R users were required to scan a specific QR code for their transactions.
  • However, thanks to the interoperability of these systems, payments can now be initiated using a single QR code.
  • In this setup, the e? is stored in a digital wallet, which is connected to the customer's existing savings bank account, while UPI is directly linked to the customer's account for payments.

How will interoperability contribute to increased CBDC adoption?

  • Interoperability between CBDC and UPI is poised to drive the adoption of the digital rupee, especially considering UPI's widespread use.
  • Currently, UPI is a highly popular payment method, with more than 70 mobile apps and over 50 million merchants accepting UPI payments.
  • In July, the RBI Deputy Governor reported that there were 1.3 million customers and 0.3 million merchants using the retail digital rupee.
  • However, the daily e?-R transactions in July ranged from 5,000 to 10,000, indicating room for growth.
  • The seamless integration of CBDC with UPI is expected to boost the acceptance and utilization of digital currencies in everyday transactions.

How will this benefit customers and merchants?

  • The UPI and CBDC interoperability will streamline transactions for both customers and merchants, eliminating the need to switch between multiple digital platforms.
  • Digital rupee users can now effortlessly make payments for everyday essentials like groceries and medications by scanning any UPI QR code at any merchant's store.
  • Merchants will no longer need a separate QR code to accept digital rupee payments; they can seamlessly receive CBDC payments through their existing QR code setup.
  • If the merchant has a CBDC account, the payment will be settled in their CBDC wallet. For merchants without a CBDC account, there will be an option to process payments using UPI.

What is a QR code?

  • A QR code, short for Quick Response code, is a pattern of black squares arranged in a square grid against a white background, designed to be read by imaging devices like cameras.
  • These codes contain information related to the item they are associated with. QR codes serve as a convenient and contactless method for various purposes, including enabling businesses to receive payments directly into their bank accounts from customers.

What is Central Bank Digital Currency (CBDC)?

  • CBDC stands for Central Bank Digital Currency, which is a digital form of legal tender issued by a central bank.
  • In the case of India, the Reserve Bank of India has introduced the digital rupee, known as e-Rupee.
  • This digital currency holds the same value as traditional fiat currency and can be exchanged on a one-to-one basis.
  • The primary distinction is its digital format.
  • The launch of the digital rupee is divided into two main categories: general purpose (retail) and wholesale.
  • This categorization is based on how the digital rupee is used and its accessibility levels.
  • Starting from November 1, 2022, the RBI initiated its first pilot project for the use of the digital rupee in the wholesale market, specifically for secondary trade in government securities (G-secs).
  • Wholesale CBDC has the potential to enhance the efficiency and security of settlement systems for financial transactions conducted by banks, particularly in the government securities segment, inter-bank market, and capital market.
  • This transformation is achieved by reducing operational costs, improving collateral usage, and enhancing liquidity management.
  • Subsequently, from December 1, 2022, the pilot for the retail digital rupee (e-R) was launched.
  • Essentially, the retail e-rupee serves as an electronic substitute for physical cash and is primarily intended for everyday retail transactions.
  • It is accessible to all, including the private sector, non-financial consumers, and businesses.
  • Distribution of the retail digital rupee will be facilitated through intermediaries, such as banks.
  • It does not accrue any interest and can be converted into other forms of money, such as bank deposits.

Mains Question:

  • Discuss the potential advantages and disadvantages of implementing a Central Bank Digital Currency (CBDC) like the digital rupee (e-R) in India, and elucidate its possible implications on the broader financial ecosystem? (10M)

Chandrayaan-3 | Vikram Hops on the Moon and Lands Safely (The Hindu)

  • 05 Sep 2023

Why in the News?

Surpassing its intended mission goals, the Chandrayaan-3 mission's lander, Vikram, has reached a noteworthy milestone by successfully conducting a hop experiment.

Context:

  • The Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) announced on Tuesday that the lander completed a successful hop experiment.
  • Upon receiving the command, it activated its engines, lifting itself by approximately 40 cm as planned and made a safe landing within a range of 30–40 cm.
  • This achievement in the hop experiment is of significant importance for upcoming missions, especially those aimed at retrieving lunar samples and future human expeditions to the moon. The lander module, which carried the rover Pragyan, had previously executed a successful soft landing on August 23. Following that, Pragyan was carefully deployed onto the lunar surface.

What is Hop Test?

  • In the context of space exploratiom a "hop test" is typically refers to an experiment where a spacecraft's lander or rover briefly lifts off or hops above the surface of a celestial body, such as the moon or Mars, before landing back safely.
  • This test is conducted to demonstrate the spacecraft's ability to perform controlled vertical takeoffs and landings.
  • In lunar missions, for example, a hop test is crucial for various reasons:
  • Mobility: Hopping allows the lander or rover to move to a different location on the lunar surface, providing it with increased mobility and access to a wider range of scientific targets.
  • Avoiding Obstacles: Hopping can help the spacecraft avoid obstacles or hazards on the surface, such as large rocks or rough terrain.
  • Positioning: Hopping can reposition the spacecraft's instruments or cameras for better observations.
  • The successful execution of a hop test demonstrates the spacecraft's precision in controlling its engines, which is crucial for safe landings, mobility, and conducting experiments on celestial bodies with low or no atmosphere.

Post Hop Experiment Updates:

  • ISRO reported that the spacecraft and its onboard instruments remained in excellent working condition after the successful 'hop.'
  • Instruments such as the deployed ramp, ChaSTE, and ILSA were folded back and redeployed without any issues following the experiment.
  • Subsequently, the payloads onboard the lander were deactivated in anticipation of the approaching lunar night.
  • The solar-powered instruments were not designed to endure the extremely frigid temperatures of the lunar night, which can plummet to below -120 degrees Celsius.
  • Therefore, the instruments on the rover were placed in a sleep mode a few days ahead of the start of the lunar night, which lasts for 14 Earth days.
  • If the battery retains some charge during this period, the instruments can be reactivated when sunlight becomes available once more.
  • Additionally, the ISRO Chairman announced plans to extend the mission life of both the lander and rover shortly after the launch of the Aditya-L1 mission.
  • Originally, the mission life for both the lander and rover was set at just one lunar day, equivalent to 14 Earth days.

Why is the Hop Test Significant?

  • Even though ISRO has not officially disclosed subsequent lunar missions, scientists believe that a sample return mission is a logical progression after Chandrayaan-3.
  • In fact, had Chandrayaan-2 succeeded in 2019, Chandrayaan-3 would have been designed as a sample return mission.
  • A human lander mission is also anticipated in the future.
  • China's Chang'e lunar program has followed a similar trajectory, starting with an orbiter in 2007 and advancing to a lander and sample return mission (most recently in 2020).
  • Therefore, the hop test holds critical importance for upcoming lunar missions. In missions involving sample return or human landings, the lander must take off from the lunar surface and return to Earth, necessitating much higher thrust.
  • Nevertheless, as a technology demonstration, the 'hop experiment' remains a noteworthy achievement within the Chandrayaan-3 mission.
  • The successful hop experiment also showcases India's prowess in space exploration, which could potentially attract international investments to the country's space endeavors.

One Nation, One Election (Indian Express)

  • 04 Sep 2023

Why in the News?

  • The Centre on Saturday (September 2) set up a committee to examine various aspects, both legal and logistical, for implementing the “one nation, one election” idea.
  • The Law Ministry has outlined seven terms of reference for the eight-member panel headed by former President Ram Nath Kovind and including Union Home Minister Amit Shah.
  • One of the terms of reference is to examine if a constitutional amendment to facilitate simultaneous polls would have to be ratified by the states.

What is the 'One Nation One Election' system?

  • The current electoral system in the country conducts separate elections for the Lok Sabha and state Assemblies with a five-year gap.
  • This gap is based on the conclusion of the Lower House's tenure, the state government's term, or premature dissolution of either.
  • State assemblies may not align their terms with each other or with that of the Lok Sabha, resulting in a continuous cycle of elections throughout the year.
  • The 'One Nation One Election' proposal suggests holding simultaneous elections for all states and the Lok Sabha every five years.
  • This would require restructuring the Indian election calendar to synchronize state and central elections.
  • Voters would then cast their ballots for both the Lok Sabha and state assemblies on a single day, simultaneously or in phased manner as needed.

Amending the Constitution:

Constitutional Provisions:

  • In India, Article 368 of the Constitution outlines the power and procedure for amending the Constitution.
  • The interpretation of this provision has led to tensions between Parliament and the judiciary since 1951.

Mixing of Flexibility and Rigidity:

  • During the debates of the Constituent Assembly, there was extensive discussion on whether the Constitution should be flexible or rigid.
  • The British constitution is often considered flexible because it can be amended by Parliament just like any other ordinary legislation.
  • In contrast, the United States Constitution cannot be amended without the ratification of at least three-fourths of the individual states.

India's Approach:

  • The Indian Constitution adopted a combination of flexibility and rigidity.
  • It allows for constitutional amendments through judicial interpretation and conventions established through usage.

Informal Amendments:

  • Informally, the Constitution is modified through judicial interpretation and established conventions.
  • For instance, in the process of appointing judges to the higher judiciary, although the Constitution refers to a consultation between the President and the Chief Justice of India, the Supreme Court's interpretation has evolved it to mean "concurrence."
  • This interpretation led to the development of the collegium system for appointing judges, effectively bringing about a change in the essence of the Constitution.

What is the Amendment Process?

Simple Majority:

  • Many provisions of the Constitution can be amended through a straightforward legislative process similar to passing regular laws in Parliament.
  • This amendment method is achieved by a majority of those present and voting and does not require a quorum.
  • Although Article 368 doesn't explicitly list such 'less significant' provisions, they are excluded from its scope throughout the Constitution, establishing a separate category.
  • Examples include changing state names, admitting new states to the Union, and adjusting state boundaries.

Special Majority:

  • For amending provisions that don't fall into the first category, Article 368 mandates that the amendment Bill must be approved by both Houses of Parliament with a majority of at least two-thirds of the members present and voting.
  • According to Rule 158 of the Lok Sabha Rules, the total membership encompasses all members of the House, regardless of any vacancies or absentees at the time.

Ratification by States:

  • A third category of provisions not only requires a special majority for amendment but also necessitates ratification by the legislatures of at least half of the states.
  • Only after receiving ratification from the states can such an amendment be presented to the President for approval.
  • These provisions pertain to the federal character of the Constitution and are commonly known as entrenched provisions.
  • For instance, the 99th Constitutional Amendment in 2014, which established the national judicial accountability commission, was ratified by 16 state legislatures before receiving the President's approval.
  • Similarly, in 2016, the 122nd Constitutional Amendment Bill introducing the Goods and Services Tax regime was ratified by 23 states.

Established Provisions:

  • Article 368 identifies six segments of the Constitution that are subject to additional safeguards when it comes to their amendment.
  • These segments include:
  • Article 54 and 55, which pertain to the election of the President of India.
  • Article 73 and 162, addressing the extent of executive power for the Union and states, respectively.
  • Articles 124–147 and 214–231, dealing with the powers of the Supreme Court and the High Courts.
  • Article 245 to 255, concerning the distribution of legislative, taxing, and administrative powers between the Union and the states.
  • Article 81–82, governing the representation of states in Parliament.
  • Article 368 itself.

State Ratification: A Supreme Court Perspective

  • The significance of state ratification was highlighted in the 1992 Supreme Court case of Kihoto Hollohan v Zachillu.
  • In this case, the constitutionality of the Tenth Schedule was challenged on the grounds that it had not been ratified by the states.
  • The Tenth Schedule deals with the disqualification of elected representatives and aimed to, among other things, limit the jurisdiction of courts in matters related to disqualifications.
  • This aspect of the amendment pertained to one of the six areas that require ratification by at least half of the states, namely, the jurisdiction of the Supreme Court and the High Courts.
  • The Supreme Court ruled in favor of the validity of the Tenth Schedule but struck down the part of the amendment that tinkered with the jurisdiction of the Supreme Court and the High Courts.

Mains Question:

  • Critically evaluate the impact of the 'One Nation One Election' proposal on India's political landscape, and elucidate the potential benefits and drawbacks of such a system? (10M)

Equatorial-Origin Cyclones and Pacific Decadal Oscillation (The Hindu)

  • 02 Sep 2023

Syllabus: Mains – GS I (Geography)

Why in the News?

  • In recent decades, tropical cyclones starting near the Equator have been less destructive.
  • The most recent big cyclone like this in the Indian area was Cyclone Okchi in 2017. It caused a lot of damage in Kerala, Tamil Nadu, and Sri Lanka.
  • But, in the future, these cyclones might happen more often. This is because of two things: global warming and a repeating event called the Pacific Decadal Oscillation (PDO). The PDO comes back every 20-30 years.

What are Equatorial-Origin or Low Latitude Cyclones?

  • Equatorial-Origin or Low Latitude Cyclones (LLCs) are cyclones that start between 5°N and 11°N.
  • They are smaller in size than cyclones in higher areas but can get much stronger very quickly.
  • Normally, cyclones don't form near the equator (low latitude), but when the water is warm, they can gather more moisture and become more powerful.
  • Most of these cyclones begin in the Western Pacific Ocean.
  • The last big cyclone like this in the Indian area was Cyclone Ockhi in 2017.
  • It traveled more than 2000 km and caused a lot of damage in Kerala, Tamil Nadu, and Sri Lanka.
  • In the post-monsoon season (Oct-Nov-Dec), the north Indian Ocean (NIO) is a hotspot for LLCs.
  • They make up about 60% of all Tropical Cyclones in the NIO since 1951. However, they haven't received as much attention as they should have.

What is the Pacific Decadal Oscillation (PDO)?

  • The Pacific Decadal Oscillation (PDO) is a long-term change in the Pacific Ocean.
  • It's like a cycle that happens every 20-30 years, and it has both "cool" and "warm" phases.
  • Positive (Warm) PDO: During this phase, the western part of the Pacific Ocean becomes cooler, while the eastern part gets warmer. It's the opposite during a negative PDO.
  • The term Pacific Decadal Oscillation (PDO) was first used around 1996 by a scientist named Steven Hare.
  • Impact of PDO:
  • On Global Climate: The PDO's phase can have a big impact on the world's weather. It affects things like hurricanes in the Pacific and Atlantic, droughts and floods around the Pacific, how well marine life does, and patterns in global land temperatures.
  • On Cyclones: When the PDO is warmer (positive phase), there tend to be fewer cyclones that start near the equator.
  • In 2019, the PDO started getting cooler, going into a negative phase.
  • If this continues, it could mean more of those equatorial-origin cyclones in the months after the monsoon.

ENSO and PDO:

  • Positive PDO with ENSO is generally unfavorable, but a negative PDO brings more rain to India.
  • When the Pacific Decadal Oscillation (PDO) is in a positive phase along with the El Niño-Southern Oscillation (ENSO), it's often not good.
  • However, when the PDO is negative, it brings more rain to India.
  • When Both ENSO and PDO Match:
  • If both ENSO and PDO are in the same phase, it's believed that the impacts of El Niño or La Niña events may be stronger.

PDO vs. ENSO:

  • Difference in Repeating:
  • El Niño or La Niña events happen in the Pacific Ocean every 2-7 years, but the PDO has a pattern that lasts much longer, often over decades.
  • Identifying Positive PDO Takes Time:
  • You can figure out if the PDO is in a "positive" or "warmer phase," but it takes several years of measuring ocean temperatures and their interaction with the atmosphere.
  • In contrast, you can determine the stage of an ENSO event in any given year.

What is El Niño-Southern Oscillation (ENSO)?

ENSO is one of the most important climate phenomena on Earth due to its ability to change the global atmospheric circulation, which in turn, influences temperature and precipitation across the globe.  We also focus on ENSO because we can often predict its arrival many seasons in advance of its strongest impacts on weather and climate.

  • The El Niño-Southern Oscillation (ENSO) is a recurring climate pattern involving changes in the temperature of waters in the central and eastern tropical Pacific Ocean.
  • On periods ranging from about three to seven years, the surface waters across a large swath of the tropical Pacific Ocean warm or cool by anywhere from 1°C to 3°C, compared to normal.
  • This oscillating warming and cooling pattern, referred to as the ENSO cycle, directly affects rainfall distribution in the tropics and can have a strong influence on weather across the United States and other parts of the world.
  • El Niño and La Niña are the extreme phases of the ENSO cycle; between these two phases is a third phase called ENSO-neutral.
  • El Niño:  A warming of the ocean surface, or above-average sea surface temperatures (SST), in the central and eastern tropical Pacific Ocean.
  • Over Indonesia, rainfall tends to become reduced while rainfall increases over the central and eastern tropical Pacific Ocean.
  • The low-level surface winds, which normally blow from east to west along the equator (“easterly winds”), instead weaken or, in some cases, start blowing the other direction (from west to east or “westerly winds”).
  • In general, the warmer the ocean temperature anomalies, the stronger the El Niño (and vice-versa).
  • La Niña:  A cooling of the ocean surface, or below-average sea surface temperatures (SST), in the central and eastern tropical Pacific Ocean.
  • Over Indonesia, rainfall tends to increase while rainfall decreases over the central and eastern tropical Pacific Ocean.
  • The normal easterly winds along the equator become even stronger.
  • In general, the cooler the ocean temperature anomalies, the stronger the La Niña (and vice-versa).
  • Neutral: Neither El Niño or La Niña. Often tropical Pacific SSTs are generally close to average.
  • However, there are some instances when the ocean can look like it is in an El Niño or La Niña state, but the atmosphere is not playing along (or vice versa).

Mains Question:

  • What are the key environmental and geographical factors that influence the formation and distribution of tropical cyclones in various ocean basins around the world, and how do they differ? (15M)

Production Linked Incentive (PLI) Scheme for IT Hardware (Business Standard)

  • 01 Sep 2023

Why in the News?

As many as 38 companies, including big names like Foxconn Group, HP, Dell and Lenovo, have applied for incentives under the mega Production Linked Incentive (PLI) IT hardware scheme for manufacturing laptops, PCs and servers.

Context:

  • In addition to Asus, Dell, HP, and Foxconn, several other companies, including Lenovo, Acer, and Flex, have submitted applications for the scheme. Notably, Flex is reportedly involved in manufacturing Reliance's JioBook laptop.
  • HP Enterprises (HPE) has also sought approval for server manufacturing operations within India.
  • Although the expected incremental production over the scheme's six-year duration is projected to reach Rs 3.35 lakh crore, the anticipated additional investment during this period is relatively modest, at just Rs 4,000 crore.
  • The government anticipates that the manufacturing activities enabled by the scheme will create approximately 75,000 direct jobs, with the potential to generate up to 2 lakh indirect jobs when considering the broader economic impact.

What is the PLI Scheme?

  • The PLI scheme was created to boost domestic manufacturing, reduce reliance on imports, and create more jobs.
  • The government has allocated Rs 1.97 lakh crore for various sectors under the PLI schemes, with an additional Rs 19,500 crore designated for PLI in solar PV modules in the 2022-23 Budget.
  • Initiated in March 2020, the scheme initially focused on three industries:
  • Mobile and allied Component Manufacturing
  • Electrical Component Manufacturing
  • Medical Devices
  • Incentives Under the Scheme:
  • The incentives, based on increased sales, vary from 1% for electronics and technology products to 20% for critical key starting drugs and certain drug intermediaries.
  • In some sectors like advanced chemistry cell batteries, textile products, and the drone industry, incentives are calculated based on sales, performance, and local value addition over a five-year period.
  • Sectors Covered by the PLI Scheme:
  • The government has introduced PLI schemes for 14 sectors, including automobiles and auto components, electronics and IT hardware, telecom, pharmaceuticals, solar modules, metals and mining, textiles and apparel, white goods, drones, and advanced chemistry cell batteries.
  • Objectives:
  • The government introduced this scheme to reduce India's dependence on foreign countries, particularly China.
  • It aims to support labor-intensive sectors and increase employment in India while reducing import bills and promoting domestic production.
  • The PLI Yojana also encourages foreign companies to establish operations in India and domestic enterprises to expand their production facilities.

What is the PLI scheme for IT Hardware?

  • The PLI scheme for IT Hardware was initially announced in February 2021, with an initial allocation of approximately Rs 7,300 crore over a four-year period.
  • Incentive Structure:
  • Under this scheme, domestic companies that invest Rs 20 crore and achieve sales of Rs 50 crore in the first year, Rs 100 crore in the second year, Rs 200 crore in the third year, and Rs 300 crore in the final year can receive incentives ranging from 1% to 4% on incremental sales compared to the base year of 2019-20.
  • Revised Version:
  • The initial version of the scheme had limited success, with only two companies, Dell and Bhagwati, meeting the first-year targets.
  • Consequently, the industry called for a revamped scheme with a larger budget.
  • In response, the Union Cabinet approved a revised PLI scheme for IT hardware in May 2023, allocating Rs 17,000 crore, more than doubling the budget.
  • Potential Impact:
  • PLI 2.0 has the potential to attract major global IT hardware manufacturers to establish their production operations in India, bolstering the local production of laptops, servers, personal computers, and more.
  • Over a six-year period, the average incentive is expected to be around 5%, compared to the previous 2% over four years.
  • Achieving Digital Economy Goals:
  • With the IT hardware industry aiming for a production value of $24 billion by 2025-26 (with exports estimated at $12-17 billion), this scheme plays a crucial role in realizing the goal of a $1 trillion digital economy, including $300 billion from electronics manufacturing by 2025-26.

How Will the PLI Scheme Drive Local Production in India?

  • Despite identifying electronics manufacturing as a pivotal sector for future economic growth, India has witnessed a surge in the import of electronic goods in recent years.
  • Import Scenario:
  • For instance, the import of electronic goods surged to $6.96 billion during April-June this year, up from $4.73 billion in the same period last year, constituting 4-7% of overall imports.
  • The category with the highest import share includes personal computers, including laptops and palmtops.
  • China Dominance:
  • China commands a significant portion, approximately 70-80%, of India's imports in the personal computer and laptop category.
  • Incentives for Component Manufacturers:
  • Companies engaged in local manufacturing of specific components like memory modules and display panels will receive supplementary incentives under the revised scheme.
  • Performance-Driven Approach:
  • The PLI scheme is designed to encourage companies to meet production targets.
  • If companies fall short of these thresholds, they may face deductions of up to 10% from their subsidies.
  • Synergy with Semiconductor Scheme:
  • The PLI scheme will complement the government's semiconductor scheme, with domestically produced chips finding application in laptop manufacturing, further bolstering the local industry.

Mains Question:

  • Discuss the impact of the PLI Scheme for IT Hardware on the Indian electronics manufacturing sector. Evaluate its effectiveness in reducing imports and critically assess its potential to stimulate job growth in the country. (15M)

Curbs on Rice Exports (The Hindu)

  • 31 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

In a move to check domestic rice prices and ensure domestic food security, the Indian government has prohibited the export of white rice, levied a 20% export duty on par-boiled rice till October 15, and permitted the export of Basmati rice for contracts with value of $1,200 a tonne or above.

India's Rice Exports:

  • India is the biggest rice seller in the whole world, making up 45% of the global rice market.
  • In the months of April and May in 2023, the amount of rice sent out of the country was 21.1% more compared to the same time in the previous financial year.
  • Just in May, the export of Basmati rice was 10.86% higher than how much was exported in May of 2022.
  • The amount of non-Basmati rice being shipped out has been increasing for three years, and in the year 2022-2023, more Basmati rice was exported than the year before.
  • According to the information the government provided, until August 17 this year, the total rice exports (not including broken rice) were 15% more, reaching 7.3 million tonnes.
  • This is compared to 6.3 million tonnes during the same time last year.
  • Thailand thinks it will produce almost 25% less rice in 2023-2024; Myanmar has stopped sending out raw rice; and it seems like there might be less rice available in Iraq and Iran too.

Rice Production in Current Season:

  • The Department of Agriculture and Farmers Welfare has reported that during the Rabi season of 2022-2023, the amount of rice produced was 13.8% lower, reaching 158.95 lakh tonnes.
  • This is compared to 184.71 lakh tonnes in the Rabi season of 2021-2022.
  • For the Kharif season, the data about planting shows that rice has been planted on 384.05 lakh hectares this year as of August 25.
  • This is more compared to 367.83 lakh hectares during the same time last year.
  • People in the trading and rice milling business are saying that the new season's rice will start arriving after the first week of September.
  • They also mentioned that the effects of El Nino might have some impact on how much rice arrives.
  • Rice prices were ?27 per kilogram at this time last year, but now they've gone up to ?33 per kilogram.

Challenges in India’s Rice Export Strategy:

  • India managed to export a record-breaking 21 million metric tonnes (MMT) of rice in the fiscal year 2021-22 (FY22), which made up around 41 percent of the global exports in a market of about 51.3 MMT.
  • Exporting such large amounts of rice led to a drop in global rice prices by approximately 23 percent in March (compared to the previous year), while other cereal prices like wheat and maize were increasing significantly in the global market. In fact, in FY22, the price for each tonne of common rice exported was only $354, which was lower than the Minimum Support Price (MSP) for rice.
  • Buying below MSP or issues with distribution which means that either rice exporters were buying rice (paddy) from farmers and millers at prices below the MSP, or a significant portion of rice provided for free under the PM Garib Kalyan Ann Yojana (PMGKAY) was being sent for export at prices below the MSP.
  • Certain states, particularly Punjab, provide free electricity for irrigation, and highly subsidized fertilizers, especially urea, which gives Indian rice an artificial competitive edge in global markets.

What Can Indian Farmers and Consumers Anticipate?

  • The government has raised the Minimum Support Price (MSP) for rice, and rice millers are now buying paddy at a price higher than the MSP.
  • Because of this, farmers can expect that prices won't go down.
  • Limits on exports will make sure that rice prices in the market don't suddenly go up by a lot.
  • For people in India who are buying rice, there's a small increase in prices right now, but over time, there will still be enough rice available and prices aren't predicted to go way up.

Actions Taken by the Central Government:

  • To control the prices of rice in the country and make sure there's enough food for people here, the Union government has stopped exporting regular (non-basmati) white rice.
  • They have also put a 20% tax on exporting partially cooked rice until October 15.
  • For Basmati rice, the government says it can be exported if the contract's value is $1,200 per tonne or more.
  • Since last September, exporting broken rice has not been allowed.
  • However, in some cases, the government can allow exporting broken rice if other countries need it for their food security and if their government asks for it.

Opinions of Rice Exporters:

  • Indian par-boiled rice is still competitively priced in the global market, even with the 20% duty added.
  • When the world rice market is strong, it can handle higher prices as well. Overall, there's a lot of demand from other countries.
  • Countries like Indonesia, which usually sell rice, are now buying (raw rice) from other places.
  • According to rice exporters, instead of dividing rice into Basmati and non-Basmati, the government should think about categorizing it as regular rice and special rice for making export decisions.
  • Around 12 types of rice have something called Geographical Indication (GI) recognition, and these should be kept separate from general market rules.
  • For Basmati rice, the government could have let exports continue or set a minimum value for exports at $900 per tonne.
  • Basmati rice is unique, and there will be new rice arriving soon, so there's no real need for restrictions.
  • Since Indian rice quality is good and supply is steady, other countries will want it even more in the future.

India's G20 Presidency and Financing the green transition (Indian Express)

  • 30 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

With India gearing up to host the G20 summit on September 9 and 10, the focal points of extensive discussions are expected to revolve around climate change and its financial aspects. The current pledges from developed nations, particularly concerning climate financing mechanisms, fall short in effectively addressing the challenges posed by climate change.

What is Climate Finance?

  • Climate finance encompasses funding at the local, national, or transnational levels.
  • The UNFCCC, the Kyoto Protocol, and the Paris Agreement emphasize the need for financial support from wealthier Parties to aid those with fewer resources and greater vulnerability.
  • This acknowledgment is rooted in the understanding that countries' contributions to and capabilities for addressing climate change differ widely.
  • Mitigation efforts demand substantial investments for significant emission reductions.
  • Equally, adaptation efforts rely on substantial financial resources to counter the adverse effects and mitigate the impacts of a shifting climate.

Challenges with the Current Framework of Climate Financing:

Inadequacy of the $100 Billion Target

  • During COP15 in 2009 (Copenhagen, Denmark), developed nations collectively committed to mobilize $100 billion annually by 2020 to support climate initiatives in developing countries.
  • However, the basis for this figure, established over a decade ago, lacks rationale and logic.
  • Even at its inception, the estimated amount was insufficient to meet the actual requirements, leading to ongoing debates about its adequacy.
  • Moreover, the developing world has consistently raised concerns that the promised $100 billion annually is not being delivered by developed nations.
  • Today, to meet the objectives of the Paris Agreement, the demand for climate finance stands at approximately $4.35 trillion.
  • Actual expenditure remains just a fraction of this, around one-seventh of the needed sum.

Inclusion of Commercial Loans as Grants

  • Developed nations (OECD) claim to have provided nearly $80 billion to developing nations as climate finance in 2020.
  • However, the actual financial transfers amount to only $19-22 billion.
  • This discrepancy arises from the developed world including regular commercial debt related to climate activities in their calculations.
  • This approach reveals an evasion of responsibility, as the committed $100 billion is intended to be in the form of concessional finance or grants, not loans.

Challenges in Financing Adaptation vs. Mitigation

  • Climate finance is comprised of two main categories: mitigation and adaptation.
  • A significant majority (93 percent) of funds directed toward climate finance are channeled into mitigation projects, with an understandable rationale.
  • Mitigation initiatives often generate revenue streams and are perceived as financially viable, making them conducive to loans under standard market conditions.
  • In contrast, adaptation projects entail substantial initial expenses, prolonged timeframes, and a lack of predictable income sources.
  • This makes them appear risky to financial institutions, resulting in limited funding availability.

Limited Progress in Grant Provision

  • Despite the recurrent commitment to deliver $100 billion annually, little tangible progress has been achieved.
  • Even during recent Conferences of Parties (CoP), this promise is reiterated, yet real-world advancements remain limited.
  • In the most recent CoP (CoP27 in Sharm El-Sheikh, Egypt), an agreement was reached to establish a loss and damage fund.
  • However, the fund's specifics and quantum will be finalized later.
  • This fund is intended to address immediate challenges like rising sea levels and desertification.
  • Considering historical trends in concessional finance, substantial outcomes from this proposed fund are unlikely in the near future.
  • Furthermore, there is ambiguity regarding whether countries like India will be eligible to receive assistance or provide it.

Strides Toward Fulfilling Climate Finance Objectives:

  • Global Financing Pact 2023
  • In June 2023, the French President orchestrated a summit aimed at funding climate change mitigation (as well as poverty reduction) in the Global South.
  • During this Summit, it was declared that an additional lending capacity of USD 200 billion would be made accessible to emerging economies.
  • Moreover, the Summit signaled the imminent achievement of the long-anticipated USD 100 billion climate finance target within the current year.
  • Integration of Disaster Clauses:
  • To address the impacts of extreme weather occurrences, the World Bank introduced disaster clauses.
  • These clauses allow for the suspension of debt payments during such events, providing relief to affected nations.
  • Investment in Special Drawing Rights (SDRs):
  • The IMF unveiled a commitment to allocate USD 100 billion in Special Drawing Rights (SDRs) to support vulnerable nations.
  • However, certain SDR allocations are pending approval from the US Congress.

Way Forward for India and Other Developing Nations Amidst Limited Support from Developed Countries:

  • Resource Mobilization for Climate Finance:
  • In the face of the inadequacies in support from developed nations, countries like India must now turn inwards and strategically mobilize resources for climate finance.
  • This endeavor calls for collaborative efforts among various institutions that can complement each other's strengths.
  • Financial organizations will need to invest in mature technologies, such as wind and solar, which are commercially viable.
  • Investing in Advanced Technologies:
  • For technologies not yet ready for widespread commercial viability, governments must play a pivotal role.
  • For instance, direct financial backing is essential for the adoption of electrolysers in nascent areas like green hydrogen.
  • Currently, the cost of electrolysers poses a barrier, and scaling up through substantial orders can trigger cost reductions through economies of scale.
  • Private Sector Engagement in Adaptation Projects:
  • Regarding adaptation initiatives, involving the private sector is crucial, necessitating government intervention to facilitate collaboration.
  • Globally, most adaptation funding originates from multilateral development banks in the form of loans.
  • However, private sector participation in adaptation projects remains below 2 percent.
  • This imbalance arises from the private sector's perception of adaptation projects as high-risk ventures, given the limited incentives available for such engagements.
  • If governments co-finance adaptation projects with the private sector, it could mitigate risks and attract private sector participation.

Securing Additional Resources

  • To enable government involvement in these endeavors, additional resources will be indispensable. Possible avenues include imposing carbon taxes, issuing green bonds, and exploring catastrophe (CAT) bonds, among other innovative mechanisms.

When it comes to climate finance, countries must primarily look within, given the apparent lack of full commitment from the developed world to provide necessary assistance.

This holds special importance for nations like India, particularly as they might not qualify for concessional financing. As a result, these countries need to prioritize self-reliance and innovative strategies to address the challenges of climate change.

Mains Question:

  • How can developing countries like India address climate finance challenges in the face of limited commitment from developed nations? Discuss strategies for effective funding and the role of self-reliance. (15M)

Aditya-L1 (Indian Express)

  • 29 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

The Aditya-L1 mission will launch on September 2 from Sriharikota, according to ISRO. The first Indian observatory in space, Aditya L1, will study the Sun.

What is the Aditya-L1 Mission?

Aditya, which in Sanskrit means "Sun," is a coronagraphy spacecraft that is intended to research the solar atmosphere, or solar corona, which is its outermost region. It was created by ISRO and several other Indian scientific organizations. It will be launched on a PSLV-XL launch vehicle and is the first specifically designed Indian mission to view the Sun.

Objectives of Aditya-L1 Mission:

  • The Aditya L1 payloads' suits are anticipated to deliver vital data for comprehending the phenomenon of:
  • The dynamics of space weather, particle and field propagation.
  • Coronal mass ejection (CME), pre-flare and flare activities and their features, etc.
  • The position of the spacecraft:
  • The spacecraft will be positioned in a halo orbit around the Sun-Earth system's Lagrange point 1 (L1), according to ISRO.
  • The main benefit of having a satellite in the halo orbit around the L1 point is being able to continuously see the Sun without any occultation or eclipses.
  • This will provide us a better opportunity to watch the solar activity and how it affects the space weather in real time.
  • 1.5 million kilometers separate L1 from the planet. The spacecraft is anticipated to take more than 120 days to arrive to L1.
  • Study conducted by Aditya L1
  • The photosphere, the lowest layer of the sun that we can see directly, the chromosphere, the layer 400–2,100 km above the photosphere, and the outermost layers of the sun (the corona), are the three layers that the spacecraft is equipped to observe.
  • The remaining three playloads will examine particles and fields in situ at the Lagrange point L1, while the final four playloads will directly research the Sun.
  • Remote sensing payloads that will study the sun include:
  • The Visible Emission Line Coronagraph (VELC) for corona/imaging and spectroscopy and CME;
  • The Solar Ultraviolet Imaging Telescope (SUIT) for photosphere and chromosphere imaging;
  • The Solar Low Energy X-ray Spectrometer (SoLEXS), a soft X-ray spectrometer for Sun-as-a-star observation; and
  • The High Energy L1 Orbit
  • The payloads used to study the L1 in situ Aditya Solar Wind Particle Experiment (ASPEX) for solar wind/particle analyzer protons and heavier ions with directions;
  • Plasma Analyser Package For Aditya (PAPA) for solar wind/particle analyzer electrons and heavier ions with directions; and
  • Advanced Tri-axial High Resolution Digital Magnetometers for in situ magnetic field study.

Why is it necessary to study the Sun?

  • Every planet, including Earth and the exoplanets outside the Solar System, evolves — and the parent star governs this evolution.
  • The weather of the entire system is influenced by the solar weather and environment.
  • Variations in this weather can cause satellites' orbits to shift or their lives to be cut short, interfere with or damage onboard electronics, and cause power outages and other disruptions on Earth.
  • Understanding space weather requires knowledge of solar occurrences.
  • Continuous solar observations are required to learn about, track, and anticipate the impact of Earth-directed storms.
  • Every storm that forms in the Sun and travels to Earth passes through L1.

What is the first Lagrange point?

  • A Lagrange point is a place in space where the gravitational attraction of two enormous masses exactly equals the centripetal force necessary to move with them.
  • That is, at that moment, the gravitational attraction and repulsion between two celestial entities is such that an object put between them effectively stays in the same relative position while travelling with them.
  • These spots in space can be employed by spacecraft to lower the amount of fuel required to stay in position.
  • The five Lagrange points are named after the Italian-French mathematician Josephy-Louis Lagrange: L1, L2, L3, L4, and L5.
  • The Earth-Sun system's L1 point provides an unobstructed view of the Sun.
  • The Solar and Heliospheric Observatory Satellite SOHO is currently based there.
  • The James Webb Space Telescope of NASA is at L2.

Other Solar Missions by Different Countries:

  • United States
  • Parker Solar Probe (August 2018): Touched the Sun’s upper atmosphere, sampled particles and magnetic fields in December 2021
  • Solar Orbiter (February 2020): Explores the Sun’s changing space environment
  • Europe
  • Ulysses (October 1990): Studied space environment above and below the Sun’s poles
  • Proba-2 (October 2001): Part of solar exploratory missions.
  • Upcoming: Proba-3 (2024), Smile (2025)
  • China
  • Advanced Space-based Solar Observatory (ASO-S, October 2022): Launched to observe the Sun.
  • Japan
  • Hinotori (ASTRO-A, 1981): Studied solar flares using hard X-rays
  • Yohkoh (SOLAR-A, 1991): Studied solar activity
  • Hinode (SOLAR-B, 2006): Studied the Sun’s impact on Earth.

India and the Asian Development Bank to establish a climate change and health hub in Delhi (The Hindu)

  • 28 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

India's G-20 document states that the climate change and health hub will facilitate knowledge sharing, partnerships, and innovations to assist developing countries, while health systems will face challenges from infectious diseases and natural disasters driven by climate change.

Why in the news?

  • India, in collaboration with the Asian Development Bank (ADB), is gearing up to inaugurate a climate change and health hub in the national capital.
  • This initiative follows India's earlier achievement in hosting the inaugural WHO Centre for Global Traditional Medicine, located in Jamnagar, Gujarat.
  • The forthcoming hub's mission is to foster knowledge exchange, cultivate partnerships, drive innovations, and extend support to nations beyond the G-20, with a special focus on developing countries.

The Significance of the Climate Change and Health Hub:

  • Fostering Collaboration: This center holds paramount significance as it brings together diverse partners to engage in vital discussions regarding the far-reaching impacts of climate change.
  • It provides a unique platform for shared learning and collaboration among stakeholders.
  • Addressing Health Emergencies: India's recent G-20 outcome document highlights that climate change remains a key driver of health emergencies, including the resurgence of infectious diseases.
  • Moreover, it exacerbates the frequency and severity of natural disasters, posing a significant threat to the capability of health systems to provide essential services.
  • Boosting Resilience: Given this backdrop, it is imperative to bolster the resilience of health systems against the adverse effects of climate change.
  • The G-20 outcome document outlines a commitment to prioritize the development of climate-resilient health systems, establish sustainable and eco-friendly healthcare supply chains, mobilize resources for resilient, low-carbon health systems, and promote collaboration through initiatives like the WHO-led Alliance for Transformative Action on Climate and Health (ATACH).
  • Tackling Zoonotic Spillovers: The recent G-20 Health Ministers' meeting expressed concern about the rising incidence of zoonotic spillovers, leading to the emergence of new diseases.
  • In this context, there is an urgent need to identify both new and existing drivers using a scientific and risk-based approach while reinforcing existing infectious disease surveillance systems.
  • Global Impact: Situated in New Delhi, the Climate Change and Health Hub is poised to address these pressing issues on a global scale, serving as a hub for international collaboration and solutions.

About Asian Development Bank (ADB):

  • Founded in 1966, the Asian Development Bank (ADB) is a multilateral institution that counts 68 members among its ownership, with 49 hailing from the Asian and Pacific region.
  • ADB is unwavering in its commitment to fostering a prosperous, inclusive, resilient, and sustainable future for Asia and the Pacific, all while maintaining its steadfast resolve to eliminate extreme poverty.
  • To achieve its noble objectives, ADB extends its support to member nations and partners through a comprehensive suite of financial instruments.
  • This includes loans, technical assistance, grants, and equity investments, all aimed at catalyzing social and economic development across the region.
  • In essence, ADB stands as a stalwart advocate for advancing social and economic development in Asia and the Pacific.
  • As of December 31, 2019, ADB's five largest shareholders are Japan and the United States, each possessing 15.6% of total shares, followed by the People's Republic of China (6.4%), India (6.3%), and Australia (5.8%). The institution's headquarters are situated in Manila, Philippines.

About WHO Global Centre for Traditional Medicine (GCTM):

  • The WHO Global Centre for Traditional Medicine (GCTM) is a pioneering knowledge hub dedicated to traditional medicine, recognized as the world's premier center of its kind.
  • Situated in Jamnagar, Gujarat, it represents a remarkable collaboration between nations.
  • India, as the primary investor in GCTM, has committed an approximate sum of US$ 250 million to facilitate the center's establishment, infrastructure development, and operational activities.

The GCTM is designed to achieve five key objectives:

  • Archiving Traditional Wisdom: GCTM seeks to harness technology to construct a comprehensive database of traditional knowledge systems.
  • Setting International Standards: It aspires to establish global standards for the testing and certification of traditional medicines, enhancing confidence in these age-old remedies.
  • Global Knowledge Exchange: The center aims to serve as a global platform where experts in traditional medicine converge to share their experiences and expertise.
  • Funding Research: GCTM endeavors to mobilize resources and funding for research in the field of traditional medicines, fostering innovation and scientific exploration.
  • Holistic Healing Protocols: The center is dedicated to developing holistic treatment protocols for specific diseases, enabling patients to benefit from the complementary strengths of both traditional and modern medicine approaches.

National Medical Commission Delays Exclusive Generic Medicine Prescriptions (Indian Express)

  • 26 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

The National Medical Commission (NMC) on Thursday put on hold its new guidelines that made it mandatory for doctors to only prescribe generic drugs.

What’s in the News?

  • Amid criticism from the Indian Medical Association (IMA) and the Indian Pharmaceutical Alliance (IPA), the National Medical Commission has suspended the Medical Practitioner (Professional Conduct) Regulations, 2023.
  • The Central Drugs Standard Control Organization (CDSCO), India's top drug regulator, also raised concerns about the language used in the notification.
  • Stakeholder groups recommended that the guidelines be postponed until the implementation of WHO's good manufacturing practices.
  • It was argued that exclusive generic drug prescriptions might lead pharmacies to sell generics with significant profit margins, potentially discouraging quality branded generic manufacturers.

Overview of the Medical Practitioner (Professional Conduct) Regulations, 2023:

  • Released on August 2nd, the National Medical Commission introduced the Medical Practitioner (Professional Conduct) Regulations, 2023, aimed at reforming prescription practices.
  • These regulations made it compulsory for registered medical practitioners to prescribe medications using terms like 'generic,' 'non-proprietary,' or 'pharmacological' names.
  • According to these guidelines, a generic drug is defined as a product comparable to the brand/reference listed product in terms of dosage form, strength, route of administration, quality, performance characteristics, and intended use.
  • Additionally, they described branded generic drugs as those that have gone off-patent are manufactured by various companies, and sold under different brand names.
  • The guidelines emphasized that every Registered Medical Practitioner (RMP) should legibly prescribe drugs using generic names, promoting rational prescription practices by avoiding unnecessary medications and irrational fixed-dose combination tablets.
  • The regulations also outlined punitive measures for those who breach these directives.
  • Beyond generic drug prescribing, the NMC guidelines covered a wide range of issues, including continuing medical education, the use of social media platforms, and the maintenance of a dynamic register of doctors.
  • They also prohibited doctors from participating in events sponsored by pharmaceutical companies.
  • However, these NMC guidelines faced opposition from the Indian Medical Association (IMA).

Concerns Raised by the Indian Medical Association (IMA):

  • In response to the regulations introduced by the NMC, the IMA released a statement outlining its concerns.
  • The IMA highlights the primary obstacle to the adoption of generic drugs as the uncertainty surrounding their quality.
  • They emphasize that the nation's quality control standards are significantly lacking, making it practically impossible to guarantee the quality of drugs. Prescribing drugs without assured quality, they argue, could jeopardize patient health.
  • The statement further points out that less than 0.1% of drugs manufactured in India undergo quality testing.
  • The IMA suggests that this step should be postponed until the government can ensure the quality of all drugs released into the market.
  • Their statement firmly asserts that patient care and safety must not be compromised.
  • The IMA has long advocated for the availability of only high-quality drugs in the country, with uniform and affordable pricing.
  • They call upon the government to implement a 'one drug, one quality, one price' system, in which all brands are either sold at the same price or banned, allowing only generics while ensuring the highest quality of these drugs.

About National Medical Commission:

  • The National Medical Commission (NMC) is a statutory institution established under the National Medical Commission Act of 2019.
  • It succeeded the previously existing Medical Council of India (MCI), which had been in operation since 1934.

NMC's Key Objectives:

  • Enhance accessibility to quality and affordable medical education.
  • Ensure the availability of sufficient and high-quality medical professionals throughout the country.
  • Promote equitable and comprehensive healthcare with a focus on community health and universal access to medical services for all citizens.
  • Encourage medical professionals to integrate the latest medical research into their practice and contribute to ongoing research.
  • Conduct transparent periodic assessments of medical institutions.
  • Maintain a comprehensive medical register for India.
  • Uphold rigorous ethical standards across all facets of medical services.
  • Establish an effective grievance redressal mechanism.

NMC Composition:

  • The NMC comprises 25 members, the majority of whom are nominated by the Central government.
  • The tenure of NMC members is four years, except for part-time members, who serve for two years.
  • Eleven part-time members represent states or state medical councils.
  • Notably, NMC chairpersons and other members appointed by the Central government cannot be reappointed.
  • Decisions within the Commission require approval from the majority, with a minimum of 13 out of 25 members' agreement.

BRICS Summit 2023 (The Hindu)

  • 25 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

The 15th BRICS summit convened at the Sandton Convention Centre in South Africa from August 22nd to 24th. One of the significant outcomes of this summit was the unanimous agreement among BRICS leaders to broaden the group's membership by welcoming six new countries.

What are the Key Highlights of the Summit?

At the 15th BRICS Summit hosted in South Africa, the alliance extended invitations to six nations, marking a significant development that reinforces BRICS' position as a prominent 'voice of the Global South.' These new members, namely Iran, the United Arab Emirates, Saudi Arabia, Argentina, Egypt, and Ethiopia, are set to formally commence their participation in BRICS starting January 2024.

  • Host: South Africa played host to this year's summit, taking on the role of Chair for BRICS since January 1, 2023.
  • Theme: The overarching theme for the summit was "BRICS and Africa: Partnership for Mutually Accelerated Growth, Sustainable Development, and Inclusive Multilateralism."
  • Five Priorities for 2023:
  • The member nations focused on five key priorities:
  • Advancing a partnership for a fair Just Transition.
  • Revolutionizing education and skills development for the future.
  • Exploiting opportunities through the African Continental Free Trade Area.
  • Bolstering socio-economic recovery after the pandemic and working towards achieving the 2030 Agenda on Sustainable Development.
  • Reinforcing multilateralism, which includes pursuing substantial reforms of global governance institutions and empowering women's meaningful participation in peace processes.
  • Outcome Document: After the summit, member countries collectively adopted the Johannesburg II Declaration, which outlined their commitment to working on the following themes:
  • Building a Partnership for Inclusive Multilateralism.
  • Cultivating an Environment of Peace and Development.
  • Fostering a Partnership for Mutually Accelerated Growth.
  • Nurturing a Partnership for Sustainable Development.
  • Deepening People-to-People Exchanges.
  • Enhancing Institutional Development.

Significance of this Development:

  • Amplified Advocate for Developing Nations: The inclusion of new member states bolsters BRICS' role as a prominent spokesperson for the interests of the developing world.
  • Enhanced Global Influence: Currently representing approximately 40% of the global population and over a quarter of the world's GDP, BRICS' significance amplifies with these additions.
  • The organization will now encompass nearly half of the world's population and incorporate three of the globe's major oil-producing nations, namely Saudi Arabia, the UAE, and Iran.
  • China's Expanding Influence: This expansion also raises questions about China's growing dominance within BRICS, given its pivotal role in driving the group's enlargement.
  • Noteworthy Regional Dynamics: The fact that regional rivals, Saudi Arabia and Iran, are both joining BRICS is particularly remarkable.
  • China's role as the largest purchaser of Saudi Arabia's oil and its recent mediation in brokering a peace agreement between Tehran and Riyadh adds a distinctive dimension to this development.

The Recent Additions to BRICS:

The inclusion of new members in BRICS marks a noteworthy development in the alliance's composition:

  • Iran: The invitation extended to Iran, a nation with strained ties with the West, is perceived as a move with strong backing from China and Russia.
  • This signals Iran's strategic alignment with these major players on the global stage.
  • Saudi Arabia: Historically, Saudi Arabia has been a staunch ally of the United States.
  • However, recent trends suggest the kingdom's growing independence in its foreign policy decisions, and its decision to join BRICS aligns with this shift.
  • Russia and Iran: For both Russia and Iran, BRICS membership serves as a diplomatic signal to the Western world, affirming that they maintain global friendships and strategic partnerships beyond Western alliances.
  • Egypt and Ethiopia: Despite their longstanding ties with the United States, both Egypt and Ethiopia's involvement in BRICS indicates a diversification of their international partnerships and interests.
  • Argentina: Amidst an economic crisis, Argentina's BRICS membership carries the expectation of potential financial assistance from the alliance, reflecting the nation's pursuit of economic stability and cooperation on the global stage.

Rationale for BRICS Expansion:

  • Counterbalance to Anti-US Sentiment and Advocacy for Multipolarity: In light of significant anti-US sentiment prevailing worldwide, these countries seek a platform where they can harness this sentiment to unite effectively.
  • Moreover, there's a growing demand for multipolarity, a forum through which Global South nations can demonstrate their solidarity.
  • Emerging as a Counterweight to Western Hegemony: The conflict in Ukraine has resulted in Western nations coming together while simultaneously reinforcing the China-Russia partnership.
  • Consequently, BRICS has evolved into an aspirational bloc capable of challenging the Western geopolitical perspective and serving as a counterweight to Western-dominated forums like the Group of 7 and the World Bank.

What BRICS Expansion Signifies for India's Global Positioning?

  • India's recent participation in the G7 summit in Hiroshima and the informal Quad summit, alongside its continued engagement with the BRICS alliance, has sparked discussions about its foreign policy orientation.
  • While some perceive these moves as indicative of India aligning more closely with the United States, it's crucial to underscore India's persistent commitment to the BRICS, often viewed as an 'anti-Western' bloc.
  • Additionally, India maintains its presence within the Shanghai Cooperation Organisation (SCO) and maintains diplomatic relations with both Russia and China, despite occasional challenges.
  • It is important to note that India's perspective on BRICS differs from China's. India sees BRICS as a forum that should remain non-aligned with Western powers, emphasizing its non-Western character.
  • Regarding the recent expansion of BRICS to include new members, India views these additions as opportunities for valuable partnerships.
  • However, concerns have arisen about the possibility of BRICS becoming more aligned with China's interests, potentially marginalizing India's influence within the group.
  • This raises questions about how India will safeguard its voice and interests within BRICS as the alliance evolves.

Chandrayaan-3 Successfully Lands on the Moon (The Hindu)

  • 24 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

India's Chandrayaan-3 mission made an indelible mark in history with its successful lunar landing. Achieving a 'soft landing' at the Moon's south pole, India now stands as the sole nation to have accomplished this remarkable feat.

Nearly sixty years after the Soviet Union’s Luna 9 mission made history as the first soft landing on the Moon, a lunar landing remains elusive for many countries. Russia’s Luna-25 mission failed earlier this week, in the same year that the Japanese Hakuto mission crash-landed. In 2019, Chandrayaan-2’s crash was preceded by Israel’s Beresheet facing a similar fate.

What is Soft Landing?

  • A 'soft landing' refers to the precise and controlled landing of a spacecraft at a gentle speed, ensuring minimal or no damage to the craft.
  • This achievement highlights the technical prowess of the spacecraft.
  • During a soft landing, the spacecraft executes a sequence of maneuvers and braking procedures aimed at diminishing its velocity and aligning it with the chosen landing area.
  • Typically, this involves activating retro-rockets or thrusters to gradually reduce descent speed and maintain a carefully managed approach.
  • The ultimate objective is to guide the spacecraft to the surface in a manner that avoids significant damage, showcasing the precision and expertise of the mission.

But why is it so difficult?

  •  The Moon has an extremely thin atmosphere. This means that spacecraft cannot rely on atmospheric friction to slow down considerably ahead of a landing which means that they will have to rely heavily on their propulsion systems to make a safe landing.
  • Also, there is no GPS on the Moon, unlike here on Earth.
  • This means that onboard computers will have to make quick calculations and maneuvers to land at a safe location without guidance from a massive network of satellites.

Why is ISRO Aiming for the Southern Pole?

  • All of the spacecraft that have landed on the Moon previously have landed in the equatorial region, either a few degrees of latitude north or a few degrees south of the lunar equator.
  • NASA’s Surveyor 7 is the mission that went farthest from the equator in history, landing as far away as 50 degrees south of the equator.
  • It is not without reason that so many missions land near the equator.
  • The terrain and temperature there are more welcoming, making the long and sustained operations of instruments easier.
  • Also, the surface there is relatively smooth with very few steep slopes, hills, and craters.
  • Due to the difficult environment, the polar regions of the Moon have largely remained unexplored.
  • But if the data from many previous orbiter missions is anything to go by, these regions could be very interesting to explore.
  • Chandrayaan-1 observed some evidence of the presence of ice molecules in the deep craters in the region.
  • Also, the cold temperatures of the region mean that things trapped there would remain frozen for a long time.
  • Essentially, that part of the Moon could act as a “time capsule.”
  • This could help scientists discover clues about the early history of the solar system, including how the Earth and the Moon formed.

Why the South Pole of the Moon Holds Significance?

  • Abundant Water Resources: Compelling evidence suggests the presence of water ice within the perpetually shadowed craters at the moon's south pole.
  • This water resource holds immense value for future human lunar exploration, serving potential uses such as drinking water, food cultivation, and the production of rocket fuel.
  • Various Volatiles: Beyond water ice, the moon's south pole may house other volatiles like methane and ammonia, offering additional resources for prospective lunar missions.
  • Geological Fascination: The lunar south pole boasts intriguing geological features, notably the South Pole-Aitken basin, the moon's largest impact basin.
  • Studying this basin could yield valuable insights into the moon's formation and evolutionary history.
  • Prime for Astronomical Observations: The permanently shadowed craters at the moon's south pole provide an excellent vantage point for astronomical observations.
  • Shielded from the Sun's radiation, these craters offer ideal conditions for studying radio waves and other forms of radiation that Earth's atmosphere tends to block.

What Has Changed Since the Chandrayaan-2 Setback?

  • Enhanced Landing Gear: Chandrayaan-3's landing legs have been fortified to guarantee stability and secure touchdown, even at a velocity of 3 meters per second, equivalent to 10.8 kilometers per hour.
  • Expanded Landing Flexibility: Unlike wheeled vehicles, a lunar lander employs stilts or legs to land.
  • The potential landing area has been broadened, with Chandrayaan-3 now programmed to touch down safely within a 4-kilometer by 2.4-kilometer zone, rather than aiming for a specific 500-meter by 500-meter patch as previously targeted by Chandrayaan-2.
  • Ample Fuel Reserves: Chandrayaan-3 carries an increased fuel load compared to Chandrayaan-2.
  • This surplus fuel is on standby for last-minute adjustments to the landing site if required.
  • Enhanced Solar Panels: The Chandrayaan-3 Lander is equipped with solar panels on all four sides, a significant upgrade from Chandrayaan-2's two-sided configuration.
  • This design ensures the Lander can harness solar power consistently, even if it lands incorrectly or experiences tumbling.
  • At least one or two sides will continually face the Sun, ensuring uninterrupted power generation.

What Next After Chandrayaan-3 successfully lands on the Moon?

  • Payloads in Action: Typically, spacecraft carry specialized instruments and experiments, known as payloads, to observe and record events in space.
  • Data Transmission to Earth: The data collected by these payloads is then transmitted back to Earth, where scientists analyze and study it for valuable insights.
  • Consistent Payloads: In Chandrayaan-3, the six payloads on the Vikram lander and rover Pragyan remain consistent with the previous mission.
  • Scientific Payloads on Lander: The lander hosts four scientific payloads that focus on various aspects, including the study of lunar quakes, thermal properties of the lunar surface, changes in the plasma near the surface, and a passive experiment aimed at precise measurements of the Earth-Moon distance. One of these payloads comes from NASA.

Rover Payloads: The rover carries two payloads designed to examine the chemical and mineral composition of the lunar surface. They are tasked with determining the presence and composition of elements like magnesium, aluminum, and iron in lunar soil and rocks.

India’s Smartphone Manufacturing Dreams and PIL Scheme (The Hindu)

  • 23 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

In recent months, there has been an ongoing exchange of viewpoints between former RBI governor Raghuram Rajan and Minister of State for Electronics Rajeev Chandrasekhar regarding the performance of a Central government initiative aimed at enhancing the electronics manufacturing sector.

Context:

  • In the backdrop of this discussion, it's important to highlight that former RBI governor Raghuram Rajan, along with two fellow economists, released a concise research paper in which they posited that the Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) program might not be effectively driving India toward self-reliance in manufacturing.
  • They contended that taxpayer funds were potentially being used to establish an ecosystem centered around low-level assembly jobs, which could still heavily rely on imports.

What Is the Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) Scheme?

  • The PLI scheme was designed with the overarching goals of bolstering domestic manufacturing capacity, augmenting import substitution, and fostering employment generation.
  • Launched in March 2020, this initiative initially focused on three key industries:
  • Mobile and related Component Manufacturing
  • Electrical Component Manufacturing
  • Medical Devices
  • Incentives Offered by the Scheme:
  • The incentives provided under this program are contingent on incremental sales and vary across sectors.
  • They range from as low as 1% for electronics and technology products to as high as 20% for the production of critical key starting drugs and certain drug intermediaries.
  • In certain sectors like advanced chemistry cell batteries, textile products, and the drone industry, incentives are calculated based on sales performance and local value addition over five years.
  • Sectors Covered by the PLI Scheme:
  • To date, the government has unveiled PLI schemes encompassing 14 sectors, including but not limited to the automobile and auto components industry, electronics and IT hardware, telecom, pharmaceuticals, solar modules, metals and mining, textiles and apparel, white goods, drones, and advanced chemistry cell batteries.
  • The introduction of this scheme aligns with several key objectives:
  • Reducing India's reliance on imports from countries like China and other foreign nations.
  • Bolstering labor-intensive sectors to enhance the employment ratio within India.
  • Mitigating import bills while promoting domestic production.
  • It's important to note that the PLI Yojana also extends an invitation to foreign companies to establish their operations in India and encourages domestic enterprises to expand their manufacturing capabilities.

What is the PLI Program in the Smartphone Manufacturing Sector?

  • Among the sectors, the smartphone manufacturing industry has exhibited remarkable enthusiasm for the PLI program.
  • Companies such as Micromax, Samsung, and Foxconn (known for manufacturing Apple phones) stand to benefit by receiving incentives of up to 6% of their incremental sales revenue through the PLI initiative.
  • This program has yielded remarkable results, as evidenced by the staggering growth in mobile phone exports.
  • The exports of mobile phones surged from a modest $300 million in FY2018 to an astonishing $11 billion in FY23.
  • Additionally, the import figures tell a compelling story; while India imported mobile phones valued at $3.6 billion in FY2018, this figure significantly dwindled to just $1.6 billion in FY23.
  • Central government Ministers, including Mr. Chandrasekhar, frequently cite these statistics as compelling evidence of the resounding success of the PLI scheme.

Former RBI Governor Raghuram Rajan's Perspective:

  • In his research paper, the former head of the Central Bank presented the argument that while the imports of fully assembled mobile phones have indeed decreased, the imports of mobile phone components, encompassing items such as display screens, cameras, batteries, and printed circuit boards, experienced a significant upsurge between FY21 and FY23.
  • Interestingly, these two years also marked the period during which mobile phone exports experienced their most substantial growth.
  • His contention revolves around the observation that manufacturers in India are not fundamentally engaged in the traditional sense of mobile phone production, which would involve the localization of the entire supply chain and the domestic production of most components.
  • Instead, what these companies are primarily doing is importing all the requisite parts and subsequently assembling them in India to produce a product labeled as 'Made in India.'
  • Furthermore, Rajan's critique extends to the assertion that low-level assembly work, as opposed to comprehensive manufacturing, does not generate well-paying jobs and lacks the robust multiplier effect that genuine manufacturing might provide to the economy.

What is the Union Government Response:

  • Minister of State for Electronics, Rajeev Chandrasekhar, presents a two-part counter-argument.
  • Firstly, he contends that Mr. Rajan's assumption that all imports of items like screens and batteries are exclusively intended for mobile phone manufacturing is inaccurate.
  • These imported components could also be utilized in the production of other devices such as computer monitors, DSLR cameras, and electric vehicles, among others.
  • Secondly, he points out that not all mobile phone production in India benefits from the PLI scheme; only approximately 22% of the industry has been covered by the scheme thus far.
  • The Minister's primary assertion is that import dependency isn't as severe as Mr. Rajan portrays it to be, given the potential diversity of applications for these imported components and the limited coverage of mobile phone production under the PLI scheme.

In Conclusion:

  • The former RBI Governor contends that even if we assume that only 60% of imports are utilized for production, India's net exports would remain in the negative territory.
  • This means that even if just 60% of components like screens and batteries are dedicated to mobile phone manufacturing, the total imports would still surpass the overall exports.
  • The fundamental divide in this debate revolves around the question of whether the PLI program can effectively generate sustainable employment opportunities and firmly position India as a manufacturing and supply hub that contributes substantial value to the production process.
  • The Union Government's perspective is that the results of the PLI Scheme may require time to become fully apparent and impactful.

National E-Commerce Policy (Financial Express)

  • 22 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

The Commerce and Industry Ministry is in the final stages of formulating the proposed national e-commerce policy, and at this point, no additional draft policy will be released to solicit input from stakeholders.

Context:

  • Electronic commerce (e-commerce) is emerging as a pivotal driver of India's economic growth and development.
  • Estimates indicate that, with grocery and fashion/apparel leading the way, the Indian e-commerce sector is poised to reach a valuation of $99 billion by 2024, with projections soaring to $300 billion by 2030.
  • Recognizing this immense potential, the government is diligently monitoring the evolving landscape of electronic business, calling for a regulatory framework to safeguard the interests of buyers, sellers, marketers, and distributors.
  • In 2019, a draft National E-Commerce policy was drafted and made available to the public for scrutiny.
  • In response to this draft policy, numerous foreign governments, including the United States, have submitted comments, highlighting concerns affecting U.S. businesses.
  • In August 2023, the Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade (DPIIT) conducted extensive discussions with representatives from e-commerce companies and domestic trade associations concerning the proposed policy.
  • A government official noted that a consensus has been reached among the involved stakeholders regarding the proposed policy.

Key Highlights of the National E-Commerce Policy:

  • On February 23, 2019, the Ministry of Commerce and Industry unveiled the draft National E-Commerce Policy (DPIIT 2019).
  • Aim:
  • The national e-commerce policy seeks to establish a regulatory framework that simplifies business operations within the sector.
  • Boosting Exports:
  • This policy recognizes the substantial export potential within India's e-commerce sector.
  • Projections indicate that by 2030, India's e-commerce exports could range from 200 billion USD to 300 billion USD annually.
  • Given the anticipated growth in global cross-border e-commerce exports, expected to reach 2 trillion USD by 2025, India aims to harness this opportunity.
  • Regulatory Body and FDI:
  • The possibility of creating a regulatory authority for the e-commerce sector is under consideration, though its implementation may require time.
  • Local trade associations have been advocating for an empowered regulatory body to enforce e-commerce regulations and address violations.
  • While 100% foreign direct investment (FDI) is
  • permissible in the marketplace model, the inventory-based model does not allow FDI.
  • Addressing Trader Concerns:
  • Traders have voiced concerns regarding e-commerce rule violations, such as steep discounts and preferential treatment for specific sellers.
  • The policy aims to clarify these concerns and enhance transparency in FDI regulations for e-commerce.
  • Furthermore, the Consumer Protection (e-commerce) Rules 2020 and proposed amendments will align with the e-commerce policy to maintain consistency.
  • Comprehensive Framework:
  • The e-commerce policy will function as a comprehensive framework for the sector, ensuring harmony among various governing statutes.
  • The sector is presently regulated by the FDI policy, the Consumer Protection Act of 2019, the Information Technology Act of 2000, and the Competition Act of 2002.
  • The policy intends to streamline these regulations, creating an environment conducive to the e-commerce industry's growth.

Advantages Highlighted in the Draft E-Commerce Policy:

  • Enhanced Information Provision: One notable strength of the draft e-commerce policy lies in its emphasis on comprehensive information provision.
  • It mandates that firms furnish clear details about product specifications, images, return and exchange policies, payment methods, and grievance redressal procedures.
  • This ensures consumers have access to transparent information, fostering a healthy e-commerce market.
  • Clear Grievance Redressal Mechanisms: The policy advocates for the establishment of transparent grievance redressal mechanisms, including the appointment of nodal officers, specified timeframes, and defined processes.
  • These measures benefit consumers by facilitating seamless pre- and post-purchase processes.
  • Seller Transparency: The policy requires platforms to disclose seller information, including names, locations, and contact details.
  • This transparency empowers buyers to engage with sellers beyond the confines of a platform if they choose to do so.
  • Fair Data Use: Platforms are prohibited from exploiting the vast data at their disposal to gain an unfair advantage over sellers or exhibit preferential treatment among sellers
  • This regulation plays a crucial role in safeguarding the welfare of sellers.

Criticism of the Draft E-Commerce Policy:

  • Infringement on Other Ministries' Mandates: The proposed rules appear to encroach upon the mandates of other ministries.
  • For instance, the 'fallback-liability' provision holds platforms responsible for any mis-spelling by third-party sellers, contradicting the Finance Ministry's FDI rules that limit platform inventory management.
  • Additionally, it removes the immunity granted specifically to marketplaces under the IT Act.
  • Redundancy in Regulatory Oversight: The Ministry of Corporate Affairs argues that rules addressing the abuse of competitive positions are unnecessary since the Competition Commission of India already oversees such matters.
  • Restrictive Measures on Related Parties: The policy restricts related parties from engaging in commercial activities on platforms, with related parties defined as entities with common shareholders owning more than 5% or over 10% ownership.
  • While well-intentioned, this clause may not align with regulatory objectives.

Mains Question:

  • Examine the objectives of India's National E-commerce Policy about consumer protection and seller support. Analyze the criticisms and challenges posed by its potential impact on other ministries and restrictions on related parties. (15M)

Green Hydrogen Standard for India (Indian Express)

  • 21 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

The Indian Ministry for Clean Energy has set rules for making green hydrogen in India. These rules say how clean the hydrogen must be. They also promise to explain how to check and confirm if the hydrogen is green.

What is Green Hydrogen?

Green hydrogen is clean energy made by splitting water using renewable sources like wind, sun, and water power. It can be a big part of moving to an eco-friendly economy and fighting climate change. This hydrogen can be saved and used as fuel for vehicles, factories, and farming.

If we compare it to grey and blue hydrogen:

  • Grey hydrogen is made using electricity from fossil fuels, which make harmful gases. Right now, 95% of hydrogen is made this way.
  • Blue hydrogen is also made using fossil fuels for electricity, but it's made cleaner by stopping the harmful gases from going into the air using a special technology called carbon capture and storage (CCS).

Why We Should Invest in Green Hydrogen?

  • Cutting Greenhouse Gas Emissions: The main reason to embrace green hydrogen is to slash greenhouse gas emissions and fight climate change.
  • Traditional fuels used for transportation and power generation produce lots of harmful emissions.
  • Green hydrogen, made from clean sources, doesn't emit any of these gases, making it a planet-friendly energy choice.
  • Energy Security and Independence: Fossil fuels are running out, and their prices can go up and down because of supply and demand.
  • By going for clean energy like green hydrogen, countries can be more self-reliant and not as affected by price swings and fuel shortages.
  • Creating Jobs and Industries: Making green hydrogen opens up new businesses and job opportunities, especially in clean energy.
  • Producing, storing, and moving green hydrogen needs special skills and infrastructure, which can mean lots of new jobs.
  • The renewable energy field, for example, employed 11 million people worldwide in 2018 and is set to create over 42 million jobs by 2050, says the International Renewable Energy Agency (IRENA).
  • Clean-Up Tough Industries: Some industries, like heavy manufacturing and aviation, are hard to clean up.
  • They make a big mess in the environment. Green hydrogen can replace dirty fuels in these sectors and help them become cleaner.
  • Boosting Technology: Developing green hydrogen forces us to come up with new ideas and technologies in lots of areas.
  • Making, storing, and moving green hydrogen needs new stuff, like materials and systems which can lead to big advances in technology and how things work.

What are the Uses of Green Hydrogen?

In Agriculture:

  • Replacing Fossil Fuels:
  • Green hydrogen can take the place of fossil fuels in farming. It can help make ammonia, which is used in fertilizers.
  • Normally, we make ammonia from natural gas, which makes harmful gases.
  • Green ammonia made with green hydrogen is clean and has benefits like working better and not making the soil too acidic.
  • But, making lots of green ammonia needs new technology and lots of money, so it might not happen quickly.
  • Green-Powered Farm Machines:
  • Big machines on farms, like tractors, use a lot of energy. Using green hydrogen to power these machines can cut down on harmful gases but still give them enough power to do their jobs.
  • Water Management:
  • Green hydrogen can help make saltwater into freshwater using special machines called desalination plants. This helps save fresh water.

In Transportation:

  • Hydrogen Fuel Cells:
  • These are like magic batteries that run on hydrogen and oxygen. They make electricity for vehicles without making any bad stuff.
  • Hydrogen-powered vehicles can go far and fill up fast, which is great for long trips.

In Industry:

  • Saving Money:
  • We can make green hydrogen when there's extra clean energy, like when the wind is blowing strong. Then we save it for when we need it. This can lower energy costs and help the environment.
  • Reliable Energy:
  • Green hydrogen can be made and saved right where it's used, so it's always ready.
  • This means we don't have to rely too much on the power grid, which is good for energy independence.
  • Less Waste:
  • We can make green hydrogen from stuff we don't want, like trash and farm leftovers. This can cut down on waste and be good for the planet.
  • Using Energy Better:
  • Green hydrogen can power things called fuel cells, which are more efficient than regular engines which means we use less energy, which is better for everyone.

What India is Doing to Boost Green Hydrogen?

India knows that green hydrogen can help make the country cleaner and reach climate goals. They have started many plans to make, use, and even sell green hydrogen.

Here are some important ones:

  • National Hydrogen Mission: This is like a big plan to make India a leader in green hydrogen and everything that comes from it. They will also work on things like trying it out, studying it, teaching people about it, making rules, and setting goals.
  • Using More Green Hydrogen: The government wants some big industries, like fertilizer and oil refining, to use a part of their hydrogen from green sources. It's kind of like how they ask electricity companies to use more clean energy.
  • Green Hydrogen Centers: Special places in India are being picked where they can make a lot of green hydrogen and use it too. These places will be like hubs for all things green hydrogen.

Key Highlights of India's Green Hydrogen Standard:

  • Defining Green Hydrogen: Green hydrogen in India means making hydrogen in a way that doesn't create more than two kilograms of carbon dioxide for every kilogram of hydrogen. India now joins a small group of countries with a clear green hydrogen definition.
  • What's Counted: This measurement includes everything from cleaning water to making hydrogen, plus purifying, drying, and compressing it.
  • Different Production Methods Included: This rule covers hydrogen made using electricity (like machines) and hydrogen made from biomass (plants).
  • Nodal Authority: The Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE) under the Ministry of Power is the boss that approves agencies responsible for watching, confirming, and certifying green hydrogen projects.

Challenges in Implementing Green Hydrogen:

  • Cost Barrier: Right now, green hydrogen is more expensive than regular fossil fuels.
  • This is because it needs special equipment and systems for production, storage, and transport, however, as technology gets better and we make more of it, the cost is likely to come down.
  • Building Infrastructure: To use green hydrogen everywhere, we need a strong system in place to produce it, store it, and move it around.
  • This system must also work well with our current energy setup to make the switch to green hydrogen smooth.
  • Energy Storage: Green hydrogen comes from sources like the wind and sun, which aren't always available.
  • We need smart ways to store extra energy when it's sunny and windy so that we have a constant supply of green hydrogen.
  • Batteries and special hydrogen storage can help with this.
  • Safety: Green hydrogen is a gas that can catch fire easily, so we need to be very careful when handling and storing it.
  • Creating safety rules and regulations is important to make sure it's handled safely.

Way Forward

  • Tackling High Costs: Green hydrogen currently costs more to produce and use than hydrogen from fossil fuels or other low-carbon sources. To address this, we should focus on developing more efficient technologies. This might involve improving electrolysis systems to use less energy or integrating green hydrogen production with renewable energy sources like wind and solar to reduce electricity costs.
  • Government Support: Governments can play a vital role by implementing rules that encourage the adoption of green hydrogen. This might include tax breaks or subsidies to make green hydrogen more attractive for both producers and users.
  • Building the Right Infrastructure: Green hydrogen needs its own infrastructure and supply chain. The current setup for regular hydrogen doesn't work well for green hydrogen. We need to build an efficient and cost-effective system for producing, storing, transporting, and distributing green hydrogen.
  • Cooperation Among Stakeholders: Making green hydrogen happen involves many different groups, from renewable energy makers to hydrogen producers and users. They all need to work together and have consistent rules, standards, and incentives to make Green hydrogen a success.

Raising Awareness and Building Skills: Green hydrogen is still a new idea for many. We need to show people how it's good, safe, and practical in various uses. This also means training and developing the skills needed to produce and use green hydrogen effectively.

India’s first 3D-printed Post Office (Indian Express)

  • 19 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

  • The inaugural of India's first 3D-printed post office took place virtually, led by Union Minister Ashwini Vaishnaw in Bengaluru's Cambridge Layout.
  • The post office was constructed in an impressive 43 days, finishing two days ahead of schedule.
  • Larsen & Toubro Limited, a multinational company, partnered with IIT Madras to provide the technological expertise for building this innovative post office.

What is 3D Printing?

  • 3D printing, also known as additive manufacturing, employs computer-aided design to create prototypes or functional models of objects by depositing successive layers of materials like plastic, resin, thermoplastic, metal, fiber, or ceramic.
  • The process begins with computer software developing the model, which then provides instructions to the 3D printer.
  • The primary form of 3D printing, known as additive manufacturing, caters to specific demands, often producing specialized items like lightweight equipment for unique projects.
  • This technology finds crucial applications in fields like healthcare and related industries.
  • On a global scale, the USA leads in 3D printing, commanding more than 35% of the market.
  • In Asia, China dominates, capturing around 50% of the market, while Japan follows at 30%, and South Korea at 10%.

Applications of 3D printing:

  • The applications of 3D printing are extensive and diverse, finding their place in various industries worldwide.
  • This technology is increasingly harnessed for:
  • Mass Customization: 3D printing enables tailored production, catering to individual preferences.
  • It contributes to open-source designs in the agriculture, healthcare, automotive, locomotive, and aviation sectors.
  • Objects are built layer by layer using materials directly from computer-aided design (CAD) models.
  • 3D printing serves a wide spectrum, including affordable housing up to G+3 floors, military barracks, single-floor schools, warehousing, accommodations, and villas.

How 3D Printing Works?

  • Prerequisites:
  • To engage in 3D printing, you'll require a personal computer connected to a 3D printer.
  • The process starts by designing a 3D model of the desired object using computer-aided design (CAD) software and then selecting the 'print' option.
  • The 3D printer then takes over the rest of the process.
  • Design:
  • Initiating the process involves crafting a digital 3D model of the intended object.
  • This model can be formed through 3D modeling software or acquired via 3D scanning techniques.
  • Slicing:
  • The 3D model is segmented into thin horizontal layers through specialized software, with each layer representing a cross-section of the final object.
  • Preparation:
  • The sliced model, along with parameters like layer thickness, print speed, material type, and temperature, is sent to the 3D printer.
  • Printing: The 3D printer follows instructions and starts the printing process using various methods, including:
  • Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM): This common method extrudes molten thermoplastic material through a heated nozzle, building the object layer by layer.
  • Stereolithography (SLA): SLA employs UV laser to solidify liquid photopolymer resin, producing intricate and detailed objects.
  • Selective Laser Sintering (SLS): In SLS, a laser fuses powdered material layer by layer, allowing for versatility in materials like plastics, metals, or ceramics.
  • Powder Bed Fusion (PBF): Similar to SLS, PBF fuses powdered materials like metals, plastics, or ceramics using a laser.
  • Inkjet Printing: Some printers use inkjet-like technology to deposit material in droplets, which are then cured to form layers.
  • Layer-by-Layer Construction:
  • The printer continues depositing material layer by layer as per the sliced model until the complete object takes shape.
  • Supports might be included for intricate or overhanging parts, which can be removed after printing.
  • Post-Processing:
  • After printing, post-processing steps like cleaning, curing, sanding, painting or assembly might be needed, depending on the material and desired finish.

Benefits of 3D Printing Technology:

  • Accessibility Enhancement: 3D printers are increasingly accessible, with local service providers offering manufacturing outsourcing services.
  • Medical Advancements: In healthcare, 3D printing aids in saving lives by producing organs like livers, kidneys, and hearts.
  • Ongoing developments in healthcare harness this technology for significant advancements.
  • Eco-Friendly Approach: With reduced material wastage, 3D printing is inherently environmentally friendly.
  • Cost-Effectiveness: Customization of desired products occurs swiftly, reducing costs associated with using multiple machines for manufacturing.
  • Swift Prototyping: 3D printing generates parts within hours, drastically expediting the prototyping process.
  • Efficient Design and Production: The technology enables rapid design iterations and faster production cycles.
  • Strength and Lightweight Properties: Parts created through 3D printing are strong and lightweight, offering a valuable combination of properties.
  • Complex Object Realization: This technology empowers the creation of intricate objects and shapes that might be unattainable through conventional methods.

Drawbacks of 3D Printing:

  • Design Inaccuracies: Inconsistencies in design accuracy can arise from variations in the type of machine or process used.
  • Some printers may have lower tolerances, leading to differences between the final parts and the original design.
  • Copyright Concerns: As 3D printing becomes more widespread, counterfeit products could proliferate, challenging the distinction between genuine and fake items.
  • Copyright infringement issues and quality control problems can emerge.
  • Impact on Manufacturing Jobs: The automation and printer-based production of 3D technology may lead to a reduction in human labor.
  • This could jeopardize the economies of third-world countries that heavily rely on low-skill manufacturing jobs.
  • Build Size Limitations: 3D printers currently possess compact print chambers, constraining the size of printable parts.
  • Larger objects may require separate printing of components and subsequent manual assembly, increasing costs and time.
  • Material Constraints: While 3D printing accommodates plastics and metals, the range of available raw materials is not exhaustive.

The trajectory of 3D Printing is poised to reshape India's manufacturing and industrial landscape, leveraging digital techniques, communication, imaging, architecture, and engineering. To establish a significant presence in the additive manufacturing or 3D printing domain, it's proposed that India should integrate this technology across all sectors, including defense and public domains. Establishing a governing body comprising local and global industry experts can spearhead this transformative endeavor.

Mains Question:

  • Discuss the advantages and challenges of 3D printing technology in the context of modern manufacturing. Provide specific examples of industries where 3D printing has made significant contributions and highlight the potential impact of this technology on future manufacturing processes and industries. (15M)

MoEFCC’s U-turn to Merge Autonomous Bodies (The Hindu)

  • 18 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

In June, the Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change (MoEFCC) issued a notification quietly walking back on its move to establish integrated regional offices by merging offices of the Forest Survey of India (FSI), the National Tiger Conservation Authority (NTCA), the Wildlife Crime Control Bureau (WCCB), and the Central Zoo Authority (CZA), and thus bring them under the Ministry.

What's in the News?

  • Amidst the Covid-19 pandemic, the central government suggested the consolidation of four entities – NTCA, CZA, WCCB, and FSI – into a single organization.
  • This proposition faced intense criticism from activists who argued that it could strip key environmental bodies of their effectiveness.
  • To illustrate, within the current structure, the NTCA possesses the ability to contest forest clearances for projects that involve diverting areas within Tiger Reserves.
  • However, the proposed amalgamation might have complicated this process, as the NTCA would have fallen under the authority of the Deputy Director General of Forests. This individual oversees the Integrated Regional Office and reports to the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC).

About the Forest Survey of India (FSI):

  • The inception of the Forest Survey of India dates back to 1981, a product of the National Commission on Agriculture's (NCA) suggestions.
  • FSI conducts a biennial evaluation of the nation's forest coverage through digital analysis of satellite data from remote sensing technology. This assessment culminates in the publication of the 'State of Forest Report' (SFR).
  • FSI plays an instrumental role in imparting training to forest officers from diverse Indian states.
  • The base of Operations: Dehradun, Uttarakhand.

About the National Tiger Conservation Authority (NTCA):

  • The National Tiger Conservation Authority, established under the Wildlife (Protection) Act of 1972, operates as a statutory body.
  • Established in 2005 as a result of the recommendations of the Tiger Task Force, its core aims encompass:
  • Granting legal authority to Project Tiger, thereby rendering adherence to its directives a matter of legality.
  • Enhancing the accountability of both the central and state governments in managing Tiger Reserves.
  • Addressing the livelihood concerns of local communities residing in the vicinity of Tiger Reserves.
  • Key Responsibilities:
  • Approval of tiger conservation plans devised by state governments.
  • Ensuring that the integrity of tiger reserves and the ecological connectivity between different protected areas and reserves remain intact, avoiding unsustainable ecological utilization.
  • Providing support and facilitation for the management of tiger reserves within states, aimed at conserving biodiversity.
  • NTCA undertakes a comprehensive Tiger Census across India every four years.
  • Leadership: The chairman of NTCA is the Union Minister of Environment, Forest and Climate Change.

About the Wildlife Crime Control Bureau (WCCB):

  • The Wildlife Crime Control Bureau was established in 2007 as a statutory body under the Wildlife (Protection) Act of 1972.
  • Main Responsibilities:
  • Gathering and organizing information about organized wildlife crimes and quickly sharing it with state and other enforcement agencies to catch the criminals promptly.
  • Creating a central place to store data about wildlife crimes.
  • Coordinating efforts from different agencies to enforce the rules of the Act.
  • Helping other countries and international groups work together to control wildlife crimes.
  • Helping enforcement agencies improve their skills in investigating wildlife crimes.
  • Guiding State Governments to successfully handle cases related to wildlife crimes.
  • The WCCB also assists Customs authorities in checking shipments of plants and animals according to the rules of the Wildlife Protection Act, CITES, and EXIM Policy.
  • The headquarters is based in New Delhi.

About the Central Zoo Authority (CZA):

  • The Central Zoo Authority, established in 1992 as a legal body under the Wildlife (Protection) Act of 1972, has a specific purpose.
  • What It Aims to Achieve:
  • To support and enhance the national mission to conserve the diverse and valuable biodiversity of the country, especially its animals, following the guidelines of the National Zoo Policy from 1998.
  • Every zoo in the nation must gain recognition from this Authority to operate.
  • The Authority's main role is more about helping than controlling. It offers technical and financial assistance to zoos that have the potential to meet the desired standards in animal management.
  • It sets rules and guidelines for transferring animals among zoos within the country and globally.
  • It coordinates and puts into action plans for improving the skills of zoo staff, organized breeding efforts, and research done outside the natural habitat (ex-situ research).
  • Headquarters: New Delhi

Why Did MoEF&CC Put Forward the Proposal?

MoEF&CC explained that the proposal was not about merging but about bringing together the different authorities to operate from 19 regional offices under one central hub.

However, in June 2023, MoEF&CC decided not to go ahead with the merger plan, possibly due to challenges in combining the involved institutions from technical and administrative standpoints.

Consumption-Based Poverty Estimates (The Hindu)

  • 17 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

  • In a recent assessment of multidimensional poverty conducted by NITI Aayog, the findings reveal a decline in the poverty rate from 25% in 2015-16 to 15% in 2019-21.
  • Notably, approximately 135 million individuals were elevated from impoverished conditions within this timeframe.
  • Consequently, it becomes imperative to scrutinize the methodologies underpinning the multidimensional poverty index and ascertain the continued pertinence of poverty evaluations based solely on consumption.

What is Multidimensional Poverty?

  • Traditionally, poverty has been predominantly gauged through single-dimensional indicators, frequently revolving around income levels.
  • Multidimensional poverty, in contrast, comprehensively addresses the array of deficiencies that individuals grappling with poverty encounter in their daily existence.
  • These deficiencies encompass compromised health, limited access to education, insufficient living conditions, disempowerment, subpar employment situations, exposure to violence, and inhabiting environmentally precarious regions, among other factors.

Distinguishing Between Consumption-Based and Multidimensional Poverty Indices (MPI):

  • Poverty gauges based on consumption levels primarily address one aspect of deprivation, without accounting for other dimensions.
  • The global MPI encapsulates both the extent of multidimensional poverty (the percentage of individuals within a population grappling with multidimensional poverty) and its depth (the average number of deprivations experienced by each impoverished individual).
  • Nonetheless, it's important to recognize that while Multidimensional poverty estimates offer valuable insights, they are not intended to replace the National Sample Survey (NSS) consumption-based poverty ratios.

Recent Findings on Multidimensional Poverty in India:

  • Within a mere 15-year span, from 2005/2006 to 2019/2021, a striking 415 million individuals in India have successfully transcended poverty, showcasing a commendable accomplishment by the world's most populous nation.
  • These revelations stem from the latest global release of the Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI) by the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP) and the Oxford Poverty and Human Development Initiative (OPHI) based at the University of Oxford.
  • The global MPI stands as a comprehensive measure of poverty, encapsulating the various deprivations that underprivileged individuals encounter in the realms of education, health, and living conditions.
  • In the year 2005/2006, approximately 645 million people grappled with multidimensional poverty in India; this figure dwindled to around 370 million in 2015/2016 and further down to 230 million in 2019/2021.

Challenges Associated with the Multidimensional Poverty Index:

  • The Global MPI's Findings Are Not a Novel Revelation
  • The application of the Global MPI as a conclusive breakthrough isn't unprecedented.
  • Poverty estimations grounded in consumer spending and utilizing the Tendulkar committee's framework revealed a reduction of 137 million individuals living in poverty between 2004-05 and 2011-12, despite population growth.
  • Following the Rangarajan Committee's methodology, the decrease from 2009-10 to 2011-12 stands at 92 million, equating to an annual reduction of 46 million.
  • Myriad Indicators to Consider
  • Given the extensive array of dimensions and indicators, it becomes imperative to engage in meticulous asset mapping to pinpoint the most pertinent parameters.
  • However, owing to the abundance of indicators spanning multiple dimensions, the accurate evaluation, and consequent effective policy implementation might pose challenges.
  • Aggregating Across Indicators
  • This presents yet another predicament, as these indicators should ideally remain independent of each other.
  • For instance, indicators like access to clean drinking water should not be aggregated with factors such as child mortality."

Challenges Regarding Consumption Expenditure Surveys:

  • After 2011-12, there is a lack of accessible official records on consumer expenditure, which inhibits the capacity to juxtapose it with trends in the multidimensional poverty index.
  • The survey outcomes about consumption expenditures from 2017-18 have not been officially disseminated.
  • Given the dearth of this information, various studies have attempted to investigate poverty utilizing indirect techniques along with resources such as the Centre for Monitoring Indian Economy (CMIE) and the Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS). These endeavors, however, have yielded disparate findings.

Approaches to Tackle MPI Challenges:

  • Integration of MPI with Consumption-Based Poverty Assessments
  • Examining the advancements in non-monetary aspects like education, healthcare, sanitation, access to clean water, and child survival alongside income or consumption poverty can provide valuable insights.
  • However, the conversion of all these variables into a single index introduces complexities.
  • Incorporating Public Services as an Additional Dimension: Regarding multidimensional matters, considering public services as an independent dimension, beyond consumption, can yield more comprehensive results.

Reforming Consumption Expenditure Surveys: A Necessity

  • Enhancing Data Collection Practices
  • An imperative concern revolves around the disparities observed in aggregate consumption estimations between National Accounts Statistics (NAS) and National Sample Survey (NSS) data.
  • It's worth noting that across all nations, the NSS and NAS consumption estimates invariably diverge – a trend India also follows.
  • What is particularly perplexing is the escalating dissimilarity in India between NSS and NAS consumption figures over the years.
  • From a divergence of under 10% in the late 1970s, this gap has widened to a substantial 53.1% in 2011-12. This disparity is too significant to disregard.
  • The National Statistical Office ought to meticulously analyze this issue and proffer potential solutions to enhance data collection through both avenues.
  • Moreover, it's essential to complement the outcomes of consumption surveys with an evaluation of the impact of public expenditure on the health and education of distinct expenditure strata.

A prevalent perception associates wealth or destitution with high or low-income levels. The insufficiency of income is mirrored in numerous non-income poverty indicators.

Defining poverty in terms of income, or when income data is lacking, in terms of expenditure, appears to be the most pertinent approach, and this methodology is prevalent across the majority of countries.

Instances of Cloudburst and Their Frequency in India (Indian Express)

  • 16 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

  • After heavy rains in Himachal Pradesh, landslides occurred, resulting in 22 fatalities.
  • Chief Minister Sukhvinder Singh Sukhu reported cloudbursts and advised against approaching waterbodies and vulnerable areas.
  • The Indian Meteorological Department (IMD) forecasted scattered to widespread rains in Himachal Pradesh on August 14 and 15, and in Uttarakhand from August 14 to 18, followed by a substantial decrease.

Reasons Behind Intense Rains in Himachal and Uttarakhand:

  • The combination of the monsoon trough's northward progression and its interaction with a weakened western disturbance is triggering heavy rainfall in Himachal Pradesh and Uttarakhand.
  • The monsoon trough takes the form of an extended low-pressure region, stretching from a "heat low" situated over Pakistan's seas to the Bay of Bengal region's head (encompassing parts of Odisha, West Bengal, and Bangladesh).
  • The monsoon trough is a semi-permanent component of the monsoon's circulation, as outlined by the India Meteorological Department.
  • Presently, the monsoon trough has shifted northward beyond its usual position, overlaying the foothills of the Himalayas.
  • In the near term, the monsoon trough will undergo a southward shift, leading to a temporary decrease in hill-region rainfall and an upsurge in rainfall across the east-central regions of India.

About Cloudbursts

  • Cloudbursts refer to highly concentrated and intense rainfall events.
  • As per the India Meteorological Department (IMD), cloudbursts involve exceptionally heavy rain concentrated over a limited region, with a rapid rate of around 10 cm per hour.
  • This phenomenon is accompanied by robust winds and lightning, typically occurring across an area of about 20 to 30 square kilometers.
  • Following this criterion, even 5 cm of rain within just thirty minutes across the same area would be classified as a cloudburst.
  • Cloudbursts are relatively frequent occurrences, especially in the monsoon season.
  • A majority of these incidents take place in the Himalayan states, where the unique local geography, wind patterns, and temperature differences between various atmospheric layers create favorable conditions for their formation.

Occurrence of Cloudburst:

  • Cloudbursts unfold when moisture-laden air ascends hilly terrain, forming vertical cloud columns known as 'cumulonimbus' clouds.
  • These clouds typically yield rain, thunder, and lightning. This upward cloud movement is termed an orographic lift.
  • Such unstable clouds generate an intense rainstorm over a limited area once they amass enough moisture while being trapped within the ridges and valleys amid hills.
  • The energy needed for a cloudburst originates from the ascending air movement.
  • Cloudbursts are predominantly witnessed at altitudes ranging from 1,000 to 2,500 meters above sea level.
  • Moisture is often sourced from low-pressure systems (associated with cyclonic storms in the ocean) positioned over the Gangetic plains, coupled with low-level winds blowing in from the east.
  • On occasions, north-western winds also contribute to cloudburst occurrence.
  • Given the multifaceted factors that must align for a cloudburst event, their likelihood is quite rare.

Cloudburst Prediction:

  • The India Meteorological Department (IMD) anticipates forthcoming rainfall occurrences with a certain lead time. However, they do not project the precise volume of rainfall—this remains true for meteorological bodies worldwide.
  • Forecasts generally pertain to categories like light, heavy, or very heavy rainfall, omitting the exact measurements of rainfall at specific locations.
  • Moreover, these predictions encompass relatively larger geographic regions such as states, meteorological sub-divisions, or even districts, and their accuracy diminishes for smaller areas.
  • While it's theoretically conceivable to forecast rain for minute areas, the prerequisites include an intricate network of weather instruments and computational capabilities that currently appear impractical with available technologies.
  • As a result, the exact anticipation of individual cloudburst incidents remains beyond current forecasting capabilities.

Are Cloudburst Incidents on the Rise?

  • There is no discernible long-term trend indicating an increase in cloudbursts, as defined by the IMD.
  • Nevertheless, occurrences of extreme rainfall, along with other extreme weather phenomena, are on the rise globally, not solely in India.
  • While the total rainfall volume in India has not undergone significant change, a growing portion of precipitation is concentrated within a brief timeframe.
  • This implies that instances of heavy rainfall are becoming more intense, accompanied by prolonged dry periods within the rainy season.
  • This distinctive pattern, attributed to climate change, potentially signifies an elevated probability of cloudburst events as well.

Consequences of Cloudbursts:

  • Flash Floods: Cloudbursts can lead to catastrophic flash floods, resulting in the uprooting of trees and the displacement of boulders and debris.
  • Infrastructure Deterioration: The sheer intensity of cloudburst downpours can inflict significant harm on infrastructure, including houses, roads, and bridges.
  • Landslides: In hilly and mountainous regions, cloudburst-induced heavy rainfall can precipitate landslides.
  • Ecological Impact: Cloudbursts can also negatively impact trees, plants, and crops, causing loss of cultivable land and affecting livestock.

Cloudbursts can trigger a chain of devastating outcomes, encompassing flash floods, damage to infrastructure, landslides, and ecological disruption.

Areas Prone to Cloudbursts in India:

  • Cloudbursts primarily occur across the challenging landscapes of the Himalayas, the Western Ghats, and the northeastern hill states of India.
  • Intense rainfall on these vulnerable steep slopes triggers landslides, flash floods, and debris flows, leading to extensive devastation and loss of lives and property.
  • An illustration of this was the flash floods in the Lidder Valley on July 8, 2022, along the route to the Amarnath Temple in Jammu and Kashmir, which tragically claimed the lives of numerous pilgrims.
  • Furthermore, robust monsoon winds along the coastline can also induce cloudbursts, as evident in incidents like Mumbai (2005) and Chennai (2015).
  • Coastal cities face heightened vulnerability due to cloudbursts, as these sudden floods can disrupt conventional stormwater and flood management strategies in these urban areas.

Strategies to Mitigate Cloudburst Impact:

  • Controlled Construction Near Water Bodies: Regulate construction near riverbanks, considering water levels during heavy rainfall to prevent vulnerability.
  • Enhanced Water Control Infrastructure: Reinforce embankments, barrages, and dams to manage and regulate water flow more effectively.
  • Ecologically Informed Local Planning: Implement localized planning that acknowledges the region's ecological sensitivity and engages local communities.
  • Balanced Infrastructure Development: Scrutinize infrastructure projects and protect eco-sensitive zones to maintain environmental integrity.
  • Advanced Forecasting and Technology: Improve IMD forecasting and integrate advanced technology to monitor and predict extreme weather occurrences. This allows for early warnings, evacuation planning, and readiness.
  • Eco-Friendly Approaches: Promote eco-sensitive tourism and adopt environmentally friendly policies to foster sustainable development in the area.
  • Disaster Management Integration: Embed disaster management and prevention measures into the developmental planning process for a comprehensive approach.
  • Addressing Himalayan Region: Address the increasing frequency of cloudbursts in the Himalayan region, driven by the higher decadal temperature rise compared to the global trend.

By implementing these measures, it's possible to alleviate the impacts of cloudbursts and enhance the region's resilience to extreme weather events.

The global incidence and severity of cloudbursts are anticipated to rise due to climate change. A mere 1-degree Celsius temperature elevation could correspond to a 7-10% augmentation in moisture and rainfall levels. This heightened moisture capacity in the air leads to elongated dry spells punctuated by brief bursts of intense rainfall. Consequently, more substantial cumulonimbus clouds form, heightening the likelihood of cloudbursts.

In light of this, immediate actions and well-devised policies are imperative to safeguard lives and assets from escalating extreme events, which are poised to intensify as global temperature shifts intensify.

Mains Question:

  • Elaborate on the causative factors and ramifications associated with cloudbursts, and subsequently, examine the strategies aimed at averting and mitigating the profound consequences of these intense rainfall events. (15M)

Enhancing the Efficiency of Urea as a Fertilizer: Reasons and Necessity (Indian Express)

  • 15 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

  • Prime Minister of India has recently inaugurated 'Urea Gold,' a novel fertilizer created by the state-owned Rashtriya Chemicals and Fertilizers Ltd (RCF), which involves enhancing urea with sulfur.
  • Urea, a white nitrogen-based chemical fertilizer, artificially enriches plants with a key nutrient, nitrogen.

What are Fertilizers?

  • A fertilizer is a substance, whether naturally occurring or synthetically produced, comprising essential chemical elements like Nitrogen (N), Phosphorus (P), and Potassium (K), which enhance the growth and productivity of plants.
  • In India, the primary fertilizers are Urea, DAP, and Muriate of Potash (MOP), forming the trio of fundamental fertilizing agents.

Fertilizer Utilization in India:

  • The Green Revolution in the 1960s experienced remarkable success due to the abundant application of these fertilizers, resulting in increased grain output.
  • However, the response of crop yields to fertilizer usage has significantly declined over time.
  • For instance, during the 1960s in India, 1 kg of NPK nutrients yielded 12.1 kg of cereal grains; this yield diminished to 5 kg during the 2010s.
  • The primary cause behind this decline has been the imbalanced application of Nitrogen (N) by farmers.

What Factors Sustain Urea's Prominence as the Leading Fertilizer?

  • Advantages in Abundance:
  • Urea retains its supremacy as the most extensively utilized fertilizer owing to its enriched nitrogen content, a pivotal nutrient for promoting plant growth.
  • Urea's widespread popularity is attributed to its accessibility and cost-effectiveness, presenting farmers with a practical nitrogen source.
  • Additionally, its ease of storage and transportation enhances its convenience for both agricultural practitioners and manufacturers.
  • The versatility of urea as a fertilizer is noteworthy, as it suits a diverse array of crops and soil compositions.
  • Substantial Subsidization:
  • In India, urea maintains its position as the top-ranking fertilizer in terms of production, import, consumption, and regulatory control.
  • Urea's consumption has surged by more than a third since 2009-10, primarily due to a mere 16.5% increase in its maximum retail price (MRP), rising from Rs 4,830 to Rs 5,628 per tonne.
  • Nonetheless, the current per-tonne MRP of urea, especially when juxtaposed against DAP (Rs 27,000) and MOP (Rs 34,000), significantly deviates from the recommended 4:2:1 NPK usage ratio, widely considered optimal for Indian soil conditions."

Dual Challenges Arising from Escalating Urea Consumption:

  • India's annual urea consumption, reaching around 36 million metric tons, currently ranks second only to China's 51 million metric tons. China's urea production is primarily coal-derived.
  • In the previous fiscal year, approximately 7.6 million metric tons of urea were imported out of the total 36 million metric tons consumed. Notably, even domestically produced urea relies on imported natural gas as its primary feedstock.
  • The second challenge centers on nitrogen use efficiency (NUE). A mere 35% of the nitrogen applied through urea in India effectively contributes to crop growth and harvested yields.
  • The diminishing NUE, declining from approximately 48% in the early 1960s, compels farmers to increase fertilizer application to attain the same level of yield.

Government Initiatives to Curtail Urea Consumption in India:

  • The initiation of the nutrient-based subsidy (NBS) framework in 2010 marked a pivotal step.
  • Under NBS, the government established a fixed per-kilogram subsidy for each fertilizer nutrient – Nitrogen (N), Phosphorus (P), Potash (K), and Sulphur (S) – a departure from the previous product-specific subsidy system.
  • The primary goal is to encourage balanced fertilization by dissuading excessive application of urea (46% N), di-ammonium phosphate (DAP - 46% P plus 18% N), and muriate of potash (MOP - 60% K).
  • In 2015, the government mandated the application of neem oil coating to all domestically produced and imported urea.
  • While initial years witnessed a decline in consumption, this trend reversed from 2018-19.
  • Subsequently, the transition from 50 kg bags to 45 kg bags occurred in 2018. Moreover, the Indian Farmers' Fertiliser Cooperative (IFFCO) introduced the liquid 'Nano Urea' in 2021. This innovative form of urea as nanoparticles aims to rectify the disproportionate and unsystematic usage of conventional urea. It seeks to elevate crop productivity while diminishing soil, water, and air pollution.
  • Despite these government measures to counter illegal diversion for non-agricultural purposes and enhance nitrogen use efficiency, the reduction in urea consumption has not been achieved."

What is Urea Gold?

  • Ordinary urea typically contains a single plant nutrient, Nitrogen (N), at a concentration of 46%. Urea Gold, on the other hand, consists of 37% N along with an additional 17% sulfur (S).
  • Urea Gold pursues dual objectives.
  • Firstly, it provides Sulphur (S) in conjunction with Nitrogen (N).
  • Indian soils suffer from Sulphur deficiency, a shortfall that is particularly crucial for oilseeds and pulses – commodities in which the nation is heavily reliant on imports.
  • Secondly, Urea Gold aims to enhance the Nitrogen Use Efficiency (NUE) of urea.
  • The sulfur coating on urea ensures a more gradual release of Nitrogen, prolonging its action.
  • This extended effect keeps plants vibrant for an extended duration, thus reducing the frequency of application. For instance, just two bags of Urea Gold (instead of three) could potentially cover an acre of paddy or wheat.
  • As of now, the commercial launch of Urea Gold by RCF is pending, with pricing details yet to be disclosed.

Primary Obstacle in Urea Fortification and the Path Forward:

  • A key challenge pertains to pricing dynamics.
  • For instance, the anticipated Maximum Retail Price (MRP) for Urea Gold is projected to range between Rs 400-500 for a 40-kg bag (compared to approximately Rs 254 for a 45-kg bag of regular neem-coated urea).
  • One potential solution could involve allowing market-driven determination of MRPs for all coated fertilizers.
  • Given that conventional urea and DAP will persist at heavily subsidized rates, manufacturers are likely to face constraints in levying substantial premiums on their fortified fertilizer offerings.
  • An optimal approach would involve conducting the coating process directly at the manufacturing facility.
  • This ensures a more consistent distribution of micronutrients and simplifies the task for farmers, sparing them the intricacies of blending the elements themselves.

Mains Question:

  • Discuss the outcomes of CACP's proposal to incorporate Urea into Nutrient-Based Subsidy. Analyze how Urea's exclusion from NBS contributes to nutrient imbalance and assess how challenges, including economic burden and black marketing, impact the effectiveness of NBS. (15M)

The Bharatiya Nagrik Suraksha Sanhita Bill 2023 (NewsOnAIR)

  • 14 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

  • The Home Minister, Amit Shah introduces three bills namely, the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita 2023, the Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha Sanhita 2023, and the Bharatiya Sakshya Bill 2023.
  • The Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita 2023 is designed to replace the Indian Penal Code of 1860, the Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha Sanhita 2023 aims to supersede the Criminal Procedure Act, of 1898, and the Bharatiya Sakshya Bill 2023 will take the place of the Indian Evidence Act, 1872.
  • The Minister emphasized that these Bills are set to revolutionize the country's criminal justice system.
  • Their primary focus is on delivering justice to individuals rather than merely imposing penalties.
  • These legislative measures have been meticulously developed after thorough discussions and deliberations. Notably, provisions relating to sedition will be fully removed.
  • The laws have undergone 313 modifications to bolster the criminal justice system's efficacy and robustness.

What Prompted the Introduction of the Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha Sanhita Bill?

  • The culmination of Azadi ka Amrit Mahotsav on August 15, 2023, marks the commencement of India's journey from 75 to 100 years of independence, heralding the vision of a resplendent India.
  • On August 15, 2022, during his address from the Red Fort, the Prime Minister of India presented the nation with the Panch Pran, or five vows, one of which is the eradication of all vestiges of subjugation.
  • Spanning from 1860 to 2023, India's criminal justice system has endured under laws formulated by the British Parliament.
  • In this context, the introduction of these three bills stands as an embodiment of the commitment to fulfill one of the five vows - instilling a distinct Indian essence to drive a transformative shift in the nation's criminal justice system.

What Constitutes the Code of Criminal Procedure (CrPC)?

  • Established in 1973 (enforced on April 1, 1974), the CrPC stands as the primary legislation governing the procedural aspects of administering substantive criminal law in India.
  • It serves to:
  • Outline the mechanisms for investigating crimes,
  • Facilitate the apprehension of suspected individuals,
  • Facilitate the collection of evidence,
  • Ascertain the guilt or innocence of the accused party, and
  • Determine the appropriate punishment for those found guilty.
  • Furthermore, the CrPC addresses matters such as public disturbances, prevention of offenses, and the support of family members like spouses, children, and parents.
  • The Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha Sanhita Bill 2023 aims to replace the CrPC as it currently stands.

What are the Main Amendments Proposed in the CrPC?

  • Enhanced Technological Integration:
  • Proceedings including trials, appeals, and depositions (including those of public servants and police officers) can be conducted through electronic means.
  • Accused individuals' statements may be recorded via video conferencing.
  • Summons, warrants, documents, police reports, and evidence statements can be generated in electronic format.
  • Integration of Communication Devices:
  • The bill introduces "communication devices" as part of electronic communication.
  • Individuals may be required to produce digital evidence-containing devices upon court or police directives.
  • Controlled Use of Handcuffs:
  • Police officers may use handcuffs during the arrest of repeat offenders, escapees from custody, or those involved in organized crime, terrorist acts, or offenses against the state.
  • Strengthened Safeguards:
  • Section 41A of CrPC will be renumbered as Section 35.
  • Added provision: Arrest without prior permission from a DSP isn't permitted for offenses carrying less than 3 years' punishment or if the person is over 60 years old.
  • Mercy Petitions Clarified:
  • Guidelines outlined for filing mercy petitions in death sentence cases.
  • A 30-day window after being informed of petition disposal for submitting a mercy plea to the Governor.
  • Subsequent recourse to the President within 60 days if rejected, with no further court appeal.
  • Expedited Sanction to Prosecute:
  • Government to decide on granting or rejecting prosecution sanction within 120 days of receiving a request.
  • Inaction will be deemed as granting sanction.
  • Exemptions for sexual offenses, trafficking, etc., from requiring sanction.
  • Arms Possession Regulations:
  • District magistrates retain power under Section 144A to prohibit arms possession during processions and mass activities to maintain public peace.
  • Samples Collection Without Arrest:
  • Magistrates are empowered to order samples of signature, handwriting, voice, or finger impressions for investigation without arrest.
  • Police Detention and Action:
  • Police are enabled to detain or remove individuals resisting preventive actions or defying orders.
  • Trial in Absentia:
  • In alignment with stringent anti-terror laws like UAPA, where the burden of proof is reversed.
  • Accused must prove innocence rather than the state proving guilt.
  • These proposed amendments aim to modernize and enhance the effectiveness of the Criminal Procedure Code while upholding safeguards and rights.

Importance of the Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha Sanhita Bill:

  • Streamlined Criminal Procedure:
  • The bill seeks to consolidate and amend criminal procedure laws, establishing specific timelines for time-bound investigations, trials, and verdicts.
  • This ensures a prompt and efficient dispensation of justice.
  • Expedited Justice Delivery:
  • The legislation stands to expedite the judicial process, leading to a swifter resolution of cases.
  • Alignment with Digital India Initiative:
  • The draft legislation is in sync with the Digital India campaign.
  • It acknowledges digital records as admissible evidence, conferring the same legal validity and enforceability as traditional paper records.
  • Enhanced Citizen-Centric Approach:
  • The bill adopts a citizen-centric perspective by ensuring that First Information Reports (FIRs) are readily accessible to complainants.
  • Victims are kept informed about case progress via digital channels.
  • Summary Trials for Minor Offences:
  • The bill introduces summary trials for minor offenses, further speeding up the legal process for less serious cases.
  • Facilitation of 'Zero FIR':
  • The bill allows for the lodging of a 'Zero FIR' at any police station, irrespective of jurisdiction.
  • This enables swift initiation of the legal process without being bound by geographical constraints.

The Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha Sanhita Bill aims to modernize criminal procedures, leverage technology for efficiency, prioritize citizens' access to justice, and foster a faster and more accessible legal system.

Why India Needs an Industrial Policy? (The Hindu)

  • 12 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

The Union Government on Thursday introduced a Bill removing the Chief Justice of India (CJI) from a three-member panel to select the Chief Election Commissioner (CEC) and Election Commissioners.

What's in the News?

  • The government has brought the Chief Election Commissioner and other Election Commissioners (Appointment, Conditions of Service and Term of Office) Bill, 2023, in the Rajya Sabha.
  • This bill aims to eliminate the Chief Justice of India (CJI) from the group responsible for selecting the Chief Election Commissioner and Election Commissioners.
  • In an earlier development in March 2023, the Supreme Court decreed that a three-member committee should oversee the selection process for Chief Election Commissioner and Election Commissioners.
  • The committee, according to this ruling, should consist of the Prime Minister, the Leader of the Opposition in the Lok Sabha, and the Chief Justice of India.

Supreme Court's Stand on Election Commission Appointments:

  • A Constitution Bench of the Supreme Court, comprising five judges, was engaged in hearing a collection of petitions requesting a selection procedure akin to that observed in the appointment of the Director of the Central Bureau of Investigation (CBI).
  • The Director of the CBI is appointed through a committee, which includes the Prime Minister, the Leader of the Largest Opposition Party, and the Chief Justice of India.
  • In a unanimous decision reached in March 2023, the Court expressed its dissent regarding the existing approach of the Central Government in nominating members of the electoral oversight body.
  • Citing Article 324(2) of the Constitution, the Court urged the Parliament to establish legislation governing the criteria for selection, terms of service, and duration of office for the Chief Election Commissioner (CEC) and Election Commissioners (ECs).
  • Pending the formulation of such legislation, the highest court convened a panel comprised of the Prime Minister, the Chief Justice of India, and the leader of the opposition to undertake these appointments.

Proposed Bill to Remove CJI from Panel for Election Commissioner Selection:

The Chief Election Commissioner and other Election Commissioners (Appointment, Conditions of Service and Term of Office) Bill, 2023, has been introduced by the Law Minister in the Rajya Sabha.

Highlighted Aspects of the Bill:

  • Exclusion of CJI:
  • The bill endeavors to substitute the Chief Justice of India with a Cabinet Minister nominated by the Prime Minister within the committee tasked with choosing the Chief Election Commissioners (CECs) and Election Commissioners (ECs).
  • Addition of Opposition Leader:
  • The bill adds the Leader of the Opposition in Lok Sabha as a member of the selection committee.
  • Eligibility Criteria:
  • The bill stipulates that individuals for the ECI, including CEC and ECs, must be individuals who hold or have held positions equivalent to Secretary to the Government of India.
  • They should possess integrity, coupled with expertise and familiarity in election management and administration.
  • Selection Process:
  • Initially, a Search Committee, headed by the Cabinet Secretary and encompassing two members not below the rank of Secretary with election-related knowledge, will craft a list of five candidates.
  • This list will then be submitted to the Selection Committee.
  • Composition of Selection Committee:
  • Chaired by the Prime Minister, the Selection Committee comprises the Leader of the Opposition or the leader of the largest Opposition party in Lok Sabha, alongside a Cabinet Minister designated by the Prime Minister.
  • The Selection Committee is empowered to consider candidates outside the Search Committee's list.
  • Tenure and Terms:
  • The CEC and ECs continue to hold their positions for a six-year term or until reaching the age of 65, whichever comes earlier.
  • The Bill aligns their remuneration with that of the Cabinet Secretary.
  • This diverges from the current practice under the Election Commission (Conditions of Service of Election Commissioners and Transaction of Business) Act, 1991, which equates their salary with that of a Supreme Court judge. Despite the change, the monetary amount remains consistent.
  • Repealing the 1991 Act:
  • The bill revokes the Election Commission (Conditions of Service of Election Commissioners and Transaction of Business) Act, 1991, which hitherto guided the operations of the ECI.
  • The Bill mandates that the ECI's proceedings be conducted with unanimity whenever possible; in the case of divergent opinions, the majority's viewpoint prevails.

About Election Commission of India:

  • The Election Commission of India (ECI) is an autonomous constitutional authority responsible for administering Union and State election processes in India.
  • It was established in accordance with the Constitution on 25th January 1950 (celebrated as national voters' day). The secretariat of the commission is in New Delhi.
  • The body administers elections to the Lok Sabha, Rajya Sabha, and State Legislative Assemblies in India, and the offices of the President and Vice President in the country.
  • It is not concerned with the elections to panchayats and municipalities in the states. For this, the Constitution of India provides for a separate State Election Commission.
  • By Article 324 of the Constitution of India, it is vested with the power of conducting elections to Parliament, State Legislatures, Office of President and Vice-President of India.

Structure of ECI:

  • Initially, the commission had a single election commissioner. Yet, the Election Commissioner Amendment Act 1989 transformed it into a group with multiple members.
  • The Election Commission is made up of the Chief Election Commissioner (CEC) along with additional election commissioners, determined by the President as needed.
  • Currently, it comprises the CEC and two Election Commissioners.
  • On a state level, the Chief Electoral Officer, an IAS rank Officer, supports the election commission.

Appointment & Term of Commissioners:

  • The President designates the Chief Election Commissioner (CEC) and Election Commissioners.
  • Their service spans six years or until they reach 65 years of age, whichever comes first.
  • They are accorded equivalent status and entitlements to those enjoyed by Supreme Court (SC) Judges in India.

Removal:

  • They possess the option to resign at any point or may face premature removal.
  • In the case of the Chief Election Commissioner (CEC), dismissal can only occur through a procedure akin to the removal of a Supreme Court judge, executed by Parliament.

Limitations:

  • The Constitution doesn't outline the prerequisites (legal, educational, administrative, or judicial) for Election Commission members.
  • It doesn't define the duration of service for Election Commission members.
  • It doesn't prevent former election commissioners from securing subsequent government appointments.

Mains Question:

  • Analyze the constitutional mechanisms established to safeguard the autonomy and neutrality of the Election Commission of India. Discuss the constraints that can potentially influence the functioning of the Election Commission of India at the university level. (15M)

Why India Needs an Industrial Policy? (Indian Express)

  • 11 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

  • India's move to impose import limitations on personal computers, laptops, and a variety of commodities has sparked a discussion about the trajectory of the nation's industrial policy.
  • Detractors view these restrictions as reminiscent of a bygone era when the Indian economy was constrained by the license permit regime.

The Government's Directive Regarding Laptop Import Ban:

  • On August 3rd, the Union Government introduced measures to restrict the import of laptops, tablets, all-in-one personal computers, ultra-small computers, and servers, effective immediately.
  • Entities or businesses intending to import laptops and computers for sale within India will now require government permission or a license for their importation.
  • This directive was issued by the Directorate General of Foreign Trade (DGFT).
  • The restrictions have been enacted under HSN Code 8471, affecting seven categories of electronic devices.
  • The Harmonized System of Nomenclature (HSN) code is an organizational system utilized for tax-related product identification.
  • HSN Code 8471 is employed to categorize devices specifically designed for data processing functions.
  • However, due to issues arising at ports where customs officials were detaining shipments of the specified electronic goods, the DGFT opted to suspend the enforcement of this measure until November 1st, 2023."

Concerns Regarding the Laptop Import Restrictions:

  • These limitations have raised concerns about a potential regression of the Indian economy into the period characterized by the license permit system, during which discretionary and authoritarian bureaucratic control prevailed, sometimes accompanied by corruption.
  • During that era, citizens encountered scarcities, substandard products, or attempts to circumvent government regulations.
  • The manner in which the government introduced the import ban on laptops, subsequently revising the deadlines, has evoked familiar concerns about bureaucrats who seem to "act first and inquire later."
  • Nonetheless, proponents of the policy contend that its implementation was long overdue.

How these Restrictions are Different from Regulations in the 1960s-70s?

  • Shift in Circumstances
  • Indian industrial policy of the past yielded moderate outcomes, However, the historical context has undergone a transformation.
  • Factors such as energy availability, logistics, human capital, and global geopolitical dynamics are no longer as constricting for India as they once were.
  • The expanded market size, particularly in certain sectors, grants India greater negotiating power than in the past.
  • Enhancement of Government Capacity:
  • The current imposition of import restrictions is distinct due to the enhancement of government capacity, setting it apart from the circumstances of the 1960s.
  • Those earlier restrictions were significantly more extensive, governing the entire import and production landscape in a way that hindered domestic productive and allocative efficiencies.
  • Altered Objective:
  • Today's objective diverges from simply reducing import reliance; it aims to reshape the import structure to support India's journey towards self-reliance (Aatma Bharat).
  • If the government can effectively communicate and uphold this distinction, the nation may avoid reliving the challenges posed by prior industrial policies."

Importance of Instituting an Industrial Policy in India:

  • While India has witnessed the fruits of liberalization, the reality persists that the country struggled to cultivate a robust manufacturing foundation and experienced premature de-industrialization.
  • Across the globe, no nation has achieved industrialization solely through deregulation. An industrial policy is pivotal for orchestrating a fundamental reconfiguration of the economy's structure.
  • Strategically devised import restrictions can constitute an integral element of such a policy framework.
  • Given the contemporary global landscape, a robust industrial policy is imperative. Various countries are already adopting this approach, and considering the prevailing geopolitics and security concerns, it's crucial for India to formulate a comprehensive industrial policy and place a heightened emphasis on manufacturing."

Suggestions for Developing a Strong Industrial Policy:

  • Balancing Competition and Collaboration:
  • Advocates of an industrial policy assert that India should prioritize the fundamental attributes that enhance competitiveness within an economy.
  • Such a policy can engender favorable external effects, address coordination hurdles, and stimulate agglomeration advantages.
  • Shifting Away from Subsidies and Safeguards:
  • Despite increased state capacity, the dynamics of bureaucratic discretion must not be underestimated, particularly within a context where certain companies receive disproportionate state favoritism.
  • Furthermore, Indian states should progressively transition from reliance on subsidies and moderate safeguards.
  • Embracing Export-Oriented Strategies Over Import Substitution:
  • A noteworthy feature of successful Chinese and East Asian industrial policies was their emphasis on export-driven development.
  • India faces a dual challenge in this regard. Achieving export orientation necessitates an open global trade framework. Yet, global support for this system is waning.
  • India's effectiveness in advocating for an open trade system could be compromised if it resorts to protectionist measures.
  • Thus, the design of India's industrial policy should promote exports rather than replicate import substitution tactics.
  • Minimizing Spectacle
  •  
  • For instance, the current emphasis on the Micron deal, wherein the government contributes 70% of the investment, warrants consideration.
  • Simultaneously, it's crucial for the government to recognize that chip companies are relocating manufacturing to more expensive locales with fewer subsidies.

Moving forward, the government must undertake a meticulous assessment of the nation's unique conditions and capacities. Crafting an effective industrial policy for India involves ensuring that the advantages of laptops extend beyond a specific class.

Nonetheless, it's essential to maintain a perspective that prevents the discourse on industrial policy from being swayed by ostentatious displays, oversimplified theories, or deceptive historical parallels.

Resolution to Rename State as 'Keralam' Approved by Kerala Assembly (Indian Express)

  • 10 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

A resolution adopted by the Kerala Assembly calls upon the Central government to officially change the state's name to 'Keralam' in the Constitution and all official records.

What is the essence of the resolution?

  • The Kerala Assembly unanimously passed a resolution urging the Central government to officially change the name of the State from Kerala to Keralam.
  • The resolution highlights the linguistic aspect of our state's name, which is "Keralam" in Malayalam.
  • It underscores the historical significance of the formation of states based on language on November 1, 1956, a day also commemorated as Kerala's establishment day.
  • Throughout the freedom struggle and subsequent periods, there has been a fervent call for a united Kerala that embraces all Malayalam-speaking communities.
  • This sentiment has resonated strongly.
  • However, a discrepancy exists between the name of our state, as commonly used, and its representation in the first Schedule of the Constitution, where it is listed as "Kerala."
  • With unanimous consensus, this Assembly is making an earnest appeal to the Union Government. Under the provisions of Article 3 of the Constitution, it is requested that swift actions be taken to effectuate the change in the state's name to "Keralam."

The Origins of the Names of Kerala:

Kerala's Origin

  • The etymology of the name 'Kerala' has given rise to various theories.
  • The earliest historical inscription that mentions Kerala dates back to Emperor Ashoka's Rock Edict II from 257 BC.
  • This inscription makes reference to the local ruler as Keralaputra, signifying "son of Kerala," and also as "son of Chera," denoting the Chera dynasty.

The Origins of Keralam

  • In relation to 'Keralam,' scholars postulate that it might have its roots in the term 'Cheram.'
  • Experts have noted the resemblance between the word 'keram' and the Canarese (Kannada) rendition of cheram.
  • They have interpreted 'Keralam' as 'Cheram,' representing the expanse between Gokarnam and Kanyakumari.
  • The term's possible origin could be traced to the root 'cher,' implying a sense of connection or joining.
  • This connotation becomes evident in the compound term 'Cheralam,' where 'alam' signifies region or land.

Quest for the Contemporary State:

  • Throughout history, the population conversing in Malayalam found themselves under the dominion of diverse monarchs and princely domains within the vicinity.
  • The 1920s marked a significant turning point with the emergence of the Aikya Kerala (Unified Kerala) movement, propelling the discourse for an independent state designated for the Malayalam-speaking populace.
  • Central to its mission was the amalgamation of Malabar, Kochi, and Travancore into a singular territorial entity.

The state of Kerala after Independence:

  • The progression of Kerala post-Independence witnessed a pivotal transformation through the amalgamation and integration of princely realms.
  • An instrumental stride in the configuration of the modern Kerala state was the confluence of various princely states, culminating in a new identity.
  • The inaugural step in this direction occurred on July 1, 1949, as the territories of Travancore and Kochi were harmonized, giving rise to the entity known as the Travancore-Cochin State.
  • Subsequently, as the movement for linguistic-based state reorganization gained momentum, the State Reorganisation Commission of the Union Government played a crucial role. Their recommendations paved the way for the creation of the Kerala state.
  • Guided by Syed Fazl Ali, the Commission advocated the incorporation of the Malabar district and the Kasargod taluk into the state predominantly inhabited by Malayalam speakers.
  • The culmination of these efforts culminated in the formal establishment of the state of Kerala on November 1, 1956.
  • In Malayalam, this state found its appellation as "Keralam," while in English, it retained the name "Kerala."

The Process to Rename any State:

Constitutional Provision:

  • The power to alter a state's name lies with the Parliament.
  • Article 3 of the Constitution of India confers the authority upon the Parliament to modify the name, area, or boundaries of a state.

Proposal Initiation:

  • The renaming process can be initiated either by the Parliament or the state assembly.
  • The state assembly sends a proposal to the Central government in the form of a resolution.
  • For presenting the bill in Parliament, a recommendation from the President is essential.

Procedure:

  • In cases where the proposed change affects multiple states, the legislature of the impacted state must receive the bill.
  • Originally absent in the Constitution, the provision to forward the bill to the state legislature was introduced via the 5th Amendment Act of 1955.
  • The State Legislative Assembly has a designated period to offer its opinions on the bill.
  • While the suggestions of the State Legislature hold no enforceable power against the President or Parliament, they are a part of the deliberation process.
  • Parliament has the authority to disregard the state legislature's opinion.
  • After receiving the state legislative assembly's suggestions or when the stipulated timeframe lapses, the bill returns to Parliament for further deliberations.

Passing of the Bill:

  • The bill is sent to the President for approval.
  • Once the President grants approval, the bill transforms into law, effectuating the modification of the state's name.

Additional Institutions Involved:

  • The process involves securing No Objection Certificates (NOCs) from various bodies such as the Ministry of Railways, Intelligence Bureau, Department of Posts, Survey of India, and Registrar General of India.
  • Upon receiving NOCs from these agencies, the Union Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA) endorses the state's resolution.
  • This comprehensive procedure underscores the intricate steps and institutions entailed in the process of renaming a state, all governed by constitutional provisions and regulatory mechanisms.

Mains Question:

  • Elaborate on the constitutional provisions and intricate procedural steps entailed in the process of renaming a state in India. Discuss the roles played by the Parliament, state legislature, and other pertinent institutions in this multifaceted process. (15M)

Select Committee for Delhi Services Bill (The Hindu)

  • 09 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

  • Following complaints from a minimum of four Members of Parliament who expressed their objection to their names being added to a prospective Select Committee for the Delhi Services Bill without their prior consent, an important development unfolded.
  • The proposition for the Select Committee had been put forth by Raghav Chadha, a Member of Parliament representing the Aam Aadmi Party (AAP), within the Upper House. Consequently, in light of these concerns, the Deputy Chairman of the Rajya Sabha made an announcement about initiating an inquiry into the matter.

Select Committee Overview:

  • In India's Parliament, a diverse range of committees serves distinct functions.
  • Among these, 12 Standing Committees are permanent entities, their members nominated periodically by the Chairman.
  • Amit Shah's preference for the Privileges Committee to address the Raghav Chadha issue aligns with this category.
  • Additionally, there exist ad hoc or temporary committees established for specific purposes, such as the examination of specific Bills, and their dissolution upon fulfilling their role.
  • A Select Committee belongs to this transient category.

Select Committee Procedure:

  • Although transient, a Select Committee adheres to a defined procedure outlined in the Rules of Procedure.
  • According to Rule 125 of the Rajya Sabha Rules and Procedures, any member can propose an amendment, advocating Bill's referral to a Select Committee.
  • This motion can originate from the Bill's sponsoring member or any other parliamentarian.

How members are chosen for a Select Committee:

  • In accordance with the rules of the Rajya Sabha, Bills earmarked for Select Committees are accompanied by motions passed by the House, specifying the individuals designated for the Committee.
  • When a motion proposes Bill's referral to a Select Committee, the House is responsible for appointing the Committee members.
  • It is a foundational principle that no member can be included in a Select Committee unless they willingly participate.
  • The onus lies with the proposer of the motion to confirm the intended member's willingness to serve on the Committee. While rules mandate obtaining a member's consent before their inclusion, they do not explicitly address the collection of signatures.
  • The actual composition of a Select Committee is variable, differing across Committees.
  • In the context of Joint Committees, members are apportioned in a 1:2 ratio between the Rajya Sabha and the Lok Sabha.
  • The Chairman of the Committee is typically selected by the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha from among the Committee members.
  • Additionally, the member or Minister overseeing the Bill is usually included as a Committee member.

What is the functioning process of a Select Committee?

  • To commence proceedings, a minimum of one-third of the total committee members must be present, constituting a quorum.
  • In instances where votes are tied on a particular issue, the chairman (or another designated presiding individual) holds the authority for a decisive or casting vote.
  • For a focused examination of specific aspects linked to the Bill, a sub-committee may be established by a select committee.
  • The committee's chairperson will endorse the report, which can include dissenting opinions from any member.
  • Following endorsement, the report and any dissenting viewpoints will be submitted, printed, and circulated among all members of the Rajya Sabha."

What are the roles of a Select Committee?

  • The core responsibility of the Committee involves meticulously reviewing each clause within the Bill's text.
  • This is carried out to ensure that the Bill effectively captures the original intention and proposed objectives.
  • To facilitate this, the Committee can call upon experts, interested parties, and organizations for written input or oral testimonies.
  • Furthermore, the Committee possesses the authority to seek elucidation from government officials regarding the underlying policy of different provisions in the Bill, as well as to obtain necessary background information.
  • Upon collecting and analyzing the evidence, the Committee deliberates on the Bill's individual components and crafts its conclusions, potentially amending clauses as necessary.
  • Additionally, the Committee holds the prerogative to physically visit relevant institutions and organizations to gain firsthand insights into matters tied to the Bill."

What happens following the submission of a Select Committee's report?

  • The committee's report holds a suggestive character, allowing the government the flexibility to adopt or decline the recommendations presented.
  • Furthermore, a Select Committee has the option to present its revised iteration of the Bill.
  • Should this transpire, the minister responsible for the respective Bill can propose that the committee's version of the Bill be deliberated upon and approved within the legislative assembly."

Importance of Parliamentary Committees?

  • Expertise in Legislation:
  • Given that many Members of Parliament lack specialized knowledge in specific fields, relying on insights from experts and stakeholders is crucial for informed decision-making.
  • Parliamentary committees play a pivotal role in aiding MPs to access expertise and allocate sufficient time to thoroughly analyze issues.
  • Simulating Parliament's Functions:
  • These committees effectively emulate the functions of the larger parliamentary body.
  • Comprising MPs from various parties, they are elected using the single transferable vote method, reflecting the overall party distribution in Parliament.
  • Thorough Examination Tool:
  • Bills directed to these committees undergo meticulous scrutiny, with active engagement from external stakeholders, including the general public, to solicit diverse perspectives.
  • Government Oversight Mechanism:
  • Despite non-binding recommendations, committee reports serve as public records of inclusive consultations.
  • They compel the government to reevaluate contentious provisions, adding a degree of accountability.
  • Fostering Collaborative Discussions:
  • Conducted behind closed doors, committee meetings encourage collaborative discussions among MPs.
  • The absence of public scrutiny diminishes the need for grandstanding, enabling more productive exchanges."

Organ Shortage and Transplants in India (The Hindu)

  • 08 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

Around three lakh patients wait for organ donation in the country and the country’s increase in donors has not kept pace with demand; experts say country urgently needs to increase its deceased donation rate, and there should be greater awareness among ICU doctors and families on how one deceased donor can save several lives.

Key Data Highlights:

Health Ministry's Insights:

  • The count of donors, comprising both living and deceased, witnessed a growth from 6,916 in 2014 to approximately 16,041 in 2022.
  • Within the domain of deceased donors, the nation achieved notable milestones with 1,589 kidney transplants, 761 liver transplants, and 250 heart transplants during 2022.
  • A substantial progression was seen in kidney and pancreas transplants, ascending from merely three in 2014 to a significant 22 in 2022.
  • Analysis of the statistics reveals a compelling trend where approximately 70% to 75% of donors are female. The roles of wives, mothers, and sisters have prominently emerged as major sources of organ donation.

Global Perspective:

  • On a global scale, the reality remains that a mere 10% of individuals necessitating organ transplants are able to access them in a timely manner.
  • Noteworthy examples of more robust organ donation systems can be observed in countries such as Spain and the United States. These nations exhibit higher numbers, with 30 to 50 organ donations per million people, showcasing a commendable commitment to addressing the shortage of organs.

Current Scenario of Organ Donation and Transplantation in India:

  • The practice of organ transplants in India has witnessed a remarkable surge, growing by more than threefold, escalating from 4,990 instances in 2013 to an impressive 15,561 cases in 2022.
  • The foremost among organ transplants remains the kidney transplant, followed by liver, heart, lung, pancreas, and small bowel transplants, collectively contributing to the medical landscape.
  • The year 2022 stood out with the execution of nearly 12,791 living donor transplants and an additional 2,765 transplants from deceased donors.
  • Of note, a notable proportion of these transplants (14%) were sourced from deceased donors, underscoring the significant role of living donors, particularly in kidney and liver contributions.
  • In terms of geographic distribution, the organ donation dynamic is concentrated. In 2021, the bulk of deceased organ donations occurred within 15 specific states, with the top five states collectively accounting for an impressive 85% of the total contributions.

Why India Needs More Organ Donations?

  • India boasts the distinction of being the world's third-largest performer of transplants. However, the demand for organs significantly outstrips the supply of available transplants.
  • The surge in lifestyle-related illnesses is amplifying the call for organs, particularly for vital organs like hearts and lungs that are solely obtainable from deceased donors.
  • An alarming number of approximately 1.5 lakh individuals succumb to road traffic accidents each year in India. This presents an opportunity to potentially harness organs from these cases, contributing to a more robust supply.
  • Beyond saving lives, the practice of organ transplantation serves to alleviate the burden on healthcare systems. This includes a reduction in hospital stays, the need for repeat surgeries, and extended treatments.
  • India's existing organ donation rate stands at a modest 0.52 per million population, notably lower than the figure in countries like Spain, which boasts a rate of 49.6 per million.
  • One of the most compelling aspects of organ donation is its capacity to impact multiple lives simultaneously. A single donor can serve as a source of numerous organs and tissues, magnifying the potential to save and enhance multiple lives.

Issues, Challenges and Ethics in Organ Transplantation:

  • Lack of Public Awareness:
  • A prevailing challenge revolves around inadequate public awareness regarding the significance of organ donation and the subsequent transplantation process.
  • This lack of understanding contributes to a dearth of available donated organs.
  • Shortfall in Donors:
  • Despite heightened efforts in awareness campaigns, a shortage of willing organ donors persists due to factors such as religious beliefs and a lack of trust in the healthcare system.
  • Ethical and Legal Complexities:
  • The arena of organ donation faces intricate ethical and legal dilemmas. These encompass matters like consent, the fair allotment of organs, and equitable distribution, presenting multifaceted challenges.
  • Transportation and Preservation:
  • The preservation and transportation of organs demand specific conditions to maintain their transplant viability.
  • These logistical hurdles are especially pronounced for organs with limited shelf lives.
  • Medical Suitability Constraints:
  • The suitability of donated organs for transplantation can be impeded by medical conditions or other considerations.
  • This dynamic can impose restrictions on the available pool of organs for potential transplant recipients.
  • Financial Implications:
  • A significant challenge arises in the form of the associated costs linked with organ transplantation.
  • These financial burdens can potentially restrict access to treatment for certain patients, creating disparities in care.

What are the Government Steps Taken to Promote Organ Donation in the Country?

  • National Organ Donation Day:
  • Designating November 27 as National Organ Donation Day, the Indian government seeks to heighten public awareness about the significance of organ donation and encourage individuals to pledge their organs.
  • National Organ Transplant Programme (NOTP):
  • Launched in 2014, NOTP is a comprehensive endeavor.
  • It aims to create a national registry encompassing both organ donors and recipients, bolster the presence of organ transplant centers, and foster greater awareness about the critical nature of organ donation.
  • Deceased Organ Donation Program:
  • The Ministry of Health and Family Welfare introduced this program to actively encourage organ donations from individuals who have passed away.
  • Transplantation of Human Organs and Tissues Act (THOTA):
  • Instituted in 1994, THOTA serves as the framework regulating organ transplantation within India.
  • This legislative act also establishes the National Organ and Tissue Transplant Organization (NOTTO) and State Organ and Tissue Transplant Organizations (SOTTO).
  • Their roles encompass overseeing organ transplantation activities and donations.
  • Swasth Bharat Yatra:
  • Spearheaded by the government, this campaign is dedicated to promoting a health-conscious lifestyle, preventing lifestyle diseases, raising awareness about organ donation, and motivating individuals to pledge their organs.
  • National Organ and Tissue Transplant Registry:
  • Establishing a dedicated National Organ and Tissue Transplant Registry, India now maintains comprehensive records of organ donations and transplantations across the nation.
  • This database aids in formulating effective policies and strategies for fostering organ donation and transplantation.
  • Organ Retrieval Banking Organization:
  • Housed within the All India Institute of Medical Sciences (AIIMS) in New Delhi, this organization assumes responsibility for retrieving, preserving, and efficiently distributing organs for transplantation in the Delhi-NCR region.

Moving Ahead:

At present, India is witnessing an enhanced consciousness regarding organ donation, with a growing number of families expressing willingness to engage in this altruistic endeavor, as reported by medical professionals. In the journey forward, it is imperative to emphasize awareness, cultivate trust, and augment the cadre of medically proficient transplant coordinators. This collective effort holds the potential to amplify deceased donations significantly. In the broader spectrum, organ transplantation stands as a pivotal pillar in the medical domain. It not only bestows hope upon individuals grappling with organ failure but also elevates their quality of life, embodying a profound impact on healthcare.

Mains Question:

  • Discuss the impact of government initiatives like the National Organ Transplant Programme and the Deceased Organ Donation Program on addressing challenges and increasing awareness in organ transplantation in India. (15M)

Incremental injustice (The Hindu)

  • 07 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

Recently, the Varanasi District Court issued an order for the Archaeological Survey of India (ASI) to conduct a survey of the Gyanvapi mosque.

Background:

In 1984, around 558 Hindus assembled in Delhi to hold the first religious parliament. During this gathering, they made a unanimous decision to initiate a nationwide campaign for Hindus to assert their rights over the sacred shrines located in Varanasi, Mathura, and Ayodhya. The movement gained momentum after the Ram Janma Bhumi-Babri Masjid dispute in 1990. Although the initial call was to claim about 3000 mosques in the mentioned areas, Hindu religious groups focused their efforts on two particular mosques: (1) The Shahi Idgah mosque, situated adjacent to the Lord Krishna temple in Mathura, and (2) The Gyanvapi mosque, located next to the Kashi Vishwanath temple in Varanasi.

What is Gyanvapi Mosque Dispute?

Historical Background:

  • There is a prevailing belief that the Gyanvapi Mosque was constructed in 1669 under the rule of the Mughal Emperor Aurangzeb. The mosque is said to have been built on the site where the ancient Vishweshwar temple once stood.
  • According to Saqib Khan's book 'Yasir Alamgiri', it is mentioned that Aurangzeb ordered Governor Abul Hassan to demolish the Vishweshwar temple in 1669, paving the way for the construction of the Gyanvapi Mosque.

Judicial Intervention in the Gyanvapi Mosque Dispute:

  • The legal case pertaining to the Gyanvapi mosque dates back to 1991 when three individuals, including Pandit Somnath Vyas, a descendant of the Kashi Vishwanath temple priests, filed a lawsuit in the civil court of Varanasi. Their claim asserted that Aurangzeb had demolished the original Lord Vishweshwar temple and constructed a mosque in its place, urging that the land should be restored to them.
  • In 2021, five women lodged a petition in the same Varanasi court, seeking permission to worship at the temple of Mother Gauri. Consequently, the court appointed a commission to investigate the present status of the Makeup Gauri Temple.
  • As part of the commission's task, the court instructed the survey report to be documented through video-graphing, covering the idol of Makeup Gauri and the Gyanvapi complex.
  • This development sparked controversy as questions arose about the impartiality of the court-appointed commissioner representing the Muslim side in the survey process.

Arguments From Hindu Side:

  • Vijay Shankar Rastogi, representing the Hindu side, presented a map of the entire Gyanvapi complex as evidence in court.
  • The map indicates the presence of Hindu deities' temples beyond the mosque's entrance, along with the Vishweshwar temple, Gyankoop, the big Nandi, and the basement of the Vyas family.
  • There has been a contentious issue regarding the survey and videography of the basement in question.

Arguments From Muslim Side:

  • The Muslim side contends that the dispute cannot be adjudicated under the Religious Places Act of 1991.
  • According to Section 3 of the Places of Worship (Special Provisions) Act, 1991, it is forbidden to convert a place of worship, including its precincts, into a place of worship of a different religious denomination or a different class within the same religious denomination.
  • Section 4(2) of the Act stipulates that all ongoing litigations, appeals, or other proceedings concerning the alteration of the place of worship (which were pending until August 15, 1947) shall be terminated after the enactment of this Act, and no new actions can be initiated on such cases.
  • However, legal action can be pursued if the alteration in the nature of the place of worship occurred after the cut-off date of August 15, 1947 (after the act came into force).
  • For instance, the disputed site of Ayodhya (Ram Janmabhoomi-Babri Masjid) was exempted from the Act.

About Archaeological Survey of India (ASI):

  • The Archaeological Survey of India (ASI) is a government agency responsible for preserving, conserving, and excavating archaeological sites and monuments in India.
  • It was founded in 1861 and established by ‘Alexander Cunningham
  • It operates under the Ministry of Culture and it’s HQ is in Delhi.
  • ASI's main objective is to protect and maintain India's rich cultural heritage, including ancient temples, forts, caves, sculptures, and archaeological remains.
  • The organization conducts excavations and research to uncover historical insights and restore significant monuments to their original state.
  • ASI plays a crucial role in promoting tourism and fostering a deeper understanding of India's history and cultural diversity.
  • Its efforts contribute significantly to preserving invaluable historical treasures for future generations.
  • It also regulates the Antiquities and Art Treasure Act, of 1972.

Places of Worship (Special Provisions) Act, 1991:

The Act prohibits converting any place of worship and ensures the maintenance of its religious character as it existed on August 15, 1947. It applies to the entire India, except Jammu and Kashmir.

  • Bar of Conversion of Places of Worship:
  • No person can convert any place of worship or its religious denomination into another religious sect or section of the same denomination.
  • Declaration on Religious Character and Jurisdiction Bar:
  • The religious character of a place of worship on August 15, 1947, remains unchanged.
  • Pending suits or proceedings related to religious conversion shall abate, and no new suits can be filed after the Act's commencement.
  • Exceptions include ancient and historical monuments, settled disputes, conversions before the Act, and barred challenges under limitations.
  • Exemption for Ram Janma Bhumi-Babri Masjid:
  • The Act does not apply to the Ram Janma Bhumi-Babri Masjid in Ayodhya, Uttar Pradesh, and related suits or proceedings.
  • Punishment under the Act:
  • Violation of Section 3 results in imprisonment up to three years and a fine.
  • Attempting or abetting the offence carries similar penalties as provided under relevant IPC sections."

Ujwal DISCOM Assurance Yojana (UDAY) (Indian Express)

  • 05 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

The Comptroller and Auditor General of India (CAG) in its report on Compliance Audit for the year ended March 2021 said that the main objective of the financial and operational turnaround of the Maharashtra State Electricity Distribution Company (MSEDCL) was not achieved in spite of implementing Ujwal DISCOM Assurance Yojana (UDAY) scheme.

What was the News Regarding CAG's Report for Ujwal DISCOM Assurance Yojana (UDAY) scheme?

  • MSEDCL failed to reach its targets of reducing AT&C (Aggregate Technical and Commercial) losses to the desired level.
  • On the contrary, AT&C losses for MSEDCL increased from 16.94% in 2018-19 to 20.73% in 2020-21.
  • The primary reasons for this increase were poor collection, especially from agricultural consumers and various State Government departments.
  • Despite implementing the UDAY scheme, the main objectives of achieving financial and operational turnaround for MahaVitaran were not accomplished.
  • The Government of Maharashtra should prioritize clearing all electricity dues owed by departments and local bodies to MahaVitaran within a specified timeframe.
  • To improve the situation, MahaVitaran should swiftly complete DT (Direct Connected) metering and feeder segregation, aiming to reduce AT&C losses to 15% by enhancing billing and collection efficiency.

About UDAY Scheme:

  • The UDAY Scheme, introduced by the Government of India's Ministry of Power in 2015, aims to assist financially struggling Power Distribution Companies (DISCOMs) owned by state governments.
  • It serves as a debt restructuring plan, enhancing the operational efficiency of DISCOMs.
  • State participation in UDAY is optional.
  • States joining the scheme agree to take on 75% of their respective DISCOMs' debts, while the remaining 25% is converted into bonds issued to the DISCOMs.
  • As an incentive, participating states receive additional priority funding for various schemes, such as Deen Dayal Upadhyaya Gram Jyoti Yojana (DDUGJY) and Integrated Power Development Scheme (IPDS).
  • The primary goal of UDAY is to provide accessible and affordable 24x7 electricity to all citizens.
  • It targets revenue-side and cost-side efficiency, initiating reforms in power generation, transmission, distribution, coal, and energy efficiency.
  • Initially planned for four years until 2019, the scheme offered a revival package for electricity distribution companies.
  • Its success led to the introduction of 'UDAY 2.0' under the Union Budget 2020-21 to further build upon its achievements.

The Primary Objectives of the UDAY Scheme are as follows:

  • AT&C Loss Reduction: Target to decrease the aggregate technical & commercial (AT&C) losses from approximately 22% to 15% by the year 2018-19.
  • Enhanced Operational Efficiency: Achieve improved operational efficiency through mandatory smart metering, transformer upgrades, and meter enhancements.
  • Energy Efficiency Measures: Implement energy efficiency measures, including the promotion of energy-efficient LED bulbs and other energy-saving initiatives.
  • Power Sector Cost Reduction: Reduce power costs, interest burden, and power losses in the distribution sector.
  • State Participation Encouragement: Encourage active participation of states in the scheme by offering incentives to performing states.

Additionally, the UDAY Scheme offers the following advantages:

  • Increased Domestic Coal Supply: Ensure increased supply of domestic coal to power generation companies.
  • Rationalized Coal Prices: Implement measures to rationalize coal prices for improved affordability.
  • Faster Interstate Transmission Lines: Expedite the completion of interstate transmission lines for enhanced power distribution.
  • Transparent Competitive Bidding: Facilitate power purchase through transparent competitive bidding processes.
  • Overall, the UDAY Scheme seeks to address various aspects of the power sector to enhance efficiency, reduce losses, and promote sustainable growth in the energy distribution and consumption landscape.

What is the Need for UDAY Scheme?

  • Financial Strain: DISCOMs in India are burdened with losses and substantial outstanding debt due to supplying electricity at tariffs below the cost of production.
  • Affordability and Quality of Life: The financial distress of DISCOMs hampers their ability to provide adequate power at affordable rates, impacting the quality of life for citizens and hindering overall economic growth and development.
  • Distribution Inefficiencies: Inefficient power distribution, including significant transmission and distribution losses, further exacerbates the financial challenges faced by DISCOMs, leading to heavy borrowing from banks to sustain their operations.
  • Mounting Debts and Losses: Accumulated losses and a massive debt burden of approximately Rs. 2.75 lakh crore from 2011-12 to 2014-15 necessitated a government intervention to develop a financial scheme that would assist DISCOMs and address their transmission losses.

The Challenges Confronting the UDAY Scheme are as follows:

  • Persistently High AT&C Losses: Some states continue to grapple with high AT&C losses, with certain regions reporting losses exceeding 40%. Only a limited number of states, such as TN, Kerala, Gujarat, etc., have managed to reduce losses to less than 15%.
  • Impact of Rising Renewable Energy (RE) Share: The increasing penetration of renewable energy in the distribution system is displacing low-cost coal, leading to a rise in the average cost of supply for DISCOMs.
  • Unprofitable Bonds: UDAY bonds issued have not yielded substantial profits, resulting in considerable losses of up to 6,000 crores for banks and financial institutions that provided the funds.
  • Strained State Finances: Placing the responsibility on states to handle the situation has added pressure to their finances, further straining their financial stability.

The Accomplishments of the UDAY Scheme are as follows:

  • Extensive State Participation: The UDAY Scheme witnessed significant participation from numerous states, resulting in improved liquidity conditions for DISCOMs and enhanced power supply.
  • Reduction in AT&C Losses: Participating states successfully achieved a reduction in aggregate technical & commercial (AT&C) losses or distribution losses, contributing to the overall efficiency improvement in the power sector.

Mains Question:

  • Assess the UDAY Scheme's impact on India's power sector reforms, considering challenges like high AT&C losses and increasing renewable energy share. Recommend strategies to address these issues. (15M)

India's Digital Personal Data Protection Bill 2023 (TOI)

  • 04 Aug 2023
  •  
  • The central government will notify countries where data fiduciaries may transfer personal data.
  • Such transfers will be subject to prescribed terms and conditions.
  • Exemptions:
  • Certain specified cases will be exempt from certain rights of data principals and obligations of data fiduciaries, excluding data security. These cases include:
  • Prevention and investigation of offenses.
  • Enforcement of legal rights or claims.
  • The central government may, through notification, exempt certain activities from Bill's application, such as
  • Processing by government entities for national security and public order.
  • Data processing for research, archiving, or statistical purposes.
  • Data Protection Board of India:
  • The central government will establish the Data Protection Board of India.
  • Key functions of the Board include:
  • Monitoring compliance and imposing penalties.
  • Directing data fiduciaries to take necessary measures in the event of a data breach.
  • Addressing grievances made by affected individuals.
  • Penalties:
  • The Bill outlines penalties for various offenses, including
  • Fines of up to Rs 200 crore for non-compliance with obligations related to children's data.
  • Fines of up to Rs 250 crore for failure to implement adequate security measures to prevent data breaches.

Importance of the Digital Personal Data Protection Bill, 2023:

  • The Digital Personal Data Protection Bill 2023 holds significant value as it aims to ensure the safety and privacy of users’ personal data while granting them greater control over its portability. The bill sets forth stringent measures and norms that will hold big corporations and consumers accountable, imposing substantial fines on those who fail to comply.
  • The primary objective of the bill is to enhance the accountability of entities, including internet companies, mobile apps, and businesses, in their collection, storage, and processing of citizens' data, safeguarding the citizens' "Right to Privacy." Once approved, various public and private entities will be obligated to obtain explicit consent from users before collecting and processing their data.
  • This landmark legislation signifies a major step towards valuing and protecting the privacy of each consumer, ensuring that their personal data is handled with utmost care and responsibility, creating a safer and more secure digital environment for all.

Concerns regarding the Digital Personal Data Protection Bill, 2023, include several contentious issues:

  • The government and its agencies are granted wide-ranging exemptions.
  • The powers of the data protection board might be diluted.
  • The proposed amendment to the Right to Information Act, of 2005, is causing worries, particularly due to the removal of the public interest caveat that could restrict sharing of government officials' personal information.
  • The bill overrides Section 43A of the Information Technology Act, 2000, which mandates compensation for mishandling user data by companies. The new compensation mechanism has been questioned, as it may impact users' ability to seek adequate redress.
  • Addressing these concerns is essential to ensure a comprehensive and balanced approach to safeguarding personal data in the digital realm.

What are Data Privacy Regulations in Other Countries?

  • Approximately 70% of countries worldwide have implemented data protection legislation, as reported by the United Nations trade agency UNCTAD.
  • The EU's General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), enforced in 2018, is considered the most stringent privacy and security law globally and serves as a benchmark for data protection regulations.
  • Several countries, such as China and Vietnam, have recently strengthened their laws concerning the cross-border transfer of personal data to enhance data privacy.
  • In 2018, Australia passed a bill granting police access to encrypted data.

In conclusion, the Digital Personal Data Protection Bill, 2023, offers extensive rights to individuals, granting them enhanced visibility, awareness, decision-making autonomy, and control over their data. It imposes strict obligations on companies to adhere to individual rights and establishes robust redressal mechanisms, backed by significant penalties for non-compliance.

Moreover, the Bill reinforces the landmark judgment of the Supreme Court in the case of Justice K. S. Puttaswamy (Retd) Vs Union of India (2017). In this judgment, a nine-judge bench unanimously recognized the constitutionally protected fundamental right to privacy for Indians, affirming that privacy is an intrinsic aspect of life and liberty under Article 21 of the Constitution. The Digital Personal Data Protection Bill, 2023, is a crucial step towards upholding this fundamental right and ensuring better protection of personal data in the digital age.

Mains Question:

  • Examine the provisions and significance of the Digital Personal Data Protection Bill, 2023, comparing it to global data privacy regulations and its alignment with the Indian Supreme Court's right to privacy ruling. (15M)

India is in Dire need of Police Reforms (LiveMint)

  • 03 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

The outbreak of communal violence in the Delhi region raises concerns over the role of law enforcement; police forces need structural autonomy and revised incentives.

About Police and Policing Framework in India:

Police forces play a crucial role in upholding and enforcing laws, investigating crimes, and providing security to the nation's people. Given India's large population, well-equipped police forces with adequate personnel, weaponry, forensic, communication, and transport support are essential for effective performance.

The existing legal and institutional framework for police matters in India was inherited from the British, but it lacks accountability in establishing a responsible police force. Despite multiple reform proposals acknowledged by the Government of India and the Supreme Court, comprehensive implementation remains elusive. Consequently, India must revise the legal and institutional framework to advance towards smart policing.

Constitutional and Legal Provisions:

  • As per the Constitution of India, 'Police' and 'Public Order' fall under state subjects in the Seventh Schedule, granting each state its own police force.
  • The central government is also permitted to maintain its police forces to assist states in maintaining law and order.
  • The foundational framework for policing in India was established through the Police Act, of 1861, during the pre-independence era.
  • Additionally, several other laws and regulations, such as the Criminal Procedure Code (CrPC), Indian Penal Code (IPC), Evidence Act, and state-specific laws, govern the functioning of the police in India.

Issues and challenges in Police Forces:

  • Colonial Legacy: The current police system in India is still rooted in colonial-era laws, with past misuse of police as a tool to suppress dissent, which sometimes continues in the present government.
  • Shortage of Police Personnel: Despite a sanctioned strength of 181 police per lakh persons in 2016, the actual strength was only 137 police, well below the United Nations' recommended standard of 222 police per lakh persons, leading to overburdened police personnel.
  • Custodial Death: Instances of custodial death due to torture or pressure in police/judicial custody remain a concern, despite the Supreme Court's guidelines against it.
  • Inadequate Infrastructure: Modern policing requires robust communication support, modern weapons, and high mobility, but funds allocated for police infrastructure often face underutilization.
  • Lack of Torture Law: While India has signed the "United Nations Convention Against Torture," a specific domestic law against torture is yet to be enacted.
  • Political Interference: Political interference hampers police officers' ability to perform their duties effectively, with insufficient tenure and posting security for higher-ranking officers.
  • Promotion and Working Conditions: Qualifications and training for police personnel, especially at lower levels, need improvement. Verbal abuse from superiors and inhumane working conditions for lower ranks impact their relationship with the public negatively.

Significance of Police Reforms:

  • Police-Population Ratio: India's low ratio of 120 police per 100,000 people, compared to the global average of 270, results in inadequately equipped and politically oriented police, posing a security challenge for its citizens.
  • Tackling Corruption: A significant rise in vigilance inquiries against police personnel in 2016 and a decrease in corruption from 66% (2014) to 34% (2015) highlight the need for reforms to address corruption within the police force.
  • Adapting to Changing Crime Patterns: Evolving social and technological changes, driven by the internet and social media, have transformed crime, necessitating reforms to effectively combat lawlessness and global terrorism.
  • Ensuring Inclusivity: Underrepresentation of women and marginalized castes can lead to insensitivity towards these groups, highlighting the importance of reforms to promote inclusivity within the police force.
  • Addressing Caste-Based Violence: Reforms are crucial to tackling escalating violence arising from caste conflicts, including recent Dalit uprisings and farmers' issues across the country.

Various Committees for Police Reforms:

  • Gore Committee on Police Training (1971-73): Reviewed police training from constabulary to IPS officers.
  • National Police Commission (1977): Produced eight Reports on various aspects of police administration.
  • Ribeiro Committee (1998): Recommended setting up Police Performance and Accountability Commissions at the state level and a District Complaints Authority, and replacing the Police Act, of 1861.
  • Padmanabhaiah Committee (2000): Studied police force recruitment, training, duties, investigations, and prosecution.
  • Soli Sorabjee Committee (2005).
  • Vohra Committee Report: Exposed the nexus between criminals, politicians, and government officials, suggesting the establishment of an institution to address the issue.

Way Forward for Police Reforms: Seven Supreme Court Directives

  • Curbing Political Control: Ensure state governments do not exert undue influence or pressure on the police.
  • Merit-Based Appointments: Implement a transparent and merit-based process for appointing the Director-General of Police, ensuring a minimum tenure of 2 years.
  • Tenure Stability: Provide a minimum tenure of 2 years to police officers handling operational duties, including district Superintendents of Police and Station House Officers.
  • Separation of Functions: Separate the roles of investigation and law enforcement to enhance efficiency and transparency.
  • Police Establishment Board: Establish a Police Establishment Board to address transfers, postings, promotions, and service-related matters for officers up to the rank of Deputy Superintendent of Police.
  • State and District Police Complaints Authority: Set up independent Police Complaints Authorities at the state and district levels to address serious misconduct complaints against police officers.
  • National Security Commission: Establish a National Security Commission at the union level to facilitate the selection and placement of chiefs of Central Police Organizations with a minimum tenure of 2 years.

Preserving tribal culture: Odisha’s Special Development Councils model is worth emulating (The Hindu)

  • 02 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

In Odisha's development model driven by the 5T principles (transparency, technology, teamwork, time limit, and transformation), the vision of inclusive growth and community-led development goes beyond being a mere idea; it stands as an actionable strategy with tangible outcomes.

Tribal population in India:

  • India encompasses a significant tribal population of 8.6%, possessing a vast repository of indigenous knowledge that holds the potential to offer sustainable solutions through recognition, adoption, and integration into mainstream practices.
  • As per Article 342 of the Indian Constitution, the President has the authority to specify, with respect to any State or Union territory, the tribes, tribal communities, parts of, or groups within tribes or tribal communities as Scheduled Tribes.

Tribal Culture: A Glimpse

  • Communal Bond: Many tribal communities in India embrace a strong sense of communal living, where resources are shared, and decisions are collectively made within close-knit communities.
  • Connection with Nature: Tribals deeply connect with nature, embracing traditional beliefs and practices centered around forests and animals.
  • Self-Sufficiency: A tribe embodies self-reliance, forming relatively closed societies where their self-sufficiency pursuits define their openness to the outside world.
  • Spiritual Traditions: Tribals nurture distinct spiritual beliefs, often venerating ancestors, nature spirits, or deities, adding uniqueness to their cultural tapestry.
  • Expressive Artistry: Tribals are celebrated for their exquisite art forms, such as pottery, weaving, and jewelry making. These crafts hold spiritual and cultural significance, passing down through generations.

Tribal Lifestyle and Sustainable Development:

  • Harmony with Nature: The tribal lifestyle upholds profound respect for the natural environment, incorporating sustainable practices like using natural materials for housing, food, and medicine, and living in sync with nature's cycles.
  • Community-Centric Decision-Making: Their collective decision-making process prioritizes the needs of the entire community, ensuring sustainable and equitable choices.
  • Biodiversity Preservation: Tribals actively promote biodiversity by employing traditional agricultural techniques like intercropping and seed saving, as well as safeguarding sacred sites vital for biodiversity conservation.
  • Resource Conservation: Sustainable practices involve judicious resource usage, such as rotational farming and allowing forests to regenerate before harvesting timber, ensuring their long-term availability.
  • Intergenerational Knowledge Transfer: Passing down knowledge to future generations includes traditional wisdom about the natural environment and sustainable resource management.
  • Water Resource Protection: Tribal communities have devised practices to safeguard water resources, guaranteeing their availability for future generations while reducing greenhouse gas emissions.
  • Regenerative Agriculture: For centuries, tribal communities have practiced regenerative agriculture, incorporating crop rotation, intercropping, and organic matter to enrich soils and sequester carbon, contributing to climate change mitigation.
  • Embracing Renewable Energy: Traditional reliance on renewable energy sources like wind, solar, and hydropower offers a model for expanding and modernizing clean energy solutions for broader communities.

Challenges Confronting Tribal Lifestyles:

  • Discrimination: Tribal communities frequently encounter discrimination and bias from the dominant society, leading to restricted access to education, healthcare, and essential services.
  • Land Rights: Displacement from ancestral lands due to industrialization and mining has led to the loss of cultural identity and socio-economic marginalization among tribal communities.
  • Climate Change and Environmental Degradation: Adverse effects of climate change, such as altered rainfall patterns, more frequent natural disasters, biodiversity loss, deforestation, pollution, and habitat destruction, have severely impacted their traditional livelihoods and ways of life.
  • Socioeconomic Marginalization: Limited access to education, healthcare, and economic opportunities has resulted in poverty and social exclusion for many tribal communities.
  • Lack of Political Representation: Tribal communities often lack political representation, depriving them of a voice in decision-making processes that directly influence their lives.
  • Cultural Assimilation: Pressures to conform to the dominant culture impose a risk of losing traditional knowledge, language, and cultural practices within many tribal communities.

What is Odisha's Special Development Councils (SDCs) Initiative?

  • In a momentous stride towards preserving, promoting, and celebrating tribal culture while advancing the trajectory of development, the Odisha government introduced the Special Development Councils (SDCs) initiative in 2017.
  • The primary objective is to safeguard the rich culture and heritage of 62 tribes in the State under a unified approach while ensuring continued economic progress in the regions.
  • Originally encompassing 9 tribal-dominated districts and benefiting 60 lakh tribal households across 117 blocks, the initiative has now expanded to cover 23 districts, extending its benefits to over 84 lakh tribal individuals.

Government Initiatives for Tribal Culture Conservation:

  • National Scheduled Tribes Finance and Development Corporation (NSTFDC): Established in 2001 under the Ministry of Tribal Affairs, NSTFDC aims to uplift Scheduled Tribes economically through concessional financial assistance under various schemes.
  • TRIFED's Tribal Initiatives: The government plans to establish 50,000 Van Dhan Vikas Kendras and 3,000 Haat Bazaars, fostering economic opportunities for tribal populations.
  • Central Sector Scheme: Supporting Institutional Development & Marketing of Tribal Products/Produce.
  • Centrally Sponsored Scheme: Ensuring a sustainable mechanism for Marketing Minor Forest Produce (MFP) through Minimum Support Price (MSP) and developing value chains, providing social safety for MFP gatherers.
  • Pradhan Mantri Van Dhan Yojana: A market-linked tribal entrepreneurship development program promoting the formation and strengthening of Tribal Producer Companies through clusters of tribal Self Help Groups (SHGs).
  • Scholarships: Government-funded scholarships for pre-matric, post-matric, and overseas education, facilitating educational access for tribal students.
  • Support to NSTFDC: Assistance to the National Scheduled Tribes Finance and Development Corporation for further empowerment initiatives.
  • Development of Particularly Vulnerable Tribal Groups (PVTGs): Comprehensive support encompassing housing, land distribution, agricultural and animal husbandry development, link road construction, and more.
  • Vocational Training in Tribal Areas: Focused on enhancing the skills of ST youth for diverse job opportunities and self-employment, elevating their socio-economic status.

Mains Question:

  • Examine the challenges faced by tribal lifestyles and evaluate the effectiveness of government initiatives for tribal culture conservation in improving socio-economic conditions and preserving cultural heritage among tribals. (15M)

The Forest (Conservation) Amendment Bill, 2023 (The Hindu)

  • 28 Jul 2023

Why in the News?

Amidst pandemonium, the Lok Sabha passed the Forest Conservation (Amendment) Bill on July 26, without any changes from the version first introduced on March 29. The contentious Bill was introduced to amend the Forest Conservation Act, 1980.

Context:

  • The Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980, was enacted to prevent large-scale deforestation and mandates central government approval for diverting forest land for non-forest purposes.
  • The pressure on forest land has increased due to various factors like industry demands, agriculture, and the need for forest produce, as noted by the Standing Committee on Science and Technology, Environment, and Forests (2019).
  • The Forest (Conservation) Amendment Bill alters the criteria for including and excluding forest land from the Act's scope, presenting modifications to address the evolving challenges faced in forest conservation.

What is The Forest (Conservation) Act 1980?

  • The Forest (Conservation) Act of 1980 was implemented to safeguard India's forest land from unauthorized encroachments for non-forestry activities.
  • It grants the Central government the authority to demand appropriate compensation when forest land is diverted for non-forestry purposes.
  • Furthermore, the Act extends its scope to encompass areas not officially classified as "forest" in State or Central government records.

Need for the recent amendments:

  • The process of obtaining forest-clearance approval in India is challenging, involving significant delays and potential corruption.
  • Inconsistent land records add to the complexity, as parcels marked as forests in one record may have different classifications elsewhere.
  • A court order inadvertently discouraged states from reclassifying forests, complicating matters further.
  • The amendments aim to eliminate ambiguities and provide clear guidelines for the Act's application to different types of lands.

Key Features of the Forest (Conservation) Amendment Bill, 2023:

  • Land under the Act:
  • The Bill includes two categories of land under its purview, including officially declared forest land and land notified as a forest after October 25, 1980.
  • Exemptions:
  • Certain land types, such as forest land along railways or public roads maintained by the government, are exempted from the Act's provisions.
  • Assignment/Leasing of Forest Land:
  • Prior approval of the central government is required for assigning forest land to any entity, including those owned and controlled by the government, with specific terms and conditions.
  • Permitted Activities:
  • The Bill expands the list of activities excluded from non-forest purposes, including zoos, ecotourism facilities, silvicultural operations, and others specified by the central government.
  • Power to Issue Directions:
  • The central government may issue implementation directions to any recognized authority or organization under the central, state, or union territory.

Upsides of the Forest Amendment Bill:

  • Certain amendments outline exclusions where the Act won't apply.
  • Other amendments promote plantation cultivation on non-forest land, potentially increasing tree cover, acting as a carbon sink, and supporting India's emissions reduction goals.
  • The bill would lift restrictions on infrastructure development for national security and livelihood opportunities for forest-adjacent communities.

Environmentalists' Concerns with the Forest Amendment Bill:

  • Changing the Act's name to Van (Sanrakshan Evam Samvardhan) Adhiniyam raises confusion.
  • Reclassifying forest areas may invalidate past judgments and reduce protection for vast forest tracts.
  • The Bill doesn't consider the real scenario of deforestation and its impact on ecological functions.
  • Exemptions in border areas may hinder the rights of forest-dwelling tribes and reduce the necessity of forest clearances.
  • The Bill was referred to a joint committee instead of the standing committee, raising concerns about the potential lack of scrutiny.

Government's Intention with the Forest Amendment Bill:

  • The government sees this as a crucial opportunity to address a 27-year-old policy deadlock that hinders growth and employment while not effectively conserving forests.
  • The amendments are necessary to align with India's evolving ecological, strategic, and economic aspirations. They aim to:
  • Support India's objective of increasing forest and tree cover to a third of its land area.
  • Help achieve Net Zero emissions by 2070 and enhance forest carbon stocks through sustainable development.
  • Create a carbon sink of 2.5-3 billion tonnes of CO2-equivalent by 2030 under the Nationally Determined Contribution targets.
  • Enable the act to address emerging ecological challenges related to forest conservation, restoration, compensatory mechanisms, and mitigation measures.

Striking a Balance between Forest Conservation and Economic Activities:

  • The 1980 Act aimed to combat deforestation, necessitating central government approval for diverting forest land for non-forest purposes. Additionally, only certain conservation and wildlife management activities were allowed without prior approval.
  • The Bill introduces new activities like silvicultural operations, safaris, and eco-tourism facilities to this list. It also permits certain surveys without central government approval.
  • These activities can contribute to economic development and align with national priorities such as energy security and industrial growth, especially in cases like mineral prospecting.
  • However, achieving a balance between economic benefits and forest conservation is crucial. The shift from case-by-case examination by the central government to a blanket exemption raises questions about the mechanism for striking this balance.

The Forest (Conservation) Amendment Bill, 2023, warrants meticulous examination to reconcile the noble aspirations outlined in its Preamble with the possible detrimental impact of its operative provisions. An inclusive approach encompassing expanded forest definitions, safeguards for delicate ecosystems, and active involvement of forest communities is imperative. Sustainable development should not entail forest degradation, but instead, harmonize efforts to safeguard India's natural legacy for generations to come. Responsible and holistic conservation endeavors are vital to fulfilling India's net-zero carbon commitments and preserving its invaluable ecosystems.

Mains Question:

  • Evaluate the Forest (Conservation) Amendment Bill, 2023, considering its impact on forest preservation, sustainability, and environmental concerns. Suggest measures for balancing economic activities with responsible forest conservation to achieve net-zero carbon commitments. (15 M)

Gaganyaan Human Spaceflight Mission (The Hindu)

  • 27 Jul 2023

Why in the News?

Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) successfully carried out two more hot tests on the Gaganyaan Service Module Propulsion System (SMPS) at ISRO Propulsion Complex (IPRC), Mahendragiri (Tirunelveli District), Tamil Nadu.

About Gaganyaan Mission:

  • The Gaganyaan program is an indigenous manned mission aiming to send Indian astronauts to space.
  • As part of the Indian Human Spaceflight Programme, this Indian crewed orbital spacecraft plans to carry 3 astronauts to space by the end of 2023 or in 2024.
  • Upon its successful execution, India will become the 4th nation after US, Russia and China to achieve a Human Spaceflight Mission.
  • It is launched by ISRO's Geosynchronous Satellite Launch Vehicle GSLV Mk III (3 stages heavy-lift vehicle).

 What is the Significance of Gaganyaan Mission for India:

  • Self-reliance and Make in India: The Gaganyaan mission contributes to India's aspiration of achieving self-reliance by boosting the Make in India initiative, reducing reliance on external support for satellite launches.
  • Advancing R&D and Robotics: The mission propels scientific and technological research and development, especially in space exploration, facilitating India's long-term and cost-effective plans for robotic and human exploration beyond the solar system.
  • Addressing Regional Demands: Gaganyaan's focus on regional requirements becomes essential, given the limited availability of International Space Stations (ISS) worldwide, making it a relevant initiative for regional space exploration.
  • Strengthening International Ties: By promoting collaborative and peaceful endeavors, the Gaganyaan mission fosters international partnerships and contributes to global security.
  • Boost to Academic Organizations: The Gaganyaan Programme is a collective national endeavor, fostering active involvement from academia and National Agencies. It will establish an extensive framework for collaboration, uniting ISRO, academia, industry, national agencies, and other scientific organizations in a collaborative effort.
  • Elevated Prestige: Gaganyaan's successful mission will position India as the 4th country to achieve human spaceflight, elevating the nation's prestige on the global stage. Also, it will solidify India's significant role as a key player in the space industry.

Challenges in the Mission:

  • Launch Reliability: The GSLV Mk III requires significant modifications to meet human-rated and fail-safe criteria, with the challenge of achieving a reliability of 98% or higher, posing a daunting task.
  • Crew Escape System: Developing a reliable crew escape system is crucial to prepare for emergencies from the launch phase onwards. The Environmental Control & Life Support System (ELCSS), space suit, and crew support systems are still in the developmental stage.
  • Astronaut Training: India lacks facilities for comprehensive training, including centrifuges to simulate g-forces and aircraft for zero-gravity simulations, posing a hurdle in preparing astronauts adequately.
  • Threat of Space Debris: The increasing threat of space debris in low earth orbits raises concerns about potential collisions with small debris, leading to cabin depressurization in the crew module.
  • Financial Implications: Human space flight missions are not one-time investments but an ongoing pursuit with national benefits, raising financial concerns regarding long-term funding requirements.

Problems Faced by Gaganyaan Astronauts:

  • Environmental Hazards: Astronauts encounter radiation risks and navigate a hostile space environment devoid of gravity and atmosphere.
  • Artificial Atmosphere: Two primary options for creating a suitable atmosphere are pure oxygen or a combination of oxygen and an inert gas like nitrogen, helium, or argon.
  • Medical Issues: Microgravity can impact hand-eye and head-eye coordination, orientation, vision, muscle strength, aerobic capacity, etc. Additionally, isolation and reliance on limited resources may lead to behavioral issues such as depression, cabin fever, fatigue, sleep disorders, and psychiatric disorders.
  • Aerospace Technology Challenges: Space travel demands significantly higher speeds than regular air travel, with rockets accelerating to approximately 25,000 km per hour within minutes. Launch, pre-launch, and post-launch periods pose potential risks, including rocket malfunctions.

   Way Forward for India's Space Programme:

  • Private Sector Involvement: Encouraging the participation of the private sector in supporting ISRO and developing critical space technologies is vital.
  • Promoting Youth Engagement: Initiating campaigns and media outreach to stimulate the interest of young individuals in space activities will help nurture future talent.
  • Continued Government Support: The government should persist in its encouragement and support of ISRO's endeavors, while also engaging the private sector in space activities.

Pursuing a manned space programme becomes the logical progression for India. Gaganyaan's success will elevate India to the elite club of space superpowers and pave the way for developing its own space station. Overcoming technological challenges is crucial for ensuring the safety and success of future manned missions.

International Collaboration: Collaboration with other nations will be essential for acquiring the necessary technologies and expertise to further India's space exploration goals.

Gig Economy and Gig Workers (Indian Express)

  • 26 Jul 2023

Why in the News?

The Rajasthan government recently enacted the Rajasthan Platform Based Gig Workers (Registration and Welfare) Bill in the year 2023.

  • Highlights of the Bill:

Rajasthan Platform-based Gig Workers Welfare Board will formulate welfare policies and address grievances of piece-rate gig workers.

  • The board can determine the aggregator's cess percentage for the social welfare corpus, based on transaction volumes on the platform.
  • Unique ID:
  • All gig workers registered with any platform will automatically be registered with the board, receiving a unique ID valid for three years.
  • Penalty:
  • Violating data sharing and worker employment rules can result in fines up to 10 lakh for the first offense and up to 1 crore for subsequent ones.
  • Suspension Authority:
  • The board is authorized to recommend temporary or permanent suspension of errant aggregators in the state.
  • Public Feedback:
  • The draft Bill will soon be made available to the public for feedback, currently with the Law department.
  • What is Gig Economy?
  • The Gig economy offers flexible work arrangements, allowing individuals to take up short-term or part-time jobs based on their availability and preferences.
  • It heavily relies on digital platforms and apps that connect gig workers with customers or clients seeking specific services.
  • Many people engage in gig work to supplement their income or as a source of additional earnings, making it easier to diversify their income streams.
  • The gig economy has faced controversies regarding worker rights, fair pay, and debates over whether gig workers should be classified as employees with access to employment benefits.
  • Who are gig workers?
  • As per the Code on Social Security, 2020, a gig worker is an individual who engages in work or work arrangements and earns from such activities independently, outside the scope of a conventional employer-employee relationship.
  • Gig workers can be broadly classified into platform and non-platform-based workers.
  • Platform Workers:
  • These workers refer to individuals who perform tasks or services through online software apps or digital platforms like Zomato, Swiggy, Ola, and others.
  • Non-platform Workers:
  • These workers are typically casual wage and own-account workers in traditional sectors, working either part-time or full-time.
  • Gig Economy in India:
  • As per NITI Aayog's report titled 'India's Booming Gig and Platform Economy':
  • Gig workers are individuals involved in income-earning activities beyond the conventional employer-employee arrangement and may also operate within the informal sector.
  • According to a 2019 report by the India Staffing Federation, India is the fifth largest in flexi-staffing globally, after the US, China, Brazil and Japan.
  • In 2020, approximately 7.7 million workers were actively engaged in the gig economy.
  • The gig workforce is expected to grow significantly, reaching 23.5 million workers by the year 2029-30.
  • Currently, around 47% of gig work falls under medium-skilled jobs, 22% in high-skilled, and 31% in low-skilled jobs.
  • There is a noticeable trend showing a gradual decline in medium-skilled workers' concentration, while the number of low-skilled and high-skilled workers is on the rise.
  • Challenges faced by Gig workers:
  • Impact on Full-time Employment Growth: The gig economy trend can hinder the growth of full-time employment as some employers may prefer to hire contracted workers due to cost-effectiveness and flexibility.
  • Disruption of Work-life Balance: For certain workers, the flexibility of gig work can lead to disruptions in work-life balance, affecting sleep patterns and daily activities.
  • Potential Replacement of Full-time Employees: Freelance workers in the gig economy may replace the need for a higher number of full-time employees within a company.
  • Lack of Job Security: In the gig economy, workers have a more entrepreneurial role, which means they may experience less job security with no guaranteed steady income, pay, or benefits.
  • Absence of Regular Job Benefits: Employers often avoid providing benefits such as health coverage and paid vacation time to gig workers, as they are not part of a formal employment relationship with the platform company. This lack of benefits can make short-term contracts less appealing and challenging to include on resumes.
  • Government Initiatives for Gig Workers India:
  • Code of Social Security, 2020: The Government introduced the Code on Social Security, 2020, aiming to develop suitable social security schemes for gig workers and platform workers, covering aspects like life and disability insurance, accident coverage, health and maternity benefits, and old age protection.
  • However, these provisions are yet to be implemented.
  • e-Shram Portal: In 2021, the Government launched the e-Shram portal, designed for the registration and establishment of a Comprehensive National Database of Unorganized Workers, including gig workers and platform workers.
  • This portal facilitates self-declaration registration for individuals engaged in approximately 400 different occupations.
  • Way Forward

The Gig Economy holds promising opportunities for India's extensive workforce, particularly for low-skilled laborers. To harness its potential, the Government should take proactive measures to foster the growth of gig economy platforms. Simultaneously, safeguarding the welfare of gig workers is crucial, ensuring fair working conditions and access to social security benefits. Striking this balance will require collaborative efforts from all stakeholders involved.

  • Mains Question:

Discuss the Government's role in supporting the Gig Economy while safeguarding gig workers' interests. How can a balance be achieved between promoting the gig economy and protecting the welfare of gig workers? (20 M)

India’s Ethanol Production Programme and Ethanol Blended Petro (Indian Express)

  • 25 Jul 2023

Why in the News?

Prime Minister Modi, at a G20 Energy Ministers’ meet on Saturday (July 22), said that India has rolled out 20% ethanol-blended petrol this year and aims to “cover the entire country by 2025”.

What is Ethanol?

  • Ethanol, also known as ethyl alcohol or grain alcohol, is basically 9% pure alcohol that can be blended with petrol.
  • It is distinct from 94% rectified spirit, commonly used in paints and pharmaceuticals, as well as 96% extra neutral alcohol, which is utilized in the production of potable liquor.
  • It is also a renewable biofuel and can be derived from various plant sources, such as sugarcane, corn, wheat, and other agricultural products, through the process of fermentation and distillation.
  • Ethanol has a wide range of industrial, commercial, and recreational applications, making it a versatile and important chemical compound.

Ethanol blending programme (EBP) in India:

Overview:

  • The Ethanol Blending Programme (EBP) in India began with pilot projects that supplied 5% ethanol-blended petrol to retail outlets.
  • The successful field trials led to the official launch of the EBP in 2003.
  • The program aimed to promote 5% ethanol-blended petrol in 9 States and 4 Union Territories, utilizing a separate pumping and BIO-metering mechanism.

Objectives:

  • The EBP aimed at reducing the country's reliance on crude oil imports, curbing carbon emissions, and enhancing farmers' incomes.

Targets:

  • Initially, India targeted 10% ethanol blending in petrol by the end of 2022 and 20% blending by 2030.
  • However, in December 2020, the government accelerated its target of achieving 20% blending (E20) to 2025.
  • Alsoly, there is a target of 5% blending of biodiesel with diesel by 2030.

Incentive Measures:

  • To encourage blending, the government introduced an additional duty of Rs. 2 per litre on unblended fuels starting October.

Significance of Ethanol Blending:

  • Energy Security: As the third-largest consumer of energy globally, India aims to enhance its energy self-dependency through ethanol blending, aligning with the AtmaNirbhar Bharat Abhiyan.
  • Reducing Import Dependency: Ethanol blending in petrol will decrease India's reliance on crude oil and natural gas imports, potentially saving around USD 4 billion (Rs. 300 billion) per year.
  • Support for the Agricultural Sector: The program aids sugar mill owners in paying farmers their pending Fair and Remunerative Price (FRP) for sugarcane and mitigates the impact of low sugar prices in the international market, providing additional income to farmers.
  • Environmental Friendly Fuel: Ethanol-blended petrol results in smoother combustion, reducing emissions of CO, hydrocarbons, and NOx, and contributing to a more environmentally friendly fuel option.
  • Decreasing Pollution: Using ethanol-blended petrol leads to lower emissions of CO, HC, and NOx, making it an effective measure to decrease pollution levels and promote cleaner air.
  • SDG Targets: Ethanol blending aligns with Sustainable Development Goal targets by reducing emissions and mitigating climate change effects.

Related Issues with Ethanol Blending Programme:

  • National Policy on Biofuel: The new ethanol blending target focuses on food-based feedstocks, deviating from the 2018 National Policy on Biofuels, which emphasized non-food feedstocks like grasses, algae, and cellulosic materials.
  • This change raises concerns about grain surpluses and the impact on food availability.
  • Risk of Hunger: The diversion of food grains to distilleries at cheaper prices could affect food security for the impoverished, potentially leading to increased hunger risks.
  • India ranks 101st out of 116 countries on the World Hunger Index 2021.
  • Cost Implications: The production of biofuels requires land, impacting the cost of biofuels as well as food crops, which can have economic implications.
  • Water Usage: Biofuel crops and the manufacturing process require significant amounts of water, which can strain local and regional water resources.
  • Efficiency Comparison: Some biofuels produce less energy compared to fossil fuels.
  • For instance, 1 gallon of ethanol generates less energy than 1 gallon of gasoline, raising concerns about the efficiency of biofuels as a viable alternative.

Addressing these issues is crucial for implementing ethanol blending targets in a sustainable and responsible manner.

Ethanol Program: Benefits and Concerns:

Benefits:

  • The ethanol program offers several advantages, including reduced dependence on fossil fuels, promotion of sustainable practices, and new opportunities for farmers and industries. Advancements like multi-effect evaporator units have enabled the utilization of distilleries' liquid effluent for boiler fuel and the production of fertilizer and animal feed as by-products.

Concerns:

  • Despite its benefits, the ethanol program raises some concerns. Increased demand for grains in ethanol production may impact food supply and prices. Additionally, distilleries' liquid effluent can pose environmental challenges.

The ethanol program shows great promise in achieving sustainable goals while addressing environmental and economic challenges. With proper management and technological advancements, it can play a vital role in India's energy and agricultural sectors.

Mains Question:

  • Discuss the benefits, concerns, and significance of India's ethanol program, focusing on reducing fossil fuel dependence, promoting sustainability, and addressing the impact on food supply and prices. (15 M)

Zero Hunger and the Global Report on the Food Crises 2023 (The Hindu)

  • 24 Jul 2023

Why in the News?

The Global Report on Food Crises (GRFC) 2023, produced by GNAFC (Global Network Against Food Crisis), offers crucial insights into global food insecurity. It sheds light on the scale of hunger and the obstacles in achieving Sustainable Development Goal 2 - Zero Hunger.

By analyzing factors contributing to food insecurity and undernourishment, the report presents vital solutions to tackle this urgent challenge.

What is GNAFC?

GNAFC, founded in 2016 by the European Union, FAO, and WFP, is an alliance of humanitarian and development organizations collaborating to prevent, prepare for, and respond to food crises. Their collective efforts aim to support the achievement of Sustainable Development Goal 2, which is to End Hunger.

Key Findings:

  • Food Insecurity and Undernourishment: According to the GRFC, hunger affected between 691 million and 783 million people in 2022, a significant increase from pre-pandemic levels in 2019. The number of individuals lacking adequate access to food rose to 2.4 billion in 2022, up by 391 million compared to 2019. Additionally, undernourishment prevalence reached 9.2% of the global population in 2022, compared to 7.9% in 2019.
  • Positive Developments: Despite concerning figures, the report highlights some positive trends. Stunting among children under five decreased from 204.2 million in 2000 to 148.1 million in 2022, while child wasting declined from 54.1 million to 45 million during the same period. However, there was a slight, non-significant increase in child overweight or obesity, rising from 5.3% (33 million) in 2000 to 5.6% (37 million) in 2022.
  • Cost of a Healthy Diet: The GRFC's revised analysis indicates that nearly 3.2 billion people worldwide couldn't afford a healthy diet in 2020, with a slight improvement in 2021. The global cost of a healthy diet rose by 6.7% from 2019 to 2021. The report projects that approximately 600 million people will face chronic undernourishment in 2030.

What is food security?

  • Food security, as defined by the World Food Summit of 1996, refers to a state where all individuals have continuous physical and economic access to an adequate supply of safe, nutritious food that fulfills their dietary requirements and preferences, supporting an active and healthy lifestyle.
  • The prevalence of moderate or severe food insecurity in the population is assessed using the Food Insecurity Experience Scale (FIES).

Drivers of Food Insecurity:

  • Pandemic-related Disruptions: The COVID-19 pandemic, along with its associated lockdowns, economic downturns, and job losses in 2020, has significantly contributed to food insecurity, aggravating existing challenges.
  • Russia-Ukraine War: Ongoing conflicts, such as the war in Ukraine, have further impacted global food insecurity, causing disruptions in food supply chains.
  • Governmental Policies: Certain governmental policies may inadequately address food insecurity, posing obstacles to achieving Zero Hunger.
  • Urbanization: The increasing trend of urbanization has led to changes in agrifood systems, resulting in varying food security levels among different population groups.
  • Weather and Climate Extremes: Extreme weather events and climate variations have become the primary drivers of acute food insecurity in 12 countries. Droughts, floods, and storms severely disrupt agricultural production and food supply chains.
  • Conflict: Ongoing conflicts and insecurity remain the most significant drivers of acute food insecurity in 19 countries/territories, affecting food access and availability in these regions.

Solutions for Achieving Zero Hunger:

  • Promoting Healthier Food Outlets: The report highlights the need for policy incentives to encourage shops to sell fresh and minimally processed foods, improving access to nutritious diets and positively impacting food security.
  • Enhancing Street Food Safety: Addressing street food safety, considering its widespread consumption by approximately 2.5 billion people daily, is crucial. Improving infrastructure and regulations surrounding street food can enhance nutritional safety and quality.
  • Investing in Rural Infrastructure: Building rural infrastructure, including quality rural roads and linkages to main networks, can enhance connectivity for small farms and enterprises, boosting food production and distribution.
  • Empowering Local Governments: Local governments play a significant role in implementing policies to ensure healthy diets are available and affordable for all. Their active involvement can lead to effective multilevel and multi-stakeholder mechanisms for achieving food security.

The Global Report on Food Crises 2023 highlights the ongoing issue of food insecurity worldwide. Implementing the recommended solutions and addressing the drivers of food insecurity will enable the international community to make significant progress toward achieving Zero Hunger and ensuring sufficient and nutritious food for all.

Recent Government Initiatives to Address Food Insecurity:

The Indian government has introduced various initiatives aimed at tackling food insecurity and alleviating poverty within the country. Some of these initiatives include:

  • One Nation One Ration Card: Beneficiaries can access subsidized food grains from the Public Distribution System (PDS) across the country, regardless of their location.
  • PM Garib Kalyan Ann Yojana (PMGKAY): This scheme ensures free food grains for vulnerable populations during crises like the COVID-19 pandemic.
  • Atmanirbhar Bharat Rozgar Yojana: Focused on generating employment opportunities and promoting self-reliance, indirectly impacting food security.
  • Pradhan Mantri Kisan Samman Nidhi: This program provides income support to small and marginal farmers, contributing to their economic well-being and food security.
  • Intensified Mission Indradhanush 3.0 Scheme: Aims to boost vaccination rates among children and pregnant women, indirectly impacting child nutrition and health.